Architect c4000i1000操作手册

ARCHITECT System
Operations Manual
201837-107
Abbott Laboratories ©1998, 2009 Abbott Laboratories

Abbott Park, IL 60064 ARCHITECT is a registered trademark
of Abbott Laboratories
Patents Pending
Table of contents
Read me first. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Read me-1

Customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-3
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-4
Proprietary statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-5
Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-6
ARCHITECT c System warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-7
ARCHITECT i System warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-8
Abbott warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-9
Agency approvals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-10
Trademark statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-11
System labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-12
System documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-1
Printed documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-2
Organization of the printed operations manual . System documentation-2
Conventions for the printed documentation . . . System documentation-4
Online documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-6
Conventions for the online documentation. . . . System documentation-8
Help window descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-10
Procedure map description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-21
Online documentation use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-24
Tips for using the online documentation . . . . . System documentation-24
Procedures for using the online documentation System documentation-26
Use or function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
ARCHITECT System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Primary components of an ARCHITECT System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
ARCHITECT integrated system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
ARCHITECT c 4000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
ARCHITECT i 1000SR System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
System control center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
SCC standard components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
SCC optional components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
ARCHITECT System software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Processing modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-1

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table of contents
Processing module (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Processing modules (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Optional components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
Sample handlers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
RSH - robotic sample handler (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100). . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
Required consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
ARCHITECT System consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
ARCHITECT c System consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
ARCHITECT i System consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102
Required accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113
Sample carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113
Reagent segments (c 4000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
Reagent cartridge adapters (c 4000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115
Reagent carriers (i 1000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-116
System statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-118
Sample handler status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-118
Processing module status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120
Automatic processing module activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-126
System flush (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-126
System flush (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127
System prime (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127
Processing module wash (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-128
Automatic rotation of reagent supply center(s) (c System) . . . . . . . . 1-128
Installation procedures and special requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
System installation or relocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
System installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
System checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
System relocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Configuration screen - System settings view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Configuration screen - Assay settings view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
Software installation and backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
Utilities screen - Software install view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169
Utilities screen - System updates view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171
Utilities screen - Backup software view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173
Assay file management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177
Table of contents-2 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table of contents
Install or delete an assay file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177

Import an assay file (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178
Export an assay file (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
Maintenance and diagnostic file management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181
Install or delete a maintenance or diagnostic procedure file . . . . . . . 2-181
Principles of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
c System principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Photometric method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Potentiometric method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Assay processing (c 4000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
SmartWash feature (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
OSS feature (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Sample interference indices (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
i System principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
CMIA method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Assay processing (i 1000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Performance characteristics and specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Performance characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
c System performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
i System performance characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
System capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Weight and force specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
System clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Electrical specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Electrical safety parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Optical specifications (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
External waste pump specifications and requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Environmental specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Computer and interface specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Printer specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Bar code label requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table of contents
System startup, pause, and shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

SCC power off and power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Processing module and sample handler cycle power, startup, and pause . .
5-6
Emergency shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Long-term shutdown (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Consumable inventory management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Supply status screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
ARCHITECT System procedures - consumable inventory management . . .
5-22
c System procedures - consumable inventory management . . . . . . . . 5-23
i System procedures - consumable inventory management. . . . . . . . . 5-35
Reagent inventory management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Reagent status screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Reagent history screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
ARCHITECT System procedures - Reagent inventory management . . 5-68
c 4000 procedures - reagent inventory management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Loading requirements for the reagent supply center(s) (c System) . . . 5-91
i 1000SR procedures - reagent inventory management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Patient and control orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Automated ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Patient order screens and views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Control order screen and views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
Order status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
Sample status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154
Sample management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162
Sample requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162
Loading samples (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168
Initiating or resuming sample processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176
Sample processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-177
Unloading samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-181
Patient and QC results review, rerun, and release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-184
Patient results review and release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-184
QC result review and release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-204
Patient results, QC results, and exceptions rerun review . . . . . . . . . . 5-219
Patient and QC stored results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-224
Patient stored results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-224

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table of contents
Stored QC results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-240

Exception management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-255
Exception status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-255
Quality control analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-271
Westgard rule application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-271
Levey-Jennings graph screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-274
QC summary review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-285
QC reports screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-292
Report printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-295
Print a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-295
Print the Order List report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-298
Print the Levey-Jennings report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-299
Print the QC Analysis report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-299
Print the QC Summary report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-300
Print a Maintenance History report for a specified month. . . . . . . . . 5-301
Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure . . . . . . . 5-302
Print a Procedure report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-303
Print the Message History Log report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-304
Print an Assay Parameter report for specified assays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-304
Print an Assay Parameter report for all assays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-305
View a print job in the print queue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-306
Delete a print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-307
Print a screen image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-307
Windows - Report printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-308
Calibration procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Assay calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Calibration guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Calibration sampling rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Calibration methods (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Calibration method (potentiometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Calibration methods (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Calibration types (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Calibration types (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Calibration curve storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Calibration order screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Calibration review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Calibration verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table of contents
Calibration status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Calibration history screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Procedures - Calibration review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Operational precautions and limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
General requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Precautions and requirements for system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Requirements for handling consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Requirements for handling specimens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Limitations of result interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
Operator responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Safety icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Hazard symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Biological hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Chemical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Spill clean-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Waste handling and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Decontamination procedure requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Electrical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Mechanical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Physical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Service and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Maintenance suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Maintenance screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Maintenance log screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Maintenance statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Component replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
c 4000 component replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73
i 1000SR component replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-148
Optional component replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-178
Troubleshooting and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Approach to troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
System troubleshooting variables (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
System troubleshooting variables (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table of contents
Reagent troubleshooting variables (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Reagent troubleshooting variables (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Operator troubleshooting variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Environmental troubleshooting variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
System logs screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
System logs screen - Error message logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
System logs screen - Software update log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Access the System logs screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Procedures - System logs screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Windows - System logs screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
General error codes (0001-0999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Assay specific error codes (1000-1999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-125
Maintenance error codes (2000-2999). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-196
Level sense error codes (3000-3999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-249
Bar code reader error codes (4000-4999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-331
Robotic and sensor error codes (5000-5999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-352
Optics error codes (6000-6999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-432
Temperature error codes (7000-7999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-443
Computer hardware error codes (8000-8999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-462
Software error codes (9000-9999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-499
Observed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-573
Processing module observed problems (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-573
Processing module observed problems (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-584
Sample results observed problems (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-586
Sample results observed problems (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-600
Sample handler observed problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-627
SCC observed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-629
Peripheral devices observed problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-647
System diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-651
Diagnostics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-651
Diagnostic categories and procedure descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-658
Miscellaneous corrective action procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-687
Processing module corrective action procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-687
Sample handler corrective action procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-696
SCC corrective action procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-698
Printed report examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-1

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table of contents
Absorbance Data Report (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-3

Assay Parameter Report (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-6
Assay Parameter Report (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-15
Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System) . . . . . . . .Appendix A-20
Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-23
Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System) . . .Appendix A-26
Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-29
Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-32
Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-35
Cal Curve Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-38
Exception Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-40
Exception Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-43
Levey - Jennings Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-45
Maintenance History Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-48
Message History Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-50
Order List Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-52
Order Status Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-54
Patient Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-56
Procedure Report, Basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-58
Procedure Report, Columnar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-60
QC Analysis Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-62
QC Result Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-65
QC Results List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-68
QC Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-70
Reagent History Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-72
Reagent Load Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-74
Reagent Status Report (except for i 1000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-76
Reagent Status Report (i 1000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-78
Rerun List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-80
Result Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-82
Results List Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-85
Sample Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-87
Sample Laboratory Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-89
Sample Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-91
Temporary Message Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-93
TSB Installation Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-95
Verification of i System assay claims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-1

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table of contents
Limit of Blank - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-3

Limit of Blank - method 1 data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-4
Limit of Blank - method 1 data sheet example . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-5
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-6
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-7
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet example . . . . . Appendix B-8
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-9
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-10
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-11
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet example . . . . Appendix B-12
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph example . . . . . . . . Appendix B-13
Limit of Detection- method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-14
Limit of Detection - method 1 data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-15
Limit of Detection - method 1 data sheet example . . . . . . Appendix B-16
Functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial dilution) . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-17
Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet Appendix B-18
Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet example . . . .
Appendix B-19
Functional sensitivity - method 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-20
Functional sensitivity - method 2 data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-21
Limit of Quantitation - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-22
Limit of Quantitation - method 1 data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-23
Limit of Quantitation - method 1 data sheet example . . . . Appendix B-24
Precision - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-25
Precision - method 1 data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-26
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 . . . . . . . Appendix B-27
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 data sheet .Appendix
B-29
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph Appendix B-30
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 - data sheet example
Appendix B-31
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph example . . . .
Appendix B-32
Reportable range/calibration verification- method 2 . . . . . . . . Appendix B-33
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 data sheet .Appendix
B-35
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 data sheet example.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table of contents
Appendix B-36
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 graph example . . . . .
Appendix B-38
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 . . . . . . . . Appendix B-39
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 data sheet. Appendix
B-41
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 data sheet example .
Appendix B-42
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 graph example . . . . .
Appendix B-44
Automated dilution verification - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-45
Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet. . . . Appendix B-46
Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet example Appendix
B-47
Methods comparison - method 1 (correlation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-48
Methods comparison - method 1 correlation data sheet . . . Appendix B-49
Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance) . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-50
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance data sheet . Appendix B-51
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation sheet Appendix
B-51
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation sheet example.
Appendix B-53
Analytical specificity - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-54
Reference range - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-55
Math models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-1
c System data reduction methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-2
Photometric data reduction methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-2
Potentiometric data reduction method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-8
i System data reduction methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-14
Point to point method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-14
Linear regression method (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-15
4PLC methods (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-16
Cutoff assay method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-18
Reference method (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-19
i System adjustment methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-20
Ratio technique method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-20
Linear transformation method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-21

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table of contents
Parameter method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-22

Curve shape method (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-22
List numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-1
Consumable list numbers (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-2
Consumable list numbers (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-3
Accessory kit list numbers (c 4000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-4
Accessory kit list number (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-7
Additional accessory list numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-9
Electronic media list numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-10
SCC component list numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-11
Descriptions of screen elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-1
Icons and menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-2
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-6
Field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-16
Overview icon screens and windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-16
Orders icon screens and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-23
Results icon screens and windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-39
QC-Cal icon screens and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-61
Exceptions icon screens and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-96
Reagents icon screens and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-109
Supplies icon screens and windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-117
System icon screens and windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-120

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Read me first
<F=0>
Read me first
Foreword
Congratulations on the addition of the ARCHITECT System to your

laboratory. The ARCHITECT family of systems incorporates the latest
advancements in laboratory automation, assay technology, and
modularity.
• Ease of use
– Touch screen control allows easy navigation.
– An intuitive software user interface reduces training time.
– Help?, integrated with the system software, provides
immediate access to information about the currently
displayed screen, window, or error message.
– The online operation manual provides the fastest, easiest,
most comprehensive, and most accurate resource for your
informational needs.
– Scheduled maintenance procedures display in a To Do list
for automatic tracking and ease of performance.
– A Maintenance log, automatically updated after each
procedure is performed, provides current and accurate
maintenance records.
• Sample management
– Sample carriers accommodate a variety of test tube types.
– Sample handlers allow loading of up to
• 180 (ci 4100) samples.
• 100 (c 4000) samples.
• 65 (i 1000SR) samples.
– Multi-dimensional sampling provides routine, priority,
automated rerun, and reflex processing capabilities.
– Clot detection ensures accurate sampling.
– With robotic sample handler (RSH)
• Indicators provide sample processing status at a glance.
• Sample handler design provides continuous sample
access.
• Simplified troubleshooting
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Read me first-1

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Read me first
– Direct access to error message help provides probable cause

and corrective action information.
– A troubleshooting model provides a practical, systematic
approach to solving problems and implementing solutions.
Read me first topics include:
• Customer support, page Read me-3
• Intended use, page Read me-4
• Proprietary statement, page Read me-5
• Disclaimers, page Read me-6
• ARCHITECT c System warranty, page Read me-7
• ARCHITECT i System warranty, page Read me-8
• Abbott warranty, page Read me-9
• Agency approvals, page Read me-10
• Trademark statement, page Read me-11
• System labeling, page Read me-12
Read me first-2 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Read me first Customer support
Customer support
If you have any questions regarding your ARCHITECT System, please
contact your local Abbott Laboratories Diagnostics Division customer
support representative for prompt answers to your inquiries.
United States: 1-877-4ABBOTT (1-877-422-2688)
Canada: 1-800-387-8378 (English speaking customers)
1-800-465-2675 (French speaking customers)
International: Call your local Abbott customer support representative.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Intended use Read me first
Intended use
The Abbott ARCHITECT System is intended for in vitro diagnostic use
only.
The Abbott ARCHITECT System is designed to perform automated:
• Chemistry tests, utilizing photometry and potentiometric
technology
• Immunoassay tests, utilizing CMIA (chemiluminescent
microparticle assay) detection technology

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Read me first Proprietary statement
Proprietary statement
The ARCHITECT System software programs and system
documentation are protected by copyright (©1998, 2008 Abbott
Laboratories, Abbott Park, Illinois). All rights are reserved.
The software and manual were developed solely for use with the
ARCHITECT System and for in vitro diagnostic applications as specified
in the operating instructions.
The information, documents and related graphics published herein
(the "Information") are the sole property of Abbott Laboratories.
Permission to use the Information is granted, provided that
• the copyright notice appears on all copies;
• use of the Information is for operation of ABBOTT products by
Abbott trained personnel or informational use only;
• the Information is not modified in any way; and
• no graphics are used separate from accompanying text.
Each person assumes full responsibility and all risks arising from use of
the Information. The Information is presented "AS IS" and may
include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Abbott
Laboratories reserves the right to make additions, deletions, or
modifications to the Information at any time without any prior
notification.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Disclaimers Read me first
Disclaimers
All samples (printouts, graphics, displays, screens, etc.) are for
information and illustration purposes only and shall not be used for
clinical or maintenance evaluations. Data shown in sample printouts
and screens do not reflect actual patient names or test results.
The Information was developed to be used by Abbott Laboratories
trained personnel, by other persons knowledgeable or experienced
with the operation and service of the product identified, or under the
direct supervision and with cooperation from Abbott Laboratories
technical sales or service representatives.
In no event shall Abbott Laboratories or its affiliates be liable for any
damages or losses incurred in connection with or arising from the use
of the Information by persons not fully trained by Abbott
Laboratories. This limitation shall not apply to those persons
knowledgeable or experienced with the operation and service of the
product identified, or under the direct supervision and with
cooperation from Abbott Laboratories technical sales or service
representatives.
No confidential relationship shall be established in the event that any
user of the Information should make any oral, written or electronic
response to Abbott Laboratories (such as feedback, questions,
comments, suggestions, ideas, etc.). Such response and any
information submitted therewith shall be considered
non-confidential, and Abbott shall be free to reproduce, publish or
otherwise use such information for any purposes whatsoever
including, without limitation, the research, development,
manufacture, service, use, or sale of products incorporating such
information. The sender of any information to Abbott is fully
responsible for its content, including its truthfulness and accuracy and
its non-infringement of any other person's proprietary rights.
Abbott Laboratories is not engaged in rendering medical advice or
services.
Updates to the Information may be provided in either paper or
electronic format. Always refer to the latest documents for the most
current information.
Incremental manual updates may cause the master Table of contents
or master Index page numbering to change.
No part of this media may be reproduced, stored, retrieved, or
transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written
permission of Abbott Laboratories.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Read me first ARCHITECT c System warranty
ARCHITECT c System warranty

Abbott Laboratories warrants instruments sold by Abbott Diagnostics
Division to be free from defects in workmanship and materials during
normal use by the original purchaser. This warranty shall continue for
a period of one year, commencing twenty-one (21) days from the date
of shipment to the original purchaser, or until title is transferred from
the original purchaser, whichever occurs first (the "Warranty Period").
If any defects occur during the Warranty period, contact your Abbott
Customer Service Representative immediately, and be prepared to
furnish information including the serial number, the model number,
and pertinent details concerning the defect.
This Warranty does not cover defects or malfunctions which: (1) are
not reported to Abbott during the Warranty Period and within one
week of occurrence; (2) result from chemical decomposition or
corrosion; (3) are caused primarily by failure to comply with any
requirements or instruction contained in the applicable Abbott
Operations Manual; or (4) result from maintenance, repair, or
modification, performed without Abbott's authorization.
Abbott's liability for all matters arising from the supply, installation,
use, repair, and maintenance of the instrument, whether arising under
this Warranty or otherwise, shall be limited solely to the repair or (at
Abbott's sole discretion) replacement of the instrument or of
components thereof. Replaced parts shall become the property of
Abbott Laboratories. In no event shall Abbott be liable for injuries
sustained by third parties, consequential damages, and/or lost profits.
The ICT module Warranty is 15,000 samples or two months
post-installation, whichever occurs first.
The cuvette warranty is one year post-installation.
THE FOREGOING IS THE SOLE WARRANTY MADE BY ABBOTT
LABORATORIES REGARDING THE INSTRUMENT, AND ABBOTT
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS IMPLIED FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
ARCHITECT i System warranty Read me first
ARCHITECT i System warranty

Abbott Laboratories (Abbott) warrants the ARCHITECT i System
(system) when used for its intended purpose by the original purchaser,
excluding items subject to wear and tear which require replacement
during normal use. This warranty shall continue for a period of ninety
(90) days commencing twenty-one (21) days from the date of system
installation, or until title is transferred from the original purchaser,
whichever occurs first (the Warranty Period). The warranty does not
cover the software included in the system, which is subject to the
warranty stated in the Software License Agreement. Other warranty
options may be available through your Abbott representative. The
warranty is country dependent, based on local legal requirements.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Read me first Abbott warranty
Abbott warranty
ABBOTT LABORATORIES MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WITH RESPECT TO THE
INFORMATION. ABBOTT LABORATORIES HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, CREATED BY LAW, CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE
OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ABBOTT
LABORATORIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
SPECIAL (INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFIT) CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE EXISTENCE OR USE OF THE INFORMATION, REGARDLESS OF
WHETHER ABBOTT LABORATORIES HAS BEEN ADVISED AS TO THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Agency approvals Read me first
Agency approvals
The ARCHITECT System has been tested and found to comply with
the following agency standards:
• UL 61010A-1 or UL61010-1 Safety Requirements for Electrical
Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use - Part
1 General Requirements
• CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1 or CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010.1
Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control, and Laboratory Use - Part 1 General Requirements
• 21CFR Part 1040.10: Performance Standards for Light Emitting
Products
• IEC 60825-1: Safety of Laser Products (Class 1 Laser Products)
• Directive 2002/96/EC: Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment
• CE Marking
In Vitro Diagnostic Directive 98/79/EC

Manufacturer Abbott Laboratories
Diagnostics Division
Abbott Park, IL 60064 USA
Authorized Representative in the Abbott
European Community Max-Planck-Ring 2
65205 Wiesbaden
Germany
+49-6122-580

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Read me first Trademark statement
Trademark statement
ARCHITECT, i 1000SR, i 2000, i 2000SR, c 8000, ci 8200, Chemiflex,
AxSYM, AEROSET, and MasterCheck are registered trademarks of
Abbott Laboratories.
i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, i 4000SR, c 4000, c 16000, ci 4100, ci 16200,
c System, i System, ARCHITECT ARM, FlexRate, and SmartWash are
trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
All Abbott Laboratories product names and trademarks are owned by
or licensed to Abbott Laboratories, its subsidiaries or affiliates. No use
of any Abbott trademark, trade name, trade dress, or product name
may be made without the prior written authorization of Abbott
Laboratories, except to identify the product or services of Abbott
Laboratories. All other trademarks, brands, product names, and trade
names are the property of their respective companies. All rights
reserved.
Except as permitted above, no license or right, express or implied, is
granted to any person under any patent, trademark, or other
proprietary right of Abbott Laboratories.
The following U.S. Patents are relevant to the ARCHITECT c System or
its components.
4,533,457 4,619,739 4,647,362 4,678,755
4,797,192 5,025,389 5,413,770
The following U.S. Patents are relevant to ARCHITECT i Systems or

components.
5,468,646 5,536,049 5,543,524 5,545,739
5,565,570 5,669,819 5,682,662 5,723,795
5,795,784 Des. 397,938 Des. 401,699 Des. 401,697
Des. 401,700 5,783,699 5,856,194 5,859,429
Des. 404,829 Des. 406,901 5,915,282 5,915,583
5,938,120 Des. 413,539 5,965,828 6,022,746
6,063,634 6,150,113 6,153,377 6,162,645
6,413,780 6,562,298 6,588,625
There are other such patents and patent applications in the United
States and worldwide.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
System labeling Read me first
System labeling
The symbols in the following table are used on ARCHITECT System
labeling.
Key to symbols used on labeling
Label Description
Authorized Representative in the European
Community
Legal manufacturer
NOTE: A new presentation of the Legal

manufacturer label will be phased into the system
labeling in a future revision.
In vitro Diagnostic Medical Device
Manufacturer
Date of manufacture
Serial number
Alternating current
Laser
Caution, risk of electrical shock
Electrical and electronic equipment waste
Temperature limitation
Use by/Expiration date
Consult operating instructions
Caution, consult accompanying documents

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Read me first System labeling
Key to symbols used on labeling (continued)

Label Description
Batch code/Lot number
Quantity
Unit
Biological risks
Biohazard
Caution, hot surface
Assay disk
Version
Conventional units
Standard international unit
Sample cups
ICT Cleaning Fluid
ICT Lyophilized Cleaning Solution
Water Bath Additive
Pre-Trigger Solution
Trigger Solution
Concentrated Wash Buffer
Wash buffer

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
System labeling Read me first
Key to symbols used on labeling (continued)

Label Description
Reaction vessels
Septum
Replacement caps
Multi-Assay Manual Diluent
Catalog number/List number
Acid Wash
Alkaline Wash
ICT Reference Solution
Detergent A
Detergent B

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
System documentation
Introduction
System documentation
<F=0>
Documentation for the ARCHITECT System consists of the

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, available in both printed and
online versions, and ARCHITECT System Help.
Please take the time to become familiar with the organization,
features, and use of each. Learning to use the documentation will pay
off in time saved, trouble averted, and more confident operation of
the ARCHITECT System.
System documentation topics include:
• Printed documentation, page System documentation-2
• Online documentation, page System documentation-6
• Online documentation use, page System documentation-24
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual System documentation-1

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Printed documentation System documentation
Printed documentation
The printed version of the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual
contains complete instructions for using and maintaining the
ARCHITECT System. You will find it a valuable aid as you learn to use
the system and an essential reference.
Printed documentation topics include:
• Organization of the printed operations manual, page System
documentation-2
• Conventions for the printed documentation, page System
documentation-4
Organization of the printed operations manual

The printed ARCHITECT System Operations Manual is organized as
follows.
Read me first Refer to this section for important
information such as:
• Customer support numbers
• Intended use of the system
• Trademark statements
• Warranty details
System documentation Refer to this section for:
• Information on content organization
• Features of the support
documentation
• Use of both the printed and online
operations manual as well as online
help
Section 1 Use this section to identify:
Use or function • Basic system components
• Fundamentals of the user interface
• Operating statuses of the processing
module(s) and sample handler
Section 2 Refer to this section for:
Installation procedures and special • Information on locating and placing
requirements the instrument
• Installing system and assay software
• Configuring the system to meet your
laboratory's specific needs
System documentation-2 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
System documentation Printed documentation
Section 3 Refer to this section for an explanation

Principles of operation of:
• The assay technology
• How the system translates
measurements into useful data and
reports
Section 4 Refer to this section for details such as:
Performance characteristics and • Dimensions of the instrument
specifications • System capabilities
• Power requirements
Section 5 Use this section to learn how to
Operating instructions perform the various tasks related to
running assays on the system.
Section 6 Use this section to learn how to:
Calibration procedures • Run assay calibrations
• Review completed calibration results
Section 7 Review this section carefully for
Operational precautions and information about actions or conditions
limitations that can impact the:
• Integrity of the ARCHITECT System
• Accuracy of patient test results
Section 8 Use this section to become familiar with
Hazards the safety icons both on the instrument
and in the manual that alert you to
potentially hazardous situations.
Service and maintenance • Descriptions of all maintenance
procedures
• Instructions for performing
scheduled and non-scheduled
maintenance procedures
• Step-by-step instructions for
replacing components
Troubleshooting and diagnostics • Troubleshooting basics
• Information on probable causes and
corrective actions for observed
problems and error codes
• Descriptions of all diagnostic
procedures
diagnostic procedures

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Printed documentation System documentation
Appendixes Refer to the appendixes for information

on:
• Reports
• Assay claim verifications
• Math models
• List numbers
• Screen and window elements
Glossary Refer to this section for definitions of
ARCHITECT System terms.
Index Use this alphabetical listing of subject
matter to find specific information about
the system.
Revision history Refer to this section for a history of
revisions to the operations manual.
Conventions for the printed documentation

Conventions are a set of defined standards and are used to convey
meaning in an expected manner. The conventions used in the
ARCHITECT System printed documentation are intended to facilitate
finding, reading, understanding, and using the available information.
Text conventions
Description Use
Italicized typeface Indicates references to related
information.
Bold typeface Emphasizes key words within
procedures. For example, within the
numbered steps bold typeface is
applied to names of:
• Icons and menu items
• Buttons
• Function keys
• Lists and tables and their available
selections
• Options and check boxes
Numbers in brackets, for example [1], Reference specific areas of an
[2], and so forth illustration within a procedure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
System documentation Printed documentation
Content conventions
Description Use
Requirements tables at the beginning Provide the information you need to
of each procedure know prior to performing a procedure.
This information varies by procedure
and may include:
• Prerequisites for performing the
procedure
• Module status required to perform
the procedure
• Operator access level required to
perform the procedure
• Time required to complete the
procedure
• Tools required to perform the
procedure
• Replacement parts or supplies that
you must have on hand
Lists of related information topics at the Reference topics that provide
end of procedures, as appropriate information related to the procedure,
which can help in performing the
procedure.
Lists of related procedural topics at the Reference procedures that can be
end of screen and window descriptions, performed from specific screens and
as appropriate windows.
Graphic conventions
Description Use
Safety symbols, see Safety icons, Identify activities that expose you to
page 8-4, and the caution or warning potentially dangerous conditions.
signal word
Important signal word Advise you of precautions you should

take to avoid a negative impact on
system operations or assay results.
Note signal word Highlights information that is relevant to
the current subject matter.
Numerical references on illustrations, Indicate the area described in the table

photographs, and reports that follows.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Online documentation System documentation
Online documentation
The online documentation is designed to provide the fastest, easiest,
and most accurate resource for your informational needs.
The online operations manual (ARCHITECT System Operations
Manual) includes complete instructions for using and maintaining an
ARCHITECT System. You can access the online operations manual
from the software on the SCC (system control center).
Access to the online operations manual from the system software
Legend:
1. Operations manual menu item: Displays the online operations manual.
2. Online operations manual: Displays the content of the ARCHITECT System
Operations Manual electronically.
Help? (ARCHITECT System Help) is integrated with the system
software on the SCC to provide direct access to information about the
SCC screen, window, or error message currently displayed. Help?
content is a subset of information found in the operations manual.
You can access Help? for:
• A screen or window - from the screen or window
• An error message - from the error message and the Details for
exception status window

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
System documentation Online documentation
Access to Help? (screen or window)
Legend:
1. Help button: Displays Help? for the current screen or window.
2. Help?: Displays detailed information about the screen or window. Help
content for the screen or window currently displayed includes overview
information, links to descriptions of all fields, and links to procedures you
can perform from the screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Access to Help? (error message)
Legend:
1. Help button (error message): Displays Help? for the current error message.
2. Help?: Displays detailed information about the error message including
corrective actions required to resolve the issue.
Online documentation topics include:
• Conventions for the online documentation, page System
documentation-8
• Help window descriptions, page System documentation-10
• Procedure map description, page System documentation-21
• Tips for using the online documentation, page System
documentation-24
• Procedures for using the online documentation, page System
documentation-26
Conventions for the online documentation

Conventions are a set of defined standards and are used to convey
meaning in an expected manner. The conventions used in the

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
ARCHITECT System online documentation are intended to facilitate

finding, reading, understanding, and using the available information.
Text conventions
Description Used
Bold typeface Emphasizes key words within
procedures. For example, within the
numbered steps bold typeface is
applied to names of:
• Icons and menu items
• Buttons
• Function keys
• Lists and tables and their available
selections
• Options and check boxes
Blue, underlined text Indicates links to related information.
Blue, 3D (three-dimensional) bullets Indicate procedural topics.
Numbers in brackets, for example [1], Reference specific areas of an
[2], and so forth illustration within a procedure.
Content conventions
Description Use
Requirements tables at the beginning Provide the information you need to
of each procedure know prior to performing a procedure.
This information varies by procedure
and may include:
• Prerequisites for performing the
procedure
• Module status required to perform
the procedure
• Operator access level required to
perform the procedure
• Time required to complete the
procedure
• Tools required to perform the
procedure
• Replacement parts or supplies that
you must have on hand
Lists of related information topics at the Reference topics that provide additional
end of procedures, as appropriate information related to procedures.
Lists of related procedural topics at the Reference procedures that can be
end of screen and window descriptions, performed from specific screens and
as appropriate windows.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Graphic conventions
Description Use
Safety symbols see Safety icons, Identify activities that expose you to
page 8-4, and the caution or warning potentially dangerous conditions.
signal word
Important symbol and signal word Advise you of precautions you should
take to avoid a negative impact on
system operations or assay results.
Note symbol and signal word Highlight information that is relevant to

the current subject matter.
Numerical references on illustrations Indicate the area described in the table

and photographs that follows.
Numerical references on reports Indicate the area described in the table
that follows and serve as hypertext
links to that information.
Help window descriptions

The online documentation (ARCHITECT System Operations Manual
and ARCHITECT System Help) is designed for online viewing and use
and displays in a help window, which provides several elements to
help you quickly access desired information and functionality.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Help window example - online operations manual
Legend:
1. Title bar: Displays the name of the help window.
2. Toolbar: Use the buttons to display topics in the topic pane, print a topic, or
close the help window. See Help window toolbar, page System
documentation-12.
3. Navigation pane: Use to find and display topics. See Help window
navigation pane (online operations manual), page System
documentation-14.
4. Topic pane: Use to view topic content and display related information. See
Help window topic pane, page System documentation-13.
5. Help on Help button: Select to display a list of tasks/procedures for using the
online documentation.
6. Minimize button: Select to reduce the help window to a program button
on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. To display the minimized help
window, select the program button.
Maximize/Restore Down button: Select to enlarge the help window to full
screen size or to restore the help window to its last size and position
before it was maximized.
Exit button: Select to close the help window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Help window example - Help? (screen or window)
Legend:
1. Title bar: Displays the name of the help window.
2. Toolbar: Use the buttons to display topics in the topic pane, print a topic, or
close the help window.
3. Topic pane: Use to view topic content and display related information.
4. Minimize button: Select to reduce the help window to a program button
on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. To display the minimized help
window, select the program button.
Maximize/Restore Down button: Select to enlarge the help window to full
screen size or to restore the help window to its last size and position
before it was maximized.
Exit button: Select to close the help window.
Help window toolbar
The toolbar, below the title bar on the help window, contains
command buttons that provide quick access to commonly used
navigational aids as well as the print and close commands.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Previous
(Online operations manual) Select to display the
previous topic listed in the table of contents.
Next
(Online operations manual) Select to display the next
topic listed in the table of contents.
Back
Select to display the last topic you viewed.
Forward
Select to display the next topic in a previously displayed
sequence of topics.
Home
Select to display the procedure map. (Not available for
error codes.)
Print
Select to print the current topic or all topics under a
particular heading.
Glossary
Select to display the glossary.
Close
Select to close the help window.
Help window topic pane
The topic pane, under the toolbar, is the area of the help window
where online content displays. In addition to content, individual

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
topics may contain navigational aids (for example, hypertext and

image maps) and multimedia.
Topic pane example - Help?
Related procedures...
• Display related information, page System documentation-40
• Play videos and animations, page System documentation-41
Help window navigation pane (online operations manual)
The navigation pane, under the toolbar and to the left of the topic
pane, is the area of the help window that provides the primary
navigational functionality.
NOTE: When only a portion of the topic title is displayed in the

navigation pane, you can click and drag the right border of the pane
to widen it.
It contains four tabs that you can use to find and display information
in the online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual:
• Contents tab (online operations manual), page System
documentation-15

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Index tab (online operations manual), page System

documentation-18
• Search tab (online operations manual), page System
documentation-19
• Favorites tab (online operations manual), page System
documentation-20
Navigation pane and tabs
• Use the table of contents (online operations manual), page System
documentation-30
• Use the index (online operations manual), page System
documentation-31
• Search for a term (online operations manual), page System
documentation-32
• Add or remove a favorite topic (online operations manual),
page System documentation-45
Contents tab (online operations manual)
The Contents tab is a tab on the navigation pane that displays the
table of contents, which shows how information in the online
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual is organized, see Organization
of the online operations manual, page System documentation-17. Topics

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
identified by a book icon and a plus (+) sign have one or more
subtopics. Topics identified by a page icon have no additional
subtopics.
Contents tab
documentation-30
• Page through the content (online operations manual), page System
documentation-30

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Organization of the online operations manual
The online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual is organized as

follows:
Read me first Refer to this section for important
information such as:
• Customer support numbers
• Intended use of the system
• Trademark statements
• Warranty details
System documentation Refer to this section for:
• Information on content organization
• Features of the support
documentation
• Use of both the printed and online
operations manual as well as online
help
Section 1 Use this section to identify:
Use or function • Basic system components
• Fundamentals of the user interface
• Operating statuses of the processing
module(s) and sample handler
Installation procedures and special • Information on locating and placing
requirements the instrument
• Installing system and assay software
• Configuring the system to meet your
laboratory's specific needs
Section 3 Refer to this section for an explanation
Principles of operation of:
• The assay technology
• How the system translates
measurements into useful data and
reports
Section 4 Refer to this section for details such as:
Performance characteristics and • Dimensions of the instrument
specifications • System capabilities
• Power requirements
Section 5 Use this section to learn how to
Operating instructions perform the various tasks related to
running assays on the system.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 6 Use this section to learn how to:

Calibration procedures • Run assay calibrations
• Review completed calibration results
Section 7 Review this section carefully for
Operational precautions and information about actions or conditions
limitations that can impact the:
• Integrity of the ARCHITECT System
• Accuracy of patient test results
Section 8 Use this section to become familiar with
Hazards the safety icons both on the instrument
and in the manual that alert you to
potentially hazardous situations.
Service and maintenance • Descriptions of all maintenance
procedures
scheduled and non-scheduled
maintenance procedures
• Step-by-step instructions for
replacing components
Troubleshooting and diagnostics • Troubleshooting basics
• Information on probable causes and
corrective actions for observed
problems and error codes
• Descriptions of all diagnostic
procedures
diagnostic procedures
Appendixes Refer to the appendixes for information
on:
• Reports
• Assay claim verifications
• Math models
• List numbers
• Screen and window elements
Revision history Refer to this section for a history of
revisions to the operations manual.
Index tab (online operations manual)
The Index tab is a tab on the navigation pane that displays an

alphabetical list of all index entries in the online ARCHITECT System
Operations Manual. Entries are indexed by subject and relevance, and

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
include terms for all experience levels and informational types from
general to specific.
Index tab
documentation-31
Search tab (online operations manual)
The Search tab is a tab on the navigation pane that allows you to
locate every occurrence (up to 500) of a word or phrase used in the
online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual. You can also limit the
number of results returned by using advanced search capabilities to
refine your search.

Search tab's navigation pane, you can click and drag either the right
border of the pane or the Title column.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Search tab
documentation-32
• Perform an advanced search (online operations manual), page System
documentation-33
Favorites tab (online operations manual)
The Favorites tab is a tab on the navigation pane that displays topics
you have added to your favorites list, which are topics you wish to
access often. The list is saved and is available each time you open the
online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual.
Favorites tab

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Display a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System
documentation-41
• Rename a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System
documentation-46
Procedure map description

The procedure map is an online image map that displays categories of
job-related activities and provides links to lists of tasks and procedures.
You can use the procedure map to quickly access step-by-step
instructions for performing your primary job responsibilities.
Procedure map
Legend:
1. Help on Help: Provides access to procedures associated with using the
online documentation.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2. Stored Results: Provides access to procedures associated with

retransmitting, printing, and archiving patient and control results.
3. Quality Control: Provides access to procedures associated with reviewing
Levey-Jennings graph data and printing QC reports.
4. Setup: Provides access to procedures associated with configuring and
viewing system, assay, and QC/Cal settings, installing software and assays,
and printing reports.
5. Troubleshooting: Provides access to procedures associated with emergency
shutdown, reviewing system logs, performing diagnostics, replacing
components, and printing diagnostic reports.
6. Maintenance: Provides access to procedures associated with performing
maintenance, approving maintenance logs, and printing reports.
7. Sample Processing: Provides access to procedures associated with
preparing for operation, ordering tests, loading and processing samples,
reviewing results, and printing reports.
• Display and use the procedure map, page System documentation-29
Task lists
Task lists are online topics you access from the procedure map. Each
topic contains an expandable list of tasks related to the selected
procedure map category or job-related activity. Under each task is a list
of links to the associated procedures.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Example of a task list (maintenance)
Legend:
1. Task list item expanded
2. Task list item collapsed

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Online documentation use System documentation
Online documentation use

The online documentation is designed to help you quickly and easily
find the information you need to:
• Accomplish a task
• Recover from a mistake
• Troubleshoot a problem
• Optimize task performance
• Understand the concepts behind system operation and
performance
Online documentation use topics include:
• Tips for using the online documentation, page System
documentation-24
• Procedures for using the online documentation, page System
documentation-26
Tips for using the online documentation

The online documentation is designed to provide the fastest, easiest,
and most accurate resource for your informational needs. However,
your understanding of how it works and how to use it will enhance
your satisfaction with the results.
For example, there are a number of ways to retrieve information. To an
extent the fastest and easiest method depends on the online
documentation you are using and the type of information you are
seeking.
The following tables provide tips for using Help? (ARCHITECT System
Help) and the online operations manual (ARCHITECT System
Operations Manual) to find specific types of information.
Using Help?
To... Then...
View a description of the current screen Access Help?, page System
or window documentation-28.
View a list of procedures you can 1. Access Help?, page System
perform from the current screen or documentation-28.
window
2. Scroll through a topic, page System
documentation-39 to view the list of
procedures under Related
procedures.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
System documentation Online documentation use
Using Help? (continued)

To... Then...
Display the steps of a procedure you 1. Access Help?, page System
can perform from the current screen or documentation-28.
window
2. Scroll through a topic, page System
documentation-39, and then select
one of the list items under Related
procedures.
Find the location of a part when 1. Access Help?, page System
performing a maintenance procedure documentation-28, for the
Maintenance Perform window.
2. Display related information,

page System documentation-40, for
associated maintenance graphics.
Find a description of a procedure when 1. Access Help?, page System
performing maintenance and documentation-28, for the
diagnostic procedures Maintenance Perform window.
2. Display related information,

page System documentation-40, for
maintenance categories and
procedure descriptions.
View all procedures related to the Display and use the procedure map,
performance of a particular task page System documentation-29.
Look up a word Use the glossary, page System
documentation-38.
View topics that contain related Display related information,
information page System documentation-40.
View more information about an error Access Help?, page System
code including suggested corrective documentation-28.
actions
Using the online operations manual

To... Then...
Get an overview of the subject matter Use the table of contents (online
found in the online ARCHITECT operations manual), page System
System Operations Manual documentation-30
Step through a sequence of associated Page through the content (online
topics operations manual), page System
documentation-30

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Using the online operations manual (continued)

To... Then...
Find a description of a particular screen Perform one of the following:
or window • Use the index (online operations
manual), page System
documentation-31
• Search for a term (online operations
documentation-32
View the procedures you can perform Select the blue, underlined text found in
from a particular screen the body of the content or at the end of
the topic under Related procedures.
View all procedures related to the Display and use the procedure map,
performance of a particular task page System documentation-29.
Find and view a particular procedure Perform one of the following:
• Use the index (online operations
documentation-31
• Search for a term (online operations
documentation-32
Look up a word Use the glossary, page System
documentation-38.
View topics that contain related Display related information,
information page System documentation-40.
Quickly display frequently accessed 1. Add topics to your favorites list. See
topics Add or remove a favorite topic
(online operations manual),
page System documentation-45.
2. Display a favorite topic (online

operations manual), page System
documentation-41.
View more information about an error Search for the error code, see Search
code including suggested corrective for a term (online operations manual),
actions page System documentation-32.
Procedures for using the online documentation

The following procedures provide instructions on how to access and
use the online operations manual (ARCHITECT System Operations
Manual) and Help? (ARCHITECT System Help):
• Access the online operations manual, page System
documentation-27
• Access Help?, page System documentation-28

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Display and use the procedure map, page System documentation-29

documentation-30
• Page through the content (online operations manual), page System
documentation-30
documentation-31
documentation-32
• Perform an advanced search (online operations manual),
• Use the glossary, page System documentation-38
• Scroll through a topic, page System documentation-39
• Display related information, page System documentation-40
• Redisplay a topic, page System documentation-40
• Display a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System
documentation-41
• Play videos and animations, page System documentation-41
• Print topics from the online documentation, page System
documentation-42
• Close the help window, page System documentation-44
• Resize and move the help window, page System documentation-44
• Rename a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System
documentation-46
Access the online operations manual
Perform this procedure to display the online operations manual

(ARCHITECT System Operations Manual) on either the SCC (system
control center) or a stand-alone computer that has the online
operations manual installed.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
User access level General operator

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To access the online operations manual from the SCC:

Select Overview from the menu bar, and then select Operations
manual.
The online operations manual opens in a help window and displays
the title page in the topic pane.
To access the online operations manual from a stand-alone computer:
Click Start, point to Programs, point to ARCHITECT System
Operations Manual, and then click the (Language) Operations
Manual.
The online operations manual opens in a help window and displays
the title page in the topic pane.
Related information...
Access Help?
Perform this procedure to display Help? (ARCHITECT System Help) on

the SCC (system control center).
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
To access Help?:
Select the help button found in the lower right-hand corner of

the software screen or window.
Help? opens and displays content specific to the current screen or
window.
To access Help? for error code messages, perform one of the following:
• Select the help button on the error message.
• Select the Error? help button on the Details for
exceptions window.
Help? opens and displays content specific to the current error
message.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Display and use the procedure map
Perform this procedure to view a list of procedures related to the

performance of a particular task and to display the instructions
associated with each procedure.
Prerequisite Access the online operations manual, page System
documentation-27, or Access Help?, page System
documentation-28
Module status Any
To display and use the procedure map:

1. Select the Home button on the toolbar.
The procedure map displays in the topic pane.
2. Select a category on the procedure map to display a list of related

tasks.
The topic content related to your selection displays in the topic
pane with an expandable list of related tasks.
3. Select a task(s) with a right arrow symbol to display a list of

related subtasks or procedures.
The right arrow changes to a down arrow and a list of subtasks
or procedures displays.
NOTE: You can select tasks with a down arrow symbol to

collapse the list.
4. Repeat step 3 until the desired procedure displays, and then

select the procedure.
The procedure content displays in the topic pane.
5. Select the Back button to return to the task list. (optional)
• Help window toolbar, page System documentation-12
• Procedure map description, page System documentation-21
• Task lists, page System documentation-22

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use the table of contents (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to view a list of topics found in the online

operations manual (ARCHITECT System Operations Manual) and to
display the associated content.
documentation-27
Module status Any
To use the table of contents:

1. Select the Contents tab on the navigation pane.
2. Select the + symbols next to the book icons.
NOTE: You can select the - symbol to collapse the list.
3. Use the scroll bar to the right of the navigation pane to view all
content.
4. Select a topic title.

The topic content displays in the topic pane.
• Contents tab (online operations manual), page System
documentation-15
• Organization of the online operations manual, page System
documentation-17
Page through the content (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to step through a sequence of associated topics

much like turning the pages of a book. You can start anywhere in the
table of contents, but a logical starting point is at a heading or
subheading level.
documentation-27
Module status Any
To page through the content:

1. Select the Contents tab on the navigation pane, and then select
a topic title.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2. Select the Next button on the toolbar to display the next topic
listed in the table of contents.
3. Repeat step 2 as often as desired.
4. Select the Previous button to display the previous topic listed in

the table of contents. (optional)
• Organization of the online operations manual, page System
documentation-17
Use the index (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to view a list of index entries and display the
associated content.
documentation-27
Module status Any
To use the index:

1. Select the Index tab on the navigation pane.
2. Type a word or scroll through the list.
3. Select the desired entry, and then select Display.

Or
The Topics Found dialog displays if the selected entry is found in
more than one topic. Highlight the desired topic, and then select
Display.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Index tab (online operations manual), page System
documentation-18
Search for a term (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to conduct a basic search of the ARCHITECT

System Operations Manual for the use of a particular word or phrase.
For example, if you search for the word create every topic that contains
the word create is found.
NOTE: In some instances not all word(s) are highlighted and search
results may not provide the expected outcome. In non-English
languages instances of the same word, with and without accented
characters, are found. Exact matches including the accented and
non-accented characters may be highlighted. Search results may be
expanded to include word forms of the entry.
The basic rules for formulating search queries are:
• Enter the desired word or phrase in either uppercase or lowercase
characters. Searches are not case sensitive.
• Enter any combination of letters (a-z) and numbers (0-9). You
cannot search for single letters (a, b, c, and so forth).
Punctuation marks such as a period, colon, semicolon, comma,
and hyphen are ignored.
To target your search and narrow the number of results returned, see
Perform an advanced search (online operations manual), page System
documentation-33.
documentation-27

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Module status Any

To search for a term:

1. Select the Search tab on the navigation pane.
2. Enter the desired word or phrase, or select the down arrow to

choose from previous used search terms.
NOTE: Use quotation marks to specify a literal phrase for

example, sample processing. Without the quotation marks, your
search is equivalent to specifying "sample" AND "processing,"
which finds topics that contain both individual words and not
necessarily the phrase.
3. Select List Topics.

The number of results found and a list of topics that contain the
word or phrase display sorted by rank (number of occurrences in
a topic).
4. Select Title to sort the topic list alphabetically. (optional)
5. Select a topic from the Select Topics to display list, and then
select Display.

Search tab's navigation pane, you can click and drag either the
right border of the pane or the Title column.
documentation-19
Perform an advanced search (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to target your search and narrow the number
of results returned. Steps are included to perform an advanced search
using:
• Boolean operators - qualifiers that enable you to refine a search
by creating a relationship between words
• Nested expressions - a combination of operators, one inside
another, that enable you to perform an even more refined search

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Wildcard expressions - keyboard characters that enable you to

search for terms without entering a complete entry
• Previous results only
• Similar word matches
• Topic titles only

Search tab's navigation pane, you can click and drag either the right
border of the pane or the Title column.
documentation-27
Module status Any
To perform an advanced search using boolean operators:

1. Select the Search tab on the navigation pane, and then enter the
desired terms.
2. Place the cursor where you want to use a boolean operator, and
then select the right arrow button to display a list of
operators.
3. Select the boolean operator to add, see Boolean operators

description, page System documentation-37.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add additional operators. (optional)
NOTE: You can type the boolean operator(s) or select the right
arrow button , and then select the operator to add.

a topic).
7. Select the desired topic, and then select Display.

To perform an advanced search using nested expressions:
nested expression, see Nested expressions description, page System
documentation-37.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: You can type the boolean operator(s) or select the right
arrow button , and then select the operator to add.

a topic).

To perform an advanced search using a wildcard expression:
characters and wildcard expression, see Wildcard expressions
description, page System documentation-38.

a topic).

To perform an advanced search in previous results only:
word or phrase you want to find.
2. Select the Search previous results check box to search through

the results of your last search in the current help session.

a topic).


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: The Search tab opens with the Search previous results
check box selected if you used this feature last. To search
through all files in the operations manual you must select this
check box to clear it.
To perform an advanced search for similar words:
2. Select the Match similar words check box.
NOTE: This search feature adjusts word forms to expand the

context, for example the word create is also found as creating, to
create, created, and so forth.
This feature is not functional for non-English languages.

a topic).

NOTE: The Search tab displays with the Match similar words
check box selected if you used this feature last. You can select
this check box to clear it.
To perform an advanced search in topic titles only:
2. Select the Search titles only check box.

a topic).


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: The Search tab displays with the Search titles only check
box selected if you used this feature last. To search through all
files in the operations manual you must select this check box to
clear it.
documentation-19
Boolean operators description
Boolean operators (AND, OR, NOT, and NEAR) are qualifiers that
enable you to refine a search by creating a relationship between words.
If you do not specify an operator, AND is used. For example, a search
for system control center is equivalent to a search for system AND control
AND center.
The following table shows how to use each operator.
Using boolean operators
To search for Use Results in
Both words in the same topic processing AND module A list of topics containing both the
words "processing" and "module"
Either word in a topic processing OR module A list of topics containing either the
word "processing" or the word
"module" or both
The first word without the processing NOT module A list of topics containing the word
second word "processing," but not the word
"module"
Both words in the same topic, processing NEAR module A list of topics containing the word
close together "processing" within eight words of
the word "module"
Nested expressions description
Nested expressions are a combination of operators, one inside another,

that enable you to create a highly refined search. The expressions in
parentheses are evaluated first. For example, a search for calibration
NOT (active OR failed) finds topics containing the word calibration
without either of the words active or failed.
Without the parentheses your search is evaluated from left to right
and finds topics containing the word calibration without the word
active, or topics containing the word failed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
You can nest expressions five levels deep. The following example
shows a nested expression using two levels:
calibration AND ((active OR failed) NEAR curve)
This search finds topics containing the word calibration used with the
words active and curve close together, or topics containing the word
calibration with the words failed and curve close together.
• Boolean operators description, page System documentation-37
Wildcard expressions description
Wildcard expressions are keyboard characters used to represent one or

more real characters. You use wildcard expressions to search for terms
without entering a complete entry by:
• Using a question mark as a substitute for a single character
• Using an asterisk as a substitute for any number of characters
NOTE: The question mark or asterisk cannot be the only character

used.
The following table shows how to use the asterisk wildcard expression.
Using an asterisk wildcard expression
To search for Use Results in
Results that start with specific op* A list of topics that contain the terms "operator,"
characters or numbers "operating," "operation," and so forth.
Results that start and end with 80*86 A list of topics that contain the numbers
specific characters or numbers "80186," "80286," "80386," and so forth.
Results that end with specific *25 A list of topics that contain the numbers "125,"
characters or numbers "1025," "12025," and so forth.
Results that contain specific *15* A list of topics that contain the numbers "15,"
characters or numbers "215," "3015," and so forth.
Use the glossary
Perform this procedure to look up the definition.

documentation-28
Module status Any
To use the glossary:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
1. Select the Glossary button on the toolbar.

The glossary displays.
2. Select the desired letter.

An alphabetized list of terms and definitions that start with the
selected letter displays.
3. Use the scroll bar to the right of the topic pane, as required, to
display the desired word.
• Help window topic pane, page System documentation-13
Scroll through a topic
Perform this procedure to view all content of a longer topic or to

control which part of the content displays in the help window.
documentation-28
Module status Any
To scroll through a topic:

1. Use the down arrow, in the lower right-hand corner of topics
that have scroll bars, to scroll through the content.
The content scrolls down and the scroll box indicates your
position in the topic.
2. Select the up or down arrow to move a few lines at a time.

(optional)
3. Select an empty space above or below the scroll box to move

several lines at a time. (optional)
4. Drag the scroll box to the desired location. (optional)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Display related information
Perform this procedure to display related information such as a further

explanation, a definition, procedures, and so forth.
documentation-28
Module status Any
To display related information:

1. Select the hypertext (blue, underlined text).
The related information displays in the topic pane.
2. Select the Back button on the toolbar to return to the previously

displayed topic. (optional)
Redisplay a topic
Perform this procedure to display a topic(s) you have viewed in your

current help session.
documentation-28
Module status Any
To redisplay a topic:
1. Select the Back button on the toolbar to display the last topic
you viewed.
2. Select the Forward button to display the next topic in a

previously displayed sequence of topics.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Display a favorite topic (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to display a topic(s) in your favorites list.

documentation-27
Module status Any
To display a favorite topic:

1. Select the Favorites tab on the navigation pane.
2. Select the desired topic from the Topics list, and then select
Display.
documentation-20
Play videos and animations
Perform this procedure to display and play video and animation clips.
documentation-28
Module status Any
To play video and animation clips:

1. Select the movie button to the left of images that have
multimedia capabilities.
The video or animation clip loads and begins to play. Three
buttons display below the image. These buttons represent the
standard play , pause , and stop buttons commonly
associated with VCRs and CD-Players.
2. Select the movie button after the video or animation has

played to return to the original view.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Print topics from the online documentation
Perform this procedure to print the currently displayed topic or to

print all topics under a heading.
documentation-28
Module status Any
To print topics from the online documentation:

1. Select the Print button on the toolbar.
The Print Topics window displays with Print the selected topic
option selected if you are using the Contents tab to access topics.
Or
The Print window displays with the General tab selected.
2. Perform steps a and b or step b depending on the window that

displays.
a. From the Print Topics window select OK to print the selected
topic or select Print the selected heading and all subtopics
option, and then select OK.
The Print window displays with the General tab selected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
b. From the Print window follow these instructions:
Option Instructions
Printer • Do not change the selection when printing from the
SCC (system control center).
Print to file • Do not select.
Find Printer • Do not select.
Page Range • Do not change the default selection of All.
Number of copies • Select the up arrow to increase the number of
copies. (optional)
• Do not select the Collate option.
Print • Select to print.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Close the help window
Perform this procedure to close the help window.

documentation-28
Module status Any
To close the help window:

Select the Close button on the toolbar.
The help window closes.
Resize and move the help window
Perform this procedure to change the size and position of the help
window and the width of help window panes. Steps are included to:
• Maximize the help window
• Resize the navigation and topic panes (online operations
manual)
• Change the width or height of the help window
• Move the help window
documentation-28
Module status Any
To maximize the help window:

Select the Maximize button in the upper right-hand corner of the
help window.
The help window enlarges to full screen size. You can select the
Restore Down button to return it to its previous size and position.
To resize the navigation and topic panes (online operations manual):
1. Position the pointer on the divider between the two panes.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
The pointer changes to a double arrow .
2. Drag the divider right or left.

To change the height or width of the help window:
1. Position the pointer on the top, bottom, left, or right edge of the
help window.
The pointer changes to a double arrow .
2. Drag the edge in the desired direction.

To move the help window:
1. Position the pointer on the title bar.
2. Drag the help window to the desired position.
Add or remove a favorite topic (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to add a topic(s) to your favorites list for quick
access, or to remove a topic(s) that is no longer needed.
documentation-27
Module status Any
To add a favorite topic:

1. Display the desired topic.
3. Select Add.
The topic title displays in the Topic list.
To remove a favorite topic:
Remove.
The topic title no longer displays in the Topic list.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

documentation-20
Rename a favorite topic (online operations manual)
Perform this procedure to rename a favorites topic.

documentation-27
Module status Any
To rename a favorite topic:

Display.
3. Enter the new name in the Current topic data entry box, and
then select Add.
4. Select the old topic name, and then select Remove. (optional)
documentation-20

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Section 1
Introduction
Use or function
<F=0>
The modular design and integration capabilities of the ARCHITECT

family of analyzers provide a single workstation capable of processing
a variety of assays.
With an intuitive software interface, real-time display of system
statuses, and a "to do" list of scheduled maintenance activities, you
can minimize system interaction and optimize your productivity.
Use or function topics include:
• ARCHITECT System overview, page 1-2
Provides a general description of the available ARCHITECT
System configurations.
• System control center, page 1-6
Provides a detailed description of the computer system, both
hardware and software, that provides the interface to your
ARCHITECT System.
• Processing modules, page 1-25
Provides a detailed description of each processing module
including all related hardware components.
• Sample handlers, page 1-82
Provides a detailed description of each sample transport system
including all related hardware components.
• Required consumables, page 1-89
Describes the consumables that are required to operate each
system.
• Required accessories, page 1-113
Describes the accessories that are required to operate each
system.
• System statuses, page 1-118
Lists and describes the various statuses of each system.
• Automatic processing module activities, page 1-126
Describes the automatic activities performed by the processing
module(s).
Section 1-1 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
ARCHITECT System overview Section 1
ARCHITECT System overview

The modular design of the ARCHITECT family of analyzers allows
multiple processing modules, which perform all sample processing
activities, to be physically joined to form a single workstation or
system. The processing module(s) determines your system
configuration.
ARCHITECT Systems can be configured to process samples using
potentiometric and photometric methods and/or CMIA
(chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) methods.
System overview topics include:
• Primary components of an ARCHITECT System, page 1-2
• ARCHITECT integrated system, page 1-2
• ARCHITECT c 4000 System, page 1-3
• ARCHITECT i 1000SR System, page 1-4
Primary components of an ARCHITECT System

Each ARCHITECT System, regardless of type, consists of three primary
components:
• System control center, page 1-6 - provides a common user interface
across all ARCHITECT System configurations.
• Processing modules, page 1-25 - performs all sample processing
activities from aspiration to final read. The type(s) and
number(s) of processing module(s) determines your system
configuration.
• Sample handlers, page 1-82 - transports samples through an
ARCHITECT System. Each system has a single, primary sample
handler regardless of the number of processing modules and
types.
ARCHITECT integrated system

The ARCHITECT integrated system is a fully-automated clinical
chemistry and immunoassay system consisting of a c System and an i
System processing module that form a single workstation.
Integrated systems include:
• ARCHITECT ci 4100 consisting of a c 4000 and an i 1000SR
processing module

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Section 1 ARCHITECT System overview

processing module
processing module
Figure 1.1: Primary components of an integrated system
Legend:
1. System control center, page 1-6: Computer system that provides user
control of the processing module(s) and related components through a
centralized interface.
2. Processing module (c System), page 1-25: Diagnostic module that performs
sample processing using potentiometric and photometric methods.
3. Processing modules (i System), page 1-49: Diagnostic module with priority
processing capability that performs sample processing using the CMIA
(chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) method.
4. RSH - robotic sample handler: Transport module that presents samples to
the processing module(s) for analysis and retesting.
See RSH - robotic sample handler (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 1-82.
ARCHITECT c 4000 System

The ARCHITECT c 4000 System is an open, fully-automated, clinical
chemistry system allowing random and continuous access, and
priority processing.
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Section 1-3

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
ARCHITECT System overview Section 1
Figure 1.2: Primary components of a c 4000 System
Legend:
1. c 4000 processing module, page 1-25: Diagnostic module that performs
sample processing using potentiometric and photometric methods.
2. RSH - robotic sample handler (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 1-82:
Transport module that presents samples to the processing module(s) for
analysis and retesting.
ARCHITECT i 1000SR System

The ARCHITECT i 1000SR System is a fully-automated immunoassay
system allowing random and continuous access as well as priority and
automated retest processing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Section 1 ARCHITECT System overview
Figure 1.3: Primary components of an i 1000SR System
Legend:
1. i 1000SR processing module, page 1-49: Diagnostic module with priority
processing capability that performs sample processing using the CMIA
(chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) method.
2. RSH - robotic sample handler (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 1-82:
Transport module that presents samples to the processing module(s) for
analysis and retesting.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
System control center Section 1
System control center

The SCC (system control center) is a computer system that provides
the software interface to the ARCHITECT System and can provide an
interface to a host computer. From the SCC you can:
• Configure the system
• Enter patient, control, and calibration orders
• Review patient results, control data, and calibration results
• Control the processing module(s) and the sample handler
• Perform system diagnostics and maintenance procedures
• Receive test orders and diagnostic data from a host computer
• Transfer test results to a host computer
System control center topics include:
• SCC standard components, page 1-6
• SCC optional components, page 1-9
• ARCHITECT System software, page 1-9
SCC standard components

The following illustration shows the standard components of the SCC
(system control center).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Section 1 System control center
Figure 1.4: SCC standard components
Legend:
1. Touch-screen monitor: Allows you to make onscreen selections by touching
text areas and graphics, icons and menu items, and function bar buttons.
2. CPU (central processing unit): Houses the microprocessor and other
computer components.
NOTE: Upgrades to the computer hardware may change the location of

CPU components.
3. Floppy drive: Used to:
– Collect system logs for troubleshooting purposes
– Import and export assay files (c System).
4. DVD/CD-RW drive: Used to:
– Install assay, maintenance, and diagnostic files
– Upgrade system software
– Archive patient and quality control results and calibration curve data
– Collect system logs for troubleshooting purposes
– Backup software database
– Import QC and calibration data
5. Keyboard: Used with the mouse and/or touch-screen monitor to enter
information. You can use the keyboard as an alternate means of performing
most functions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
6. Mouse (pointing device): Used with the touch-screen monitor and/or

keyboard to make onscreen selections.
7. Network hub and CPU back panel, page 1-8 (not shown): Provides the
connection between the SCC and modules for information exchange.
8. USB Flash drive: Used to import QC and calibrator data.
• SCC optional components, page 1-9
Network hub and CPU back panel
The network hub is an external device that joins communication lines

and enables the electronic transfer of information between the SCC
(system control center) and processing module(s). Cables run from the
hub to ethernet connectors on the back of the SCC and processing
module(s).
Additional I/O (input/output) ports and connectors on the back panel
of the CPU (central processing unit) provide connections to other
external devices, such as a keyboard, mouse, printer, and monitor.
NOTE: Upgrades to the computer hardware and network hub may

change the location of CPU components.
Figure 1.5: Network hub and CPU back panel
Legend:
1. CPU (central processing unit - rear view): Provides the I/O (input/output)
ports and connectors for external devices.
2. Ethernet connector: Provides the physical connection between the network
hub and the SCC and allows communication between the SCC and the
processing module(s).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
3. Ethernet connectors: Provides the physical connection between the network

hub and each module, and allows communication between the processing
module(s) and the SCC.
4. Scanner and keyboard connector: Provides the connection for the bar code
scanner and keyboard.
5. Mouse connector: Provides the connection for the mouse.
6. Com1 port: Provides the connection for the touch-screen interface.
7. Printer port: Provides the connection for the printer.
8. Video connector: Provides the connection for the monitor.
SCC optional components

Optional components available for the SCC (system control center)
include:
• Printer - provides a hard copy of test results and printed reports.
• Bar code scanner - provides a convenient means of scanning
sample bar codes to allow positive sample identification.
• UPS (uninterruptible power supply) - provides a temporary,
continuous flow of power to the CPU (central processing unit)
during a power failure, allowing you to save data as necessary
and perform a controlled shutdown procedure.
• External modem - connects the ARCHITECT System to a
telephone line, which allows communication with Abbott
personnel for training and troubleshooting purposes.
• Cart - supports the SCC components.
• Speakers - provide audio output.
ARCHITECT System software

ARCHITECT System software is the computer program or set of
computer instructions that interprets system and assay information,
calculates results, and provides the interface for controlling the system
hardware.
System software topics include:
• Software interface description, page 1-10
• Software navigation, page 1-16
• Snapshot screen, page 1-17

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Software interface description
The software interface is the portion of the computer program with

which you interact by making selections and entering information.
The interface provided by the ARCHITECT System software is a GUI
(graphical user interface), which is a type of display format. A GUI
allows you to initiate commands or make choices by selecting icons,
buttons, items from lists, and so forth. You can use the mouse,
touch-screen monitor, and/or keyboard to make your selections.
The software interface is common among all ARCHITECT Systems.
Figure 1.6: Software interface layout
Legend:
1. Icons: Represent a category of screens. When you select an icon, its color
changes from green to blue and a menu displays below the icon. See Icons
and menus, page Appendix E-2.
2. Menus: Lists the available items for the selected category (icon). When you
select a menu item, the associated screen displays. See Icons and menus,
page Appendix E-2.
3. Screens: Provides access to all related system information and functions.
See Screens, page 1-11.
4. Buttons: Allow you to perform actions associated with the active screen and
correspond to the function keys on the keyboard. Some may be unavailable
until you make a selection on the screen. See Buttons, page Appendix E-6.
5. Windows: Provides additional details or functions related to the active
screen. See Windows, page 1-13.
6. Messages or prompts: Provides informational or error messages that allow
you to complete a procedure or address the current situation. See
Messages, page 1-14 or Prompts, page 1-15.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
7. Help button: Provides access to context-sensitive help for the active screen,
window, or error message.
Screens
When you select an icon, and then a menu item, the associated screen
displays. This screen is considered the active screen and provides
access to all related system information and functions.
A screen can have different views (information displays) based on
module type and your onscreen selections.
Figure 1.7: Example of a screen
Legend:
1. Icons: Provide access to a menu that lists related screens. See Icons and
menus, page 1-12.
2. Title bar: Identifies the active screen.
3. Information area: Displays data and allows you to make selections and/or
enter information to perform various functions.
4. Function bar buttons: Allow you to perform actions associated with the
active screen and correspond to the function keys on the keyboard. Some
may be unavailable until you make a selection on the screen. See Function
bar buttons, page 1-12.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
For descriptions of all elements on a screen or window, see Descriptions

of screen elements, page Appendix E-1.
Icons and menus
Icons and menus are the navigational elements that allow you to
display specific screens. Additionally, icons serve as blinking indicators
to inform you that a condition requires your attention.
Figure 1.8: Example of icons and a menu
Legend:
1. Icons: Represent a category of screens. When you select an icon, its color
changes from green to blue and a menu displays below the icon.
2. Menu: Lists the available items for the selected category (icon). When you
select a menu item, the associated screen displays.
NOTE: Icons can be accessed by the keyboard equivalents shown in

the figure below.
Figure 1.9: Icon keyboard equivalents
Function bar buttons
Function bar buttons are the buttons at the bottom of each screen that
allow you to perform actions or access windows associated with the
screen. They correspond to the function keys on the keyboard. You
can use either the function bar buttons or the keyboard function keys.
The two types of function bar buttons are:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
• Screen available - have white lettering and are always available

(green background). For example, from the Order status screen
you can always select F3 - Find.
• Context available - have yellow lettering and are available (green
background) or unavailable (gray background) based on
selections you make from the screen. For example, from the
Order status screen you can only select the F5 - Details function
key after you select an order.
Figure 1.10: Screen and context function bar buttons
Legend:
1. Screen available function bar buttons: Are always enabled for the active
screen.
2. Unavailable context function bar buttons: Are available after you make a
selection on the screen.
Windows
Windows provide additional information or functions related to the

active screen. You access windows by selecting a button on the screen.
The window displays on top of, or in front of, the screen.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.11: Example of a window
Legend:
1. Title bar: Identifies the active window.
2. Information area: Displays data and allows you to make selections and/or
enter information to perform various functions.
For a description of all elements on a screen or window, see
Descriptions of screen elements, page Appendix E-1.
Messages
Messages provide important information during the course of normal

system operation. They display in front of the currently displayed
screen or window and require an acknowledgement. All interaction
with the user interface is suspended as long as the message displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.12: Example of a message
The type of message is indicated by one of two symbols at the left of

the window.
Caution: Indicates a condition that requires you to take
corrective action as described in the text of the message.
Information: Provides feedback or other useful information.
Prompts
Prompts allow you to continue or cancel the requested operation.

They display in front of the currently displayed screen or window and
require a response. All interaction with the user interface is suspended
as long as the prompt displays.
Figure 1.13: Example of a prompt
Refresh button
The Refresh button allows you to update the screen for items that do
not update automatically. The button is located on the upper right
corner of the screen and is available when the system has new data to
display. The following screens update automatically:
• Sample status
• Order status

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
• Reagent status - module view

• Reagent status - view all view
Figure 1.14: Example of a refresh button
Software navigation
The ARCHITECT System software interface is designed to provide

consistent and easy access to system information, software functions,
and context-sensitive help. You can navigate through the screens and
windows by using the mouse (pointing device), touch-screen monitor,
and/or keyboard.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.15: Software navigation
Legend:
1. Select an icon to display a menu that lists related items. See Icons and
menus, page 1-12.
2. Select a menu item from the menu to display that screen. See Icons and
menus, page 1-12.
3. Select a function bar button to perform an action or access a window
associated with the screen.
NOTE: Some function bar buttons may be unavailable until you make a
selection on the screen.
4. Select the help button to access context-sensitive help for the screen,
Once you access a screen where scroll buttons appear, additional
navigation is available via the keyboard.
Key name Function

Page Up Allows you to move the cursor up a page at a time.
Page Down Allows you to move the cursor down a page at a time.
Home Allows you to move to the top of the list.
End Allows you to move to the end of the list.
Snapshot screen
From the Snapshot screen you can view key system information such
as:
• Sample handler status, page 1-118 - displays on the sample
handler graphic.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
NOTE: The sample handler status graphic is not displayed for an

i 2000SR processing module configured with a LAS (laboratory
automation system).
• Processing module status, page 1-120 - displays on the processing
module graphic(s).
• Test processing status - displays on the order status button. You
can select this button to display the Order status screen.
• Reagent status - displays on the reagent status button. You can
select this button to display the Reagent status screen.
• Calibration curve status (c System) - displays on the calibration
status button. You can select this button to display the
Calibration status screen.
• Supply and waste status - displays on the supply status button.
You can select this button to display the Supply status screen.
• Number of orders pending rerun - displays on the Reruns status
button. You can select this button to display the Rerun status
screen.
• Number of exceptions pending review - displays on the
Exceptions status button. You can select this button to display
the Exception status screen.
Additionally, the Printer, LIS, ARM, LAS status buttons and Sample
find button display if your system is configured with these optional
components. A caution symbol indicates a condition that requires
attention.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.16: Snapshot screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Snapshot screen field descriptions,

page Appendix E-16.
To display this screen, see Access the Snapshot screen, page 1-20.
• Log on (general operator), page 1-21
• Log on (system administrator), page 1-22
• Change the system administrator password, page 1-23
• Log off, page 1-24
• Power on the SCC, page 5-3
• Power off the SCC, page 5-4
• Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5
• Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12
• Pause the processing module, page 5-12
• Pause the RSH, page 5-13
• Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-177

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Access the Snapshot screen
Perform this procedure to display the Snapshot screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Snapshot screen:

Select Overview from the menu bar, and then select Snapshot.
The Snapshot screen displays. The information is dependent on your
system configuration and test processing status.
• Sample handler status, page 1-118
• Processing module status, page 1-120
Window - Snapshot screen
The window you can access from the Snapshot screen is the Log on
window, page 1-20.
Log on window
From the Log on window you can log on as:

• General operator - required to display your operator ID on
printouts and reports
• System administrator - required to perform system
configuration, assay configuration, specific diagnostic
procedures, and approve the maintenance log

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.17: Log on window (system administrator)
For descriptions of these fields, see Log on window field descriptions,

page Appendix E-20.
• Log on (general operator), page 1-21
• Log on (system administrator), page 1-22
• Log off, page 1-24
User logon
User logon is the identifier that controls access to certain SCC (system
control center) functionality. The two types of user logon are:
• General operator - required to print the operator ID of the
current user on printouts and reports
• Administrator - required to perform administrator functions
such as configuring settings, performing specific diagnostic
procedures, and approving the maintenance log
Additionally, Abbott Area Customer Support may provide a user name
and temporary password to operators who call for troubleshooting
assistance. This logon authorizes selected functions in addition to
those allowed by the system administrator logon.
Log on (general operator)
Perform this procedure so that your operator ID displays on various

screens and reports.
NOTE: Although you can run the system without logging on, you
must log on if your operator ID is needed on system printouts and
reports.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
To log on as a system administrator, see Log on (system administrator),

page 1-22.
Prerequisite Access the Snapshot screen, page 1-20
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To log on (general operator):
1. Select F2 - Log on on the Snapshot screen.

The Log on window displays.
2. Enter your operator ID in the User name data entry box

(maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters).
3. Select Done to log on.

Your operator ID displays in the upper left-hand corner of the
Snapshot screen.
• User logon, page 1-21
• Log on window, page 1-20
Log on (system administrator)
Perform this procedure to complete system administrator functions

such as configuring settings, performing specific diagnostic
procedures, and approving the maintenance log.
To log on as a general operator, see Log on (general operator), page 1-21.
To change the administrator password, see Change the system
administrator password, page 1-23.
Module status Any
User access level System administrator
Supplies NA
To log on (system administrator):

2. Enter ADMIN (all capital letters) in the User name data entry box.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
3. Enter the system administrator password in the Password field.
4. Select Done to log on.

ADMIN displays in the upper left-hand corner of the Snapshot
screen.
Change the system administrator password
Perform this procedure to configure a new system administrator

password.
Prerequisite Access the Configuration screen - System settings view,
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To change the system administrator password:

1. Select Password from the System categories list on the
Configuration screen.
2. Select F6 - Configure.
3. The Configure password window displays.
4. Enter the new password in the System administrator password

data entry box.
5. Enter the new password in the System administrator password

confirm data entry box to confirm the new password.
6. Select Done to save your changes.
• Configuration screen - System settings view, page 2-4
• Configure password window, page 2-29

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Log off
Perform this procedure to log off if you are currently logged on to the
system.
Module status Any
User access level Any
Supplies NA
To log off:
2. Press the Delete key on the keyboard to delete the user name.
3. Select Done to log off.
4. Verify that a logon identifier does not display in the upper

left-hand corner of the Snapshot screen.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Section 1 Processing modules
Processing modules
Processing modules perform all sample processing activities from
aspiration to final read.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term processing module is used
generically throughout this documentation to refer to all types.
Processing module topics include:
• Processing module (c System), page 1-25
• Processing modules (i System), page 1-49
• Optional components, page 1-80
Processing module (c System)

The c System processing modules perform all sample processing
activities from aspiration to final read.
For more information for the c 4000, see c 4000 processing module,
page 1-25.
c 4000 processing module
The c 4000 processing module is a chemistry analyzer that performs

sample processing. It processes up to 400 photometric and 600
potentiometric tests per hour making use of up to 90 reagents in a
temperature-controlled reagent supply center.
For the c 4000 processing module, the sample handler configuration is
the robotic sample handler, which automatically positions samples for
retest.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Processing modules Section 1
Figure 1.18: c 4000 processing module (front view - RSH)
Legend:
1. Front processing center cover: Provides access to the components that
perform assay processing activities.
2. Supply and pump center door: Provides access to bulk solution storage and
pump center.
3. Card cage door: Provides access to the card cage.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.19: c 4000 processing module (rear view - RSH)
Legend:
1. Rear processing center cover: Provides access to the components that
perform assay processing activities.
2. Main power supply: Provides power to the processing module.
3. Water management unit: Provides the water supply connection.
• Processing center (c 4000), page 1-28
• Sample and reagent syringe area (c 4000), page 1-48
• ARCHITECT c 4000 System, page 1-3
• Processing module keypad (c 4000), page 1-27
• Supply and pump center (c 4000), page 1-45
Processing module keypad (c 4000)
The c 4000 processing module keypad, located on the right side of the
processing module, is an input device used by the operator when
performing some diagnostics and maintenance procedures.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.20: Components of the c 4000 processing module keypad
Legend:
1. L1, L2, L3, and L4 keys: Used to perform some maintenance and diagnostic
procedures.
Processing center (c 4000)
The processing center is the main activity area of the processing

module. Samples and reagents are dispensed and mixed in a reaction
carousel where assay processing is performed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.21: ARCHITECT c 4000 processing center components
Legend:
1. Sample hardware components: Provide sample aspiration and dispense.
2. Reagent hardware components: Provide reagent aspiration, dispense, and
positive identification.
3. Reaction carousel hardware components: Position the cuvettes for sample
and reagent dispense, mixing, photometric or potentiometric analysis, and
cuvette washing.
• Sample hardware components (c 4000), page 1-29
• Reagent hardware components (c 4000), page 1-32
• Reaction carousel (c 4000), page 1-37
Sample hardware components (c 4000)
Sample hardware components are devices that provide sample

aspiration and dispense.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.22: Sample hardware components (c 4000)
Legend:
1. Sample pipettor: Aspirates and dispenses samples into cuvettes.
2. Sample probe wash cup: Used to wash remaining fluid from the probe
exterior, interior, and tip.
3. Sample Wash Solution position 1, 2, and 3: Holds probe wash solutions for
the SmartWash function and maintenance procedures.
• Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 4000), page 1-30
• Sample wash solution area (c 4000), page 1-31
Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 4000)
The sample pipettor is a device that detects, aspirates, transfers, and

dispenses samples into the cuvettes. It also transfers diluted samples
from the cuvette used to make the dilution into the cuvette used for
the reaction. This pipettor assembly includes a fluid sense/pressure
monitoring system that helps to identify errors in aspiration.
The sample probe wash cup is an active wash station that washes any
remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip. The sample
probe is washed between samples to eliminate carryover.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.23: Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 4000)
Legend:
1. Sample pipettor: Aspirates and dispenses samples into cuvettes.
2. Sample probe wash cup: Washes remaining fluid from the probe exterior,
interior, and tip.
Sample wash solution area (c 4000)
The sample wash solution area is a storage location for sample probe
wash solutions used for the SmartWash function and maintenance
procedures.
A removable sample wash solution carrier inserted in the area holds
three sample tubes. Sample wash solutions are added directly to the
sample tubes.
NOTE: Sample cups can be loaded in to the sample tubes to allow

smaller wash solution volumes.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.24: Sample wash solution area (c 4000)
Legend:
1. Sample Wash Solution position 1, 2, and 3: Holds probe wash solutions for
the SmartWash function and maintenance procedures.
2. Sample wash solution carrier: Removable sample wash solution carrier.
Reagent hardware components (c 4000)
Reagent hardware components are devices that provide reagent

aspiration, dispense, and positive identification.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.25: Reagent hardware components (c 4000)
Legend:
1. Reagent supply center: Provides refrigerated storage for reagent kits, wash
solutions, and diluents.
2. Reagent pipettor 1 and wash cup: Pipettor aspirates and dispenses
reagents into cuvettes. Wash cup washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
3. Reagent pipettor 2 and wash cup: Pipettor aspirates and dispenses
reagents into cuvettes. Wash cup washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
4. Reagent bar code reader: Reads 2D (two-dimensional) bar code labels on
Abbott pre-packaged reagents or 1D bar code labels on user-defined
reagents.
5. Reagent supply center access button: Opens and closes the reagent supply
center cover and indicates when you can access the reagent supply center.
When the reagent supply center button is:
On - The reagent supply center can be accessed
Off - The reagent supply center cannot be accessed
6. Reagent supply center advance button: Indicates when you can advance the
reagent supply center carousels. When the indicator light is:
On - The reagent supply center cover is open and the carousels can be
advanced. When pressed, the inner and outer carousels will rotate 1/5 of a
turn.
Off - The reagent supply center carousels cannot be advanced.
• Reagent supply center (c 4000), page 1-33
• Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 4000), page 1-35
Reagent supply center (c 4000)
The reagent supply center is refrigerated for onboard storage of:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
• reagent kits (R1 and R2)

• onboard solutions
• sample diluents
See Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-99 for more information.
The outer / inner carousels of the reagent supply center and the
reagent pipettors are separately controlled to allow reagents to be
independently aspirated and dispensed by each reagent pipettor.
The c 4000 reagent supply center consists of an inner and outer
carousel and is segmented to store a maximum of 90 reagent cartridges
depending on the configuration of the segments. The location and
capacity of each carousel is presented in the following table.
Number of Available segment

Carousel Total cartridge capacity
segments types
Outer 10 Large (holds 4 Up to 40 - 60 cartridges
cartridges)
Small (holds 6
cartridges)
Inner 5 Large (holds 5 Up to 25 - 30 cartridges
cartridges)
Small (holds 6
cartridges)
For more information on available reagents segments, see Reagent

segments (c 4000), page 1-114.
Reagents can be bar coded labeled to provide positive identification.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.26: Temperature-controlled reagent supply center (c 4000)
Legend:
1. Reagent supply center inner carousel: Provides refrigerated storage for
reagent kits and onboard solutions.
2. Reagent supply center outer carousel: Provides refrigerated storage for
reagent kits and onboard solutions.
Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 4000)
Reagent pipettors 1 and 2 are devices that detect, aspirate, transfer,

and dispense reagents and onboard solutions into the cuvette. The
pipettor assemblies include a fluid sense/pressure monitoring system
that helps identify errors in aspiration.
Reagent pipettor wash cups are active wash stations that wash any
remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.27: Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 4000)
Legend:
1. Reagent pipettor 1: Aspirates and dispenses reagents into cuvettes.
2. Reagent pipettor 1 wash cup: Washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
3. Reagent pipettor 2: Aspirates and dispenses reagents into cuvettes.
4. Reagent pipettor 2 wash cup: Washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
Reaction carousel hardware components (c 4000)
Reaction carousel hardware components are devices that position the

cuvettes for sample and reagent dispense, mixing, photometric or
potentiometric analysis, and cuvette washing.
Figure 1.28: Reaction carousel hardware components (c 4000)
Legend:
1. Reaction carousel: Positions the cuvettes for sample processing.
2. Cuvette segments: Hold cuvettes in the reaction carousel.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
3. Lamp: Provides the light source for photometric measurement.

4. Mixer unit: Houses the mixers that mix sample with reagent.
5. Cuvette washer: Washes and dries the cuvettes.
6. ICT unit: Measures potentiometric assays (electrolytes) using ICT
(integrated chip technology).
7. Water bath/waste overflow area: Receives liquid waste from the pipettors.
8. ICT waste area: Receives liquid waste from the ICT reference solution cup
and ICT unit.
9. High concentration waste pump: Works with the cuvette washer to aspirate
waste from the cuvettes to the optional high-concentration waste container
or the drain.
• Reaction carousel (c 4000), page 1-37
• Cuvette segments (c 4000), page 1-38
• Lamp (c 4000), page 1-39
• Mixer unit (c 4000), page 1-39
• Cuvette washer (c 4000), page 1-40
• ICT unit (c 4000), page 1-41
• Water bath/waste overflow area (c 4000), page 1-43
• ICT high-concentration waste area (c 4000), page 1-42
• High-concentration waste pump (c 4000), page 1-44
Reaction carousel (c 4000)
The reaction carousel is a device that:

• Accommodates a variety of assay protocols
• Consists of 9 cuvette segments
• Is surrounded by a 37°C water bath
• Rotates clockwise to position the cuvettes at the following
locations:
– Sample dispense
– R1 reagent dispense
– R2 reagent dispense
– ICT electrolyte aspiration
– Mixing positions (2)
– Photometric read position

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
– Diluted sample aspiration
Figure 1.29: Reaction carousel (c 4000)
Cuvette segments (c 4000)
Cuvette segments are racks that sit in the reaction carousel and hold
cuvettes. Each cuvette segment holds 11 cuvettes. With 9 segments,
the reaction carousel holds 99 cuvettes.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.30: Cuvette segment (c 4000)
Lamp (c 4000)
The lamp is an optical device used to provide the light source for
photometric measurement.
Figure 1.31: Lamp (c 4000)
Mixer unit (c 4000)
The mixer unit is a device that houses two mixers (1 and 2) that mix
the sample and reagent together.
• Mixer 1 (right side) mixes the sample (undiluted or diluted) with
reagent 1.
• Mixer 2 (left side) mixes the sample/reagent 1 mixture with
reagent 2.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
The exterior of each mixer is washed after each mixing operation.
Figure 1.32: Mixer unit and mixers (c 4000)
Legend:
1. Mixer 1: Mixes the sample with reagent 1.
2. Mixer 2: Mixes the sample/reagent 1 mixture with reagent 2.
Cuvette washer (c 4000)
The cuvette washer is a device with eight nozzles that, from left to
right, perform the following functions before and after each cuvette is
used:
• Nozzle 1 - aspirates sample and reagent mixture to waste
• Nozzle 2 - dispenses Alkaline Wash to clean the cuvette, and
then aspirates it to waste
• Nozzle 3 - dispenses Acid Wash to clean the cuvette, and then
aspirates it to waste
• Nozzles 4 and 5 - dispense water to rinse the cuvette, and then
aspirate it to waste
• Nozzle 6 - dispenses water into the cuvette for the water blank
measurement, which ensures cuvette integrity
• Nozzle 7 - aspirates the remaining water in the cuvette to waste
• Nozzle 8 - dries the cuvette

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.33: Cuvette washer (c 4000)
ICT unit (c 4000)
The ICT (integrated chip technology) unit is a device that consists of

the ICT probe and ICT module and is used to perform indirect
potentiometric analysis. The ICT probe aspirates the diluted sample.
The ICT module simultaneously measures Na+, K+, and Cl- using
integrated chip technology.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.34: ICT unit (c 4000)
Legend:
1. ICT probe: Connected to the ICT module in the ICT unit. The ICT probe
aspirates diluted sample from the cuvettes or ICT Reference Solution from
the ICT reference solution cup into the ICT module for processing.
2. ICT module: Located in the ICT unit. The ICT module measures
potentiometric assays (electrolytes) using integrated chip technology.
3. ICT reference solution cup: Located beneath the ICT probe when the ICT
unit is in the home position. ICT reference solution cup contains preheated
reference solution that is aspirated by the ICT probe and measured by the
ICT module. Sensors in the cup confirm the cup fills completely and
sufficient solution is aspirated during measurement.
4. ICT reference solution warming ring: A narrow metal tube located in the
water bath. The ICT reference solution warming ring warms the reference
solution to 37°C before the reference solution fills the ICT reference solution
cup.
ICT high-concentration waste area (c 4000)
Liquid waste from the ICT unit collects in a high-concentration waste

compartment, and then is removed through the high-concentration
waste tubing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.35: ICT high-concentration waste area (c 4000)
Legend:
1. ICT unit high-concentration waste tubing: Delivers liquid waste from the ICT
unit into the high-concentration waste compartment.
Water bath/waste overflow area (c 4000)
The water bath/waste overflow area is a waste collection compartment

that receives overflow from the water bath and liquid waste from the
pipettors, ICT reference solution cup, and ICT unit.
Liquid waste from the pipettors and ICT reference solution cup collect
in a low-concentration waste compartment, and then is removed
through the low-concentration waste tubing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.36: Water bath and waste overflow area (c 4000)
Legend:
1. R1 tubing: Delivers excess deionized water from reagent pipettor 1 wash
cups into the low-concentration waste compartment.
2. R2 tubing: Delivers excess deionized water from reagent pipettor 2 wash
cups into the low-concentration waste compartment.
3. Sample tubing: Delivers excess deionized water from the sample pipettor
wash cup into the low-concentration waste compartment.
4. ICT reference solution cup low-concentration waste tubing: Delivers liquid
waste from the ICT reference solution cup into the low-concentration waste
compartment
High-concentration waste pump (c 4000)
Works with the cuvette washer to aspirate waste from the cuvettes to
the optional high-concentration waste container or drain.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.37: High-concentration waste pump (c 4000)
Supply and pump center (c 4000)
The supply and pump center is the storage area for processing module
pumps, bulk solutions, and sample and reagent syringes and drives.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.38: Supply and pump center (c 4000)
Legend:
1. Pump center: Houses the processing module pumps.
2. Bulk solution supply center: Provides onboard storage for ICT Reference
Solution, Alkaline Wash, and Acid Wash.
3. Sample and reagent syringes area: Houses the sample and reagent
syringes and drives.
Pump center (c 4000)
The pump center is the area that houses the processing module
pumps. These pumps provide the pressure needed to aspirate and
dispense liquids into the appropriate components in the processing
center and to the sample and reagent syringes.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.39: Processing module pumps (c 4000)
Legend:
1. ICT reference solution pump: Uses the syringe on the right to deliver ICT
Reference Solution into the ICT reference solution cup. After the reference
solution is measured, the ICT reference solution pump uses the syringe on
the left to drain the cup.
2. Wash solution pump: Delivers diluted alkaline and acid wash solutions to the
cuvettes during daily operation and maintenance procedures.
3. ICT aspiration pump: Uses the syringe on the right to deliver samples or ICT
Reference Solution into the ICT module for measurement. Once
measurement is complete, the ICT aspiration pump uses the syringe on the
left to aspirate waste from the ICT high concentration waste area to the
high-concentration waste tubing.
4. ICT aspiration valve: Controls the direction of liquid flow while the ICT
aspiration pump operates.
5. Cuvette wash pump: Delivers purified water to the cuvette washer.
6. Probe wash pumps: Uses purified water to flush the sample and reagent
probes.
Bulk solution supply center (c 4000)
The bulk solution supply center is an onboard storage area for ICT
Reference Solution, Alkaline Wash, and Acid Wash. The quantity of

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
each bulk solution is verified by individual weight sensors. The sensor

is tripped when the volume of the solution decreases to approximately
20% remaining.
Figure 1.40: Bulk solution supply center (c 4000)
Legend:
1. ICT reference solution (c System), page 1-96: Aspirated and analyzed by
the ICT module before and after each sample to provide a reference
concentration used to calculate results.
2. Alkaline wash (c System), page 1-97: Used by the cuvette washer to clean
the cuvettes after sample analysis.
3. Acid wash (c System), page 1-98: Used by the cuvette washer to clean the
cuvettes after sample analysis.
Sample and reagent syringe area (c 4000)
The sample and reagent syringe area is the location for the sample and
reagent syringes and drives. Each drive supports a syringe that controls
the aspiration and dispense of samples or reagents.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.41: Sample and reagent syringes (c 4000)
Legend:
1. Sample syringe: Aspirates and dispenses the sample.
2. Reagent syringes 1 and 2: Aspirate and dispense the reagent.
Processing modules (i System)

The i System processing modules perform all sample processing
activities from aspiration to final read.
For more information for the i 1000SR, see i 1000SR processing module,
page 1-49.
i 1000SR processing module
An i 1000SR is an immunoassay analyzer that performs sample

processing. It processes up to 100 CMIA (chemiluminescent
microparticle immunoassay) tests per hour when using a one step 11
STAT protocol. It has the capability to load up to 25 onboard reagent
kits (100 tests) in a temperature-controlled reagent carousel and
provides stat processing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.42: i 1000SR processing module (front view)
Legend:
1. Processing center cover: Provides access to the components that perform
assay processing activities.
2. SCC articulated arm: Provides access to the SCC monitor, keyboard, and
mouse.
3. Supply and waste center door: Provides access to the bulk storage and
waste storage area.
4. Card cage and SCC center door: Provides access to the card cage and
SCC components.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.43: i 1000SR processing module (rear view)
Legend:
1. SCC rear panel: Provides access to the SCC CPU back panel connectors.
2. Card cage rear panel: Provides access to the card cage backplane and
power supply.
3. Fluidics rear panel: Provides access to the fluidics components.
• Processing center (i 1000SR), page 1-51
• Supply and waste center (i 1000SR), page 1-66
• ARCHITECT i 1000SR System, page 1-4
Processing center (i 1000SR)
The processing center is the main activity area of the processing

module. Samples and reagents are dispensed and mixed into the RVs
(reaction vessels) in the process path where assay processing is
performed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.44: ARCHITECT i 1000SR processing center hardware

components
Legend:
1. Pipetting hardware components (i 1000SR), page 1-53: Provide sample and
reagent aspiration and dispense.
2. Process path hardware components (i 1000SR), page 1-56: Position the RVs
for sample and reagent aspiration, mixing, washing, and CMIA processing.
• Processing center map (i 1000SR), page 1-52
Processing center map (i 1000SR)
A processing center map is attached to the processing center cover on

an ARCHITECT i 1000SR to assist you in locating components when
you are performing component replacement procedures or
troubleshooting processing module problems. The map displays a
letter and/or number identifier for each component.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.45: Processing center map (i 1000SR)
For a description of each component, refer to Pipetting hardware

components (i 1000SR), page 1-53, or Process path hardware components (i
1000SR), page 1-56.
Pipetting hardware components (i 1000SR)
Pipetting hardware components are devices that provide sample and

reagent aspiration and dispense.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.46: Pipetting hardware components of the processing center

(i 1000SR)
Legend:
1. Pipettor (i 1000SR), page 1-54 (P): Aspirates and dispenses samples and
reagents into the RVs (reaction vessels).
2. Syringe (i 1000SR), page 1-55 (PS): Controls the aspiration and dispense of
samples and reagents.
3. Wash cup (i 1000SR), page 1-56 (PW): Used to wash remaining fluid from
the probe interior and exterior surfaces.
Pipettor (i 1000SR)
The pipettor (P on the processing center map) is a device that detects,

aspirates, transfers, and dispenses samples and reagents into the
reaction vessel. The pipettor also transfers pretreated samples into a
new reaction vessel after the appropriate incubation period. A fluid
sense/pressure monitoring system is included in the pipettor assembly
to help identify errors in aspiration.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.47: Pipettor (i 1000SR)
Syringe (i 1000SR)
The syringe (PS on the processing center map) is a device that controls
the aspiration and dispense of samples and reagents.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.48: Example of a syringe (i 1000SR)
Wash cup (i 1000SR)
The wash cup (PW on the processing center map) is an active wash
cup that washes any remaining fluid from the probe interior and
exterior surfaces. In addition, a vacuum source dries the exterior of the
probe.
Figure 1.49: Example of a wash cup (i 1000SR)
Process path hardware components (i 1000SR)
The process path is a covered circular track that provides incubation

temperatures, liquid aspiration, and wash points as necessary for the

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
assay protocol. The process path advances RVs (reaction vessels) every
18 seconds and positions them at the designated locations to process
the CMIA reaction. For information on the CMIA reaction, see CMIA
technology and reaction sequence, page 3-24.
Figure 1.50: Process path hardware components (i 1000SR)
Legend:
1. RV loader and hopper assembly (i 1000SR), page 1-58 (RVL): Provides
onboard storage for RVs and transports RVs into the process path.
2. Upper waste manifold (i 1000SR), page 1-58 (UWM): Directs liquid waste
from the RVs after washing into the waste area.
3. Wash zone manifold (i 1000SR), page 1-59 (WZ): Dispenses wash buffer,
and removes and discards unbound analyte from the reaction mixture in the
RV.
4. Wash zone outlet diverter (i 1000SR), page 1-60 (WZOD): Directs RVs either
into the inner track or keeps the RVs in the outer track.
5. RV access door (i 1000SR), page 1-60 (RVA): Used for diagnostic purposes
only. This door allows access to one position on the outer track.
6. Vortexers (i 1000SR), page 1-61 (VTX1, VTX2): Mix the reaction mixture to
suspend microparticles.
7. Pre-trigger/trigger manifold (i 1000SR), page 1-62 (PT/T): Dispenses
Pre-Trigger Solution, and Trigger Solution into the RVs.
8. CMIA reader (i 1000SR), page 1-63 (CMIA): Measures the chemiluminescent
emission from RVs and outputs data corresponding to the quantity of
emission detected.
9. Process path (i 1000SR), page 1-63 (PP): Contains provisions for moving
RVs, positioning them at processing stations, and providing incubation
temperatures required for the assay processing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
10. Unload diverter (i 1000SR), page 1-64 (ULD): Unloads RVs used for
pretreatment or dilution of samples from the inner track into the solid waste
container.
11. Unloader (i 1000SR), page 1-65 (UL): Removes used RVs from the process
path and discards them into the solid waste container after assay
processing.
12. Process path motor (i 1000SR), page 1-65 (PPM): Rotates the process path
disk, which holds RVs in place, and advances the RVs from position to
position.
13. Wash zone inlet diverter (i 1000SR), page 1-66 (WZID): Directs RVs either
into the wash zone (outer track) where a wash occurs or keeps the RVs in
the inner track.
RV loader and hopper assembly (i 1000SR)
The RV loader and hopper assembly (RVL on the processing center

map) is a device that provides onboard storage for RVs (reaction
vessels) and transports the RVs into the process path.
Figure 1.51: RV loader and hopper assembly (i 1000SR)
Upper waste manifold (i 1000SR)
The upper waste manifold (UWM on the processing center map) is a

device that directs liquid waste from the RVs after washing into the
waste area.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.52: Upper waste manifold (i 1000SR)
Wash zone manifold (i 1000SR)
The wash zone manifold (WZ on the processing center map) is a

device that removes and discards unbound analyte from the reaction
mixture in an RV (reaction vessel). Each wash zone has four positions
where the following actions occur:
• Position 1 - A magnet attracts paramagnetic microparticles to the
wall of the RV and a dispense nozzle dispenses wash buffer into
the RV.
• Position 2 and 3 - A vacuum is applied to the wash zone probes
as they move to the bottom of the RV. In addition, nozzles
dispense wash buffer into the RV. Additional wash/aspiration
cycles occur at these positions.
• Position 4 - A wash zone probe aspirates liquid waste from the
RV.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.53: Wash zone manifold (i 1000SR)
Wash zone outlet diverter (i 1000SR)
The wash zone outlet diverter (WZOD on the processing center map)
is a device that directs RVs either into the inner track or keeps the RVs
in the outer track.
Figure 1.54: Wash zone outlet diverter (i 1000SR)
RV access door (i 1000SR)
The RV access door (RVA on the processing center map) is an opening

that allows access to one position on the outer track. You use this door
for diagnostic purposes only and should always make sure it is closed
during system operation.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.55: RV access door (i 1000SR)
Vortexers (i 1000SR)
The vortexers (VTX1 and VTX2 on the processing center map) are
devices that mix the reaction mixture to suspend microparticles. The
RVs are vortexed in the process path.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.56: Vortexers (i 1000SR)
Pre-trigger/trigger manifold (i 1000SR)
The pre-trigger/trigger manifold (PT/T on the processing center map)

is a device that dispenses Pre-Trigger Solution, and then Trigger
Solution into RVs (reaction vessels).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.57: Pre-trigger/trigger manifold (i 1000SR)
CMIA reader (i 1000SR)
The CMIA reader (CMIA on the processing center map) is a device that
measures the chemiluminescent emission from RVs (reaction vessels)
and reports the quantity of emission detected.
Figure 1.58: CMIA reader (i 1000SR)
Process path (i 1000SR)
The process path (PP on the processing center map) is a device that
contains provisions for moving RVs, positioning them at processing

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
stations, and provides incubation temperatures required for assay

processing.
Figure 1.59: Process path (i 1000SR)
Unload diverter (i 1000SR)
The unload diverter (ULD on the processing center map) is a device

that unloads RVs used for pretreatment or dilution of samples from
the inner track into the solid waste container.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.60: Unload diverter (i 1000SR)
Unloader (i 1000SR)
The unloader (UL on the processing center map) is a device that

removes used RVs from the process path and discards them into the
solid waste container after assay processing.
Figure 1.61: Unloader (i 1000SR)
Process path motor (i 1000SR)
The process path drive motor (PPM on the processing center map) is a
device that rotates the process path disk, which holds RVs (reaction
vessels) in place, and advances the RVs from position to position.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.62: Process path motor (i 1000SR)
Wash zone inlet diverter (i 1000SR)
The wash zone inlet diverter (WZID on the processing center map) is a
device that directs RVs either into the wash zone (outer track) where a
wash occurs or keeps the RVs in the inner track.
Figure 1.63: Wash zone inlet diverter (i 1000SR)
Supply and waste center (i 1000SR)
The supply and waste center is the onboard storage area for bulk
solutions and waste.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.64: Supply and waste center (i 1000SR)
Legend:
1. Pre-trigger/trigger storage area (i 1000SR), page 1-67: Provides onboard
storage for Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution.
2. Wash buffer storage area (i 1000SR), page 1-71: Provides onboard storage
for the wash buffer.
3. Waste storage area (i 1000SR), page 1-75: Provides storage for liquid and
solid waste.
Pre-trigger/trigger storage area (i 1000SR)
The pre-trigger/trigger storage area is the location in the supply and

waste center that provides onboard storage for the Pre-Trigger Solution
and Trigger Solution, which are necessary for test processing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.65: Pre-trigger/trigger storage area (i 1000SR)
Legend:
1. Pre-trigger/trigger tray (i 1000SR), page 1-68: Holds the pre-trigger and
trigger bottles.
2. Trigger level sensor (i 1000SR), page 1-70: Detects the volume of remaining
trigger solution.
3. Pre-trigger level sensor (i 1000SR), page 1-69: Detects the volume of
remaining pre-trigger solution.
Pre-trigger/trigger tray (i 1000SR)
The pre-trigger/trigger tray is a platform in the supply and waste

center that holds the Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution bottles.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.66: Pre-trigger/trigger tray (i 1000SR)
Legend:
1. Trigger solution (i System), page 1-108: Used to produce the
chemiluminescent reaction that provides the final read.
2. Pre-trigger solution (i System), page 1-107: Used to split the acridinium dye
off the conjugate bound to the microparticle complex. This process prepares
the acridinium dye for the addition of trigger solution.
Pre-trigger level sensor (i 1000SR)
The pre-trigger level sensor is an assembly with a magnetic float sensor

located in the pre-trigger bottle that indicates when the liquid level is
low. When the sensor trips, approximately 70 mLs of usable solution
remains.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.67: Pre-trigger level sensor (i 1000SR)
Trigger level sensor (i 1000SR)
The trigger level sensor is an assembly with a magnetic float sensor

located in the trigger bottle that indicates when the liquid level is low.
When the sensor trips, approximately 70 mLs of usable solution
remains.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.68: Trigger level sensor (i 1000SR)
Wash buffer storage area (i 1000SR)
The wash buffer storage area is the location in the supply and waste
center for onboard storage of wash buffer, which is used in test
processing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.69: Wash buffer storage area (i 1000SR)
Legend:
1. Wash buffer reservoir (i 1000SR), page 1-72: Provides onboard storage for
up to 12 liters of wash buffer.
2. Wash buffer level sensor and outlet assembly (i 1000SR), page 1-73:
Dispenses wash buffer into the reservoir and measures the remaining
volume of wash buffer.
3. Wash buffer level sensor and outlet assembly (i 1000SR), page 1-73: Draws
wash buffer from the reservoir during test processing.
4. Wash buffer filter (i 1000SR), page 1-74: Protects the fluidics components by
eliminating particulates.
Wash buffer reservoir (i 1000SR)
The wash buffer reservoir is an onboard container in the supply and

waste center that holds up to 12 liters of wash buffer.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.70: Wash buffer reservoir (i 1000SR)
Wash buffer level sensor and outlet assembly (i 1000SR)
The wash buffer level sensor, located in the wash buffer reservoir, is an
assembly containing a tube with three magnetic float sensors that
indicate when the wash buffer reservoir is full (top sensor), needs to be
filled by the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module)
accessory (middle sensor), or is empty (lower sensor).
The buffer level sensor dispenses wash buffer into the reservoir. The
outlet assembly draws wash buffer from the reservoir during test
processing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.71: Wash buffer level sensor and outlet tube (i 1000SR)
Wash buffer filter (i 1000SR)
The wash buffer filter, located in the wash buffer storage area, is an
assembly containing material used to eliminate particulates that
might damage the fluidics components of the system.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.72: Wash buffer filter (i 1000SR)
Waste storage area (i 1000SR)
The waste storage area is the location in the supply and waste center
that provides a storage area for the solid waste container that holds
used RVs (reaction vessels) and the liquid waste container. These
containers are accessed by sliding out the waste drawer.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.73: Waste storage area (i 1000SR)
Legend:
1. Waste drawer (i 1000SR), page 1-76: Provides onboard storage for the liquid
and solid waste containers.
2. Liquid waste container (i 1000SR), page 1-77: Provides onboard storage for
liquid waste.
3. Solid waste container (i 1000SR), page 1-78: Provides onboard storage for
the used RVs (reaction vessels).
4. Waste pan (i 1000SR), page 1-79: Provides storage for up to 25 used RVs
when the solid waste container is removed during processing.
Waste drawer (i 1000SR)
The waste drawer is the location in the waste area that holds the liquid
and solid waste containers. Sliding this drawer out of the waste area
allows access to the liquid and solid waste containers.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.74: Waste drawer (i 1000SR)
Liquid waste container (i 1000SR)
The liquid waste container is a receptacle that holds the liquid waste
from the system. This is an optional item and only required if your
system is not configured for an external floor drain.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.75: Liquid waste container (i 1000SR)
Solid waste container (i 1000SR)
The solid waste container is a receptacle that holds used RVs (reaction
vessels).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.76: Solid waste container (i 1000SR)
Waste pan (i 1000SR)
The waste pan is a receptacle that holds used RVs (reaction vessels)
when the solid waste container is not present. This pan holds up to 25
RVs when you remove the solid waste container during processing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.77: Waste pan (i 1000SR)
Optional components
Optional components for processing modules include:
• UPS (uninterruptible power supply) - provides a temporary,
continuous flow of power to the processing module during a
power failure.
• High-concentration waste bottle (c System) - collects the
high-concentration liquid waste from the cuvettes and the ICT
unit.
• External waste pump (except for i 1000SR), page 1-80 - pumps waste
from the processing module(s) to an elevated drain located in a
sink.
External waste pump (except for i 1000SR)
The external waste pump is an optional accessory that transports

waste from the processing module(s) to an elevated drain located in a
sink when a floor drain is not available.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.78: External waste pump (front)
Legend:
1. Power outlet: Supplies power to the external waste pump.
2. Power switch: Turns the power to the pump on and off. When the power is on
the pump will automatically activate to pump waste.
3. Voltage select switch: Switches the allowable voltage from 110v to 220v.
4. Manual operating switch: Turns the power to the pump on and activates the
pump.
Figure 1.79: External waste pump (back)
Legend:
1. Waste outlet quick disconnect: Provides a connection for tubing to an
elevated drain.
2. Inlet quick disconnect (4): Provides a connection for tubing from the
processing module. Up to four processing modules can connect to one
external waste pump.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Sample handlers Section 1
Sample handlers
The sample handler is a transport system used for loading calibrators,
controls, and patient samples and presenting them to the processing
module(s).
A single primary sample handler transports samples through an
ARCHITECT System regardless of the number of processing modules
and types.
NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, the term sample handler is used

generically throughout this documentation to refer to all
configurations.
Sample handler topics include:
• RSH - robotic sample handler (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 1-82
RSH - robotic sample handler (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)

The RSH (robotic sample handler) is a transport system used for
loading calibrators, controls, patient samples, and reagents. The
design of the RSH allows random and continuous access for
loading/unloading samples and reagents. Two types of sections
position samples for either routine or priority processing. Sample
carriers can be loaded in any RSH section. Reagent carriers can only be
loaded in an i 1000SR section.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Section 1 Sample handlers
Figure 1.80: Robotic sample handler components

(c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
Legend:
1. Processing center cover: Provides access to the RSH components.
2. Load/Unload area: Positions sample and reagent carriers (i 1000SR) for
loading and unloading.
3. Bar code reader:
– For sample carriers - reads the sample and sample carrier ID bar code
labels
– For reagent carriers (i 1000SR) - reads the reagent bottle 2D bar code
labels
4. Bottle rotator (i 1000SR): Orients the pink position on the reagent carrier so
the reagent bar code label can be read.
5. Carrier transport:
– For sample carriers - transfers carriers from the sections to the
aspiration area and back.
– For reagent carriers (i 1000SR) - transfers carriers from the sections to
the reagent carousel and back
6. Carrier positioner: Positions sample carriers for sample aspiration.
7. Aspiration area: Positions sample carriers for sample aspiration.
8. Priority sections:
– For sample carriers - positions samples for priority processing

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
– For reagent carriers (i 1000SR) - positions reagent carriers for loading

on the reagent carousel
9. Routine sections:
– For sample carriers - positions samples for routine processing
Priority sections (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
The priority section(s) is a holding area for sample or reagent carriers (i

1000SR).
• For a sample carrier - You place samples in a sample carrier and
load the carrier into the priority section. The carrier transport
picks up the carrier and moves it past the bar code reader. The
bar code reader identifies the samples, and the carrier transport
moves the carrier to the carrier positioner or to the aspiration
area for sample aspiration.
• For a reagent carrier (i 1000SR) - You place reagent bottles on the
reagent carrier and load them into the priority section. The
carrier transport picks up the carrier and moves it past the bar
code reader. The bar code reader identifies the reagent kit, and
the carrier transport loads the carrier on the reagent carousel.
You can configure the number of priority sections:
• c 4000 (range 0 - 7)
• i 1000SR (range 0 - 7)
• ci 4100 (range 0 - 10)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.81: Priority sections (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
Legend:
1. Priority sections:
– For sample carriers - positions samples for priority processing
the reagent carousel
2. Status indicator: Indicates the status of sample processing and when you
can access samples:
– Indicators off - no sample or reagent carriers are loaded in the section.
– Green (steady) - sample or reagent carriers are loaded, but
processing has not begun. You can access the samples.
– Amber (steady) - sample or reagent carriers are processing and you
cannot access them.
– Green (blinking) - processing is complete and you can access the
sample or reagent carrier.
NOTE: If you add or rerun tests for a sample before it is unloaded, the
indicator for the section changes back to amber while the sample is
re-aspirated.
– Amber (blinking) - unloading a reagent carrier is in process so this
section is unavailable for loading carriers.
– Amber and green (alternating) - bar code scan or other error occurred.
You can access the carriers.
3. Sample carrier: Holds five primary tubes, aliquot tubes, or sample cups,
which you may mix within a sample carrier.
4. Reagent carrier (i 1000SR): Holds up to three reagent bottles. Two reagent
carriers are required for assays that have more than three reagent bottles.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Routine sections (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
The routine sections are holding areas for sample or reagent carriers.
• For a sample carrier - You place samples in a sample carrier and
load the carrier into the routine section. The carrier transport
picks up the carrier and moves it past the bar code reader. The
bar code reader identifies the samples, and the carrier transport
moves the carrier to the carrier positioner or to the aspiration
area for sample aspiration.
• For a reagent carrier (i 1000SR)- You place reagent bottles on the
reagent carrier and load them into the routine section. The
carrier transport picks up the carrier and moves it past the bar
code reader. The bar code reader identifies the reagent kit, and
the carrier transport loads the carrier on the reagent carousel.
Figure 1.82: Routine sections (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
Legend:
1. Routine sections:
– For sample carriers - positions samples for routine processing
– For reagent carriers (i 1000SR)- positions reagent carriers for loading
2. Status indicator: Indicates the status of sample processing and when you
can access samples:
– Indicators off - no sample or reagent carriers are loaded in the section.
– Green (steady) - sample or reagent carriers are loaded, but
processing has not begun. You can access the carriers.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
– Amber (steady) - sample or reagent carriers are processing and you

cannot access them.
– Green (blinking) - processing is complete and you can access the
sample or reagent carrier.
NOTE: If you add or rerun tests for a sample before it is unloaded, the
indicator for the section changes back to amber while the sample is
re-aspirated.
– Amber (blinking) - unloading a reagent carrier is in process so this
section is unavailable for loading carriers.
– Amber and green (alternating) - bar code scan or other error occurred.
You can access the carriers.
3. Sample carrier: Holds five primary tubes, aliquot tubes, or sample cups,
which you may mix within a sample carrier.
4. Reagent carrier (i 1000SR): Holds up to three reagent bottles. Two reagent
carriers are required for assays that have more than three reagent bottles.
Carrier transport and carrier positioner/aspiration area (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci

4100)
The carrier transport is a mechanism used to transport carriers from:

For sample carriers
• A section on the RSH to the bar code reader
• The bar code reader to the carrier positioner/aspiration area or
back to the section
• The carrier positioner/aspiration area back to the section
For reagent carriers (i 1000SR)
• A section on the RSH to the bar code reader and bottle rotator
• The bar code reader and bottle rotator to the reagent carousel or
back to the section
• The reagent carousel back to the section
The carrier positioner and aspiration area are locations on the RSH
that assist in positioning sample carriers at the appropriate aspiration
position.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.83: Carrier transport and aspiration area (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci

4100)
Legend:
1. Carrier transport:
– For sample carriers - transfers carriers from the sections to the
aspiration area and back
– For reagent carriers (i 1000SR) - transfers carriers from the sections to
the reagent carousel and back
2. Carrier positioner: Positions sample carriers for sample aspiration.
3. Aspiration area: Positions sample carriers for sample aspiration.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Section 1 Required consumables
Required consumables
Consumables are replenishable items required to run assays on an
ARCHITECT System. It is important to maintain adequate inventory
of these consumables.
Required consumables topics include:
• ARCHITECT System consumables, page 1-89
• ARCHITECT c System consumables, page 1-89
• ARCHITECT i System consumables, page 1-102
ARCHITECT System consumables

Sample cups are used on every ARCHITECT System.
The sample cup is a 1400 μL disposable container that holds patient
samples, calibrators, or controls. Volume graduation lines at 125 μL,
500 μL, and 1400 μL help you fill sample cups, eliminating the need
for precision pipetting.
You can use sample cups in conjunction with sample tubes with bar
code labels to facilitate positive sample identification.
Figure 1.84: Sample cups
ARCHITECT c System consumables

The following consumables are used on an ARCHITECT c System:
• Reagent kits and components (c System), page 1-90
• Reagent cartridges (c System), page 1-91
• Calibrators (c System), page 1-92

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Required consumables Section 1
• ICT module (c System), page 1-93

• ICT calibrators (c System), page 1-94
• ICT cleaning fluid (c System), page 1-95
• Bulk solutions (c System), page 1-96
• Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-99
• Water bath additive (c System), page 1-100
Reagent kits and components (c System)
Reagent kits are one or more cartridges that contain all the necessary
reagent components for an ARCHITECT c System photometric or
potentiometric assay.
Reagent kits can be stored on board the system in accordance with
assay-specific instructions. For details about onboard storage, see the
reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a
package insert or reagent application sheet).
Figure 1.85: Reagent kits and components
• Reagent labels (c System), page 1-90
Reagent labels (c System)
Reagent labels are unique identifiers on Abbott pre-packaged reagents

that contain a 2D (two-dimensional) bar code. Bar code information
includes:
• Reagent name
• Reagent serial number

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
• Lot number
• Cartridge size
• Expiration date
• Onboard stability time
A reagent supply center indicator (R1 or R2) is at the top of the reagent
label to aid in loading reagents.
Figure 1.86: Reagent labels
Reagent cartridges (c System)
Reagent cartridges are containers used in the reagent supply centers to

hold the reagents used during operation. They may also hold supplies
of diluted wash solutions, diluents, and Water Bath Additive.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.87: Reagent cartridges
Legend:
1. Large, 90 mL cartridge: White or natural.
2. 100 mL cartridge: Brown (only available with some prepackaged reagents
and cannot be ordered separately).
3. 20 mL cartridge: White
4. Small, 55 mL cartridge: White or natural.
5. 20 mL bottle: Brown (only available with some prepackaged reagents and
cannot be ordered separately).
• Reagent cartridge adapters (c 4000), page 1-115
Calibrators (c System)
Calibrators are samples that contain known concentrations of analyte.

A variety of calibrators (single and multiconstituent) are used on the
system. See the Abbott Clinical Chemistry package insert or reagent
application sheet to identify the calibrators used for each assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.88: Calibrators
ICT module (c System)
The ICT module is an integrated chip located within the ICT unit that
contains the Na+, K+, Cl-, and reference electrodes. The warranty for
the ICT module is 15,000 samples or two months post-installation,
whichever comes first.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.89: ICT module
ICT calibrators (c System)
ICT calibrators (7% bovine serum albumin base) and ICT urine
calibrators (aqueous base) are samples with known values used to
calibrate the ICT module. Each set contains a low and high level.
See the Abbott Clinical Chemistry package insert or reagent
application sheet for information on calibration.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.90: ICT calibrators
ICT cleaning fluid (c System)
ICT Cleaning Fluid is a cleaning agent prepared by the operator and

used during daily maintenance procedures to clean the ICT module.
The ICT Cleaning Fluid is supplied as a two-part product, consisting of
a liquid and a powder.
WARNING: SENSITIZER. ICT Lyophilized Cleaning Fluid
containing Protease 10 may cause sensitization by
inhalation and is classified per applicable EC (European
Community) Directives as: Harmful (Xn). For more
information see Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
To prepare ICT cleaning fluid, see Prepare ICT cleaning fluid (c System),
page 9-23.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.91: ICT cleaning fluid
Bulk solutions (c System)
Bulk solutions are liquid solutions provided in large quantities that are
used in sample processing. Three bulk solutions are loaded onto
weighted platforms behind the supply center door of the processing
module:
• ICT reference solution (c System), page 1-96
• Alkaline wash (c System), page 1-97
• Acid wash (c System), page 1-98
NOTE: For specific information on the storage of the bulk solutions,

see the labels on the bulk solution bottles.
• Bulk solution supply center (c 4000), page 1-47
ICT reference solution (c System)
ICT Reference Solution (2000 mL bottle) is a mid-concentration

standard. It is aspirated and analyzed by the ICT module before and
after each sample to provide a reference concentration used to
calculate results.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.92: Reference solution
Alkaline wash (c System)
Alkaline Wash (500 mL bottle) is an alkaline wash solution used by the

cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes after sample analysis.
Alkaline Wash contains sodium hydroxide (NaOH) and is
classified per applicable EC (European Community)
Directives as: Corrosive (C). For more information see
Chemical hazards, page 8-9.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.93: Alkaline wash
Acid wash (c System)
Acid Wash (500 mL bottle) is an acidic wash solution used by the

cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes after sample analysis.
CAUTION: IRRITANT. Acid Wash is irritating to the skin
and eyes. Acid Wash contains methyl alcohol and is
Directives as: Harmful (Xn). For more information, see
A dilution of the acid wash solution may also be used for probe
washing. See Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-99.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.94: Acid wash
Onboard solutions (c System)
Onboard solutions are detergents used to wash the sample and reagent
probes, mixers, and reaction cuvettes. These solutions are used during
system operation when additional probe or cuvette washes may be
required to prevent assay-to-assay interference (SmartWash feature).
They may also be used during some maintenance procedures.
Onboard solutions include:
• 0.5% acid wash solution (a 0.5% dilution of Acid Wash bulk
solution)
• Detergent A
• 10% detergent B solution (a 10% dilution of Detergent B)
CAUTION: IRRITANT. Acid Wash is irritating to the skin
and eyes. Acid Wash contains methyl alcohol and is
CAUTION: IRRITANT. Detergent A is irritating to the

skin and eyes. Detergent A contains 2-aminoethanol and
is classified per applicable EC (European Community)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Detergent B contains sodium hydroxide and is classified

per applicable EC (European Community) Directives as:
Corrosive (C). For more information, see Chemical hazards,
page 8-9.
Figure 1.95: Onboard solutions
Water bath additive (c System)
Water Bath Additive is an antimicrobial solution used to reduce

microbial contamination in the water bath. A supply of water bath
additive is placed in one of the reagent supply centers for the
automated daily maintenance procedure. During the procedure, the
solution is dispensed into the water bath.
WARNING: SENSITIZER. The water bath additive
contains a chemical which may cause an allergic skin
reaction. Water Bath Additive contains
5-Chloro-2-methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one and
2-Methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one and is classified per
applicable EC (European Community) Directives as:
Irritant (Xi). For more information, see Chemical hazards,
page 8-9.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.96: Water bath additive
Solutions used in daily operations (c 4000)
The following tables provide a quick reference by describing the

purpose, onboard stability, placement, and preparation information
for c 4000 solutions used in daily operation.
Table 1.1: Bulk solutions (c 4000)
Solution Purpose Onboard stability Placement
ICT reference ICT analysis and daily Expiration date on Weight platform in the supply center
solution maintenance bottle
Alkaline wash Wash cuvettes Expiration date on Weight platform in the supply center
bottle
Acid wash Wash cuvettes Expiration date on Weight platform in the supply center
bottle
Table 1.2: Sample wash solutions (c 4000)

0.5% Acid wash Wash sample 1 day Position 1 on the sample wash solution
solution probe carrier
Detergent A Wash sample 1 day Position 2 on the sample wash solution
probe carrier
ICT cleaning fluid 6070 Daily NA Position 3 on the sample wash solution
Maintenance carrier
procedure

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Table 1.3: Reagent supply center solutions (c 4000)

Detergent A Wash reagent probes Expiration date on Reagent supply center position A1 (as
bottle configured on the Supply status
screen)
10% Wash reagent probes 14 days Reagent supply center position A2 (as
Detergent B configured on the Supply status
screen)
0.5% Acid Wash reagent probes 30 days Reagent supply center position A3 (as
wash solution configured on the Supply status
screen)
ICT sample ICT analysis 14 days Reagent supply center, any position
diluent
Water bath 6070 Daily Expiration date on Reagent supply center position A4 (as
additive Maintenance bottle configured on the Supply status
procedure screen)
Saline Sample dilution Expiration date on Reagent supply center (as configured
bottle on the Supply status screen
Table 1.4: Solution preparation (c 4000)

Solution Preparation overview Stability
0.5% Acid Wash Mix together: Same as the expiration of the Acid
See Prepare 0.5% acid wash • 5 mL of Acid Wash Wash bulk solution
solution (c System), page 5-26. • 995 mL of purified water
• Pour into appropriate container

10% detergent B Mix together: 14 days
See Prepare 10% detergent B • 50 mL of Detergent B
solution (c System), page 5-28. • 450 mL of purified water
• Pour into appropriate container

ICT Cleaning Fluid • Add 12 mL of ICT Cleaning Fluid 14 days at 2°C to 8°C after
See Prepare ICT cleaning fluid to the ICT lyophilized cleaning preparation
(c System), page 9-23. solution bottle
• Mix gently by inversion
ARCHITECT i System consumables

The following consumables are used on an ARCHITECT i System:
• Reagent kits and components (i System), page 1-103
• Septums and replacement caps (i System), page 1-104
• Single constituent controls (i System), page 1-105
• Multiconstituent controls (i System), page 1-105

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
• Calibrators (i System), page 1-106

• Bulk solutions (i System), page 1-107
• Reaction vessels (i System), page 1-112
• Probe conditioning solution (i System), page 1-111
Reagent kits and components (i System)
Reagent kits are two or more bottles that contain all the necessary
reagent components for an ARCHITECT i System assay. Based on the
size, reagent kits include:
• 100 test kits
• 500 test kits
NOTE: 500 test reagent kits can only be used on the i 2000/i 2000SR
systems.
Reagent kits can be stored on board the system in accordance with
assay-specific instructions. For details about onboard storage, see the
assay-specific package insert.
Figure 1.97: Reagent kit and components
• Reagent labels (i System), page 1-103
Reagent labels (i System)
Reagent labels are unique identifiers on Abbott pre-packaged reagents

that contain 2D (two-dimensional) bar codes. Bar code information
includes:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
• Assay name
• Reagent serial number
• Lot number
• Test size (number of tests per kit)
• Expiration date
• Onboard stability time
• Master calibration curve information for assays that use the
2-point adjustment calibration method
Color bands, which match the reagent carousel position, are located at
the top of the reagent label to aid in loading reagents.
Figure 1.98: Reagent labels
Septums and replacement caps (i System)
Septums are membranes with slits that are used to prevent reagent
evaporation and contamination, and to ensure reagent integrity. You
place septums on all open reagent bottles prior to loading the bottle
into the processing module.
Replacement caps are teal-colored caps used to visually indicate that
reagent bottles have been opened. You place replacement caps on
open reagent bottles with the septums in place when you remove
reagent bottles from the processing module. You can then store the
bottles upright in refrigerated storage off the system.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.99: Septums and replacement caps
Single constituent controls (i System)
Single constituent controls are assay-specific samples that contain

known concentrations of analyte. They are typically labeled L, M, and
H, or Pos and Neg.
Figure 1.100: Single constituent controls
Multiconstituent controls (i System)
Abbott multiconstituent controls are samples that contain multiple

analytes. Two or three levels of control are available to allow
performance monitoring within a clinical range:
• Immunoassay-MCC (Liquid) - contains immunoassay markers
(including some cancer assay markers)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
• Tumor Marker-MCC (Lyophilized) - contains all the cancer

markers available to an ARCHITECT i System
Figure 1.101: Multiconstituent controls
Calibrators (i System)
Calibrators are samples that contain known concentrations of analyte.

Single analyte calibrators are used on an i System. See the
assay-specific package insert to identify the calibrators used for each
assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.102: Calibrators
Bulk solutions (i System)
Bulk solutions are liquid solutions provided in large quantities that are
used in sample processing. Three bulk solutions are loaded into the
supply and waste center of an ARCHITECT i System processing
module:
• Pre-trigger solution (i System), page 1-107
• Trigger solution (i System), page 1-108
• Concentrated wash buffer (i System), page 1-109
NOTE: For information specific to storing bulk solutions, see the labels
on the bulk solution bottles.
Pre-trigger solution (i System)
Pre-Trigger Solution is a hydrogen peroxide solution used to split the

acridinium dye off the conjugate bound to the microparticle complex.
This process prepares the acridinium dye for the addition of Trigger
Solution. The pre-trigger bottle is black.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.103: Pre-trigger solution
Trigger solution (i System)
Trigger Solution is a sodium hydroxide solution used to produce the

chemiluminescent reaction that provides the final read. The trigger
bottle is natural.
CAUTION: IRRITANT. Trigger solution is irritating to the
skin and eyes. Trigger Solution contains sodium
hydroxide (NaOH) and is classified per applicable EC
(European Community) Directives as: Irritant (Xi). For
more information, see Chemical hazards, page 8-9.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.104: Trigger solution
Concentrated wash buffer (i System)
Concentrated Wash Buffer is a solution containing phosphate buffered

saline. Wash buffer is used throughout assay processing and is pumped
to the sample and reagent pipetting assemblies and the two wash
zones.
A reservoir is kept on board the system in the supply and waste center
and can be replenished while the system is running.
Concentrated wash buffer is supplied in a 1 L bottle that must be
diluted prior to use or in a 10 L cubitainer for use with the
ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory.
Concentrated wash buffer that contains sodium azide is
classified per applicable EC (European community)
Directives as: Harmful (Xn). For information see Chemical
hazards, page 8-9.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.105: Concentrated wash buffer (1 L bottle)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.106: Concentrated wash buffer (10 L cubitainer)
Probe conditioning solution (i System)
Probe conditioning solution is a solution containing recalcified

human plasma. Some maintenance procedures require this solution to
condition the sample pipettor probe after cleaning to prevent
non-specific binding of analytes in the probe.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.107: Probe conditioning solution
Reaction vessels (i System)
RVs (reaction vessels) are disposable containers in which the CMIA

reaction takes place. RVs are stored in bulk in the RV hopper and are
automatically loaded into the process path as needed. You can add RVs
to the hopper at any time.
Figure 1.108: Reaction vessel

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Section 1 Required accessories
Required accessories
Accessories are components that are required for sample processing on
an ARCHITECT System. It is important to maintain a sufficient supply
of these accessories.
Required accessory topics include:
• Sample carriers, page 1-113
• Reagent segments (c 4000), page 1-114
• Reagent carriers (i 1000SR), page 1-116
Sample carriers
Sample carriers are racks used on the RSH (robotic sample handler) or
SSH (standard sample handler) to transport patient samples,
calibrators, or controls to the sample pipettor(s). Sample carriers are
bar coded for identification and hold five primary tubes, aliquot tubes,
or sample cups, which you may mix within a sample carrier.
Sample carriers have a sample gauge label to verify the sample volume
in a primary or aliquot tube. See Sample gauge label, page 5-166.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Required accessories Section 1
Figure 1.109: Sample carriers
Reagent segments (c 4000)

Reagent segments are sections of each reagent supply center that hold
reagents and diluents.
Some segments have a target for pipettor calibration used for aligning
sample or reagent pipettors when necessary.
Reagent segments are configured as follows:
• Inner carousel consists of 5 segments. Each segment may be
inserted in any location in the inner reagent carousel.
• Outer carousel consists of 10 segments. Each segment may be
inserted in any location in the outer reagent carousel.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.110: Reagent segments (c 4000)
Legend:
1. Inner reagent segment, 5 positions.
2. Inner reagent segment, 6 positions.
3. Outer reagent segment, 4 positions.
4. Outer reagent segment, 6 positions.
5. Inner reagent segment calibration target.
6. Outer reagent segment calibration target.
Reagent cartridge adapters (c 4000)

Reagent cartridge adapters are positioners used to ensure correct
alignment of the small (55 mL cartridge), 20 mL (cartridge), and 20 mL
(bottle) reagent cartridges placed in reagent supply center inner and
outer carousels.
Reagent cartridge adapters come in two sizes and are configured for
the following reagent cartridges:
• Small reagent cartridge adapter - used with small (55 mL
cartridge) and 20 mL (cartridge) reagent cartridge
• 20 mL reagent cartridge adapter - used with the 20 mL (bottle)
reagent cartridge
NOTE: The 20 mL (bottle) reagent cartridge adapter is placed in

the outer carousel only.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Required accessories Section 1
Figure 1.111: Reagent cartridge adapters (c 4000)
Legend:
1. 20 mL reagent cartridge adapter: Used with bottle (20 mL) reagent
cartridges (outer carousel)
2. Small reagent cartridge adapter: Used with small (55 mL) and (20 mL)
reagent cartridges
Reagent carriers (i 1000SR)

Reagent carriers are racks used on the RSH (robotic sample handler) to
transport reagent kits from the RSH section to the reagent carousel.
The reagent carriers hold up to three reagent bottles. Two reagent
carriers are required for assays that have more than three reagent
bottles.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Figure 1.112: Reagent carrier (i 1000SR)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
System statuses Section 1
System statuses
System status refers to the operational modes of the ARCHITECT
System. Key information displays on the Snapshot screen, providing
an immediate overview of your system.
The processing modules and sample handlers have several status
types. The transition times are approximate and may vary between the
processing module and sample handler.
The following diagram illustrates the progression of statuses from
Offline to Running (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100).
Figure 1.113: Processing module and sample handler status sequence

(c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
*The Scheduled pause status applies to all processing modules, the RSH
(robotic sample handler) and the LAS (laboratory automation system)
carousel sample handler. For the SSH (standard sample handler) this
status is Load queue paused.
System status topics include:
• Sample handler status, page 1-118
• Processing module status, page 1-120
Sample handler status

The sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen indicates the
status of the sample handler. Sample handler status types depend on
your sample handler configuration:
• RSH status types, page 1-119

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Section 1 System statuses
Figure 1.114: An example of a sample handler graphic
RSH status types
The RSH (robotic sample handler) has seven possible status types. The
following table provides a description of each.
Table 1.5: RSH status types
Status Indicates
Offline One of the following exists:
• Power to the sample handler is off.
• Power has been turned on, but communication between the sample handler
and SCC (system control center) has not been re-established.
• Communication between the sample handler and the SCC has been lost due
to a software or system error.
Stopped One of the following exists:
• Power to the sample handler is on, but F5 - Start-up on the Snapshot screen
has not been selected.
• F6 - Stop on the Snapshot screen was selected.
• A sample handler diagnostic procedure has completed.
• The processing center cover was opened while the sample handler was
running (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100).
• Sample handler detected a fatal error while processing.
Ready One of the following exists:
• Startup is complete.
• Scheduled pause status is complete.
Running One of the following exists:
• F8 - Run on the Snapshot screen was selected.
Scheduled pause One of the following exists:
• F7 - Pause on the Snapshot screen was selected.
• All processing modules are unavailable for sample processing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Table 1.5: RSH status types (continued)

Status Indicates
Initializing Either the run key, F8 - Run, or F5 - Start-up was selected. This status is a
temporary status during which the system performs the following initialization
functions:
• Homes all moving parts on the sample handler
• Checks the bar code reader
Once initialization is complete, the status changes to Running or Ready
depending on whether run or startup was selected.
Maintenance A maintenance procedure requiring use of the RSH is in process on a module.
Processing module status

The processing module graphic(s) on the Snapshot screen indicates
the status of the processing module and displays other key system
information.
Figure 1.115: Processing module status
Processing module status types depend on the configuration of your

system. For a description of the various statuses, see:
• Processing module status types (c System), page 1-121
• Processing module status types (i 1000SR), page 1-123

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Processing module status types (c System)
The c System processing modules have eight possible status types. The
See c System processing module status and associated tasks, page 1-122,
for a list of tasks that can be performed in each status.
Table 1.6: c System processing module status types
Status Indicates Prohibited activities
Offline One of the following exists: You cannot run samples on the module.
• Power to the processing module is off.
You cannot load or unload reagents
• Power has been turned on, but because the reagent supply center is
communication between the processing not aligned correctly.
module and SCC (system control
center) has not been re-established.
• Communication between the processing
module and the SCC has been lost due
Stopped One of the following exists: You cannot run samples on the module.
• Power to the processing module is on, You cannot load or unload reagents
but F5 - Start-up on the Snapshot because the reagent supply center is
screen has not been selected. not aligned correctly.
• F6 - Stop on the Snapshot screen was
selected.
• A processing module diagnostic
procedure has completed.
• Processing module detected a fatal
error while processing.
• Startup is complete (including
temperature initialization).
• Scheduled Pause status is complete.
Scheduled pause One of the following exists:
• F7 - Pause on the Snapshot screen was
selected.
• Supplies ran out.
• Processing module detected an error
while processing.
Running One of the following exists: You cannot open the reagent supply
• F8 - Run on the Snapshot screen was center covers.
selected.
• Run key on the processing module
keypad was selected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Table 1.6: c System processing module status types (continued)

Initializing A temporary status that occurs when the You cannot run samples on the module.
run key, F8 - Run, or F5 - Start-up is You cannot load or unload reagents
selected. because the reagent supply center is
The following initialization functions are not aligned correctly.
performed by the system:
• Initialization after F5 - Start-up is
selected:
– Homes motors
– Initializes the reagent bar code
reader
• Initialization after the run key or F8 - Run
is selected:
– Checks cover sensors
– Scans reagents
– Washes probes
– Checks inventory
Once initialization is complete, the status
changes to Running or Ready depending
on whether run or startup was selected.
Scanning A temporary status that occurs when F5 - You cannot run samples on the module.
Scan on the Reagent status screen is
selected. Once the scan is complete, the
status changes to Ready.
Maintenance A maintenance procedure is in process on You cannot run samples on the module.
the module.
Table 1.7: c System processing module status and associated tasks

Scheduled
Offline Stopped Ready Running Initializing
pause
Initiate a run No No Yes Yes* Yes No
Load reagents No No Yes Yes** No No
Load bulk solutions Yes Yes Yes No No No
Load onboard Yes Yes Yes No No No
solutions
Empty waste Yes Yes Yes No No No
Order patient samples in any status.

Order QC and calibrations in the Running status only to ensure the
system calculates the required sample volume.
*In the Running status you do not need to initiate the run when
samples are added.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
**Check the reagent supply center access button to ensure access is

permitted before this task (c 4000).
Processing module status types (i 1000SR)
The i 1000SR processing module has eight possible status types. The
See i 1000SR processing module status types by task, page 1-124 for a list of
tasks that can be performed in each status.
Table 1.8: i 1000SR processing module status types
Offline One of the following exists: You cannot run samples on the module.
• Power to the processing module is off.
You cannot load or unload reagents
• Power has been turned on, but because the reagent carousel is not
communication between the processing aligned correctly.
module and SCC (system control
center) has not been re-established.
• Communication between the processing
module and the SCC has been lost due
Stopped One of the following exists: You cannot run samples on the module.
• Power to the processing module is on You cannot load or unload reagents
but F5 - Start-up on the Snapshot because the reagent carousel is not
screen has not been selected. aligned correctly.
• F6 - Stop on the Snapshot screen was
selected.
• Processing module diagnostic
procedure has completed.
• Processing module detected a fatal
error while processing.
Warming Startup is complete, but temperature You cannot run samples on the module.
initialization is not.
• Startup is complete (including
temperature initialization).
• Scheduled Pause status is complete.
Scheduled One of the following exists: You cannot open the processing center
pause • F7 - Pause on the Snapshot screen was cover.
selected.
• Supplies ran out.
• Processing module detected an error
while processing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Table 1.8: i 1000SR processing module status types (continued)

Running F8 - Run on the Snapshot screen was You cannot open the processing center
selected. cover.
Initializing A temporary status that occurs when F8 - You cannot run samples on the module.
Run, or F5 - Start-up is selected. The You cannot load or unload reagents
following initialization functions are because the reagent carousel is not
performed by the system: aligned correctly.
• Initialization after F5 - Start-up is You cannot load wash buffer.
selected:
– Checks processing center and
reagent carousel cover sensors
– Homes motors
– Clears RVs from the process path
and adds clean RVs to all 23
positions
– Initializes the wash zone mechanism
– Starts microparticle dispersion
• Initialization after F8 - Run is selected:
– Checks processing center and
reagent carousel cover sensors
– Checks presence of solid waste
container
– Homes motors
– Washes probes
– Initializes wash zone mechanism
– Performs a background read
Once initialization is complete, the status
changes to Running or Ready depending
on whether run or startup was selected.
Maintenance A maintenance procedure is in process on You cannot run samples on the module.
the module.
Table 1.9: i 1000SR processing module status types by task

Scheduled
Warming/
Offline Stopped pause/ Initializing Maintenance
Ready
Running
Initiate a run No No Yes* Yes* No No
Raise the processing Yes Yes Yes No No Yes
center cover
Load reagent kits on Yes Yes Yes** Yes** Yes No
RSH

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Table 1.9: i 1000SR processing module status types by task (continued)

Scheduled
Warming/
Offline Stopped pause/ Initializing Maintenance
Ready
Running
Unload reagent kits No No Yes** Yes** No No
from reagent carousel
Load pre-trigger and Yes Yes Yes No No No
trigger
Load wash buffer No Yes Yes Yes No No
Load RVs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Empty waste Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Order patient samples in any status.

Order QC and calibrations in the Running status only to ensure the
system calculates the required sample volume.
*You cannot initiate a run in the Warming or Running status.
**The system loads or unloads reagent carriers when the processing
module status is Warming, Ready, Scheduled Pause or Running and
the RSH status is Running.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Automatic processing module activities Section 1
Automatic processing module activities

Periodically, fluids are pumped through various processing module
components to remove air or bubbles. It is important to ensure that
enough onboard inventory to perform these automatic flushes and
primes is available.
Automatic processing module activity topics include:
• System flush (c System), page 1-126
• System flush (i System), page 1-127
• System prime (i System), page 1-127
• Processing module wash (c System), page 1-128
• Automatic rotation of reagent supply center(s) (c System), page 1-128
System flush (c System)

A system flush is an automated process used to remove bubbles that
may be present. Periodic flushes are performed at the beginning of a
run on all pipettors by pumping purified water through the probes
into the wash cups. The periodic flushes occur:
• When you start up the system after powering on
• Every two hours if the processing module status is Running and
there are no tests in process
NOTE: Performing the 2132 Flush Water Line maintenance

procedure does not reset the clock for the automatic flush.
ICT Reference Solution, Alkaline Wash, and Acid Wash are used to
perform the automatic flushes that occur when you initiate a run after
replacing a bulk solution(s).
Each c 4000 flush requires:
• 2750 μL of reference solution
• 60 μL of alkaline wash solution
• 40 μL of acid wash solution
NOTE: Performing the 2155 Flush Bulk Solution maintenance


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Section 1 Automatic processing module activities
System flush (i System)

A system flush is an automated process used to remove bubbles that
may be present. Periodic flushes are performed on all pipettors by
pumping wash buffer through the pipettor probes into the wash
stations. The wash zones and the pre-trigger/trigger manifold are
flushed by pumping fluid through a bypass valve and into the waste
line.
Wash buffer, Pre-Trigger Solution, and Trigger Solution are used to
perform the automatic flushes that occur:
• When you start up the system after powering on
• Every eight hours when the processing module status is:
– Ready and the processing module covers are closed, or
– Running and no tests are in process
NOTE: Performing the 2137 Flush Fluids (i 1000SR) maintenance

• When you initiate a run after replacing a solution(s)
If the system is idle for an extended period of time, for example over a
weekend (48 hours), you need to ensure there is enough inventory for
all flushes that will take place. Each flush requires:
• 75 mL of wash buffer (i 1000SR)
• 14 mL of pre-trigger
• 14 mL of trigger
In a 48 hour period, for example, there are six flushes. Therefore, the
required inventory is:
• 450 mL of wash buffer (i 1000SR)
• 84 mL of pre-trigger
• 84 mL of trigger
System prime (i System)

A prime is the process the system uses to dispense solutions into RVs
(reaction vessels) to ensure the fluidics system is primed. The system
periodically primes to remove air from the wash zone, pre-trigger, and
trigger delivery nozzles. Priming pumps fluid through the delivery
nozzles and into an RV. The RV is then automatically discarded.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Use or function
Automatic processing module activities Section 1
Prime occurs automatically when you initiate a run.
Processing module wash (c System)

Processing module wash is the process that cleans hardware
components that come into contact with reagents and samples.
The following table describes the wash solutions used for each
hardware component.
Component Wash
Reagents and • Washed with purified water during analysis
sample probes • Additional washes with alkaline, acid, or detergent wash
solutions may be performed if SmartWash is required per
assay setting definition
• Washed with Detergent A automatically at regular
intervals
Cuvette segments • Washed with purified water and alkaline and acid wash
solutions before and after each use
• Additional washes with alkaline, acid, or detergent wash
Mixers • Washed with purified water during analysis
• Additional washes with alkaline, acid, or detergent wash
• Washed with detergent A automatically at regular
intervals
Automatic rotation of reagent supply center(s) (c System)

Automatic rotation of the reagent supply center for the c 4000 is a
programmed rotation used to stabilize the carousel temperature. The
reagent supply center automatically rotates 1 segment every 12
minutes when the cover is closed and the processing module is in
Ready or Running (idle) status.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Installation procedures and special requirements
Section 2
Introduction
<F=0>
To ensure accurate results and maximum performance, your

ARCHITECT System must be properly installed. After the system has
been installed, you must configure it to meet your site's specific
requirements.
Installation procedures and special requirements topics include:
• System installation or relocation, page 2-2
Describes the steps for installing or relocating the system.
• System configuration, page 2-4
Provides a description of all configuration screens and windows,
and step-by-step instructions for performing configuration
procedures.
• Software installation and backup, page 2-169
Provides a description of all software installation and backup
screens and windows, and step-by-step instructions for
performing installation and backup procedures.
• Assay file management, page 2-177
Describes how to install new assay files.
• Maintenance and diagnostic file management, page 2-181
Describes how to install new maintenance and diagnostic
procedure files.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
System installation or relocation Section 2
System installation or relocation

Installation of the ARCHITECT System is a team effort involving
Abbott customer support and the Abbott field service representative.
System installation or relocation topics include:
• System installation, page 2-2
• System checkout, page 2-2
• System relocation, page 2-3
System installation
Prior to installation the Abbott field service representative ensures the
site is prepared.
The location must meet environmental specifications and electrical
requirements before the system can be installed. For additional
information, see Specifications and requirements, page 4-3.
IMPORTANT: The Abbott field service representative unpacks,

positions, and installs the ARCHITECT System, and unpacks the
accessory kits that accompany the system. Do not attempt to unpack
or install the ARCHITECT System.
For additional information on items included in the accessory kit, see
Accessory kit list numbers (c 4000), page Appendix D-4.
For additional information on items included in the accessory kit, see
Accessory kit list number (i System), page Appendix D-7.
During installation, the Abbott field service representative performs
system preparation and checkout.
System checkout
After you position and install the ARCHITECT System, you should
perform the following to ensure that the system operates properly:
• Install or delete an assay file, page 2-177
• Configuring system settings, page 2-6
• Configuring Abbott assays, page 2-41
• Configuring user-defined assays, page 2-54
• Configuring QC - Cal settings, page 2-123
• Order and calibrate assays

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 2 System installation or relocation
• Order and run controls

• Perform testing specific to your site requirements
System relocation
For information on relocating your ARCHITECT System, contact your
Abbott field service representative.
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Before the system can
be moved or shipped, decontamination is required. For
more information, see Decontamination procedure
requirements, page 8-14.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
System configuration Section 2
System configuration
Configuration settings define the information the ARCHITECT System
needs to meet your site's specific requirements. You perform system
configuration at installation and may reconfigure the system at any
time, if necessary.
You access windows to configure system, assay, and QC - Cal settings
from the Configuration screen. Access to these windows is controlled
by logon. The system administrator logon allows you to access
configuration windows to change most configurable items. The
general operator logon allows you to:
• View configured settings
• Configure host-release mode options
For more information on logons, see User logon, page 1-21.
System configuration topics include:
• Configuration screen - Assay settings view, page 2-36
• Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view, page 2-121
Configuration screen - System settings view

From the System settings view of the Configuration screen the general
operator can access windows to view detailed information for
configured system settings.
The system administrator can access windows to configure these
settings, which include:
• Sample ordering
• Host - Release mode
• Reports - Printing
• Reagents - Supplies
• Password
• System control center
• Modules
• Sample handler
• Sample bar code reader
• Serial ports

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 2 System configuration
Figure 2.1: Configuration screen - System settings view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configuration screen - System settings

view field descriptions, page Appendix E-132.
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Configuration screen -
System settings view, page 2-5.
• Viewing system settings, page 2-9
• Changing system settings, page 2-10
Access the Configuration screen - System settings view
Perform this procedure to display the System settings view of the

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Configuration screen - System settings view:

Select System from the menu bar, and then select Configuration.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
The Configuration screen - System settings view displays.
Procedures - Configuration screen - System settings view
Procedures you can perform from the Configuration screen - System

settings view and its related windows are grouped by task:
• Viewing system settings, page 2-9
• Changing system settings, page 2-10
Configuring system settings
Procedures for configuring system settings include:

• Configure host interface settings, page 2-6
• Configure report settings, page 2-7
• Configure a QC run definition, page 2-9
Configure host interface settings
Perform this procedure to configure the host interface settings for

release mode, communications, and transmitting results to the host.
page 2-5
Module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready (Exceptions are noted)
Supplies NA
To configure host interface settings:

1. Select Host - Release mode from the System categories list on
the Configuration screen.
The Configure host-release mode window displays.
3. Select the desired Bidirectional host option.
NOTE: You can configure this value in any system status.

Turning Bidirectional host off allows you to clear all results
waiting to be sent to the host.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
4. Enter the timeout interval (in seconds) in the Host query

timeout data entry box. (optional)
NOTE: You can configure this value in any system status. System
throughput may be degraded if the time interval is greater than
10 seconds.
5. Select the desired Error code number and text option.
6. Select the desired Transmission code page option.
7. Select the desired Release and Transmit options for patient and
QC results.

To view the current settings, see Viewing system settings, page 2-9.
• Configure host - release mode window, page 2-26
Configure report settings
Perform this procedure to configure the settings for printing flags on

reports and automatic report printing, and to specify the text to print
in the report header for the Sample Report and Patient Report.
page 2-5
Module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Supplies NA
To configure report settings:

1. Select Reports - Printing from the System categories list on the
The Configure reports-printing window displays.
3. Select the Off option for the Print flags on reports setting.
(optional)
NOTE: The CNTL (control), EXP (expired), EXPC (expired

calibration curve) (c System only), and EDIT (c System only) flags
print on the sample and patient reports whether the feature is
turned on or off.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
4. Select the On option for the following automatic report printing

settings:
– Maintenance - A Procedure report prints after a maintenance
procedure completes, if a report is available. (optional)
– Sample - The Sample Report prints after all tests for a sample
complete and the results are released. (optional)
– Sample laboratory - The Sample Laboratory Report prints
after all tests for a sample complete and the results are
released. (optional)
– Results list - The Results List Report prints after 24 results
complete and are released or 10 minutes have elapsed.
(optional)
– Calibration curve results - A Cal Curve Detail report prints
after a calibration completes. (optional)
5. Enter the desired report header information in the Header for

sample and patient reports data entry boxes. (optional)

• Configure reports printing window, page 2-27
• Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System), page Appendix
A-20
• Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System), page Appendix A-23
• Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System),
page Appendix A-26
• Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System), page Appendix A-29
• Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System), page Appendix A-32
• Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System), page Appendix A-35
• Patient Report, page Appendix A-56
• Procedure Report, Basic, page Appendix A-58
• Procedure Report, Columnar, page Appendix A-60
• Results List Report, page Appendix A-85
• Sample Laboratory Report, page Appendix A-89
• Sample Report, page Appendix A-87

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Configure a QC run definition
Perform this procedure to define a run period for the evaluation of

Westgard rules. The run definition should be configured when you
enable Westgard rules 2-2s 1R 1M, 2-2s 1R xM, 2-2s xR 1M, 4-1s 1M, or
4-1s xM.
To configure Westgard rules, see Configure a Westgard rule, page 2-131.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To configure a QC run definition:

1. Select System control center from the System categories list on
The Configure system control center window displays.
3. Enter the start time in the QC run definition Start time data
entry box.
4. Enter the number of hours per run in the QC run definition No.
of hours per run data entry box.

• Configure system control center window, page 2-30
Viewing system settings
From the System settings view of the Configuration screen the general
configured system settings.
The general operator logon allows you to view:
• Sample ordering

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Modules
• Sample handler
• Serial ports
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Configuration screen - System settings details view:

1. Select the desired category from the System categories list.
2. Select F5 - Details.
The Details window displays.
3. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
Changing system settings
Procedures for changing system settings include:

• Change the batch sample ordering type, page 2-11
• Change the automatic report printing settings, page 2-11
• Change the option for printing flags, page 2-13
• Change the report header text, page 2-13
• Change the system low alert setting for reagent kits, page 2-14
• Change the system language setting, page 2-15
• Change the screen timeout setting, page 2-16
• Change the date and time settings, page 2-17
• Change liquid waste container settings (i 1000SR), page 2-18
• Change automatic repositioning for retest setting (RSH), page 2-18
• Change the number of priority sections on the RSH
(c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 2-19
• Change the sample bar code settings for codabar, page 2-20
• Change the sample bar code settings for code 39, page 2-20

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-21

• Change the LIS serial port settings, page 2-22
• Change the onboard solution options (c 4000), page 2-23
• Change the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits,
page 2-24
Change the batch sample ordering type
Perform this procedure to change the batch sample ordering type for
bar coded or non-bar coded samples. The batch ordering type
determines the fields that display on the Patient order screen - Batch
view.
page 2-5
No batch orders pending
Supplies NA
To change the batch sample ordering type:

1. Select F6 - Configure on the Configuration screen.
The Configure sample ordering window displays.
2. Select the desired Batch ordering option.

• Configure sample ordering window, page 2-25
Change the automatic report printing settings
Perform this procedure to enable or disable automatic printing of the

Procedure, Sample, Sample Laboratory, Results List, and Cal Curve
Details reports.
page 2-5
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To change the automatic report printing settings:

The Configure reports printing window displays.
3. Select the desired Automatic report printing option(s) for:

– Maintenance - A Procedure report prints after a maintenance
procedure completes, if a report is available.
– Sample - The Sample Report prints after all tests for a sample
complete and the results are released.
– Sample laboratory - The Sample Laboratory Report prints
after all tests for a sample complete and the results are
released.
– Results list - The Results List Report prints after 24 results
complete and are released or 10 minutes have elapsed.
– Calibration curve results - A Cal Curve Detail report prints
after a calibration completes.

A-20
page Appendix A-26

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Change the option for printing flags
Perform this procedure to enable or disable the printing of flags on the

Sample and Patient reports.
NOTE: The CNTL (control), EXP (expired), EXPC (expired calibration

curve) (c System only), and EDIT (c System only) flags print on the
sample and patient reports whether the feature is turned on or off.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the options for printing flags:

3. Select the desired Print flags on reports option.

Change the report header text
Perform this procedure to change the text that displays in the report
header on the Sample and Patient reports.
page 2-5
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To change the report header text:

3. Enter the desired report header information in the Header for

sample and patient reports data entry boxes.
NOTE: Each field on the screen represents one line of the report
header (approximately 50 characters per line).

Change the system low alert setting for reagent kits
Perform this procedure to change the level at which the system low
alert notification occurs.
To change the level at which the low alert notification occurs for a
specific reagent, see Change the reagent-specific low alert setting (c
System), page 2-82.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the system low alert setting for reagent kits:

1. Select Reagents - Supplies from the System categories list on
The Configure reagents - supplies window displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3. Enter the desired alert level (number of tests left) in the Default
reagent low alert data entry box.

• Configure reagents - supplies window (ci 4100), page 2-28
Change the system language setting
Perform this procedure to change the language for the system.
NOTE: Messages in the Temporary message and Message history logs

remain in the language in which they were generated. If you change
the system language to or from Japanese, previously generated
messages may display for some characters.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the system language setting:

3. Select the System language list button, and then select the
desired language.
4. Select Done.
A prompt displays to notify you that the SCC will shut down
and restart to change the language.
5. Select OK to shut down the SCC.
6. Wait for the SCC to cycle through shutdown.
7. Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: If your system is configured with the bar code scanner,

you must modify the keyboard language to match the system
language. See the ARCHITECT Bar Code Scanner User's Guide or
the ARCHITECT and AxSYM Bar Code Scanner User's Guide for
instructions.
Change the screen timeout setting
Perform this procedure to change the setting for the screen timeout.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the screen timeout setting:

3. Enter the desired screen timeout in the Screen timeout data

entry box.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Change the date and time settings
Perform this procedure to change the date and time settings.

page 2-5
Remove reagents
Supplies NA
To change the date and time settings:

3. Enter the date using the current format in the System date data
entry box.
4. Enter the time in the System time data entry box.

The system time displays in a 24-hour format.
5. Select the desired Date format option.
NOTE: When you edit this field, the new format does not
display in the System date field until you select Done and access
the window again.
6. Select the Time zone list button, and then select the desired
time zone.
7. Select the Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings

check box. (optional)


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Change liquid waste container settings (i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure to change the liquid waste container settings

when you want to use an external floor drain instead of the liquid
waste container.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To configure liquid waste container settings (i 1000SR):

1. Select Modules from the System categories list on the
The Configure modules window displays.
3. Select the desired Liquid waste container option.

• Configure modules window (i 1000SR), page 2-32
Change automatic repositioning for retest setting (RSH)
Perform this procedure to change the settings that determine whether

the RSH (robotic sample handler) automatically repositions patient
samples for retest.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change automatic repositioning for retest setting:

1. Select Sample handler from the System categories list on the

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
The Configure sample handler window displays.
3. Select the desired Retest option.

• Configure sample handler window (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100),
page 2-33
Change the number of priority sections on the RSH

(c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
Perform this procedure to change the number of priority sections to be

used on the RSH (robotic sample handler) when the default setting for
the number of priority sections does not reflect your laboratory
requirements.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To configure the number of priority sections on the RSH

(c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100):
1. Select Sample handler from the System categories list on the
The Configure sample handler window displays.
3. Enter the desired Number of priority sections.

page 2-33

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Change the sample bar code settings for codabar
Perform this procedure to change the sample bar code settings for
codabar.
To change bar code settings for code 39, see Change the sample bar code
settings for code 39, page 2-20.
To change bar code settings for I 2 of 5, see Change the sample bar code
settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-21.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the sample bar code settings for codabar:

1. Select Sample bar code reader from the System categories list
on the Configuration screen.
The Configure bar codes window displays.
3. Select the Bar code type list button, and then select Codabar.
4. Select the desired Bar code type option to either enable or

disable the bar code type.
5. Select the desired Checksums option.
6. Select the Send checksum digits to the SCC check box, if you
enabled Checksums. (optional)
7. Select the Send the start / stop characters to the SCC check
box, if you enabled Checksums. (optional)

• Configure bar codes window, page 2-34
Change the sample bar code settings for code 39
Perform this procedure to change the sample bar code settings for
code 39.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To change bar code settings for I 2 of 5, see Change the sample bar code
settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-21.
To change bar code settings for codabar, see Change the sample bar code
settings for codabar, page 2-20.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the sample bar code settings for code 39:



Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5
Perform this procedure to change the sample bar code settings for I 2
of 5.
To change bar code settings for code 39, Change the sample bar code
settings for code 39, page 2-20.
To change bar code settings for codabar, see Change the sample bar code
settings for codabar, page 2-20.
page 2-5

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Supplies NA
To change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5:

3. Select the Bar code type list button, and then select I 2 of 5.

7. Enter a value in the Code length #1 data entry box.
8. Enter a value in the Code length #2 data entry box. (optional)

Change the LIS serial port settings
Perform this procedure to change the LIS (laboratory information

system) serial port settings.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the LIS serial port settings:

1. Select Serial ports from the System categories list on the

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
The Configure serial ports window displays.
3. Select the Port type list button, and then select LIS.
4. Select the Baud rate list button, and then select the desired
value.
5. Select the desired Parity option.
6. Select the desired Data bits option.
7. Select the desired Stop bits option.
8. Select Done.
A confirmation message displays.
9. Select OK to save your changes.

The serial port changes take effect the next time the system
control center power is cycled.
To cycle power to the system control center, see Cycle power to the SCC,
page 5-5.
• Configure serial ports window, page 2-35
Change the onboard solution options (c 4000)
Perform this procedure to change the segment, position, and cartridge

size for onboard solutions located in the reagent carousel.
page 2-5
Module status Stopped or Ready
Supplies NA
To change the onboard solution options:

1. Select Reagents - Supplies from the System categories list on
The Configure reagents - supplies window displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3. Select the desired onboard solution segment list button, and

then select the segment.
4. Select the desired onboard solution position list button, and

then select the position.
5. Select the desired onboard solution size list button, and then
select the cartridge size.

Change the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits
Perform this procedure to change the option for running controls for
onboard reagents.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To change the option for running controls for onboard reagents:

1. Select Reagents-Supplies from the System categories list on the
The Configure reagents-supplies window displays.
3. Select the desired Run controls for onboard reagents by option

for:
– Lot: Run QC on only one kit per lot
– Kit: Run QC for every kit in a lot
NOTE: Controls for constituents of calculated assays are

automatically run on one kit on one module (selected by the
system software) regardless of the option selected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Windows - Configuration screen - System settings view
Windows you can access from the Configuration screen - System

settings view include:
• Configure sample ordering window, page 2-25
• Configure password window, page 2-29
• Configure modules window (c 4000), page 2-31
• Configure modules window (i 1000SR), page 2-32
page 2-33
• Configure serial ports window, page 2-35
Configure sample ordering window
From the Configure sample ordering window the system administrator

can configure settings for batch ordering, calibration override (c
System), and average tests per sample (multi-module i System).
NOTE: From the Details window you can view the current settings.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.2: Configure sample ordering window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure sample ordering window

field descriptions, page Appendix E-133.
Configure host - release mode window
From the Configure host - release mode window the system

administrator can configure the settings for release mode,
communication type, and result reporting to a host computer.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.3: Configure host - release mode window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure host - release mode window
• Configure host interface settings, page 2-6
• Cancel result transmission, page 5-230
Configure reports printing window
From the Configure reports printing window the system administrator

can configure the settings for printing flags on reports, automatic
report printing, and specify the text to print in the report header.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.4: Configure reports printing window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure reports printing window

• Configure report settings, page 2-7
• Change the option for printing flags, page 2-13
• Change the automatic report printing settings, page 2-11
• Change the report header text, page 2-13
Configure reagents - supplies window (ci 4100)
From the Configure reagents - supplies window (ci 4100) the system
administrator can configure the settings for:
• Reagent options
– Default reagent low alert
– Reagent expiration and stability override
– Run controls by reagent lot or reagent kit
• Supply options
– Wash and detergent solutions location and cartridge size
(c 4000)
– Pre-Trigger and Trigger stability override (i 1000SR)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.5: Configure reagents - supplies window (ci 4100)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure reagents - supplies window

(ci 4100) field descriptions, page Appendix E-137.
• Change the system low alert setting for reagent kits, page 2-14
• Change the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits,
page 2-24
• Change the onboard solution options (c 4000), page 2-23
Configure password window
From the Configure password window the system administrator can

configure the system administrator password.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.6: Configure password window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure password window field

descriptions, page Appendix E-139.
Configure system control center window
From the Configure system control center window the system

administrator can configure the settings for the SCC (system control
center), which include:
• System date, date format, time, time zone, and automatic
adjustment for daylight savings time
• Number format for thousands separator
• System language
• Unicode input
• Screen timeout
• QC run definition
• Beep volume

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.7: Configure system control center window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure system control center

window field descriptions, page Appendix E-140.
• Change the date and time settings, page 2-17
• Change the system language setting, page 2-15
• Configure a QC run definition, page 2-9
• Change the screen timeout setting, page 2-16
Configure modules window (c 4000)
From the Configure modules window (c 4000) the system

administrator can:
• Enable / disable the sample saving mode
• Configure the module to run with an ICT module
• Configure the module to run with the high concentration waste
bottle

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.8: Configure modules window (c 4000)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure modules window (c 4000)

• Enable or disable the ICT module (c System), page 10-689
Configure modules window (i 1000SR)
From the Configure modules window, the system administrator can:

• Enter the optics normalization and linearity values
• Change the liquid waste container option

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.9: Configure modules window (i 1000SR)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure modules window (i 1000SR)

Configure sample handler window (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci

4100)
From the configure sample handler window, the system administrator

can:
• Enable or disable the sample handler to automatically reposition
samples for retest
• Change the number of priority sections

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.10: Configure sample handler window (RSH -

c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure sample handler window

(RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100) field descriptions, page Appendix E-143.
Configure bar codes window
From the Configure bar codes window the system administrator can
enable or disable bar code types and, depending on the type, can
configure:
• Checksums
• Send checksum digits to the SCC (system control center)
• Send the start / stop characters to the SCC
• Code length #1
• Code length #2

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.11: Configure bar codes window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure bar codes window field
• Change the sample bar code settings for codabar, page 2-20
• Change the sample bar code settings for code 39, page 2-20
• Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-21
Configure serial ports window
From the Configure serial ports window the system administrator can
configure communication settings for the serial ports.
Figure 2.12: Configure serial ports window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure serial ports window field

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Change the LIS serial port settings, page 2-22
Configuration screen - Assay settings view

From the Assay settings view of the Configuration screen you can
configure settings associated with assays. The display of this view is
dependent on your selection from the Assay categories list:
• Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view,
page 2-36
• Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view, page 2-38
• Import assay window, page 2-40
• Export assay window, page 2-41
Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view
From the Assay settings - Assay parameters view of the Configuration

screen the general operator can access windows to view detailed
information for configured assay settings.
• Assay parameters
• CC reagent settings
• New assay
• Result units
• Panel definitions
• Retest rules

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.13: Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters

view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configuration screen - Assay settings -

Assay parameters view field descriptions, page Appendix E-148.
Assay settings - Assay parameters view, page 2-37.
• Changing assay configuration settings, page 2-68
• Change the result units setting, page 2-87
• Printing assay parameter reports, page 2-91
Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay

parameters view
Perform this procedure to display the Assay settings - Assay parameters

view of the Configuration screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Supplies NA
To access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay Parameters

view:
1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select
Configuration.
2. Select the Assay settings option.

The Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay Parameters
view displays.
page 2-36
Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view
From the Assay settings - New assay view of the Configuration screen
the system administrator can select an assay file type and access
windows to configure. Assay file types include calculated and
photometric.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.14: Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configuration screen - Assay settings -

New assay view field descriptions, page Appendix E-148.
Assay settings - New assay view, page 2-39.
• Configure a photometric assay (c System), page 2-59
• Configure a calculated assay, page 2-55
Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay

view
Perform this procedure to display the Assay settings - New assay view
of the Configuration screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view:

Configuration.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2. Select the Assay settings option.

The Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters
view displays.
3. Select New assay from the Assay categories list.

The Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view
displays.
Import assay window
From the Assay settings view of the Configuration screen the system
administrator can import an assay file from another ARCHITECT c
System.
Figure 2.15: Import assay window
For descriptions of these fields, see Import assay window field

• Import an assay file (c System), page 2-178

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Export assay window
From the Assay settings view of the Configuration screen you can
export an assay file to another ARCHITECT c System.
Figure 2.16: Export assay window
For descriptions of these fields, see Export assay window field

• Export an assay file (c System), page 2-180
Procedures - Configuration screen - Assay settings view
Procedures you can perform from the Configuration screen - Assay

• Viewing assay settings, page 2-67
• Changing assay configuration settings, page 2-68
Configuring Abbott assays
Procedures for configuring Abbott assay settings include:

• Configure normal and extreme ranges, page 2-42

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Configure patient and QC panels, page 2-43

• Configure a retest rule, page 2-44
• Configure result units and decimal places, page 2-47
• Configure the default dilution setting (photometric - c System),
page 2-48
• Configure a calibration adjustment type and interval (photometric - c
System), page 2-48
• Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated), page 2-50
• Configure the default dilution setting (i System), page 2-53
• Configure the option for running calibrations by kit (c System),
page 2-53
Configure normal and extreme ranges
Perform this procedure to configure normal and extreme result ranges

for an assay.
NOTE: Ranges are evaluated in the order defined.

Prerequisite Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings -
Assay parameters view, page 2-37
Supplies NA
To configure normal and extreme ranges:

1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list on the
Configuration screen, and then select F6 - Configure.
The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays.
The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected.
2. Select the Results option.

The Configure assay parameters window - Results view displays.
3. Select Add.
The Configure results parameters window displays.
4. Select the desired Gender option.
5. Select the Age list button, and then select the desired age format.
NOTE: If you do not enter an age when creating a patient order,

the age is assumed to be 0.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6. Enter a value in the Minimum and Maximum data entry boxes.
7. Enter a value in the Normal range data entry boxes.
8. Enter a value in the Extreme range data entry boxes. (optional)
9. Select Done to return to the Results view of the Configure assay

parameters window.
Your values display in the Gender and age specific ranges table.
10. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you

selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 through 9 for
each. (optional)

To view the current settings, see Viewing assay settings, page 2-67.
page 2-36
• Configure assay parameters window - Results view, page 2-111
• Configure results parameters window, page 2-112
Configure patient and QC panels
Perform this procedure to create a panel(s) that may be used when

ordering patient or control samples.
Supplies NA
To configure patient and QC panels:

1. Select Panel definitions from the Assay categories list on the
The Configure panel definitions window displays.
3. Enter a unique name (maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters)

in the New panel name data entry box.
4. Select the desired Panel type check box(es).
5. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6. Select Add to create the panel.

The panel name displays in the Panels list.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to add another panel. (optional)

page 2-36
• Configure panel definitions window, page 2-117
Configure a retest rule
Perform this procedure to configure a retest rule(s), which provides

automatic patient sample reordering for those samples that meet
specified retest rules on an assay-by-assay basis.
IMPORTANT: If you configure a calculated assay as your retest assay

the system will use existing valid constituent results to perform the
calculation.
Supplies NA
To configure a retest rule:

1. Select Retest rules from the Assay categories list on the
2. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6
- Configure.
The Configure assay retest rules window displays.
3. Select Add rule.

The Add / edit assay retest rules window displays.
4. Enter a name in the Rule name data entry box.
5. Enter the number of replicates in the Replicates data entry box.
NOTE: The system runs the number of replicates entered for all
retest assays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6. Select the desired Retest indicator option to determine the

retest criteria, result range, or error code.
NOTE: If you selected the error code option and one of the
following error codes occurs, the assay is retested.
• 1005 - Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside
the specification of the lowest calibrator.
• 1007 - Unable to process test, activated read failure.
• 1008 - Unable to process test, final read failure.
• 1051 - Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeded
optical limits.
• 1053 - Unable to calculate result, rate reaction linearity
failure.
• 1054 - Unable to calculate result, Reaction check failure.
• 1232 - Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside
the specification of the highest calibrator.
• 1250 - Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeds highest
calibrator.
• 1350 - Unable to calculate result, no absorbance reads within
absorbance range.
• 1351 - Unable to calculate result, insufficient absorbance
reads within absorbance range.
7. Enter a value(s) in the Result range data entry box(es), if

displayed.
– To automatically retest all samples when the original results
are within a specific range, enter values in both data entry
boxes.
are less than or equal to a specific value, leave the first data
entry box blank and enter the value in the second data entry
box.
are greater than or equal to a specific value, enter the value
in the first data entry box and leave the second data entry
box blank.
8. Select Select assay. (optional)

The Select assay window displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
a. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list.
b. Deselect the original assay if you do not want to include it as

a retest assay. (optional)
c. Select Done to return to the Add / edit assay retest rules

window.
The selected assay(s) displays in the Selected retest assays
list.
9. Select the desired Original dilution option for the original assay.
(optional)
10. Select a retest assay from the Selected retest assays list.
(optional)
11. Select the desired Retest dilution option. (optional)
12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for each retest assay.
13. Select Done to return to the Configure assay retest rules window.
The retest rule displays.
14. Repeat steps 3 through 13 to configure additional rules for this

assay. (optional)

each. (optional)

page 2-36
• Configure assay retest rules window, page 2-118
• Add / edit assay retest rules window, page 2-119
• Select assay window, page 2-120

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Configure result units and decimal places
Perform this procedure to configure alternate result units and decimal

places for an assay.
Supplies NA
To configure result units and decimal places:

1. Select Result units from the Assay categories list on the
- Configure.
The Configure result units window displays.
3. Enter the result units by performing one of the following:

– Select the Result units list button, and then select the
desired unit (i System assays).
– Enter the unit in the Results units data entry box (c System
assays).
4. Enter the desired value in the Decimal places data entry box.

selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 and 4 for each.
(optional)

page 2-36
• Configure result units window, page 2-116

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Configure the default dilution setting (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to configure the dilution option to use if a

dilution is not specified when a test is ordered.
Supplies NA
To configure the default dilution setting:

- Configure.
The Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction
definition view displays.
2. Select the Reagent / Sample option.

The Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent /
Sample view displays.
3. Select the Default dilution option.

selected more than one, and then select a default dilution for
each. (optional)

page 2-36
• Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view
(photometric - c System), page 2-97
Configure a calibration adjustment type and interval (photometric - c

System)
Perform this procedure to define the adjustment type and level of a

full calibration curve. You can configure the calibration adjustment to
occur at scheduled intervals or to be ordered at non-scheduled
intervals.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: If you modify the calibration adjustment type and/or interval

for an assay an asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate
the assay was modified.
If you configure a factor calibration method, you cannot configure
adjustment settings.
To specify an adjustment when ordering, see Create a calibration order,
page 6-12.
Supplies NA
To Configure a calibration adjustment type and interval:

- Configure.
2. Select the Calibration option.

The Configure assay parameters window - Calibration-
Calibrators view displays.
3. Select the Intervals option.

The Configure assay parameters window - Calibration- Intervals
view displays.
4. Select the Adjust type list button, and then select an adjustment
type.
NOTE: If you select the 1-point or 2-point adjustment type, you

must also configure the Adjust level setting.
5. Select the Adjust level list button, if available, and then select
the calibrator level to use for adjustment. (optional)
6. Enter the expiration interval for the adjustment calibration in

the Adjust interval data entry box. (optional)
7. Select the Default ordering type list button, and then select the
desired default ordering type.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

selected more than one, and then repeat steps 4 - 7 for each.
(optional)

page 2-36
• Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view
Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated)
Perform this procedure to include the interpretation with the test

result and to determine whether results are held for review.
Supplies NA
To configure interpretation options:

- Configure.
2. Select the Interpretation option.

The Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view
displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3. Select the Name list button, and then select the desired name for
the interpretation.
NOTE: If the desired name is not listed, select User defined and
enter the name.
4. Repeat step 3 to select another interpretation name.
5. Enter a value(s) in the Range data entry box(es).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: The first Range data entry must be the low-linearity

value. The last Range data entry must be the high-linearity
value.
6. Select the Results review required check box(es) for the desired
interpretation(s). (optional)

each. (optional)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
page 2-36
• Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view, page 2-113
Configure the default dilution setting (i System)
Perform this procedure to configure the dilution option to use if a

dilution is not specified when you order a test.
Supplies NA
To configure the default dilution setting:

- Configure.
2. Select the Dilution option.
3. Select the desired Default dilution option.

each. (optional)

page 2-36
• Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System),
page 2-93
Configure the option for running calibrations by kit (c System)
Perform this procedure to configure the option for running

calibrations on all reagent kits onboard the system for a specified

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
reagent. This option is only available for photometric assays installed

with an Abbott assay disk.
When this option is configured the following will occur for the
reagent selected:
• All calibration data is deleted.
• Active calibration curve statuses change to Inactive.
• The assay number is marked with an asterisk to indicate it has
been modified.
Supplies NA
To configure the option for running calibrations by kit:

1. Select CC reagent settings from the Assays categories list on
2. Select the desired reagent from the Reagents list, and then select
F6 - Configure.
The Configure reagent window displays.
3. Select the desired Run calibrations for reagents by Kit option.
4. Select Done.
A prompt displays to notify you that all calibration data will be
deleted, all Active calibration curves will become Inactive, and
the assay file will be marked as modified.

To recalibrate the assay see Create a calibration order, page 6-12.
To view the current settings see Viewing assay settings, page 2-67.
page 2-36
• Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view,
page 2-114
Configuring user-defined assays
Procedures for configuring user-defined assays include:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Configure a calculated assay
Perform this procedure to create an assay with a mathematical formula

for deriving a calculated (ratio) result.
To edit a user-defined calculated assay see Change a calculated assay,
page 2-89.
Prerequisite Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - New
assay view, page 2-39
Supplies NA
To configure a calculated assay:

The Configure assay parameters window - General view
(calculated) displays.
2. Enter the desired name in the Assay data entry box.
3. Enter the desired assay number in the Number data entry box.
NOTE: The next available assay number displays in the number

field, but may be edited. The user-defined assay number range is
2000-2999.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
A calculated assay installed from an assay disk has an assay

number ranging from 3000-3099 which cannot be edited.
4. Select the Assay availability list button, and then select the
desired option.
5. Select Select assays.

a. Select the assay(s) to be included in the formula from the
Assays list. The assays are assigned to calculator buttons in
the order you select them.
For example: For an LDL calculation you would select
Cholesterol, HDL, and Triglyceride.
b. Select Done to return to the Configure assay parameters
window - General view (calculated).
The selected assay(s) display in the Selected assays area and
the appropriate ASSAY buttons display above the calculator
keypad.
6. Enter the formula for the calculation by selecting the desired

constituent assay(s) and calculator buttons.
NOTE: You must include all of the selected constituent assay(s)

in the formula.
For example: To enter the formula for an LDL calculation
Cholesterol - HDL - (Triglyceride /5), you would perform the
following steps:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
a. Select the ASSAY1 (cholesterol) button , and then select

the minus button .
b. Select the ASSAY2 (HDL) button , and then select the

minus button .
c. Select the open parenthesis button , and then select the

ASSAY3 (Triglyceride) button .
d. Select the divide button , then select 5, and then select

the close parenthesis button .
The formula for the calculation displays in the Formula data
entry box.
7. Enter a result range for the assay(s) in the Minimum and

Maximum value data entry box(es).
NOTE: If the constituent test result(s) is outside the defined

range, the calculated test becomes an exception and a result is
not reported.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
8. Select the Results option to configure ranges.

See Configure normal and extreme ranges, page 2-42.
9. Select the Interpretation option to configure interpretations.

See Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated),
page 2-50.
10. Select Done to create the calculated assay and return to the
The calculated assay displays in the Assays list.
To configure result units and decimal places for the calculated assay,
see Configure result units and decimal places, page 2-47.
• Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated),
page 2-94

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Configure a photometric assay (c System)
Use the following order to configure c System photometric

user-defined assays.
Table 2.1: Configuring c System photometric assays
Procedure Description
Configure a new calibrator set (c Perform this procedure if a calibrator
System), page 2-132 set is not defined for the assay.
Configure a user-defined reagent Perform this procedure to define the
(photometric - c System), page 2-65 reagent and to link to the procedure to
define the reagent kit if the assay uses
non-bar coded reagents.
Configure a user-defined sample Perform this procedure if the assay
diluent (photometric - c System), uses a non-bar coded sample diluent
page 2-64 not previously configured.
Configure a photometric assay, Perform this procedure to configure the
page 2-60 assay parameters. If you followed the
recommended order your calibrator,
reagent, and sample diluent (if
required) information is available.
Change photometric assay calibrator Perform this procedure to configure the
settings (c System), page 2-147 calibrator concentrations for a
user-defined assay.
Configure result units and decimal Perform this procedure to configure
places, page 2-47 result units and number of decimal
places desired.
The following procedures are optional once the photometric assay is

configured.
Table 2.2: Configuring optional items for photometric assays
Procedure Description
Configure patient and QC panels, Perform this procedure to create a
page 2-43 panel(s) to use when ordering patient
or control samples.
Configure a retest rule, page 2-44 Perform this procedure to configure a
retest rule(s) to provide automatic
patient sample reordering for those
samples that meet specified retest
rules on an assay-by-assay basis.
Prepare reagent bar code labels. See 1D reagent bar code label data
format, page 4-25

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Configure a photometric assay
Perform this procedure to configure the assay parameters.

Prerequisite See table above, Configuring c System photometric
assays, page 2-59.
Supplies NA
To configure a photometric assay:

1. Select the Photometric option on the Configuration screen, and
then select F6 - Configure.
The Configure assay parameters - General - Reaction definition
view displays.
2. Configure the settings for the General option.

a. Enter the desired name in the Assay data entry box.
b. Enter the desired assay number in the Number data entry

box.
NOTE: The next available assay number displays in the number

field, but may be edited. The user-defined assay number range is
2000-2999.
c. Select the Assay availability list button, and then select the
desired availability option.
d. Configure the settings for the Reaction definition, Reagent

/ Sample, and Validity checks options.
3. Configure the settings for the Calibration option.

a. Select the Calibration option.
The Configure assay parameters - Calibration - Calibrators
view displays.
b. Select the Calibration method list button, and then select
the desired method.
c. Configure the settings for the Calibrators, Volumes,

Intervals, and Validity checks options.
4. Select the SmartWash option to configure washes. (optional)

See Configure the SmartWash settings (c System), page 2-62.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


(optional)
page 2-50.
7. Select Done to create the photometric assay.

The assay now displays in the Assays list.
8. Enter calibrator concentrations for the calibrator set configured

in step 3c. See Change photometric assay calibrator settings (c
System), page 2-147.
NOTE: To enable this assay, calibrator concentrations must first

be entered for every level of the calibrator set.
To save your configuration information to an alternative location, see
Create a system software backup, page 2-175.
To save assay files to a floppy disk, see Export an assay file (c System),
page 2-180.
To configure result units and decimal places for the photometric assay,
For additional information see the ARCHITECT c System Assay
Application Guide.
• Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition
view (photometric - c System), page 2-96
• Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view
• Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view
• Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks
Configure the SmartWash settings (c System)
Perform this procedure to configure SmartWash settings. The

SmartWash feature provides an additional wash for the reagent probes,
sample probe, and cuvette to prevent assay-to-assay interference.
NOTE: Do not configure more than one wash type for each
component. Only one wash solution configured for each component
is used by the system.
SmartWash protocols are performed in the order configured. Reagent
probe protocols using the All option should be configured last.
Supplies NA
To configure the SmartWash settings:

- Configure.
2. Select the SmartWash option.

The Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view
displays.
3. Select Add.
The Add / edit SmartWash - Rgt 1 probe view displays.
4. Configure the settings for the Rgt 1 probe options. (optional)

a. Select the desired reagent(s) from the Reagents list.
b. Select the Wash list button, and then select the desired wash
type.
c. Enter the volume (20 - 345 μL) of the wash type in the
Volume data entry box.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
d. Enter the number of replicates in the Replicates data entry

box.
5. Select the Rgt 2 probe option, and then repeat steps 4a through
4d. (optional)
6. Configure settings for the Sample probe options. (optional)

a. Select the Sample probe option.
The Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view
displays.
b. Select the Wash list button, and then select the desired wash
type.
c. Select the desired Sample wash protocol option.
7. Configure the settings for the Cuvette options. (optional)

a. Select the Cuvette option.
The Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view displays.
b. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list.
c. Select the Wash list button, and then select the desired wash
type.
8. Select Done.

The Configure assay parameters window displays.

each. (optional)
11. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen - Assay

settings view.
page 2-36
• Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System),
page 2-108
• Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System),
page 2-109

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System),

page 2-110
• Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System), page 2-111
Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to configure an onboard sample diluent.

Supplies NA
To configure a user-defined sample diluent:

1. Select CC Reagent settings from the Assay categories list on the
2. Select NEW from the Reagents list, and then select F6 -

Configure.
The Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window displays.
3. Enter a unique name for the sample diluent (maximum of 7

alphanumeric characters) in the Reagent name data entry box.
4. Select the Reagent type list button, and then select Sample
diluent.
5. Enter a value in the Reagent low alert data entry box. (optional)

page 2-36
• Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay
view, page 2-115

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to configure a reagent when using non-bar

coded reagents or reagents not supplied by Abbott Laboratories.
Supplies NA
To configure a user-defined reagent:

1. Select CC reagent settings from the Assay categories list on the
2. Select NEW from the Reagents list, and then select F6 -

Configure.

in the Reagent name data entry box.
NOTE: When you are configuring bar coded reagents not

supplied by Abbott Laboratories, the reagent name must match
the name (including capitalization) encoded in the bar code.
When you are configuring reagents that use 1D (one
dimensional) bar code labels, the reagent name must be identical
to digits 1 - 5 of the bar code. See 1D reagent bar code label data
format, page 4-25.
4. Select the Reagent type list button, and then select R1 only or
R1 and R2.
5. Enter a value in the Reagent low alert data entry box. (optional)
6. Enter a value in the Onboard stability data entry box.

(optional)
7. Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c System),

page 2-66 for non-bar coded reagents. (optional)

To configure a non-bar coded sample diluent, see Configure a
user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c System), page 2-64.
To configure the assay parameters, see Configure a photometric assay (c
System), page 2-59.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
page 2-36
view, page 2-115
Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to create a reagent kit with a unique identifier

for non-bar coded reagents. This identifier allows the system to track
the onboard stability and remaining tests for a kit even if it is moved.
It also allows the system to perform reagent changeover when a
cartridge is empty.
NOTE: You must define at least one reagent kit before you can load
the reagent in the reagent supply centers.
Supplies NA
To configure a user-defined reagent kit:

F6 - Configure.
The information is dependent on the reagent you selected.
3. Select the Lot number list button, and then perform one of the
following:
– Select the desired lot from the list.
– Select New lot, and then enter a lot number (maximum of
eight alphanumeric characters) in the Lot number data
entry box.
4. Enter a unique number in the Serial number data entry box.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: You can define multiple serial numbers for each lot
number to allow you to load multiple kits of the same reagent.
Each kit defined for a single lot number must have a unique
numeric identifier (serial number).
5. Enter a date in the Expiration date data entry box. (optional)
6. Select the R1 cartridge size list button, and then select the
cartridge size.
7. Select the R2 cartridge size list button, and then select the
cartridge size. (optional)
8. Select Add kit to create the kit.

The new kit displays in the Configured kits list.

page 2-36
page 2-114
Viewing assay settings
From the Assay settings view of the Configuration screen the general
configured assay settings.
• Result units
• Retest rules
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To access the Configuration screen - Assay settings details view:

1. Select a category from the Assay categories list.
2. Select the desired item(s) from the list box, if displayed.
4. Select the appropriate options to view additional parameters.

selected more than one. (optional)
Changing assay configuration settings
Procedures for changing assay settings include:

• Change the name of an assay, page 2-69
• Change the availability of an assay, page 2-70
• Change normal and extreme ranges, page 2-71
• Change a patient or QC panel, page 2-72
• Delete a patient or QC panel, page 2-73
• Add an assay to a retest rule, page 2-73
• Remove an assay from a retest rule, page 2-75
• Delete a retest rule, page 2-76
• Change a linearity range, page 2-76
• Change the last required read setting (photometric - c System),
page 2-78
• Change the default dilution setting (photometric - c System),
page 2-79
• Change default calibration type (photometric - c System), page 2-80
• Change the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System),
page 2-81
• Change a potentiometric assay calibrator concentration (c System),
page 2-82
• Change the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System), page 2-82
• Delete a reagent (c System), page 2-83
• Delete a reagent kit (c System), page 2-85

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Change the default dilution setting (i System), page 2-85

• Change interpretation settings (i System), page 2-86
• Change a calculated assay, page 2-89
Change the name of an assay
Perform this procedure to change the assay name that displays on all
screens and windows.
No orders pending for the assay being changed
Supplies NA
To change the name of an assay:

- Configure.

in the Assay data entry box.

selected more than one, and enter a unique name for each.
(optional)

page 2-36
page 2-93
• Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view, page 2-98

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Change the availability of an assay
Perform this procedure to change assay availability, which determines

whether an assay(s) is available for ordering on the order screens.
Supplies NA
To change the availability of an assay:

- Configure.
desired assay availability.
– Enabled - Indicates the assay is available for ordering.
– Disabled - Indicates the assay name does not display on the
patient, control, and calibration order screens.
– Patient disabled - Indicates the assay name does not display
on the Patient order screen.

selected more than one, and then enable or disable each.
(optional)

page 2-36
page 2-93

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Change normal and extreme ranges
Perform this procedure to edit normal and extreme ranges.
NOTE: Ranges are evaluated in the order defined.

Supplies NA
To change normal and extreme ranges:


3. Select the desired range from the Gender and age specific
ranges table, and then select Edit.
The Configure results parameters window displays.
4. Select the Age list button, and then select the desired age format.
5. Enter a value in the Minimum and Maximum data entry boxes.
6. Enter a value in the Normal range data entry boxes.
7. Enter a value in the Extreme range data entry boxes. (optional)
8. Select Done to return to the Results view of the Configure assay

parameters window.
Your edits display in the Gender and age specific ranges table.
9. Select another range, and then repeat steps 3 through 8.

(optional)

each. (optional)


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
page 2-36
Change a patient or QC panel
Perform this procedure to add or remove assays from a previously

defined panel or to change the panel type.
Supplies NA
To change a patient or QC panel:

3. Select the desired panel from the Panels list.
4. Select or deselect the Panel type check box(es).
5. Select or deselect an assay(s) from the Assays list.
6. Select Add to add your changes.

page 2-36

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Delete a patient or QC panel
Perform this procedure to delete a patient or QC panel when the panel

is no longer in use.
Supplies NA
To delete a patient or QC panel:

3. Select the panel to delete from the Panels list, and then select
Delete.
4. Select OK to delete the panel.

The panel name no longer displays in the Panels list.

page 2-36
Add an assay to a retest rule
Perform this procedure to add an assay(s) to a retest rule(s).

Supplies NA
To add an assay to a retest rule:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

2. Select an assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 -

Configure.
3. Select the desired rule from the Assay retest rules list, and then
select Edit rule.
4. Select Select assay.

a. Select the desired assay(s).
b. Select Done to return to the Add / edit assay retest rules

window.
The selected assay(s) display in the Selected retest assays list.
5. Select an assay from the Selected retest assays list.
6. Select the desired Retest dilution option.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each assay.
9. Repeat steps 3 through 8 to add a retest assay(s) to another rule.

(optional)

each. (optional)

page 2-36

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove an assay from a retest rule
Perform this procedure to remove an assay from a retest rule(s).

Supplies NA
To remove an assay from a retest rule:


Configure.
3. Select the desired rule from the Assay retest rules list, and then
select Edit rule.
4. Select Select assay.

a. Deselect the desired assay(s).
b. Select Done to return to the Add / edit assay retest rules

window.
The updated Selected retest assays list displays.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to remove a retest assay(s) from another
rule. (optional)

each. (optional)

page 2-36

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Delete a retest rule
Perform this procedure to delete a retest rule(s).

Supplies NA
To delete a retest rule:

- Configure.
3. Select the desired rule, and then select Delete rule.
4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay, if you

selected more than one, and then repeat step 3 for each.
(optional)

page 2-36
Change a linearity range
Perform this procedure to change the linearity range for an assay(s)

when your laboratory determines the linearity range has changed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: If you modify the linearity range for an assay an asterisk

displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified.
Supplies NA
To change a linearity range:

1. Select an assay(s) from the Assays list on the Configuration
screen.

4. Edit the value in the Low-Linearity data entry box.
NOTE: For i System assays this field can only be edited when the
first default dilution option is configured.
5. Edit the value in the High-Linearity data entry box.
NOTE: For i System assays this field can only be edited when the
first default dilution option is configured. This value cannot be
edited above the assay default high-linearity.

(optional)

page 2-36

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Change the last required read setting (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to specify the last read that is required for
result calculation. The result calculates as soon as the last defined read
is measured rather than waiting for all 33 reads to complete.
Supplies NA
To change the last required read setting:

3. Select the Last required read data entry box, and then enter the
read time (1-33).
NOTE: This read time cannot occur before the last read time
defined for Main, Flex, Blank, Color correction, or Reaction
check.

selected more than one, and then enter the read time for each.
(optional)

Application Guide.
page 2-36

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Change the default dilution setting (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to select the dilution option to use if a dilution

is not specified when the test is ordered.
To specify a dilution for a specific sample when ordering, see Create a
patient order (single order), page 5-115, Create a control order (single
analyte), page 5-135, or Create a control order (multiconstituent),
page 5-137.
Supplies NA
To change the default dilution setting:

- Configure.
2. Select the Reagent / Sample option.

The Configure assay parameters window - Reagent / Sample view
displays.

each. (optional)

page 2-36

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Change default calibration type (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to change the setting for the default

calibration type. This setting is used if the type is not specified when
you order a calibration.
NOTE: The Default calibration type setting is only available if you

have configured an adjustment type.
To specify a calibration type when ordering a calibration, see Create a
calibration order, page 6-12.
Supplies NA
To change the default calibration type:

Configure.

The Configure assay parameters window - Calibration -
Calibrators view displays.
3. Select the Intervals option.

The Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals
view displays.
4. Select the Default ordering type list button, and then select the
desired calibration type.

selected more than one, and then select a calibration type for
each. (optional)

page 2-36

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Change the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System)
Perform this procedure to edit the correlation factor and intercept

when correlating assay results to another system.
NOTE: If you modify the correlation factor and/or intercept for an

assay an asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate the
assay was modified.
Supplies NA
To change the correlation factor and intercept settings:

- Configure.
3. Edit the value in the Correlation factor data entry box.
4. Edit the value in the Intercept data entry box.

(optional)

Application Guide.
page 2-36

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Change a potentiometric assay calibrator concentration (c System)
Perform this procedure to change a calibrator concentration(s) for a

potentiometric assay.
NOTE: Changing the calibrator concentration(s) will change the assay

calibration status to No Cal. A full calibration must be performed. See
Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-19.
Supplies Calibrator value sheet
To change a potentiometric assay calibrator concentration:

1. Select the desired potentiometric assay(s) from the Assays list,
and then select F6 - Configure.

The Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view
displays.
3. Enter a value in the Low concentration and High

concentration data entry boxes.

selected more than one, and then enter the concentrations for
each. (optional)

page 2-36
• Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c
System), page 2-105
Change the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System)
Perform this procedure to change the level at which the low alert
notification occurs for a specific reagent.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To change the level at which the system low alert notification occurs,
see Change the system low alert setting for reagent kits, page 2-14.
Supplies NA
To change the reagent-specific low alert setting:

2. Select the desired reagent from the Reagents list on the

4. Enter the desired alert level (number of tests) in the Reagent low
alert data entry box.

page 2-36
page 2-114
view, page 2-115
Delete a reagent (c System)
Perform this procedure to delete a user-defined reagent when it is no

longer in use.
All reagent kits using the reagent must be deleted. See
Delete a reagent kit (c System), page 2-85
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To delete a reagent:
NOTE: If a reagent is defined for use in any assay parameter file, you
must perform step 1 or 2 prior to deleting the reagent.
1. Change the reagent parameter in the assay to use a different
reagent. (optional)
a. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, on the
b. Select F6 - Configure
c. Select the Reagent / Sample option.
The Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent
/ Sample view displays.
d. Select the Reagent list button, and then select a different
reagent.
e. Use the previous/next buttons if you selected more than one

assay, and then repeat step 1d for each. (optional)
f. Select Done to save your changes.
2. Delete the assay that uses the reagent if the assay file is no longer
needed. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-177. (optional)

F7 - Delete.
5. Select OK to delete the reagent.
page 2-36
view, page 2-115

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Delete a reagent kit (c System)
Perform this procedure to delete a reagent kit when it is no longer in

use.
NOTE: Performing this procedure does not delete the defined reagent.
To delete the reagent and the associated kits, see Delete a reagent (c
System), page 2-83.
Supplies NA
To delete a reagent kit:

2. Select the reagent associated with the kit from the Reagents list,
and then select F6 - Configure.
3. Select the desired kit from the Configured kits list, and then
select Delete kit.
4. Select Done to delete the kit.
page 2-36
page 2-114
view, page 2-115
Change the default dilution setting (i System)
Perform this procedure to select the dilution option to use if a dilution

is not specified when the test is ordered.
patient order (single order), page 5-115, Create a control order (single

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
analyte), page 5-135, or Create a control order (multiconstituent),

page 5-137.
Supplies NA
To change the default dilution setting:

- Configure.
2. Select the Dilution option.

each. (optional)

page 2-36
• Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System),
page 2-106
Change interpretation settings (i System)
Perform this procedure to change the settings that determine whether

the interpretation is included with the test result and results are held
for review. The interpretation option is available for specific
ARCHITECT i System assays.
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To change interpretation settings:

1. Select Assay parameters from the Assay categories list on the
2. Select the desired i System assay(s) from the Assay list, and then
select F6 - Configure.
3. Select the Interpretation option.

The Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view
displays.
4. Select the Name list button, and then select the desired name for
the interpretation. (optional)
5. Repeat step 4 to select another interpretation name. (optional)
6. Enter the desired value(s) in the Range data entry box(es), if

available. (optional)
NOTE: The first Range data entry must be the low-linearity

value. The last Range data entry must be the high-linearity
value.
7. Select the Results review required checkbox(es) for the desired

interpretation(s). (optional)

each. (optional)

• Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters
view, page 2-37
Change the result units setting
Perform this procedure to change the result units for an assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
IMPORTANT: When you edit the result concentration unit, all

previous Levey-Jennings and QC summary information is deleted.
Supplies NA
To change the result units setting:

- Configure.
3. Enter the result units by performing one of the following:

– Select the Result units list button, and then select the
desired unit (i System assays).
– Enter the unit in the Results units data entry box (c System
assays).
NOTE: For c System assays, the system changes the result unit
name displayed but it does not automatically adjust any values.
You must enter the following parameters, if applicable, using the
appropriate conversion factor.
• Calibrator concentrations
• Gender and age specific ranges (normal and extreme)
• Linearity ranges
• Interpretation ranges
• Control means
• Retest rules result ranges
• Constituent assay ranges for calculated assays

(optional)


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
page 2-36
Change a calculated assay
Perform this procedure to edit an assay with a mathematical formula

for deriving a calculated (ratio) result.
To configure a user-defined calculated assay see Configure a calculated
assay, page 2-55.
Supplies NA
To change a calculated assay:

1. Select the desired calculated assay(s) from the Assays list on the
The Configure assay parameters window - General view
(calculated) displays.
2. Edit the desired name in the Assay data entry box.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
desired option.
4. Select Select assays to add additional assays. (optional)
NOTE: This button is not available for a calculated assay

installed from an assay disk (assay numbers 3000-3099).
a. Select the assay(s) to be included in the formula from the
Assays list. The assays are assigned to calculator buttons in
the order you select them.
For example: For an LDL calculation you would select
Cholesterol, HDL, and Triglyceride.
b. Select Done to return to the Configure assay parameters
window - General view (calculated).
The selected assay(s) display in the Selected assays area and
the appropriate ASSAY buttons display above the calculator
keypad.
5. Delete the existing formula by selecting the arrow button .
Once deleted enter the formula for the calculation by selecting
the desired constituent assay(s) and calculator buttons.
NOTE: You can not edit the formula for a calculated assay
installed from an assay disk (assay numbers 3000-3099).
You must include all of the selected constituent assay(s) in the
formula.
For example: To enter a new formula for an LDL calculation
Cholesterol - HDL - (Triglyceride /5), you would perform the
following steps:
a. Select the ASSAY1 (cholesterol) button , and then select
the minus button .
b. Select the ASSAY2 (HDL) button , and then select the

minus button .
c. Select the open parenthesis button , and then select the

ASSAY3 (Triglyceride) button .
d. Select the divide button , then select 5, and then select

the close parenthesis button .
The formula for the calculation displays in the Formula data
entry box.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6. Enter or edit a result range for the assay(s) in the Minimum and
Maximum value data entry box(es).
NOTE: If the constituent test result(s) is outside the defined

range, the calculated test becomes an exception and a result is
not reported.


page 2-50.

To configure result units and decimal places for the calculated assay,
page 2-36
page 2-94
Printing assay parameter reports
Procedures for printing reports include:

• Print an Assay Parameter report for specified assays, page 5-304
• Print an Assay Parameter report for all assays, page 5-305
Windows - Configuration screen - Assay settings view
Windows you can access from the Configuration screen - Assay

page 2-93
page 2-94

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System),
page 2-99
System), page 2-105
• Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System),
page 2-106
• Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System),
page 2-108
• Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System),
page 2-109
• Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System),
page 2-110
• Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System), page 2-111
page 2-114
view, page 2-115

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System)
From the General view of the Configure assay parameters window the
system administrator can configure general assay settings, such as the
assay name and assay availability.
Figure 2.17: Configure assay parameters window - General view (i

System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window -

General view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-152.
From the General view of the Details for assay parameters window you
can view the current general assay settings, such as:
• Assay name, number, and availability
• Assay type and pretreatment option
• Assay and calibration version

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.18: Details for assay parameters window - General view (i

System)
Configure assay parameters window - General view

(calculated)
system administrator can configure the settings used to calculate the
assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.19: Configure assay parameters window - General view

(calculated)

General view (calculated) field descriptions, page Appendix E-153.
From the General calculated view of the Details for assay parameters
window you can view the current settings used to calculate an assay.
Figure 2.20: Details for assay parameters window - General view

(calculated)

General view (calculated) field descriptions, page Appendix E-153.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction

definition view (photometric - c System)
From the General - Reaction definition view of the Configure assay

parameters window the system administrator can configure:
• General assay settings, which include the assay name, number,
type, availability, and version
• Reaction definition settings, which include the reaction mode,
wave lengths, read times, and last required read
Figure 2.21: Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction

definition view (photometric - c System)

General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System) field

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Change the last required read setting (photometric - c System),

page 2-78
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent /

Sample view (photometric - c System)
From the General - Reagent / Sample view of the Configure assay

parameters window the system administrator can configure the
settings for reagent(s) and sample, such as:
• Reagent and sample diluent definition
• Reagent and water volumes
• Dilution volumes
Figure 2.22: Configure assay parameters window -General - Reagent /

Sample view (photometric - c System)

General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-158
• Change the default dilution setting (photometric - c System), page 2-79
• Configure the default dilution setting (photometric - c System),
page 2-48

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity checks

view (photometric - c System)
From the General - Validity checks view of the Configure assay

settings for validity checks used in result calculation.
Figure 2.23: Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity

checks view (photometric - c System)

General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-160.
Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view
system administrator can configure general assay settings, such as the
assay name, availability, and reagent used for the assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.24: Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view

General - ICT view field descriptions, page Appendix E-162.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i

System)
From the Calibration view of the Configure assay parameters window

the system administrator can configure the setting for calibrator
replicates.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.25: Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i

System)

Calibration view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-163.
From the Calibration view of the Details for assay parameters window
you can view the current calibration settings, such as:
• Method for calibration, data reduction, and calibration
adjustment
• Calibrator replicates
• Calibrator names and concentrations

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.26: Details for assay parameters window - Calibration view

(i System)

Calibration view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-163.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators

From the Calibration - Calibrators view of the Configure assay

settings for the calibration method and calibrator names, replicates,
and the Blank concentration.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.27: Configure assay parameters window - Calibration -

Calibrators view (photometric - c System)

Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes

From the Calibration - Volumes view of the Configure assay

settings for calibrator volumes.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Volumes view (photometric - c System)

Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals

From the Calibration - Intervals view of the Configure assay

settings for calibration type and intervals.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Intervals view (photometric - c System)

Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
• Configure a calibration adjustment type and interval (photometric - c
System), page 2-48
• Change default calibration type (photometric - c System), page 2-80
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity

checks view (photometric - c System)
From the Calibration - Validity checks view of the Configure assay

settings for validity checks used to calculate the calibration curve.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Validity checks view (photometric - c System)

Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c

System)
From the Calibration view of the Configure assay parameters window

the system administrator can configure the settings for calibration and
index options.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.31: Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT

view (c System)

Calibration - ICT view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-167.
• Change a potentiometric assay calibrator concentration (c System),
page 2-82
Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System)
From the Dilution view of the Configure assay parameters window the
system administrator can configure the default dilution for an
ARCHITECT i System assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.32: Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i

System)

Dilution view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-168.
From the Dilution view of the Details for assay parameters window
you can view the current settings for the default dilution and dilution
ranges for an ARCHITECT i System assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.33: Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i

System)

Dilution view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-168.
Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c

System)
From the SmartWash view of the Configure assay parameters window

the system administrator can configure and delete the SmartWash
settings for the sample probe, reagent probe(s), and the cuvette.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.34: Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view

(c System)

SmartWash view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-169.
• Configure the SmartWash settings (c System), page 2-62
Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System)
From the Rgt 1 and Rgt 2 probe views of the Add / edit SmartWash
window the system administrator can add or edit SmartWash settings,
which include:
• Wash type to use on the reagent probe
• Wash type volume
• Wash type replicates
The SmartWash settings can be configured for both reagent probes.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.35: Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c

System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1
probe view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-170.
Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System)
From the Sample probe view of the Add / edit SmartWash window the
system administrator can add or edit SmartWash settings, which
include the wash type and sample wash protocol used for each assay.
Figure 2.36: Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c

System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Add / edit SmartWash window -

Sample probe view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-171.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System)
From the Cuvette view of the Add / edit SmartWash window the
system administrator can add or edit the wash type settings used for
each assay.
Figure 2.37: Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Add / edit SmartWash window -

Cuvette view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-172.
Configure assay parameters window - Results view
From the Results view of the Configure assay parameters window the
system administrator can:
• Configure age and gender specific ranges
• Change normal and extreme ranges
• Edit or delete ranges
• Change a linearity range

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.38: Configure assay parameters window - Results view

Results view field descriptions, page Appendix E-172.
• Change a linearity range, page 2-76
Configure results parameters window
From the Configure results parameters window the system

administrator can configure normal and extreme ranges.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.39: Configure results parameters window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure results parameters window

Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view
From the Interpretation view of the Configure assay parameters

window the system administrator can configure the settings for
interpretation name, range, and the requirement to review the result.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.40: Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation

view

Interpretation view field descriptions, page Appendix E-173.
• Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated), page 2-50
• Change interpretation settings (i System), page 2-86
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay

view
From the Abbott assay view of the Configure reagent (CC reagent
settings) window the system administrator can:
• run calibrations for reagents by Lot or Kit
• configure the number of tests for the reagent-specific low alert
setting

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.41: Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott

assay view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure reagent (CC reagent

settings) window - Abbott assay view field descriptions, page Appendix
E-174.
• Configure the option for running calibrations by kit (c System),
page 2-53
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined

assay view
From the user-defined assay view of the Configure reagent (CC reagent
settings) window the system administrator can configure the settings
for:
• Reagent name and type
• Reagent low alert and onboard stability
• Reagent kit lot number, serial number, expiration date, and
cartridge size
The system administrator can also delete reagent kits and access a
window to add a new kit.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.42: Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window -

user-defined assay view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure reagent (CC reagent

settings) window - User-defined assay view field descriptions,
• Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c System), page 2-65
• Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c System),
page 2-64
• Delete a reagent kit (c System), page 2-85
Configure result units window
From the Configure result units window the system administrator can
configure the settings for:
• Result units and decimal places
• Correlation factor and intercept (c System)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.43: Configure result units window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure result units window field
• Configure result units and decimal places, page 2-47
• Change the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System),
page 2-81
Configure panel definitions window
From the Configure panel definitions window the system

administrator can configure patient and QC panels.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.44: Configure panel definitions window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure panel definitions window

• Configure patient and QC panels, page 2-43
• Change a patient or QC panel, page 2-72
• Delete a patient or QC panel, page 2-73
Configure assay retest rules window
From the Configure assay retest rules window the system

administrator can add, change, or delete retest rules.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.45: Configure assay retest rules window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay retest rules window
• Change automatic repositioning for retest setting (RSH), page 2-18
Add / edit assay retest rules window
From the Add / edit assay retest rules window the system
administrator can add or edit assay retest rules.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.46: Add / edit assay retest rules window
For descriptions of these fields, see Add / edit assay retest rules window
Select assay window
From the Select assay window the system administrator can select or
deselect assay(s) for assay retest rules, multiconstituent controls, and
calculated assays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.47: Select assay window
For descriptions of these fields, see Select assay window field descriptions,
• Configure a new multiconstituent control, page 2-127
• Add an assay to a multiconstituent control, page 2-139
Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view

From the QC - Cal settings view of the Configuration screen the
general operator can access windows to view detailed information for
configured QC Cal settings.
• QC - Single analyte
• QC - Multiconstituent
• Multiconstituent bar code SID
• Westgard rules
• Calibrator set

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.48: Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configuration screen - QC-Cal settings

QC - Cal settings view, page 2-122.
• Viewing QC - Cal settings, page 2-134
• Changing QC - Cal settings, page 2-134
Access the Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view
Perform this procedure to display the QC - Cal view of the

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view:

Configuration.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
The Configuration screen displays.
2. Select the QC - Cal settings option.

The Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view displays.
Procedures - Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view
Procedures you can perform from the Configuration screen - QC - Cal

• Viewing QC - Cal settings, page 2-134
• Changing QC - Cal settings, page 2-134
• Importing QC - Cal data, page 2-149
Configuring QC - Cal settings
Procedures for configuring QC - Cal settings include:

• Configure a single analyte control, page 2-123
• Configure a bar code for a single analyte control level, page 2-125
• Configure intervals for automated single analyte control ordering,
page 2-126
• Configure a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-129
• Configure intervals for automated multiconstituent control ordering,
page 2-130
• Configure a Westgard rule, page 2-131
• Configure a new calibrator set (c System), page 2-132
Configure a single analyte control
Perform this procedure to configure control information for each level

of a single analyte control set.
NOTE: You cannot configure single analyte controls for calculated

assays. Calculated assay controls must be configured as

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
multiconstituent controls. See Configure a new multiconstituent control,

page 2-127.
Prerequisite Access the Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To configure a single analyte control:

- Configure.
The Configure single analyte window displays.
2. Select the Lot no. list button, and then select one of the
following:
– New Lot
– New Lot - Copy Data - used to add a new lot and use the
same data as the default lot
3. Enter the lot number for the control in the Lot no. data entry
box.
4. Enter the expiration date for the control in the Exp. date data
entry box. (optional)
5. Enter values for the following level information in the

appropriate data entry box:
– Level name (maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters and
name is case sensitive)
NOTE: The level name can not be edited when the New Lot -
Copy Data option is selected.
– Manufacturer mean (optional)
– Manufacturer 1 SD (standard deviation) (optional)
– Expected mean (optional)
– Expected 1 SD (standard deviation) (optional)
NOTE: QC reports are not generated if the expected mean and

SD are not defined.
6. Select the Default dilution list button, and then select the
desired dilution for the control level.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
7. Enter the ID for the control level bar code in the Bar code SID
data entry box. (optional)
NOTE: The Bar code SID must be unique for each control level
within a lot.
8. Select the Display order list button, and then select the desired
display order for the control level.
9. Enter a value in the QC time interval data entry box. (optional)
10. Enter a value in the QC test count interval data entry box.
(optional)
11. Select Add level to add the control.

The control level name displays in the Level list.
12. Select the Level list button, select New Level to add another
level, and then repeat steps 5 through 11. (optional)

each. (optional)

To view the current settings, see Viewing QC - Cal settings, page 2-134.
• Configure single analyte window, page 2-157
Configure a bar code for a single analyte control level
Perform this procedure to define a bar code for a single analyte control
level.
NOTE: You cannot configure single analyte controls for calculated

assays. Calculated assay controls must be configured as
multiconstituent controls. See Configure a new multiconstituent control,
page 2-127.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To configure a bar code for a single analyte control level:

- Configure.
2. Select the Lot no. list button, and then select the desired lot.
3. Select the Level list button, and then select the desired level.
4. Enter the ID to be used for the control level bar code in the Bar
code SID data entry box.
NOTE: The Bar code SID must be unique for each control level
within a lot.
5. Select the Level list button, select another level, and then enter a
bar code SID. (optional)

each. (optional)

Configure intervals for automated single analyte control ordering
Perform this procedure to define intervals for automated control

ordering of single analyte controls.
For automated control ordering you must configure an SID for the
control level. See Configure a bar code for a single analyte control level,
page 2-125.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To configure intervals:
- Configure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

(optional)

each. (optional)

• Automated control ordering, page 5-108
Configure a new multiconstituent control
Perform this procedure to configure control information for each level

of a multiconstituent control set.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To configure a new multiconstituent control:

1. Select QC - Multiconstituent from the QC - Cal categories list
2. Select NEW from the Controls list, and then select F6 -

Configure.
The Configure multiconstituent control window displays.
3. Enter the control name in the Control data entry box.
4. Select the Lot number list button, and then select New Lot.
5. Enter the lot number for the control in the Lot number data
entry box.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

a. Select the desired assay(s) from the list.
b. Select Done to return to the Configure multiconstituent

control window.
The assay(s) display in the table.
9. Select the assay(s) from the table, and then select Define data.
The Define control data window displays.
NOTE: You must define the assay-specific data for each assay
before you can add the level.
a. Enter values for the following level information in the
NOTE: QC reports are not generated if the expected mean and

SD are not defined.
b. Select the Default dilution list button, and then select the
NOTE: This button is not available for calculated assay controls.
c. Enter a value in the QC time interval data entry box.

(optional)
d. Enter a value in the QC test count interval data entry box.

(optional)
e. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you

selected more than one, and then repeat steps 9a through 9d
for each. (optional)
f. Select Done to return to the Configure multiconstituent

control window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
The assay-specific data displays in the table.

10. Select Add level to add the level.
11. Select the Level list button, select another level, and then repeat
steps 8 through 10. (optional)

• Configure multiconstituent control window, page 2-158
• Define control data window, page 2-160
Configure a multiconstituent bar code SID
Perform this procedure to assign a bar code SID for a configured

multiconstituent control.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To configure a multiconstituent bar code SID:

1. Select Multiconstituent bar code SID from the QC - Cal
categories list on the Configuration screen, and then select F6 -
Configure.
The Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window displays.
2. Enter the ID to be used for the multiconstituent control level bar

code in the New bar code SID data entry box.
NOTE: The bar code SID must be unique for each control level
within a lot.
3. Select the Control list button, and then select the desired
control.
4. Select the Lot list button, and then select the desired lot.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select
Add.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to configure additional bar code SIDs.

(optional)

• Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window, page 2-161
Configure intervals for automated multiconstituent control ordering
Perform this procedure to define intervals for automated control

ordering of multiconstituent controls.
For automated control ordering you must configure an SID for the
control. See Configure a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-129.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To configure intervals:
2. Select the desired multiconstituent control from the Controls

list, and then select F6 - Configure.
Define data.

(optional)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

(optional)
9. Select Done to return to the Configure multiconstituent control

window.
10. Select the Add level button to save your changes.
steps 5 - 10. (optional)

Configure a Westgard rule
Perform this procedure to configure Westgard rules, which are used to

assess quality control results.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To configure a Westgard rule:

1. Select Westgard rules from the QC - Cal categories list on the
- Configure.
The Configure Westgard window displays.
3. Select the desired rule from the Rules list.
4. Select the desired Status option.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: If you selected Westgard rules 2-2s 1R 1M, 2-2s 1R xM,

2-2s xR 1M, 4-1s 1M, or 4-1s xM, you must configure a run
definition.
5. Select the desired Flag type option.
NOTE: Westgard rules configured as a warning do not produce a

flag for patient results. Westgard rules configured as a failure
produce a CNTL flag for a patient result.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 to configure another rule for the

displayed assay. (optional)

each. (optional)

To define a run, see Configure a QC run definition, page 2-9.
• Configure Westgard window, page 2-162
• Westgard rule application, page 5-271
Configure a new calibrator set (c System)
Perform this procedure to create a calibrator set.

view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To configure a calibrator set:

1. Select Calibrator set from the QC - Cal categories list on the
2. Select NEW from the Calibrator sets list, and then select F6 -
Configure.
The Configure calibrator set window displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

in the Calibrator set data entry box.
4. Select the Lot number list button and then select New Lot.
5. Enter the calibrator lot number in the Lot number data entry
box.
6. Enter a value (1 - 6) in the Number of levels data entry box.
7. Enter a value in the Expiration date data entry box. (optional)
8. Select Select assays. (optional)

NOTE: If a user-defined assay has not been configured the assay

name will not be available for selection. To add the user-defined
assay to the calibrator set you must return to this window after
configuring the assay.
b. Select Done to return to the Configure calibrator set window.

The Define calibrator data window displays.
10. Enter a value in the Concentration data entry box for each
calibrator level.
NOTE: A concentration must be entered for each calibrator level

regardless of whether the level is used for the assay calibration.

12. Select Done to return to the Configure calibrator set window.

13. Select Done to create the calibrator set.
NOTE: If assays assigned to the new calibrator set are assigned to

an existing calibrator set, a message displays to notify you the
assay will be removed from the previous calibrator set, Active
calibrations will become Invalid, and recalibration is required.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Configure calibrator set window (c System), page 2-163
• Define calibrator data window (c System), page 2-164
Viewing QC - Cal settings
From the QC - Cal settings view of the Configuration screen the

general operator can access windows to view detailed information for
configured QC - Cal settings.
• Westgard rules
• Calibrator set
view, page 2-122
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings details view:

1. Select a category from the QC-Cal categories list.
2. Select the desired item(s) from the list box, if displayed.
4. Select the Lot no.: list button, and then select the desired level, if
required.

Changing QC - Cal settings
Procedures for changing QC - Cal settings include:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Add a lot to a single analyte control, page 2-135

• Change single analyte control settings, page 2-137
• Delete a single analyte control level, page 2-138
• Change the default dilution for a single analyte control level,
page 2-139
• Change multiconstituent control settings, page 2-141
• Add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-142
• Change multiconstituent bar code SID settings, page 2-143
• Delete a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-144
• Delete a multiconstituent control level, page 2-145
• Change Westgard rule settings, page 2-146
• Change photometric assay calibrator settings (c System), page 2-147
• Delete a calibrator set (photometric - c System), page 2-148
Add a lot to a single analyte control
Perform this procedure to add a lot to an existing single analyte

control.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To add a lot to a single analyte control:

- Configure.
2. Select the Lot no. list button, and then select New Lot.
3. Enter the lot number for the control in the Lot no. data entry
box.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
– Level name (maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters and

name is case sensitive)
dilution for the control level.
NOTE: The bar code SID must be unique for each control level
within a lot.
8. Select the Display order list button, and then select a display
order for the control level.
(optional)
11. Select Add level to add the lot.

The lot number displays in the Lot no. list.
12. Select the Level list button, select New Level to add another
level, and then repeat steps 5 through 10. (optional)

each. (optional)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Change single analyte control settings
Perform this procedure to change control information for each level of

a single analyte control set.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To change single analyte control settings:

- Configure.

desired dilution.
7. Select the Display order list button, and then select the desired
order.

(optional)
steps 4 - 9. (optional)

selected more than one, and then repeat steps 2 - 10 for each.
(optional)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Delete a single analyte control level
Perform this procedure to delete a single analyte control level.

view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To delete a single analyte control level:

1. Release, archive, and delete all control results for the control
level. See Release a control result, page 5-212 and then Archive
stored control results, page 5-246.
- Configure.
4. Select the Level list button, and then select the level to delete.
5. Select Delete level.
6. Select the Level list button, select another level, and then select
Delete. (optional)

each. (optional)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Change the default dilution for a single analyte control level
Perform this procedure to change the default dilution for a single

analyte control level.
control order (single analyte), page 5-135.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To change the default dilution for a single analyte control level:

- Configure.
desired dilution.
5. Select the Level list button, and then another level. (optional)

each. (optional)
Add an assay to a multiconstituent control
Perform this procedure to add an assay(s) to the level(s) of a

multiconstituent control.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To add an assay to a multiconstituent control:


3. Select the Lot number list button, and then select the desired lot
number.

a. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list.
b. Select Done to return to the Configure multiconstituent

control window.
The selected assay(s) display in the table.
NOTE: You must define the assay-specific data for each assay
before you can add the level.
a. Enter values for the following level information in the

(optional)

(optional)


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

control window.
7. Select Add level to add the assay to the level.
steps 5 through 7. (optional)
Change multiconstituent control settings
Perform this procedure to change multiconstituent control settings

when you determine that the quality control values for the ranges
have changed.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To change multiconstituent control settings:


number.
5. Select the desired assay(s) from the table, and then select Define
data.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
a. Enter the desired values for the following level information

in the appropriate data entry box:

(optional)

(optional)


control window.
6. Select Add level to add the data to the level.
steps 5 and 6. (optional)
Add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID
Perform this procedure to add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code

SID.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID:

categories list on the Configuration screen and then select F6 -
Configure.
2. Select the desired bar code SID from the Bar codes list.
NOTE: The bar code SID is unique for each control level within a
lot.
Add.
4. Select another bar code SID from the Bar codes list, and then
repeat step 3. (optional)
Change multiconstituent bar code SID settings
Perform this procedure to change multiconstituent bar code SID

settings.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To change multiconstituent bar code SID settings:

Configure.
NOTE: The bar code SID is unique for each control level within a
lot.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
control.
Add.
repeat steps 3 through 6. (optional)
Delete a multiconstituent bar code SID
Perform this procedure to delete a multiconstituent bar code SID.

view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To delete a multiconstituent bar code SID:

Configure.
3. Select Delete.
repeat step 3. (optional)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Delete a multiconstituent control level
Perform this procedure to delete a level from a multiconstituent

control set.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To delete a multiconstituent control level:


number.
4. Select the Level list button, and then select the level to delete.
5. Select Delete level.

step 5. (optional)
NOTE: If there is only one level of a multiconstituent control

configured and you delete the level, the control name is also
deleted.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Change Westgard rule settings
Perform this procedure to change Westgard rule settings, which are

used to assess quality control results.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To change Westgard rule settings:

1. Select Westgard rules from the QC - Cal categories list on the
- Configure.
The Configure Westgard window displays.
3. Select the desired rule from the Rules list.
4. Select the Status option to enable or disable the rule.
NOTE: If you selected Westgard rules 2-2s 1R 1M, 2-2s 1R xM,

2-2s xR 1M, 4-1s 1M, or 4-1s xM, you must configure a run
definition. See Configure a QC run definition, page 2-9.
5. Select the Flag type option for the rule.
NOTE: Westgard rules configured as a warning do not produce a

flag for patient results. Westgard rules configured as a failure
produce a CNTL flag for patient results.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to configure another rule for the

displayed assay. (optional)

each. (optional)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Change photometric assay calibrator settings (c System)
Perform this procedure to change calibrator settings.

view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To change photometric assay calibrator settings:

2. Select the desired calibrator set, and then select F6 - Configure.

3. Select the Lot number list button, and then select New Lot.
4. Enter a value in the Lot number data entry box.
5. Enter a value (1 - 6) in the Number of levels data entry box.
6. Enter a value in the Expiration date data entry box. (optional)
7. Select Select assays. (optional)

The Select assays window displays.
b. Select Done to return to the Configure calibrator set window.

9. Enter a value in the Concentration data entry box for each

calibrator.
NOTE: A concentration must be entered for each calibrator level

regardless of whether the level is used for the assay calibration.



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: If assays assigned to this calibrator set are assigned to an

existing calibrator set, a message displays to notify you the assay
will be removed from the previous calibrator set, Active
calibrations will become Invalid, and recalibration is required.
Delete a calibrator set (photometric - c System)
Perform this procedure to delete a calibrator set when the calibrator is

no longer used.
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To delete a calibrator set:
NOTE: If a calibrator set is defined for use in any assay parameter file,
you must perform step 2 or step 3 prior to deleting the calibrator set.
2. Delete the assay(s) that use the calibrator set if the assay file(s)
are no longer needed. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-177.
(optional)
3. Change the assay to use a different calibrator set. (optional)

a. Select the calibrator set you want to assign the assay to from
the Calibrator sets list, and then select F6 - Configure.
b. Select Select assays.
c. Select the desired assay(s) from the list.
d. Select Done to return to the Configure calibrator set window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

e. Select the assay(s) from the table and then select Define data.
f. Enter a value in the Concentration data entry box for each
calibrator level.
g. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you

selected more than one assay, and then repeat step 3f for
each.
h. Select Done to return to the Configure calibrator set window.
i. Select Done to save your changes.

A message displays to notify you that the assay will be
removed from the previous calibrator set, active calibrations
will become Invalid, and recalibration is required.
4. Select the desired calibrator set, and then select F7 - Delete.
5. Select OK to delete the calibrator set.

The calibrator set name no longer displays in the calibrator set
table.

Importing QC - Cal data
Procedures for importing QC - Cal data include:

• Import control data (c System), page 2-150
• Import control data (i System), page 2-151
• Import calibrator data (c System), page 2-152
• Assign an assay for import of control data (c System), page 2-154
• Assign an assay for import of calibrator data (c System), page 2-154
• Unassign an assay from imported control data (c System), page 2-155

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Unassign an assay from imported calibrator data (c System),

page 2-156
Import control data (c System)
Perform this procedure to import multiconstituent control data from a

CD-ROM or USB flash drive to the SCC (system control center).
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To import control data:

2. Select the control name from the Controls list. If this is the
initial configuration for the control select New.
4. Select the Lot number list button and then select Import.
5. Insert the CD-ROM or USB flash drive and then select OK.
The available control files display in the Import lot file selection
window.
6. Select the desired data file and then select Done.

The Assign assays for multiconstituent control window displays.
Data for all control levels is imported for assays with the
following import statuses:
• OK
• Assigned - System
• Assigned - User
No data is imported for assays with the following import statuses
which are displayed in red text:
• No Assay
• Previously Defined
• Units Mismatch

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
See Descriptions of import statuses (c System), page 2-167 to resolve

these statuses and import data for these assays.

window.
8. Edit the imported control name. (optional)
9. Select Done to save the imported data.
10. Select OK if the data was imported from a USB flash drive and
then remove the drive from the USB port.
The flash drive must be removed from the port and then
reinserted before another file can be imported.
• Descriptions of import statuses (c System), page 2-167
Import control data (i System)
Perform this procedure to import multiconstituent control data from a

CD-ROM or USB flash drive to the SCC (system control center).
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA

2. Select the control name from the Controls list. If this is the
initial configuration for the control select New.
The available control files display in the Import lot file selection
window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

The Assign assays for multiconstituent control window displays.
Data for all control levels is imported for assays with an import
status of OK.
• No Assay
See Descriptions of import statuses (i System), page 2-168 to resolve

window.
8. Edit the imported control name. (optional)
• Descriptions of import statuses (i System), page 2-168
Import calibrator data (c System)
Perform this procedure to import calibrator set data from a CD-ROM

or USB flash drive to the SCC (system control center).
view, page 2-122
Supplies NA
To import calibrator data:


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2. Select the desired calibrator set from the Calibrator sets list and
then select F6 - Configure.
The available calibrator files display in the Import lot file
selection window.

The Assign assays for calibrator set window displays.
Data for all calibrator levels is imported for assays with the
following import statuses:
• OK
• Assigned - System
• Assigned - User
• Cal Set Mismatch
• No Assay
• Units Mismatch
See Descriptions of import statuses (c System), page 2-167 to resolve

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assign an assay for import of control data (c System)
Perform this procedure to associate an assay from the imported data

file with a user-defined assay on the system. The imported data file
assays and the user-defined assays on the system have assay numbers
in the range of 2000 - 2999.
NOTE: Assays can not be sorted by status in the Assign assays for
multiconstituent control window.
Prerequisite NA
Supplies NA

1. Select the assay to assign.
2. Select the Assign assay button.

3. Select the desired assay from the list. Assays available to assign
display in black text.
4. Select Done to exit the Select assay window.
5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 for each additional assay to be assigned.

window.
7. Select Done to save the assay assignment.
Assign an assay for import of calibrator data (c System)
Perform this procedure to associate an assay from the imported data

file with a user-defined assay on the system. The imported data file

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
assays and the user-defined assays on the system have assay numbers
in the range of 2000 - 2999.
Prerequisite NA
Supplies NA
To import calibrator data:

1. Select the assay to assign.
2. Select the Assign assay button.

NOTE: Only assays with the same calibrator set as the import
assay will display.
3. Select the desired assay from the list. Assays available to assign
display in black text.
4. Select Done to exit the Select assay window.
5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 for each additional assay to be assigned.
7. Select Done to save the assay assignment.
Unassign an assay from imported control data (c System)
Perform this procedure to disassociate a user-defined assay on the

system from an imported assay data file.
Prerequisite Assay import status must be Assigned - System or
Assigned - User
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To unassign an assay from imported control data:

1. Select the assay to unassign.
2. Select the Unassign assay button.

The status changes to No Assay.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for additional assays as needed.

window.
Unassign an assay from imported calibrator data (c System)
Perform this procedure to disassociate a user-defined assay on the

system from an imported assay data file.
Prerequisite Assay import status must be Assigned - System or
Assigned - User
Supplies NA
To unassign an assay from imported calibrator data:

1. Select the assay to unassign.
2. Select the Unassign assay button.

The status changes to No Assay.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for additional assays as needed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Windows - Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view
Windows you can access from the Configuration screen - QC - Cal

• Assign assays for multiconstituent control window, page 2-159
• Assign assays for calibrator set window (c System), page 2-165
• Import lot file selection window, page 2-165
• Descriptions of import statuses (i System), page 2-168
Configure single analyte window
From the Configure single analyte window the system administrator

can configure single analyte control settings, which include:
• Control level name, lot number, expiration date, default
dilution, bar code SID (sample identification), and display order
• Manufacturer mean and 1 SD (standard deviation)
• Expected mean and 1 SD (standard deviation)
• QC time interval
• QC test count interval

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.49: Configure single analyte window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure single analyte window field
• Configure a single analyte control, page 2-123
page 2-126
• Add a lot to a single analyte control, page 2-135
• Change single analyte control settings, page 2-137
• Delete a single analyte control level, page 2-138
• Change the default dilution for a single analyte control level,
page 2-139
Configure multiconstituent control window
From the Configure multiconstituent control window the system

administrator can configure the settings for the control name, level
name, lot number, and expiration date. Also, the system administrator
can access windows to import control data from a data file, add or
delete a level, define data for a level, add or delete an assay from a
level, enter a QC time, and enter a QC test count interval.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.50: Configure multiconstituent control window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure multiconstituent control

page 2-130
• Delete a multiconstituent control level, page 2-145
Assign assays for multiconstituent control window
From the Assign assays for multiconstituent control window you can
view imported assays assigned to system assays and the associated
units. You can manually assign imported control file assay(s) with
assay numbers from 2000 - 2999 to user-defined assay(s) configured on
the system.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.51: Assign assays for multiconstituent control window
For descriptions of these fields, see Assign assays for multiconstituent

control window field descriptions, page Appendix E-183.
• Assign an assay for import of control data (c System), page 2-154
• Unassign an assay from imported control data (c System), page 2-155
Define control data window
From the Define control data window the system administrator can
configure the following settings for multiconstituent controls:
• Manufacturer mean and 1 SD (standard deviation)
• Expected mean and 1 SD (standard deviation)
• Default dilution
• QC time interval
• QC test count interval

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.52: Define control data window
For descriptions of these fields, see Define control data window field
page 2-130
Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window
From the Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window, the

system administrator can assign the bar code SID (sample
identification) for a configured multiconstituent control. Also, the
system administrator can add or delete assays from a bar code SID and
delete a bar code SID.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.53: Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure multiconstituent bar code

SID window field descriptions, page Appendix E-184.
• Add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-142
• Change multiconstituent bar code SID settings, page 2-143
• Delete a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-144
Configure Westgard window
From the Configure Westgard window, the system administrator can

select the Westgard rules that are enabled for an assay and determine
whether the failure of the rules is flagged as a Warning or a Failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.54: Configure Westgard window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure Westgard window field

• Configure a Westgard rule, page 2-131
• Change Westgard rule settings, page 2-146
Configure calibrator set window (c System)
From the Configure calibrator set window the system administrator

can configure the calibrator set name and number of levels, lot
number, and expiration date. The system administrator can also access
windows to import calibrator set data from a data file, add or delete an
assay, define data for each calibrator level and assay in a lot, and delete
a lot.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.55: Configure calibrator set window (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure calibrator set window (c

System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-185.
• Delete a calibrator set (photometric - c System), page 2-148
Define calibrator data window (c System)
From the Define calibrator data window the system administrator can
configure the settings for the calibrator levels assigned to a calibrator
set.
Figure 2.56: Define calibrator data window (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Define calibrator data window (c


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Change photometric assay calibrator settings (c System), page 2-147
Assign assays for calibrator set window (c System)
From the Assign assays for calibrator set window you can view
imported assays assigned to system assays and the associated units.
You can manually assign imported calibrator file assay(s) with assay
numbers from 2000 - 2999 to user-defined assay(s) configured on the
system.
Figure 2.57: Assign assays for calibrator set window (cSystem)
For descriptions of these fields, see Assign assays for calibrator set
window (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-186.
• Assign an assay for import of calibrator data (c System), page 2-154
• Unassign an assay from imported calibrator data (c System),
page 2-156
Import lot file selection window
From the Import lot file selection window the system administrator
can select a data file to import.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.58: Import lot file selection window
For descriptions of these fields, see Import lot file selection window field

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Descriptions of import statuses (c System)
Use the import status information to resolve issues while importing

control or calibrator data. The system displays one of the following
statuses for each assay.
Table 2.3: Import statuses (c System)
Status Description
Assigned - System The import assay was automatically assigned to an assay
on the system with the same assay number and result unit.
This status is only used for assay numbers in the range of
2000 - 2999.
IMPORTANT: The system does not compare the assay

names. You must confirm the import assay is assigned to
the correct system assay.
The data is imported.
Assigned - User The import assay was assigned by the user to an assay on
the system with a different assay number but with the same
result unit. This status is only used for assay numbers in the
range of 2000 - 2999.
Cal Set Mismatch The import assay has the same assay number as the assay
configured on the system but the defined calibrator set does
not match. Verify the following:
– The calibrator set is configured on the system.
– The assay is defined for the calibrator set.
– The calibrator set is defined for the assay on the
system.
The data is not imported.
No Assay There is no assay on the system with the same assay
number in the import file.
Import assay files with assay numbers from 2000 - 2999 can
be assigned to user-defined assays on the system.
OK The import assay has the same assay number and result
units as the assay configured on the system. This status is
only used for assay numbers in the range of 1000 - 1999.
Previously Defined Data has already been manually entered or imported.
Units Mismatch The import assay has different result units than the system
assay with the same assay number. Result units are case
sensitive. See Change the result units setting, page 2-87.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Descriptions of import statuses (i System)
Use the import status information to resolve issues while importing

control or calibrator data. The system displays one of the following
statuses for each assay.
Table 2.4: Import statuses (i System)
Status Description
No Assay There is no assay on the system with the same assay
number in the import file.
OK The import assay has the same assay number and result
units as the assay configured on the system. This status is
only used for assay numbers in the range of 2000 - 2999.
Previously Defined Data has already been manually entered or imported for the
control lot number.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 2 Software installation and backup
Software installation and backup

Your Abbott field service representative (FSE) must install the
ARCHITECT System Software on the SCC before you can use your
system. After your system is running, you may receive occasional
system software upgrades or patches that must be installed manually.
Software installation and backup topics include:
• Utilities screen - Software install view, page 2-169
• Utilities screen - System updates view, page 2-171
• Utilities screen - Backup software view, page 2-173
Utilities screen - Software install view

From the Software install view of the Utilities screen the general
operator can view the current system software version. The system
administrator can install system software.
Figure 2.59: Utilities screen - Software install view
For descriptions of these fields, see Utilities screen - Software install view
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Utilities screen -
Software install view, page 2-170.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Software installation and backup Section 2
• View the system software version, page 2-170
Access the Utilities screen - Software install view
Perform this procedure to display the Software install view of the

Utilities screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Utilities screen - Software install view:

1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select Utilities.
The Utilities screen - Backup software view displays.
2. Select the Software install option.

The Utilities screen - Software install view displays.
Procedure - Utilities screen - Software install view
The procedure you can perform from the Utilities screen - Software
install view and its related window is:
• View the system software version, page 2-170
View the system software version
Perform this procedure to view the version information for the current
system software.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
User access level General operator / system administrator
Supplies NA
To view the system software version:

2. Select the Software install option.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
The current software version displays.
Utilities screen - System updates view

From the System updates view of the Utilities screen, you can review
and install ARCHITECT System software updates that have been
downloaded to the SCC (System Control Center) via AbbottLink.
When updates are available on the SCC, a button appears on the
Snapshot Screen that allows the updates to be installed.
NOTE: The remote software update capability is available only if your

system is connected via AbbottLink.
Figure 2.60: Utilities Screen - System updates view
For descriptions of these fields, see Utilities screen - System updates view
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Utilities Screen - System
updates view, page 2-172.
• Install system software updates, page 2-172

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Access the Utilities Screen - System updates view
Perform this procedure to display the System updates view of the

Utilities screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
User access level General operator or System administrator
Supplies NA
To access the Utilities screen - System updates view:

2. Select the System updates option.

The Utilities screen - System updates view displays.
This screen lists all the updates that are ready for installation.
NOTE: Each update is assigned a log on level by Abbott. Users that do

not have access at or above this level for a specific update can neither
see nor install that update.
• Utilities screen - System updates view, page 2-171
Procedure - Utilities screen - System updates view
The procedures you can perform from the Utilities screen - System
updates view and its related window are:
• Install system software updates, page 2-172
• Print a report, page 5-295
Install system software updates
Perform this procedure to install software updates that have been

downloaded to your SCC via AbbottLink.
Prerequisite Access the Utilities Screen - System updates view
User access level General operator or System administrator
Supplies NA
To install software updates:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
1. Select the desired updates from the Available updates list on the
Utilities screen.
2. Select F4 - Print to print the installation instructions for each

update, and review these instructions before beginning
installation.
3. Select F5 Install. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete

the installation.
NOTE: If your ARCHITECT system is part of a LIS (Laboratory

Information System) network, the network connection to the system
will be temporarily interrupted while the software update is in
progress. This connection will be automatically restored once the
update has been completed.
• System logs screen - Software update log, page 10-13
• TSB Installation Log Report, page Appendix A-95
Utilities screen - Backup software view

From the Backup view of the Utilities screen you can create a software
backup, access a window to add a comment for the backup, and view
backups that were previously created. If necessary, Abbott service and
support personnel can restore your software from a backup.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 2.61: Utilities screen - Backup software view
For descriptions of these fields, see Utilities screen - Backup software view
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Utilities screen - Backup
software view, page 2-174.
• Create a system software backup, page 2-175
Access the Utilities screen - Backup software view
Perform this procedure to display the Backup software view of the

Utilities screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Utilities screen - Backup software view:

Select System from the menu bar, and then select Utilities.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Create backup window, page 2-176
Procedure - Utilities screen - Backup view
The procedure you can perform from the Utilities screen - Backup view
and its related window is:
Create a system software backup
Perform this procedure in accordance with your laboratory's data

backup schedule and any time you perform module calibration
procedures, edit configuration, add a new assay, or calibrate an assay.
The software backup procedure allows you to transfer ARCHITECT
System information, such as module calibrations, configuration, and
the database, to an alternative location. Backing up system
information protects against data loss.
You can create and save a total of three software backups. Additional
backups replace the existing backups starting with the oldest first.
Prerequisite Access the Utilities screen - Backup software view,
page 2-174
Module status Offline, Stopped, or Ready
Supplies NA
To create a system software backup:

1. Select F4 - Create backup from the Utilities screen.
The Create backup window displays.
2. Enter a comment (up to 50 characters) in the Comment data

3. Select Done to create the backup.

A progress indicator displays until the process completes.
To copy the system software backup to a CD perform 6004 Copy backup
software, page 10-684.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Windows - Utilities screen - Backup view
Windows you can access from the Utilities screen - Backup view
include:
Create backup window
From the Create backup window you can enter a comment for the
software backup.
Figure 2.62: Create backup window
For descriptions of these fields, see Create backup window field


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 2 Assay file management
Assay file management

You need to install assay files when you install a new system and when
new assays become available. Assay installation requires system
administrator logon or higher.
Before you install assay files, read the information that accompanies
the ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM.
Assay installation procedures include:
• Install or delete an assay file, page 2-177
• Import an assay file (c System), page 2-178
• Export an assay file (c System), page 2-180
Install or delete an assay file

Perform this SCC (system control center) diagnostic procedure to
install or delete an assay file(s). The ARCHITECT System can store 200
c System assay files.
When installing an assay that uses data from a reference assay, the
reference assay must be installed first.
When deleting an assay that is referenced in another assay file you
must perform one of the following:
• Change the Use Cal Factor or Reference photometric assay
parameter in the assay file to use a different assay
• Delete the assay that is using the reference data
Prerequisite Access the Diagnostics screen, page 10-652
User access level System Administrator
Supplies ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM
To install or delete an assay file(s):

1. Select the Module 5 (SCC) option on the Diagnostics screen.
2. Select the page down scroll button, and then select the Utilities
tab.
The diagnostic procedures for the Utilities category display.
3. Select 6114 Install / Delete Assays from the DIAGNOSTICS

PROCEDURES list, and then select F5 - Perform.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay file management Section 2
4. Select OK to perform the procedure.

The Diagnostic perform window displays.
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to install or delete an assay(s)

file.
NOTE: When handling CD-ROMs, only hold them by their

edges. Avoid getting fingerprints on the CD-ROM surface. If the
CD-ROM comes in contact with moisture the ink can smear or
run.
6. Select Done to return to the Diagnostics screen.
7. Remove the CD-ROM from the drive if you installed an assay

file(s). (optional)
NOTE: If you installed a new version of an existing assay file(s),

see the information that accompanied the ARCHITECT System
Assay CD-ROM for specific calibration and QC requirements.
You may need to calibrate the assay(s) and run all levels of
controls before reporting patient results. See Create a calibration
order, page 6-12, Create a control order (single analyte), page 5-135
or Create a control order (multiconstituent), page 5-137.
• Diagnostics screen, page 10-651
• Diagnostic perform window, page 10-656
• SCC diagnostic categories, page 10-683
Import an assay file (c System)

Perform this procedure to copy an assay file to another ARCHITECT c
System. The ARCHITECT System can store 200 c System assay files.
IMPORTANT: When you copy an assay file from an ARCHITECT c

8000 System to an ARCHITECT c 16000 System (or visa versa), the
sample probe wash protocol and/or wavelength assay parameters may
change. A status message displays to indicate this change during the
import process. For more information see Descriptions of import status
messages, page Appendix E-150. For assay parameter information refer

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 2 Assay file management
to the manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package

insert or reagent application sheet).
Module status Offline, Stopped, Maintenance or Ready
Supplies Floppy disk with exported assay files
To import an assay file:

1. Select F3 - Import on the Configuration screen.
You are prompted to insert a floppy disk into the floppy drive.
2. Insert a disk into the drive.

The Import assay window displays a list of the files on the disk.
3. Select the desired assay(s), and then select the Import button.
The selected assay files are copied to the system and the Import
assay window displays the status of the imported files.
NOTE: If there is a software version mismatch between the

system you have exported the files from and the system you are
importing the files to, an error message displays and the assays
will not be copied.
IMPORTANT: You MUST confirm all assay parameters are

imported correctly. See Viewing assay settings, page 2-67.
5. Remove the floppy disk from the drive.

To enter the calibrator lot and concentration(s) see Change photometric
assay calibrator settings (c System), page 2-147.
page 2-36
• Import assay window, page 2-40

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay file management Section 2
Export an assay file (c System)

Perform this procedure to save an assay file from one ARCHITECT c
System onto a floppy disk so you copy it to another c System.
Module status Offline, Stopped, Maintenance or Ready
Supplies Floppy disk
To export an assay file:

1. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy drive.
2. Select F4 - Export on the Configuration screen.

The Export assay window displays.
3. Select the desired assay(s), and then select the Export button.
The selected assay files are copied to the floppy disk, and the
Export assay window displays the status.
5. Remove the floppy disk from the drive.

To copy the file to another system, see Import an assay file (c System),
page 2-178.
page 2-36
• Export assay window, page 2-41

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 2 Maintenance and diagnostic file management
Maintenance and diagnostic file management

You need to install maintenance and diagnostic files when you install
a new system and when new maintenance and diagnostics files
become available. Maintenance and diagnostic file installation
requires system administrator logon or higher.
Before you install these files, read the information that accompanies
the ARCHITECT System Maintenance and Diagnostics CD-ROM.
To install or delete maintenance or diagnostic files, see Install or delete
a maintenance or diagnostic procedure file, page 2-181
Install or delete a maintenance or diagnostic procedure file

Perform this procedure to install or delete a procedure file(s).
User access level System Administrator
Supplies NA
To install or delete a maintenance or diagnostic procedure file:

1. Select the Module 5 (SCC) option on the Diagnostics screen.
2. Select the page down scroll button, and then select the Utilities
tab.
The diagnostic procedures for the Utilities category display.
3. Select 6115 Install / Delete Procedures from the

DIAGNOSTICS PROCEDURES list, and then select F5 -
Perform.

The Diagnostic perform window displays.
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to install or delete a procedure

file(s).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Maintenance and diagnostic file management Section 2

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Principles of operation
Section 3
Introduction
<F=0>
An ARCHITECT System uses photometric, potentiometric, and/or

CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) technology to
measure analyte concentrations in samples.
Principles of operation topics include:
• c System principles of operation, page 3-2
Provides an overview of the technology, optical measurements,
and protocols used for c System assay processing.
• i System principles of operation, page 3-24
Provides an overview of the technology, optical measurements,
and protocols used for i System assay processing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
c System principles of operation Section 3
c System principles of operation

ARCHITECT c System principles of operation provides an overview of
the photometric and potentiometric assay methods, assay processing,
and the SmartWash feature used for analyte measurement.
Information also includes an overview of sample interference indices
for lipemic, hemolyzed, and icteric samples.
c System principles of operation topics include:
• Photometric method, page 3-2
• Potentiometric method, page 3-6
• Assay processing (c 4000), page 3-13
• SmartWash feature (c System), page 3-19
• Sample interference indices (c System), page 3-20
Photometric method
Photometric method is the process used by the c System to measure
sample absorbance for the quantitation of analyte concentration.
Photometric method topics include:
• Photometric technology, page 3-2
• Optical measurements (c System), page 3-4
Photometric technology
Photometric technology is the measurement of the amount of light a

sample absorbs and involves passing a beam of light through a sample
and measuring the intensity of light that reaches a detector. Beer's Law
establishes the mathematical relationship between the absorbance of
the solution and the concentration of the analyte. The absorbance of
the solution changes as the reaction progresses and measurements are
taken when either all reactant is depleted and the reaction is stable
(end-point assays), or when the reactant reaches a stable rate (rate
assays).
Photometric technology topics include:
• End-point assay reactions, page 3-3
• Rate assay reactions, page 3-3

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 3 c System principles of operation
End-point assay reactions
End-point assay reactions are reactions that are allowed to react until
all reactant is depleted and the absorbance is stable. When the
reaction is complete, the system measures the absorbance readings
used for calibration and calculating results.
For end-point assays, the system calculates the concentration using
the absorbance data obtained during the main read time specified on
the Configure assay parameters window - General Reaction Definition
view.
The following illustration shows a typical end-point assay reaction
curve.
Figure 3.1: Example of an end-point assay reaction curve
Rate assay reactions
Rate assay reactions are reactions that are allowed to reach a stable rate
in which the change in absorbance between readings is constant. The
system performs several readings during this time, calculates
absorbance change per minute (rate), and then uses the rate to
calculate results.
For rate assays, the system uses the linear least squares method to
calculate the change of absorbance per minute ( Abs/min) during the
main read time specified on the Configure assay parameters window -
General Reaction Definition view. The calculation must include at

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
least three photometric points to receive a result without a flag. The

maximum number of photometric points is 33.
The following illustration shows a typical rate assay reaction curve.
Figure 3.2: Example of a down rate assay reaction curve
Optical measurements (c System)
Optical measurement is the process the c System uses to obtain

absorbance readings, and then convert them to assay-specific analyte
concentration units or qualitative interpretations.
Optical measurement topics include:
• Optical system and measurement sequence (c System), page 3-4
• Data reduction calculation (photometric - c System), page 3-6
Optical system and measurement sequence (c System)
The optics system on the processing module is a direct photometry

system that directs and aligns the light from the source lamp, through
the water bath and reaction cuvette, and then into the optics unit. The
system focuses only light that originates from the source lamp and
simultaneously measures the intensity of 16 different wavelengths.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 3.3: Optical system
Legend:
1. Lamp
2. Heat glass
3. Convex lens
4. Water bath lens
5. Cuvette
6. Shutter
7. Convex lens
8. Mirror
9. Entrance slit
10. Diffraction grating
11. Linear photodiode array
12. Preamp board
13. DAQ (data acquisition board)
14. CPU (central processing unit) board
Measurement occurs as the optical system performs the following:
1. A convex lens focuses light from a tungsten halogen lamp and
passes the light through the reaction cuvette to allow
measurement of absorbance changes as the reaction progresses.
2. A second convex lens focuses the light onto the mirror, which
reflects the light through the slit onto the diffraction grating.
3. The grating breaks up the focused light beam into 16 component

wavelengths (340 to 804 nm) and reflects the light spectrum to
the photodiode array.
4. A photodiode array measures the light intensity at the different

wavelengths.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
5. The preamp board, DAQ board, and CPU board convert and
amplify the signal from the photodiode array, and then
communicate transmittance values to the SCC (system control
center) where data reduction and result calculation occur.
Data reduction calculation (photometric - c System)
Data reduction calculation is the method used to calculate the final

absorbance values and result concentration.
The SCC (system control center) receives the transmittance readings
from the processing module for each cuvette, determines the readings
required to calculate the assay, and then converts these readings to
absorbance values. The system uses readings from one
(monochromatic) or two (bichromatic) wavelengths to calculate assay
results. Most assays are bichromatic.
Number of wavelengths measured at How the absorbance values are

each read point calculated
1 - Monochromatic Uses the reading from a single
wavelength.
2 - Bichromatic Subtracts the readings taken at the
secondary wavelength from the
readings taken at the primary
wavelength and uses the difference as
the absorbance value.
NOTE: The system adjusts the absorbance data readings to 10 mm

light path length values.
The absorbance readings are blank corrected (as specified for each
test), and then converted to concentration units.
• Photometric data reduction methods, page Appendix C-2
Potentiometric method
Potentiometry is a detection technology used by the c System to
measure electrical potential in a sample. The c System uses an ICT
(integrated chip technology) module to measure potentiometric assays
(electrolytes).
Potentiometric method topics include:
• Integrated chip technology, page 3-7
• ICT measurement, page 3-7

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Integrated chip technology
ICT (integrated chip technology) is the method the c System uses to

simultaneously measure sodium, potassium, and chloride. ICT
methodology uses solid state ion-selective electrodes contained in a
single chip (ICT module), which reduces the maintenance required to
perform electrolyte measurements.
Electrode Description
Sodium (Na+) A Crown Ether ionophore incorporated into an ion-selective
plastic membrane.
(It is NOT a glass electrode, and therefore is less affected by
pH changes.)
Potassium (K+) Valinomycin incorporated into an ion-selective plastic
membrane.
Chloride (Cl-) A solid silver chloride (AgCl) disk.
Reference A silver/silver chloride electrode in a potassium chloride
(KCl) gel inner solution, separated from the sample by a
porous ceramic tube.
ICT measurement
ICT measurement is the process the c System uses to obtain millivolt

readings, and then convert them to assay-specific analyte conversion
units. The measurements of ICT Reference Solution and ICT samples
are used to calculate the assay results.
ICT measurement topics include:
• ICT reference solution and sample delivery/processing, page 3-7
• Measurement by the ICT module, page 3-11
• Data reduction calculation (potentiometric - c System), page 3-12
ICT reference solution and sample delivery/processing
ICT Reference Solution and ICT samples are delivered to the ICT
module where measurement takes place.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 3.4: ICT Reference Solution delivery
During processing, the following events occur:

1. The ICT reference solution cup is filled with ICT Reference
Solution.
The syringe on the right side of the ICT reference solution pump
moves ICT Reference Solution from the bottle, through the
warming ring, and into the ICT reference solution cup.
2. The ICT Reference Solution is analyzed.

a. The ICT unit moves down to position the ICT probe in the
ICT reference solution cup.
b. The syringe on the right side of the ICT aspiration pump

aspirates ICT Reference Solution from the cup into the ICT
module.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
c. The ICT module measures the ICT Reference Solution and the
system converts the measurements into millivolt readings
used for reference when calculating sample result
concentrations. See Measurement by the ICT module,
page 3-11.
3. Waste is removed.
High-concentration waste
a. The syringe on the right side of the ICT aspiration pump
moves the ICT Reference Solution from the ICT module to
the high-concentration waste compartment.
b. The syringe on the left side of the ICT aspiration pump

aspirates the liquid waste from the high-concentration waste
compartment.
c. The syringe on the left side of the ICT aspiration pump moves
the liquid waste to the high-concentration waste tubing.
Low-concentration waste
a. The syringe on the left side of the ICT reference solution
pump moves the remaining ICT Reference Solution from the
ICT reference solution cup.
b. The syringe on the left side of the ICT reference solution

pump moves the solution into the low-concentration
compartment in the water bath/waste overflow area.
c. Gravity causes the liquid waste to drain from the

low-concentration compartment in the water bath/waste
overflow area into the low-concentration waste tubing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 3.5: ICT sample delivery
During processing, the following events occur:

1. The sample and reagent are dispensed into the cuvette.
a. The sample pipettor dispenses 15 μL of sample into the
cuvette.
b. Reagent pipettor 1 dispenses 345 μL of ICT sample diluent

into the cuvette.
c. Mixer 1 mixes the sample and diluent.
d. The reaction carousel continues to rotate until the cuvette

aligns with the ICT unit. This occurs after:
– 22 reaction carousel movements for c 4000
2. The sample is analyzed.

a. The ICT unit moves out and down to position the ICT probe
in the cuvette.
b. The syringe on the right side of the ICT aspiration pump

aspirates the sample from the cuvette into the ICT module.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
c. The ICT module measures the sample and the system

converts the measurements into millivolt readings used
when calculating sample result concentrations. See
Measurement by the ICT module, page 3-11.
3. Waste is removed.
a. The syringe on the right side of the ICT aspiration pump
moves the sample from the ICT module to the
high-concentration waste compartment.
b. The syringe on the left side of the ICT aspiration pump

aspirates the liquid waste from the high-concentration waste
compartment.
c. The syringe on the left side of the ICT aspiration pump moves
the liquid waste to the high-concentration waste tubing.
Measurement by the ICT module
The ICT module measures:

• ICT Reference Solution - (once before and after each serum
sample and twice before and after each urine sample) to provide
a reference concentration used to calculate results
• Samples - (patient, QC, and calibrators) to obtain the readings
used to calculate results
The following measurements are captured:
• Potential difference between the sample and ICT Reference
Solution for each electrode
• Potential of each electrode in contact with ICT Reference
Solution
• Potential of each electrode in contact with the sample
In the figure below the internal components of the ICT module are
shown on the right. The direction of the sample flow is indicated by
the arrow.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 3.6: ICT module and internal components
Legend:
1. O-ring
2. Liquid junction ceramic tube
3. Inner solution (KCl gel)
4. Ref electrode
5. Cl- electrode
6. K+ electrode
7. Na+ electrode
Data reduction calculation (potentiometric - c System)

result concentration. For each sample, the system compares the
millivolt readings from the sample to the millivolt readings from the
ICT Reference Solution analyzed immediately after the sample. The
difference in the millivolt readings is used to calculate the assay
results.
• Potentiometric data reduction method, page Appendix C-8

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay processing (c 4000)

Many kinds of assay processing activities take place between sample
aspiration and the final read. Components located around the
reaction carousel perform these activities.
Figure 3.7: c 4000 assay processing components
Legend:
1. Sample pipettor
2. Sample probe wash cup
3. Reagent pipettor (1) and wash cup
4. Reagent pipettor (2) and wash cup
5. ICT unit
6. Cuvette washer
7. Mixers (2)
8. Mixer wash cups (2)
9. Lamp
10. Cuvette segments (11)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
The movement of the reaction carousel, the timing of these

movements, and the position of the components allow each reaction
activity to occur at a specified time and location.
During processing, the reaction carousel rotates clockwise
approximately 1 and 1/4 turns every 9 seconds to position the cuvettes
at each location. Each rotation increments the carousel 124 cuvette
positions. As each rotation occurs the cuvettes pass the photometric
position, where the lamp is located, and the absorbance is measured in
each cuvette.
The following illustration shows key positions on the reaction carousel
where activities occur.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 3.8: Reaction carousel positions
The following information describes the movement and timing used

in all assay protocol types.
Position(s) Description
1 The sample pipettor dispenses sample into the cuvette at
the starting position.
2 The reaction carousel rotates approximately 1 and 1/4 turns
(124 cuvette positions). The cuvette containing sample is
now at the first reagent dispense position. Reagent pipettor
1 dispenses reagent 1 in the cuvette.
3 The reaction carousel rotates one cycle (1 and 1/4 turns) to
the first mixing position where the mixer unit (mixer 1) mixes
the sample and reagent 1.
NOTE: Each time the reaction carousel rotates, the

cuvette passes the photometric position where the lamp
is located and the photometer measures the absorbance.
4 The reaction carousel rotates one cycle to this position at
which no activity takes place.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
5 The reaction carousel has completed 4 cycles. Each cycle
rotates the reaction 124 cuvette positions (approximately 1
and 1/4 turns). Since there are 99 cuvettes in the reaction
carousel, each cycle indexes the carousel 25 cuvette
positions (124 - 99 = 25). After 4 cycles the cuvette is now
one position beyond the original starting position (4 x 25 =
100).
6 - 68 The reaction carousel continues to rotate and the reaction
mixture incubates. The photometer takes absorbance
readings every time the cuvette passes the photometric
position. Although the cuvette passes the photometric
position 68 times, the c 4000 processing module only uses
up to 33 absorbance readings for calculation of results.
69-97 The cuvette washer removes the reaction mixture to waste
and cleans the cuvette with Alkaline Wash, Acid Wash, and
DI water. Then the cuvette washer dispenses DI water into
the cuvette for a water blank measurement to ensure
cuvette integrity. Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the
water and dries the cuvette.
100 The clean cuvette waits for new sample dispense.
Some assay protocols may also use the following locations.
5 If onboard dilution is required, the sample pipettor aspirates
the diluted sample and dispenses the sample into the new
cuvette that is currently at position 1.
22 For an ICT sample, the ICT probe aspirates the diluted
sample into the ICT unit.
37 If the reaction requires a second reagent, reagent pipettor 2
dispenses reagent 2 into the cuvette.
38 The mixer unit (mixer 2) mixes the second reagent with the
sample and reagent mixture.
The following illustration shows the relationship between the timing

of photometric reads and the dispense of samples and reagents.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 3.9: Photometric timing (c 4000)
• Assay processing for a one-reagent protocol (c 4000), page 3-17
• Assay processing for a two-reagent protocol (c 4000), page 3-18
• Assay processing for a dilution protocol (c 4000), page 3-18
• Assay processing for an ICT protocol (c 4000), page 3-19
Assay processing for a one-reagent protocol (c 4000)
The following steps describe the c 4000 operation and photometric

reaction that occurs during one-reagent assay processing.
• In position 1 the sample pipettor aspirates sample, and then
dispenses it into a cuvette.
• In position 2 reagent pipettor 1 aspirates reagent, and then
dispenses it into the cuvette.
• In position 3 the mixer unit (mixer 1) mixes the sample and
reagent.
• In positions 4 - 68 the reaction mixture incubates, and the
photometer takes absorbance readings as the cuvette passes the
photometric position. The reaction completes.
• In positions 69-97 the cuvette washer removes the reaction
mixture to waste and cleans the cuvette with Alkaline Wash,
Acid Wash, and DI water. Then the cuvette washer dispenses DI
water into the cuvette for a water blank measurement to ensure
cuvette integrity. Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the water
and dries the cuvette.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay processing for a two-reagent protocol (c 4000)
The following steps describe the c 4000 operation and photometric

reaction that occurs during two-reagent assay processing.
reagent.
photometric position.
dispenses the second reagent into the cuvette.
• In position 38 the mixer unit (mixer 2) mixes the second reagent
with the sample and reagent mixture.
photometric position.
• In positions 69 - 97 the cuvette washer removes the reaction
mixture to waste and cleans the cuvette with Alkaline Wash,
Acid Wash, and DI water. Then the cuvette washer dispenses DI
water into the cuvette for a water blank measurement to ensure
cuvette integrity. Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the water
and dries the cuvette.
Assay processing for a dilution protocol (c 4000)
The following steps describe the c 4000 operation that occurs when
the sample is diluted prior to sample processing.
• In position 2 reagent pipettor 1 aspirates diluent, and then
diluent.
• In position 5 the sample pipettor aspirates diluted sample, and
then dispenses it into a new cuvette. The sample then follows
the one-reagent or two-reagent assay protocol, as appropriate.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay processing for an ICT protocol (c 4000)
The following steps describe the c 4000 operation and potentiometric

reaction for ICT (integrated chip technology) assays.
• In position 2 reagent pipettor 1 aspirates ICT sample diluent,
and then dispenses it into the cuvette.
• In position 3 the mixer unit (mixer 1) mixes the sample and ICT
sample diluent.
• In position 22 the ICT probe aspirates the diluted sample, and
then the ICT module analyzes the sample.
NOTE: The ICT module analyzes the ICT Reference Solution

once before and after each serum sample and twice before and
after each urine sample to provide a reference concentration
used to calculate results.
• In positions 69 - 97 the cuvette washer removes the reaction
mixture to waste, cleans the cuvette with Alkaline Wash, Acid
Wash, and DI water. Then the cuvette washer dispenses DI water
into the cuvette for a water blank measurement to ensure cuvette
integrity. Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the water and dries
the cuvette.
SmartWash feature (c System)

SmartWash is a feature of the c System that provides an additional
wash process, when needed, for reagent probes, sample probes, and
cuvettes. It is used to prevent assay-to-assay interference when specific
combinations of assays are tested.
If a known combination of assays results in assay-to-assay interference,
you can avoid interference by configuring the combination as a
SmartWash pair. This configuration executes an additional wash
process between measurement of the assays.
NOTE: Abbott reagents are configured with default SmartWash pair

settings.
To prevent consecutive measurement of assays configured as
SmartWash pairs the c System processing module uses the OSS
(optimum sampling sequence) feature, which automatically changes
the sampling sequence.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
OSS feature (c System)

The OSS (optimum sampling sequence) feature is an automatic process
that maximizes processing speed and throughput by allowing the
system to rearrange sampling sequence. This rearrangement prevents
consecutive measurement of interfering reagents, and therefore
reduces the number of required washes and unused cuvettes. If it is
not possible to rearrange the sampling sequence, the system
automatically activates SmartWash.
In the following example assays A, B, and C are ordered and
SmartWash is configured between A and B. The elimination of the
wash cycle shows how throughput is improved when the OSS feature
is used.
OSS feature not used OSS feature used
Cycle System operations Cycle System operations

1 Sampling for assay A 1 Sampling for assay B
2 Wash (empty cuvettes) 2 Sampling for assay A
3 Sampling for assay B 3 Sampling for assay C
4 Sampling for assay C
Sample interference indices (c System)

The sample interference indices are sample measurements that allow
estimation of lipids, hemoglobin, and bilirubin present in lipemic,
hemolyzed, and icteric samples, respectively. The estimation is based
on absorbance measurement of:
• Turbidity for lipids (lipemia)
• Red color for hemoglobin (hemolysis)
• Yellow color for bilirubin (icterus)
c System interference indices topics include:
• Sample interference indices protocols (c System), page 3-20
• Sample interference indices measurement (c System), page 3-21
Sample interference indices protocols (c System)
The sample interference indices protocols are two different methods

that you can use to measure the lipemia, hemolysis, and icterus for a
sample. Both methods require selection of a reference photometric
assay that the system uses to estimate indices on a sample. You can
select an existing assay for the reference photometric assay (common

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
test file) or create a new assay that is only used for sample interference
indices measurement (extra test file).
The type of assay file you select determines whether an additional
cuvette is used to measure the indices.
The common test file is a protocol that uses an existing assay file such
as AST or ALT as the reference photometric assay. The system
simultaneously measures indices in the same cuvette as the selected
assay and therefore does not impact system throughput.
When determining whether to use the common test file option,
consider:
• Your choice of reference assays is limited to assays that are
measured at different wavelengths than the indices and use a
colorless reagent.
• Extra reagent is used if you do not routinely order the reference
assay on most samples because reagent is dispensed for sample
interference indices even though you do not order the reference
assay.
The extra test file is a protocol that uses an assay file for the reference
photometric assay that is defined to use saline as the reagent. The
system measures the indices using saline and therefore does not
impact reagent use. This method uses an earlier read window than the
common test file method therefore providing a faster turnaround time
for reporting results.
When determining whether to use the extra test file, consider that
throughput is lowered because an additional cuvette is required.
• Sample interference indices measurement (c System), page 3-21
Sample interference indices measurement (c System)
Sample interference indices measurement is the process a c System

uses to measure hemolysis, icterus, and lipemia in a sample once it has
been mixed with the reagent or saline.
Specimens containing interfering substances such as hemolysis,
icterus, and lipemia absorb at different wavelengths as shown in the
following graph.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 3.10: Absorption spectra of NADH and hemolyzed, icteric, and

lipemic samples
NOTE: NADH is the reference absorbance peak.

To measure the three interfering substances, the system measures
absorbance values of four wavelength pairs and, using the appropriate
photometric reads, applies a mathematical calculation to determine
the relative interferent concentration as shown:
• Lipemia = M (a01 x A1 + a02 x A2 + a03 x A3 + a04 x A4)
• Hemolysis = M (a05 x A1 + a06 x A2 + a07 x A3 + a08 x A4)
• Icterus = M (a09 x A1 + a10 x A2 + a11 x A3 + a12 x A4)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Where:
M = M is the correction for the sample
dilution. (reagent volume + sample
volume) / (sample volume).
• a01, a02, a03, and a04 = Constants specific to each interferrant
(lipemic) are used by the system to calculate the
• a05, a06, a07, and a08 sample interference indices. Constants
(hemolysis) are not user definable.
• a09, a10, a11, and a12

(icterus)
Absorbance level measured at = (absorbance primary wavelength -
wavelength pairs absorbance secondary wavelength.)
• A1 (500 nm/524 nm)
• A2 (572 nm/604 nm)
• A3 (628 nm/660 nm)
• A4 (524 nm/804 nm)
• Sample interference indices protocols (c System), page 3-20

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
i System principles of operation Section 3
i System principles of operation

ARCHITECT i System principles of operation provides an overview of
the CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay)
technology, assay processing, and optical system used for analyte
measurement.
i System principles of operation topics include:
• CMIA method, page 3-24
• Assay processing (i 1000SR), page 3-29
CMIA method
CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) is a detection
method used by an i System to measure and quantify analyte
concentration.
CMIA method topics include:
• CMIA technology and reaction sequence, page 3-24
• Optical measurements (i System), page 3-27
CMIA technology and reaction sequence
CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) is a technology

used to determine the presence of antigens, antibodies, and analytes
in samples.
The reactants necessary for CMIA technology include:
• Paramagnetic microparticles coated with a capture molecule
(antigen, antibody, or viral particle) specific for the analyte being
measured
• Acridinium-labeled conjugate
• Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution
The following graphic symbols are used to represent these reactants.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 3 i System principles of operation
Figure 3.11: Graphical symbols
Legend:
1. Anti-analyte microparticle with capture molecule
2. Sample analyte measured
3. Acridinium-labeled conjugate
4. Sample analyte not measured
A CMIA reaction sequence is the order of interactions between the
analyte present in the sample and the reactants. A sequence is specific
to the assay protocol.
The following two-step reaction sequence illustrates the basic
principles of a reaction.
1. The pipettor dispenses microparticles (paramagnetic
microparticles coated with capture molecules) into the sample in
the reaction vessel. The vortexer mixes the reaction mixture.
Figure 3.12: Sample and microparticle binding
2. The reaction mixture incubates and the analyte present in the

sample binds to the corresponding capture molecules on the
microparticles forming the immune complex.
3. A magnet attracts the paramagnetic microparticles (bound to the

specific analyte) to a wall of the reaction vessel. The wash zone
manifold washes the reaction mixture to remove unbound
materials. Further processing can now take place.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 3.13: Magnet attracting paramagnetic microparticles
4. The pipettor dispenses a chemiluminescent acridinium-labeled

conjugate. The conjugate binds to the immune complex to
complete the reaction mixture.
Figure 3.14: Addition of the acridinium-labeled conjugate
5. The reaction mixture incubates.
6. The wash zone manifold washes the reaction mixture to remove

unbound materials.
7. The pre-trigger nozzle dispenses Pre-Trigger Solution (hydrogen

peroxide) and the CMIA optical system takes a background read.
Pre-trigger performs the following functions:
– Creates an acidic environment to prevent early release of
energy (light emission).
– Helps to keep microparticles from clumping.
– Splits acridinium dye off the conjugate bound to the
microparticle complex. This action prepares the acridinium
dye for the next step.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
8. The trigger nozzle dispenses Trigger Solution (sodium hydroxide)

to the reaction mixture. The acridinium undergoes an oxidative
reaction when exposed to peroxide and an alkaline solution.
This reaction causes the chemiluminescent reaction to occur.
N-methylacridone forms and releases energy (light emission) as
it returns to its ground state.
9. The CMIA optical system measures the chemiluminescent

emission (activated read) over a predefined time period to
quantitate the analyte concentration or to determine qualitative
interpretations for index (cutoff) assays.
• Assay processing for One step 25 (i 1000SR), page 3-31
• Assay processing for Two step 18-4 (i 1000SR), page 3-33
• Pretreatment (i 1000SR), page 3-36
• STAT assay processing for One step 11 (i 1000SR), page 3-38
• STAT assay processing for Two step 4-4 (i 1000SR), page 3-40
Optical measurements (i System)
Optical measurement is the process an i System uses to obtain RLU

(relative light unit) readings, and then convert them to assay-specific
analyte concentration units or qualitative interpretations for index
(cutoff) assays.
Optical measurement topics include:
• Optical system and measurement sequence (i System), page 3-27
• Data reduction calculation (i System), page 3-29
Optical system and measurement sequence (i System)
The optical system on the processing module is a system that directs

the chemiluminescent emission from the reaction vessel to the CMIA
(chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) reader.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 3.15: Optical system
Legend:
1. Photomultiplier tube (PMT)
2. CMIA reader
3. Light pipe
4. Trigger Solution delivery nozzle
5. Reaction vessel
6. Magnet
7. CMIA shutter assembly
Measurement occurs as the optical system performs the following:
1. Closes the shutter around the reaction vessel to seal off ambient
light
2. Turns on the high voltage to the PMT (photomultiplier tube),

takes a background read (Pre-Trigger Solution has already been
dispensed), and transfers the data to the CPU (central processing
unit)
3. Dispenses Trigger Solution into the reaction vessel
NOTE: This solution initiates the chemiluminescent reaction

that results in the emission of photons of light.
4. Uses the light pipe to collect the emitted light and directs it to
the PMT, which is in the CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle
immunoassay) reader
5. Takes the activated read by collecting the emitted photons of

light

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6. Transfers the count data to the CPU
NOTE: The chemiluminescent light produced during this

reaction is directly or indirectly proportional to the amount of
analyte present in the sample, depending on the type of assay.
7. Sums the signal over a defined time period to yield the RLU
(relative light unit)
8. Turns off the high voltage PMT
9. Opens the shutter
Data reduction calculation (i System)

read in RLUs (relative light units). The calculation is:
Final Read (RLU) = Activated Read - Background
In performing the data reduction calculation the system:
1. Sums the signal measured by the CMIA optical system
2. Verifies that:
– Background counts fall within an acceptable range
– Activated read profile falls within an acceptable set of ranges
3. Subtracts the background counts from the activated read counts

to calculate the final read and converted it to concentration
units
• i System data reduction methods, page Appendix C-14
Assay processing (i 1000SR)

Many kinds of assay processing activities take place between sample
aspiration and the final read. The movement of the process path, the
timing of these movements, and the position of the components allow
each reaction activity to occur at a specified time and location.
The following illustration shows the components surrounding the
process path that are used for assay measurements.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 3.16: System assay processing components (i 1000SR)
Legend:
1. RV Loader assembly (RVL)
2. Upper waste manifold (UWM)
3. Wash zone manifold (WM)
4. Wash zone outlet diverter (WZOD)
5. Pipettor wash (PW)
6. RV access door (RVA)
7. Vortexer 2 (VTX2)
8. Pipettor (P)
9. Pre-trigger/trigger manifold (PT/T)
10. CMIA reader (CMIA)
11. Vortexer 1 (VTX1)
12. Process path (PP)
13. Unload diverter (ULD)
14. Unloader (UL)
15. Process path motor (PPM)
16. Wash zone inlet diverter (WZID)
17. Pipettor syringe (PS)
i System technology, known as Chemiflex technology, provides you
with a variety of protocols or assay processing methods. Depending on
the type of protocol, assay processing steps occur at different positions
on the process path.
The Intelli-flow feature of the i1000SR System provides a robust wash
process for the pipettor probe by using an enhanced wash cup design

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
and wash algorithm. This wash process is accomplished by increasing

the wash flow rate when required to minimize interferences. In
addition the software provides a smart-scheduler to minimize assay to
assay interferences when specific combinations of assays are tested.
• Pretreatment (i 1000SR), page 3-36
• STAT assay processing for Two step 4-4 (i 1000SR), page 3-40
Assay processing for One step 25 (i 1000SR)
A One step 25 assay protocol is a method of assay processing in which

the sample and all required reagents are added prior to washing the
microparticles. Total processing time for a One step 25 assay is 29
minutes including a 25 minute incubation time. See Pretreatment (i
1000SR), page 3-36, for additional processing required by pretreatment
assays.
The following steps describe i 1000SR operation and CMIA
(chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) reaction that occurs
during One step 25 assay processing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 3.17: Assay processing for One step 25 (i 1000SR)
Inner process path track:

1. The pipettor dispenses the sample into the Reaction Vessel (RV)
at position 1.
2. The pipettor dispenses the microparticles and acridinium-labeled

conjugate into the RV at position 2.
3. Vortexer 1 mixes the sample, microparticles, and conjugate at

position 3.
4. The reaction mixture incubates for 25 minutes. (3 complete

revolutions around the process path track)
Outer process path track:
5. The wash zone inlet diverter directs the RV with the reaction
mixture to the outer track. The wash zone manifold washes the
reaction mixture in the RV and then removes unbound
materials.
6. Pre-trigger is dispensed into the RV and Vortexer 2 mixes the

reaction mixture.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
7. The CMIA optical system takes a background read and then

Trigger is dispensed into the RV with the reaction mixture. The
CMIA optical system takes an activated read.
8. The Unloader removes the RV and disposes of it in the solid

waste container.
Assay processing for Two step 18-4 (i 1000SR)
A Two step 18-4 assay protocol is a method of sample processing in

which the sample and some reagents are added prior to washing the
microparticles. The conjugate reagent is added after the microparticles
are washed. Total processing time for a Two step 18-4 assay is 29
1000SR), page 3-36, for additional processing steps required by
pretreatment assays.
The following steps describe the i 1000SR operation and CMIA
during Two step 18-4 assay processing.
Figure 3.18: Assay processing for Two step 18-4 (i 1000SR)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
at position 1.
2. The pipettor dispenses the microparticles into the RV at position

2.
3. Vortexer 1 mixes the sample and microparticles at position 3.

revolutions around the process path track)
materials.
6. The wash zone outlet diverter directs the RV back to the inner
track and acridinium-labeled conjugate is added to the RV in
position 2.
7. Vortexer 1 mixes the reaction mixture.
8. The reaction mixture incubates for 4 minutes.

mixture to the outer track for a second wash.

reaction mixture.
trigger is dispensed into the RV with the reaction mixture. The

waste container.
Assay processing for One step 18 (i 1000SR)
A One step 18 assay protocol is a method of assay processing in which

the sample and all required reagents are added prior to washing the
microparticles. Total processing time for a One step 18 assay is 22
minutes including an 18 minute incubation time. See Pretreatment (i
1000SR), page 3-36, for additional processing required by pretreatment
assays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

at position 1.

3. Vortexer 1 mixes the sample, microparticles, and conjugate at

position 3.

revolutions around the process path track.)
materials.

reaction mixture.


waste container.
Assay processing for Two step 11-4 (i 1000SR)
A Two step 11-4 assay protocol is a method of sample processing in

which the sample and some reagents are added prior to washing the
microparticles. The conjugate reagent is added after the microparticles
are washed. Total processing time for a Two step 11-4 assay is 22
1000SR), page 3-36, for additional processing steps required by
pretreatment assays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
at position 1.

2.

revolution around the process path track.)
materials.
position 2.


reaction mixture.

waste container.
Pretreatment (i 1000SR)
Pretreatment is the performance of additional steps prior to

performing one-step or two-step assay protocols. An i 1000SR
automatically performs these steps if pretreatment is required.
Depending on the type of pretreatment processing, incubation times
and number of pretreatment reagents vary. For information on
processing activities for specific pretreatment types, see:
• Processing for Pretreatment 7 (i 1000SR), page 3-37

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Processing for Pretreatment 7-7 (i 1000SR), page 3-37

• Processing for Pretreatment 14 (i 1000SR), page 3-38
Processing for Pretreatment 7 (i 1000SR)
Performance of Pretreatment 7 requires an additional 7 minutes.

During pretreatment, the system completes the following steps.
1. The pipettor dispenses sample into the Reaction Vessel (RV) at
position 1.
2. The pipettor dispenses the pretreatment reagents to the sample

in the RV at position 2.
3. The reaction mixture incubates 7 minutes. (One complete

revolution around the process path track)
4. At the RV in position 2 the pipettor transfers the pretreated

sample to a new RV in position 1. The one-step or two-step assay
processing protocol proceeds.
5. The Unload diverter unloads the RV used for pretreatment and

discards it into the solid waste container.
NOTE: For more information on assay-specific pretreatment

processing protocols, see the i System assay-package insert.
Processing for Pretreatment 7-7 (i 1000SR)
Performance of Pretreatment 7-7 requires an additional 14 minutes.

at position 1.

3. The reaction mixture incubates 7 minutes. (1 complete

revolution around the process path track.)

sample to a new RV in position 1.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6. The reaction mixture incubates 7 minutes. (1 complete


8. The Unload diverter unloads the RVs used for pretreatment and
discards them into the solid waste container.

Processing for Pretreatment 14 (i 1000SR)
Performance of Pretreatment 14 requires an additional 14 minutes.

at position 1.

3. The reaction mixture incubates 7 minutes (1 complete

revolution around the process path track).

sample to a new RV in position 1.
5. The reaction mixture incubates 7 minutes (1 complete

revolution around the process path track).

7. The Unload diverter unloads the RVs used for pretreatment and
discards them into the solid waste container.

STAT assay processing for One step 11 (i 1000SR)
A One step 11 assay protocol, like a One step 25 assay protocol, is a

method of sample processing in which the sample and all required
reagents are added prior to washing the microparticles. A One step 11

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
assay, however, has a shorter incubation time. After the sample is

aspirated the processing time for a One step 11 assay is 15 minutes
including an 11 minute incubation time.
Figure 3.19: STAT assay processing for One step 11 (i 1000SR)

1. The pipettor dispenses the sample into the RV (reaction vessel) at
position 1.

3. Vortexer 1 mixes the sample, microparticles and conjugate at

position 3.
4. The reaction mixture incubates for 11 minutes. (One complete


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
5. The wash zone inlet diverter directs the reaction mixture to the
outer track. The wash zone manifold washes the reaction
mixture in the RV and then removes unbound materials.

reaction mixture.


waste container.
STAT assay processing for Two step 4-4 (i 1000SR)
A Two step 4-4 assay protocol, like a Two step 18-4 assay protocol, is a
method of sample processing in which the sample and some reagents
are added prior to washing the microparticles. The conjugate reagent
is added after the microparticles are washed. A Two step 4-4 assay,
however, has a shorter incubation time. After the sample is aspirated
the processing time for a Two step 4-4 assay is 15 minutes including an
8 minute incubation time.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 3.20: STAT assay processing for Two step 4-4 (i 1000SR)

at position 1.

2.

materials.
position 2.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
7. Vortexer 1 mixes the reaction mixture.


reaction mixture.

waste container.
STAT assay processing for One step 4 (i 1000SR)
A One step 4 assay protocol, like a One step 25 assay protocol, is a

method of sample processing in which the sample and all required
reagents are added prior to washing the microparticles. A One step 4
assay, however, has a shorter incubation time. Total processing for a
One step 4 assay is 8 minutes including a 4 minute incubation time.
at position 1.

3. Vortexer 1 mixes the sample, microparticles and conjugate at

position 3.

5. The wash zone inlet diverter directs the reaction mixture to the
outer track. The wash zone manifold washes the reaction
mixture in the RV and then removes unbound materials.

reaction mixture.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


waste container.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Performance characteristics and specifications
Section 4
Introduction
<F=0>
Before attempting to operate your system, you may want to familiarize

yourself with its performance characteristics, throughput capabilities
and capacities, specifications, and requirements for samples,
temperature, waste, and clearance.
Performance characteristics and specifications topics include:
• Performance characteristics, page 4-2
Describes the operational mode, detection technique, and
pipetting capabilities of the ARCHITECT System.
• Specifications and requirements, page 4-3
Describes the specifications and system capacities for the
ARCHITECT System.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Performance characteristics Section 4
Performance characteristics
Performance characteristics include the operational mode, detection
technology, and pipetting capabilities of the system.
Performance characteristics topics include:
• c System performance characteristics, page 4-2
• i System performance characteristics, page 4-2
c System performance characteristics

Performance characteristics representative of the c System are
presented in the following table.
Table 4.1: c System performance characteristics
Operational mode Random and continuous access,
priority loading
Detection technology:
• Photometric End-point and rate
• Potentiometric ICT (integrated chip technology)
ion-selective electrodes
Pipetting capability Robotic precision with clot detection
i System performance characteristics

Performance characteristics representative of an i System are presented
in the following table.
Table 4.2: i System performance characteristics
Operational mode Random and continuous access,
priority loading
Detection technology CMIA (Chemiluminescent Microparticle
Immunoassay)
Emission measurement The CMIA optical assembly measures
the chemiluminescent emission from
the reaction vessel and outputs data
corresponding to the quantity of
emission detected.
Pipetting capability Robotic precision with clot detection

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 4 Specifications and requirements
Specifications and requirements

The system specifications and requirements presented are related to
the proper installation and operation of the ARCHITECT System.
Specifications and requirements topics include:
• General specifications, page 4-3
• System capacities, page 4-5
• Physical specifications, page 4-8
• Weight and force specifications, page 4-9
• System clearances, page 4-12
• Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-14
• Electrical safety parameters, page 4-16
• Optical specifications (c System), page 4-16
• Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements, page 4-17
• External waste pump specifications and requirements, page 4-18
• Environmental specifications and requirements, page 4-20
• Computer and interface specifications, page 4-21
• Printer specifications and requirements, page 4-22
• Bar code label requirements, page 4-23
General specifications
General specifications include information about throughput for each
processing module, sample types that can be used on the ARCHITECT
System, the primary components of the system, and the operator
interface components.
General specifications topics include:
• ARCHITECT System specifications, page 4-3
• c System processing module specifications, page 4-5
• i System processing module specifications, page 4-5
ARCHITECT System specifications
General specifications for the ARCHITECT System are presented in the

following table.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Specifications and requirements Section 4
NOTE: Approximate throughput times are presented in the following

table.
Table 4.3: System specifications
Primary components System control center, sample handler,
and processing module
Operator interface • System control center
• Touch-screen monitor
• Keyboard and pointing device
• Processing module keypad (except
for i 1000SR)
• Optional bar code scanner
Throughput c 4000 stand alone:
• Photometric assays only Up to 400 tests per hour
• ICT (integrated chip technology) Up to 600 tests per hour
assays only
• Photometric and ICT assay mix Up to 800 tests per hour
• Individual assay time 4 - 10 minutes
• Warm-up time from cold start Approximately 30 minutes
Throughput i 1000SR stand alone:
• General Up to 100 tests per hour for One step
11 STAT protocol
• Time to first result 29 minutes (non-pretreatment)
36 to 43 minutes (pretreatment)
15 minutes (STAT protocol)*
*18 minutes estimated processing time
including sample handling
Sample types Serum, plasma, or other body fluids.
For more information, see the reagent
manufacturer's assay-specific
documentation (such as a package
Sample volume required See the reagent manufacturer's
assay-specific documentation (such as
a package insert or reagent application
sheet).
Sample probe carryover Less than 0.1 ppm
performance
Quality control Levey-Jennings and Westgard rules
Onboard data storage Hard drive
Stored data protection Optional UPS (uninterruptible power
supply)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
c System processing module specifications
General specifications for the c System are presented in the following

table.
Table 4.4: c System processing module specifications
Bar code readers
• c 4000 (2) Reagent supply center and RSH
Dispensing volume:
• Sample (Photometric): 1.5 - 35.0 μL per test in 0.1 μL
increments
• Sample (ICT): 15 μL per sample
• Reagent 20 - 345 μL per test in 1 μL increments
Temperature:
• Onboard reagent refrigerator 2°C to 10°C
• Reaction mixture 36.7°C to 37.3°C
• Sample carousel Minimum of 10°C below room
temperature
i System processing module specifications
General specifications for an i System are presented in the following

table.
Table 4.5: i System processing module specifications
Bar code readers:
• i 1000SR with RSH (1) RSH
Dispensing volume:
• Sample 2 - 200 μL in 1 μL increments
• Reagent (i 1000SR) 10 - 90 μL in 1 μL increments
• Pre-Trigger Solution 100 μL per test
• Trigger Solution 300 μL per test
Temperature:
• Onboard reagent refrigerator 2°C to 12°C
• Reaction mixture 36.4°C to 37.6°C
Average liquid waste output:
• i 1000SR 1.5 L per hour
System capacities
System capacities include storage information for the SCC (system
control center), processing modules, and sample handlers.
System capacities topics include:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• SCC onboard data storage capacities, page 4-6

• c System processing module capacities, page 4-6
• i System processing module capacities, page 4-7
• Sample handler capacities, page 4-8
SCC onboard data storage capacities
Capacities for the SCC (system control center) are presented in the
following table.
Table 4.6: Onboard data storage capacities
Reagent kits 3,000 kits
Message history log 12,000 messages
Temporary messages 200 messages
Printer spool 10 print requests
QC results 35,000 results
Released results:
• SCC with Pentium IV 50,000 results
• SCC with Pentium II or III 25,000 results
Unreleased results:
• Patient 8,000 test orders, tests in process,
and/or exceptions
• QC 2,000 test orders, tests in process,
and/or exceptions
• Calibrator 1,000 test orders, tests in process,
and/or exceptions
Calibration curves (Inactive) Up to 3 months
Assay files 200 assay files
c System processing module capacities
Capacities for the c System processing module are presented in the

following table.
Table 4.7: c System processing module capacities
Bulk solutions:
• ICT Reference Solution 2L
• Alkaline Wash 500 mL
• Acid Wash 500 mL
c 4000 Reagent supply center:
• Outer carousel 40 - 60 positions
• Inner carousel 25 - 30 positions

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 4.7: c System processing module capacities (continued)

Reaction carousel
• c 4000 99 cuvettes
c 4000 Reaction cuvettes:
• Minimum volume 80 μL
• Maximum volume for photometric 360 μL
reaction
High-concentration waste bottle:
• Volume 10 L
• Weight 22 lbs. (10 kg)
i System processing module capacities
Capacities for an i System processing modules are presented in the

following table.
Table 4.8: i System processing module capacities
Bulk solutions:
• Pre-Trigger Solution 975 mL
• Trigger Solution 975 mL
• Wash buffer reservoir volume 12 L
(i 1000SR)
• Wash buffer reservoir weight 30 lbs. (14 kg)
(i 1000SR)
Reagent carousel 25* reagent positions available for
loading 100 or 500** test kits
*
Does not include use of reagent kits
with > three reagent bottles
**
2000/i 2000SR only
Process path:
i1000SR 23 positions
RVs (reaction vessels):
• Total volume 1000 μL
• Maximum reaction mixture volume 400 μL
RV hopper:
• i 1000SR 360 RVs
Solid waste:
• Container capacity (i 1000SR) 1000 RVs
Liquid waste container (i1000SR)
• Volume 10 L
• Weight 22 lbs (10 kg)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 4.8: i System processing module capacities (continued)

Biohazard bag size:
• i 1000SR 24" X 23" (60.9 cm X 58.42 cm)
Sample handler capacities
Capacities for the sample handlers are presented in the following

table.
Table 4.9: Sample handler capacities (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
Sample carriers 5 positions per carrier
RSH (robotic sample handler) bays 8 bays on an integrated ci 4100
4 bays on an integrated or stand alone
c 4000
4 bays on an integrated i 1000SR (16
sections)
RSH (routine sections) Up to 36 sections on an integrated
ci 4100
Up to 20 sections on a stand alone
c 4000
RSH (priority sections) 0-10 sections (up to 50 positions) on an
integrated ci 4100
0-7 sections (up to 35 positions) on a
stand alone c 4000 and i 1000SR
Physical specifications
Approximate physical specifications for the ARCHITECT System are
presented in the following table. Measurements for the processing
modules and sample handlers do not include the SCC (system control
center) or any optional accessories.
Table 4.10: Physical specifications
Module Depth Width Height Weight
SCC 21" (53.3 cm) 15.5" 22" (55.9 cm) 55 lbs. (25 kg)
(39.4 cm)
c 4000 36" (90.7 cm) 63" (160 cm) 49" (125.1 cm) 1132 lbs.
processing (513.5 kg)
module and
sample
handler

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 4.10: Physical specifications (continued)

Module Depth Width Height Weight
i 1000SR 30" (76.2 cm) 59" (149.9 cm) 49" (124.5 cm) 636 lbs
processing (288 kg)
module and
sample
handler
ci 4100 36" (90.7 cm) 111" 49" (125.1 cm) 1677 lbs.
processing (281.2 cm) (760.7 kg)
module and
sample
handler
Weight and force specifications

Approximate weight and force specifications are presented in the
following tables.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 4.1: ci 4100 footprint
Table 4.11: ARCHITECT ci 4100 weight and force specifications

Total weight 1677.0 lbs. (760.7 kg)
Weight at each foot 1. 256.0 lbs. (116.1 kg)
2. 232.5 lbs. (105.5 kg)
3. 272.0 lbs. (123.4 kg)
4. 265.5 lbs. (120.4 kg)
5. 148.5 lbs. (67.4 kg)
6. 211.5 lbs. (95.9 kg)
7. 138.0 lbs. (62.6 kg)
8. 133.0 lbs. (60.3 kg)

Force at each foot 1. 59.1 lbs./sq. in. (4.2 kg/sq. cm)
2. 53.8 lbs./sq. in. (3.8 kg/sq. cm)
3. 62.8 lbs./sq. in. (4.4 kg/sq. cm)
4. 61.3 lbs./sq. in. (4.3 kg/sq. cm)
5. 48.1 lbs./sq. in. (3.4 kg/sq. cm)
6. 68.2 lbs./sq. in. (4.8 kg/sq. cm)
7. 44.7 lbs./sq. in. (3.1 kg/sq. cm)
8. 43.2 lbs./sq. in. (3.0 kg/sq. cm)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 4.2: c 4000 footprint
Table 4.12: ARCHITECT c 4000 weight and force specifications

Total weight 1132.0 lbs. (513.5 kg)
Weight at each foot 1. 264.5 lbs. (120.0 kg)
2. 291.5 lbs. (132.2 kg)
3. 328.5 lbs. (149.0 kg)
4. 247.5 lbs. (112.3 kg)

Force at each foot 1. 60.5 lbs./sq. in. (4.3 kg/sq. cm)
2. 66.7 lbs./sq. in. (4.7 kg/sq. cm)
3. 75.2 lbs./sq. in. (5.3 kg/sq. cm)
4. 56.6 lbs./sq. in. (4.0 kg/sq. cm)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 4.3: i 1000SR footprint
Table 4.13: ARCHITECT i 1000SR weight and force specifications

Total weight 636 lbs. (288 kg)
Weight at each foot (Approximate 1. 150 lbs. (68 kg)
weight on level floor)
2. 190 lbs. (86 kg)
3. 128 lbs. (58 kg)
4. 168 lbs. (76 kg)

Force at each foot 1. 65 lbs./sq. in. (4.53 kg/sq. cm)
2. 82 lbs./sq. in. (5.74 kg/sq. cm)
3. 55 lbs./sq. in. (3.87 kg/sq. cm)
4. 72 lbs./sq. in. (5.07 kg/sq. cm)
System clearances
System clearances include information about the space required
around the system and processing module(s) so you can safely operate
and service an ARCHITECT System.
System clearance topics include:
• c System processing module with RSH clearances, page 4-13
• i 1000SR processing module with RSH clearances, page 4-13

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
c System processing module with RSH clearances
Clearances for the c System processing module with RSH (robotic

sample handler) are presented in the following table.
Table 4.14: c System processing module with RSH
Power cord length 13' (4.0 m)
(to allow positioning of the module so that it is not
difficult to disconnect the power cord)
Left and right clearances 24" (61.0 cm)
(for access)
Rear clearance:
(for safety access to main circuit breakers, cooling,
airflow, cable and tubing routing, maintenance, and
traffic)
• Single module 30" (76.2 cm)
• Integrated system (with c System processing 30" (76.2 cm)
module)
Clearance above 20" (50.8 cm)
(to open processing center covers)
Front clearance 34" (86.4 cm)
(to open front doors and to access, remove, and replace
bulk solutions, syringe and pump components)
i 1000SR processing module with RSH clearances
Clearance for the i 1000SR processing module with RSH (robotic sample
handler) are presented in the following table.
Table 4.15: i 1000SR processing module with RSH clearances
(to allow positioning of the module so
that it is not difficult to disconnect the
power cord)
Left clearance 3" (7.6 cm)
Right clearance 22" (55.9 cm)
Rear clearance 20" (50.8 cm)
(for safety access to main circuit
breakers, cooling, airflow, cable and
tubing routing, maintenance, and
traffic)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 4.15: i 1000SR processing module with RSH clearances

Clearance above 20" (50.8 cm)
(to open processing center cover) 72" (182.9 cm) from floor
Front clearance 34" (86.4 cm)
(to open front doors and to access,
remove, and replace bulk solutions and
waste)
Electrical specifications and requirements

Electrical specifications and requirements include information about
the circuits, outlet types, and outlet requirements.
Electrical requirements topics include:
• SCC electrical requirements, page 4-14
• c System processing module with sample handler electrical
specifications and requirements, page 4-15
• i System processing module with sample handler electrical
specifications and requirements, page 4-15
SCC electrical requirements
Electrical requirements for the SCC (system control center) are

Table 4.16: Electrical requirements - SCC
AC power:
• Low voltage option • Voltage: 90 - 132 VAC
• Frequency: 47 - 63 Hz
• High voltage option • Voltage: 180 - 264 VAC
• Frequency: 47 - 63 Hz
Circuit breaker that can be reset:
• Low voltage option 14 amp
• High voltage option 12 amp
Outlet (one)
• North America NEMA 5-15 three prong (120 VAC,
15A)
• International IEC 320 M grounded (220 - 240 VAC)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
c System processing module with sample handler electrical specifications and

requirements
Electrical specifications and requirements for the c System processing

module with its sample handler are presented in the following table.
Table 4.17: Electrical specifications and requirements - c System
processing module with sample handler
AC power • Voltage: 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 ±
10% VAC (180 - 264 VAC)
• Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz (47 - 63 Hz)
• North America 20 amp
• International 16 amp
NOTE: If using a system UPS, refer

to the UPS manufacturer’s
specifications.
Outlet (one)
• North America • 20 amps - NEMA L6-20R (250 VAC,
20A, twistlock)
• With 30 amp UPS - NEMA L6-30R
(250 VAC, 30A, twistlock)
• International IEC309 (250 VAC, or 220 - 240 VAC,
16A)
NOTE: If using a system UPS, refer

to the UPS manufacturer’s
specifications.
Rated power consumption 3000 volt amp (3 kVA) maximum
Estimated heat output See Environmental specifications and
i System processing module with sample handler electrical specifications and

requirements
Electrical specifications and requirements for an i System processing

module with its sample handler are presented in the following table.
Table 4.18: Electrical specifications and requirements - i System
processing module with sample handler
AC power
• i 1000SR • Voltage: 110 - 120 or 200 - 240 ±
10% VAC (99 - 264 VAC)
Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz Self
adjusting

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 4.18: Electrical specifications and requirements - i System

processing module with sample handler (continued)
Circuit breaker that can be reset
(i1000SR):
One breaker for each processing
module.
• 110 Volts 20 amp
• 220 Volts 10 amp
Outlet (i 1000SR):
Outlet within 7' (2.1m) of the i 1000SR
processing module.
• North America NEMA L5-20R (125 VAC, 20A, twist
lock)
NEMA L6-20R (250 VAC, 20A, twist
lock)
• International Country specific based on voltage
Power cord length
• i 1000SR 8' (2.5 m)
Rated power consumption:
• i 1000SR 1760 volt amp (1.76 kVA) maximum
Estimated heat output See Environmental specifications and
Electrical safety parameters

Electrical safety parameters for an ARCHITECT System are presented in
the following table.
Table 4.19: Electrical safety parameters
Installation category II (Overvoltage category)
Pollution degree 2
NOTE: Electrical safety parameters have no bearing on performance.
Optical specifications (c System)

Optical specifications for the c System processing module are
Table 4.20: Optical specifications for the c System processing module
Light source Tungsten-halogen lamp
Detector Silicon photodiode array
Light path length 5 mm

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 4.20: Optical specifications for the c System processing module

Photometric method Concave diffraction grating
Reaction cuvette Rectangular glass cuvette
c 4000/c 16000 16 wavelengths (340, 380, 404, 416, 450, 476, 500,
Wavelengths 524, 548, 572, 604, 628, 660, 700, 748, and 804
nm)
Photometric range -0.1 to 3.2 Abs (converted to 10 mm light path
length)
Linearity 2% at 2.0 Abs
Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements

Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements include
information about water quality, water consumption, the drain port
location, and drain capacity.
Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements topics include:
• c System processing module water and liquid waste specifications and
requirements, page 4-17
• i System processing module water and liquid waste requirements,
page 4-18
c System processing module water and liquid waste specifications and

requirements
Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements for the

c System processing module are presented in the following table.
Table 4.21: Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements -
c System processing module
c 4000 Deionized water consumption 15 L per hour during normal operation
25 L per hour (maximum)
c 4000 Average liquid waste output 15 L per hour during normal operation
25 L per hour (maximum)
Water quality:
• Maximum microbial contamination < 1000 colony-forming units/mL
• Minimum resistivity 1 Meg Ohm - cm @ 25°C (77°F)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 4.21: Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements -

c System processing module (continued)
• Pressure 15 - 25 psi
IMPORTANT: Do not process

samples on the c System when you
are performing maintenance on your
DI water system. After maintenance
is complete, check the pressure to be
sure it is within specifications.
Drainage port:
You must have a drainage port that
meets the following specifications or
you must use the external waste pump
(optional accessory) if the drain is
located in a sink or otherwise elevated.
• Location Within 9.5 ft. (2.9 m) from the rear of
the system
• Height 4" (10.0 cm) above floor level
Drainage capacity 200 L per hour
Liquid waste configuration:
• Two gravity-fed waste tubes Drain into the drainage port or the
external waste pump
• High-concentration waste tube(s) Drains into the high-concentration
– c 4000 (one) waste bottle, drainage port, or the
external waste pump
i System processing module water and liquid waste requirements
Water and liquid waste requirements for an i System processing

module are presented in the following table.
Table 4.22: Water and liquid waste requirements - i System
processing module
Water quality:
• Maximum microbial contamination < 1000 colony-forming units/mL
• Minimum resistivity 1 Meg Ohm - cm @ 25°C (77°F)
Liquid waste Gravity flow to drain at floor level or
external pump to sink
External waste pump specifications and requirements

The external waste pump is optional for use with the c System and/or
i System when a floor drain is unavailable and a sink drain is used.
This accessory pumps waste from the processing module(s) to an
elevated drain located in a sink.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
External waste pump specifications and requirements topics include:

• External waste pump general specifications, page 4-19
• External waste pump electrical specifications and requirements,
page 4-19
• External waste pump clearances, page 4-20
External waste pump general specifications
Physical specifications for the external waste pump are presented in

the following table.
Table 4.23: External waste pump general specifications
Depth 13" (33 cm)
Width 13" (33 cm)
Height 13" (33 cm)
Weight 18 lbs. (8 kg)
External waste pump electrical specifications and requirements
Electrical specifications and requirements for the external waste pump

are presented in the following table.
NOTE: You must manually set the voltage selector switch.

Table 4.24: Electrical specifications and requirements - external
waste pump
AC power:
• North America • Voltage: 115 ± 10% VAC (104 - 126
VAC)
• Frequency: 60 Hz (47 - 63 Hz)
• International • Voltage: 220 ± 10% VAC (207 - 253
VAC)
• North America 1.6 amp
• International 0.8 amp
Outlet (one):
15A)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
External waste pump clearances
Clearances for the external waste pump are presented in the following
table.
Table 4.25: External waste pump clearances
Clearance on either side 5" (12.7 cm)
(for access)
Clearance in front 9" (22.9 cm)
(for access)
Clearance in rear 9" (22.9 cm)
(for access)
Environmental specifications and requirements

Environmental specifications and requirements for the ARCHITECT
System are presented in the following table.
Table 4.26: Environmental specifications and requirements
Heat dissipation (including the
system control center and sample
handler):
• c 4000 2800 BTU/hour (820 watts)
• i 1000SR 2400 BTU/hour (703 watts)
• ci 4100 4500 BTU/hour (1318 watts)
Noise level Does not exceed 85 dB during normal
operation above a reference sound
pressure of 20 μ Pa.
Temperature, operating 15°C to 30°C (59°F to 86°F)
Humidity 10% - 85% (non-condensing) RH
(relative humidity) at 25°C (77°F)
NOTE: For SCC (system control

center) humidity requirements refer
to the component manufacturers'
information.
Altitude 8500 ft. (2590.7 m)
Placement • For indoor use. Do not place in direct
sunlight.
• Avoid drafts from heating and
cooling vents.
Storage and Transport • Keep dry
• Fragile - Handle with care

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Computer and interface specifications

Computer and interface specifications for the SCC (system control
center) of an ARCHITECT System are presented in the following table.
Table 4.27: Computer and interface specifications
Processor Minimum: Intel Pentium II; 350 MHz,
640 Mb RAM
Hard drive (2):
• C drive Minimum: 10 Gbyte
• D drive Minimum: 10 Gbyte
Floppy drive 3.5", 1.44 Mbyte
CD-RW drive:
• Minimum read speed 24x
• Minimum write speed 8x
Operator interface:
• Color monitor Standard VGA connection
• Touchscreen "Surface Wave" glass, USB connection
(i 1000SR)
• Keyboard Standard PC-style 101-key system
• Pointing device PS-2 interface
Optional external modem:
• Speed Minimum 28.8 bps
• PC interface Integrated RS-232
• Cabling RS-232 25-pin serial cable, RJ-11
phone cord and power adapter cable
• Telephone line Direct line (no switchboard interface) is
required. Dedicated line is
recommended, but not required.
Host interface:
• Communications mode Bidirectional
• Communications device Serial RS-232 port
• Baud rate options 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
28800, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps
• Interface reference document CLSI LIS1-A (ASTM E 1381-91) and
LIS2-A2 (ASTM E1394-91)
Processing module interface:
• c System Ethernet, 100 BASE-T
• i System Ethernet, 10 BASE-T

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Printer specifications and requirements

The printer for the SCC (system control center) of the ARCHITECT
System is provided by Abbott Laboratories.
Printer specifications and requirements topics include:
• Printer general specifications, page 4-22
• Printer electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-22
Printer general specifications
General specifications for the printer are presented in the following

table.
Table 4.28: Printer general specifications
Parallel cable length 6' (1.8 m)
Printer electrical specifications and requirements
Electrical specifications and requirements for the printer are presented

Table 4.29: Electrical specifications and requirements - printer
AC power:
• North America • Voltage: 110 or 120 ± 10% VAC (90
- 132 VAC)
• International • Voltage: 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 ±
10% VAC (180 - 264 VAC)
• North America 14 amp
• International 12 amp
Outlet (one):
15A)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Bar code label requirements

Depending on the type of bar code label, requirements include
information about guidelines, format, Sample ID length, label length,
and placement.
Bar code label requirements topics include:
• 1D reagent bar code requirements (c System), page 4-23
• Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-27
1D reagent bar code requirements (c System)
Review the following information to ensure 1D (one-dimensional)

reagent bar code labels meet the recommended guidelines and are
properly placed on reagent cartridges.
• 1D reagent bar code label guidelines, page 4-24
• 1D reagent bar code label data format, page 4-25
• 1D reagent bar code label placement, page 4-26

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
1D reagent bar code label guidelines
Bar code label guidelines for 1D (one-dimensional) reagent bar code

labels are presented in the following table.
Table 4.30: 1D reagent bar code label guidelines
Component Description
Printer type Printer with a minimum resolution of 300 DPI (dots per
inch). Proper maintenance of the bar code printer is
essential.
NOTE: Laser and ink jet printers with resolution less than
300 DPI may not produce acceptable labels. Dot matrix
printers are not recommended.
Label stock Good quality white label stock. Black ink used for bar codes
must be compatible with the label stock used.
The labels are used in the reagent carousels which have
high humidity and condensation levels. The labels should be
water resistant.
NOTE: The contrast between the bars and the

background label must be the maximum possible.
Contact your bar code label supplier for help in increasing
the contrast. If the use of color on the label is desired, a
color band may be used outside the bar code portion of
the label. For optimal performance, it is recommended
that only black bars be used on a white background for the
bar code portion of the label.
Bar code print Label print quality is an important factor affecting the ability
quality of a bar code reader to correctly decode label information.
Performance can be enhanced by using labels with an ANSI
(American National Standards Institute) grade of A, B, or C.
Although bar code labels with ANSI grades lower than C
can provide valid reads, the number of "no reads" is higher
and the possibility of misreads is increased.
NOTE: ANSI document X3.182-1990, "Bar Code Print

Quality - Guideline," presents a standardized
methodology for measuring and grading bar code print
quality. It is good practice to evaluate all bar code labels
according to this methodology. Contact your bar code
label or print supplier for help in grading your labels.
Commercially available verifier systems are also available
to perform these evaluations.
Symbology 128 (recommended) or Interleaved 2 of 5
Length Maximum length of the printed bar code is 2.17" (55 mm)
Height Minimum height of the printed bar code is 0.36" (9 mm)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 4.30: 1D reagent bar code label guidelines (continued)

Quiet zone The quiet zone is the distance from the left edge of the label
to the first black bar and from the last black bar to the right
edge of the label.
Minimum quiet zone distance: 0.2" (5 mm)
Density Minimum density (narrow bar width) is 12 Mils (0.012" or 0.3
mm)
Ratio (wide to Minimum ratio: 2.5:1
narrow bar) Maximum ratio: 3:1
1D reagent bar code label data format
The 1D (one-dimensional) reagent bar code data format includes 18

digits (17 data digits and one checksum digit). A description of the
data format is presented in the following table.
Table 4.31: 1D reagent bar code label data format
Digit Description
1 to 5 Reagent name: A unique number assigned for each
reagent.
Range: 00000 - 99999
6 Cartridge size: Identifies the reagent cartridge size.
Options are:
• 1 = 20 mL (bottle)
• 2 = 50 mL (trapezoid)
• 3 = 100 mL (cartridge)
• 5 = Small (55 mL cartridge)
• 6 = Large (90 mL cartridge)
• 8 = 20 mL (trapezoid)
7 Reagent type: Identifies the reagent type.
Options are:
• 1 = Reagent 1
• 2 = Reagent 2
8 Expiration date (year): Identifies the year the reagent
expires.
Range: 0 - 9
The range selected is the last digit of the year; for example a
range selection of 1 represents the year 2001 or 2011.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 4.31: 1D reagent bar code label data format (continued)

Digit Description
9 to 10 Expiration date: Identifies the day of the year the reagent
expires.
Range: 00 - 52
• 00 = Expires at the end of the 7th day of the year
• 52 = Expires at the end of the last day of the year
NOTE: If you enter a value greater than 52, the reagent

expiration is not tracked.
11 to 13 Lot number: Identifies the unique reagent lot number.
Range: 000 - 999
NOTE: The lot number displayed for the reagent is eight

digits and includes the five digit reagent name and this
three digit lot number.
14 to 17 Serial number: Identifies the unique serial number of the
reagent cartridge.
Range: 0000 - 9999
NOTE: Each cartridge for a single lot of reagent must

have a unique numeric identifier.
18 Checksum: The checksum digit calculated for the bar code
data.
The checksum modulus is Mod 10.
NOTE: When you configure the user-defined reagent for the 1D bar
code labeled reagent, the reagent name that you define must be
identical to characters 1 to 5 of the bar code. See Configure a
user-defined reagent (photometric - c System), page 2-65.
1D reagent bar code label placement
You should affix the bar code label to the reagent cartridge in a
"ladder" orientation where the printed bars are horizontal.
To ensure the entire label is visible to the bar code reader when the
reagent cartridge is loaded into the reagent supply center, do not place
the bar code label lower than 10 mm from the bottom of the reagent
cartridge. Place bar code labels on reagent cartridges as vertically
straight as possible. If the vertical angle exceeds one degree, the bar
code reader may have difficulty locating the required quiet zones.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 4.4: 1D reagent bar code label placement
Sample bar code label requirements
Review the following information to ensure sample bar code labels

meet the recommended guidelines and are properly placed on sample
tubes.
• Sample bar code label guidelines, page 4-28
• Sample ID (identification) length, page 4-29
• Sample bar code label length, page 4-29
• Sample bar code label placement, page 4-30

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Sample bar code label guidelines
Guidelines for sample bar code labels are presented in the following
table.
Table 4.32: Bar code label guidelines
Printer type Printer with a minimum resolution of 300 DPI (dots per
inch). Proper maintenance of the bar code printer is
essential.
NOTE: Laser and ink jet printers with resolution less than
300 DPI may not produce acceptable labels. Dot matrix
printers are not recommended.
Label stock Good quality white label stock. Black ink used for bar codes
must be compatible with the label stock used.
The printed labels should be clean and dry when they are
presented to the bar code reader.
NOTE: The contrast between the bars and the

background label must be the maximum possible.
Contact your bar code label supplier for help in increasing
the contrast. If the use of color on the label is desired, a
color band may be used outside the bar code portion of
the label. For optimal performance, it is recommended
that only black bars be used on a white background for the
bar code portion of the label.
Bar code print Label print quality is an important factor affecting the ability
quality of a bar code reader to correctly decode label information.
Performance can be enhanced by using labels with an ANSI
(American National Standards Institute) grade of A, B, or C.
Although bar code labels with ANSI grades lower than C
can provide valid reads, the number of "no reads" is higher
and the possibility of misreads is increased.
NOTE: ANSI document X3.182-1990, "Bar Code Print

Quality - Guideline," presents a standardized
methodology for measuring and grading bar code print
quality. It is good practice to evaluate all bar code labels
according to this methodology. Contact your bar code
label or print supplier for help in grading your labels.
Commercially available verifier systems are also available
to perform these evaluations.
Symbology Symbologies allowed on the ARCHITECT System include:
• Code 39
• Codabar
• Interleaved 2 of 5
• Code 128 (Subsets A, B, and C)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 4.32: Bar code label guidelines (continued)

Quiet zone The quiet zone is the distance from the left edge of the label
to the first black bar and from the last black bar to the right
edge of the label.
Minimum quiet zone distance: 0.25" (6.35 mm)
Density Minimum density (narrow bar width) is 7.5 Mils (0.0075" or
0.19 mm)
Ratio (wide to Minimum ratio: 2:1
narrow bar) Maximum ratio: 3:1
Sample ID (identification) length
The following factors affect the number of characters that can fit on a
sample bar code label:
• Sample bar code label length, page 4-29
• Sample bar code label placement, page 4-30
• Symbology used
• Density
• Ratio
• Quiet zone
A maximum of 20 characters is allowed on the sample bar code label.
However, the maximum number of readable characters may be less
than 20 for some symbologies due to overall label length, narrow bar
width, and ratio. A minimum of 2 characters is required for samples
loaded on the c System sample carousel when using Code 128
symbology.
IMPORTANT: When the bar code reader scans a bar code label with an
SID containing >20 characters, only the first 20 characters are read.
NOTE: If you print bar code labels (3 of 9, codabar, and I 2 of 5) with

the checksum function enabled, a checksum character is added to the
label. This character is usually added after the last character on the
right and to the left of the stop character. The operator-readable
portion of the label may or may not display this checksum character.
Sample bar code label length
Generally, a 51 mm label fits a 75 mm sample tube and a 76 mm label

fits a 100 mm sample tube.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Sample bar code label placement
You should affix the bar code label to the sample tube in a "ladder"
orientation where the printed bars are horizontal. Correctly labeled
tube, page 4-30, shows an example of correct label placement.
Incorrectly labeled tubes, page 4-31, shows examples of incorrect label
placement.
To ensure the entire label is visible to the bar code reader when the
tube is loaded into the carousel, do not place the bar code label lower
than 8 mm from the bottom of the sample tube. Place bar code labels
on tubes as vertically straight as possible. If the vertical angle exceeds
five degrees, the bar code reader may have difficulty locating the
required quiet zones and the start/stop characters. The bar code label
should not exceed the top of the tube.
IMPORTANT: The operator is responsible for placing the correct bar

code label on the sample tube to ensure proper sample identification.
Figure 4.5: Correctly labeled tube
Legend:
1. Quiet zones
2. Minimum distance from bottom of sample tube: 8 mm

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 4.6: Incorrectly labeled tubes
Legend:
1. Angled placement
2. Edges peeled loose
3. Clear tape over label
4. Flap extending from label
5. Label extending beyond bottom of tube

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Operating instructions
Section 5
Introduction
<F=0>
The flexibility of the ARCHITECT System accommodates many

laboratory environments and workflows. Operating procedures are
included for all system configurations.
Before attempting to operate the system, you should be familiar with
the hardware components of your system and the fundamental
principles of the software user interface. See Use or function, page 1-1.
Operating instructions topics include:
• System startup, pause, and shutdown, page 5-3
Describes how to start up, pause, shut down, cycle power to, and
power off the system and its components.
• Consumable inventory management, page 5-17
Provides a description of the Supply status screen and
instructions for performing consumable inventory management
procedures.
• Reagent inventory management, page 5-49
Provides descriptions of the Reagent status and Reagent history
screens and instructions for performing reagent inventory
management procedures.
• Patient and control orders, page 5-107
Provides instructions for automated ordering of patient and
control samples, descriptions of the Patient order and Control
order screens and instructions for performing patient order and
control order procedures.
• Sample management, page 5-162
Describes how to prepare, load, and unload samples, and how to
initiate processing.
• Patient and QC results review, rerun, and release, page 5-184
Provides descriptions of the Results review and the QC result
review screens and instructions for rerunning tests and releasing
results.
• Patient and QC stored results, page 5-224

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 5
Provides descriptions of the Stored results and the Stored QC

results screens and instructions on how to view and archive
patient and QC results that have been released.
• Exception management, page 5-255
Provides a description of the Exception status screen and
instructions for performing exception management procedures.
• Quality control analysis, page 5-271
Provides descriptions of Westgard rules, Levey-Jennings graph
and QC reports screens, and instructions on quality control
management.
• Report printing, page 5-295
Provides instructions for printing reports and describes the
screens from which you can print each report.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 5 System startup, pause, and shutdown
System startup, pause, and shutdown

You may need to start up, pause, shut down, cycle power to, or power
off the system and its components to:
• Load samples, reagents, and solutions
• Perform maintenance or diagnostic procedures
• Replace components
System startup, pause, and shutdown topics include:
• SCC power off and power on, page 5-3
• Processing module and sample handler cycle power, startup, and
pause, page 5-6
• Emergency shutdown, page 5-14
• Long-term shutdown (i System), page 5-16
SCC power off and power on

You may need to power off and power on the SCC (system control
center) to store configuration information or when indicated for
component replacement or troubleshooting purposes.
See specific procedures to determine if you must shut down the SCC.
To resume normal operation, you must then Power on the SCC,
page 5-3.
SCC power off and power on procedures include:
• Power on the SCC, page 5-3
• Power off the SCC, page 5-4
• Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5
Power on the SCC
Perform this procedure to apply power to the SCC (system control

center).
Prerequisite Power off the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-9
Module status Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Supplies NA
To power on the SCC:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
System startup, pause, and shutdown Section 5
1. Verify the processing module power is off before applying power

to the SCC.
NOTE: If the processing module(s) power is on when you power

on the SCC, communication is not properly initialized between
the system components.
2. Locate the CPU (central processing unit).
NOTE: For the i 1000SR/ci 4100, open the card cage and SCC
center door to access the power switch.
3. Press the power switch on the front of the CPU (central

processing unit) to turn on the SCC.
To power on the processing module and/or sample handler, see Power
on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7.
Power off the SCC
Perform this procedure to shut down and power off the SCC (system
control center) and to ensure that all data is stored before powering off
the system.
NOTE: The sample handler and processing module(s) are not

functional when the system control center is off. To prevent flooding
when your system is connected to an ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic
Reconstitution Module) accessory, do not shut down the SCC if the
ARM is in the process of filling the wash buffer reservoir.
To cycle power to the SCC, see Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
Supplies NA
To power off the SCC:

1. Select F3 - Shutdown on the Snapshot screen.
2. Select OK to initiate shutdown.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3. Wait for the information window to display, and then

simultaneously press the CTRL+ALT+DELETE keys on the
keyboard.
The Confirm Exit window displays.
4. Leave the Shutdown Computer option selected, select OK, and

then wait for the information window to display.
6. Press and hold the power switch on the front of the CPU (central
processing unit) to turn off power to the SCC.
NOTE: The SCC may power off immediately, or it may take up to

10 seconds depending on the type of SCC you have.
Cycle power to the SCC
Perform this procedure to cycle power to the SCC (system control

center) to reestablish communication to the system control center, to
store configuration information, or when indicated for
troubleshooting purposes.
Supplies NA
To cycle power to the SCC:

1. Select F3 - Shutdown on the Snapshot screen.
2. Select OK to confirm the shutdown.
3. Wait for the information window to display, and then

simultaneously press the CTRL+ALT+DELETE keys on the
keyboard.
The Confirm Exit window displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
4. Leave the Shutdown Computer option selected, select OK, and

then wait for the information window to display.
6. Press and hold the power switch on the front of the CPU (central
processing unit) to turn off power to the SCC.
NOTE: The SCC may power off immediately, or it may take up to

10 seconds depending on the type of SCC you have.
7. Turn off the power to the processing module(s) by moving the

power switch down. See Power off the processing module and/or
sample handler, page 5-9 for power switch location.
8. Press the power switch on the front of the CPU to turn on the
SCC.
9. Wait for the Snapshot screen to display. It may take several

minutes to display.
10. Ensure the processing module(s) has been powered off for one
minute (i 1000SR), and then move the power switch up to turn
on power.
Ensure the processing module(s) has been powered off for one
minute (c Systems), and then move the power switch up to turn
on power.
To change the status of the processing module from Stopped to Ready,
see Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12.
Processing module and sample handler cycle power, startup,

and pause
It may be necessary for you to remove power to the processing
module(s) and sample handler to perform certain procedures.
Cycling power involves powering off the processing module and
sample handler followed by applying power. Once the power is on,
you must perform a startup to attain a Ready status.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
You are required to pause the sample load queue to load samples on
the SSH (standard sample handler), and you must pause the sample
carousel (c System) to load samples in the carousel.
You are required to pause the sample handler and the processing
module to load reagents and solutions, and to perform maintenance
or diagnostic procedures.
Processing module and sample handler cycle power, startup, and
pause procedures include:
• Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7
• Power off the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-9
• Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler,
page 5-11
• Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12
• Pause the processing module, page 5-12
• Pause the RSH, page 5-13
Power on the processing module and/or sample handler
Perform this procedure to apply power to the processing module

and/or sample handler.
Prerequisite Power on the SCC, page 5-3
Module status Offline
Supplies NA
To power on the processing module and/or sample handler:

1. Ensure that the SCC (system control center) power is on and that
the Snapshot screen displays.
2. Move the power switch on the lower center rear (i 1000SR) of the
processing module up to the ON/| position to turn on the power.
Move the power switch on the back (c 4000) of the processing
module up to the ON/| position to turn on the power.
NOTE: In a single module system, powering on the processing

module also turns on power to the sample handler.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.1: c 4000 power switch
Figure 5.2: i 1000SR power switch
To change the status of the processing module and sample handler

from Stopped to Ready, see Start up the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-12.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Power off the processing module and/or sample handler
Perform this procedure to power off the processing module and

sample handler during component replacement and troubleshooting
activities.
To cycle power to the processing module and sample handler, see Cycle
power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-11.
To power off the i System for more than two weeks, see Long-term
shutdown (i System), page 5-16.
Prerequisite NA
Supplies NA
To power off the processing module and/or sample handler:

1. Determine which module to power off.
IMPORTANT: To power off all processing modules in a

multi-module system, you must turn the power to each
processing module off.
2. Verify the processing module and/or sample handler are in

Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready status. The processing
module MUST be in one of these statuses to ensure that test
processing is not interrupted.
processing module down to the OFF/O position to turn off the
power.
module down to the OFF/O position to turn off the power.
NOTE: In a single module system, powering off the processing

module also turns off power to the sample handler.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.3: c 4000 power switch
Figure 5.4: i 1000SR power switch

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler
Perform this procedure to cycle power to the processing module

and/or sample handler when indicated for troubleshooting purposes,
and to reestablish communication to the SCC (system control center).
Prerequisite NA
Supplies NA
To cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler:

1. Determine the module to power off.
2. Verify the processing module and/or sample handler are in

Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready status. The processing
module MUST be in one of these statuses to ensure that test
processing is not interrupted.
processing module down to turn off the power.
module down to the OFF/O position to turn off the power.
NOTE: In a single module system, powering off the processing

module also turns off power to the sample handler.
4. Ensure that the SCC (system control center) power is on and that
the Snapshot screen displays.
5. Ensure the processing module has been powered off for one
minute (i 1000SR), and then move the power switch up to turn
on the processing module and/or sample handler.
Ensure the processing module(s) has been powered off for one
minute (c Systems), and then move the power switch up to turn
on power.
To change the status of the processing module and sample handler
from Stopped to Ready, see Start up the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-12.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Start up the processing module and/or sample handler
Perform this procedure to change the status of the processing module

and/or sample handler from Stopped to Ready to:
• Initialize the processing module and/or sample handler
• Prepare for sample processing
Prerequisite Power on the SCC, page 5-3
Power on the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-7
Access the Snapshot screen, page 1-20
Module status Stopped
Supplies NA
To start up the processing module and/or sample handler:

1. Select the processing module graphic and/or sample handler
graphic on the Snapshot screen, and then select F5 - Start-up.
2. Verify the status(es) when startup is complete:

– Ready or Warming (processing module)
– Ready (sample handler)
To initiate a run, see Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH),
page 5-177.
• Processing modules, page 1-25
Pause the processing module
Perform this procedure to change the status of the processing module

from Running to Ready to:
• Load reagents (except for i 1000SR)
• Load bulk solutions
• Perform maintenance or diagnostic procedures
• Perform component replacement

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: Some tests with a status of Scheduled may become exceptions

and will not be processed.
Module status Processing module - Running
Supplies NA
To pause the processing module:

1. Select the desired processing module graphic on the Snapshot
screen, and then select F7 - Pause.
2. Select OK to pause the processing module.
NOTE: If you are pausing a c 4000 module, open the reagent

supply center access door to view the access button. Once the
button is illuminated press the button to access the reagent
supply center.
To resume processing module operation, see Initiate or resume sample
processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-177.
Pause the RSH
Perform this procedure to pause the RSH (robotic sample handler) so

you can:
• Remove a sample carrier from the priority bay or section when
the amber indicator is illuminated
• Remove a carrier tray from a routine bay(s) or section(s) when
the amber indicator is illuminated
• Perform maintenance or diagnostic procedures (c 4000/i 1000SR)
You may also perform this procedure to pause the RSH prior to
pausing a processing module(s) so that samples are not transported to
the module(s).
NOTE: When you pause the RSH, the sample handler status
transitions from Running to Scheduled pause. The processing module

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
completes aspirations for all scheduled tests and the RSH returns the
carriers to their original locations. It may take up to 45 minutes for the
sample handler to complete this process. If you do not initiate a run
on the sample handler during that time, the sample handler status
changes to Ready.
To pause the processing module, see Pause the processing module,
page 5-12.
Module status Running
Supplies NA
To pause the RSH:

1. Select the sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen, and
then select F7 - Pause.
2. Select OK to pause the RSH.

To return to Running status, see Initiate or resume sample processing
(RSH and SSH), page 5-177.
• Loading samples (RSH), page 5-168
• Load samples for processing (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR /ci 4100),
page 5-170
• Unload samples (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 5-181
Emergency shutdown
When an unusual circumstance indicates that an emergency may
exist, turn off the power to the ARCHITECT System.
Steps for turning off the power vary slightly based on whether you
have a single or multi-module system.
• Emergency shutdown recovery (RSH), page 5-15
• Perform an emergency shutdown on a c 4000, page 5-15
• Perform an emergency shutdown on an i 1000SR, page 5-15

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Emergency shutdown recovery (RSH)
If a carrier is in the RSH (robotic sample handler) carrier transport

when you perform an emergency shutdown, samples and the
surrounding area may be contaminated by sample splashing as the
carrier transport motor loses power.
IMPORTANT: You must remove the sample carrier(s) from the carrier
transport and positioner(s) and then discard all sample cups and/or
tubes.
• Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and aspiration area
(RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 10-696
Perform an emergency shutdown on a c 4000
Perform this procedure to stop the sample handler and processing

module on a c 4000.
To perform an emergency shutdown on a c 4000 system:
1. Move the power switch on the back of the processing module
down to the OFF/O position to turn off the power.
2. Disconnect the main power cord at its receptacle.
NOTE: This AC power cord does not disconnect power to the

System Control Center (SCC).
Perform an emergency shutdown on an i 1000SR
Perform this procedure to stop the sample handler and processing

module on an i 1000SR.
To perform an emergency shutdown on an i 1000SR system:
1. Move the power switch on the lower center rear of the
processing module down to the OFF/O position to turn off the
power.
2. Disconnect the main power cord at its receptacle.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: This AC power cord does not disconnect power to the

System Control Center (SCC).
Long-term shutdown (i System)

Whenever you shut down an ARCHITECT i System for more than
seven days, you must perform the processing module specific Long
Term Shutdown diagnostic procedure. This diagnostic procedure:
• Flushes all pumps with deionized water and then air (i 1000SR)
• Removes all RVs
For instructions on how to perform a diagnostic procedure, see Perform
a diagnostic procedure, page 10-654.
An internal decontamination must be performed prior to start up after
a long-term shutdown. Contact your Area Customer Support for more
information.
• 2138 Long Term Shutdown, page 10-673 (i 1000SR)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 5 Consumable inventory management
Consumable inventory management

Always check consumable inventory before processing samples. Use
the Supply status screen to check inventory.
Consumable inventory management topics include:
• Supply status screens, page 5-17
• ARCHITECT System procedures - consumable inventory management,
page 5-22
• c System procedures - consumable inventory management, page 5-23
• i System procedures - consumable inventory management, page 5-35
Supply status screens

From the Supply status screen you can view the status of supplies on
board the system and the waste status. The view that displays is
dependent on the processing module configuration of your system.
Supply status screen and views topics include:
• Supply status screen - c 4000 view, page 5-17
• Supply status screen - i 1000SR view, page 5-19
• Windows - Supply status screen, page 5-21
Supply status screen - c 4000 view
From the c 4000 view of the Supply status screen you can:
• View the volume and percent of bulk solutions
• View the volume and percent of onboard solutions in the
reagent supply center
• View the status of onboard solutions in the sample wash
solution area
• View the status of the liquid waste in the high-concentration
waste bottle
• Access a window to update the status(es) of bulk solutions and
onboard solutions
NOTE: The system calculates supply volume and % remaining

information based on tests required for samples that have been
scanned by the sample handler.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Consumable inventory management Section 5
Figure 5.5: Supply status screen - c 4000
For descriptions of these fields, see Supply status screen - c 4000 view
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Supply status screen - c
4000 view, page 5-18.
See Solutions used in daily operations (c 4000), page 1-101 for quick
reference regarding c 4000 solutions.
• Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-23
• Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System), page 5-24
• Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply center and update
inventory (c 4000), page 5-29
• Empty the high-concentration waste bottle (c System), page 5-34
Access the Supply status screen - c 4000 view
Perform this procedure to display the c 4000 view of the Supply status
screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Supplies NA
To access the Supply status screen:
NOTE: You may also access this screen from the Snapshot screen by
selecting the supply status button on the desired c 4000 processing
module graphic.
Select Supplies from the menu bar, and then select Supply status.
The Supply status screen - c 4000 view displays.
Supply status screen - i 1000SR view
From the i 1000SR view of the Supply status screen you can:
• View the volume and percent of bulk solutions
• View the status of solid waste
• View the volume and percentage of liquid waste
• View the status of RVs (reaction vessels)
• Access a window to update the status(es) of bulk solutions, solid
waste, RVs, and liquid waste
NOTE: The system calculates supply volume and % remaining

information based on tests required for samples that have been
scanned by the sample handler.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.6: Supply status screen - i 1000SR view
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Supply status screen - i
1000SR view, page 5-20.
• Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-23
• Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 1000SR), page 5-36
• Empty liquid waste and update inventory (i 1000SR), page 5-38
• Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 1000SR), page 5-40
• Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 1000SR),
page 5-42
• Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i
1000SR), page 5-46
Access the Supply status screen - i 1000SR view
Perform this procedure to display the i 1000SR view of the Supply

status screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To access the Supply status screen:
selecting the supply status button on the desired i 1000SR processing
module graphic.
Select Supplies from the menu bar, and then select Supply status.
The Supply status screen - i 1000SR view displays.
Windows - Supply status screen
The window you can access from the Supply status screen is:
• Update supplies window - c 4000 view, page 5-21
• Update supplies window - i 1000SR view, page 5-22
Update supplies window - c 4000 view
From the c 4000 view of the Update supplies window you can update
supply information so the system can accurately track onboard supply
inventory.
Figure 5.7: Update supplies window - c 4000 view
For descriptions of these fields, see Update supplies window - c 4000 view

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Update supplies window - i 1000SR view
From the i 1000SR view of the Update supplies window you can update
supply information so the system can accurately track onboard supply
inventory.
Figure 5.8: Update supplies window - i 1000SR view
For descriptions of these fields, see Update supplies window - i 1000SR

page 5-42
1000SR), page 5-46
ARCHITECT System procedures - consumable inventory

management
The procedure that is common to both the c System and i Systems is
Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-23.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Verify supply and waste inventory
Perform this procedure before initiating sample processing to verify

adequate supply inventory levels or when the supply status button on
the processing module(s) graphic(s) displays a caution icon.
NOTE: The status that displays reflects the inventory that remains
after the system processes the samples that have been scanned by the
sample bar code reader.
You can create orders when inventory levels are insufficient. However,
if inventory is not adequate when you initiate sample processing, tests
become exceptions and are not processed.
Prerequisite Access the Supply status screen - c 4000 view,
page 5-18
Access the Supply status screen - i 1000SR view,
page 5-20
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To verify supply and waste inventory:

1. Select the desired Module option.
The Supply status screen for the selected module displays.
2. View the inventory of supplies and waste.
c System procedures - consumable inventory management

c System consumable inventory management procedures include:
• Prepare 0.5% acid wash solution (c System), page 5-26
• Prepare detergent A (c System), page 5-27
• Prepare 10% detergent B solution (c System), page 5-28

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Replace onboard solutions in the sample wash solution area and

update inventory (c 4000), page 5-32
• Empty the high-concentration waste bottle (c System), page 5-34
Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System)
Perform this procedure to replace and update ICT Reference Solution,

Acid Wash, or Alkaline Wash inventory when the bottle is empty or
the solution is expired.
Prerequisite Access the Supply status screen - c 4000 view,
page 5-18
Supplies • ICT Reference solution
• Alkaline Wash
• Acid Wash
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a

chemical-related hazard. See product-specific information
under Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
To replace bulk solutions and update inventory:

1. Verify the new solution is within the expiration date listed on
the label. DO NOT use the solution if the expiration date is
exceeded.
2. Open the supply center door.
3. Remove the used bottle from the weight platform, and then
place the used bottle on the floor in front of the supply center.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
4. Verify the following:

– liquid or dried solution has not accumulated on the weight
platform tray
– excess solution is not present in the bottles (volume is
decreasing over time)
– bottles are not overflowing
If liquid or dried solution has accumulated on the tray, see
Solution/dried solution under bulk solution bottles (c System),
page 10-584.
If excess solution is present or bottles are overfilled, see Wash
solution is not being used (level not falling over time) (c System),
page 10-584.
5. Remove the cap from the new bottle, and then place the bottle
on the floor next to the used bottle.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT pool partially filled bottles of bulk

solutions.
6. Remove the cap and tubing from the used bottle.
7. Insert the tubing into the new bottle, and then press the cap
firmly on the new bottle.
8. Place the new bottle in the correct orientation and the correct
location on the weight platform, ensuring the bottle is securely
seated. The correct bottle orientation is:
– Acid and Alkaline wash - bottle cap and opening in front

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
– ICT Reference solution - bottle cap and opening in back
IMPORTANT: Results can be adversely affected if you do not

load bulk solutions correctly
9. Discard the used bottle in accordance with the waste disposal

procedures for your laboratory. See Waste handling and disposal,
page 8-12, for additional information.
10. Close the supply center door.
11. Select the Module 1 option on the Supply status screen.

The c 4000 or c 8000/c 16000 view of the Supply status screen
displays.
12. Select F2 - Update supplies.

The Update supplies window displays.
13. Select the appropriate Bulk solutions check box(es).
14. Select Done to update supply inventory.
NOTE: The bulk solution inventory is updated to 100%

remaining. Inaccurate tracking will result if a new bottle is not
used.
Prepare 0.5% acid wash solution (c System)
Perform this procedure to prepare a 0.5% dilution of Acid Wash. Acid

wash is an onboard solution used for washing probes.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies • Acid Wash (bulk solution)
• Purified water
• Appropriate reagent cartridge
• Sample cup

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

To prepare 0.5% acid wash solution:

1. Verify that the concentrated acid wash is within the expiration
date on the bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is
exceeded.
2. Add 5 mL of acid wash to 995 mL of purified water and mix.
3. Store the diluted solution in a container labeled with the name

(0.5% acid wash) and the expiration date.
NOTE: The expiration date of the prepared 0.5% solution of acid

wash is the same as the concentrated acid wash.
4. Pour 0.5% acid wash into the appropriate container to be loaded

on the processing module.
5. Label the container with the name (0.5% acid wash) and the
expiration date.
NOTE: The stability of the prepared 0.5% acid wash when placed
onboard the reagent supply centers is 30 days.
The stability of the prepared 0.5% acid wash when placed
onboard the sample carousel is one day.
To replace 0.5% acid wash in the reagent supply center on the c 4000
processing module, see Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply
center and update inventory (c 4000), page 5-29.
To replace 0.5% acid wash in the sample wash solution area, see
Replace onboard solutions in the sample wash solution area and update
inventory (c 4000), page 5-32.
Prepare detergent A (c System)
Perform this procedure to prepare Detergent A. This detergent is an

onboard solution used for washing probes and cleaning cuvettes.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Supplies • Detergent A
• Sample cup

To prepare Detergent A:
1. Verify detergent A is within the expiration date on the bottle
label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded.
2. Gently invert to ensure a homogeneous solution.
3. Pour detergent A into the appropriate container to be loaded on

board the reagent supply center.
4. Label the container with the name (Detergent A) and expiration

date.
NOTE: The stability of detergent A when placed onboard the

reagent supply centers is the expiration date on the bottle label.
The stability of detergent A when placed on board the sample
carousel is one day.
To replace detergent A on the c 4000 processing module, see Replace
onboard solutions in the reagent supply center and update inventory (c
4000), page 5-29.
To replace detergent A in the sample wash solution area see Replace
onboard solutions in the sample wash solution area and update inventory (c
4000), page 5-32.
Prepare 10% detergent B solution (c System)
Perform this procedure to prepare a 10% dilution of Detergent B. This

detergent is an onboard solution used for washing probes.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Supplies • Detergent B
• Purified water

To prepare 10% Detergent B solution:

1. Verify detergent B is within the expiration date on the bottle
label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded.
2. Gently invert 4-5 times to ensure a homogeneous solution.
3. Mix 50 mL of detergent B with 450 mL of purified water.
4. Store the diluted solution in a container labeled with the name

(10% Detergent B) and the expiration date.
NOTE: The stability of the prepared 10% detergent B is 14 days.
5. Pour the 10% detergent B into the appropriate container to be

loaded onboard the reagent supply center.
6. Label the container with the name (10% Detergent B) and the
expiration date.
NOTE: The stability of the prepared 10% detergent B when

placed onboard the reagent supply centers is 14 days.
To replace detergent B on the c 4000 processing module, see Replace
onboard solutions in the reagent supply center and update inventory (c
4000), page 5-29.
Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply center and update inventory (c
4000)
Perform this procedure to replace and update onboard solution

inventory in the reagent supply center when the inventory is empty or
the solution is expired. Onboard solutions in the reagent supply center
may include a 0.5% dilution of acid wash, detergent A, or a 10%
dilution of detergent B.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To change the onboard solution locations, see Change the onboard

solution options (c 4000), page 2-23.
Prerequisite Prepare 0.5% acid wash solution (c System), page 5-26
Prepare detergent A (c System), page 5-27
Prepare 10% detergent B solution (c System),
page 5-28
Access the Supply status screen - c 4000 view,
page 5-18
Module status Ready or Scheduled pause
Supplies • 0.5% dilution of Acid Wash
• Detergent A
• 10% dilution of Detergent B

To replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply center and update

inventory:
1. Pour the appropriate solution into a reagent cartridge.
2. Label the container with the solution name and the expiration
date.
NOTE: The stability of the prepared 0.5% acid wash when placed
on board the reagent supply centers is 30 days.
The stability of detergent A when placed on board the reagent
supply centers is the expiration date on the bottle label.
The stability of the prepared 10% detergent B when placed on
board the reagent supply centers is 14 days.
3. Remove air bubbles, if they exist, with a clean applicator stick.
4. Open the reagent supply center access door.

CAUTION: Moving Parts. Identifies an activity or area
where you may be exposed to moving parts. For more
information, see Mechanical hazards, page 8-18.
5. Verify the reagent supply center access button (1) is illuminated

before accessing the reagent supply center.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: If the module status is Scheduled pause, the button will

illuminate when the reagent supply center becomes available. It
may take up to five minutes after you pause the module for the
reagent supply center to become available.
6. Remove and replace the onboard solutions in the reagent supply

center by performing the following steps:
a. Press the reagent supply center access button (1) to open the
cover.
b. Press the carousel advance button (2) after the button

illuminates to advance the reagent supply center to access
the position.
c. Remove the empty or expired solution and place the fresh

solution in the position.
d. Press the reagent supply center access button to close the

cover.
7. Discard the used cartridge in accordance with the waste disposal

8. Close the reagent supply center access door.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
9. Select run to resume processing if the module status is Scheduled

pause or perform the following steps to update supplies if the
module status is Ready.
To update supplies:
a. Select F2 - Update supplies.
b. Select the appropriate Reagent supply center check box(es).
c. Select Done to update the supply information.
NOTE: The inventory of the solution indicates that the reagent

cartridge is completely full. The inventory updates with the
actual remaining volume when the solution is accessed during a
run.
Replace onboard solutions in the sample wash solution area and update inventory
(c 4000)
Perform this procedure to replace and update onboard solution

inventory in the sample wash solution area when the sample cup or
tube is empty or the solution is expired. Onboard solutions in the
sample wash solution area may include 0.5% Acid Wash and
Detergent A.
Prerequisite Prepare 0.5% acid wash solution (c System), page 5-26
Prepare detergent A (c System), page 5-27
Access the Supply status screen - c 4000 view,
page 5-18
Module status Ready
Supplies • 0.5% Acid Wash
• Detergent A
• Sample cups or tubes

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

To replace onboard solutions in the sample wash solution area and

update inventory:
1. Pour the appropriate onboard solution into a sample cup
(sample cups must be used in conjunction with sample tubes) or
tube.
A minimum of 500 μL onboard solution is required.
NOTE: The stability of onboard solutions in the sample wash

solution area is one day.
2. Open the processing module cover.
3. Locate the sample wash solution area.
4. Remove the sample wash solution carrier (1).
5. Remove the empty or expired solution and place the fresh

solution in the sample wash solution area as specified:
– 0.5% acid wash in position 1
– Detergent A in position 2
IMPORTANT: You are responsible for loading the correct

solution in the correct position.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6. Discard used sample cups and/or tubes in accordance with the

waste disposal procedures for your laboratory. See Waste handling
and disposal, page 8-12, for additional information.
7. Place the carrier into the sample wash solution area.
8. Close the processing module cover.
9. Select F2 - Update supplies.

10. Select the appropriate Sample wash solution check box(es).
11. Select Done to update the supply inventory.
• Sample wash solution area (c 4000), page 1-31
Empty the high-concentration waste bottle (c System)
Perform this procedure to empty the high-concentration waste bottle

(optional component) when it reaches capacity.
Prerequisite Check the liquid waste inventory in Supply status
screen
Supplies Absorbent towels
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or

area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious
material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.

To empty the high-concentration waste bottle:

1. Disconnect the float switch cable from the waste bottle cap by
unscrewing the locking ring and disconnecting the cable.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2. Place an absorbent towel next to the bottle to catch any spills

from the bottle cap.
3. Unscrew the waste bottle from the cap, and ensure the tubing is
not kinked.
4. Place the cap with the attached tubing on the absorbent towel.
5. Dispose of liquid waste in accordance with the waste disposal

CAUTION: Lifting Hazard. The ARCHITECT c System
high-concentration waste bottle is heavy when full.
Obtain assistance with lifting and/or use mechanical
devices to move and/or lift full or partially full waste
containers to reduce risk of injury. See Heavy objects,
page 8-21.
CAUTION: Prevent spills. Do not move open waste

containers with liquid. Close full or partially full
containers before attempting to move them and keep the
closures in place during the move.
6. Screw the cap onto the waste bottle, and ensure the tubing is not
kinked.
7. Reconnect the float switch cable by inserting the cable and

tightening the locking ring.
NOTE: The Supply status screen updates automatically when

you reconnect the float switch cable.
i System procedures - consumable inventory management

i System consumable inventory management procedures include:
• Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-41

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

page 5-42
1000SR), page 5-46
Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure to empty the solid waste container and to

update the waste status. The solid waste container holds used RVs
(reaction vessels).
Prerequisite Access the Supply status screen - i 1000SR view,
page 5-20
Module status Any
Supplies Biohazard bag


To remove solid waste and update inventory:

1. Open the supply and waste center door.
2. Disconnect the quick disconnect on the liquid waste container,

if present.
3. Grasp the handle and pull out the waste drawer.
4. Lift the solid waste container out of the drawer.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
5. Remove the biohazard bag and discard the bag and its contents
in a biohazard trash receptacle.
6. Install a new biohazard bag in the solid waste container.
NOTE: The biohazard bag must fit snugly and be fully opened in
the solid waste container to allow RVs to drop freely into the
container.
7. Replace the solid waste container and liquid waste container (if
present) into the waste drawer and push the waste drawer back
in place.
NOTE: If the solid or liquid waste container is not replaced

within 30 minutes, sample processing will be paused.
8. Reconnect the quick disconnect fitting on the liquid waste

container.
9. Select the appropriate Module option on the Supply status

screen, and then select F2 - Update supplies.
10. Select the Solid waste check box.
11. Select Done to update supplies.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Empty liquid waste and update inventory (i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure to empty the liquid waste container and to

update the liquid waste status.
page 5-20
Module status Any
Supplies

To empty liquid waste and update inventory:

2. Disconnect the quick disconnect on the liquid waste container.
3. Grasp the handle and pull out the waste drawer.
4. Lift the liquid waste container out of the drawer.

CAUTION: Lifting hazard. The i 1000SR liquid waste
container is heavy when full. Obtain assistance with
lifting and/or use mechanical devices to move and/or lift
full or partially full waste containers to reduce risk of
injury. See Heavy objects, page 8-21.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
5. Discard the liquid waste in accordance with the waste disposal

page 8-12 for additional information.
NOTE: Do not add disinfectant to the liquid waste container

prior to loading it back onto the system.
6. Replace the liquid waste container into the waste drawer and
push the waste drawer back in place.
NOTE: If the liquid waste container is not replaced within 30

minutes, sample processing will be paused.
7. Reconnect the quick disconnect fitting on the liquid waste

container.

9. Select the Liquid waste check box.
10. Select Done to update supplies.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure to replenish and update RV (reaction vessel)

inventory on the processing module. The maximum onboard storage
capacity is 360 RVs.
page 5-20
Module status Any
Supplies Reaction vessels
To replenish RVs and update inventory:

1. Open the RV hopper cover.
2. Add enough RVs to fill the hopper.
NOTE: Do not overfill the hopper.
3. Close the RV hopper cover.

5. Select the Filled hopper check box.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6. Select Done to update RV inventory.
• Reaction vessels (i System), page 1-112
Prepare wash buffer (i System)
Perform this procedure to prepare wash buffer from concentrate.

Prerequisite NA
Module status NA
Supplies • Concentrated Wash Buffer (1 L bottle)
• 10 L wash buffer preparation container
• Purified water
To prepare wash buffer:

1. Verify that the wash buffer is within the expiration date on the
bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded.
2. Invert the concentrated wash buffer bottle several times to

ensure a homogeneous solution.
3. Pour the concentrated wash buffer into the preparation

container.
NOTE: The expiration date of the prepared wash buffer is the

expiration date on the wash buffer label.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
4. Slowly add purified water into the preparation container until

the liquid reaches the 10 L mark.
NOTE: Add the water slowly to avoid foaming. Ensure that the
liquid level is between the two solid lines on the preparation
container.
To load wash buffer, see Replenish wash buffer manually and update
inventory (i 1000SR), page 5-42.
• Concentrated wash buffer (i System), page 1-109
Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure to load wash buffer concentrate into the 12

liter onboard reservoir.
CAUTION: The quick disconnect port above the waste
area is used for manually loading wash buffer.
Prerequisite Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-41

Access the Supply status screen - i 1000SR view,
page 5-20
Module status All except Offline, Initializing, and Maintenance

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Supplies • Prepared wash buffer (room temperature 15°C -
37°C)
• Wash buffer transfer tubing
• Lint-free tissue
• Purified water
To replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory:

2. Put the transfer tubing into the wash buffer preparation

container.
3. Attach the wash buffer transfer tubing to the quick disconnect

above the waste area.

5. Select the Add buffer check box.
6. Select Done.
An information message displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
7. Select OK to initiate buffer transfer.

The Supply status screen displays with a Wash buffer status of
FILL IN PROGRESS.
8. Wait for the fill to complete, and then push the gray button to
disconnect the wash buffer transfer tubing from the quick
disconnect above the waste area.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
9. Remove the tubing from the preparation container.
10. Drain any liquid remaining in the transfer tubing into a sink by
raising the tubing above the level of the sink and depressing the
connector (as indicated in the graphic) in the end of the tubing.
11. Dry the outside of the tubing with a clean soft lint-free tissue,
and then store the tubing in a clean, dry place.
12. Close the supply and waste center door.
13. Rinse the wash buffer preparation container with purified water
and place the container upside down to air dry.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure to replace and update Pre-Trigger and Trigger

Solution inventory when the bottle is empty, has reached the onboard
stability expiration date, or is expired.
page 5-20
Supplies • Pre-Trigger Solution
• Trigger Solution

To replace pre-trigger and/or trigger and update inventory:

1. Verify that the new pre-trigger or trigger is within the expiration
date listed on the label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is
exceeded.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT pool partially filled bottles of pre-trigger

or trigger.
2. Record the installation date in accordance with your current

laboratory procedures.
3. Add the number of days for onboard storage listed on the bottle
label to the installation date.
4. Record this date (onboard expiration date) in accordance with

your current laboratory procedures.
NOTE: This date must not exceed the expiration date of the
solution.
6. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray out.
NOTE: Use caution when handling Level Sensors:

• Avoid bending the tubing connected to the cap
• Avoid stress on the Level Sensor wiring and connectors

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
7. Move the bottle to be replaced to the bottle exchange position in

the middle of the tray.
8. Place the new bottle in the correct location in the tray, as

indicated by the label on the tray.
IMPORTANT: Results can be adversely affected if you do not

load pre-trigger and trigger correctly.
9. Remove the cap from the new bottle and place it in the cap
storage area at the front of the tray.
10. Remove the cap from the used bottle. The level sensor assembly
is attached to the cap.
11. Slide the level sensor and cap into the new bottle, with the arrow
on top of the level sensor facing towards the front.
12. Tighten the cap.
IMPORTANT: Results and inventory status can be adversely

affected if you do not align the level sensor correctly.
13. Place the cap from the cap storage area on the used bottle and
then remove the bottle.
14. Discard the used bottle in accordance with the waste disposal
15. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray back into the module.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
17. Select the appropriate Module option from the Supply status
18. Select the Pre-Trigger and/or Trigger check box(es).
19. Select Done to update the pre-trigger or trigger inventory.
• Pre-trigger solution (i System), page 1-107
• Trigger solution (i System), page 1-108

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 5 Reagent inventory management
Reagent inventory management

Always check reagent inventory before processing samples. Use the
Reagent screens to manage reagent inventory.
Reagent inventory management topics include:
• Reagent status screens, page 5-49
• Reagent history screen, page 5-64
• ARCHITECT System procedures - Reagent inventory management,
page 5-68
• c 4000 procedures - reagent inventory management, page 5-73
• i 1000SR procedures - reagent inventory management, page 5-95
Reagent status screens

From the Reagent status and Reagent status all screens you can view
the status of reagents on board the system. The view that displays for
the Reagent status screen is dependent on the processing module
configuration of your system.
Reagent status screen and views topics include:
• Reagent status screen - c 4000 view, page 5-49
• Reagent status screen - i 1000SR view, page 5-52
• Reagent status screen - View all view, page 5-55
• Descriptions of reagent statuses (except for i 1000SR), page 5-57
• Descriptions of reagent statuses (i 1000SR), page 5-58
• Descriptions of carrier statuses (i 1000SR), page 5-59
• Windows - Reagent status screens, page 5-60
Reagent status screen - c 4000 view
From the c 4000 view of the Reagent status screen you can view
information for reagents loaded on the reagent carousel, such as:
• Reagent location
• Assay name
• Calibration status
• Remaining tests
• Reagent status

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reagent inventory management Section 5
A graphical representation of the reagent carousel indicates the

location of the reagents and their statuses.
You can also access windows to:
• Find a specific reagent
• Update the reagent inventory
• Print the Reagent Load Error report
• Print the Reagent Status report
• View detailed reagent information
• Assign locations for non-bar coded reagents
• Reset volume and stability for non-bar coded reagents
An ellipsis (...) displays when the system cannot display all data on a
screen or a window. View the details window to see all data.
Figure 5.9: Reagent status screen - c 4000 view
For descriptions of these fields, see Reagent status screen - c 4000 field
When accessing the Reagent status screen the information sorts by
reagent position.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The
information sorts as described in the following table.
Column Sort description

R1, R2 R1 carousel position in ascending
order.
ASSAY Alphanumerically in ascending order.
REMAINING TESTS Numerically is ascending order.
CAL STATUS and REAGENT STATUS See Descriptions of calibration
statuses, page 6-19 and Descriptions
of reagent statuses (except for i
1000SR), page 5-57.
To display this screen, see Access the Reagent status screen - c 4000 view,
page 5-51.
• Verify reagent inventory on a single module, page 5-68
• Verify reagent inventory on all modules, page 5-69
• Find a specific reagent, page 5-70
• View reagent details, page 5-71
• Scan the reagent carousel(s) (except for i 1000SR), page 5-73
• Load bar coded reagents (c 4000), page 5-74
• Load sample diluent(s) (c 4000), page 5-76
• Load non-bar coded reagents (c 4000), page 5-79
• Replace sample diluent(s) (c 4000), page 5-82
• Replace non-bar coded reagents (c 4000), page 5-84
• Unload bar coded reagents (c 4000), page 5-87
• Unload non-bar coded reagents (c 4000), page 5-89
Access the Reagent status screen - c 4000 view
Perform this procedure to display the c 4000 view of the Reagent status
screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To access the Reagent status screen:
selecting the reagent status button on the c 4000 processing module
graphic.
Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select Reagent status.
The Reagent status screen - c 4000 view displays.
Reagent status screen - i 1000SR view
From the i 1000SR view of the Reagent status screen you can view
information for reagents loaded on the reagent carousel and RSH
(robotic sample handler), such as:
• Reagent location
• Assay name
• Calibration status
• Remaining tests
• Reagent status
• Carrier status
• Scheduled tests
• Ready to unload time (reagent kit becomes available to unload)
A graphical representation of the reagent carousel indicates the
location of the reagents and their statuses.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.10: Reagent status screen - i 1000SR view
For descriptions of these fields, see Reagent status screen - i 1000SR field
When accessing the Reagent status screen the information sorts by
reagent position.

P RSH section number and then carousel
position in ascending order.
REMAINING TESTS Numerically is ascending order.
CAL STATUS and REAGENT STATUS See Descriptions of calibration
statuses, page 6-19 and Descriptions
of reagent statuses (i 1000SR),
page 5-58.
CARRIER STATUS See Descriptions of carrier statuses (i
1000SR), page 5-59.
SCHEDULED TESTS Numerically in ascending order.
READY TO UNLOAD First to last to become available for
unload.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To display this screen, see Access the Reagent status screen - i 1000SR view,
page 5-54.
• Prepare new reagent bottles (i 1000SR), page 5-95
• Prepare used reagent bottles (i 1000SR), page 5-97
• Load reagents on the RSH (i 1000SR), page 5-100
• Unload reagents from reagent carousel (i 1000SR), page 5-102
• Reloading reagents after opening the reagent carousel cover (i 1000SR),
page 5-105
• Cancel reagent unload (i 1000SR), page 5-103
Access the Reagent status screen - i 1000SR view
Perform this procedure to display the i 1000SR view of the Reagent

status screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Reagent status screen:
selecting the reagent status button on the i 1000SR processing module
graphic.
1. Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select Reagent
status.
The Reagent status screen - i 1000SR view displays.
2. Select another Module option to display a different view.

(optional)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reagent status screen - View all view
From the View all view of the Reagent status screen you can see
information for reagents loaded on all modules, such as:
• Assay name
• Reagent location, lot number, expiration date, and onboard
stability
• Reagent and calibration status
• Remaining tests
• Print the Reagent Load Error report
• Print the Reagent Status report
Figure 5.11: Reagent status screen - View all view
For descriptions of these fields, see Reagent status screen - View all view

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
When accessing the Reagent status all screen the information sorts by
reagent position.

M/P Module, and then carousel position in
ascending order.
ASSAY and REAGENT LOT Numerically in ascending order.
REMAINING TESTS Numerically in ascending order.
CAL STATUS and REAGENT STATUS Descriptions of calibration statuses,
page 6-19
Descriptions of reagent statuses
(except for i 1000SR), page 5-57.
Descriptions of reagent statuses (i
1000SR), page 5-58.
EXP. DATE First to last to expire.
STABILITY Shortest stability in ascending order.
To display this screen, see Access the Reagent status screen - View all view,
page 5-56.
Access the Reagent status screen - View all view
Perform this procedure to display the Reagent status screen - View all
view.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Reagent status screen - View all view:

1. Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select Reagent
status.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
The Reagent status screen - c System view displays. This view

displays for a standalone c System and an integrated system.
OR
The Reagent status screen - i System view displays. This view
displays for standalone and multi-module i Systems.
2. Select the View all option.

The Reagent status screen - view all view displays.
Descriptions of reagent statuses (except for i 1000SR)
You can use reagent status information to determine the status of each
reagent and if there are problems with the reagent kits loaded on the
system. The system displays one of the following reagent statuses for
each reagent kit. When you select the REAGENT STATUS column
heading, the reagent status sorts in the following order.
Table 5.1: Reagent statuses (except for i 1000SR)
Status Description
BC Fail The bar code on the reagent bottle is unreadable.
Undefined The reagent configuration for a 1D bar code is not defined.
See Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c
System), page 2-65.
Load Error c System:
The reagent is loaded in the wrong reagent supply center.
For example, an R1 reagent is loaded in reagent supply
center 2.
Missing Bottle The reagent kit is missing a required bottle.
Extra Bottle The detected bottle(s) is not part of a known reagent kit or
insufficient bottles are loaded to create a kit.
No Assay The reagent is not used by any assay file installed on the
system.
Empty The reagent is empty.
LLS Error Consecutive liquid level sense errors occurred during
aspiration of the reagent.
Expired The reagent is expired or has exceeded the onboard
stability time.
Low Alert The remaining volume of the reagent is below the
configured number of tests for the low alert notification.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 5.1: Reagent statuses (except for i 1000SR) (continued)

Status Description
Overridden The operator has overridden a reagent that is expired or has
exceeded the onboard stability time.
OK The reagent is OK.
Descriptions of reagent statuses (i 1000SR)
You can use reagent status information to determine the status of each
reagent and if there are problems with the reagent kits loaded on the
system. The system displays one of the following reagent statuses for
each reagent kit. When you select the REAGENT STATUS column
heading, the reagent status sorts in the following order.
Table 5.2: Reagent statuses (i 1000SR)
Status Description
BC Fail The bar code on the reagent bottle is unreadable.
NOTE: This status is also displayed when the system

automatically unloads reagent carriers after opening the
reagent carousel cover.
Incomplete A hardware error occurred during loading or unloading a
two carrier reagent kit causing a separation of the reagent
carriers.
NOTE: When this status occurs either:

• one reagent carrier is located on the RSH and the other
carrier is on the reagent carousel
or
• one reagent carrier is located on the RSH or reagent
carousel and the other carrier is no longer on the system
Missing Bottle The reagent kit is missing a required bottle.
Extra Bottle The detected bottle(s) is not part of a known reagent kit or
insufficient bottles are loaded to create a kit.
Mismatch One or more detected bottles are not linked to the reagent
kit.
NOTE: Bottles in a reagent kit are linked together by the

system software when they are scanned for the first time.
The bottles must be kept together and cannot be used for
another reagent kit.
No Assay The reagent is not used by any assay file installed on the
system.
Empty The reagent is empty.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 5.2: Reagent statuses (i 1000SR) (continued)

Status Description
LLS Error Consecutive liquid level sense errors occurred during
aspiration of the reagent.
Expired The reagent is expired or has exceeded the onboard
stability time.
Low Alert The remaining volume of the reagent is below the
configured number of tests for the low alert notification.
Overridden The operator has overridden a reagent that is expired or has
exceeded the onboard stability time.
OK The reagent is OK.
Mixing The reagent is mixing to disperse the microparticles.
Descriptions of carrier statuses (i 1000SR)
You can use carrier status information to determine the status of

loading or unloading each reagent carrier and if there are problems
with the loading or unloading of the reagent carriers. The system
displays one of the following carrier statuses for each reagent kit.
When you select the CARRIER STATUS column heading, the carrier
status sorts in the following order.
Table 5.3: Carrier statuses (i 1000SR)
Status Description
Unload error A hardware error occurred when unloading the reagent
carrier.
Load error A hardware error occurred when loading the reagent carrier
or a hardware condition exists that prevents future loading
of reagent carriers.
Scheduled unload A reagent carrier unload has been requested but can not be
immediately processed due to one of the following:
• tests are still running for the requested reagent
• no RSH section is available to unload the carrier
• the system is currently unloading another reagent kit
Scheduled load A reagent carrier needs to be loaded on the reagent
carousel but no position is available on the carousel.
Partially unloaded The first carrier of a two carrier reagent kit has been
unloaded or the second carrier needs to be unloaded but no
section is available on the RSH.
Scanning The first carrier of a two carrier reagent kit has been
scanned by the bar code reader and is waiting on the
system to scan the second carrier.
Unloading The reagent carrier is in the process of being removed from
the reagent carousel.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 5.3: Carrier statuses (i 1000SR) (continued)

Status Description
Loading The reagent carrier is in the process of being loaded on the
reagent carousel.
Blank The reagent carrier is loaded on the reagent carousel, has
been successfully unloaded to the RSH or has just been
loaded on the RSH but not scanned by the bar code reader.
Windows - Reagent status screens
Windows you can access from the Reagent status screen include:
• Details for reagent (Reagent status) window, page 5-60
• Assign location window (c 4000), page 5-61
• Find options (Reagent status) window, page 5-62
• Find options (Reagent status - View all or Reagent history) window,
page 5-63
• Print options window, page 5-308
Details for reagent (Reagent status) window
From the Details for reagent (Reagent status) window you can view
reagent, assay, and component details for a reagent. This information
allows you to address reagent inventory concerns.
Figure 5.12: Details for reagent (Reagent status) window - c System

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.13: Details for reagent (Reagent status) window - i System
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for reagent (Reagent status)
Assign location window (c 4000)
From the Assign location window, you can configure a location in the
reagent supply center for non-bar coded reagents.
You can also unload non-bar coded reagents when inventory is
depleted, expired, or space is needed for a different assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.14: Assign location window (c 4000)
For descriptions of these fields, see Assign location window - c 4000 field
Find options (Reagent status) window
From the Find options (Reagent status) window you can search for
specific reagent(s) on a single module by entering your search criteria
in one or more fields.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.15: Find options (Reagent status) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Reagent status) window
Find options (Reagent status - View all or Reagent history)

window
From the Find options (Reagent status - View all or Reagent history)
window you can search for specific reagents on all modules by
entering your search criteria in one or more fields.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.16: Find options (Reagent status - view all) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Reagent status - View
all) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-114.
Reagent history screen

From the Reagent history screen you can view historical information
on reagent kits that have been used on the system, such as:
• Assay name
• Reagent location, lot number, onboard stability, and expiration
date
• Reagent and calibration status
• Remaining tests
The system stores information for up to 3000 reagent kits.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.17: Reagent history screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Reagent history screen field

When accessing the Reagent history screen the information sorts by
reagent position.

M/P Module, and then carousel position in
ascending order.
ASSAY and REAGENT LOT Numerically in ascending order.
REMAINING TESTS Numerically in ascending order.
CAL STATUS and REAGENT STATUS Descriptions of calibration statuses,
page 6-19
Descriptions of reagent statuses
(except for i 1000SR), page 5-57.
Descriptions of reagent statuses (i
1000SR), page 5-58.
EXP. DATE First to last to expire.
STABILITY Shortest stability in ascending order.
To display this screen, see Access the Reagent history screen, page 5-66.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• View reagent history details, page 5-72
Access the Reagent history screen
Perform this procedure to display the Reagent history screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Reagent history screen:

Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select Reagent history.
The Reagent history screen displays.
Window - Reagent history screen
Windows you can access from the Reagent history screen include:
• Details for reagent (history) window, page 5-66
page 5-63
Details for reagent (history) window
From the Details for reagent (history) window you can view reagent,
assay, and component details for a reagent. This information provides
a historical perspective that is useful in a troubleshooting scenario.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.18: Details for reagent (history) window - c System
Figure 5.19: Details for reagent (history) window - i System
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for reagent (history) window

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
ARCHITECT System procedures - Reagent inventory

management
Procedures that are common to both the c System and the i System
are:
• Scan the reagent carousel(s) (except for i 1000SR), page 5-73
Verify reagent inventory on a single module

adequate reagent inventory or when the reagent status button on the
processing module graphic displays a caution icon.
To verify reagent inventory on all modules, see Verify reagent inventory
on all modules, page 5-69.
Prerequisite Access the Reagent status screen - c 4000 view,
page 5-51
Access the Reagent status screen - i 1000SR view,
page 5-54
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To verify reagent inventory on a single module:

1. Select the desired Module option on the Reagent status screen.
(optional)
Reagent information for the selected module displays.
2. View reagent inventory.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To print a Reagent Status report or Reagent Load Error report, see Print
a report, page 5-295.
• Descriptions of carrier statuses (i 1000SR), page 5-59
• Reagent Load Error Report, page Appendix A-74
• Reagent Status Report (except for i 1000SR), page Appendix A-76
• Reagent Status Report (i 1000SR), page Appendix A-78
Verify reagent inventory on all modules

adequate reagent inventory or when the reagent status button on the
processing module displays a caution icon.
To view reagent inventory on a single module system, see Verify reagent
inventory on a single module, page 5-68.
page 5-51
page 5-54
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To verify reagent inventory on all modules:

1. Select the View all option on the Reagent status screen.
The Reagent status screen - View all view displays.
2. View reagent inventory.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To print a Reagent Status report or Reagent Load Error report, see Print
a report, page 5-295.
Find a specific reagent
Perform this procedure to search for specific reagents by entering

search criteria in one or more fields.
page 5-51
page 5-54
Access the Reagent status screen - View all view,
page 5-56
Access the Reagent history screen, page 5-66
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific reagent:

1. Select the appropriate Module option on the Reagent status
screen.
The reagent inventory for the selected module displays.
2. Select F3 - Find.
The Find options (Reagent status) window displays.
3. Select and/or enter your search conditions. You can narrow the
results returned by entering/selecting more criteria.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: A wild card search allows you to type a partial entry

followed by an asterisk (*) to begin a search when you do not
know the entire entry. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard
character in all data entry boxes except position (P).
Example: If you enter 123* in the Reagent lot data entry box, all
reagent lots starting with 123 display. This list could include
12345M100, 12346M100, and 12347M100.
NOTE: To display c System reagent(s) for a specific reagent

carousel, you must enter a position in the P data entry box and
select the R1 and/or R2 check box. If you do not enter a position
(P), all reagents display.
4. Select Done to initiate the search.

The Reagent status screen displays with the text "Search results:"
in the title bar.
NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records.
• Find options (Reagent status) window, page 5-62
page 5-63
View reagent details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for reagent (Reagent

status) window. From this window you can view detailed information
for reagents.
page 5-51
page 5-54
Access the Reagent status screen - View all view,
page 5-56
Module status Any

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Supplies NA
To view reagent details:

1. Select a Module option on the Reagent status screen.
2. Select the desired reagent(s) from the table or select F2 - Select

all.
The Details for reagent (Reagent status) window displays.
4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each reagent if you

5. Select Done to return to the Reagent status screen.
• Details for reagent (Reagent status) window, page 5-60
View reagent history details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for reagent (Reagent

history) window. From this window you can view detailed
information for reagents.
Prerequisite Access the Reagent history screen, page 5-66
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view reagent history details:

1. Select the desired reagent(s) from the table on the Reagent
history screen or select F2 - Select all.
The Details for reagent (Reagent history) window displays.
3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each reagent if you

4. Select Done to return to the Reagent history screen.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Details for reagent (history) window, page 5-66
Scan the reagent carousel(s) (except for i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure to update reagent statuses by scanning the

reagent kits currently on board the reagent supply centers.
page 5-51
Module status Warming or Ready
Supplies NA
To scan the reagent carousels:

1. Select the appropriate Module option.
The Reagent status screen displays.
2. Select F5 - Scan to update reagent inventory.

The updated status displays on the Reagent status screen.
c 4000 procedures - reagent inventory management

c 4000 reagent inventory management procedures include:
• Load bar coded reagents (c 4000), page 5-74
• Replace sample diluent(s) (c 4000), page 5-82
• Replace non-bar coded reagents (c 4000), page 5-84
• Unload bar coded reagents (c 4000), page 5-87

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Load bar coded reagents (c 4000)
Perform this procedure to load new bar coded reagents into the
reagent supply center on the processing module.
NOTE: To ensure correct reagent status tracking, do not move reagents

kits to a processing module controlled by a different SCC (system
control center).
Prerequisite Check reagent inventory
Access the Reagent status screen - c 4000 view,
page 5-51
Supplies • Bar coded reagent kits
• Adapter, if required


chemical-related hazard. See the assay-specific package
insert or reagent application sheet.
To load bar coded reagents:

1. Verify the expiration date of the reagent. DO NOT use the
reagent if the expiration date is exceeded.
2. Invert the reagent cartridge gently to ensure a homogenous

solution.
3. Remove and discard the cap.


may take up to five minutes after you pause the module for the

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
7. Load the reagent cartridge(s) in the reagent supply center by

performing the following steps:
cover.
where you may be exposed to moving parts. Do not allow
any part of your body to enter the range of mechanical
movement of the reagent supply center cover or carousel.
For more information, see Mechanical hazards, page 8-18.

the position.
c. Load the reagent cartridge(s) in any open position.

cover.
For system loading information, see Loading requirements for
the reagent supply center(s) (c System), page 5-91

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: The 20 mL (cartridge) and 20 mL (bottle) reagent

cartridges require an adapter. Reagent cartridge adapters are
placed in the outer carousel only.

procedures in your laboratory. See Waste handling and disposal,
10. Initiate or resume sample processing, or select F5 - Scan on the

Reagent status screen to update reagent inventory.
NOTE: Once you place a new reagent(s) on a processing module

and the bar code reader scans the bar code label, the system
software links individual R1 and R2 cartridges together as a kit. If
the cartridges are not kept together, the reagent status of Missing
bottle or Extra bottle displays.
The system tracks onboard stability only when the reagent kit is
on board the processing module. To update the onboard stability
timer, you must perform a reagent scan every time you load a
reagent kit. For information on reagent onboard stability, see the
assay-specific package insert or reagent application sheet.
• Reagent kits and components (c System), page 1-90
Load sample diluent(s) (c 4000)
Perform this procedure to load sample diluent(s) into reagent supply

center on the processing module.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: To ensure correct reagent status tracking, do not move reagent

control center).
Prerequisite Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric -
c System), page 2-64
Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c
System), page 2-66
page 5-51
Module status Ready
Supplies • Sample diluent
• Reagent cartridge
• Adapter, if required
To load sample diluent(s):

1. Select F6 - Assign location on the Reagent status screen.
The Assign location window displays.
2. Select the desired sample diluent from the Reagent kits table.
3. Select the desired Reagent supply center option, and then enter
the desired location in the data entry box.
4. Select Add.
The assigned position displays in the Reagent kits table.
5. Note the displayed reagent cartridge size.
6. Verify the expiration date of the sample diluent. DO NOT use

the sample diluent if the expiration date is exceeded.
7. Pour the sample diluent into the specified reagent cartridge type.
9. Label the container(s) with the name and expiration date.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
11. Remove and replace the sample diluent(s) in the reagent supply
cover.

the position.
c. Remove the empty or expired sample diluent and place the

fresh sample diluent in the assigned location(s).

cover.
For additional loading information, see Loading requirements for
the reagent supply center(s) (c System), page 5-91.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: The 20 mL bottles and reagent cartridges require an

adapter. Reagent cartridge adapters are placed in the outer
carousel only.
13. Select Done on the Assign location window to return to the

Reagent status screen.
Load non-bar coded reagents (c 4000)
Perform this procedure to load non-bar coded reagents into the

reagent supply centers on the processing module.

kits to a processing module controlled by a different system control
center.
Prerequisite Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric -
c System), page 2-64
Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c
System), page 2-66
page 5-51
Module status Ready
Supplies • Reagent kits
• Reagent cartridges, if required
• Adapters, if required


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

chemical-related hazard. See the reagent manufacturer's
assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or
reagent application sheet).
To load non-bar coded reagents:

2. Select the desired reagent from the Reagent kits table.
3. Select the desired Reagent supply center option, and then enter
the desired location in the data entry box.
4. Select Add.
The assigned position(s) displays in the Reagent kits table.


solution.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
10. Place the reagent cartridge(s) in the reagent supply center by

cover.
b. Press the carousel advance button (2) after the button is

illuminated to advance the reagent supply center to access
the position.
c. Place the reagent cartridge(s) in the assigned location(s).

cover.
For additional loading information, see Loading requirements for
the reagent supply center(s) (c System), page 5-91.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: The 20 mL bottles and reagent cartridges require an

adapter. Reagent cartridge adapters are placed in the outer
carousel only.
12. Select Done on the Assign location window to return to the

Reagent status screen.
Replace sample diluent(s) (c 4000)
Perform this procedure to replace sample diluents and to reset the

sample diluent volume.

control center).
page 5-51
Supplies • Sample diluents
• Reagent cartridge
To replace sample diluent(s):

1. Verify the expiration date of the sample diluent. DO NOT use
the sample diluent if the expiration date is exceeded.
2. Pour the sample diluent into a new reagent cartridge.
4. Label the container with the name and expiration date.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

may take up to five minutes after you pause the module for
7. Remove and replace the sample diluent(s) in the reagent supply

cover.

the position.
c. Remove the empty or expired sample diluent and place the

fresh sample diluent in the assigned location(s).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

cover.
IMPORTANT: The outside of the cartridge(s) my be wet. Do not

drip condensation into the other reagent cartridges.
9. Select the desired sample diluent from the Reagent status table
on the Reagent status screen, and then select F8 - Reset.
10. Select OK.

The updated remaining tests and reagent status display in the
Reagent status table.
Replace non-bar coded reagents (c 4000)
Perform this procedure to replace non-bar coded reagents and to reset

the reagent volume and onboard stability.

control center).
page 5-51
Supplies Reagents



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To replace non-bar coded reagents:


solution.


7. Remove and replace the reagent kit(s) in the reagent supply


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
cover.

the position.
c. Remove the empty or expired reagent kit and place the fresh
kit in the assigned position.

cover.
IMPORTANT: The outside of the cartridge(s) my be wet. Do not

drip condensation into the other reagent cartridges.

procedures in your laboratory. See Waste handling and disposal,
10. Select the desired non-bar coded reagent from the Reagent
status table on the Reagent status screen, and then select F8 -
Reset.
11. Select OK.
NOTE: The updated remaining tests and reagent status display in

the Reagent status table. The onboard stability timer restarts. To
update the onboard stability timer you must perform a reset
every time you load a new reagent kit. For information on
reagent onboard stability, see the reagent manufacturer's
assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent
application sheet).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Unload bar coded reagents (c 4000)
Perform this procedure when reagents are depleted or have expired, or

when you need room to add a different assay reagent kit in the reagent
supply center.
page 5-51
Supplies Container caps


insert or reagent application sheet.
To unload bar coded reagents:




(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3. Remove the reagent kit(s) in the reagent supply center by

cover.

the position.
c. Remove the reagent kit(s) and place a container cap on the

kit(s).

cover.
4. Initiate or resume sample processing, or select F5 - Scan on the

Reagent status screen to update the reagent inventory.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: Onboard stability is tracked only when the reagent kit is

on board the processing module. To update the onboard stability
timer, you must perform a reagent scan every time you unload a
reagent kit. For information on reagent onboard stability, see the
assay-specific package insert or reagent application sheet.
Unload non-bar coded reagents (c 4000)
Perform this procedure to unload reagents when inventory is depleted

or has expired, or when you need room to add a different assay
reagent kit onto the processing module.
page 5-51
Module status Ready
Supplies Container caps


To unload non-bar coded reagents:

1. Open the reagent supply access door.
2. Verify the reagent supply center access button is illuminated



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3. Remove the reagent kit(s) in the reagent supply center by

cover.

the position.
c. Remove the reagent kit(s) and place a container cap on the

kit(s).

cover.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
5. Select the desired reagent from the Reagent kits table.
6. Select Unload.
The assigned position no longer displays in the Reagent kits
table.
7. Select Done to return to the Reagent status screen.
NOTE: Onboard stability is no longer tracked for the removed

reagent(s). To update the onboard stability timer you must
perform an unload procedure every time you unload a reagent
kit. For information on reagent onboard stability, see the reagent
manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package
Loading requirements for the reagent supply center(s)

(c System)
Loading requirements for the reagent supply centers depend on what
item you are loading, what type of cartridge or bottle you are loading,
and which c System processing module you are loading it on. The
following tables describe the loading requirements:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
chemical-related hazard. See Chemical hazards, page 8-9.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 5.4: Loading requirements for a 20mL cartridge, small (55 ml)
cartridge, or 20 mL bottle
Item Requirement
20 mL cartridge or 1. Load the small reagent cartridge adapter into the
small (55 ml) cartridge reagent supply center.
NOTE: For c 4000, reagent cartridge adapters are
placed in the outer carousel only.
2. Insert the cartridge into the adapter and then set the
cartridge completely.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 5.4: Loading requirements for a 20mL cartridge, small (55 ml)
cartridge, or 20 mL bottle (continued)
Item Requirement
20 mL bottle 1. Align the bottle so that the bar code faces outward.
Center the bar code between the two longest adapter
prongs as shown below and insert the bottle into the
top of the adapter.
2. Load the adapter and bottle into the reagent supply

center by positioning the guide bars on the adapter
(identified in the figure below) so that they fit into the
grooves at the bottom of the reagent segment.
IMPORTANT: The guide bars must be inserted into

the grooves in order to prevent a probe crash or level
sense errors.
3. Ensure the bottle touches the bottom of the reagent

supply center and the bar code label remains facing
outward.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
i 1000SR procedures - reagent inventory management

i 1000SR System reagent inventory management procedures include:
• Prepare new reagent bottles (i 1000SR), page 5-95
• Prepare used reagent bottles (i 1000SR), page 5-97
• Load reagent bottles into reagent carrier(s) (i 1000SR), page 5-98
• Load reagents on the RSH (i 1000SR), page 5-100
• Unload reagents from reagent carousel (i 1000SR), page 5-102
• Cancel reagent unload (i 1000SR), page 5-103
• Unload reagents from RSH (i 1000SR), page 5-103
• Reloading reagents after opening the reagent carousel cover (i 1000SR),
page 5-105
Prepare new reagent bottles (i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure to prepare new reagent bottles before loading

them on the processing module.
Prerequisite NA
Module status NA
• One septum per reagent bottle


insert.
To prepare new reagent bottles:

1. Verify the required assay reagent components are present.
2. Record the reagent lot numbers.
3. Verify the reagent component is within the expiration date on

the bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded.
4. Ensure the reagent bottles are not leaking.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
5. Invert the microparticle bottle gently 30 times to resuspend

microparticles that may have settled during shipment.
6. Inspect the bottle to ensure microparticles are resuspended. If

microparticles still adhere to the bottle or cap, continue to invert
the bottle until the microparticles have been completely
resuspended.
7. Open the reagent bottle and discard the white cap.
IMPORTANT: Do not mix reagent kit components from different

reagent lots. Do not pool reagents.
NOTE: An ARCHITECT i System tracks only the reagent lot

number from the reagent bottle. Record the lot numbers found
on the reagent kit box prior to discarding the box. Also, record
the reagent lot numbers from the reagent bottles.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use if the microparticles do not

resuspend. Contact your Area Customer Support.
8. Check each bottle for bubbles. If bubbles are present, remove

them with a clean applicator stick.
9. Wear clean gloves to prevent contamination, and then remove a

septum from the bag.
10. Carefully seat the septum onto the top of the bottle. Ensure the
reagent does not contaminate your gloves.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
IMPORTANT: You MUST use septums to prevent reagent

evaporation and contamination and to ensure reagent integrity.
Reliability of assay results cannot be guaranteed if septums are
not used as instructed.
Once you have placed a septum on a reagent bottle, do not
invert the bottle as this results in reagent leakage and may
compromise assay results. Reagent bottles with septums installed
must be stored UPRIGHT. Do not remove septums once they
have been installed on reagent bottles.
To load reagents, see Load reagents on the RSH (i 1000SR), page 5-100.
Prepare used reagent bottles (i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure to prepare used reagent bottles before loading

them on the processing module.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
• Septum as required

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


insert.
To prepare used reagent bottles:

1. Verify required assay reagent components are present.
IMPORTANT: Do not pool reagents.
2. Verify the reagent component is within the expiration date on

the bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded.
3. Ensure reagent bottles have been stored upright.
4. Open the reagent bottles and discard the teal-colored

replacement caps.
5. Ensure reagent bottles have septums.

To load reagents, see Load reagents on the RSH (i 1000SR), page 5-100.
Load reagent bottles into reagent carrier(s) (i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure to load reagent bottles into reagent carrier(s).

Prerequisite Prepare new reagent bottles (i 1000SR), page 5-95
Prepare used reagent bottles (i 1000SR), page 5-97
Module status NA
Supplies • Reagent kit(s)
NOTE: Only 100 test reagent kits can be used on the i
1000SR.
• Reagent carriers

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


insert.
To load reagent bottles into reagent carrier(s):

1. Place a reagent carrier on a work surface with the handle to the
left.
2. Place the bottle with the yellow color band securely into the
position with the yellow seat on the reagent carrier. Ensure the
bottle is not tilted and the reagent bar code is visible.
NOTE: If the reagent kit has more than three bottles, load the
bottle(s) designated with a #2 in a second reagent carrier.
3. Place the bottle with the pink color band into the position with
the pink seat on the reagent carrier. Ensure the bottle is not
tilted.
4. Place the bottle with the green color band into the position with
the green seat on the reagent carrier. Ensure the bottle is not
tilted and the reagent bar code is visible.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To load reagents on the RSH, see Load reagents on the RSH (i 1000SR),
page 5-100,
• Reagent carriers (i 1000SR), page 1-116
Load reagents on the RSH (i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure to load reagent carriers in sections on the RSH

(robotic sample handler).
Prerequisite Load reagent bottles into reagent carrier(s) (i 1000SR),
page 5-98
Module status Ready or Running (processing module)
Running (sample handler)
Supplies NA


insert.
To load reagents:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
1. Verify the indicators below the desired section are off, which
indicates the section is available.
2. Load the reagent carrier into the section by pushing it in until

the indicator illuminates.
NOTE: When the modules have a status of Running or Ready for

the processing module and Running for the sample handler,
reagent carriers are scanned by the bar code reader and loaded
on the reagent carousel in the order they are placed on the RSH,
not by position number.
NOTE: Once you place a new reagent(s) on the RSH and the bar
code reader scans the bar code label, the system software links
individual bottles together as a kit. If the bottles are not kept
together, the reagent status of Missing bottle or Extra bottle
displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Onboard stability is tracked after the reagent carrier is scanned

by the bar code reader and is in the process of being loaded on
the reagent carousel and while the reagent kit is loaded on the
reagent carousel. Once the reagent carrier has been unloaded
from the reagent carousel and removed from the RSH the
onboard stability tracking timer stops.
For information on reagent onboard stability, see the
Unload reagents from reagent carousel (i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure when reagents are expired, or when you need
room to add a different assay reagent kit on the reagent carousel.
NOTE: The system automatically unloads reagent kits with a reagent

status of empty or LLS error.

insert.
Prerequisite Access the Reagent status screen - i 1000SR view,

page 5-54
Module status Running, Scheduled pause, Ready (processing module)
Supplies NA
To unload reagents:
1. Select the Refresh button to display all records.
2. Select the Page scroll right button and verify there are no
scheduled tests for the reagent kit to be unloaded.
NOTE: If a reagent kit is unloaded, all scheduled tests for that

reagent kit will go to exceptions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3. Select the desired reagent kit(s) to be unloaded, and then select

F7-Unload. The reagent carrier will be unloaded to an available
section on the RSH.
To cancel the unloading of the reagent kit, see Cancel reagent unload (i
1000SR), page 5-103.
Cancel reagent unload (i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure when reagent kit(s) have been selected for
unloading from the reagent carousel and you want to cancel the
unloading process and leave the reagent kit(s) on the reagent carousel.
Prerequisite Access the Reagent status screen - i 1000SR view,
page 5-54
Module status Running, Scheduled pause, Ready (processing module)
Supplies NA
To cancel a reagent unload:

1. Verify the carrier status is scheduled unload for the desired
reagent kit(s).
2. Select the appropriate reagent kit(s).
3. Select F8 - Cancel unload to cancel the unloading of reagent

kit(s).
Unload reagents from RSH (i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure to unload reagents from the sections of the

RSH (robotic sample handler) when they are no longer needed on the
system.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

insert.
Prerequisite Section indicator:

• blinking green
• solid green
• alternating green/amber
Module status Any
Supplies Replacement cap (one for each bottle removed)
To unload reagents from the RSH:

1. Remove the reagent carrier by sliding the reagent carrier out of
the section.
2. Place new teal-colored replacement caps on the bottles covering

the septums.
IMPORTANT: Always use replacement caps on used reagent

bottles. Do not use the original bottle caps. Do not invert bottles
with a septum and replacement cap, as this results in reagent
leakage and may compromise assay results. Reagent bottles
MUST be stored in an UPRIGHT position.
Empty reagent kits may be discarded without the teal-colored
replacement cap.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: Once you place a new reagent(s) on the RSH and the bar
code reader scans the bar code label, the system software links
individual bottles together as a kit. If the bottles are not kept
together, the reagent status of Missing bottle or Extra bottle
displays.
Onboard stability is tracked after the reagent carrier is scanned
by the bar code reader and is in the process of being loaded on
the reagent carousel and while the reagent kit is loaded on the
reagent carousel. Once the reagent carrier has been unloaded
from the reagent carousel and removed from the RSH the
onboard stability tracking timer stops.
For information on reagent onboard stability, see the
3. Place the reagent carriers UPRIGHT in refrigerated storage

according to instructions in the assay-specific package insert.
NOTE: For reagents stored off the system, it is recommended you

store them in their reagent carriers and ensure they remain
upright.
To cancel the unloading of the reagent kit, see Cancel reagent unload (i
1000SR), page 5-103.
Reloading reagents after opening the reagent carousel cover (i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure to reload reagent carriers in sections on the

RSH (robotic sample handler) after opening the reagent carousel cover.
NOTE: Reagent carrier positions on the reagent carousel must be

verified after opening the reagent carousel cover. Once the sample
handler module status is running, the system will automatically
unload the reagent carriers. You must reinsert the reagent carriers that
you want to be loaded back on the reagent carousel.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Ready or Running (processing module)
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


insert.
To reload reagents:
1. Verify the indicators below the desired section are blinking
green, which indicates the reagent carrier has been unloaded.
2. Reload the reagent carrier into the section by pulling the carrier
out and pushing it in until the indicator illuminates.
NOTE: Reagent carriers are scanned by the bar code reader and loaded
on the reagent carousel in the order they are repositioned on the RSH,
not by position number.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 5 Patient and control orders
Patient and control orders

Patient and control orders are created automatically or by an operator.
Patient and control orders topics include:
• Automated ordering, page 5-107
• Patient order screens and views, page 5-110
• Control order screen and views, page 5-132
• Order status screen, page 5-142
• Sample status screen, page 5-154
Automated ordering
Automated patient sample and control ordering is available using host
computer download, host order query, or automated control ordering.
• Host computer download, page 5-107
• Host order query, page 5-108
• Auto retest (patient samples), page 5-109
Host computer download
Host computer download is the process of downloading sample orders

from a host computer to the SCC (system control center). Depending
on the type of sample handler:
• All sample handlers except an LAS (laboratory automated
system) track - When the bar code reader scans a bar coded
sample and the host has downloaded an order to the SCC, the
system processes the test(s).
• RSH (robotic sample handler) - When the host computer sends a
rerun order for a sample to the SCC and the sample has not been
unloaded from the RSH, the system processes the test(s).
When the host downloads new orders, the Orders icon blinks. You can
view the orders on the Order status screen.
NOTE: For automated ordering by host computer download, you must

configure your system to communicate with a host computer.
See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Patient and control orders Section 5
Host order query
Host order query is the process of downloading a sample order from a

host computer to the SCC (system control center) after a request from
the SCC. Depending on the type of sample handler:
• All sample handlers except an LAS (laboratory automation
system) track - When a bar code reader scans a bar coded sample
(sample identification number not configured as a control) and
an order does not exist on the SCC, the SCC sends a query to the
host computer.
• LAS track - When the LAS system sends sample information to
the SCC and an order does not exist, the SCC sends a query to
the host computer.
If the host computer has test requests for that sample it sends them.
When a new order is downloaded the Orders icon blinks. You can view
the order on the Order status screen.
If the host computer has no orders for the sample (or no record of the
sample) you are notified by a message on the System logs screen -
Temporary message log view.
NOTE: For automated ordering by host order query, you must

configure your system to communicate with a host computer with
query.
If the ARCHITECT System encounters three consecutive host time-out
errors while waiting for a response from the host computer, the system
communications setting "On with query" is turned off and the sample
handler is paused. To continue using the query mode, you must
reconfigure this setting.
NOTE: If the host computer creates rerun orders, you must download
the orders to the SCC. The SCC does not query for rerun orders.
Automated control ordering
Automated control ordering is the process the system uses to

automatically order control tests by associating an SID (sample ID)
with a predefined test(s). For automated control ordering you must
configure a bar code SID for each control level. When a bar code is
scanned and recognized as a configured control, the system
automatically processes the test(s) configured for that SID. You can
view the order on the Order status screen.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Automated control ordering can also be performed based on an

interval measured either in time or by the number of tests since the
assay was last evaluated. This can be configured individually for each
single analyte control level, and each analyte configured for a
multiconstituent control level.
NOTE: You must establish the control onboard stability intervals for
your laboratory if you use this feature.
Bar coded control samples configured for one or more QC intervals are
automatically processed in the following conditions:
• A valid control result has never been generated.
• The QC time or test count interval has been exceeded.
• A reagent kit lot has a Westgard failure on the most recent
control result generated.
• A calibration order is Scheduled or Running.
• A control has not been verified for an existing calibration curve.
NOTE: To ensure calibrators are processed first, the bar coded

control samples must be loaded in numerically higher positions
on the sample carousel than the bar coded calibrators. On the
RSH the calibrator samples must be loaded prior to the bar coded
control samples to ensure that calibrators are scanned before the
controls.
page 2-126
page 2-130
Auto retest (patient samples)
Auto retest is the process the system uses to automatically generate

rerun orders for patient tests (excluding controls and calibrators). For
each test, the system can generate four automatic rerun orders.
1. The system compares test results to the configured retest rules
starting with the first rule. When a result meets the retest criteria
of a rule, the system generates a rerun order without evaluating
further rules.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
You can view the tests scheduled for rerun on the Order status,
Rerun status, and Sample status screens. The R (rerun) code is
assigned to the test.
If your system is configured with an RSH (robotic sample
handler), you can configure the system to automatically
reposition the sample(s) for retest. If your system is not
configured for automatic repositioning, you must reload the
sample(s) to be retested.
2. The system compares retest results to the configured retest rules.

If a retest result meets the retest criteria of a rule, the system
generates a second rerun order. This rerun order displays and
processes the same as the first.
NOTE: If you manually rerun a test result or test exception, the

system restarts the auto retest process and can generate four
additional automatic rerun orders for each test.
To configure retest rules, see Configure a retest rule, page 2-44.
Patient order screens and views

You use patient order screens and their views to create patient orders.
Patient order screen and views topics include:
• Patient order screen - Single patient view, page 5-110
• Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view, page 5-112
• Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view, page 5-113
• Procedures - Patient order screen, page 5-115
• Windows - Patient order screen and views, page 5-128
Patient order screen - Single patient view
From the single patient view of the Patient order screen you can create
non-batch patient orders when:
• The system is not connected to a host computer
• The host computer is inoperable
• The LAS (laboratory automation system) track is inoperable
• A sample does not have a bar code label
You can also access windows to enter additional patient information
and order assay options.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.20: Patient order screen - single patient view
For descriptions of these fields, see Patient order screen - Single patient
To display this screen, see Access the Patient order screen - Single patient
view, page 5-111.
• Create a patient order (single order), page 5-115
• Add a test to a patient order, page 5-125
Access the Patient order screen - Single patient view
Perform this procedure to display the single order view of the Patient
order screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Patient order screen - single order view:

Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Patient order.
The Patient order screen - single order view displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view
From the Batch (bar coded) view of the Patient order screen you can
create patient batch orders for bar coded samples.
NOTE: Batch ordering is not available if your system is configured

with an LAS (laboratory automation system) sample handler.
You can also access windows to change the batch name, add a
comment for the batch order, and order assay options.
To change the view to allow you to order a non-bar coded batch, see
Change the batch sample ordering type, page 2-11.
Figure 5.21: Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view
For descriptions of these fields, see Patient order screen - Batch (bar
coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix E-25.
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Patient order screen -
Batch (bar coded) view, page 5-113.
• Create a patient order (batch, bar coded), page 5-119

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Access the Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view
Perform this procedure to display the batch view of the Patient order
screen.
Prerequisite Batch ordering sample type configured to bar coded
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Patient order screen - batch (bar coded) view:

1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Patient order.
The Patient order screen - single order view displays.
2. Select the Batch option.

The Patient order screen - Batch view displays.
Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view
From the Batch (non-bar coded) view of the Patient order screen you
can create patient batch orders for non-bar coded samples.
• Change the batch name
• Enter a comment for the batch order
• Order assay options
NOTE: Batch ordering is not available if your system is configured

with an LAS (laboratory automation system) sample handler.
To change the view to allow you to order a bar coded batch, see

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.22: Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view
For descriptions of these fields, see Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar
coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix E-26.
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Patient order screen -
Batch (non-bar coded) view, page 5-114.
• Create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded), page 5-122
Access the Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view
Perform this procedure to display the Batch view of the Patient order
screen.
Prerequisite Batch ordering sample type configured to non-bar
coded
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view:

1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Patient order.
The Patient order screen - Single patient view displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2. Select the Batch option.

The Patient order screen - batch view displays.
Procedures - Patient order screen
Procedures you can perform from the Patient order screen and its
related windows include:
Create a patient order (single order)
Perform this procedure to create a manual patient order.

To create batch orders, see:
Prerequisite Access the Patient order screen - Single patient view,
page 5-111
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To create a patient order (single order):

1. Select the Sampling priority: STAT option on the Patient order
screen to display the "S" (STAT) code for the sample orders and
results. (optional)
2. Select the carrier or carousel button, if displayed.
3. Enter a carrier or carousel ID in the C data entry box, if

displayed.
4. Enter a position in the P data entry box, if displayed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: When using bar coded samples, steps 3 and 4 are not
required. If a carrier and position are entered and the bar code
on the sample is not seen, the system automatically uses the
scanned C/P as the unique ID and the sample is processed as
entered.
5. Enter the SID (sample identification) in the SID data entry box.
NOTE: You can use the bar code scanner, if available, to scan the
SID. When using the bar code scanner, Caps Lock on the
keyboard must be off to prevent an incorrect read of the SID.
IMPORTANT: To ensure tests processed include the correct

information, confirm that your laboratory is not reusing the
same SID prior to completion or deletion of previously pending
orders.
6. Enter a value in the Sample manual dilution factor data entry

box. (optional)
NOTE: Not all assays support manual dilutions. An assay

displays unavailable if you select manual dilution, and the assay
does not support this type of dilution. See the reagent
7. Select the desired panel(s) from the Panels list and/or select an
assay(s) from the Assays list.
NOTE: If you selected the carousel button on an integrated

System, panel names that include ARCHITECT i System assays
do not display.
To order a calculated assay, perform one of the following:
• Select only the calculated assay. The system automatically
orders the assays required to complete the calculation but
does not release or report these results.
Constituent assays for some calculated assays installed from
an assay disk (assay numbers 3000 - 3099) cannot be
automatically ordered by the system and must be ordered
separately. Refer to the i System assay-package insert for
specific assay requirements.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Select the calculated assay and the desired constituent

assay(s). The system automatically orders the additional
constituent assays required to complete the calculation but
does not release or report the system-ordered constituent
results.
• Select the calculated assay and all its constituent assays. The
system releases and reports all results.
8. Select F2 - Sample details to enter patient information.

(optional)
The Details for sample window displays.
a. Enter patient information in the appropriate data entry
box(es) and/or select the appropriate Gender option.
NOTE: A Patient ID is required to print patient report data.

When entering a PID, enter only the details that are known to be
accurate. If the information is not known, leave the data entry
box empty. Never edit information previously entered. If you
edit the PID, the software recognizes the PID as a different and
unique patient.
b. Enter a comment in the Comment data entry box.
NOTE: Sample comments are associated with the sample and

display and/or print with each test ordered for the sample.
c. Select Done to save your changes and return to the Patient

order screen.
9. Select F5 - Assay options to specify assay options. (optional)

The Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution
view displays if you entered a manual dilution factor.
OR
The Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution
view displays if you did not enter a manual dilution factor.
a. Delete replicate values that are not required, and then enter
the number of replicates for the desired dilution(s) in the
Dilution protocols/Number of replicates data entry box.
NOTE: You cannot run all assays with an automated dilution

protocol. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific
documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application
sheet).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
The system software automatically selects one replicate for the

default dilution protocol.
You cannot order replicates for calculated assays.
IMPORTANT: For ARCHITECT i System assays do not order more

than 10 tests per sample for samples loaded in sample cups.
For c System ICT assays do not order more than 15 tests per
sample for samples loaded in cups and/or tubes.
The total number of tests per sample includes all assays,
replicates, dilutions, and available reagent lots for the order.
b. Select the Module selection: Manual option, and then select

the appropriate module check box(es) to override the system
module scheduler (multi-module i System).
NOTE: Overriding the system module scheduler may impact

overall throughput.
c. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you

selected more than one, and then repeat steps 9a and 9b for
each. (optional)
d. Select Done to save your changes and return to the Patient

order screen.
10. Select F3 - Add order.

To view orders, see Access the Order status screen, page 5-144.
To print the Order List Report, see Print the Order List report, page 5-298.
NOTE: The minimum sample volume information prints on the Order

List report.
• Details for sample window, page 5-130
• Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution view,
page 5-128
• Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution view,
page 5-129
• Order List Report, page Appendix A-52

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Create a patient order (batch, bar coded)
Perform this procedure to order the same test(s) on multiple patient

samples. You can process batch orders on the standard or robotic
sample handlers.
If you have an RSH and/or sample carousel, you may order tests for
priority processing on patient or control samples and load them in the
priority bay, section, or sample carousel while the batch order is
processing.
IMPORTANT: When running a bar coded batch you cannot:

• Load calibrators
• Leave empty spaces in a carrier
• Load batch samples in a carrier with tests in process
NOTE: You cannot add a test(s) to an order within the batch. If you
add a test(s) to an order that is part of a batch order, the additional
test(s) processes instead of the batch test(s). You must order additional
tests separately and load the samples after the batch process is
complete.
To change the view to allow you to order a non-bar coded batch, see
To create a single order for a patient sample, see Create a patient order
(single order), page 5-115.
Prerequisite Batch ordering sample type configured to bar coded
Access the Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded)
view, page 5-113
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To create a patient order (batch, bar coded):

1. Select the Order type: Batch option on the Patient order screen.
The Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view displays.
2. Enter a starting sample ID in the Starting SID data entry box.
3. Enter an ending sample ID in the Ending SID data entry box.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: Batch processing begins on the sample with the starting

SID and continues until the sample with the ending SID is
processed. All samples in between, regardless of sequence or SID,
are included in the batch process.

box. (optional)

NOTE: To order a calculated assay, perform one of the following:

results.
6. Select F2 - Batch details to change the batch name or enter a

comment. (optional)
The Details for batch window displays.
a. Enter a new batch name in the Batch name data entry box.

order screen.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

OR

sheet).



overall throughput.

each. (optional)

order screen.

To print the Order List report, see Print the Order List report, page 5-298.

List report.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Details for batch window, page 5-131
page 5-128
page 5-129
• Batch processing, page 5-180
Create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded)
Perform this procedure to order the same test(s) on multiple patient

samples. You can process batch orders on the RSH (robotic sample
handler) or SSH (standard sample handler).
If you have an RSH and/or sample carousel, you may order tests for
priority processing on patient or control samples and load them in the
priority bay, section, or sample carousel while the batch order is
processing.
IMPORTANT: When running a non-bar coded batch you cannot:

• Load calibrators
• Leave empty spaces in a carrier
NOTE: You cannot add a test(s) to an order within the batch. If you
add a test(s) to an order that is part of a batch order, the additional
test(s) processes instead of the batch test(s). You must order additional
tests separately and load the samples after the batch process is
complete.
To change the view to allow you to order a bar coded batch, see

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To create a single order for a patient sample, see Create a patient order
(single order), page 5-115.
Prerequisite Batch ordering sample type configured to non-bar
coded
Access the Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar
coded) view, page 5-114
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded):

1. Select the Order type: Batch option on the Patient order screen.
The Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view displays.
2. Enter the starting carrier ID in the Starting (C) data entry box.
3. Enter a position in the (P) data entry box.
4. Enter the starting SID (sample identification) in the Starting SID

data entry box (maximum of nine numeric characters).
The SID is assigned sequentially for each batch sample.
5. Enter the total number of samples in the batch order. This

number cannot exceed 5000.
NOTE: Batch processing begins on the sample with the starting

carrier and position and continues until the total number of
samples processed equals the number of samples entered.

box. (optional)

NOTE: To order a calculated assay, perform one of the following:


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

results.
8. Select F2 - Batch details, to change the batch name or enter a

comment. (optional)
The Details for batch window displays.
a. Enter a new batch name in the Batch name data entry box.

order screen.

OR

sheet).


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


overall throughput.

each. (optional)

order screen.


List report.
page 5-128
page 5-129
Add a test to a patient order
Perform this procedure to add a test(s) to a patient order.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: If you are adding a calculated assay and new constituent results
are desired for the calculation, you must add the constituent assays in
addition to the calculated assay.
You cannot add a test(s) to an order within a batch.
If you add a test(s) to an order that is part of a batch order, the
additional test(s) processes instead of the batch test(s).
You must order additional tests separately and load the samples after
the batch process is complete.
Prerequisite Access the Patient order screen - Single patient view,
page 5-111
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To add a test to a patient order:

1. Enter the SID (sample identification) in the SID data entry box.
NOTE: You can use the bar code scanner, if available, to scan the
SID. When using the bar code scanner, the Caps Lock key on the
keyboard must be off to prevent an incorrect read of the SID.
2. Enter the value from the original order in the Sample manual
dilution factor data entry box.
NOTE: If you selected the carousel button on an integrated

system, panel names that include both ARCHITECT c System
and ARCHITECT i System assays or only i System assays do not
display.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

results.

OR

sheet).



overall throughput.

each. (optional)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

order screen.
NOTE: If you have an RSH (robotic sample handler) that is

configured to automatically reposition samples for retest and the
sample is still onboard, a confirmation message displays. Select
Yes to have the system re-aspirate the sample.

List report.
page 5-128
page 5-129
Windows - Patient order screen and views
Windows you can access from the Patient order screen include:
page 5-128
page 5-129
Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution view
From the manual dilution view of the Assay options (Patient order)
window you can:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Enter the desired number of replicates

• Override the system module scheduler and select a specific
module for processing an order (multi-module i System)
Figure 5.23: Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution

view
For descriptions of these fields, see Assay options (Patient order) window -
Manual dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-27.
Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution view
From the automated dilution view of the Assay options (Patient order)
window you can:
• Select an automated dilution factor other than the configured
option

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.24: Assay options (Patient order) window - automated

dilution view
For descriptions of these fields, see Assay options (Patient order) window -
Automated dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-28.
Details for sample window
From the Details for sample window you can:

• Enter patient information such as patient ID, name, date of
birth, and gender
• Enter comments for orders
• View previously entered patient information

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.25: Details for sample window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for sample window field
Details for batch window
From the Details for batch window you can change the batch name
and enter a comment for your batch order.
Figure 5.26: Details for batch window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for batch window field

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Control order screen and views

You use control order screens and their views to create control orders.
Controls have the following characteristics:
• Require running, at all levels and for each assay, immediately
after calibration to verify the newly-stored calibration curve on a
specific processing module.
• Are run routinely to check a previously-stored active curve and
to monitor system/assay performance.
For recommendations on routine control test frequency, see the
IMPORTANT: Patient results can be compromised if you do not run

controls and evaluate the results according to the reagent
manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert
or reagent application sheet).
Control order screen and views topics include:
• Control order screen - Single analyte view, page 5-132
• Control order screen - Multiconstituent view, page 5-134
• Procedures - Control order screen, page 5-135
• Windows - Control order screen and views, page 5-140
Control order screen - Single analyte view
From the Single analyte view of the Control order screen you can
create a control order when:
• The system is not configured to run bar coded control samples
• The control sample does not have a bar code label
• The control sample has a SID bar code label not currently
configured on the system
You can also access a window to order assay options.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.27: Control order screen - Single analyte view
For descriptions of these fields, see Control order screen - Single analyte
• Create a control order (single analyte), page 5-135
Access the Control order screen - Single analyte view
Perform this procedure to display the Single analyte view of the

Control order screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Control order screen - Single analyte view:

1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Control order.
The Control order screen - Multiconstituent view displays.
2. Select the Order type: Single analyte option.

The Control order screen - Single analyte view displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Control order screen - Multiconstituent view
From the Multiconstituent view of the Control order screen you can
create a control order when:
• The system is not configured to run bar coded control samples
• The control sample does not have a bar code label
• The control sample has a SID bar code label which may or may
not be configured on the system
You can also access a window to order assay options.
Figure 5.28: Control order screen - Multiconstituent view
For descriptions of these fields, see Control order screen - Multiconstituent

• Create a control order (multiconstituent), page 5-137

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Access the Control order screen - Multiconstituent view
Perform this procedure to display the Multiconstituent view of the

Control order screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Control order screen - Multiconstituent view:

Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Control order.
The Control order screen - Multiconstituent view displays.
Procedures - Control order screen
Procedures you can perform from the Control order screen and its
Create a control order (single analyte)
Perform this procedure to create an order for a single analyte control

when a host computer is not available or single analyte controls are
not configured to use a bar code SID (sample identification).
NOTE: You must configure controls in the system before you can
perform this procedure. See Configure a single analyte control,
page 2-123.
Prerequisite Access the Control order screen - Single analyte view,
page 5-133
Module status Any. If the processing module(s) is not in Running
status, the volume printed on the Order List report is for
one control per module.
Supplies NA
To create a control order (single analyte):

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
1. Select the Sampling priority: STAT option on the Control order

screen to display the "S" (STAT) code for the sample order and
results. (optional)
2. Select the carrier or carousel button.

displayed.
4. Enter a position in the P data entry box.

box. (optional)

6. Select the desired assay from the Assays list.
8. Select the desired Levels check box(es).
NOTE: All control levels selected must fit in one carrier/carousel.

The Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution
OR
The Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution

sheet) for limitations on automated dilutions.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


overall throughput.
c. Use the previous/nextbuttons to display each level if you

each. (optional)
d. Select Done to save your changes and return to the Control

order screen.


List report.
• Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view,
page 5-140
• Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution view,
page 5-141
Create a control order (multiconstituent)
Perform this procedure to create an order for a multiconstituent

control when a host computer is not available or multiconstituent
controls are not configured to use a bar code SID (sample
identification).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: You must configure controls in the system before you can
perform this procedure. See Configure a new multiconstituent control,
page 2-127.
Prerequisite Access the Control order screen - Multiconstituent view,
page 5-135
Module status Any. If the processing module(s) is not in Running
status, the volume printed on the Order List report is for
one control per module.
Supplies NA
To create a control order (multiconstituent):

1. Select the Sampling priority: STAT option on the Control order
screen to display the "S" (STAT) code for the sample orders and
results. (optional)
2. Select the carrier or carousel button.

displayed.
4. Enter a position in the P data entry box.
control.

box. (optional)

8. Select the desired Levels option.
9. Select the SID list button, and then select the desired SID.
(optional)
10. Select the desired panel(s) from the Panels list and/or select the

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

results.
11. Select F5 - Assay options to specify assay options.

The Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution
OR
The Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution

sheet).
You cannot order replicates for calculated assays.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


overall throughput.

selected more than one, and then repeat steps 10a and 10b
d. Select Done to save your changes and return to the Control

order screen.


List report.
page 5-140
page 5-141
Windows - Control order screen and views
Windows you can access from the Control order screen include:
page 5-140
page 5-141
Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view
From the manual dilution view of the Assay options (Control order)
window you can:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Figure 5.29: Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution

view
For descriptions of these fields, see Assay options (Control order) window
- Manual dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-32.
Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution

view
From the automated dilution view of the Assay options (Control

order) window you can:
• Select an automated dilution factor other than the configured
option

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.30: Assay options (Control order) window - automated

dilution view
For descriptions of these fields, see Assay options (Control order) window
- Automated dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-33.
Order status screen

From the Order status screen you can view information for patient,
control, calibration, and rerun test orders, which includes:
• Sample location, identified by sample carrier ID/position,
carousel ID/position, or LAS
• Sample name and identification number
• Assay name, status, and time of completion
• Processing codes
You can also delete a test from an order and access windows to:
• Find information for specific tests based on specified search
criteria
• Print the Order List report and Order Status report
• View detailed test information
• Add a comment to an order

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.31: Order status screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Order status screen field descriptions,
page Appendix E-34.
When accessing the Order status screen the information sorts by
completion time, first to last complete. Orders with no completion
time sort to the bottom.

C/P Alphanumerically in the following order:
• Carrier/position
• CRSL (carousel)/position
• LAS
• LAS carousel/position
• WTR (water)/0
• No carrier or carousel/position
SID, NAME, and ASSAY Alphanumerically in ascending order. If
you did not enter a patient name, the
test(s) with a blank name field displays
last when the column sorts.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

TIME First to last to complete.
STATUS and CODE See Descriptions of test statuses,
page 5-145 and Descriptions of
processing codes, page 5-145.
To display this screen, see Access the Order status screen, page 5-144.
• View the status of ordered tests, page 5-146
• Find a specific test order, page 5-147
• Print the Order List report, page 5-298
• View order or rerun status details, page 5-148
• Add a comment to an order, page 5-149
• Delete a test from a patient order, page 5-150
Access the Order status screen
Perform this procedure to display the Order status screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Order status screen:
selecting the order status button on the processing module graphic.
Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Order status.
The Order status screen displays.
• Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-145
• Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-145

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Descriptions of test statuses
You can use test status information to determine the progress of an

ordered test or to manage patient and control results. The system
tracks one of the following test statuses for each ordered or completed
test. When you select the STATUS column heading, the status sorts in
the following order.
Table 5.5: Test statuses
Status Description
Pending The test was ordered but the sample has not been scanned
by the bar code reader.
Scheduled The test was assigned to a processing module when the
sample was scanned by the bar code reader, but aspiration
has not occurred.
Running The aspiration for the test has occurred and the test is being
processed.
In Process • Batch order - the sample labeled with the starting SID of
a batch order was scanned by the bar code reader.
• Calculated test - the tests required to calculate the result
of a calculated test are being processed.
Exception The test did not complete successfully due to an error.
*Complete The test is complete.
*Pending The test is complete but is waiting to be transmitted to the
Transmission host.
*Archived The test was archived (copied) to a CD.
*Pending Collation The test is complete, but the system is waiting for one of the
following to occur prior to transmitting to the host:
• all tests associated with the SID to complete
• all tests associated with the SID on a particular
processing module to complete
* Indicates you can use the find option in the Stored results screen to
locate these statuses.
Descriptions of processing codes
You use processing code information to determine how a sample(s)

was processed. The system displays one or more of the following
processing codes, when applicable, for an ordered test or test result.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
When you select the CODE column heading, the codes sort in the
following order.
Table 5.6: Processing codes
Code Description
S The sample is ordered as a STAT.
D The test is an automated dilution with a dilution factor >1, or
an automated dilution that is not the first configured dilution.
M The sample is manually diluted.
R The test is a rerun.
* The test is an original result for a rerun.
B The test is part of a batch order.
C The test has a comment.
Procedures - Order status screen
Procedures you can perform from the Order status screen and its
• View the status of ordered tests, page 5-146
• Delete a test from a patient order, page 5-150
View the status of ordered tests
Perform this procedure to access the Order status screen. From this
screen you can check the status of patient, control, calibration, and
rerun test orders.
To find specific test orders, see Find a specific test order, page 5-147.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the status of ordered tests:
selecting the order status button on the processing module graphic.
Select Orders on the menu bar, and then select Order status.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
The Order status screen displays.

An ellipsis (...) displays when the system cannot display all the data on
a screen or window. View the details window to see all of the data.
Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is
maximum character length.
Find a specific test order
Perform this procedure to search for a specific test order(s) by entering

Prerequisite Access the Order status screen, page 5-144, or Access
the Rerun status screen, page 5-221
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific test order:

1. Select F3 - Find on the Order or Rerun status screen.
The Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window displays.

Example: If you enter 123* in the SID data entry box, all results
starting with 123 display. This list could include 12345, 12346,
and 12347.

The Order or Rerun status screen displays with the text "Search
results:" in the title bar.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Rerun status screen, page 5-219
• Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window, page 5-151
View order or rerun status details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for order (Order

status/Rerun status) window. From this window you can view details
for orders and add comments.
Prerequisite Access the Order status screen, page 5-144,or Access
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view order or rerun status details:

1. Select the desired orders from the table on the Order or Rerun
status screen, or select F2 - Select all.
The Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window
displays.
3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each order if you

4. Select Done to return to the Order status or Rerun status screen.
• Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - single order
view, page 5-151
• Details for order (Order status) window - batch (bar coded) view,
page 5-152

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Details for order (Order status) window - batch (non-bar coded) view,
page 5-153
Add a comment to an order
Perform this procedure to add a comment to an order.

Prerequisite Access the Order status screen, page 5-144 or Access
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To add a comment to an order:

1. Select the desired order(s) from the table on the Order or Rerun
status screen, or select F2 - Select All.
The Details for order window displays.
3. Enter a comment in the Comment data entry box.
NOTE: Comments are associated with a test and display and/or

print with the test. Sample comments also display if entered.
For batch orders, if the batch status is In process, you cannot
enter a comment for the batch order. You must enter a comment
when the batch order is created or the batch status is pending.
4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each order if you

selected more than one, and then enter a comment for each.
(optional)
view, page 5-151

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
page 5-152
page 5-153
Delete a test from a patient order
Perform this procedure to delete a test(s) that no longer needs to be

processed.
Prerequisite Access the Order status screen, page 5-144
Test status - Pending, In process
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To delete a test from a patient order:

1. Select the desired test(s) from the table on the Order status
screen, or select F2 - Select all.
2. Select F6 - Delete.
NOTE: If you delete a batch order, tests with a status of Running

or Scheduled continue processing. Additional tests for the order
do not process.
3. Select OK to delete the test(s).
Windows - Order status screen
Windows you can access from the Order status screen include:
• Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window, page 5-151
view, page 5-151
page 5-152
page 5-153

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window
From the Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window you can
search for specific test orders.
Figure 5.32: Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Order status/Rerun

status) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-35.
Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - single

order view
From the single order view of the Details for order (Order status/Rerun
status) window you can view detailed information for orders and add
comments.
NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from
the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if
the data you entered is maximum character length.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.33: Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window -

single order view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for order (Order status/Rerun
status) window - Single order view field descriptions, page Appendix E-36.
• View sample status details, page 5-159
Details for order (Order status) window - batch (bar coded) view
From the batch (bar coded) view of the Details for order (Order status)
window you can view information for bar coded batch orders and add
comments.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.34: Details for order (Order status) window - batch (bar
coded) view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for order (Order status)
window - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix E-37.
Details for order (Order status) window - batch (non-bar coded)

view
From the batch (non-bar coded) view of the Details for order (Order
status) window you can view information for non-bar coded batch
orders and add comments.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.35: Details for order (Order status) window - batch (non-bar
coded) view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for order (Order status)
window - Batch (non-bar coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix
E-38.
Sample status screen

From the Sample status screen you can view information for patient,
control, calibration orders, unreleased patient and control results, and
exceptions, which includes:
• Sample location, identified by carrier ID/position, bay, section,
• Assay name and processing code
• Test status and time to completion or result, date and time of
completion, and (where applicable) interpretation
You can also suspend processing on a sample, release a result, and
access windows to:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Find information for specific samples based on specified search

criteria
• Print the Sample Status report
• View detailed test information
• Add a comment to an order or result
• Rerun a test
Figure 5.36: Sample status screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Sample status screen field descriptions,
page Appendix E-20.
When accessing the Sample status screen, the information sorts by SID
with the first SID selected. A new SID may be selected. You cannot
deselect a SID, therefore one SID remains selected. To sort columns on
this screen, select the desired column heading. The column sorts and

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
continues to display the selected SID. The column sorts are described

SID and NAME Alphanumerically in ascending order.
C/P and B/S Alphanumerically in the following order:
• Carrier/position and bay or section
• LAS
• WTR (water)/0
ASSAY and CODES These columns do not sort.
STATUS/RESULT See Descriptions of test statuses,
To display this screen, see Access the Sample status screen, page 5-156.
• View sample status, page 5-157
• Find a specific sample, page 5-158
• Access a sample with tests in process (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR /ci 4100),
page 5-182
• View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System),
page 5-192
• Rerun a test, page 5-193
• Release a patient result, page 5-196
Access the Sample status screen
Perform this procedure to display the Sample status screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To access the Sample status screen:

Select Overview from the menu bar, and then select Sample status.
The Sample status screen displays.
Procedures - Sample status screen
Procedures you can perform from the Sample status screen and its
• View sample status, page 5-157
• Access a sample with tests in process (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR /ci
4100), page 5-182
page 5-192
View sample status
Perform this procedure to access the Sample status screen.

Prerequisite Access the Sample status screen, page 5-156
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view sample status:

Select the desired sample from the SID Name column on the Sample
status screen.
The tests and codes display in the ASSAY and CODES column. The
results and status display in the STATUS/RESULT column.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Find a specific sample
Perform this procedure to search for a specific sample(s) by entering

Access the Sample status screen, page 5-156
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific sample:

1. Select the Sample Find button on the Snapshot screen or select
F3 - Find on the Sample status screen.
The Find options (Sample status) window displays.
2. Select the desired Find sample: option.

The System option searches for samples in the Sample status
screen and the patient and QC stored results screens.
The Sample status option only searches for samples in the
Sample status screen.

character in all data entry box(es) except position (P).
and 12347.

The Sample status screen displays either ‚Search results:
System” or "Search results:" in the title bar depending on the
option selected in step 2.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
5. Select the refresh button to display all records.
• Find options (Sample status) window, page 5-160
View sample status details
Perform this procedure to display the Details... window. From this

window you can view detailed information for orders, exceptions, and
patient and QC results.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view sample status details:

1. Select the desired sample from the SID Name column on the
Sample status screen, and then select the desired assay(s) from
the ASSAY and CODES column.
The Details... window displays. Information is dependent on the
assay(s) you selected.

4. Select Done to return to the Sample status screen.
view, page 5-151
page 5-152
page 5-153

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Details for exceptions window - data view (c System), page 5-263

• Details for exceptions window - photometric - graph view (c System),
page 5-264
• Details for exceptions window (i System), page 5-265
• Details for exceptions window - calculated view, page 5-266
• Details for exceptions window - control view, page 5-267
• Details for exceptions window - calibrator view, page 5-269
• Find options (Results review) window, page 5-197
• Details for result (Results review) window - calculated view,
page 5-198
• Details for result (Results review) window - data view (c System),
page 5-199
• Details for result (Results review) window - photometric - graph view (c
System), page 5-200
• Details for result (Results review) window - sample interference index
view (c System), page 5-201
• Details for result (Results review) window (i System), page 5-202
• Details for QC result (QC result review) window - data view (c System),
page 5-214
• Details for QC result (QC result review) window - photometric - graph
• Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System),
page 5-216
Windows - Sample status screen
The windows you can access from the Sample status screen are:
• Rerun options window, page 5-203
Find options (Sample status) window
From the Find options (Sample status) window you can search for
specific samples by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.37: Find options (Sample status) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Sample status) window

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Sample management Section 5
Sample management
Sample management consists of the activities associated with
preparing and loading samples, initiating processing, and unloading
samples.
Sample management topics include:
• Sample requirements, page 5-162
• Initiating or resuming sample processing, page 5-176
• Sample processing, page 5-177
• Unloading samples, page 5-181
Sample requirements
Before you load samples onto the system, be sure you are familiar with
the following:
• Sample cup and/or tube requirements, page 5-162
• Sample volume requirements, page 5-164
• Sample integrity, page 5-168
Sample cup and/or tube requirements
The following sample cups and/or tubes are acceptable for use on the
ARCHITECT System:
• ARCHITECT System sample cups (see Sample cup, page 5-163)
• ARCHITECT System sample cups used in conjunction with
sample tubes
• Aliquot and primary sample tubes (see Aliquot and primary sample
tube specifications, page 5-163)
For information on sample volume, see Sample volume requirements,
page 5-164.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 5 Sample management
Figure 5.38: Sample cup
Figure 5.39: Aliquot and primary sample tube specifications
Measurement Nominal Extreme limits

1. Height 75 mm - 100 mm 72 mm - 102 mm
2. Outside diameter 10 mm - 16 mm 9.6 mm - 16.1 mm
3. Inside diameter NA 7.75 mm minimum
NOTE: The sample cup, when used with sample tubes, shall be no
greater than:
• 6 mm in height above the maximum tube specification of 102
mm for systems with the RSH (robotic sample handler)
• 12 mm in height above the maximum tube specification of 102
mm for systems with the SSH (standard sample handler)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: Use of serum filters in sample tubes is acceptable if the opening

(inside diameter) and the height of the filter meets the sample tube
specifications.
Sample volume requirements
Sample volume requirement depend on the sample vessel type, the

onboard sample storage conditions, and the assay(s) ordered.
For sample cup and tube volume requirements, and the use of the
sample gauge label, see:
• Sample cup volumes, page 5-164
• Primary tube volumes, page 5-165
• Aliquot tube volumes, page 5-166
• Sample gauge label, page 5-166
For information on onboard sample storage conditions and the effect
on sample evaporation, see Onboard sample storage, page 5-167.
For assay-specific sample volume requirements, see the reagent
Sample cup volumes
The ARCHITECT System calculates the minimum sample cup volume

required to test a sample as follows:
• c System (with sample saving mode on - recommended):
50 μL (sample cup dead volume) + 8 μL (over-aspiration volume)
+ combined sample volume of the ordered assays and replicates
NOTE: For each assay that requires an onboard dilution or has a

sample volume greater than 15 μL, an additional 8 μL
over-aspiration volume is added for the sample probe wash that
occurs.
• c System (with sample saving mode off):
50 μL (sample cup dead volume) + combined sample volume of
the ordered assays and replicates + over-aspiration volume (equal
to 20% of the sample volume + 4 μL for each ordered assay and
replicate)
• i System:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
50 μL (sample cup dead volume) + combined sample volume of

the ordered assays and replicates
This volume is printed on the Order List report as "Minimum sample
cup volume required:."
NOTE: The minimum sample cup volume for controls and calibrators
is valid for the reagent inventory on the processing module(s) in
Running status at the time you order the sample.
If the processing module(s) is not in Running status, the indicated
volume is for one calibration/control per module.
If the minimum sample cup volume is less than 150 μL, you must
priority load the sample to avoid concentration effects due to sample
evaporation. If you do not priority load the sample, a minimum
volume of 150 μL is required.
IMPORTANT: If you do not use adequate sample volume, reliability of

assay results cannot be guaranteed.
To ensure accurate liquid level detection, do not fill the sample cups
above the 1400 μL mark.
For sample volume information, see the reagent manufacturer's
application sheet).
IMPORTANT: If you load samples on the RSH (robotic sample

handler) and the RSH is configured to automatically reposition
samples for retest, you must ensure there is adequate sample volume
to allow for retests.
For information on sample volume requirements for primary or
aliquot tubes, see Primary tube volumes, page 5-165 or Aliquot tube
volumes, page 5-166.
Primary tube volumes
When using primary tubes, remove any tube closures and verify at
least 8 mm of sample is available above the clot, gel separator, or
plasma/red cell interface to avoid contamination of the sample during
aspiration.
Use the sample gauge label to verify adequate sample volume. See
Sample gauge label, page 5-166.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

application sheet).

For information on sample volume requirements for aliquot tubes or
sample cups, see Aliquot tube volumes, page 5-166, or Sample cup
Aliquot tube volumes
When using aliquot tubes, remove any tube closures and verify
adequate sample is present in the tube.
Use the sample gauge label to verify at least 8 mm of sample is present
in the tube. See Sample gauge label, page 5-166.

application sheet).

For information on sample volume requirements for primary tubes or
sample cups, see Primary tube volumes, page 5-165, or Sample cup
Sample gauge label
You use the sample gauge (1 on the following illustration) to verify at

least 8 mm of sample is present above the clot, gel separator, or
plasma/red cell interface when using primary tubes.
You also use the gauge to verify at least 8 mm of sample is present in
an aliquot tube.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.40: Sample gauge on a sample carrier
Onboard sample storage
The ARCHITECT System requires a minimum of 150 μL for routine

testing of controls and patient samples. This recommendation
supports onboard sample storage for three hours under average
laboratory conditions without observable concentration effects due to
sample evaporation. Reliability of assay results cannot be guaranteed if
this recommendation is not followed.
The following table describes the approximate amount of time
required to decrease the weight of various starting sample volumes by
5% when measured in sample cups under different environmental
conditions.
The high and low temperatures (30°C and 15°C) were tested with low
humidity. An environment of 25°C and 45% RH (relative humidity) is
considered representative of average laboratory conditions.
"Onboard"
15°C 15% RH 25°C 45% RH 30°C 15% RH
time (Hrs)
1 60 μL 60 μL 100 μL
2 70 μL 80 μL 180 μL
3 100 μL 120 μL 280 μL
4 130 μL 160 μL 365 μL
5 160 μL 200 μL 450 μL

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Sample integrity
For detailed specimen collection, preparation, and storage

information, see Requirements for handling specimens, page 7-8, and the
Loading samples (RSH)

Calibrators, controls, and patient samples are loaded on the RSH
(robotic sample handler) for routine, priority, or batch processing.
Loading samples (RSH) procedures include:
• Load samples in sample carriers (RSH), page 5-168
• Load samples for processing (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR /ci 4100),
page 5-170
• Load bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR
/ci 4100), page 5-172
• Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH - c 4000/i
1000SR /ci 4100), page 5-174
Load samples in sample carriers (RSH)
Perform this procedure to load samples in sample carriers.

Prerequisite NA
Module status NA
Supplies • Samples
• Sample carriers

To load samples in sample carriers:

1. Verify the calibrators and controls, if loading, are within the
expiration date on the bottle label. DO NOT use the calibrators
or controls if the expiration date is exceeded.
2. Determine the minimum sample volume required in the sample

cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-164.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3. Verify adequate sample volume above the separation point in a

primary tube by using the sample gauge label (1 on the following
illustration).
a. Hold the primary tube so that the separation point is level
with the bottom of the sample gauge label.
b. Verify the amount of sample above the separation point is at

least equivalent to the sample gauge label. This volume is
adequate for one test.
4. Verify adequate sample volume in an aliquot tube by using the

sample gauge label (1 on the illustration).
a. Hold the bottom of the aliquot tube level with the bottom of
the sample gauge label.
b. Verify the amount of sample in the aliquot tube is at least

equivalent to the sample gauge label. This volume is
adequate for one test.
5. Print the Order List report to ensure that you load the samples in
the correct C/P (carrier/position). See Print the Order List report,
page 5-298.
IMPORTANT: You are responsible for loading the correct sample

in the correct position.
NOTE: This step is optional when using bar code labels on

samples for positive ID.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6. Place the sample in the sample carrier so that the bar code, if
used, is visible in the sample bar code label window (1 on the
following illustration) and the bar code fills the width of the
window.
IMPORTANT: When you load sample cups and/or tubes, ensure

that you have pushed them completely down into the sample
carriers and that they are not tilted.
Avoid splashing outside of the sample cups and/or tubes.
To load sample carriers for the i 1000SR, see Load samples for processing
(RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR /ci 4100), page 5-170.
• Sample cup and/or tube requirements, page 5-162
• Sample integrity, page 5-168
• Sample gauge label, page 5-166
Load samples for processing (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR /ci 4100)
Perform this procedure to load samples in the sections of the RSH

(robotic sample handler) for routine and priority processing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
IMPORTANT: Verify calibrator(s) in order status is Scheduled before

you load controls in the sections of the RSH to ensure the system does
not process controls before the calibration completes.
To view the calibrator order status, see Access the Order status screen,
page 5-144.
Prerequisite Load samples in sample carriers (RSH), page 5-168
Module status Ready or Running
Supplies Sample carriers loaded with samples
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Identifies an activity or

IMPORTANT: When transporting or loading sample carriers, avoid

splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes.
To load samples for processing:
1. Verify the indicators below the desired section are off, which
indicates the section is available.
2. Position the sample carrier so that the carrier ID label is at the

front of the RSH.
3. Load the carrier into a priority section or a routine section by

pushing it in until the indicator illuminates.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: You must physically place the carriers with calibrators in

the sections in sequential order. Carriers are processed in the
order they are placed on the sample handler, not by the position
number.
To initiate sample processing, see Initiate or resume sample processing
• RSH sample processing (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 5-178
Load bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR /ci 4100)
Perform this procedure to load bar coded samples for batch processing
in the RSH (robotic sample handler). Batch processing is not available
in the RSH priority section(s).
To load non-bar coded samples for batch processing, see Load non-bar
coded samples for batch processing (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR /ci 4100),
page 5-174.
NOTE: Before loading samples, ensure you are familiar with the
components of the RSH. See RSH - robotic sample handler
(c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 1-82.
Prerequisite Load samples in sample carriers (RSH), page 5-168

IMPORTANT: When transporting and loading sample carriers avoid

When you load samples for batch processing, DO NOT load calibrators
or controls within the batch. Also, do not leave an empty space(s)
between samples as it will be identified as an invalid sample with error
message 0120.
To load bar coded samples for batch processing:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
1. Locate the sample carrier that contains the sample with the
starting SID (sample identification) that was entered in the batch
order.
2. Position the carrier so the carrier ID label is located at the front

of the RSH.
3. Verify the indicators below the routine section farthest to the left
are both off, which indicates the section is available.
4. Load the carrier in the routine section farthest to the left

pushing the carrier in until the indicator illuminates.
5. Load additional carriers, from left to right, until all samples are
loaded.
6. Ensure the sample with the ending SID is loaded at the end of all
samples in the batch.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR /ci 4100)
Perform this procedure to load non-bar coded samples for batch

processing in the RSH (robotic sample handler). Batch processing is
not available in the RSH priority section(s).
NOTE: Before loading samples, ensure you are familiar with the
components of the RSH. See RSH - robotic sample handler
(c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 1-82.
To load bar coded samples for batch processing, see Load bar coded
samples for batch processing (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR /ci 4100), page 5-172.
Prerequisite Load samples in sample carriers (RSH), page 5-168.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

IMPORTANT: When transporting and loading sample carriers avoid

When you load samples for batch processing, DO NOT:
• Load calibrators or controls within the batch
• Leave empty spaces between samples as they will be included in
the total number of samples
To load non-bar coded samples for batch processing:
1. Locate the sample carrier that contains the sample with the
starting carrier and position entered in the batch order.
2. Position the carrier so the carrier ID label is located at the front

of the RSH.
3. Verify the indicators below the routine section farthest to the left
are both off, which indicates the section is available.
4. Load the carrier in the routine section farthest to the left

pushing the carrier in until the indicator illuminates.
5. Load additional carriers, from left to right, until all samples are
loaded.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6. Ensure the number of samples loaded matches the number of

samples in the order.

Initiating or resuming sample processing

You must initiate or resume sample processing when:
• Orders have been created and samples have been loaded
• The processing module and/or sample handler have been paused
Procedures include:
• Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-177

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH)
Perform this procedure to process a run after ordering and loading

samples or to resume sample processing after the module and/or
sample handler have been paused.
Prerequisite Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-23
Verify reagent inventory on a single module, page 5-68
Verify reagent inventory on all modules, page 5-69
Access the Snapshot screen, page 1-20
Module status Processing module - Ready or Scheduled pause
Sample handler - Ready, Scheduled pause (RSH), or
Load queue paused (SSH)
Supplies NA
To initiate or resume sample processing:

1. Initialize the processing module, if the status is not Running, by
performing one of the following:
– Press the run key on each processing module keypad if
available.
– Select the appropriate processing module graphic(s) on the
Snapshot screen, and then select F8 - Run.
2. Initialize the sample handler, if the status is not Running, by

– Press the run key on the sample handler keypad if available.
– Select the sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen,
and then select F8 - Run.
• Processing module keypad (c 4000), page 1-27
Sample processing
The progression of samples through the ARCHITECT System differs
depending on your system configuration, sample order type (batch vs.
single order), and available reagent inventory.
Sample processing topics include:
• Control sample processing, page 5-178

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Reagent inventory processing, page 5-180
Control sample processing
When multiple reagent kits are loaded on the system and the
sampling process for a control order is ready to begin, the system
determines which reagent kits to use depending on the configuration
of your system. If your system is configured to run controls by:
• Lot (default) - QC will run only on one kit per lot per module
• Kit - QC will run on every kit per module
Controls for constituents of calculated assays are automatically run on
one kit on one module (selected by the system software) regardless of
the system configuration.
To change the current control run configuration see Change the option
for running controls for onboard reagent kits, page 2-24.
RSH sample processing (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
After you load a sample(s) the sample handler moves the sample(s) to
the aspiration location. The prioritization of samples on the system:
• Carriers in the priority sections are processed first in the order
they were inserted.
• Carriers in the routine sections are then processed in the order
they were inserted.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.41: RSH sample processing
After you load samples onto the RSH and initiate a run:
1. The RSH carrier transport moves to the first carrier as determined
by software prioritization, and then picks up a carrier. The RSH
indicators turn amber to indicate the carriers are being accessed
by the carrier transport.
2. The carrier transport moves the carrier to the bar code reader
where the carrier ID and sample ID(s) are read, and then the
carrier returns to its original location.
3. The system software determines if an order is present on the SCC

for each sample on the carrier. If there are no orders and your
system is configured for host query, a query is sent to the host.
4. The carrier is moved to the aspiration area if an order exists or a

query returns a test order(s).
5. The processing module pipettor aspirates the sample.
6. The carrier is moved to the next carrier position for aspiration, if

necessary, and then moves it back to the routine or priority
section.
7. The RSH indicators blink green when all samples within the
routine or priority section are aspirated.
If your system is configured to automatically reposition samples
for reruns, the indicators remain amber until all reruns are
aspirated.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
If you add or rerun tests for a sample before it is unloaded, the

indicators for the section change back to amber while the sample
is re-aspirated.
• Host order query, page 5-108
• Host computer download, page 5-107
• Auto retest (patient samples), page 5-109
Batch processing
After you load samples the sample handler moves the samples to the
NOTE: Batch processing is not available on the sample carousel

(c 8000/c 16000) or the RSH priority bays or sections.
For bar code labeled batch orders, the starting SID (sample ID)
identifies the beginning of the batch run and the ending SID the end
of the run. All bar coded samples loaded in between, regardless of SID
or sequence, are processed as part of the batch. The batch is
terminated when the ending SID is scanned.
For non-bar code labeled batch orders, the starting carrier/position
identifies the beginning of the batch run. All non-bar coded samples
after the starting carrier/position are processed as part of the batch
until the total number of samples equals the number entered.
The only samples that may temporarily interrupt batch processing are
patient or control samples loaded in the sample carousel
(c 8000/c 16000) or priority bay or section on the RSH (robotic sample
handler). When loaded on any other sample handler, any samples
loaded within the batch become exceptions and are not processed.
Reagent inventory processing
The following criteria is used to determine which reagent kit is used

first when multiple kits with active calibration curves are loaded on
the system:
• The reagent kit nearest to its stability expiration date.
• The reagent kit nearest to its reagent lot expiration date.
• The reagent kit with the fewest tests remaining.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: Constituents of calculated assays using the same reagent kit

must be run with the same reagent lot.
Unloading samples
To maintain continuous processing you should unload samples on a
routine basis.
Procedures include:
• Unload samples (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 5-181
• Access a sample with tests in process (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR /ci
4100), page 5-182
Unload samples (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
Perform this procedure to unload samples from the priority and/or

routine section(s) of the RSH (robotic sample handler) when they are
no longer needed on the system.
NOTE: Review the Exception status and Rerun status screens to

determine if the sample(s) is still needed on the system. See Access the
Exception status screen, page 5-257, or Access the Rerun status screen,
page 5-221.
Prerequisite Section indicator:
• blinking green
• solid green
• alternating green/amber
Module status Any
Supplies NA

IMPORTANT: When unloading and transporting sample carriers and

carrier trays, do not splash sample outside of the sample cups and/or
tubes.
To unload samples:
1. Remove the sample carrier sliding the sample carrier out of the
section.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2. Remove the samples from the sample carrier.
3. Dispose of sample cups in a biohazardous waste container.
4. Store remaining samples according to laboratory guidelines.
Access a sample with tests in process (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR /ci 4100)
Perform this procedure to suspend a section on the RSH (robotic

sample handler) when you need to immediately access a sample that is
being processed.
NOTE: When you suspend processing for a section, the processing

module stops aspirations on all samples associated with that location.
Any scheduled tests not aspirated become exceptions and are not
processed.
Supplies NA
To access a sample with tests in process:

1. Select F3 - Find on the Sample status screen to locate the sample
to be accessed.
The Find options (Sample status) window displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
a. Enter the sample name, sample ID, and/or patient ID in the

appropriate data entry boxes.
b. Select Done to initiate the search.

The Sample status screen displays with the text "Search
2. Select the sample from the SID Name column, and then select
F6 - Suspend.
3. Select OK to suspend processing.

The RSH returns the carrier(s) to its original location.
4. Unload samples (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 5-181.

To reload the sample(s), see Load samples for processing (RSH - c 4000/i
1000SR /ci 4100), page 5-170.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Patient and QC results review, rerun, and release Section 5
Patient and QC results review, rerun, and

release
Once patient and QC sample processing are complete, you can view
the results to determine whether to release them or rerun the tests.
Patient and QC results review, rerun, and release topics include:
• Patient results review and release, page 5-184
• QC result review and release, page 5-204
• Patient results, QC results, and exceptions rerun review, page 5-219
Patient results review and release

Review patient results to determine whether to rerun the tests, release,
or delete them.
Patient results review and release topics include:
• Results review screen, page 5-184
• Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-187
• Procedures - Results review screen, page 5-188
• Windows - Results review screen, page 5-197
Results review screen
From the Results review screen you can view information for
unreleased patient results, which includes:
• Assay name and result
• Flags and codes
You can also release or delete a result and access windows to:
criteria
• Print the Absorbance Data report, Patient report, Result Details
report, Results List report, and Sample report
• View detailed result information
• Add a comment to a result

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 5 Patient and QC results review, rerun, and release
• Rerun a test
For results that have been released, see Stored results screen, page 5-224.
Figure 5.42: Results review screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Results review screen field

When accessing the Results review screen the information sorts by
time the result was generated from the most recent to the oldest result.

SID and NAME Alphanumerically in ascending order.
• LAS
SID, NAME, and ASSAY Alphanumerically in ascending order.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

RESULT Based on interpretation.
FLAG and CODE See Descriptions of patient result flags,
To display this screen, see Access the Results review screen, page 5-186.
• View all patient results, page 5-188
• Find a specific patient result, page 5-189
• View patient result details, page 5-190
• Add a comment to a patient result, page 5-191
page 5-192
• Delete a patient result, page 5-195
Access the Results review screen
Perform this procedure to display the Results review screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Results review screen:

Select Results from the menu bar, and then select Results review.
The Results review screen displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Descriptions of patient result flags
Flags provide additional information about a result and indicate that

you may need to review the result. When a patient result has a flag,
the information displays in red on the Results review and Stored
results screens. The system displays one or more of the following result
flags, when applicable, for a test result. When you select the FLAG
column heading, the flags sort in the following order.
Table 5.7: Patient result flags
Flag Description
EDIT The result was manually edited by the operator and was not
(c System) calculated by the system.
EXP* The result was measured using expired reagents,

Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solutions.
EXPC* The result was calculated using an expired calibration
curve.
(c System)
A#1 The result was calculated using the only read, out of all
(c System) reads in the main read window, with measured absorbance
within the defined absorbance range. This condition can
occur when the result concentration is high or the sample is
lipemic. See Sample results observed problems (c System),
page 10-586.
A#2 The result was calculated using only two reads, out of all
(c System) reads in the main or flex read window, with measured
absorbance within the defined absorbance range. This
condition can occur when the result concentration is high or
the sample is lipemic. See Sample results observed
problems (c System), page 10-586.
CNTL* The result was calculated after the quality control failed for
the same control name and control level.
The flag continues to appear on subsequent results until the
failed quality control result is rerun and the result is within
acceptable limits.
NOTE: Only Westgard rules configured as a failure

produce a CNTL flag for a patient result.
< or > The result is outside the dynamic or linear range.
FLEX The result was calculated using the read data measured
(c System) during the flex read time. See Sample results observed
problems (c System), page 10-586.
LL or HH** The result is outside the defined extreme range.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 5.7: Patient result flags (continued)

Flag Description
PSHH The result may be affected by the ICT sample that was
(c System ICT measured immediately prior to this sample. Rerun the
assays) sample to verify that there was no affect. See Sample
results observed problems (c System), page 10-586.
LOW or HIGH** The result is outside the defined normal range.
* Indicates these flags carry over from a constituent result to a

calculated result.
** Indicates a result is rounded to the reporting number of decimals for
an assay, and then compared against the range.
Procedures - Results review screen
Procedures you can perform from the Results review screen and its
• View all patient results, page 5-188
page 5-192
• Delete a patient result, page 5-195
View all patient results
Perform this procedure to display the Results review screen. From this
screen you can view information on unreleased patient results.
To view information for released patient results, see View all stored
patient results, page 5-227.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To view all patient results:

Select Results on the menu bar, and then select Results review.
The Results review screen displays.
Find a specific patient result
Perform this procedure to search for specific unreleased patient results

by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
Prerequisite Access the Results review screen, page 5-186
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific patient result:

1. Select F3 - Find on the Results review screen.
The Find options (Results review) window displays.
NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific

time interval.
A wild card search allows you to type a partial entry followed by
an asterisk (*) to begin a search when you do not know the entire
entry. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard character in all fields
except position (P).
and 12347.

The Results review screen displays with the text "Search results:"
in the title bar.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
View patient result details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for result window. From
this window you can view details for unreleased patient results and
add comments.
To view the assay reaction graph and absorbance data for patient
results, see View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c
To view details for released patient results, see View stored patient results
details, page 5-228.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view patient result details:

1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the Results review
The Details for result (Results review) window displays.
3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each result if you

4. Select Done to return to the Results review screen.
page 5-198
page 5-199
System), page 5-200

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Add a comment to a patient result
Perform this procedure to add a comment to an unreleased patient

result(s).
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To add a comment to a patient result:

1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the Results review
The Details for result (Results review) window displays.

(optional)
page 5-198
page 5-199

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c

System)
Perform this procedure to view the reaction graph and absorbance

data for a result.
Access the Results review screen, page 5-186
Access the Stored results screen, page 5-226
Access the QC result review screen, page 5-207
Access the Stored QC results screen, page 5-242
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result:

1. Select the desired photometric assay result(s) on the appropriate
The Details for result window - photometric - data view displays.
3. Select the graph button.

The Details for result window - photometric - graph view
displays.
4. Enter the desired range in the Y axis scale data entry boxes, and
then select Rescale to change the absorbance scale. (optional)
An updated view of the reaction graph displays.
5. Select Done to return to the previous screen.

Your changes to the Y axis scale are not saved.
• Stored results screen, page 5-224
• QC result review screen, page 5-205
• Stored QC results screen, page 5-240
page 5-199

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

System), page 5-200
page 5-214
• Details for result (Stored results) window - data view (c System),
page 5-235
• Details for result (Stored results) window - photometric - graph view (c
System), page 5-236
• Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - data view (c
System), page 5-249
• Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - photometric - graph
Rerun a test
Perform this procedure to rerun a patient test, control test, or an

exception. If additional tests are required, you must create a new order.
See Add a test to a patient order, page 5-125.
Access the QC result review screen, page 5-207
Access the Exception status screen, page 5-257
Module status Any
Supplies NA
NOTE: To rerun a calculated assay, perform one of the following:

• Select the calculated assay only. The system automatically reruns
the assays required to complete the calculation but does not
release or report these results.
Constituent assays for some calculated assays installed from an
assay disk (assay numbers 3000 - 3099) cannot be automatically
ordered by the system and must be ordered separately. Refer to
the i System assay-package insert for specific assay requirements.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Select the calculated assay and the desired constituent assay(s) to

rerun. The system uses the existing valid constituent results to
complete the calculation. The system releases and reports results
not automatically ordered by the system.
• Select the calculated assay and all of its constituent assays. The
To rerun a test:
1. Retrieve the original sample and verify:
– Volume is sufficient. See Sample volume requirements,
page 5-164.
– Sample integrity is acceptable. See Sample integrity,
page 5-168.
2. Return the sample to its position.
3. Select the desired test(s) on the appropriate screen.
NOTE: You cannot rerun calibrator exceptions. When rerunning

controls only rerun one control level replicate.
4. Select one of the following:

– F6 - Rerun from the Results review, QC result review, or
Exception status screen.
– F7 - Rerun from the Sample status screen.
The Rerun options window displays.
5. Specify the desired rerun options. (optional)

a. Select the carrier or carousel button, and then enter a carrier
or carousel ID in the C data entry box, if displayed.
b. Enter a position in the P data entry box.
NOTE: Steps 5a and 5b are not required if using a bar coded

sample.
c. Delete replicate values that are not required, and then enter
Dilution protocols/number of replicates data entry box.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

sheet).
d. Select the Module selection: Manual option, and then select


overall throughput.

6. Select Done to save your changes and schedule the rerun.

You can view the tests scheduled for rerun on the Order status,
Rerun status, and Sample status screens. The R (rerun) code is
assigned to the test(s).
NOTE: If the sample is still onboard the RSH (robotic sample

samples for retest, the system repositions and re-aspirates the
sample automatically.
• Exception status screen, page 5-255
• Rerun options (QC result review) window, page 5-218
Delete a patient result
Perform this procedure to delete a patient result(s) that does not meet
release requirements.
Module status Any

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Supplies NA
To delete a patient result:

1. Select the desired patient result(s) from the table on the Results
review screen, or select F2 - Select all.
3. Select OK to delete the result(s).
Release a patient result
Perform this procedure to release a patient result(s) that has been

reviewed.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To release a patient result:

1. Select the desired patient result(s) or select F2 - Select all.
2. Select F8 - Release to release the result(s).
NOTE: The F8 - Release button is not available if any of the

selected items on the Sample status screen are exceptions (red
text) or released results (blue text). Deselect the exceptions
and/or released results to make the button available.
You can view result information on the Stored results screen. If
your system interfaces with a host computer, the results transmit
to the host and the number of tests pending transmission
display on the LIS status button on the Snapshot screen.
To cancel a result transmission, see Cancel result transmission,
page 5-230.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Windows - Results review screen
Windows you can access from the Results review screen include:
page 5-198
page 5-199
• Details for result (Results review) window - photometric - graph view
(c System), page 5-200
• Edit result window (c System), page 5-204
Find options (Results review) window
From the Find options (Results review) window you can search for
specific unreleased patient results by entering your search criteria in
one or more fields.
For patient results that have been released, see Find options (Stored
results) window, page 5-234.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.43: Find options (Results review) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Results review) window
Details for result (Results review) window - calculated view
From the calculated view of the Details for result (Results review)
window you can view detailed information for unreleased calculated
patient results and add comments.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.44: Details for result (Results review) window - calculated

view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result (Results review)
window - Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-42.
Details for result (Results review) window - data view (c

System)
From the data view of the Details for result (Results review) window
you can view detailed information for unreleased patient results and
add comments. The information that displays depends on the assay
type (photometric or potentiometric) for the result selected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.45: Details for result (Results review) window - data view (c
System)
window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-43.
page 5-192
Details for result (Results review) window - photometric - graph

view (c System)
From the photometric - graph view of the Details for result (Results
review) window you can view the assay reaction graph and associated
absorbance data for unreleased patient results.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.46: Details for result (Results review) window - photometric

- graph view (c System)
window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-45.
page 5-192
Details for result (Results review) window - sample interference

index view (c System)
From the sample interference index view of the Details for result
(Results review) window you can view detailed information for patient
results and add comments.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.47: Details for result (Results review) window - sample

interference index view (c System)
window - Sample interference index view (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-46.
Details for result (Results review) window (i System)
From the Details for result (Results review) window (i System) you can
view detailed information for unreleased patient results and add
comments.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.48: Details for result (Results review) window (i System)
window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-48.
Rerun options window
From the Rerun options window you can order a rerun for a patient
test and change the following:
• Carrier ID and position or the carousel position
• Automated dilution factor
• Number of replicates

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.49: Rerun options window
For descriptions of these fields, see Rerun options window field

Edit result window (c System)
From the Edit result window the system administrator can edit an
assay result.
Figure 5.50: Edit result window (c System)
QC result review and release

Review control results to determine whether to rerun the tests, release,
or delete them.
QC result review and release topics include:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-207

• Procedures - QC result review screen, page 5-208
• Windows - QC result review screen, page 5-213
QC result review screen
From the QC result review screen you can view information for
unreleased control results, which includes:
• Sample location, identified by sample carrier ID/position, sample
• Control name, level, and identification number
• Flags
You can also release a control result and access windows to:
criteria
• Print the Absorbance Data report, QC Result Details report, and
the QC Results List report
• View detailed control result information
• Add a comment to a control result
• Rerun a test
For control results that have been released, see Stored QC results screen,
page 5-240.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.51: QC result review screen
For descriptions of these fields, see QC result review screen field

When accessing the QC result review screen the information sorts by

• LAS
M Numerically in ascending order.
SID, CONTROL NAME, LEVEL, and Alphanumerically in ascending order.
ASSAY
RESULT This column does not sort.
FLAG See Descriptions of quality control
result flags, page 5-207.
To display this screen, see Access the QC result review screen, page 5-207.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• View all control results, page 5-209
• Find a specific control result, page 5-209
• View control result details, page 5-210
• Add a comment to a control result, page 5-211
page 5-192
• Release a control result, page 5-212
Access the QC result review screen
Perform this procedure to display the QC result review screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the QC result review screen:

Select QC - Cal from the menu bar, and then select QC result review.
The QC result review screen displays.
Descriptions of quality control result flags
Flags provide additional information about a quality control result

and indicate that you may need to review the result. When a control
result has a flag, the information displays in red on the QC result
review, Stored QC results, and QC summary review screens. The
system displays one or more of the following quality control result

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
flags, when applicable, for a quality control result. When you select
the FLAG column header, the flags sort in the following order.
Table 5.8: Quality control result flags
Flag Description
Westgard rule The quality control result failed a Westgard rule. See
Westgard rule descriptions, page 5-272.
EXP The quality control result was measured using expired
reagents, Pre-Trigger, or Trigger Solutions.
EXPC (c System) The quality control result was calculated using an expired
calibration curve.
A#1 (c System) The quality control result was calculated using the only
read, out of all reads in the main read window, with
measured absorbance within the defined absorbance
range. See Sample results observed problems (c System),
page 10-586.
A#2 (c System) The quality control result was calculated using only two
reads, out of all reads in the main or flex read window, with
measured absorbance within the defined absorbance
range. See Sample results observed problems (c System),
page 10-586.
< or > The quality control result is outside the dynamic or linear
range.
FLEX (c System) The quality control result was calculated using the read data
measured during the flex read time. See Sample results
observed problems (c System), page 10-586.
PSHH (c System The quality control result may be affected by the ICT sample
ICT assays) that was measured immediately prior to this sample. Rerun
the sample to verify that there was no affect. See Sample
results observed problems (c System), page 10-586.
Procedures - QC result review screen
Procedures you can perform from the QC result review screen and its
• View all control results, page 5-209
page 5-192
• Release a control result, page 5-212

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
View all control results
Perform this procedure to display the QC result review screen. From

this screen you can view information on unreleased control results.
To view information for released control results, see View all stored
control results, page 5-243.
To view a summary of statistical data for controls, see View QC data
summary, page 5-288.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view all control results:

Select QC-Cal icon from the menu bar, and then select QC result
review.
The QC result review screen displays.
• Westgard rule descriptions, page 5-272
Find a specific control result
Perform this procedure to search for specific unreleased control results

by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
Prerequisite Access the QC result review screen, page 5-207
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific control result:

1. Select F3 - Find on the QC result review screen.
The Find options (QC result review) window displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

time interval.
except position (p).
and 12347.

The QC result review screen displays with the text "Search
• Find options (QC result review) window, page 5-213
View control result details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for QC result window.

From this window you can view details for unreleased control results
and add comments.
To view the assay reaction graph and absorbance data for control
To view details for released control results, see View stored control result
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view control result details:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the QC result review
The Details for QC result (QC result review) window displays.
NOTE: A code C may display for a Levey-Jennings point

comment and a QC result details comment.

4. Select Done to return to the QC result review screen.
page 5-214
page 5-216
Add a comment to a control result
Perform this procedure to add a comment to an unreleased control

result(s).
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To add a comment to a control result:

1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the QC result review
The Details for QC result (QC result review) window displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: Both the QC result comment and the Levey-Jennings

point comment print on the QC Result Details report.

(optional)
page 5-214
page 5-216
Release a control result
Perform this procedure to release a control result(s) that has been

reviewed.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To release a control result:

1. Select the desired control result(s) from the table on the QC
result review screen, or select F2 - Select all.
2. Select F8 - Release to release the result(s).

You can view result information on the Stored QC results screen
and the Levey-Jennings graph screen. If your system interfaces
with a host computer and is configured for transmitting
approved QC results to the host, the results transmit to the host
and the number of tests pending transmission display on the LIS
(laboratory information system) status button on the Snapshot
screen.
To cancel result transmission, see Cancel result transmission,
page 5-230.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Stored QC results, page 5-240
Windows - QC result review screen
Windows you can access from the QC result review screen include:
• Find options (QC result review) window, page 5-213
• Details for QC result (QC result review) window - data view (c
System), page 5-214
page 5-216
• Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated view,
page 5-217
• Rerun options (QC result review) window, page 5-218
Find options (QC result review) window
From the Find options (QC result review) window you can search for
specific unreleased control results by entering your search criteria in
one or more fields.
For control results that have been released, see Find options (Stored QC
results) window, page 5-248.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.52: Find options (QC result review) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (QC result review)
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - data view (c

System)
From the data view of the Details for QC result (QC result review)
window you can view detailed information for unreleased control
results and add comments. The information that displays depends on
the assay type (photometric or potentiometric) for the result selected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.53: Details for QC result (QC result review) window - data
view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for QC result (QC result
review) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix
E-65.
page 5-192
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - photometric -

graph view (c System)
From the photometric - graph view of the Details for QC result (QC
result review) window you can view the assay reaction graph and
associated absorbance data for unreleased control results.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.54: Details for QC result (QC result review) window -

photometric - graph view (c System)
review) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-67.
page 5-192
Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System)
From the i System view of the Details for QC result (QC result review)
window you can view detailed information for unreleased control
results and add comments.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.55: Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i

System)
review) window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-68.
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated

view
From the calculated view of the Details for QC result (QC result
review) window you can view detailed information for unreleased
control results and add comments.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.56: Details for QC result (QC result review) window -

Calculated view
review) window - Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-69.
Rerun options (QC result review) window
From the Rerun options (QC result review) window you can order a
rerun for a control test and change the following:
• Carrier ID and position or the carousel position
• Automated dilution factor
• Number of replicates
• Module for processing the test (multi-module i System)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.57: Rerun options (QC result review) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Rerun options (QC result review)
Patient results, QC results, and exceptions rerun review

A rerun is a test order created by the operator or automatically by the
system. You use the Rerun status screen to review and manage patient
results, QC results, and exceptions that are scheduled for rerun.
Patient, QC, and exception rerun review topics include:
• Procedures - Rerun status screen, page 5-222
Rerun status screen
From the Rerun status screen you can view information for the tests
scheduled for rerun and delete a rerun. These tests are ordered by the
operator or created automatically by the system and display until the
rerun is complete.
NOTE: Tests scheduled for rerun also display on the Order status and
Sample status screens.
Information includes:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Assay name, status, and time of completion

• Processing codes
• Find information for specific reruns based on specified search
criteria
• Print the Rerun list report
• View detailed rerun information
• Add a comment to a rerun
• Delete a test scheduled for rerun
Figure 5.58: Rerun status screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Rerun status screen field descriptions,
When accessing the Rerun status screen the information sorts by
completion time, first to last to complete. Reruns with no completion
time sort to the bottom.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• LAS
TIME Last to first to complete.
STATUS and CODE See Descriptions of test statuses,
To display this screen, see Access the Rerun status screen, page 5-221.
• View the status of tests scheduled for rerun, page 5-222
• Delete a test from a rerun order, page 5-223
Access the Rerun status screen
Perform this procedure to display the Rerun status screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Rerun status screen:
selecting the Reruns status button.
Select Exceptions from the menu bar, and then select Rerun status.
The Rerun status screen displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Procedures - Rerun status screen
Procedures you can perform from the Rerun status screen and its
• View the status of tests scheduled for rerun, page 5-222
• Delete a test from a rerun order, page 5-223
View the status of tests scheduled for rerun
Perform this procedure to access the Rerun status screen. From this
screen you can view information for the tests scheduled for rerun and
delete a rerun. These tests are ordered by the operator or created
automatically by the system and display until the rerun is complete.
NOTE: Tests scheduled for rerun also display on the Order status and
Sample status screens.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the status of tests scheduled for rerun:
selecting the Reruns status button.
Select Exceptions from the menu bar, and then select Rerun status.
The Rerun status screen displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Delete a test from a rerun order
Perform this procedure to delete a test(s) that no longer needs to be

rerun.
Prerequisite Access the Rerun status screen, page 5-221
Rerun order status - Pending
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To delete a test from a rerun order:

1. Select the desired test(s) from the table on the Rerun status
3. Select OK to delete the test(s).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Patient and QC stored results Section 5
Patient and QC stored results

This subsection describes how to view and archive patient and QC
results that have been released.
Patient and QC stored results topics include:
• Patient stored results, page 5-224
• Stored QC results, page 5-240
Patient stored results

Patient results that have been released remain in stored results until
you archive or delete them, or system capacity is reached. See System
capacities, page 4-5.
Patient stored results topics include:
• Procedures - Stored results screen, page 5-226
• Windows - Stored results screen, page 5-233
Stored results screen
From the Stored results screen you can view information for released
patient results, which includes:
• Flags and codes
You can also retransmit, archive, or delete a stored result and access
windows to:
• Find information for specific stored results based on specified
search criteria
• Print the Absorbance Data report, Patient report, Result Details
report, Results List report, and the Sample report
• View detailed information for stored results

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 5 Patient and QC stored results
For results that have not been released, see Results review screen,
page 5-184.
Figure 5.59: Stored results screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Stored results screen field descriptions,
page Appendix E-50.
When accessing the Stored results screen the information sorts by time
the result was generated from the most recent to the oldest result.

• LAS
RESULT Based on interpretation.
FLAG and CODE See Descriptions of patient result flags,

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To display this screen, see Access the Stored results screen, page 5-226.
• View all stored patient results, page 5-227
• Find a specific stored patient result, page 5-227
• View stored patient results details, page 5-228
page 5-192
• Retransmit a stored patient result to the host, page 5-229
• Delete a stored patient result, page 5-231
• Archive stored patient results, page 5-231
Access the Stored results screen
Perform this procedure to display the Stored results screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Stored results screen:

Select Results from the menu bar, and then select Stored results.
The Stored results screen displays.
Procedures - Stored results screen
Procedures you can perform from the Stored results screen and its
• View all stored patient results, page 5-227

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Retransmit a stored patient result to the host, page 5-229

• Delete a stored patient result, page 5-231
View all stored patient results
Perform this procedure to display the Stored results screen. From this
screen you can view information on released patient results.
To view information for unreleased patient results, see View all patient
results, page 5-188.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view all stored patient results:

Select Results on the menu bar, and then select Stored results.
The Stored results screen displays.
Find a specific stored patient result
Perform this procedure to search for specific released patient results by

Prerequisite Access the Stored results screen, page 5-226
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific stored patient result:

1. Select F3 - Find on the Stored results screen.
The Find options (Stored results) window displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

time interval.
except position (P).
and 12347.

The Stored results screen displays with the text "Search results:"
in the title bar.
• Find options (Stored results) window, page 5-234
View stored patient results details
Perform this procedure to display the Stored results screen. From this
screen you can view details for released patient results.
To view the assay reaction graph and absorbance data for patient
To view details for unreleased patient results, see View patient result
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view stored patient results details:

1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the Stored results

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
The Details for result (Stored results) window displays.

4. Select Done to return to the Stored results screen.
• Details for result (Stored results) window - calculated view, page 5-235
page 5-235
System), page 5-236
• Details for result (Stored results) window - sample interference index
• Details for result (Stored results) window (i System), page 5-238
Retransmit a stored patient result to the host
Perform this procedure to retransmit a released patient result(s) to the

host.
Must be configured for bidirectional host
communications.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To retransmit a stored patient result to the host:

1. Select the desired patient result(s) from the table on the Stored
results screen, or select F2 - Select all.
2. Select F6 - Transmit to Host.

3. Select OK to transmit the result(s).

To cancel a transmission to the host computer, see Cancel result
transmission, page 5-230.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Cancel result transmission
Perform this procedure to clear all results that are pending

transmission to the host.
page 2-5
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To cancel result transmission:

1. Select Host-Release mode from the System categories list on
The Configure host - release mode window displays.
3. Select the Bidirectional host: Off option, and then select Done.
A message displays when you have results that are pending
transmission to the host.
4. Select OK to cancel result transmission.
NOTE: If you select Cancel to leave the Bidirectional host on, the
results pending transmission remain until transmission is
successful.
Results with a status of Pending Transmission go to a status of
complete. Error message 8465, Host transmission canceled by
the user is logged in the Message History log.
NOTE: To resume host communication, you must reset the

bidirectional host option.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Delete a stored patient result
Perform this procedure to delete a released patient result(s) that is no

longer needed on the system.
Result is not pending transmission or pending collation
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To delete a stored patient result:

NOTE: Results with a status of pending transmission or pending

collation cannot be deleted. Wait until the results have been
transmitted or all results have been released before deleting
them.
3. Select OK to delete the result(s).
Archive stored patient results
Perform this procedure to store released patient results on a CD to

create a backup for long-term storage.
NOTE: The results are archived in a delimited ASCII format so you can
import them into a spreadsheet. You cannot use the ARCHITECT
System to retrieve the information.
Supplies • CD-R (compact disk recordable) or
• Unformatted CD-RW (compact disk
Recordable/ReWritable)
To archive stored patient results:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
1. Disable the screen timeout if the database is full and you are
archiving a large amount of data. See Change the screen timeout
setting, page 2-16. (optional)
2. Insert a CD-R or CD-RW into the CD drive.
NOTE: If an archive message displays, see Descriptions of archive

messages, page 5-233.
NOTE: You can also select F3 - Find to search for and select
results. See Find a specific stored patient result, page 5-227.
4. Select F8 - Archive.
The Archive results window displays.
5. Verify the CD drive read indicator light is off.
6. Deselect Delete records after archive check box. (optional)
NOTE: If you choose to delete results, results with a status of

Pending transmission or Pending collation are not deleted.
7. Select Done to archive the results.
NOTE: An archive routinely takes less than four minutes, but

with a full database it may take longer. You can cancel an archive
when the system is collecting archive data and creating a
temporary archive data file. A progress indicator displays with a
Cancel button. You can cancel an archive prior to it being 50%
complete.
Do not navigate to a different screen or window until the "0519
Data Archive Complete" message displays.
8. Select the refresh button, if available, to display all records.
• Archive results window, page 5-239

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Descriptions of archive messages
The following table lists the archive messages and their meanings.
Table 5.9: Descriptions of archive messages
Message Description
Insufficient disk space for archive The disk does not have enough space
to archive the requested record. See
error code 0180.
NOTE: A minimum of 40 megabytes

of disk space is required to initiate an
archive.
No disk or incorrect disk type detected • You did not place a disk in the CD
drive.
• You used an incorrect disk type.
• You inserted the disk upside down.
• The archive disk is not a
Recordable/ReWritable disk.
See error code 0181.
No CD drive is detected • A CD-RW drive is not installed on the
SCC.
• A cabling problem exists on the CD
drive.
• The CD drive had a hardware failure.
See error code 0182.
CD drive is initializing You selected the Done button before
initialization is complete. See error
code 0183.
The disk is read-only The archive disk is not a
Recordable/ReWritable disk. See error
code 0184.
NOTE: A CD that has been

previously used to write information
other than archive information
cannot be used to archive additional
information.
Busy The CD is in the process of reading,
writing, or initializing. See error code
0185.
Windows - Stored results screen
Windows you can access from the Stored results screen include:
• Find options (Stored results) window, page 5-234

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Details for result (Stored results) window - calculated view,

page 5-235
page 5-235
System), page 5-236
• Details for result (Stored results) window - sample interference index
• Details for result (Stored results) window (i System), page 5-238
• Archive results window, page 5-239
Find options (Stored results) window
From the Find options (Stored results) window you can search for
specific released patient results by entering your search criteria in one
or more fields.
For patient results that have not been released, see Find options (Results
review) window, page 5-197.
Figure 5.60: Find options (Stored results) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Stored results) window

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Details for result (Stored results) window - calculated view
From the calculated view of the Details for result (Stored results)
window you can view detailed information for released patient results.
NOTE: Some data fields may not display all data if the data you
entered is maximum character length.
Figure 5.61: Details for result (Stored results) window - calculated

view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result (Stored results)
window - Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-52.
Details for result (Stored results) window - data view (c System)
From the data view of the Details for result (Stored results) window
you can view detailed information for released patient results. The
information that displays depends on the assay type (photometric or
potentiometric) for the result selected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.62: Details for result (Stored results) window - data view (c
System)
window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-54.
page 5-192
Details for result (Stored results) window - photometric - graph

view (c System)
From the photometric - graph view of the Details for result (Stored
results) window you can view the assay reaction graph and associated
absorbance data for released patient results.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.63: Details for result (Stored results) window - photometric -

graph view (c System)
window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-56.
page 5-192
Details for result (Stored results) window - sample interference

index view (c System)
From the sample interference index view of the Details for result
(Stored results) window you can view detailed information for released
patient results.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.64: Details for result (Stored results) window - sample

interference index view (c System)
window - Sample interference index view (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-57.
Details for result (Stored results) window (i System)
From the Details for result (Stored results) window (i System) you can
view detailed information for released patient results.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.65: Details for result (Stored results) window (i System)
window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-59.
Archive results window
From the Archive results window you can archive released patient
results to a CD.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.66: Archive results window
For descriptions of these fields, see Archive results window field

Stored QC results
QC results that have been released remain in stored results until you
archive and delete them.
Stored QC results topics include:
• Procedures - Stored QC results screen, page 5-243
• Windows - Stored QC results screen, page 5-248
Stored QC results screen
From the Stored QC results screen you can view information for
released control results, which includes:
• Control name, level, and identification number
• Flags

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
You can also retransmit or archive a stored control result and access
windows to:
criteria
• Print the Absorbance Data report, QC Result Details report, and
QC Results List report
• View detailed stored control result information
For control results that have not been released, see QC result review
screen, page 5-205.
Figure 5.67: Stored QC results screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Stored QC results screen field

When accessing the Stored QC results screen the information sorts by

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• LAS
SID, CONTROL NAME, LEVEL, and Alphanumerically in ascending order.
ASSAY
RESULT This column does not sort.
FLAG See Descriptions of quality control
To display this screen, see Access the Stored QC results screen,

page 5-242.
• View all stored control results, page 5-243
• Find a specific stored control result, page 5-244
• View stored control result details, page 5-245
page 5-192
• Retransmit a stored control result, page 5-246
• Archive stored control results, page 5-246
Access the Stored QC results screen
Perform this procedure to display the Stored QC results screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Stored QC results screen:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Select QC - Cal from the menu bar, and then select Stored QC results.
The Stored QC results screen displays.
Procedures - Stored QC results screen
Procedures you can perform from the Stored QC results screen and its
• View all stored control results, page 5-243
page 5-192
• Retransmit a stored control result, page 5-246
View all stored control results
Perform this procedure to display the Stored QC results screen. From

this screen you can view information for released control results.
To view information for unreleased control results, see View all control
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view all stored control results:

Select QC - Cal icon from the menu bar, and then select Stored QC
results.
The Stored QC results screen displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Find a specific stored control result
Perform this procedure to search for specific released control results by

Prerequisite Access the Stored QC results screen, page 5-242
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific stored control result:

1. Select F3 - Find on the Stored QC results screen.
The Find options (Stored QC results) window displays.

time interval.
except position (p).
and 12347.

The Stored QC results screen displays with the text "Search
• Find options (Stored QC results) window, page 5-248

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
View stored control result details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for QC result (Stored QC

results) window. From this screen you can view details for released
control results and add comments.
To view the assay reaction graph and absorbance data for control
To view details for unreleased control results, see View control result
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view stored control result details:

1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the Stored QC
The Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window displays.

4. Select Done to return to the Stored QC results screen.
System), page 5-249
• Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System),
page 5-251

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Retransmit a stored control result
Perform this procedure to retransmit a released control result(s) to the

host.
communications.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To retransmit a stored control result to the host:

1. Select the desired control result(s) from the table on the Stored
QC results screen, or select F2 - Select all.
2. Select F6 - Transmit to Host.

3. Select OK to transmit the result(s).

To cancel a transmission to the host computer, see Cancel result
transmission, page 5-230.
Archive stored control results
Perform this procedure to store released control results on a CD to

create a backup for long-term storage.
NOTE: The results are archived in a delimited ASCII format so you can
import them into a spreadsheet. You cannot use the ARCHITECT
System to retrieve the information.
• Unformatted CD-RW (compact disk read/write)
To archive stored control results:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

3. Select the desired control results from the table on the Stored QC
results. See Find a specific stored control result, page 5-244.
4. Select F8-Archive.
The Archive QC results window displays.
6. Deselect Delete records after archive check box. (optional)
NOTE: If you delete QC results, the result values continue to be

used in the cumulative module or system data. However, deleted
QC results are deleted from the current Westgard analysis. Before
deleting QC results, verify that all results you do not want
included in the cumulative data have been excluded. See Exclude
or include a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-280. Once the archive is
complete and the QC results have been deleted, you cannot
access the result to exclude it.
If you choose to delete results, results with a status of Pending
transmission or Pending collation are not deleted.
7. Select Done to archive the results.

complete. Do not navigate to a different screen or window until
the "0519 Data Archive Complete" message displays.
8. Select the refresh button, if available, to display all records.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Archive QC results window, page 5-253
Windows - Stored QC results screen
Windows you can access from the Stored QC results screen include:
• Find options (Stored QC results) window, page 5-248
System), page 5-249
• Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System),
page 5-251
• Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - calculated view,
page 5-252
• Archive QC results window, page 5-253
Find options (Stored QC results) window
From the Find options (Stored QC results) window you can search for
specific released control results by entering your search criteria in one
or more fields. The information that displays depends on the assay
type (photometric or potentiometric) for the result selected.
For unreleased control results, see Find options (QC result review)
window, page 5-213.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.68: Find options (Stored QC results) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Stored QC results)

Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - data view (c

System)
From the data view of the Details for QC result (Stored QC results)
window you can view detailed information for released control results.
The information that displays depends on the assay type (photometric
or potentiometric) for the result selected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.69: Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - data

view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for QC result (Stored QC

results) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix
E-87.
page 5-192
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - photometric

- graph view (c System)
From the photometric - graph view of the Details for QC result (Stored
QC results) window you can view the assay reaction graph and
associated absorbance data for released control results.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.70: Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window -

photometric - graph view (c System)

results) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-89.
page 5-192
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System)
From the i System view of the Details for QC result (Stored QC results)
window you can view detailed information for released control results.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.71: Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i

System)

results) window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-90.
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - calculated

view
From the calculated view of the Details for QC result (Stored QC

results) window you can view detailed information for released
control results.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.72: Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window -

calculated view

results) window - Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-91.
Archive QC results window
From the Archive QC results window you can archive released control
results to a CD.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.73: Archive QC results window
For descriptions of these fields, see Archive QC results window field


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 5 Exception management
Exception management
An exception is a test order that failed to complete. Results are not
reported and operator intervention is required. You use the Exception
status screen to review and manage exceptions.
When an exception(s) occurs:
• The Exceptions status button displays on the Snapshot screen
and indicates the number of exceptions. You can select this
button to display the Exception status screen.
• The Exceptions icon on the menu bar blinks to indicate new
exceptions exist. You can select this icon, and then Exception
status, to display the Exception status screen.
The exception management topic includes the Exception status screen,
page 5-255.
Exception status screen

From the Exception status screen you can view information for
patient, control, and calibration exceptions, which includes:
• Assay name
• Error code
• Module identifier
You can also transmit an exception to the host, delete an exception,
and access windows to:
• Find information for specific exceptions based on specified
search criteria
• Print the Exception Details, Exception Status, and Absorbance
Data reports
• View detailed information for exceptions
• View probable causes and corrective actions for the error code
• Add a comment to an exception
• Rerun an exception

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Exception management Section 5
Figure 5.74: Exception status screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Exception status screen field

When accessing the Exception status screen the information sorts by
time the exception was generated from the most recent to the oldest
exception.

• LAS
• WTR (water)/0

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

ERROR CODE Numerically in ascending order.
To display this screen, see Access the Exception status screen, page 5-257.
• View all exceptions, page 5-258
• Find a specific exception, page 5-258
• View exception details, page 5-259
• Add a comment to an exception, page 5-260
page 5-192
• Transmit an exception to the host, page 5-261
• Delete an exception, page 5-261
Access the Exception status screen
Perform this procedure to display the Exception status screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Exception status screen:
selecting the Exceptions status button.
Select Exceptions from the menu bar, and then select Exception
status.
The Exception status screen displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Procedures - Exception status screen
Procedures you can perform from the Exception status screen include:
• View all exceptions, page 5-258
• Transmit an exception to the host, page 5-261
• Delete an exception, page 5-261
View all exceptions
Perform this procedure to display the Exception status screen. From

this screen you can view a list of all tests that have failed to complete.
To find specific exceptions, see Find a specific exception, page 5-258.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
selecting the Exceptions status button.
To view all exceptions:
Select Exceptions from the menu bar, and then select Exception
status.
The Exception status screen displays.
Find a specific exception
Perform this procedure to search for a specific exception(s) by entering

your search criteria in one or more fields.
Prerequisite Access the Exception status screen, page 5-257
Module status Any

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Supplies NA
To find a specific exception:

1. Select F3 - Find on the Exception status screen.
The Find options (Exception status) window displays.

Example: If you enter 123* in the Error code data entry box, all
orders with an error code starting with 123 display.

The Exception status screen displays with the text "Search
• Find options (Exception status) window, page 5-262
View exception details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for exceptions window.

From this window you can view detailed information for exceptions
that you can use in troubleshooting.
Prerequisite Exception status screen, page 5-255
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view exception details:

1. Select the desired exception(s) from the table on the Exception
The Details for exceptions window displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each exception if you

4. Select Done to return to the Exception status screen.
page 5-264
Add a comment to an exception
Perform this procedure to add a comment to an exception(s).

Module status Any
Supplies NA
To add a comment to an exception:

The Details for exceptions window displays.
NOTE: Comments are associated with a test and display and/or

print with the test. Sample comments also display if entered.
4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each exception if you

(optional)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

page 5-264
Transmit an exception to the host
Perform this procedure to transmit an exception(s) to the host when

exceptions are managed on a host system.
communications.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To transmit an exception to the host:

2. Select F8 - Transmit to Host to transmit the exceptions.

Once the transmission completes, the exception(s) no longer
displays on the Exception status screen.
To cancel the exception transmission, see Cancel result transmission,
page 5-230.
Delete an exception
Perform this procedure to delete an exception(s) that is no longer

needed for troubleshooting.
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To delete an exception:
3. Select OK to delete the exception(s).
NOTE: Exceptions that are pending transmission or pending

collation are not deleted until transmission completes.
Windows - Exception status screen
Windows you can access from the Exception status screen include:
• Find options (Exception status) window, page 5-262
page 5-264
• Details for exceptions window - calculated control view, page 5-268
Find options (Exception status) window
From the Find options (Exception status) window you can search for
specific exceptions by entering your search criteria in one or more
fields.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.75: Find options (Exception status) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Exception status)

Details for exceptions window - data view (c System)
From the data view of the Details for exceptions window you can view
detailed information for exceptions and add comments. The
information that displays depends on the assay type (photometric,
potentiometric, or sample interference index) for the exception
selected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.76: Details for exceptions window - data view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for exceptions window - Data
view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-98.
page 5-192
Details for exceptions window - photometric - graph view (c

System)
From the photometric - graph view of the Details for exceptions

window you can view the assay reaction graph and associated
absorbance data for results. This view is not available for tests that are
unable to complete all photometric measurements.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.77: Details for exceptions window - photometric - graph view

(c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for exceptions window -

Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix
E-100.
page 5-192
Details for exceptions window (i System)
From the Details for exceptions window you can view detailed
information for exceptions and add comments.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.78: Details for exceptions window (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for exceptions window (i

Details for exceptions window - calculated view
From the calculated view of the Details for exceptions window you
can view detailed information for exceptions and add comments.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.79: Details for exceptions window - calculated view

Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-103.
Details for exceptions window - control view
From the control view of the Details for exceptions window you can
view detailed information for exceptions and add comments.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.80: Details for exceptions window - control view

Control view field descriptions, page Appendix E-104.
Details for exceptions window - calculated control view
From the calculated control view of the Details for exceptions window
you can view detailed information for exceptions and add comments.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.81: Details for exceptions window - calculated control view

Calculated control view field descriptions, page Appendix E-105.
Details for exceptions window - calibrator view
From the calibrator view of the Details for exceptions window you can
view detailed information for exceptions and add comments.
the Sample status window. Some data fields may not display all data if

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.82: Details for exceptions window - calibrator view

Calibrator view field descriptions, page Appendix E-106.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 5 Quality control analysis
Quality control analysis

Quality control analysis is the process of monitoring control activity.
The ARCHITECT System allows you to monitor control activity using
standard Levey-Jennings graphs, Westgard rules, and QC data
summaries. Control data includes both unreleased and released
results.
To help ensure quality results and maintain optimal system
performance:
• Carefully follow all directions in the Operations Manual and the
• Never use expired or contaminated consumables.
• Perform maintenance checks and calibration procedures as
recommended. See Maintenance, page 9-2.
IMPORTANT: The system evaluates controls on an assay per control

lot basis. If a control fails on one or multiple reagent kits, the control
failure on the kit(s) does not prevent the kit(s) from being used. You
need to evaluate and resolve any control issues before running patient
samples.
The quality control management topics include:
• Levey-Jennings graph screen, page 5-274
• QC summary review screen, page 5-285
• QC reports screen, page 5-292
Westgard rule application

When Westgard rules are configured, the ARCHITECT System
compares a control result against the expected mean and standard
deviation for the control level. Previous results for the same assay are
considered.
For information on configuring Westgard rules, see Configure a
Westgard rule, page 2-131.
For information on each of the rules, see Westgard rule descriptions,
page 5-272.
For information on run definitions, see Westgard rule run descriptions,
page 5-274.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Quality control analysis Section 5
Westgard rule descriptions
Westgard rules configured as a failure for an assay(s) produce a CNTL

(control) flag for each patient result associated with the assay(s). The
system compares the control result to the Westgard rules starting with
the first rule. Westgard rules are applied in the following order: 1-3s,
2-2s 1R 1M, 2-2s 1R xM, 2-2s xR 1M, R-4s, 4-1s 1m, 4-1s xM, 10-x 1M,
10-x xM, 1-2s. When a result fails to meet the criteria of a rule the
system generates an error without further evaluation.
Table 5.10: Westgard rule descriptions
Westgard rule Description
1-2s Control rule to test whether a control measurement exceeds
the control limits of x + 2SD or x - 2SD.
1-3s Control rule to test whether a control measurement exceeds
the control limits of x + 3SD or x - 3SD.
2-2s 1R 1M Control rule to test whether two consecutive control
measurements for the same control material within the
same run exceed the same control limit of either x + 2SD or
x - 2SD. Both results must fall on the same side of the
mean.
2-2s 1R xM Control rule to test whether two consecutive control
measurements across control materials within the same run
exceed the same control limit of either x + 2SD or x - 2SD.
Both results must fall on the same side of the mean. The
two control results must have different control level names.
2-2s xR 1M Control rule to test whether two consecutive control
measurements for the same control material across two
different runs exceed the same control limit of either x +
2SD or x - 2SD. Both results must fall on the same side of
the mean. The previous consecutive control result can be
obtained during any previous run.
R-4s Control rule to test whether the range, or difference,
between control measurements run within 30 minutes of
each other exceeds 4SD. The two control results need not
be consecutive. The current control result is compared
against each control result, which is older than the current
result, by 30 minutes or less. Each result must be greater
than 2SD, but in opposite directions.
4-1s 1M Control rule to test whether four consecutive control
measurements for the same control material exceed the
same control limit of either x + 1SD or x - 1SD. All four
control results must fall on the same side of the mean. The
previous control results can be obtained during any run.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 5.10: Westgard rule descriptions (continued)

Westgard rule Description
4-1s xM Control rule to test whether four consecutive control
measurements across control materials exceed the same
control limit of either x + 1SD or x - 1SD. All four results
must fall on the same side of the mean. The previous control
results can be obtained during any run. (For this rule, both
control results with the same or different control level names
are considered.)
10-x 1M Control rule to test whether 10 consecutive control
measurements for the same control material fall on the
same side of the mean. If a result falls on the mean, the rule
does not fail. The previous control results can be obtained
during any run.
10-x xM Control rule to test whether 10 consecutive control
measurements across control materials fall on the same
side of the mean. If a result falls on the mean, the rule does
not fail. The previous control results can be obtained during
any run. (For this rule, both control results with the same or
different control level names are considered.)
NOTE: To evaluate 1M (one material) rules, the system considers

previous control results with the same control name, control level
name, and control lot number.
To evaluate xM (across materials) rules, the system considers previous
control results with the same control name and control lot number
but different control level names.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Westgard rule run descriptions
The following table describes Westgard rules run definitions. For

information on configuring Run definitions, see Configure system
control center window, page 2-30.
Table 5.11: Westgard rules run definitions
Run definitions Description
First Run Start The system allows the user to define what a run is on a
Hour system-wide basis. Run is defined by specifying a start time
(which hour) and a time period (how many hours per run).
This is the time based run mode. The start hour is an
integer between 0 and 23. The "Run Period" is used for
Westgard rules 2-2s 1R 1M, 2-2s 1R xM, 2-2s xR 1M, 4-1s
1M, 4-1s xM.
Run Period Length The length of the "Run Period" in hours. The next Run
Period begins Run Period Length hours after the current
Run Period started. The run period is an integer between 1
and 24. If the 1 day period (24 hours) cannot be divided into
equal time runs, the last run shall have the remaining hours.
The Run Period is used for Westgard rules 2-2s 1R 1M,
2-2s 1R xM, 2-2s xR 1M, 4-1s 1M, 4-1s xM.
Levey-Jennings graph screen

From the Levey-Jennings graph screen you can view graphs and
statistical data that reflect the criteria you specified on the QC
selection window. A maximum of six Levey-Jennings graphs, three per
page, displays.
• Change the criteria for the graph and data
• Include or exclude points from a graph
• View details for a selected point
• Print the Levey-Jennings report

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.83: Levey-Jennings graph screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Levey-Jennings graph screen field

An explanation of the graph and statistical data elements on the
Levey-Jennings graph screen follows.
Table 5.12: Graph elements
Item Description
MEAN Represented by the center line of the graph and indicates
the expected control mean.
+ and - 1 SD Represented by the first line above and below the mean
(standard (green area).
deviation)
+ and - 2 SD Represented by the second line above and below the mean
(yellow area).
+ and - 3 SD Represented by the third line above and below the mean
(red area).
Cursor (yellow Indicates the selected point. Use the Point cursor controls to
box) move the cursor from one point to the next.
Points Represent control results and are graphed in the order of
completion.
• Normal (black) Points that fall within the defined control range and do not
fail configured Westgard rules.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 5.12: Graph elements (continued)

Item Description
• Westgard Points that caused a warning condition based on the
warnings Westgard analysis.
(yellow)
• Westgard Points that failed Westgard analysis.
failures (red)
• Out of range Bar that indicates a control result that is outside of the
(blue) control range.
• Excluded Points that have been excluded from the data calculation.
(white)
Table 5.13: Levey-Jennings graph statistical data elements

Statistic fields Description
MEAN The expected mean value as configured.
SD The expected standard deviation value as configured.
LEVEL The control level name you selected.
N The number of control points for the selected
level/lot/assay/module.
COMPARISON The mean used to compare to the expected control mean.
MEAN Information that displays is determined by your selections
on the QC selection window.
Options are:
None - no comparison displayed
Manufacturers - mean as configured
Module cumulative - calculated for the selected
assay/level/lot for the selected module
System cumulative - calculated value for the selected
assay/level/lot for all modules
COMPARISON SD The SD (standard deviation) used to compare to the
expected control SD. Information that displays is determined
by your selections on the QC selection window.
Options are:
None - no comparison displayed
Manufacturers - SD as configured
Module cumulative - calculated for the selected
assay/level/lot for the selected module
System cumulative - calculated value for the selected
assay/level/lot for all modules
VISIBLE DATE The date range of the displayed points. As you navigate
RANGE through the graph, the VISIBLE DATE RANGE changes to
reflect the points you are viewing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To display this screen, see Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-277.
• Display the value for a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-280
• Change a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-279
• View details for a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-281
• Add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-282
• Exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-280
• Recalculate Westgard analysis, page 5-282
• Print the Levey-Jennings report, page 5-299
Procedures - Levey-Jennings graph screen
Procedures you can perform from the Levey-Jennings graph screen

include:
• Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-277
• Display the value for a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-280
• View details for a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-281
Create a Levey-Jennings graph
Perform this procedure to create Levey-Jennings graphs that you can

use to monitor control activity.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To create a Levey-Jennings graph:

1. Select QC - Cal from the menu bar, and then select
Levey-Jennings graph.
The Levey-Jennings graph screen displays in the background
with the QC selection window as the active window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: Select module 5 for calculated results.

The control information for the selected module displays.
3. Enter a date range in the Date range for calculation data entry
box.
NOTE: The default range includes one month prior to the

current date.
4. Select the desired Comparison type option:

– None - Does not use a comparison method
– Manufacturers - Compares the expected mean and SD
(standard deviation) to the manufacturers mean and SD
configured for the control
– Module cumulative - Compares the expected mean and SD
to the cumulative mean and SD of the processing module
selected in step 2
– System cumulative - Compares the expected mean and SD
to the cumulative mean and SD of all modules for a
multi-module system
5. Select the desired assay from the Assay list.
6. Select the desired control name from the Control name list.
7. Select the desired control lot number from the Control lot list.
8. Deselect the desired Control level check boxes. (optional)
NOTE: The default setting is all control level check boxes

selected.
9. Select Done to create the graph.

To view detailed information for a single control result, see View details
for a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-281.
To change the criteria for your graph, see Change a Levey-Jennings
graph, page 5-279.
• QC selection window, page 5-283

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Change a Levey-Jennings graph
Perform this procedure to redefine the criteria for a Levey-Jennings

graph.
Prerequisite Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-277
View an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph,
page 5-290
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To change a Levey-Jennings graph:

1. Select F2 - QC selection on the Levey-Jennings graph screen.
The QC selection window displays.

3. Enter a date range in the Date range for calculation data entry
box.

current date.
4. Select the desired Comparison type option:

– None - Does not use a comparison method
– Manufacturers - Compares the expected mean and SD
(standard deviation) to the manufacturers mean and SD
configured for the control
– Module cumulative - Compares the expected mean and SD
to the cumulative mean and SD of the processing module
selected in step 2
– System cumulative - Compares the expected mean and SD
to the cumulative mean and SD of all modules for a
multi-module system
5. Select the desired assay from the Assay list.
6. Select the desired control name from the Control name list.
7. Select the desired control lot number from the Control lot list.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
8. Deselect the desired Control level check boxes. (optional)
NOTE: The default setting is all control level check boxes

selected.

The updated Levey-Jennings graph screen displays.
Display the value for a Levey-Jennings point
Perform this procedure to display the result value and date for a
specific point(s) on the Levey-Jennings graph screen.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To display the value for a Levey-Jennings point:

1. Select the desired point from the graph on the Levey-Jennings
graph screen.
The point value and date display in the lower right corner of the
screen.
2. Use the Point scroll buttons to select another point. (optional)
Exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point
Perform this procedure to exclude a point or include a previously

excluded point from the comparison mean and standard deviation.
To recalculate Westgard rules, see Recalculate Westgard analysis,
page 5-282.
Module status Any

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Supplies NA
To exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point:

graph screen, and then select F5 - Details.
The Point detail window displays.
2. Select the desired Include/exclude option.
NOTE: You must enter a comment to include or exclude a point.

Both the QC result comment and the Levey-Jennings point
comment print on the QC Result Details report.
4. Select the Westgard re-evaluation check box to recalculate the

Westgard analysis. (optional)

• Point detail window, page 5-284
View details for a Levey-Jennings point
Perform this procedure to display the Point detail window. From this
window you can view detailed information for a control result.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view details for a Levey-Jennings point:

Select the desired point from the graph on the Levey-Jennings graph
screen, and then select F5 - Details.
To exclude a point on the Levey-Jennings graph, see Exclude or include
a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-280.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To add a comment, see Add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point,

page 5-282.
Add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point
Perform this procedure to add a comment to a control point on a

Module status Any
Supplies NA
To add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point:

1. Select the desired Levey-Jennings point, and then select F5 -
Details.
NOTE: Both the QC result comment and the Levey-Jennings

point comment print on the QC Result Details report.
Recalculate Westgard analysis
Perform this procedure to recalculate Westgard analysis after:

• Including or excluding a point
• Changing the configured expected mean and/or SD (standard
deviation) settings

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
The analysis is repeated for all rules except 1-3s or 1-2s.

Module status Any
Supplies NA
To recalculate Westgard analysis:

graph screen, and then select F5 - Details.
2. Select the desired Include/exclude option. (optional)
3. Select the Westgard re-evaluation check box.

Windows - Levey-Jennings graph screen
Windows you can access from the Levey-Jennings graph screen

include:
QC selection window
From the QC selection window you specify the criteria used to create
Levey-Jennings graphs and statistical data.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.84: QC selection window
For descriptions of these fields, see QC selection window field

• Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-277
Point detail window
From the Point detail window you can view detailed information for a
point on the Levey-Jennings graph screen. You can also:
• Include or exclude a point
• Recalculate the Westgard analysis
• Add a comment

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.85: Point detail window
For descriptions of these fields, see Point detail window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-73.
QC summary review screen

From the QC summary review screen you can view statistical data for
all assay control levels, which includes:
• Assay name
• Control name, lot number, and level
• Number of control points
• Actual mean, SD, and%CV
• Expected mean and SD
• Find information for specific assay controls based on specified
search criteria
• Print the QC Analysis, QC Summary, and Levey-Jennings reports
• View detailed QC data

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• View the Levey-Jennings graphs for a selected assay control level
Figure 5.86: QC summary review screen
For descriptions of these fields, see QC summary review screen field

When accessing the QC summary review screen the information sorts
by control name, level, and then by assay.

CONTROL NAME/LOT Alphanumerically in ascending order.
LEVEL Alphanumerically in ascending order.
N Numerically in descending order.
ACTUAL MEAN These columns do not sort.
ACTUAL SD
% CV
EXPECTED MEAN
EXPECTED SD

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table 5.14: QC summary review statistical data elements

Statistic fields Description
N The number of control points for the
level/lot/assay/module used in the calculation.
ACTUAL MEAN The mean calculated for the level/lot/assay for a
processing module and specified date range.
ACTUAL SD The SD calculated for the level/lot/assay for a
processing module and specified date range.
% CV The percent coefficient of variation calculated for the
level/lot/assay for a processing module and specified
date range.
EXPECTED MEAN The expected mean configured for the control level.
EXPECTED SD The expected SD configured for the control level.
When a control result has a flag, the QC summary information

displays in red on this screen. Once a control result completes without
a flag, the information displays in black. See Descriptions of quality
control result flags, page 5-207.
To display this screen, see View QC data summary, page 5-288.
• Find the summary for specific QC data, page 5-288
• View QC data details, page 5-289
• View an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-290
• Print the QC Analysis report, page 5-299
• Print the QC Summary report, page 5-300
Procedures - QC summary review screen
Procedures you can perform from the QC summary review screen

include:
• View QC data summary, page 5-288
• View an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-290

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
View QC data summary
Perform this procedure to display the QC summary review screen.

From this screen you can view a summary of control data.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view QC data summary:

1. Select the QC-Cal icon from the menu bar and then select QC
summary.
The QC summary review screen displays.
2. Select the desired Module option. (optional)

3. Enter a date range in the Date range: data entry box and then
select the update button to update the data. (optional)

current date.
Find the summary for specific QC data
Perform this procedure to search for specific QC data by entering your

Prerequisite View QC data summary, page 5-288
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find the summary for specific QC data:

1. Select F3-Find on the QC summary review screen.
The Find options (QC summary review) window displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

orders with an error code starting with 123 display.

The QC summary review screen displays with the text "Search
• Find options (QC summary review) window, page 5-290
View QC data details
Perform this procedure to display the Details for QC summary

window. From this window you can view QC data details for a selected
assay control level.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view QC data details:

1. Select the desired assay control level(s) from the table on the QC
summary review screen, or select F2 - Select all.
The Details for QC summary window displays.
3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay control

level if you selected more than one. (optional)
4. Select Done to return to the QC summary review screen.
• Details for QC summary window, page 5-291

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
View an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph
Perform this procedure to display the Levey-Jennings graph screen.

From this screen you can view the Levey-Jennings graph for a selected
assay control level.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph:

1. Select the control level(s) for an assay from the table on the QC
summary review screen.
NOTE: The F7 - Graph button is not available if more than one

assay control lot is selected on the QC summary review screen.
2. Select F7 - Graph.
The Levey-Jennings graph screen displays.
3. Select F3 - QC summary to return to the QC summary review

screen. (optional)
To redefine the criteria for the Levey-Jennings graph, see Change a
Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-279.
Windows - QC summary review screen
Windows you can access from the QC summary review screen include:
• Find options (QC summary review) window, page 5-290
• Details for QC summary window, page 5-291
Find options (QC summary review) window
From the Find options (QC summary review) window you can search
for specific control data by entering your search criteria in one or more
fields.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.87: Find options (QC summary review) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (QC summary review)
Details for QC summary window
From the Details for QC summary window you can view QC data
details for the selected control level, which includes:
• Expected and Manufacturer mean and SD
• Actual (processing module specific) and System (all processing
modules in an i System) data for a date range
• Module cumulative (processing module specific) and System
cumulative (all processing modules in an i System) data

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.88: Details for QC summary window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for QC summary window field
QC reports screen
From the QC reports screen you can specify the information to
include in the QC Analysis, QC Summary, and Levey-Jennings reports,
and print the reports. This information includes:
• Module
• Assay
• Date range

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 5.89: QC reports screen
For descriptions of these fields, see QC reports screen field descriptions,

page Appendix E-94.
To display this screen, see Access the QC reports screen, page 5-293.
Access the QC reports screen
Perform this procedure to display the QC reports screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the QC reports screen:

Select QC - Cal from the menu bar, and then select QC reports.
The QC reports screen displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To print the Levey-Jennings report, see Print the Levey-Jennings report,

page 5-299.
To print the QC Analysis report, see Print the QC Analysis report,
page 5-299.
To print the QC Summary report, see Print the QC Summary report,
page 5-300.
• Levey - Jennings Report, page Appendix A-45
• QC Analysis Report, page Appendix A-62
• QC Summary Report, page Appendix A-70

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 5 Report printing
Report printing
You can print screen images and reports generated by the ARCHITECT
System. Your system may be configured to print some reports
automatically. For example, the Procedure, Cal Curve Details, Sample,
and Results List reports print upon completion of the related activity.
Report printing procedures and topic include:
• Print the Order List report, page 5-298
• Print a Maintenance History report for a specified month, page 5-301
• Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure,
page 5-302
• Print a Procedure report, page 5-303
• Print the Message History Log report, page 5-304
• View a print job in the print queue, page 5-306
• Delete a print job, page 5-307
• Print a screen image, page 5-307
• Windows - Report printing, page 5-308
Print a report
Perform this procedure to print a report. Reports are available from
related screens. For example, you can print the Patient report from
both the Results review and Stored results screens. You can print the
Order List report from the Order status screen. Report availability is
listed in the following table.
NOTE: Your system may be configured to print some reports

automatically. For more information see Configure report settings,
page 2-7.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Report printing Section 5
A Patient ID is required to print patient data. If the selected test result

does not contain a PID the report will print the header information
and no data.
To print the... Access the...

Absorbance Data Report (c System), Results review screen
page Appendix A-3 Stored results screen
QC result review screen
Stored QC results screen
Exception status screen
Assay Parameter Report (c System), Configuration screen
page Appendix A-6
Assay Parameter Report (i System),
page Appendix A-15
Cal Curve Details Report - Calibration status screen
Potentiometric (c System), Calibration history screen
page Appendix A-20
Cal Curve Details Report - Linear
(c System), page Appendix A-23
Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal
Factor/Blank (c System),
page Appendix A-26
Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust
(i System), page Appendix A-29
Cal Curve Details Report - Full
Cal Curve Details Report - Index
Cal Curve Summary Report, Calibration status screen
page Appendix A-38 Calibration history screen
Exception Details Report, Exception status screen
page Appendix A-40
Exception Status Report,
page Appendix A-43
Levey - Jennings Report, Levey-Jennings graph screen
page Appendix A-45 QC reports screen
Maintenance History Report, Maintenance log screen
page Appendix A-48
Message History Log Report, System logs screen
page Appendix A-50
Order List Report, page Appendix A-52 Order status screen
Order Status Report, page Appendix
A-54

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To print the... Access the...

Patient Report, page Appendix A-56 Results review screen
Stored results screen
Procedure Report, Basic, Maintenance screen
page Appendix A-58 Diagnostics screen
Procedure Report, Columnar,
page Appendix A-60
QC Analysis Report, page Appendix QC reports screen
A-62 QC summary review screen
QC Summary Report, page Appendix
A-70
QC Result Details Report, QC result review screen
page Appendix A-65 Stored QC results screen
QC Results List Report, page Appendix
A-68
Reagent Load Error Report, Reagent status screen
page Appendix A-74
Reagent Status Report (i 1000SR),
page Appendix A-78
Rerun List Report, page Appendix A-80 Rerun status screen
Result Details Report, page Appendix Results review screen
A-82 Stored results screen
Results List Report, page Appendix
A-85
Sample Laboratory Report, Results review screen
page Appendix A-89 Stored results screen
Sample Report, page Appendix A-87
Sample Status Report, page Appendix Sample status screen
A-91
Temporary Message Log Report, System logs screen
page Appendix A-93
TSB Installation Log Report,
page Appendix A-95
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print a report:
1. Select the item(s) to include in the report. (optional)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: Items print in the order they are displayed on the screen.
If you do not select a specific item(s), all items print.
2. Select F4 - Print.
The Print options window displays.
3. Select the desired Print selection option.
4. Select the desired report from the Reports available list.
5. Enter the number of copies in the Number of copies data entry

box.
6. Select Done to print the report.
• Printed report examples, page Appendix A-1
Print the Order List report

Perform this procedure to print an Order List report to assist you in
placing a sufficient amount of sample in the assigned position.
Prerequisite Access the Order status screen, page 5-144
Module status Any, however, if the processing module is not in
Running status the volume printed on the Order List
report is for one calibration/control per module and does
not account for multiple reagent lots and kits on a
module.
Supplies NA
To print an Order List report:

1. Select F4 - Print on the Order status screen.
2. Select the Order List report option.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Print the Levey-Jennings report

Perform this procedure to print a Levey-Jennings report for a selected
control.
Prerequisite Access the QC reports screen, page 5-293
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print a Levey-Jennings report for a selected control:

1. Select the desired Module option or for a multi-module i System
the desired check box(es) on the QC reports screen.
2. Enter the starting and ending dates in the Date from and to data
entry boxes.
3. Select the desired control(s) from the Controls list.

box.
Print the QC Analysis report

Perform this procedure to print a QC Analysis report for a selected
control.
Module status Any

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Supplies NA
To print a QC Analysis report for a selected control:

entry boxes.

box.
Print the QC Summary report

Perform this procedure to print a QC Summary report for a selected
control.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print a QC Summary report for a selected control:


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
entry boxes. (optional)

box.
Print a Maintenance History report for a specified month

Perform this procedure to print a Maintenance History report that
includes the maintenance procedures (scheduled and/or performed)
for a specified month.
To print a report for all procedures, see Print a Maintenance History
report for a specific procedure, page 5-302.
Prerequisite Access the Maintenance log screen, page 9-16
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print a Maintenance History report for a specified month:

1. Select the desired Module option on the Maintenance log
screen.
2. Use the previous/next buttons to display the desired month.

(optional)
4. Ensure the All items option is selected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
5. Select Done to print the Maintenance History report for the

selected month.
NOTE: For procedures that were scheduled but not performed,

00.00.00 prints in the time column.
• Maintenance log screen, page 9-14
• Maintenance History Report, page Appendix A-48
Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure

Perform this procedure to print a Maintenance History report for a
specific procedure for a specific month (scheduled and/or performed)
stored on the system. The system stores procedures for the last four
months.
To print a report for a selected month, see Print a Maintenance History
report for a specified month, page 5-301.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print a Maintenance History report for all procedures:

1. Select the desired Module option on the Maintenance log
screen.
2. Select the desired procedure.
4. Select the Selected items option.
5. Select Done to print the Maintenance History report.
NOTE: For procedures that were scheduled but not performed,

00:00:00 prints in the time column.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Print a Procedure report

Perform this procedure to:
• Print a Procedure report if your system is not configured to
automatically print one after a maintenance procedure is
performed
• Print a Procedure report after a diagnostic procedure is
performed
• Reprint a Procedure report
For information on enabling automatic report printing, see Change the
automatic report printing settings, page 2-11.
Prerequisite Access the Maintenance screen, page 9-4, or Access
the Diagnostics screen, page 10-652
Module status Stopped, Warming, Ready, or Maintenance
Supplies NA
To print a Procedure report:

2. Select the desired tab to display the maintenance or diagnostic

procedures for that category.
3. Select a procedure from the MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES or

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES list. (optional)
NOTE: If you do not select a specific procedure, all available

reports print for all performed procedures in the selected
category.
To print a Procedure report for a procedure currently in process,
you must return to the Maintenance perform window. See Return
to a maintenance procedure in process, page 9-9.
The Print Options window displays.

box.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Maintenance screen, page 9-3
Print the Message History Log report

Perform this procedure to print the Message History Log report.
Prerequisite Access the System logs screen, page 10-14
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print the Message History Log report:

1. Select the Log selection list button on the System logs screen,
and then select Message history log.
2. Select the item(s) to include in the report. (optional)
NOTE: Items print in the order you select them. If you do not
select a specific item(s), all items print.

box.
• System logs screen, page 10-11
Print an Assay Parameter report for specified assays

Perform this procedure to print an Assay Parameter report for selected
assays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To print an Assay Parameter report for all assays, see Print an Assay
Parameter report for all assays, page 5-305.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print an Assay Parameter report for specified assays:

1. Select the assay(s) to include in the report from the Assays list on
NOTE: The Assay Parameter report prints in the order you select
the assays.

box.
page 2-36
• Assay Parameter Report (c System), page Appendix A-6
• Assay Parameter Report (i System), page Appendix A-15
Print an Assay Parameter report for all assays

Perform this procedure to print an Assay Parameter report for all
assays.
To print an Assay Parameter Report for selected assays, see Print an
Assay Parameter report for specified assays, page 5-304.
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To print an Assay Parameter report for all assays:

1. Select F2 - Print on the Configuration screen.

box.
page 2-36
View a print job in the print queue

Perform this procedure to view the status of a print request that is in
the print queue.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view a print job in the print queue:

1. Select the Printer button on the Snapshot screen.
The Printer window displays.
2. View the status of the desired print job in the Printer queue list.
3. Select Done to return to the Snapshot screen.
• Printer window, page 5-309

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Delete a print job

Perform this procedure to delete a report that is printing or waiting to
be printed.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To delete a print job:

1. Select the Printer button on the Snapshot screen.
The Printer window displays.
2. Select the desired print job from the Printer queue list.
3. Select Delete to delete the print job or Delete all to delete all
jobs in the printer queue.
NOTE: When deleting a print request with a status of printing,

wait until the printer starts printing the report before selecting
Delete.
4. Select Done to return to the Snapshot screen.
Print a screen image

Perform this procedure to print a screen image to preserve graphical or
troubleshooting information such as:
• The Maintenance log
• A Levey-Jennings graph
• An alert and/or information message
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To print a screen image:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Access the desired screen image, and then simultaneously press the
ALT+Print Screen keys on the keyboard.
The screen image prints.
NOTE: General printing errors can occur when you attempt to print
multiple screen images. Do not attempt to print more than three
screen images at one time or to print a screen image while printing
reports.
Windows - Report printing

Windows you can access include:
Print options window
From the Print options window you can choose the report to print,
specify the data to include, and enter the number of copies.
Figure 5.90: Print options window
For descriptions of these fields, see Print options window field


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure, page 5-302

• Print the Message History Log report, page 5-304
Printer window
From the Printer window you can check the printer status and delete a
print job.
Figure 5.91: Printer window
For descriptions of these fields, see Printer window field descriptions,

• View a print job in the print queue, page 5-306
• Delete a print job, page 5-307

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Calibration procedures
Section 6
Introduction
<F=0>
Prior to running patient and control samples you must calibrate your
assay(s).
Before attempting to calibrate the system you should be familiar with
the hardware components of your system and the fundamental
principles of the software user interface. See Use or function, page 1-1.
Calibration topics include:
• Assay calibration, page 6-2
Provides descriptions of calibration methods and types and
descriptions of the Calibration order screen with instructions for
performing calibration order procedures.
• Calibration review, page 6-16
Provides descriptions of the Calibration status and Calibration
history screens with instructions for viewing and archiving
calibration curves.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay calibration Section 6
Assay calibration
Calibration is analyzing samples of known concentrations, recording
the instrument response value(s), and plotting the measured value(s)
against the known concentration to create a curve for evaluating
unknown samples.
Assay calibration topics include:
• Calibration guidelines, page 6-2
• Calibration sampling rules, page 6-4
• Calibration methods (photometric - c System), page 6-4
• Calibration method (potentiometric - c System), page 6-4
• Calibration methods (i System), page 6-5
• Calibration types (c System), page 6-5
• Calibration types (i System), page 6-9
• Calibration curve storage, page 6-10
• Calibration order screen, page 6-11
Calibration guidelines
After you install an assay(s) that requires a calibration, you must
generate an active calibration curve. You do not need to recalibrate
assays every time they are run; however, certain variables make
recalibration necessary.
For more information, see:
• Mandatory assay calibration, page 6-2
• Optional assay calibration, page 6-3
• Automated assay calibration, page 6-3
NOTE: It is recommended that you run all levels of appropriate

controls whenever you calibrate an assay.
Mandatory assay calibration
You must perform a calibration when:

• A new reagent lot number is used
• Documentation accompanying a new version of an existing
assay file states calibration is required

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 6 Assay calibration
• A new assay file that requires a calibration is installed

• The calibration curve has expired (c System)
Optional assay calibration
You may need to perform a calibration when:

• Assay control values are out of specification. For specific
information regarding quality control, see the reagent
• Certain system maintenance/component replacement
procedures are performed.
• Certain errors occur. To determine whether recalibration is
necessary when an error occurs, see assay-specific error codes.
Automated assay calibration
Automated assay calibration is the process the system uses to

automatically order calibrations by associating an SID (sample ID)
with a predefined calibrator(s). For automated assay calibration you
use a bar code label for each calibrator level. See diagnostic procedure
6029 Assay Information, page 10-685 for more information on
generating calibrator bar code labels.
When a bar code is scanned and recognized as a configured calibrator
the system automatically processes the test(s) configured for that SID.
You can view the order on the Order status screen.
NOTE: You must establish the calibrator onboard stability intervals for
your laboratory if you use this feature.
Bar coded calibrator samples are automatically processed in the
following conditions:
• Onboard reagent lots do not have an Active calibration curve.
• A calibration is not in progress.
• The expired calibration has not been overridden.
• An Active calibration curve will expire in less time than the
sample carousel auto scan interval.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Calibration sampling rules

When multiple reagent lots for an assay are loaded on the system and
the sampling process for a calibration order is ready to begin, the
system determines the lots to calibrate using the following rules.
For the ARCHITECT System:
• If all reagent lots for the assay do not currently have a calibration
status of Active, the system calibrates all reagent lots loaded on
the system.
• If all reagent lots for the assay currently have a calibration status
of Active, the system recalibrates all reagent lots loaded on the
system.
• If some reagent lots for the assay have a calibration status of
Active and some do not, the system calibrates only the reagent
lots loaded on the system without an active calibration.
Calibration methods (photometric - c System)

The c System calibration methods are methods used to measure
absorbance values and to plot a calibration curve or cutoff value. One
of six different mathematical methods is used to calculate results:
• Absorbance method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-2
• Factor method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-2
• Linear method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-3
• Logit-4 method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-5
• Spline method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-6
• Use factor and blank method (photometric - c System),
page Appendix C-7
c System calibration methods are assay-specific and are defined in the
assay parameter file. You define the calibration method for
non-Abbott assays on the Configure assay parameters window -
Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System), page 2-101.
Calibration method (potentiometric - c System)

A potentiometric calibration method is the method used for
calculating ICT assays (electrolytes). Either serum or urine calibrators
are used. Serum calibrators are a protein-based material with known
concentrations of sodium (Na+), potassium (K+), and chloride (Cl-).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Urine calibrators are aqueous-based and span a greater range of

concentration.
There are three components to the potentiometric method:
• Electromotive force measurement (potentiometric - c System),
page Appendix C-9
• Slope calculation (potentiometric - c System), page Appendix C-10
• Sample measurement (potentiometric - c System), page Appendix
C-11
The mV (millivolts) measured by each electrode in the ICT module are
plotted against the known concentration of electrolyte in the
calibrator. The slope of the calibration is expressed as a percentage of
the ideal slope. Electrolyte determinations are made at 37°C; therefore,
the ideal slope of the electrode is 100% (62mV/decade).
NOTE: The potentiometric calibration method is assay-specific and is

defined in the assay parameter file.
Calibration methods (i System)

Calibration methods are data reduction methods used by ARCHITECT
i Systems to measure RLU (relative light unit) values and to plot a
calibration curve or cutoff value. One of five different mathematical
methods is used to calculate results:
• Point to point method (i System), page Appendix C-14
• Linear regression method (i System), page Appendix C-15
• 4PLC methods (i System), page Appendix C-16
• Cutoff assay method (i System), page Appendix C-18
• Reference method (i System), page Appendix C-19
i System calibration methods are assay-specific and are defined in the
assay parameter file. You can view the method on the Details for assay
parameters window - Calibration view (i System).
For more information on the mathematical methods, See i System data
reduction methods, page Appendix C-14.
Calibration types (c System)

Calibration types pertain to photometric assays only and indicate
whether a calibration curve is created or adjusted.
Two calibration types are available:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Full calibration, page 6-6

• Adjustment calibration, page 6-6
NOTE: See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation

(such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) for information
on required calibration types.
Full calibration
A full calibration is the measurement of a reagent blank and all data

points specified for an assay plotted against known concentrations to
create a curve for evaluating unknown samples. The system software
analyzes the data points on the Calibration - calibrators view of the
Configure assay parameters window to generate the new calibration
curve.
NOTE: A full calibration is required to update the full calibration

interval.
Adjustment calibration
An adjustment calibration is a new measurement of a blank and/or

specific point(s) of a full calibration curve. For the 1-point and 2-point
adjustment options the system software calculates a ratio comparing
the new measurements to previously measured absorbances, adjusts all
other calibrators using the calculated ratio, and then generates a new
calibration curve.
The following adjustment options are available on the Configure assay
parameters window:
• None
• Blank adjustment, page 6-7
• 1-point adjustment, page 6-7
• 2-point adjustment, page 6-8
NOTE: You can perform either a full calibration or the designated

adjustment calibration to update the adjustment calibration interval.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Blank adjustment
In a blank adjustment, the system reanalyzes the reagent blank only.

The following table shows the process for adjusting the calibration
curve with the new reagent blank data.
Step Description
1 The system performs the new measurement for the reagent
blank.
2 The value of the reagent blank absorbance obtained in the
new measurement replaces the value obtained in the
previous measurement.
3 The curve adjusts up or down, based on the change in the
reagent blank.
1-point adjustment
In a 1-point adjustment the system reanalyzes a single calibrator. The

calibrator used is defined on the Configure assay parameters window -
Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System), page 2-101. The
following table shows the procedure for adjusting the calibration
curve with the new calibrator data.
Step Description
1 The system performs the new measurement for the
calibrator.
2 A ratio calculates comparing the new and previous
absorbance data.
3 All other calibrators (except the reagent blank) adjust using

the calculated ratio.
4 A new calibration curve generates using the data points
after adjustment.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2-point adjustment
In a 2-point adjustment the system reanalyzes both the reagent blank

and a single calibrator. The calibrator used is defined on the Configure
assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c
System), page 2-101. The following table shows the procedure for
adjusting the calibration curve with the new calibrator data.
Step Description
1 The system performs the new measurement for the reagent
blank and the calibrator.
2 The value of the reagent blank absorbance obtained in the
new measurement replaces the value obtained in the
previous measurement.
3 The curve adjusts up or down based on the change in the
reagent blank.
4 A ratio calculates comparing the new and previous
absorbance data.
5 All other calibrators (except the reagent blank) adjust using

the calculated ratio.
6 A new calibration curve generates using the data points
after adjustment.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Calibration types (i System)

The calibration type indicates whether a new calibration curve is
created, a master reference curve is adjusted, or a cutoff value is
created for i System assays on a processing module. The type is defined
in the assay parameter file and is assay-specific.
The calibration types are as follows:
• Adjust calibration, page 6-9
• Full calibration, page 6-10
• Index calibration, page 6-10
NOTE: Calibration type is assay-specific. For a detailed description of

the assay calibrator(s) and calibration type for each assay, see the
ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert.
Adjust calibration
A calibration adjustment is a new measurement of 2 points of a master

reference curve specified for an assay. This 2-point calibration
generates a processing module-specific calibration curve for
quantitative assays by adjusting the master calibration data.
A 2-point calibration adjustment assay has master calibration data
encoded within the 2D bar code on the microparticle bottle label.
After you load a reagent kit on a processing module, the system
performs a scan and stores master calibration data in the system
software. The data stored is specific for the assay but must be adjusted
to fit the specific processing module. Therefore, the operator must run
two calibrators.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Full calibration
A full calibration is the measurement of 6 points specified for a

quantitative assay plotted against known concentrations to generate a
processing module-specific calibration curve for evaluating unknown
samples.
Index calibration
An index calibration is the measurement of 1 point or 2 points

specified for a qualitative assay and generates a processing
module-specific index (cutoff).
The system software uses the index value to generate all cutoff values
defined for an index or screening assay.
Calibration curve storage

The ARCHITECT System stores active, inactive, and failed calibration
curves.
For more information on curve storage, see:
• Active calibration curve storage, page 6-10
• Inactive calibration curve storage, page 6-11
• Failed calibration curve storage, page 6-11
For more information on calibration curve statuses, see Descriptions of
calibration statuses, page 6-19.
Active calibration curve storage
The system stores active curves as follows:

• Stores the processing module-specific calibration as the active
curve for that reagent lot
• Replaces the previous calibration curve, which becomes inactive
• Automatically defaults to the active curve for the onboard
reagent lot
• Stores one active curve for up to four different reagent lots for
each assay on a processing module
• Replaces the oldest active curve if a fifth reagent lot calibrates
successfully
NOTE: You may manually fail an active calibration curve by selecting

the Fail Curve button on the Calibration curve window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Inactive calibration curve storage
The system stores the previous curve as inactive when a new

calibration curve is generated for the reagent lot. Inactive curves are
stored for up to 3 months.
Failed calibration curve storage
The system stores a failed calibration curve until an active curve or

another failed curve is generated for the reagent lot.
For details on how to resolve errors for failed curves, see assay-specific
error codes.
Calibration order screen

From the Calibration order screen you can order assay calibrations and
access a window to specify calibration options.
Figure 6.1: Calibration order screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration order screen field

To display this screen, see Access the Calibration order screen, page 6-12.
• Create a calibration order, page 6-12

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Access the Calibration order screen
Perform this procedure to display the Calibration order screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Calibration order screen:

Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Calibration order.
The Calibration order screen displays.
Procedure - Calibration order screen
The procedure you can perform from the Calibration order screen is:
Create a calibration order
Perform this procedure to order a calibration when one or more assays

require a new calibration and bar coded calibrators are not being used.
Prerequisite Access the Calibration order screen, page 6-12
Module status Any
Supplies Consecutively numbered carriers
To create a calibration order:

1. Select the carrier or carousel button on the Calibration order
screen, if displayed.
NOTE: When you select multiple assays, the software

automatically assigns the calibrators in sequential carriers and/or
positions:
• If you select carrier, the system does not increment to more
than five sequential carriers.
• If you select carousel, the system does not increment beyond
the last position in the sample carousel.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2. Enter a carrier ID or carousel ID (LAS carousel sample handler) in

the C data entry box, if displayed.
3. Enter a position in the P data entry box, if displayed.
4. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list.
5. Select F5 - Assay options to specify calibration options.

(optional)
The Assay options (Calibration order) window displays.
NOTE: For i System assays the last calibrator lot number and
expiration date entered display.
For c System assays the configured default calibrator lot number
and expiration date display.
The calibrator lot number and expiration date display on the
Calibration curve window and the Cal Curve Details report.
a. Enter a calibrator lot number in the Lot data entry box, and
then enter a date in the Expiration date data entry box
(i System). (optional)
Select the Lot number list button and then select the desired
lot (c System). (optional)
b. Select the Calibration type list button, if displayed, and then
select the calibration type (c System). (optional)
c. Select the Manual option, and then select the desired

Module selection check box (multi-module i System).
(optional)
d. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you

selected more than one, and then repeat Steps 5a - 5c for
each. (optional)
e. Select Done to save your changes and/or return to the

Calibration order screen.
6. Select F2 - Add order to add the calibration order.

Orders can be viewed from the Order status screen.
To load samples, see Loading samples (RSH), page 5-168.
• Assay options (Calibration order) window, page 6-14

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Window - Calibration order screen
The window you can access from the Calibration order screen is the
Assay options (Calibration order) window, page 6-14.
Assay options (Calibration order) window
From the Assay options (Calibration order) window you can:

• Enter a calibrator lot number and expiration date (i System) or
select a lot other than the default lot (c System).
This information displays on the Calibration curve window and
in the Cal Curve Details report.
• Change the type of calibration to run (c System).
Figure 6.2: Assay options (Calibration order) window (i System)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 6.3: Assay options (Calibration order) window (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Assay options (Calibration order)


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Calibration review Section 6
Calibration review
The assay calibration run must pass calibration verification before the
system stores the calibration. The status of each calibration displays on
the Calibration status and/or Calibration history screens.
Calibration review topics include:
• Calibration verification, page 6-16
• Calibration status screen, page 6-16
• Calibration history screen, page 6-26
Calibration verification
After you process calibrators, the system verifies the results by
comparing them to the assay-specific calibration parameter
specifications. If the results of a calibration fall within the specified
range for that assay, the new calibration curve replaces any previous
calibration curve and the previous calibration curve status changes to
inactive. If the results of a calibration do not fall within the specified
range, then the new calibration curve is assigned a status of failed; if
there is an existing calibration curve for that assay, it is not replaced.
The assigned status of a calibration displays on the Calibration status
and/or Calibration history screens and includes:
• Active - the values fall within the specifications. The system
software calculates patient and control test results from this
curve.
• Failed - the values fall outside of the specifications. If an active
curve exists for a reagent lot, the system software calculates
patient and control test results from the existing active curve.
• Inactive - this is an older, previously active curve that has been
superseded by a more recent calibration. An inactive curve status
displays only on the Calibration history screen.
See Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view
(photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-160 for a
description of available calibration validity checks.
Calibration status screen

From the Calibration status screen you can view a summary list of the
calibration statuses for each assay and reagent lot currently loaded on
the system.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 6 Calibration review

• Find information for specific calibrations based on specified
search criteria
• View detailed calibration curve information
• Fail a calibration curve
• Override an expired calibration curve (c System)
• Print the Cal Curve Summary and Cal Curve Details reports
To view information about previously performed calibrations, see
Calibration history screen, page 6-26.
Figure 6.4: Calibration status screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration status screen field

When accessing the Calibration status screen the information sorts by
calibration status. See Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-19 for
calibration status sort order.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

ASSAY and REAGENT LOT Alphanumerically in ascending order.
CAL DATE / TIME and EXP DATE / Chronologically in descending order.
TIME
CAL STATUS See Descriptions of calibration
statuses, page 6-19.
To display this screen, see Access the Calibration status screen, page 6-18.
• View assay calibration status, page 6-30
• Find a specific calibration, page 6-32
• View calibration curve information, page 6-32
• Fail a calibration curve, page 6-33
Access the Calibration status screen
Perform this procedure to display the Calibration status screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Calibration status screen:
selecting the Calibration status button on the c System processing
module graphic.
Select QC-Cal from the menu bar, and then select Calibration status.
The Calibration status screen displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Descriptions of calibration statuses
You can use calibration status information to determine the status of

each calibration curve. The system displays one of the following
calibration statuses for each calibration curve. The table below
displays the calibration statuses in the order in which they sort.
Table 6.1: Calibration statuses
Status Description
Failed One of the following occurred:
• The calibration failed curve validity checks.
• The calibration did not complete successfully due to a
hardware error.
• The user manually failed the calibration.
Expired (c System The full or adjustment interval has been exceeded.
only)
No Cal One of the following occurred:
• The reagent lot was never calibrated.
• A parameter in a c System assay file was edited, which
caused the system to delete the calibration curve.
Overridden (c The operator has overridden an expired calibration.
System only)
In Process The calibration is currently in process.
Active The calibration completed successfully and, for c System
assays, the calibration is not expired.
Inactive A previously active curve which was replaced by a new
active curve. Inactive calibration curves display only on the
Calibration history screen.
Windows - Calibration status screen
Windows and views of windows that you can access from the
Calibration status screen include:
• Find options (Calibration status) window, page 6-20
• Calibration curve window - factor, linear, and non-linear assay views
• Calibration curve window - use cal factor/blank assay view (c System),
page 6-21
• Calibration curve window - potentiometric assay view (c System),
page 6-22
• Calibration curve window - adjust assay view (i System), page 6-23
• Calibration curve window - index assay view (i System), page 6-24

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Calibration curve window - full assay view (i System), page 6-25
Find options (Calibration status) window
From the Find options (Calibration status) window you can search for
specific calibration records.
Figure 6.5: Find options (Calibration status) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Calibration status and
Calibration history) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-76.
Calibration curve window - factor, linear, and non-linear assay

views (c System)
From the factor, linear, and non-linear assay views of the Calibration
curve window you can view information such as:
• Calibrator name and concentration
• Calibrator lot number and expiration date, if entered
• Calibrator absorbance for all replicates and the calibration
factor(s)
• Corrected mean absorbance value
• Calibration curve graph (linear and non-linear views only)
You can also manually fail a curve(s) or override the curve expiration
date.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 6.6: Calibration curve window - Linear assay view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window - Linear

assay view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-76.
Calibration curve window - use cal factor/blank assay view (c

System)
From the use cal factor/blank assay view of the Calibration curve
window you can view information from the reference assay such as:
• Reference assay name
• Calibrator absorbance for all replicates and the calibration
factor(s)
• Corrected mean absorbance value

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 6.7: Calibration curve window - Use cal factor / blank view (c
System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window - Use cal
factor / blank assay view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix
E-78.
Calibration curve window - potentiometric assay view (c

System)
From the potentiometric assay view of the Calibration curve window

you can view information such as:
• Calibrator mV (millivolt) response for all replicates and the
calibration slope
• Calibration curve graph
You can also manually fail a curve(s) or override the curve expiration
date.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 6.8: Calibration curve window - Potentiometric assay view (c

System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window -

Potentiometric assay view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix
E-79.
Calibration curve window - adjust assay view (i System)
From the adjust assay view of the Calibration curve window you can
view information such as:
• Calibrator name
• Calibrator RLU (relative light units) response for all replicates,
mean RLU, and the calibration adjustment ratio(s)
• Reference calibrator concentration, RLU response, and the fit
curve RLU response for each calibrator
You can also manually fail a curve(s).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 6.9: Calibration curve window - Adjust assay view (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window - Adjust

assay view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-80.
Calibration curve window - index assay view (i System)
From the index assay view of the Calibration curve window you can
• Calibrator name
mean RLU, and cutoff value

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 6.10: Calibration curve window - Index assay view (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window - Index

assay view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-82.
Calibration curve window - full assay view (i System)
From the full assay view of the Calibration curve window you can
mean RLU, and the fit curve RLU response for each calibrator

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 6.11: Calibration curve window - Full assay view (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window - Full assay
view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-83.
Calibration history screen

From the Calibration history screen you can view a summary list of
the calibration statuses for current and previously performed
calibrations.
• Find information for specific calibrations based on specified
search criteria
• View detailed calibration curve information
• Fail a calibration curve
• Override an expired calibration curve (c System)
• Print the Cal Curve Summary and Cal Curve Details reports
• Archive calibration curve information

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 6.12: Calibration history screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration history screen field

When accessing the Calibration history screen the information sorts
by the time the calibration curve was generated from the most recent
to the oldest calibration.

ASSAY and REAGENT LOT Alphanumerically in ascending order.
CAL DATE / TIME and EXP DATE / Chronologically in descending order.
TIME
CAL STATUS See Descriptions of calibration
To display this screen, see Access the Calibration history screen,

page 6-28.
• View assay calibration history, page 6-31

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Archive calibration curves, page 6-34
Access the Calibration history screen
Perform this procedure to display the Calibration history screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Calibration history screen:

Select QC-Cal from the menu bar, and then select Calibration
history.
The Calibration history screen displays.
Windows - Calibration history screen
Windows and views of windows that you can access from the
Calibration history screen include:
• Find options (Calibration history) window, page 6-29
page 6-21
page 6-22
• Archive calibration curves window, page 6-29

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Find options (Calibration history) window
From the Find options (Calibration history) window you can search
for specific calibration records.
Figure 6.13: Find options (Calibration history) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Calibration status and
Calibration history) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-76.
Archive calibration curves window
From the Archive calibration curves window you can archive

calibration curves to a CD.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 6.14: Archive calibration curves window
For descriptions of these fields, see Archive calibration curves window

Procedures - Calibration review

Procedures you can perform from the Calibration status and/or
Calibration history screen and its related windows include:
• View assay calibration status, page 6-30
• View assay calibration history, page 6-31
View assay calibration status
Perform this procedure to display the Calibration status screen. From

this screen you can view a summary list of the calibration statuses for
each assay and reagent lot currently loaded on the system.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To find specific calibrations, see Find a specific calibration, page 6-32.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view assay calibration status:
selecting the CAL STATUS button on the c System processing module
graphic.
Select QC-Cal from the menu bar, and then select Calibration status.
The Calibration status screen displays.
• Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-19
View assay calibration history
Perform this procedure to display the Calibration history screen. From

this screen you can view a summary list of the calibration statuses for
current and previously performed calibrations.
To find specific calibrations, see Find a specific calibration, page 6-32.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view assay calibration history:

Select QC-Cal from the menu bar, and then select Calibration
history.
The Calibration history screen displays.
• Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-19

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Find a specific calibration
Perform this procedure to search for a specific calibration by entering

your search criteria in one or more fields.
Prerequisite Access the Calibration status screen, page 6-18
Access the Calibration history screen, page 6-28
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific calibration:

1. Select F3 - Find on the Calibration status or Calibration history
screen.
The Find options (Calibration status or Calibration history)
window displays.
NOTE: A wildcard search allows you to type a partial entry

Example: If you enter 123* in the Reagent lot data entry box, all
the reagent lots starting with 123 display. This list could include
12345M100, 12346M100, or 12347M100.

The Calibration status or Calibration history screen displays with
the text "Search results:" in the title bar.
• Find options (Calibration status) window, page 6-20
• Find options (Calibration history) window, page 6-29
View calibration curve information
Perform this procedure to display the Calibration curve window. From

this window you can view detailed information for a calibration
curve(s) such as:
• Calibrator name, concentration, lot number, and expiration date

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Calibrator curve data

• Calibration curve graph (c System - assay dependent)
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view calibration curve information:

1. Select the desired calibration(s) from the table on the Calibration
status or Calibration history screen, or select F2- Select all.
The Calibration curve window displays. The view is dependent
on the calibration(s) you selected.
3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each calibration if you

4. Select Done to return to the Calibration status or Calibration

history screen.
page 6-21
page 6-22
Fail a calibration curve
Perform this procedure to fail an active calibration curve so that

subsequent control or patient orders are not calculated from the curve.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Supplies NA
To fail a calibration curve:

1. Select the desired calibration(s) from the table on the Calibration
status or Calibration history screen.
The Calibration curve window displays.
3. Select Fail Curve.

4. Select OK to fail the calibration curve.
5. Use the previous/next buttons to display each calibration if you

(optional)
6. Select Done to return to the Calibration status or Calibration

history screen.
page 6-21
page 6-22
Archive calibration curves
Perform this procedure to store calibration curves on a CD to create a

backup for long-term storage.
NOTE: The calibration curves are archived in a delimited ASCII format

so you can import them into a spreadsheet. You cannot use the
ARCHITECT System to retrieve the information.
Prerequisite Access the Calibration history screen, page 6-28

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Unformatted CD-RW (compact disk
Recordable/ReWritable)
To archive calibration curves:


3. Select the desired calibration curves from the table on the

Calibration history screen, or select F2 - Select all.
calibration curves. See Find a specific calibration, page 6-32.
4. Select F8 - Archive.
The Archive calibration curves window displays.
6. Deselect Delete inactive curves after archive check box.

(optional)
NOTE: If you choose to delete calibration curves, curves with a

status of Active are not deleted.
7. Select Done to archive the calibration curves.

complete.
Do not navigate to a different screen or window until the "0519
Data Archive Complete" message displays.
8. Select the refresh button, if available.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Archive calibration curves window, page 6-29

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Operational precautions and limitations
Section 7
Introduction
<F=0>
Operational requirements, precautions, and limitations are provided

to ensure operator safety and accurate assay results. Not following
these requirements or taking these precautions can impact system and
assay performance and may cause damage to the system or adversely
affect assay results.
Operational precautions and limitations topics include:
• General requirements, page 7-2
Lists the requirements for system environment, maintenance,
and troubleshooting to ensure proper system performance.
• Precautions and requirements for system operation, page 7-3
Lists the precautions you should take and the requirements you
should follow before and during system operation.
• Requirements for handling consumables, page 7-5
Lists the requirements for storing and using consumables such as
reagents, calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, and onboard
solutions.
• Requirements for handling specimens, page 7-8
Lists the requirements for collecting, preparing, and storing
specimens.
• Limitations of result interpretation, page 7-10
Discusses the other factors you should consider when
interpreting patient test results.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
General requirements Section 7
General requirements
You MUST follow these general ARCHITECT System requirements to
help ensure proper system performance:
• Contact your Abbott representative to install your ARCHITECT
System.
• Ensure the system is out of direct sunlight, heat and drafts, and
away from any heat generating device. Exposure to heat and
drafts can interfere with the ability of the system to maintain an
operating temperature that is within the acceptable range.
• Maintain the required space on all sides of the system. For more
information about space requirements, see System clearances,
page 4-12. This space buffer is essential for:
– Adequate cooling of electrical components
– Accurate temperature control of the processing center
– Easy access for maintenance
– Easy access for disconnecting the power cord when required
• Leave the system power on continuously unless instructed
otherwise in a maintenance or troubleshooting procedure, or
unless an emergency situation occurs.
• Perform maintenance procedures as recommended in Section 9,
Service and maintenance.
• Do not attempt any maintenance or repairs that are not specified
in documentation provided by Abbott Laboratories.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 7 Precautions and requirements for system operation
Precautions and requirements for system

operation
You MUST take these precautions and follow these requirements when
operating the ARCHITECT System. Failure to do so may cause damage
to the system and may adversely affect test results.
Precautions before operation
Before you begin operating the system, you should:

• Read this manual thoroughly to understand full functionality of
the system and associated hazards.
• Read the sections of the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific
sheet) that are associated with:
– Warnings and precautions
– Safety precautions
– Handling precautions
Requirements before operation
Before you begin operating the system, you should:

• Verify that supplies are loaded.
• Load c System reagents into the appropriate section of the
reagent supply center.
• Load i System reagents, with septums installed, in the
appropriate section of the reagent carousel or reagent carrier.
IMPORTANT: You must use septums to prevent reagent

evaporation and to ensure reagent integrity. Reliability of assay
results cannot be guaranteed if you do not use septums as
instructed in this manual and the assay-specific package insert.
Once you have placed a septum on a reagent bottle, do not
invert the bottle. Inverting the bottle results in reagent leakage
and may compromise assay results. Do not remove septums once
they have been installed on reagent bottles.
• Verify the c System ICT module is installed before running
potentiometric assays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Precautions and requirements for system operation Section 7
Precautions during operation
While operating the system, take the following precautions:

• Keep all processing module and sample handler doors closed and
covers in place unless instructed otherwise in a maintenance or
troubleshooting procedure.
• Do not disconnect any electrical connection while the power is
on.
• Shutdown the system control center if the main power source is
interrupted. You have a maximum of ten minutes to perform the
shutdown before losing backup power from the UPS
(uninterruptible power supply). See Power off the SCC, page 5-4.
• Respond to system notifications relating to waste levels during
processing. Dispose of all liquid waste according to local, state,
and federal regulations.
• Stop the RSH (robotic sample handler) before losing power from
the UPS (uninterruptible power supply) if the main power source
to the processing module(s) is interrupted. Stop the RSH by
– Press the stop key on the sample handler keypad, if
available.
– Select the sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen,
and then select F6 - Stop.
• Discard all sample cups and/or tubes on the sample carrier if a
carrier is in the RSH carrier transport when you perform an
emergency shutdown. Samples and the surrounding area may be
contaminated by sample splashing as the RSH carrier transport
motor loses power.
For proper recovery information for the c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100,
see Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and aspiration
area (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 10-696.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 7 Requirements for handling consumables
Requirements for handling consumables

You MUST follow these requirements when handling consumables to
help ensure your safety and accurate assay results. See the
or reagent application sheet), the specific product label, or the
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for detailed information. For a
description of the hazard symbols, see Hazard symbols, page 8-6.
Requirements for storage
Follow these requirements for storing cuvettes, reaction vessels,

sample cups, and reagent cartridges:
• Keep all consumables clean and free of dust.
• Store all consumables in their original containers so that you can
obtain information such as expiration dates and lot numbers if
necessary.
Follow these requirements for storing reagents, calibrators, controls,
bulk solutions, and onboard solutions:
• Store reagents, calibrators, and controls according to directions
in the manufacturer's documentation (such as a package insert
• Store bulk solutions and onboard solutions as instructed on their
labels or in the product's documentation (such as a package
• Store i System reagents off the system in an UPRIGHT position
according to the directions in the assay-specific package insert.
Contact your Abbott Customer Support if you receive reagents,
calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, or onboard solutions that are in a
condition contrary to the product's documentation (such as a package
insert or reagent application sheet) or label recommendation, or that
are damaged.
Requirements for use
Follow these requirements for using reaction vessels, sample cups, and
reagent cartridges:
• Do not reuse or substitute. Abbott Laboratories cannot accept
responsibility for system performance and assay results when
consumables are reused or have been manufactured by anyone
other than Abbott Laboratories.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Requirements for handling consumables Section 7
• Use caution when handling to prevent contamination and

operator exposure.
• Use within their specified dating periods.
• Consider all used reaction vessels, sample cups, and reagent
cartridges as potentially infectious. Follow appropriate
procedures for handling.
Follow these requirements for using reagents, calibrators, controls,
bulk solutions, and onboard solutions:
• Do not substitute. Abbott Laboratories manufactures substances
and components to rigidly controlled quality standards.
Substitution of materials may affect ARCHITECT System
performance, assay results, safety, and equipment life.
• Avoid excessive mixing or shaking of liquids to minimize
formation of foam and bubbles.
• Do not pipette by mouth.
• Do not smoke, eat, drink, apply cosmetics, or handle contact
lenses in areas where specimens, reagents, calibrators, controls,
bulk solutions, or onboard solutions are handled.
• Use caution when handling reagents, calibrators, controls, bulk
solutions, and onboard solutions to prevent contamination and
operator exposure.
• Wear clean gloves to avoid contamination and operator
exposure when placing an uncapped reagent bottle or cartridge
on the processing module.
• Wear clean gloves to avoid contamination and operator
exposure when placing a septum on an uncapped i System
reagent bottle or when handling a c System reagent cartridge.
• Do not invert the i System reagent bottle once you have placed a
septum on it. Inverting the bottle results in reagent leakage and
may compromise assay results.
IMPORTANT: You must use septums to prevent reagent

evaporation and contamination and to ensure reagent integrity.
Reliability of assay results cannot be guaranteed if you do not use
septums as instructed in this manual and the assay-specific
package insert. Do not remove septums once they have been
installed on reagent bottles.
• Verify that all necessary assay components are present in the kit
when loading new reagents.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 7 Requirements for handling consumables
• Verify the lot number and expiration date of each reagent kit
component before you load the components in the reagent
supply centers.
• Do not use reagents, calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, and
onboard solutions beyond their expiration dates.
• Do not use reagents on board the system beyond the maximum
number of cumulative days as stated in the reagent
• Verify that bulk solutions and onboard solutions are loaded in
the appropriate positions to ensure that results are not adversely
affected.
• Do not mix reagents, calibrators, controls, or c System bulk and
onboard solutions within a lot or between lots.
• Do not mix reagents, calibrators, controls, or Pre-Trigger
Solution and Trigger Solution within a lot or between lots.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Requirements for handling specimens Section 7
Requirements for handling specimens

See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a
package insert or reagent application sheet) for detailed, assay-specific
information about specimen collection, preparation, and storage.
Consider all clinical specimens, reagents, controls, and calibrators that
contain human-sourced materials as potentially infectious. Consider
all system surfaces or components that have come in contact with
human-sourced materials as potentially infectious. Refer to Biological
hazards, page 8-7 for additional information.
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Identifies an activity or
material.
Requirements for collection
Follow these requirements for collecting specimens:

• Follow all usual precautions for collecting blood by venipuncture
to avoid specimen hemolysis.
• See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation
(such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) for the
appropriate specimen type for each assay.
NOTE: Only human specimens have been tested and approved

for analysis on the ARCHITECT System. Performance has not
been established using cadaver specimens or body fluids other
than those specified in the Abbott product assay-specific
sheet).
• Verify the correct specimen type(s) is used. The ARCHITECT
System does not verify specimen type.
Requirements for preparation and storage
Follow these requirements for preparing and storing specimens:

• Ensure that serum specimens collected in tubes containing a gel
separator have 8 mm of serum above the gel to avoid
contamination of the specimen during pipetting.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 7 Requirements for handling specimens
• Inspect all samples for bubbles. Remove bubbles with a clean

applicator stick prior to analysis. Use a new applicator stick for
each sample to prevent cross contamination.
• Verify serum and plasma specimens are free of fibrin, red blood
cells, or other particulate matter.
• Ensure that complete clot formation in serum specimens has
taken place prior to centrifugation. Some specimens, especially
those from patients receiving anticoagulant or thrombolytic
therapy may exhibit increased clotting times. If the specimen is
centrifuged before a complete clot forms, the presence of fibrin
may cause erroneous results.
• See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation
(such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) for sample
volume information.
• Separate the serum or plasma from the clot, serum separator, or
red blood cells prior to freezing.
• Mix and centrifuge patient samples after any freeze/thaw cycle
or to remove red blood cells or particulate matter. See the reagent
insert or reagent application sheet) for limitations and
interfering substances.
• Avoid multiple freeze-thaw cycles. After you thaw a specimen,
you MUST mix it thoroughly by low speed vortexing or by
gently inverting it to ensure consistency in the results.
• Remove closures from specimen tubes prior to loading them on
the sample handler.
• Minimize evaporation effects after you load samples on the
system by processing them within the number of hours specified
in the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation
(such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). For
detailed information on evaporation effects, see Sample volume

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Limitations of result interpretation Section 7
Limitations of result interpretation

Assay results MUST be used with other clinical data, for example,
symptoms, other test results, patient history, clinical impressions,
information available from clinical evaluation, and other diagnostic
procedures. All data MUST be considered for patient care
management.
If assay results are inconsistent with clinical evidence, additional
testing is suggested to confirm the result.
The ARCHITECT System has been validated for its intended use.
However, errors can occur due to potential operator errors and
ARCHITECT System technology limitations.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Section 8
Introduction
Hazards
<F=0>
Attention to hazard and safety information minimizes the potential of

harm to personnel and damage to the laboratory environment.
Hazard and safety topics include:
• Operator responsibility, page 8-3
Provides guidance on using the ARCHITECT System as designed.
• Safety icons, page 8-4
Provides an illustration of each safety symbol and sample text
associated with the symbol.
• Hazard symbols, page 8-6
Provides an illustration of each hazard symbol and a description
along with its standard abbreviation.
• Biological hazards, page 8-7
Provides an overview of the biological hazards you may be
exposed to and the precautions you should take to minimize
exposure.
• Chemical hazards, page 8-9
Provides an overview of the chemical hazards you may be
exposed to and the precautions you should take to minimize
exposure.
• Spill clean-up, page 8-11
Provides guidelines for cleaning spills in accordance with
established biosafety practices.
• Waste handling and disposal, page 8-12
Identifies the responsibilities for appropriate waste disposal.
• Decontamination procedure requirements, page 8-14
Provides information on decontaminating an ARCHITECT
System and links to specific decontamination procedures.
• Electrical hazards, page 8-16
Provides an overview of precautions you should take to avoid
personal injury or damage to the system from the electrical
components.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Section 8
• Mechanical hazards, page 8-18

Provides an overview of the precautions you should take to
avoid personal injury or damage to the system from the
mechanical components.
• Physical hazards, page 8-20
Provides an overview of the precautions you should take to
avoid physical injury when operating or moving the system.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Section 8 Operator responsibility
Operator responsibility
You are responsible for using the ARCHITECT System only as
designed. Operators must be trained before being allowed to operate
the system. Failure to follow safe use instructions could cause injury to
you, damage to the system, or adversely affect assay results. See
Operational precautions and limitations, page 7-1.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Safety icons Section 8
Safety icons
Safety icons are used in ARCHITECT System documentation and on
ARCHITECT Systems to identify potentially dangerous conditions. You
MUST recognize these icons and understand the type and degree of
potential hazard.
The following icons may be used with text or in lieu of text. If text
accompanies the icon, it describes the nature of the hazard and is
labeled with WARNING or CAUTION.
WARNING is defined as a physical, mechanical, or procedural
condition that could result in moderate to serious personal injury.
CAUTION is defined as a condition that could result in minor injury
or interfere with proper functioning of the system.
Table 8.1: Safety icons and descriptions
Icon Description
WARNING: Potential Biohazard
Identifies an activity or area where you
may be exposed to potentially
infectious material. For more
information, see Biological hazards,
page 8-7.
WARNING: Potential Biohazard
may be exposed to potentially
infectious material. For more
information, see Biological hazards,
page 8-7.
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard
Indicates the possibility of electrical
shock if procedural or engineering
controls are not observed. For more
information, see Electrical hazards,
page 8-16.
CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation
when open. Avoid eye exposure to
light. Do not stare into the beam.
Warns against direct viewing of the
beam or reflections from the beam. For
more information, see Laser light,
page 8-20.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Section 8 Safety icons
Table 8.1: Safety icons and descriptions (continued)

Icon Description
WARNING: Hot Surface
may be exposed to hot surfaces. For
more information, see Hot objects,
page 8-22.
WARNING: Probe Stick Hazard
may be exposed to probes. For more
information, see Probes and sharps,
page 8-20.
Identifies an activity that may present a
safety-related hazard and advises you
to consult the associated caution or
warning instructions provided.
Examples include:
CAUTION: Lifting Hazard
Identifies an activity where you may be
required to lift or move a heavy object.
For more information, see Heavy
objects, page 8-21.
CAUTION: Moving Parts
may be exposed to moving parts. For
more information, see Mechanical
hazards, page 8-18.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard
may be exposed to hazardous
chemicals. For more information, see

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Hazard symbols Section 8
Hazard symbols
ARCHITECT System product labeling may include one or more of the
following hazard symbols. These symbols convey properties of the
chemical or chemical mixture, and notify you that you should take
precautions when working with the material. Always consult the
specific package insert or MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet) for further
information.
Table 8.2: Hazard symbols and descriptions
Symbol Description with standard abbreviation
This symbol indicates that some component(s) of the
product is(are) irritating (Xi).

product is(are) harmful (Xn).

product is(are) corrosive (C).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Section 8 Biological hazards
Biological hazards
When performing the following activities you may be exposed to
potentially infectious materials:
• Handling samples, reagents, calibrators, and controls
• Cleaning spills
• Handling and disposing of waste
• Moving the system
• Performing maintenance procedures
• Performing cleaning or decontamination procedures
• Performing component replacement procedures
The following information is presented to help you minimize the
impact of this exposure.
Precautions
You should consider all clinical samples, reagents, calibrators,

controls, and used RVs (reaction vessels) that contain human-sourced
material as potentially infectious. You should consider all system
surfaces or components that have come in contact with
human-sourced material as potentially infectious. No known test
method can offer complete assurance that products derived from
human-sourced material will not transmit infection. Therefore, all
products derived from human-sourced materials and system
components exposed to human-sourced materials should be
considered potentially infectious.
It is recommended that you handle all potentially infectious materials
in accordance with the OSHA Standard on Bloodborne Pathogens1.
You should use Biosafety Level 22 or appropriate biosafety practices3,4
for materials that contain or are suspected of containing infectious
agents. Precautions include, but are not limited to the following:
• Wear gloves, lab coats, and protective eye wear when handling
human-sourced material or contaminated system components.
• Do not pipette by mouth.
• Do not eat, drink, smoke, apply cosmetics, or handle contact
lenses when handling human-sourced material or contaminated
system components.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Biological hazards Section 8
• Clean spills of potentially infectious materials and contaminated

system components with a detergent followed by an appropriate
disinfectant, such as 0.1% sodium hypochlorite or other suitable
disinfectant.
NOTE: For information on diluting sodium hypochlorite, see

Decontamination procedure requirements, page 8-14.
• Decontaminate and dispose of all samples, reagents, and other
potentially contaminated materials in accordance with local,
state, and federal regulations.
If you are exposed to biohazardous or potentially infectious materials,
you should seek medical attention immediately and take steps to
cleanse the affected area:
• Eyes - Rinse with water for 15 minutes.
• Mouth - Rinse with water.
• Skin - Wash the affected area with soap and water.
• Puncture wound - Allow to bleed freely. Wash the affected area
with soap and water.
1. US Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration, 29 CFR Part 1910.1030, Bloodborne Pathogens.
2. US Department of Health and Human Services. Biosafety in
Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories. 5th ed. Washington, DC: US
Government Printing Office, January 2007.
3. World Health Organization. Laboratory Biosafety Manual. 3rd ed.
Geneva: World Health Organization, 2004.
4. Sewell DL, Bove KE, Callihan DR, et al. Protection of Laboratory
Workers from Occupationally Acquired Infections: Approved Guideline -
Third Edition. (M29-A3). Wayne, PA: Clinical and Laboratory Standards
Institute, 2005.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Section 8 Chemical hazards
Chemical hazards
You may be exposed to hazardous chemicals when handling reagents,
calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, bleach, or onboard solutions,
including the optional liquid waste container.
Your exposure to hazardous chemicals is minimized by following
instructions provided in the assay-specific documentation (such as a
package insert or reagent application sheet), on product-specific labels,
and in product-specific MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets). Exposure
levels are further reduced by the design features of the instrument
when it is installed and used properly.
Hazard symbols that appear on ARCHITECT System product labeling
are accompanied by risk (R) and safety (S) numbers and represent risk
and safety phrases defined by European Community Directives. The
risk and safety phrases describe precautions you should use when
working with a particular chemical or chemical mixture.
(R) and (S) numbers that appear on product labeling are defined in the
corresponding assay-specific inserts and the product-specific MSDS
(Material Safety Data Sheets). (Other country-specific warning and
precautions may be included on the labeling.)
General precautions
In general, observe the following precautions when handling

chemicals:
• Consult MSDS for safe use instructions and precautions.
• Avoid contact with skin and eyes. If contact with material is
anticipated, wear impervious gloves, protective eye wear, and
clothing.
• Maintain good housekeeping. Do not eat, drink, or store food
and beverages in areas where chemicals are used.
• Seek medical attention if irritation or signs of toxicity occur after
exposure.
Sodium azide
Some products contain sodium azide. Observe the following

precautions when using products or handling waste containing
sodium azide:
• Do not autoclave products or waste containing sodium azide.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Chemical hazards Section 8
• Do not use any chemical or product with a pH below 6 to

disinfect waste that contains sodium azide. Hydrazoic acid, a
very toxic gas, is released when the pH is lower than 6. Normal
operation of the system uses small amounts of sodium azide
with other reagent components and does not generate hydrazoic
acid at levels of concern to the user.
• Flush drains thoroughly with water when solutions containing
sodium azide are discharged to drains to prevent metal azides
from forming on lead, copper, brass, or solder in laboratory
plumbing. These azides can explode upon percussion, such as
hammering.
To remove contamination from old drains suspected of azide
accumulation, the U.S. National Institute of Occupational Safety
and Health recommends the following procedure:
a. Siphon liquid from the trap using a soft rubber or plastic
hose.
b. Fill the trap with 10% sodium hydroxide solution.
c. Allow the solution to stand in the trap for 16 hours.
d. Flush the trap thoroughly with water.
Sensitizers
Some products contain low levels of ingredients that are reported to be

sensitizers. Sensitizers can stimulate allergic reactions in some people.
The allergic reactions may occur with the first exposure, or only after
repeated exposures. Methylisothiazolones, used as preservatives in
some products, have been associated with stimulating allergic skin
reactions (allergic contact dermatitis). Certain enzymatic cleansers
may stimulate allergic reactions in the respiratory systems of sensitive
people. The following precautions will reduce your potential for
exposure to sensitizers:
• Using good laboratory techniques to minimize spatters, spills
and other aerosolization of liquids and powders, particularly
when pouring or otherwise transferring materials.
• Using impervious gloves and other personal protective
equipment appropriate for biomedical laboratories.
• Remove gloves immediately if damaged or contaminated.
• Wash hands upon removing gloves, even if you are planning to
put on a fresh pair of gloves right away.
• Handle containers at a comfortable height, but below chest level.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Section 8 Spill clean-up
Spill clean-up
Clean spills in accordance with established biosafety practices and
follow instruction in the MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets). In
general, safe work practices for cleaning spills include:
1. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment, such as gloves,
eye wear, and lab coat.
2. Absorb the spill with absorbent material.
3. Wipe the spill area with detergent solution.
4. Wipe the area clean with an appropriate disinfectant such as

0.1% sodium hypochlorite.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Waste handling and disposal Section 8
Waste handling and disposal

Each facility is responsible for labeling all waste containers and
characterizing its waste stream to ensure waste is disposed of in
accordance with the appropriate local, state, and federal regulations.
Mercury
Reagents, calibrators, and controls may contain thimerosal or mercury

and may be considered hazardous per applicable environmental
regulatory agencies. See the manufacturer's assay-specific
documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet),
the product-specific label, or the product-specific MSDS (Material
Safety Data Sheet). Check with your local sanitary district to
determine limits for mercury in wastewater.
Liquid wastes containing (potentially) infectious materials
Consider the following precautions if you must meet institutional or

local requirements for decontaminating or disinfecting liquid wastes
containing infectious or potentially infectious materials:
• Select a disinfectant that is effective against bloodborne
infectious agents, as well as other microbial agents that you
might expect to be prevalent in your population. A disinfectant
that is effective against Mycobacterium tuberculosis is generally
effective against all known viruses and non-sporeforming
bacteria, and is suitable for most clinical laboratory situations.
• Select a disinfectant and method that does not bubble, effervesce
or otherwise generate aerosols.
• Do not use any chemical or product with a pH below 6. The use
of materials with a pH of below 6 will result in the generation of
highly toxic hydrazoic acid gas if the waste contains sodium
azide.
• Do not use any chemical or product for disinfection that
contains any metal in order to prevent the creation of highly
explosive metal azides in wastes that may contain sodium azide.
• Obtain and review the manufacturer’s safety information before
using any disinfectant.
• Use disinfectants according to the manufacturer’s directions (for
example, do not use excess disinfectant). Failure to follow the
manufacturer’s directions may have unexpected effects.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Section 8 Waste handling and disposal
• Do not use a disinfectant if you do not have the proper facility,

equipment and other appropriate protective measures available
to work with it safely.
• Autoclaving is not recommended for materials contaminated
with products containing chemicals that are hazardous by
inhalation at low concentrations (for example, mercury, sodium
azide or cyanides).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Decontamination procedure requirements Section 8
Decontamination procedure requirements

Always wear appropriate personal protective equipment (such as
gloves, eye wear, and lab coat) while performing decontamination
activities.
Prior to servicing the ARCHITECT System you must:
• Decontaminate the exterior surfaces
• Clean and decontaminate probes, if present
• Remove all samples, reagents, controls, calibrators, and liquid
consumables
Prior to shipment or relocation of the ARCHITECT System you must:
• Decontaminate the exterior surfaces
• Remove all samples, reagents, controls, calibrators, and liquid
consumables
IMPORTANT: If you must ship the system to a new location, contact

your Abbott field service representative for assistance. The Abbott field
service representative will prepare the decontaminated system for
shipment and install it at the new destination.
The following components of the ARCHITECT System require
decontamination.
Component Reference
Sample carrier For information about decontaminating
the sample carrier, see 6038 External
Decontamination, page 9-72.
Reagent carrier For information about decontaminating
the reagent carrier, see 6038 External
System control center For information about decontaminating
the system control center, see 6038
External Decontamination, page 9-72.
Processing module external surfaces For information about decontaminating
the processing module, see 6038
Probes (c System) For information about decontaminating
probes, see 6023 Clean
Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-26.
Supply and waste center (i System) For information about decontaminating
the supply and waste center, see 6038

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Section 8 Decontamination procedure requirements
Component Reference
ARCHITECT System / ARCHITECT For information about decontaminating
ARM surfaces (i System) system surfaces, see 6038 External
RSH (robotic sample handler) For information about decontaminating
the RSH, see 6400 RSH Cleaning,
page 9-70 (i 1000SR).
High-concentration waste bottle For information about decontaminating
(c System) system surfaces, see 6038 External
Decontamination procedures may require the use of diluted sodium

hypochlorite. To calculate the parts of water required to mix with one
part of manufacturer-supplied sodium hypochlorite solution, use the
following formula:
Where:
A = % of sodium hypochlorite solution desired
B = % of sodium hypochlorite (active or available chlorine)
in manufactured-supplied solution
X = number of parts of water required to mix with one part of
manufacturer-supplied sodium hypochlorite (active or
available chlorine) solution
NOTE: The stability of the working solution is 30 days after

preparation.
General precautions
Sodium hypochlorite (bleach) and other disinfectants are typically

hazardous chemicals that react with many chemicals, materials, and
living tissues. Obtain and review manufacturer’s safety information
before using any disinfectant. For information on decontaminating or
disinfecting wastes containing infectious or potentially infectious
materials, see Waste handling and disposal, page 8-12.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Electrical hazards Section 8
Electrical hazards
The ARCHITECT System does not pose uncommon electrical hazards
to operators if it is installed and operated without alteration, and is
connected to a power source that meets required specifications. See
Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-14.
Basic electrical hazard awareness is essential to the safe operation of
any system. Only qualified personnel should perform electrical
servicing.
Elements of electrical safety include, but are not limited to the
following:
• Inspect electrical cabling into and on the ARCHITECT System for
signs of wear and damage.
• Use only approved power cords and electrical accessories, such as
those supplied with the system, to protect against electric shock.
• Use a properly grounded electrical outlet of correct voltage and
current handling capability.
• Determine and correct the cause of a blown fuse or thrown
circuit breaker before attempting to resume operation of the
system.
• Do not disconnect any electrical connection or service any
electrical or internal components while the power is on.
• Unplug the ARCHITECT ARM accessory before cleaning,
servicing, or performing system maintenance.
• Disconnect the power cord from the UPS (uninterruptible power
supply) before servicing.
• Disconnect the processing module power cord before cleaning
major liquid spills.
• Keep liquids away from all connectors of electrical or
communication components.
• Do not touch any switches or outlets with wet hands.
• Keep the floor dry and clean under and around the ARCHITECT
System.
• Use a ground fault circuit interrupter when working in a wet
environment.
• Avoid spilling fluids in the electronics bay when using the
ARCHITECT ARM accessory.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Section 8 Electrical hazards
• Clean spilled fluids immediately.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Mechanical hazards Section 8
Mechanical hazards
The ARCHITECT System is an automated system that operates under
computer control. As with most automated equipment, there is
potential for injury and bodily harm from moving mechanical
components whenever the system is in operation.
The ARCHITECT System minimizes mechanical hazards by providing
guards to protect against accidental contact with moving components,
and encoding the software with safety features.
The ARCHITECT System requires that you accurately position all
samples, reagents, calibrators, controls, and cups and/or tubes on the
system. It is very important that you correctly position sample cups
and/or tubes, reaction vessels, and reagent containers before initiating
any operation.
Although the ARCHITECT System is equipped with safety features to
stop the lowering of the probes, it is NEVER acceptable for you to
reach into the processing module's working area when the system is in
operating mode. Should your intervention be necessary during a run,
interrupt the run according to instructions defined in Section 5,
Operating instructions.
During operation of the ARCHITECT System, you are potentially
exposed to the following moving mechanical components:
• Sample and reagent arm(s)
• Pipettor(s) and probe(s)
• Sample handler
• RV load assembly
• Wash aspiration probe(s)
• Sample carousel
• Reagent supply center(s)
• Reaction carousel
• Mixer unit
• Cuvette washer
• ICT unit/probe
Basic elements of mechanical safety include, but are not limited to:
• Never bypass or override a safety device.
• Keep all protective covers and barriers in place.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Section 8 Mechanical hazards
• Never perform manual tasks on the work surface of the system.

• Never allow any part of your body to enter a range of mechanical
movement during system operation.
• Do not open the covers to the reagent supply center(s) and the
c 8000 and c 16000 sample carousel when the access indicator
lights are not illuminated. If you open the covers when access is
not indicated, the mechanical components do not stop moving
immediately because the system attempts to return the
components to their home positions.
• Do not wear articles of clothing or accessories that could catch
on the system.
• Keep pockets free of items that could fall into the system.
• Use caution when performing adjustment, maintenance,
cleaning, or repair procedures.
• Use caution when loading sample carriers into the sample
handler.
• Use caution when loading reagents into the reagent supply
center(s) and when moving full waste containers.
• Do not operate the ARCHITECT ARM accessory with the service
doors open.
• Be aware that in the event of a system malfunction or an
unexpected sequence of movements, reflex actions could occur,
causing injury.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Physical hazards Section 8
Physical hazards
Safe practices should be observed to avoid injury when exposed to the
following potential physical hazards.
Probes and sharps
Probes are sharp and may be contaminated with infectious material.

Avoid contact with the tips of probes. Although the ARCHITECT
System is equipped with machine guarding features to stop the
lowering of the probes, you should never reach into the processing
module while it is operating.
In general, minimize use of sharps and glassware. Use mechanical
means to remove contaminated broken glassware. Dispose of sharps in
an appropriately labeled, puncture-resistant, and leakproof container
before treatment and disposal.
Laser light
CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of

procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
All the ARCHITECT Systems are classified as Class 1 Laser Products

with embedded Class 2 Laser bar code readers.
The bar code readers of the sample handler, c System carousel, and c
8000 reagent carousels use a low-power, visible laser diode and emit
laser light. Because of normal human aversion response such as
blinking, eye movement, and so forth, these lasers normally do not
present a hazard to eyes.
Although momentary exposure to a Class 2 laser (1mW maximum
power, 650-675 nm, 500-600 scans per second) is not known to be
harmful, failure to follow proper procedures may result in a
potentially hazardous condition.
• Do not look into the aperture.
• Do not remove the bar code reader covers or bypass interlocks.
• Do not stare directly into the beam.
• Do not place any objects into the beam.
Only Abbott field service representatives should service the laser. The
protective covers should only be removed by trained operators or
Abbott field service representatives.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Section 8 Physical hazards
The following laser caution labels are affixed to the ARCHITECT

System:
Figure 8.1: Manufacturer laser certification label
NOTE: c 4000 is certified to IEC60825-1 (2007).

For the c 4000, the label is affixed on the inside of the card cage door.
For the i 1000SR, the label is affixed on the inside of the card cage and
SCC center door.
Figure 8.2: System laser caution label
The system laser caution label identifies the bar code reader and laser
aperture locations.
For the c 4000 and i 1000SR, this label is only located on the sample
handler and is not on the processing module.
Do not remove, damage, or obliterate any of the laser warning labels.
If any of them become illegible, notify your Abbott field service
representative to have them replaced.
Heavy objects
Use proper lifting techniques when handling full bottles or containers.

The c System high-concentration waste bottle is heavy when full. Use
care when handling the bottle to reduce the risk of injury.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hazards
Physical hazards Section 8
The i 1000SR liquid waste container is heavy when full. Use care when
handling the container to reduce the risk of injury.
The system is heavy and has unsupported sections of the shell. Ensure
that you have adequate help before attempting to move the system.
Push only on solid sections of the housing; do not exert pressure on
unsupported sections of the shell.
Use proper lifting techniques when moving the ARCHITECT ARM
accessory.
Hot objects
The lamp and lamp housing may be hot. Before replacing the lamp,
turn off the power, and then allow the lamp and lamp housing to
cool. Use temperature-resistant gloves if necessary.
Trip hazards
The ARCHITECT System is equipped with power cords and various

computer connectors. To avoid a tripping hazard, ensure cords in high
traffic areas are properly stowed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Service and maintenance
Section 9
Introduction
<F=0>
Proper service and maintenance of your ARCHITECT System is one of

the most important aspects of a complete quality assurance program.
A thorough service and maintenance program:
• Minimizes down time
• Maintains records for inspection and accreditation
• Maintains optimal system operation to provide optimal test
results
Service and maintenance topics include:
• Maintenance, page 9-2
Provides a description of all maintenance procedures, the
software screens and windows associated with maintenance
activities, associated graphics for some maintenance procedures,
and step-by-step instructions for performing related procedures.
• Component replacement, page 9-73
Provides step-by-step instructions and graphics for replacing
system components.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Maintenance Section 9
Maintenance
The ARCHITECT System software provides a user-friendly interface for
performing and tracking your maintenance activities.
The Maintenance screen displays procedures that are scheduled to be
performed. Once you initiate a procedure, step-by-step instructions
walk you through its completion.
Performance of a procedure is tracked in the online Maintenance log.
Maintenance topics include:
• Maintenance suggestions, page 9-2
• Maintenance statuses, page 9-20
• Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions, page 9-20
Maintenance suggestions
Proper maintenance of your ARCHITECT System is important. These
suggestions, which are especially useful for integrated and
multi-module systems, are provided to help you determine efficient
strategies for performing maintenance procedures and reducing
downtime.
When scheduling and performing maintenance procedures:
• Schedule maintenance procedures during times of slower
workflow.
• Verify adequate supplies are on board the system, or available to
load, prior to initiating a maintenance procedure.
• Perform procedures within the weekly, monthly, and quarterly
maintenance categories on different shifts or days. To avoid
having these procedures scheduled for the same day, perform
some of them early to stagger the schedule.
NOTE: You must complete all maintenance procedures on or

before the day they are due.
• Use the additional graphics provided in the online help to assist
you with performing maintenance procedures. Access Help? by
selecting the help button on the Maintenance perform window,
and then select one of the following hypertext links to view a list
of available graphics:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 9 Maintenance
– c 4000 processing module associated maintenance graphics,

page 9-44
– i 1000SR processing module associated maintenance graphics,
page 9-63
– RSH associated maintenance graphics (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100),
page 9-71
NOTE: Not all maintenance procedures have additional

graphics.
Maintenance screen
From the Maintenance screen you can view information for
maintenance procedures and initiate a procedure. You can also access
windows to view version and detail information for each procedure,
and print the Procedure report.
The procedures display by module and by maintenance category:
• The To do tab displays procedures that are scheduled to be
performed on a module from the Daily, Weekly, Monthly, and
Quarterly maintenance categories. Circles that precede the
procedure name are color-coded to match the appropriate
maintenance category.
• The Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, and As needed tabs
display the non-scheduled procedures for a module and also
show the:
– LAST PERFORMED: date and time a procedure was last
performed
– OPERATOR ID: ID of the operator who last performed the
procedure
• The In process tab displays any procedure currently in process on
the selected module and also shows the:
– PROCEDURE STATUS: Current status of the procedure in
process
– TIME STARTED: time the procedure was started

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 9.1: Maintenance screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Maintenance screen field descriptions,

To display this screen, see Access the Maintenance screen, page 9-4.
• View maintenance procedure information, page 9-5
• Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6
• Perform concurrent maintenance procedures or other tasks, page 9-8
• Return to a maintenance procedure in process, page 9-9
• View details for a maintenance procedure, page 9-10
• Access the Maintenance log screen, page 9-16
Access the Maintenance screen
Perform this procedure to display the Maintenance screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To access the Maintenance screen:

Select System from the menu bar, and then select Maintenance.
The Maintenance screen displays with the To do tab selected.
Procedures - Maintenance screen
Procedures you can perform from the Maintenance screen and its
• Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6
• Return to a maintenance procedure in process, page 9-9
• View details for a maintenance procedure, page 9-10
View maintenance procedure information
Perform this procedure to display the Version details for procedure

(maintenance) window. From this window, you can view information
for a maintenance procedure prior to performing it. This information
includes the version number, required module status, and required
user access level.
Prerequisite Access the Maintenance screen, page 9-4
Module status All except Maintenance
Supplies NA
To view maintenance procedure information:

1. Select the desired Module option on the Maintenance screen.
The scheduled maintenance procedures for the selected module
display on the To do tab.
2. Select the Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, or As needed

tab. (optional)
The non-scheduled maintenance procedures for the selected
category display.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3. Select the desired procedure from the MAINTENANCE

PROCEDURES box, and then select F6 - Version.
The Version details for procedure (maintenance) window
displays.
• Version details for procedure (maintenance) window, page 9-12
Perform a maintenance procedure
Perform this procedure to do scheduled or non-scheduled

maintenance on your ARCHITECT System.
CAUTION: Moving Parts. Maintenance procedures may
expose operators to moving parts that can potentially
cause personal injury. Untrained operators should not
perform these procedures.
Prerequisite(s) Access the Maintenance screen, page 9-4

Module status Procedure dependent
User access level Procedure dependent
Supplies Procedure dependent
To perform a maintenance procedure:


tab. (optional)
category display.

PROCEDURES box, and then select F5 - Perform.

The Maintenance Perform window displays. A description of the
procedure displays in the INSTRUCTIONS box.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
5. Select Proceed, and then follow the instructions in the

INSTRUCTIONS box.
You are prompted to enter information if the procedure requires
additional data.
6. Enter the required information in the User input data entry box,
and then select Continue.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: You can select the Close window button at anytime to

close the Maintenance Perform window to perform a
maintenance procedure on another module or access other
screens and windows. See Perform concurrent maintenance
procedures or other tasks, page 9-8.
7. Select Activity to view the progress of the procedure. (optional)

The activity of the module displays in the Activity list. To return
to the Result list, select Results.
8. Select Print to print the Procedure report. (optional)
9. Select Done to return to the Maintenance screen.
• Maintenance Perform window, page 9-11
Perform concurrent maintenance procedures or other tasks
Perform this procedure to close the Maintenance Perform window

when a maintenance procedure is in process. This allows you to

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
perform a maintenance procedure on another module or to access

other screens and windows.
Prerequisite(s) Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6
Module status Maintenance
Supplies NA
To perform concurrent maintenance procedures or other tasks:

1. Select Close window on the Maintenance perform window.
The Maintenance screen displays with the In process tab
selected.
2. Select the desired Module option to perform another

maintenance procedure.
Or
Access any other screen to perform another task.
To return to an in-process maintenance procedure when user input is
required or to complete the procedure, see Return to a maintenance
procedure in process, page 9-9.
Return to a maintenance procedure in process
Perform this procedure to return to the Maintenance Perform window

of an in-process maintenance procedure. You must return to this
window to provide user input, when required, or to complete the
procedure.
Module status Maintenance
Supplies NA
To return to a maintenance procedure in process:

The procedure displays on the In process tab.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2. Select the procedure from the MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

box, and then select F5 - Continue.
The Maintenance Perform window for the selected in-process
procedure displays.
3. Follow the instructions in the INSTRUCTIONS box.
View details for a maintenance procedure
Perform this procedure to display the Details for maintenance item

window. From this window you can view information for a
maintenance procedure that has been performed. This information
includes the:
• Date the procedure was performed
• Procedure version used
• ID of the operator who performed the procedure
• Status of the procedure
Module status All
Supplies NA
To view details for a maintenance procedure:


tab. (optional)
category display.

PROCEDURES box, and then select F7 - Details.
The Details for maintenance item window displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Details for maintenance item window, page 9-13
Windows - Maintenance screen
Windows you can access from the Maintenance screen include:

• Version details for procedure (maintenance) window, page 9-12
• Details for maintenance item window, page 9-13
Maintenance Perform window
From the Maintenance Perform window you can view information

about an initiated procedure such as:
• Procedure category and name
• ID of the operator logged on to the system
• Status of the procedure
• Description of the procedure
NOTE: The display of the Maintenance Perform window is

dependent on the selected module, category, and procedure.
You can then proceed with the procedure, close the window to
perform a maintenance procedure on another module or access other
screens and windows, or quit the procedure.
For descriptions of maintenance procedures, see Maintenance categories
and procedure descriptions, page 9-20.
To view an associated maintenance graphic, see:
• c 4000 processing module associated maintenance graphics,
page 9-44
• i 1000SR processing module associated maintenance graphics,
page 9-63
• RSH associated maintenance graphics (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100),
page 9-71

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 9.2: Maintenance Perform window
For descriptions of these fields, see Maintenance Perform window field

Version details for procedure (maintenance) window
From the Version details for procedure (maintenance) window you can
view information for maintenance procedures including version
number, required module status, and required user access level.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 9.3: Version details for procedure (maintenance) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Version details for procedure

(maintenance) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-126.
Details for maintenance item window
From the Details for maintenance item window you can view detailed
information for maintenance procedures.
If the procedure has been performed, this information includes the:
• Version of the procedure
• Date
• ID of the operator logged on to the system
• Status of the procedure when last performed
NOTE: If a procedure has not been performed or you selected a

procedure from the To do tab, only the procedure name displays.
All other fields are blank.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 9.4: Details for maintenance item window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for maintenance item window
• View details for a maintenance procedure, page 9-10.
Maintenance log screen

From the Maintenance log screen you can view information about
procedures that have been performed. The system stores up to four
months of data.
• Print the Maintenance History report
• Approve the Maintenance log
• View additional details for procedures
• Add a comment to a procedure

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 9.5: Maintenance log screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Maintenance log screen field

An explanation of the descriptive elements of the Maintenance log
follows:
Item Description
Colored circles Are color-coded to match the appropriate maintenance
category tab.
Colored squares Are color-coded to match the appropriate maintenance
category tab.
• Solid Indicate procedures that have been performed and have a
(Completed) status of Completed. If the procedure is performed more
than once a day, the status of the last performed procedure
displays.
• Shaded (Not Indicate procedures that are scheduled, are pending, did
completed) not complete successfully, or were not performed when
scheduled. If the procedure is performed more than once a
day, the status of the last performed procedure displays.
Cursor Indicates the selected field in the procedure row and date
column. Use the directional arrows to move the cursor from
one procedure to the next and from one day to the next.
* Indicates a comment was entered for the procedure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Item Description
2-9 Indicates the procedure was performed X times on that day.
> Indicates the procedure was performed more than nine
times on that day.
To display this screen, see Access the Maintenance log screen, page 9-16.
• Approve the Maintenance log, page 9-17
• Add a comment to a maintenance procedure, page 9-17
• Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure, page 5-302
Access the Maintenance log screen
Perform this procedure to display the Maintenance log screen.

Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Maintenance log screen:

2. Select F2 - Maint. Log.

The Maintenance log screen for the selected module displays.
Procedures - Maintenance log screen
Procedures you can perform from the Maintenance log screen and its

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure,

page 5-302
Approve the Maintenance log
Perform this procedure to approve the monthly Maintenance log.
NOTE: The Maintenance log cannot be approved until the first day of
the next month.
Module status NA
Supplies NA
To approve the maintenance log:

1. Use the previous/next buttons on the Maintenance log screen
to display the desired month.
2. Select F4 - Approve.
The Approve maintenance log window for the selected month
displays.
3. Select the Approve log check box.
4. Select Done to approve the Maintenance log.

The status of the monthly maintenance log changes from
unapproved to approved, and displays the Operator ID, date,
and time of approval.
• Approve maintenance log window, page 9-18
Add a comment to a maintenance procedure
Perform this procedure to add a comment to a procedure listed in the

Maintenance log. Comments are particularly useful when used to
document why a procedure could not be completed when scheduled
or why an as-needed procedure was performed.
Module status Any
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To add a comment to a maintenance procedure:

1. Use the previous/next buttons on the Maintenance log screen
to select the desired month.
2. Use the up/down arrows to select the desired maintenance

procedure.
3. Use the left/right arrows to select the desired date.
The Details for maintenance log window for the selected
procedure and date displays.
• Details for maintenance log window, page 9-19
• Maintenance statuses, page 9-20
Windows - Maintenance log screen
Windows you can access from the Maintenance log screen include:
• Approve maintenance log window, page 9-18
• Details for maintenance log window, page 9-19
Approve maintenance log window
From the Approve maintenance log window the system administrator

can approve the Maintenance log.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 9.6: Approve maintenance log window
For descriptions of these fields, see Approve maintenance log window

Details for maintenance log window
From the Details for maintenance log window you can view detailed
information for a maintenance procedure (by date performed) and add
a comment.
NOTE: The data displayed is from the last time the procedure was
performed on the selected date.
Figure 9.7: Details for maintenance log window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for maintenance log screen

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Maintenance statuses
You can use maintenance status information to determine the status
of each maintenance procedure.
Table 9.1: Maintenance statuses
Status Description
Scheduled A procedure is scheduled on a future date.
Pending A procedure is scheduled on the current date.
Completed The procedure is complete and for procedures that produce
results, all results passed.
User Canceled You selected Quit prior to the procedure completing.
Failed The procedure produced an error or a failed result.
Blank The procedure has not been performed.
Running The procedure is in process.
Waiting user The procedure in process requires user input.
response
Stopped with The procedure is complete but errors occurred during
errors execution.
Not performed The procedure was not performed on the date due.
Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions

Maintenance procedures are grouped by module type and then by
category. Each category is represented by a tab on the Maintenance
screen.
The To do tab displays the currently scheduled Daily, Weekly,
Monthly, and Quarterly procedures for the selected module.
The Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, and As needed tabs display all
procedures for the selected module. You can perform any of the listed
procedures even if they are not currently scheduled.
The In process tab displays any procedure currently in process on the
selected module.
Maintenance categories/procedures by module type include:
• Processing module - the type of processing module determines
the categories and related procedures that are available.
– c System processing module maintenance categories, page 9-21

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
– c 4000 processing module associated maintenance graphics,

page 9-44
– i 1000SR processing module maintenance categories, page 9-55
– i 1000SR processing module associated maintenance graphics,
page 9-63
• Sample handler - the type of sample handler determines the
categories and related procedures that are available.
– RSH maintenance categories (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100),
page 9-69
– RSH associated maintenance graphics (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100),
page 9-71
• SCC maintenance categories, page 9-71
c System processing module maintenance categories
Maintenance procedures for the c System processing module are

grouped by category (tab) on the Maintenance screen. Procedures are
available for the following categories:
• Daily maintenance description (c System processing module),
page 9-21
• Weekly maintenance description (c System processing module),
page 9-24
• Monthly maintenance description (c System processing module),
page 9-27
• Quarterly maintenance description (c System processing module),
page 9-29
• As-needed maintenance description (c System processing module),
page 9-35
Daily maintenance description (c System processing module)
Daily maintenance is required on the processing module only. Perform

these procedures daily:
• 6024 Check 1mL Syringes, page 9-22
• 6028 Check DI Water Purity, page 9-22
• 6070 Daily Maintenance, page 9-22
To perform a maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance
procedure, page 9-6.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6024 Check 1mL Syringes
Perform this daily maintenance procedure to ensure:

• The pump syringe connections on the wash solution pump do
not leak
• The syringe plunger interiors do not show evidence of leakage
For the location of the wash solution pump see:
• ARCHITECT c 4000 supply and pump center components,
page 9-115
Estimated time Materials needed Required module status

2 minutes None Stopped or Ready
6028 Check DI Water Purity
Perform this daily maintenance procedure to check the required

purity of the water supply to facilitate accurate patient results.

6070 Daily Maintenance

Perform this daily maintenance procedure to:

• Flush sample and reagent lines
• Change water in bath
• Add Water Bath Additive
• Wash ICT probe with ICT Cleaning Fluid and ICT Reference
Solution
• Drain and fill ICT reference cup

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
For preparation instructions see Prepare ICT cleaning fluid (c System),

page 9-23.

15 minutes • ICT Cleaning Fluid Ready
• ICT sample diluent
• Water Bath Additive
Prepare ICT cleaning fluid (c System)
Perform this procedure to prepare a working solution of ICT Cleaning

Fluid. The prepared ICT cleaning fluid is used in the 6070 Daily
Maintenance procedure and as-needed maintenance procedure 6062
Wash ICT with Cleaning Fluid.
Prerequisite NA
Module status NA
User access level NA
Supplies • ICT Lyophilized Cleaning Solution
• ICT Cleaning Fluid
• Pipette
To prepare ICT cleaning fluid:

1. Hold the ICT Lyophilized Cleaning Solution bottle right side up
and tap on a flat surface before opening to remove excess
material from the cap.
IMPORTANT: Wait a couple of minutes before removing the cap

to allow suspended particles to settle.
2. Hold the bottle right side up on a flat surface. Carefully remove

the cap.
IMPORTANT: Minimize the generation of dust by removing the

cap in a slow, controlled manner while keeping the bottle steady.
3. Add 12 mL of ICT cleaning fluid to the ICT lyophilized cleaning

solution bottle.
IMPORTANT: Allow the liquid to run down the inside of the

bottle to minimize aerosolization of lyophilized material.
4. Replace the cap and mix by gentle inversion. Document the date
of preparation.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: The prepared, capped ICT cleaning fluid is stable for 14

days when stored at 2°C to 8°C, but no longer than the
expiration date.
Prepare water bath additive (c System)
Perform this procedure to prepare Water Bath Additive. The prepared

additive is dispensed into the water bath during the 6070 Daily
Maintenance procedure to prevent and control microbial
contamination.
Prerequisite NA
System status Any
Supplies • Water bath additive

To prepare water bath additive:

1. Verify water bath additive is within the expiration date on the
bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded.
2. Gently invert to ensure a homogeneous solution.
3. Pour water bath additive into the appropriate container.
4. Label the container with the name (water bath additive) and
expiration date. Review the container label for additional
information.
Weekly maintenance description (c System processing

module)
Weekly maintenance for the c System is required on the processing

module only. Perform these procedures weekly:
• 6019 Check ICT Components, page 9-25
• 6021 Clean Mixers, page 9-25
• 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-26
• 6056 Clean Cuvettes with Detergent, page 9-26
• 6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing, page 9-27

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

6019 Check ICT Components


Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to ensure:

• The ICT probe does not drip
• No bubbles are in the ICT tubing
• The pump syringe connections on the ICT aspiration pump and
the ICT reference solution pump do not leak
To view the associated graphic, see:
• 6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 4000), page 9-47

2 minutes None Ready
6021 Clean Mixers



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to ensure mixers are free

of protein buildup.

3 minutes • 70% isopropyl Stopped or Ready
alcohol
• Cotton swabs
• DI water
6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes

WARNING: Probe Stick Hazard. Probe Sharps Hazard.

This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to
probes. See Probes and sharps, page 8-20.

Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to ensure:

• The exterior of the sample and reagent probes are free of protein
buildup.
• The probes are not damaged, leaking, or dripping.

5 minutes • Detergent A Stopped or Ready
• Cotton swabs
• Purified water
• Nozzle cleaning
wire (optional)
6056 Clean Cuvettes with Detergent


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to ensure cuvettes are free

of protein buildup and reagent residue.

25 minutes Detergent A Ready
6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing

Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to ensure the

high-concentration waste pump tubing is free of blockage.
• 6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 4000), page 9-49

Monthly maintenance description (c System processing

module)
Monthly maintenance for the c System is required on the processing

module only. Perform these procedures monthly:
• 6016 Check Dispense Components, page 9-27
• 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-28
• 6026 Check Syringes and Valves, page 9-28
• 6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip, page 9-29
6016 Check Dispense Components



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Perform this monthly maintenance procedure to ensure:

• Air bubbles are not being introduced into the sample and/or
reagent syringes or the sample and/or reagent tubing
• Probe and grounding wire screws are tight
• Reagent probe tubing is not discolored

2 minutes Large slotted Stopped or Ready
screwdriver
6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles


Perform this monthly maintenance procedure to ensure nozzles are

clean and clear of debris to facilitate optimal operation.

5 minutes Nozzle cleaning wire Stopped or Ready
6026 Check Syringes and Valves

Perform this monthly maintenance procedure to ensure the syringes,

solenoid valves and their connections do not leak.
To view the associated graphic(s), see:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• 6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 4000), page 9-50

6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip


Perform this monthly maintenance procedure to ensure ICT aspiration

drain tip is free of debris and salt buildup.
• 6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 4000), page 9-51

1 - 2 minutes • Lint-free tissue Stopped or Ready
• DI water
Quarterly maintenance description (c System processing

module)
Quarterly maintenance for the c System is required on the processing

module only. Perform these procedures quarterly:
• 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-30
• 6301 Sample Syringe Maintenance, page 9-30
• 6302 Wash Syringe Maintenance, page 9-31
• 6303 Reagent Syringe Maintenance, page 9-32
• 6304 Change 1 mL Syringes, page 9-33
• 6305 Change ICT Asp Check Valve, page 9-33
• 6306 Check ICT Ref Check Valves, page 9-34
• 6307 Check/Clean HC Waste Sensor, page 9-35

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
1003 Change Lamp
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard. Never remove the

lamp or lamp plate with the processing module powered
on. See Electrical hazards, page 8-16.
WARNING: Hot Surface. This is an activity or area where

you may be exposed to hot surfaces. See Hot objects,
page 8-22.

Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to change the lamp.

For graphics associated with this quarterly maintenance procedure, see
component replacement procedure:
• Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 4000), page 9-89

15 minutes • Lamp Stopped or Ready
• Phillips screwdriver
NOTE: Time does not
include lamp warm up • Gloves
(30 minutes) • Lint-free tissue
(optional)
• Ethanol (optional)
6301 Sample Syringe Maintenance


Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to replace sample

syringe o-rings and seal tips 1 and 2.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c
4000), page 9-138
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines,
page 9-39, to prepare for operation on completion of sample syringe
maintenance.

10 minutes • Phillips screwdriver Stopped or Ready
• Slotted screwdriver
• 10 mm wrench
• Cotton swabs
• Absorbent towel
• O-rings and seal
tips 1 and 2
6302 Wash Syringe Maintenance


Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to replace wash

solution syringe o-rings and seal tips 1 and 2.
• Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 4000),
page 9-129

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions,

page 9-40, to prepare for operation on completion of wash solution
syringe maintenance.

• 10 mm wrench
• Cotton swabs
• Absorbent towel
tips 1 and 2
6303 Reagent Syringe Maintenance


Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to replace reagent

syringe o-rings and seal tips 1 and 2.
4000), page 9-138
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines,
page 9-39, to prepare for operation on completion of reagent syringe
maintenance.

• 10 mm wrench
• Cotton swabs
• Absorbent towel
tips 1 and 2

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6304 Change 1 mL Syringes


Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to replace 1 mL

syringes on:
• ICT reference pump
• Wash solution pump
• ICT aspiration pump
• Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 4000), page 9-116
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6063 Flush ICT Module,
page 9-43, to prepare for operation on completion of changing 1 mL
syringes for ICT reference and ICT aspiration pumps.
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions,
page 9-40, to prepare for operation on completion of changing 1 mL
syringes for the wash solution pump.

15 minutes • Absorbent towel Stopped or Ready
• 1 mL syringes
6305 Change ICT Asp Check Valve



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to replace ICT

aspiration check valve.
• Replace check valves (c 4000), page 9-119
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6063 Flush ICT Module,
page 9-43, to prepare for operation on completion of changing the
ICT aspiration check valve.

• ICT aspiration pump
check valve
6306 Check ICT Ref Check Valves


Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to evaluate ICT

reference solution check valves and ensure they are functioning. For
graphics associated with evaluation instructions, see Evaluate the check
valve (c System), page 10-691.

3 minutes • Clamp or large Stopped or Ready
hemostats
• Absorbent towel
• Beaker large
enough to
accommodate 1 mL
syringes with check
valves
• DI water

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6307 Check/Clean HC Waste Sensor


Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to:

• Check the high-concentration waste sensor
• Clean high-concentration waste sensor with a diluted bleach
solution

• Beaker large
enough to
accommodate
high-concentration
waste sensor
• 0.5% sodium
hypochlorite

As-needed maintenance description (c System processing

module)
Perform these recommended as-needed maintenance procedures on

the c System during troubleshooting/diagnostics or during routine
operation when problems are observed:
• 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36
• 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37
• 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-38
• 2129 Add Water Bath Additive, page 9-39
• 2131 Flush ICT Cup, page 9-39
• 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-39

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• 2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-39

• 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-40
• 3525 Temperature Status, page 9-40
• 3526 Check Water Bath Temperature, page 9-41
• 6027 Clean Reagent Supply Center (c 4000), page 9-41
• 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-41
• 6053 Probe Water Wash, page 9-41
• 6054 Probe Acid Wash, page 9-42
• 6055 Detergent B Probe Wash, page 9-42
• 6062 Wash ICT with Cleaning Fluid, page 9-42
• 6063 Flush ICT Module, page 9-43
• 6064 Clean Reaction Carousel, page 9-43
• 6309 Change ICT Module, page 9-43
• 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually, page 9-43
1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration


Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to set sample probe

positioning for all positions where aspirating and dispensing occurs.
For the associated graphic, see:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 4000), page 9-52

12 minutes • Cuvette segment Stopped or Ready
alignment tool
• Tap water or saline
Additional materials
vary depending on
sample handler
configuration.
• Carrier calibration
tool (RSH)
• Pipettor calibration
tool (LAS)
• SH bar code tool
(LAS)
1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration



Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to set R1 probe

positioning for all positions where aspirating and dispensing reagents
with the R1 pipettor occurs.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 4000), page 9-53

7 minutes • Reagent outer and Stopped or Ready
inner segments with
the pipettor
calibration target
(c 4000)
• Cuvette segment
alignment tool
• Water
1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration



Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to set R2 probe

positioning for all positions where aspirating and dispensing reagents
with the R2 pipettor occurs.
• 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 4000), page 9-54

6 minutes • Reagent outer and Stopped or Ready
inner segments with
pipettor calibration
tool (c 4000)
• Cuvette segment
alignment tool
• Water

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2129 Add Water Bath Additive

Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to add Water Bath

Additive to the water bath to prevent and control microbial
contamination. Review the container label for additional information.

5 minutes Water Bath Additive Ready
2131 Flush ICT Cup
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to:

• Drain ICT Reference Solution from the ICT reference solution
cup
• Refill the ICT reference solution warming ring from the ICT
reference solution bottle

1 minute None Ready
2132 Flush Water Lines
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to verify water is being

flushed through the:
• Wash station tubing
• Sample probe tubing
• R1 and R2 pipettor tubing

2134 Change Water Bath


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to drain water from

water bath and then refill bath with water. Review the container label
for additional information.

5 minutes Water Bath Additive Ready
2155 Flush Bulk Solutions
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to verify the following

bulk solution tubings are free of air bubbles:
• ICT Reference Solution
• Alkaline Wash
• Acid Wash

3525 Temperature Status
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to check the

temperature status of the processing module under the following
conditions:
• Taking temperature measurements required by your laboratory
• Troubleshooting certain error codes
• Starting up the system after a long-term shutdown
The system checks and displays the temperature status of the
following processing module components:
• Water bath
• Reagent supply center(s)
• Instrument interior

1 minute None Stopped or Ready

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3526 Check Water Bath Temperature
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to measure the

temperature of the processing module water bath and compare the
reading to an external thermometer for accuracy.

5 minutes Thermometer (reading Stopped or Ready
accuracy ± 0.05°C at
37°C)
6027 Clean Reagent Supply Center (c 4000)

Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to clean up spills and

ensure the reagent supply center is free of debris and deposits.

Variable Lint-free towel Ready
6052 Wash Cuvettes
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to wash all cuvettes

with Alkaline Wash, Acid Wash, and water.

18 minutes (c 4000) None Ready
6053 Probe Water Wash
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to wash the probes on

the sample pipettor, R1 reagent pipettor, and R2 reagent pipettor with
water.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6054 Probe Acid Wash


a 0.5% dilution of acid wash solution. See Prepare 0.5% acid wash
solution (c System), page 5-26.

5 minutes 0.5% acid wash Ready
6055 Detergent B Probe Wash


a 10% dilution of detergent B. For preparation instructions, see Prepare
10% detergent B solution (c System), page 5-28.

5 minutes 10% detergent B Ready
6062 Wash ICT with Cleaning Fluid
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to wash the ICT probe

with cleaning fluid to ensure the ICT probe is free of protein buildup.
For preparation instructions, see Prepare ICT cleaning fluid (c System),
page 9-23.

3 minutes ICT Cleaning Fluid Ready

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6063 Flush ICT Module
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to flush the ICT

module with ICT Reference Solution.

6064 Clean Reaction Carousel
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to clean the reaction

carousel to remove any debris.

20 minutes • Lint-free tissue Stopped or Ready
• Purified water
6309 Change ICT Module
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to replace the ICT

module.
For graphics associated with this as-needed maintenance procedure,
see component replacement procedure:
• Replace the ICT module or probe (c 4000), page 9-108

10 minutes ICT module Stopped or Ready
6310 Clean cuvettes - manually


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to manually clean the

cuvettes in the reaction carousel.

5 minutes • Slotted screwdriver Stopped or Ready
• Detergent A
• Cotton swabs
• Purified water
• Gloves
• Clean, residue-free
container to
submerge cuvette
segment
c 4000 processing module associated maintenance graphics
Maintenance procedure instructions are located in the

INSTRUCTIONS box on the Maintenance Perform window.
Occasionally graphics are required to illustrate a procedure, but they
cannot display in the INSTRUCTIONS box.
Graphics are available to aid in performing the following c 4000
processing module maintenance:
• Daily maintenance
– 6024 Check 1 mL Syringes graphics (c 4000), page 9-45
• Weekly maintenance
– 6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 4000), page 9-47
– 6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 4000),
page 9-49
• Monthly maintenance
– 6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 4000), page 9-50
– 6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 4000), page 9-51
• Quarterly maintenance
– 1003 Change Lamp see Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c
4000), page 9-89
– 6301 Sample Syringe Maintenance see Replace sample or
reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 4000), page 9-138
– 6302 Wash Syringe Maintenance see Replace wash solution
syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 4000), page 9-129

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
– 6303 Reagent Syringe Maintenance see Replace sample or

reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 4000), page 9-138
– 6304 Change 1 mL Syringes see Replace the 1 mL syringes (c
4000), page 9-116
– 6305 Change ICT Asp Check Valve see Replace check valves (c
4000), page 9-119
– 6306 Change ICT Ref Check Valve see Evaluate the check valve
• As-needed maintenance
– 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 4000), page 9-52
– 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 4000), page 9-53
– 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 4000), page 9-54
– 6309 Change ICT Module see Replace the ICT module or probe
(c 4000), page 9-108
6024 Check 1 mL Syringes graphics (c 4000)
View these daily maintenance procedure graphics to:

• Locate the wash solution pump 1 mL syringes
• Inspect the connections and interior of the 1 mL syringe for
leaks

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Legend:
1. 1 mL syringes for wash solution pump

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Legend:
1. Connections
2. Syringe plunger interior
6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 4000)
View this weekly maintenance procedure graphic to:

• Check ICT tubing for bubbles
• Inspect the connections and interior of the ICT 1 mL syringes for
leaks

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Legend:
1. ICT tubing

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Legend:
1. 1 mL syringes for ICT reference pump
2. 1 mL syringes for ICT aspiration pump
Legend:
1. Connections
2. Syringe plunger interior
6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 4000)
View this weekly maintenance procedure graphic to ensure the

high-concentration waste pump tubing is free of blockage.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 9.8: Peristaltic high-concentration waste pump
Legend:
1. Input tubing from cuvette washer
2. Output tubing to the high-concentrated waste
6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 4000)
View this monthly maintenance procedure graphic(s) to ensure the

syringe, solenoid valves, and their connections do not leak.
Legend:
1. Syringes

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2. Solenoid valves
Legend:
1. Solenoid valve connections
6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 4000)
View this monthly maintenance procedure graphic(s) to locate the ICT

drain tip.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Legend:
1. ICT drain tip
1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 4000)
View this as-needed maintenance graphic to clean the appropriate

calibration targets.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Legend:
1. Sample wash cup calibration target (to the right of the wash cup)
2. Carrier calibration tool target
3. Cuvette segment alignment tool target
1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 4000)


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Legend:
1. R1 wash cup calibration target
3. Reagent supply center inner segment calibration target
4. Reagent supply center outer segment calibration target
5. Reagent supply center maintenance cover
1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 4000)


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Legend:
1. R2 wash cup calibration target
3. Reagent supply center inner segment calibration target
4. Reagent supply center outer segment calibration target
5. Reagent supply center maintenance cover
i 1000SR processing module maintenance categories
Maintenance procedures for an i 1000SR processing module are

available in the following categories:
• Daily maintenance description (i 1000SR processing module),
page 9-56
• Weekly maintenance description (i 1000SR processing module),
page 9-56
• Monthly maintenance description (i 1000SR processing module),
page 9-58

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• As-needed maintenance description (i 1000SR processing module),

page 9-60
Daily maintenance description (i 1000SR processing module)
Daily maintenance for an ARCHITECT i 1000SR is required on the

processing module only. Perform the 6440 Daily maintenance
procedure daily.
To perform this maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance
6440 Daily Maintenance

Perform this daily maintenance procedure to:

• Clean the outside of the probes in the wash zone
• Mix the microparticle bottles on the reagent carousel
• Dry the vacuum pump filter

10 minutes • WZ probe Warming or Ready
maintenance water
bottle
• Tap water or saline
• Reagent carrier
Weekly maintenance description (i 1000SR processing module)
Weekly maintenance for an ARCHITECT i 1000SR is required on the

processing module only. Perform these procedures weekly:
• 6407 Probe Cleaning - Manual, page 9-57
• 6445 Pipettor/WZ Probe Cleaning, page 9-57
• 6450 Wash Cup Cleaning, page 9-57

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6407 Probe Cleaning - Manual

WARNING: Probe Stick Hazard. This is an activity or area

where you may be exposed to probes. See Probes and
sharps, page 8-20.
Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to clean the outside of

the pipettor and wash zone probes to remove salt buildup.

5 minutes • Wash bottle with Warming or Ready
deionized water
• Cotton swabs
6445 Pipettor/WZ Probe Cleaning
Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to clean and condition

the pipettor probe and to clean the WZ (wash zone) probes.

15 minutes • Maintenance Warming or Ready
Cleaning Bottle (LN
02G19-99)
• 0.5% sodium
hypochlorite
solution
• Probe Conditioning
Solution (LN 01L56)
6450 Wash Cup Cleaning


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to clean the wash cup

and wash cup baffle to remove salt buildup.

2 minutes • Cotton swabs Stopped, Warming, or
• Deionized water Ready
Monthly maintenance description (i 1000SR processing module)
Monthly maintenance for an i 1000SR is required on the processing

module only. Perform these procedures monthly:
• 2190 Internal Decontamination, page 9-58
• 6405 Air Filter Cleaning, page 9-59
2190 Internal Decontamination

CAUTION: Lifting hazard. The i 1000SR System wash

buffer reservoir is heavy when full. Obtain assistance with

Perform this monthly maintenance procedure to:

• Clean the wash buffer reservoir, buffer level sensor, and buffer
outlet assembly
• Clean the wash dispense nozzles
• Clean and condition the pipettor probe

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To view the associated graphics, see 2190 Internal Decontamination

graphics, page 9-64.

90 minutes • Absorbent Warming or Ready
tissues/towels
• Bleach preparation
container with 5 L
0.5% sodium
hypochlorite
solution
• Buffer filter
• Concentrated Wash
Buffer (1L bottle)
• Internal Decon
Extension
Tubing/Cable Kit
• Probe Conditioning
Solution
• Reagent carrier
• Wash buffer
preparation
container
• Wash buffer transfer
tubing
If ARM is installed:
• Extra empty 5 liter
container
tubing

6405 Air Filter Cleaning
Perform this monthly maintenance procedure to manually remove

dust buildup from the air filters. Since the filters must be reinstalled
dry, it is recommended you rotate between two filters to improve
efficiency.

10 minutes • Air filters Stopped, Warming, or
• Tap water Ready

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
As-needed maintenance description (i 1000SR processing

module)
Perform the recommended as-needed maintenance procedures on an i

1000SR processing module during troubleshooting/diagnostics or
during a routine operation when problems are observed. Perform
these procedures as needed:
• 1110 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-60
• 2136 Air Flush, page 9-61
• 2137 Flush Fluids, page 9-61
• 2160 Prime Wash Zone, page 9-62
• 2162 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-62
• 3535 Temperature Check - Manual, page 9-62
• 3540 Temperature Status, page 9-63
• 4100 Buffer Run, page 9-63
1110 Pipettor Calibration


sharps, page 8-20.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to:

• Set pipettor probe positioning for all positions required for
aspirating and dispensing specimens and reagents during
processing
• Determine probe straightness

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
For the associated graphic, see 1110 Pipettor Calibration graphic,

page 9-64.

10 minutes • Sample carrier Stopped, Warming, or
• Carrier calibration Ready
tool
• Cotton swab or
lint-free tissue
• Deionized water
2136 Air Flush
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to flush the wash

buffer, trigger, and pre-trigger tubing with air.

5 minutes • Wash buffer transfer Warming or Ready
tubing
• Wash buffer
reservoir (empty)
2137 Flush Fluids

Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to flush the wash

buffer, as well as the Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions.
NOTE: To flush the wash buffer, the inventory status must be greater
than 25%. To verify that sufficient wash buffer is available, see Verify
supply and waste inventory, page 5-23.

3 minutes None Warming or Ready
NOTE: Performing this

procedure does not
reset the clock for the
automatic flush.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2160 Prime Wash Zone
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to prime the wash

zone by dispensing 100 μL wash buffer into three RVs in the wash
zone.

1 minute None Warming or Ready
2162 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to prime Pre-Trigger

and Trigger Solutions by dispensing 300 μL pre-trigger and 100 μL
trigger into an RV at the pre-trigger/trigger manifold.

1 minute None Warming or Ready
3535 Temperature Check - Manual
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to measure the

temperature of the system when your laboratory requires external
temperature measurement.
RVs containing wash buffer are equilibrated in each of three (3)
process path zones during this procedure. In addition, tap water in the
WZ probe maintenance water bottle is loaded on the reagent carousel
by the RSH. When instructed, insert a thermometer probe to measure
the temperature.

75 minutes • External Warming or Ready
thermometer
• WZ probe
maintenance water
bottle
NOTE: An external
thermometer must
be purchased
separately to
perform the
temperature check.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3540 Temperature Status
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to check the

temperature status of the system under the following conditions:
• Taking temperature measurements required by your laboratory
• Troubleshooting certain error codes
• Starting up the system after a long-term shutdown
The temperature status of the following system components is
checked and displayed:
• Process path
• Pre-Trigger Solution
• Trigger Solution
• Wash zone
• Reagent cooler
• Ambient (except for ci 4100)

1 minute None Stopped, Warming, or
Ready
4100 Buffer Run
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to run one-step and

two-step assay protocols using wash buffer instead of reagents. This
procedure will allow you to simulate running assays when
troubleshooting system failures.

60 minutes • (2) Reagent kits (3 Warming or Ready
bottles per kit) -
bottles must be
empty
• (5) Sample carriers
• (2) Reagent carriers
• Sample cups/tubes
i 1000SR processing module associated maintenance graphics


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

cannot display in the INSTRUCTIONS box. The following graphics are
associated with i 1000SR processing module maintenance:
• 1110 Pipettor Calibration graphic, page 9-64
• 2190 Internal Decontamination graphics, page 9-64
1110 Pipettor Calibration graphic
View this as-needed maintenance graphic to locate the appropriate

Legend:
1. Wash cup calibration target
2. Reagent carousel calibration target
2190 Internal Decontamination graphics
View these monthly maintenance procedure graphics to identify:

• Materials required
• Wash buffer reservoir connectors
• Buffer level sensor and buffer outlet assembly
• Fitting on extension tubing with gray connector
• Internal decon extension tubing and cable connectors
• Buffer filter connectors

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 9.9: Materials required
Legend:
1. Bleach preparation container
2. Buffer filter
3. Internal Decon Extension Tubing/Cable Kit
4. Probe Conditioning Solution
5. Reagent Carrier
6. Wash Buffer Preparation Container
7. Concentrated Wash Buffer (1L bottle)
8. Wash buffer transfer tubing

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 9.10: Wash buffer reservoir connectors
Legend:
1. Gray tubing connector at top of filter
2. Gray electrical cable connector
3. Beige connector

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 9.11: Buffer level sensor and buffer outlet assembly
Legend:
1. Buffer level sensor
2. Buffer outlet assembly
Figure 9.12: Fitting on extension tubing with gray connector
Legend:
1. Gray connector on extension tubing
2. Gray fitting (used to drain tubing)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 9.13: Internal decon extension tubing and cable connectors
Legend:
1. Gray electrical extension cable connectors
2. Gray extension tubing connectors
3. Beige extension connectors

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 9.14: Buffer filter connectors
Legend:
1. Gray tubing connector at top of filter
2. Gray tubing connector at bottom of filter
RSH maintenance categories (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
Maintenance procedures for the RSH (robotic sample handler) are

available in the following category:
• As-needed maintenance description (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100),
page 9-69
As-needed maintenance description (RSH -

c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
Perform the recommended as-needed maintenance procedures on the

RSH (robotic sample handler) during troubleshooting/diagnostics or
during routine operation when problems are observed:
• 1114 Carrier Transport Calibration, page 9-70
• 6400 RSH Cleaning, page 9-70

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

1114 Carrier Transport Calibration
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to align the carrier

transport to the reagent carousel latch actuator and a sample carrier to
the load/unload area.

12 minutes • Sample carriers Stopped, Warming, or
• Carrier calibration Ready
tool
• Cotton swabs or
lint-free tissues
• Deionized water
6400 RSH Cleaning

Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to clean the RSH

sections, transport arm, bar code reader, bottle rotator (i 1000SR), and
aspiration area.
For the associated graphic, see 6400 RSH Cleaning graphics, page 9-71.

5 minutes • 0.1% sodium Stopped, Warming, or
hypochlorite Ready
solution
• Cotton swabs
• Deionized water
• Lint-free tissues


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
RSH associated maintenance graphics (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)

cannot display in the INSTRUCTIONS box.
The following graphic is associated with the RSH (robotic sample
handler) maintenance:
• 6400 RSH Cleaning graphics, page 9-71
6400 RSH Cleaning graphics
View these as-needed maintenance graphics to clean the RSH sections,

carrier transport arm, bar code reader, bottle rotator, and/or aspiration
area.
Legend:
1. RSH sections
2. Transport arm
3. Bottle rotator
4. Bar code reader
5. Aspiration area
SCC maintenance categories
Maintenance procedures for the SCC (system control center) are

grouped by category (tab) on the Maintenance screen.
Procedures are available for the following category:
• As-needed maintenance description (SCC), page 9-72

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
As-needed maintenance description (SCC)
Perform the 6038 External Decontamination as-needed maintenance

procedure during routine operation when problems are observed.
6038 External Decontamination

Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to decontaminate the

following external surfaces:
• Supply and pump center (c System)
• Supply and waste center (i System)
• Sample handler accessories
• SCC (system control center)
• PM (processing module) external surface
• High-concentration waste bottle (c System)
• ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory
(i System)

5 minutes • Detergent Stopped, Warming, or
• 0.1% sodium Ready
NOTE: Time above
hypochlorite
reflects the time
required to apply the • Lint-free tissue or
appropriate disinfectant gauze
only.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 9 Component replacement
Component replacement
Some system components may need to be replaced due to normal
wear from daily operations.
Your laboratory is responsible for maintaining an adequate supply of
replacement parts. List numbers are provided in the procedures for
guidance only and are subject to change. Contact your Abbott
representative for the most current list numbers.
Component replacement topics include:
• c 4000 component replacement, page 9-73
• i 1000SR component replacement, page 9-148
• Optional component replacement, page 9-178
c 4000 component replacement

Component replacement for the c 4000 includes:
• ARCHITECT c 4000 processing center component replacement,
page 9-73
• ARCHITECT c 4000 supply and pump components replacement,
page 9-114
ARCHITECT c 4000 processing center component replacement
To replace processing center components, see:

• Replace the sample probe (c 4000), page 9-74
• Replace reagent probes (c 4000), page 9-78
• Replace the sample probe tubing (c 4000), page 9-82
• Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 4000), page 9-85
• Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 4000), page 9-89
• Replace a cuvette (c 4000), page 9-96
• Replace a cuvette segment (c 4000), page 9-100
• Replace the cuvette dry tip (c 4000), page 9-103
• Replace the mixer (c 4000), page 9-106
• Replace the ICT module or probe (c 4000), page 9-108
See ARCHITECT c 4000 processing center components, page 9-74, for
component locations when performing replacement procedures.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Component replacement Section 9
ARCHITECT c 4000 processing center components
The following illustration shows the locations of the processing center

components. Use this illustration when performing component
replacement procedures.
Figure 9.15: ARCHITECT c 4000 processing center map
Legend:
1. Sample pipettor
2. Reaction carousel
3. Lamp
4. Mixer unit
5. Cuvette washer
6. ICT unit
7. Reagent supply center and cover
8. Reagent 1 pipettor
9. Reagent 2 pipettor
10. Sample wash solution area
Replace the sample probe (c 4000)
NOTE: It is recommended that you record and track the date of

sample probe installation to ensure you do not use the probe for
longer than one year.
Replacing the sample probe consists of the following procedures:
• Removal
– Removal, page 9-75

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
– Remove the sample probe, page 9-76

• Replacement
– Install the sample probe, page 9-77
– Prepare for operation, page 9-78
• Verification
– Calibrate the sample pipettor, page 9-78
– Run quality control, page 9-78
Prerequisite The processing module must be in the Ready status.
Estimated time 20 minutes
required
Tools/materials • Slotted screwdriver
required • Absorbent towel
Replacement parts • LN 01G48-03 - Sample probe
• LN 02J51-01 - Reagent/sample probe screw
(optional)



Removal
Prepare for sample probe removal

Steps Graphic / reference
1. Remove the sample wash solution carrier.
2. Initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe

Move, page 10-661, to position the sample pipettor
over the sample wash solution area.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the sample probe

1. Remove the sample pipettor cover by gently
squeezing the squeeze points [1], to release the
locking tabs, and lifting the cover [2].
2. Place an absorbent towel in the sample wash

solution area under the probe tip.
3. Use a slotted screwdriver to slightly loosen the probe

screw [3].
4. Loosen, do not remove, the probe screw [3] by hand

until the probe releases from the sample pipettor.
5. Loosen, do not remove, the screw [4] holding the

sample probe grounding wire [5] in place.
6. Detach the grounding wire.
7. Gently disconnect the tubing [6] from the top of the

probe [7].

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the sample probe

1. Attach the tubing [1] to the top of the new sample
probe [2].
NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the tubing. The tubing
should fit firmly on the sample probe. If the tubing is
loose or if the probe has been replaced several times
using the same tubing, it is recommended that you
replace the sample probe tubing.
2. Position the sample probe on the alignment pins [3]

and verify the probe plate [4] is flush with the plate on
the sample pipettor.
3. Remove the probe screw [5] from the old sample

probe and insert it into the new sample probe.
Finger-tighten the screw [5] to secure the probe in
place.
4. Stabilize the pipettor and tighten the screw with the

slotted screwdriver.
5. Attach the new sample probe grounding wire [6] and

tighten the screw [7].
NOTE: Ensure the connector for the new sample
probe grounding wire [6] is positioned under the
ring-shaped connector [8] as shown.
6. Complete pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161

Probe Move, page 10-661, to return the sample
pipettor to the home position.
7. Remove the absorbent towel from the sample

carousel area.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Prepare for operation

1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132
Flush Water Lines, page 9-39.
2. Visually inspect the probe for drips and inspect the

sample probe tubing and connections for leaks.
If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation
procedure.
3. Gently replace the pipettor cover [1]. Ensure the

tubing is not pinched or kinked below the pipettor
cover.
4. Press down on the end of the cover over the pipettor

shaft [2] until it snaps into place. The pipettor cover
must be completely seated to ensure correct liquid
level sense operation.
5. Reinstall the sample wash solution carrier.
Verification
Calibrate the sample pipettor

Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120
Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36.
Run quality control

Run quality control to verify performance prior to
reporting patient results.
Replace reagent probes (c 4000)
Replacing the reagent probe(s) consists of the following procedures:

• Removal
– Prepare for reagent probe removal, page 9-79
– Remove the reagent probe, page 9-80
• Replacement
– Install the reagent probe, page 9-81
• Verification

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
– Calibrate the Reagent pipettor, page 9-82

required
Tools/materials Slotted screwdriver
required
Replacement parts • LN 01G47-03 - Reagent probe
• LN 02J51-01 - Reagent/sample probe screw
(optional)



Removal
Prepare for reagent probe removal

1. Locate the reagent pipettor.
NOTE: See ARCHITECT c 4000 processing center
components, page 9-74, for pipettor locations.
– Access the R1 pipettor from the back of the
system.
– Access the R2 pipettor from the front or back of the
system.

Move, page 10-661, to move the reagent pipettor to
an accessible position.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the reagent probe

1. Remove the reagent pipettor cover by gently
locking tabs, and lifting the pipettor cover [2].
2. Use a slotted screwdriver to slightly loosen the probe

screw [3].
3. Loosen, do not remove, the probe screw [3] by hand

until the probe releases from the reagent pipettor.
4. Loosen, do not remove, the screw [4] holding the

reagent probe grounding wire [5] in place.
5. Detach the grounding wire.

probe [7].

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the reagent probe

1. Attach the tubing [1] to the top of the new reagent
probe [2].
NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the tubing. The tubing
should fit firmly on the reagent probe. If the tubing is
loose or if the probe has been replaced several times
using the same tubing, it is recommended that you
replace the reagent probe tubing.
2. Position the new reagent probe [2] on the alignment

pins [3] and verify the probe plate [4] is flush with the
plate on the reagent pipettor.
3. Remove the probe screw [5] from the old reagent

probe and insert it into the new reagent probe. Finger
tighten the screw [5] to secure the probe in place.
4. Stabilize the pipettor and tighten the screw with the

slotted screwdriver.
5. Attach the new reagent probe grounding wire [6] and

tighten the screw [7].
NOTE: Ensure the connector for the new reagent
probe grounding wire [6] is positioned under the
ring-shaped connector [8] as shown.

Probe Move, page 10-661, to return the reagent
probe to the home position.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


reagent probe tubing and connections for leaks.
procedure.
3. For the R2 reagent probe, perform pipettors

diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move,
page 10-661 to move the reagent pipettor to an
accessible position.

cover.
5. Stabilize the pipettor to prevent it from dropping and

causing damage to the probe. Press down on the
end of the cover over the pipettor shaft [2] until it
snaps into place. The pipettor cover must be
completely seated to ensure correct liquid level
sense operation.
Verification
Calibrate the Reagent pipettor

Perform the appropriate as-needed maintenance
procedure:
– 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37, or
– 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-38
Run quality control

Replace the sample probe tubing (c 4000)
Replacing the sample probe tubing consists of the following

procedures:
• Removal
– Prepare for sample probe tubing removal, page 9-83

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
– Remove the sample probe tubing, page 9-84

• Replacement
– Install the sample probe tubing, page 9-84
• Verification
required
Tools/materials Absorbent towel
required
Replacement parts LN 01G48-02 - Sample probe tubing



Removal
Prepare for sample probe tubing removal

1. Remove the sample wash solution carrier.

Move, page 10-661, to position the sample pipettor
over the sample wash solution area.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the sample probe tubing

1. Remove the sample pipettor cover by gently
2. Place an absorbent towel in the sample wash

solution area under the probe tip.
3. Unscrew the tubing from the probe tubing connector

[3]. Ensure the black o-ring inside the tubing
connector stays in place.

probe [5].
Replacement
Install the sample probe tubing

1. Attach the end of the new tubing [1] to the top of the
sample probe [2].
NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the new tubing. The
tubing should fit firmly on the sample probe.
2. Verify the black o-ring is inside the probe tubing

connector [3].
3. Screw the opposite end of the tubing [4] into the

tubing connector [3].

Probe Move, page 10-661, to return the sample
5. Remove the absorbent towel from the sample wash

solution area.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


sample probe tubing and connections for leaks.
procedure.

cover.
4. Press down on the end of the cover over the pipettor

shaft [2] until it snaps into place. The pipettor cover
must be completely seated to ensure correct liquid
level sense operation.
5. Reinstall the sample wash solution carrier.
Verification
Run quality control

Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 4000)
Replacing the reagent probe tubing consists of the following

procedures:
• Removal
– Prepare for reagent probe tubing removal, page 9-86
– Remove the reagent probe tubing, page 9-87
• Replacement
– Install the reagent probe tubing, page 9-88
• Verification

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

required
required
Replacement parts LN 01G47-02 - Reagent probe tubing



Removal
Prepare for reagent probe tubing removal

1. Locate the reagent pipettor.
NOTE: See ARCHITECT c 4000 processing center
components, page 9-74, for pipettor locations.
– Access the R1 pipettor from the back of the
system.
– Access the R2 pipettor from the front or back of the
system.

Move, page 10-661, to move the reagent pipettor to
an accessible position.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the reagent probe tubing

1. Remove the reagent pipettor cover by gently
2. Place an absorbent towel under the probe tip.

probe [4].
4. Gently disconnect the metal connector [5] from the

reagent pipettor tubing [6]. Ensure the protective
sleeve remains on the reagent pipettor tubing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the reagent probe tubing

1. Attach the end of the new tubing and metal
connector [1] to the reagent pipettor tubing [2]. The
tubing should be positioned as shown, with the metal
connector on the left side and routed over the top of
the loop.
2. Verify the metal connector [3] is inserted in the

reagent pipettor tubing [4] and not just in the
protective sleeve.
3. Attach the other end of the tubing [5] to the reagent

probe [6].
NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the new tubing. The
tubing should fit firmly in the reagent probe.

Probe Move, page 10-661, to return the reagent
5. Remove the absorbent towel.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


reagent probe tubing and connections for leaks.
procedure.

cover.
4. Stabilize the pipettor to prevent it from dropping and

causing damage to the probe. Press down on the
end of the cover over the pipettor shaft [2] until it
snaps into place.The cover must be completely
seated to ensure correct liquid level sense operation.
Verification
Run quality control

Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 4000)
Replacing the lamp or lamp plate consists of the following procedures:

• Removal
– Prepare for removal, page 9-90
– Remove the covers, page 9-91
– Remove the terminal cable connections, page 9-92
– Remove the lamp, page 9-93
• Replacement
– Install the lamp plate and lamp, page 9-94
– Install the terminal cables, page 9-95
– Install the processing module cover, page 9-95
• Verification

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Prerequisite Power off the processing module.
required
NOTE: Time does not include lamp warm up (30
minutes)
Tools/materials • Phillips screwdriver
required • Gloves
Replacement parts LN 09D45-02 - Lamp
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard. Never remove the

lamp or lamp plate with the processing module powered
on. See Electrical hazards, page 8-16.
WARNING: Hot Surface. This is an activity or area where

you may be exposed to hot surfaces. See Hot objects,
page 8-22.
Removal
Prepare for removal

Power off the processing module by using the main
circuit breaker located at the rear of the module.
See Power off the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-9.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the covers

WARNING: Wait at least five minutes after turning the

power off to allow the lamp and the lamp housing to
cool.
NOTE: The lamp can be accessed from the back of

the processing module.
1. Open the rear processing module cover. Locate the
lamp housing cover [1] positioned in the center of the
reaction carousel.
2. Remove the Phillips screw [2] securing the cover in

place and remove the cover.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the terminal cable connections

1. Locate the terminal block [1].
2. Remove the transparent cover [2] from the terminal

block by grasping both ends and lifting up.
3. Using the Phillips screwdriver, completely loosen the

two captive screws [3] securing the two lamp cables
[4] on the terminal block.
4. Raise the screws [5] and lower the lamp cables [4]
completely to allow you to disengage the cables from
the bottom of the screws.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the lamp

WARNING: Wait at least five minutes after turning the

power off to allow the lamp and the lamp housing to
cool. The lamp, lamp housing, and heat absorbing
filter may be hot.
1. Completely loosen the lamp plate [1] thumbscrew [2]
located towards the rear of the processing module.
2. Lift the lamp plate and loosen the other thumbscrew

[3] to remove the lamp from the plate.
3. Remove the lamp and cable from the lamp housing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the lamp plate and lamp

IMPORTANT: Wear gloves when you perform the

following steps. Residual oil on the glass surface of
the lamp shortens the lamp life. The glass surface
may be cleaned with ethanol, if necessary.
1. Insert the replacement lamp [1] fitting the pins [2] into
the pin holes [3] on the lamp plate [4].
2. Verify the filament [5] is perpendicular to the lamp

plate [4].
3. Tighten the thumbscrew [6] on the lamp plate while

the lamp is fully inserted into the pin holes.
4. Insert the lamp assembly into the housing [7],

pressing it against the leaf spring [8], and down into
the housing. Ensure the lamp assembly is properly
seated into the housing.
5. Verify the lamp cables [9] are through the slot behind
the lamp and are not pinched by the lamp plate.
6. Tighten the thumbscrew [10] to secure the lamp in

place.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Install the terminal cables

1. Raise the screws [1] and insert the cables [2] under
the screws.
2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to tighten the two captive

screws [3] securing the two lamp cables [4] on the
terminal block.
3. Route the cable through the two plastic cable clamps

[5] to ensure the cable does not interfere with the
rotation of the reaction carousel.
4. Replace the transparent cover [6] on the terminal

block.
5. Power on the processing module. The system control

center power MUST be on prior to turning on the
processing module to ensure proper initialization.
6. Check for stray light around lamp housing cover.
Install the processing module cover

1. Replace the lamp housing cover.
2. Close the rear processing module cover.

1. Start up the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-12, to change the status of the
processing module and sample handler from
Stopped to Ready.
IMPORTANT: The lamp must warm up 30 minutes

prior to running assays.
2. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003

Change Lamp, page 9-30, to document the lamp
change in the Maintenance log.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Verification
Run quality control

Replace a cuvette (c 4000)
Replacing a cuvette consists of the following procedures.

• Removal
– Remove cuvette segment, page 9-97
– Clean replacement cuvette, page 9-97
– Remove the individual cuvette, page 9-98
• Replacement
– Install the individual cuvette, page 9-99
– Reinstall the cuvette segment, page 9-100
• Verification
– Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction Carousel
Home / Move, page 9-100
required
Tools/materials • Detergent A
required • Lint-free absorbent towel
• Cotton swabs
• Purified water
• Container large enough to accommodate new
cuvettes
• Gloves
Replacement parts LN 01G46-02 - Cuvette


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Removal
Remove cuvette segment

1. Determine the cuvette number requiring
replacement.
2. Identify the location of the cuvette on the reaction

carousel.
3. Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010

Reaction Carousel Home / Move, page 10-666, to
rotate the carousel so that the cuvette segment [2]
containing the cuvette is at the front of the module.
4. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the screw [1]

located on the top of the cuvette segment until the
segment can be removed from the reaction carousel.
5. Inspect all cuvettes in the segment and replace if

damaged
6. Set the cuvette segment aside on a lint-free

absorbent towel.
Clean replacement cuvette


following steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand
may cause imprecise optical reads.
1. Remove the new cuvette from the shipping container
and place it on a lint-free absorbent towel.
2. Wet a cotton swab with Detergent A and clean the

inside and outside of the new cuvette.
3. Fill a clean, residue-free container [1] with enough

purified water to completely submerge the new
cuvette [2].
4. Rinse the cuvette in the water to remove the

Detergent A and drain any excess water from the
cuvette.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the individual cuvette


1. Remove the slotted screw [1] from the segment.
2. Gently press down on each tab [2] of the cuvette

retaining cover [3] to separate the cover from the
cuvette segment assembly [4].
3. Grasp the cuvette segment with one hand and gently

grasp the desired cuvette [5] with the other hand.
Push up on the cuvette [5].
4. Grasp the cuvette gently and once a portion of the

cuvette is positioned above the top surface of the
segment, pull it straight out.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the individual cuvette

1. Insert the new cuvette [1] into the top of the cuvette
segment.
To ensure optimal performance through the life span
of an ARCHITECT c 4000, the cuvettes should be
replaced after 12 years of use.
2. Gently push the cuvette down while ensuring that it is

guided into the rectangle-shaped depression [2] in
the bottom of the cuvette segment. When the cuvette
is correctly seated, the top of the cuvette is just
below the top surface of the cuvette segment.
3. Slide the cuvette retaining cover onto the cuvette

segment.
4. Verify each tab on the cuvette retaining cover is

inserted into the holes on the top of the cuvette
segment.
5. Position the clips [3] on the back of the cuvette

retaining cover under the back edge of the cuvette
segment [4].

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reinstall the cuvette segment

1. Position the cuvette segment [1] on the reaction
carousel alignment pins [2].
2. Finger-tighten the slotted screws [3] into the

segment.
3. Gently tighten the screws with the slotted

screwdriver.
Verification
Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move

Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction
Carousel Home / Move, page 10-666, to verify the
cuvette segment is installed properly.
Replace a cuvette segment (c 4000)
Replacing a cuvette segment consists of the following procedures.

• Removal
– Remove cuvette segment, page 9-101
– Clean replacement cuvette segment, page 9-102
• Replacement
– Install the cuvette segment, page 9-103
• Verification
– Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction Carousel
Home / Move, page 9-103
required

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Tools/materials • Detergent A
required • Lint-free absorbent towel
• Cotton swabs
• Purified water
• Container large enough to accommodate new
cuvettes
• Gloves
Replacement parts LN 01G46-01 - Cuvette segment


Removal
Remove cuvette segment

1. Determine the cuvette segment requiring
replacement.
2. Identify the location of the cuvette segment [2] on the

reaction carousel.
3. Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010

Reaction Carousel Home / Move, page 10-666, to
rotate the carousel so that the appropriate cuvette
segment is at the front of the module.
4. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the screw [1]

located on the top of the cuvette segment until the
segment can be removed from the reaction carousel.
5. Dispose of the cuvette segment.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Clean replacement cuvette segment


1. Remove the new cuvette segment from the shipping
container and place it on a lint-free absorbent towel.
2. Wet a cotton swab with Detergent A and clean the

inside and outside of all of the cuvettes in the new
cuvette segment.
3. Fill a clean, residue-free container [1] with enough

purified water to completely submerge the new
cuvette segment [2].
4. Rinse the cuvette segment in the water to remove the

Detergent A and drain any excess water from the
cuvettes.
5. Dry the top of the cuvette segment [3], especially the

slotted edges [4], to remove any remaining water.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the cuvette segment

1. Position the cuvette segment [1] on the reaction
carousel alignment pins [2].
To ensure optimal performance through the life span
of an ARCHITECT c 4000, the cuvettes should be
replaced after 12 years of use.
2. Finger-tighten the slotted screws [3] on the segment.
3. Gently tighten the screws with a slotted screwdriver.
Verification
Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move

Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction
Carousel Home / Move, page 10-666, to verify the
cuvette segment is installed properly.
Replace the cuvette dry tip (c 4000)
Replacing the cuvette dry tip consists of the following procedures.

• Removal
– Remove the cuvette washer assembly, page 9-104
– Remove the cuvette dry tip, page 9-105
• Replacement
– Install the cuvette dry tip and cuvette washer assembly,
page 9-105
• Verification

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
– Wash the cuvettes, page 9-106

required
Tools/materials • Metric ruler
required • Gloves
Replacement parts LN 09D51-02 - Cuvette dry tip


Removal
Remove the cuvette washer assembly

1. Open the rear processing module cover.
2. Loosen the black knurled knob [1] to the left of the

cuvette washer until the cuvette washer assembly [2]
can be lifted from the mounting bracket [3].

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the cuvette dry tip


interferes with the proper drying function of the tip.
1. Lift the cuvette washer assembly and rotate it so you
can easily access the white cuvette dry tip.
NOTE: The cuvette washer nozzles are attached to
the black nozzle mounting plate. You do not need to
remove any of the screws securing the wash nozzles
to the mounting plate.
2. Remove the cuvette dry tip [1] by pulling it off the

metal nozzle [2].
3. Discard the used tip.
Replacement
Install the cuvette dry tip and cuvette washer assembly


1. Gently install the new cuvette dry tip, taking care to
orient it properly.
NOTE: The cuvette dry tip and the cuvette are both
rectangular in shape. Install the dry tip so it fits into
the cuvette.
2. Position the bottom of the cuvette dry tip 61 ± 0.5 mm

from the underside of the cuvette washer assembly
[1].
3. Position the cuvette washer assembly [2] on the

alignment pins [3], and then tighten the black knurled
knob [4].

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

1. Initiate Fuses/Motors diagnostic procedure 5142
Wash Station Up/Down, page 10-664 to home the
cuvette washer assembly and reaction carousel.
2. Verify the rectangular orientation and alignment of

the cuvette dry tip with the cuvette.
NOTE: Wear gloves if adjustment to the cuvette dry
tip is required. Residual oil from an ungloved hand
3. Select L1 (down) on the processing module keypad

or the Diagnostic perform window to move the
washer assembly down.
4. Verify the alignment of the cuvette dry tip is correct

and that it moves smoothly into the cuvettes.
5. Select L1 (up) to move the washer assembly up.
6. Select L4 (exit) to end the procedure.
7. Select Done on the Diagnostic perform window to

complete the procedure.
Verification
Wash the cuvettes

Wash Cuvettes, page 9-41.
Run quality control

Replace the mixer (c 4000)
Replacing the mixer consists of the following procedures.

• Removal
– Remove the mixer, page 9-107
• Replacement
– Install the mixer, page 9-108

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Verification
– Perform reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure 3126 Mixer
Vibration Test, page 9-108
required
Tools/materials None
required
Replacement parts LN 09D59-02 - Mixer


Removal
Remove the mixer

1. Open the rear processing module cover.
2. Locate the appropriate mixer.
3. Unplug the cable [1] by pinching the white connector

[2].
4. Loosen the black thumbscrew [3] on the top of the

mixer assembly.
5. Remove the mixer [4].

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the mixer

1. Orient the new mixer assembly [1] so that the flat
side faces away from the mixer arm.
2. Align the positioning pins [2] on the top of the mixer

with the holes on the mixer arm. Tighten the black
thumbscrew [3] until the top of the mixer is flush with
the mixer arm.
3. Open the cable clip [4] from the bottom and route the
cable through the clip.
4. Attach the cable connector to the white connector [5]

below the mixer arm.
NOTE: This connector is keyed and only goes in one
way.
Verification
Perform reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure 3126 Mixer Vibration Test

Perform reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure
3126 Mixer Vibration Test, page 10-660, to verify mixer
function.
Run quality control

Replace the ICT module or probe (c 4000)
Replacing the ICT module or probe consists of the following

procedures:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Removal
– Remove the covers, page 9-110
– Remove the ICT module and probe, page 9-111
• Replacement
– Install the ICT module and probe, page 9-112
– Insert the ICT module and probe into the ICT holder, page 9-113
• Verification
– Calibrate ICT assays, page 9-114
required
Tools/materials NA
required
Replacement parts • LN 09D63-03 - ICT probe
• LN 09D28-03 - ICT module
• LN 09F93-02 - ICT o-ring (optional)



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Removal
Remove the covers

1. Lift the rear cover on the processing module to
access the ICT module and probe.
2. Locate the ICT unit.
3. Loosen the two captive thumbscrews [1] that secure

the black plate [2] in place.
4. Remove the black plate [2].

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the ICT module and probe

1. Loosen the thumbscrew [1] on the side of the ICT
holder [2] until the ICT module [3] can be lifted up.
2. Disconnect the black electrical connector [4] from the

side of the module by pulling it straight out.
3. Verify the connector is completely free from the

module.
4. Lift the ICT module [3] until the connectors on the

side of the ICT module clear the ICT holder [2].
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the probe, do not

lift the ICT module and probe all the way out of the
ICT holder.
5. Gently unscrew the ICT module [3], rotating it

clockwise, to free it from the top connector [5].
6. Lift the ICT module and probe straight up out of the

ICT holder.
7. Unscrew the ICT probe holder [6] from the ICT

module.
8. Inspect the ports of the ICT module. The black

o-rings [7] MUST be present.
IMPORTANT: Running the system without the black

o-rings could affect patient results.
9. Discard the ICT module if replacing; otherwise, set it

aside for use with the new ICT probe.
10.Remove the ICT probe [8] from the probe holder.
11.Discard the probe if replacing; otherwise set it aside

for use with the new ICT module.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the ICT module and probe

1. Remove the ICT module from the box, if replacing the ICT
module.
2. Record the expiration date found on the ICT module box prior
to discarding the box.
It is recommended that you record and track this date to
ensure you do not use the module on the c 4000 System
beyond this date.
Once you install the ICT module on the processing module, it
is warranted for 15,000 samples or two months, whichever
occurs first.
3. Disconnect and discard the plastic tubing attached to both

ends of the ICT module.
4. Inspect the ports on the ICT module. The black o-rings [1]
MUST be present.
IMPORTANT: Running the system without the black o-rings

could affect patient results.
5. Align the ICT module so that the gap [2] between the side
connectors is on top and the label [3] is right-side up.
6. Place the ICT probe [4] into the probe holder [5].
7. Attach the probe holder and probe to the bottom of the ICT
module (finger-tighten only).
IMPORTANT: The o-rings may twist and obstruct the flow

through the ICT module if this connection is overtightened.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Insert the ICT module and probe into the ICT holder
1. Insert the ICT module [1] with the probe [2] into the ICT
holder [3] until the connectors on the side of the ICT module
are just above the top of the ICT holder [3].
2. Rotate the ICT module [1] counterclockwise (finger-tighten

only) to reattach the ICT module to the top port [4] and to the
connector [5].
3. Allow the ICT module [1] to seat fully down into the ICT
holder [3] so that the connectors are aligned with the slot [6]
in the ICT holder [3].
4. Gently reconnect the black electrical connector [7] to the ICT

module connectors. Ensure the ICT module is completely
plugged into the connector.
5. Hold down the ICT module while tightening the side

thumbscrew [8] until secure. Do not overtighten. The ICT
module could be damaged.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Flush ICT Module, page 9-43.
2. Inspect the tubing from the ICT module for bubbles.
3. Inspect the ICT probe to ensure it does not drip.

If you observe bubbles or drips, see Processing
module observed problems (c System),
page 10-573.
4. Reattach the black plate [1] by securing it with the

two thumbscrews [2] on the top.
Verification
Calibrate ICT assays

1. Calibrate ICT assays.
2. Run quality control samples to verify calibration.
ARCHITECT c 4000 supply and pump components replacement
You may need to replace certain supply and pump components due to
normal wear from daily operations.
The following procedures provide step-by-step instructions on
replacing these components:
• Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 4000), page 9-116
• Replace check valves (c 4000), page 9-119
• Replace the ICT reference solution filter (c 4000), page 9-124
• Replace the wash solution filter (c 4000), page 9-126

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 4000),
page 9-129
4000), page 9-138
• Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 4000), page 9-145
See ARCHITECT c 4000 supply and pump center components, page 9-115,
for component locations when performing replacement procedures.
ARCHITECT c 4000 supply and pump center components
The following illustration shows the locations of the supply and pump
center components. Use this illustration when performing
maintenance and component replacement procedures.
Figure 9.16: ARCHITECTc 4000 supply and pump center (front)
Legend:
1. ICT reference pump
2. Wash solution pump
3. Bulk solutions
4. Sample, reagent 1 and reagent 2 syringe drives

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
5. ICT aspiration pump

6. Cuvette wash pump
7. Probe wash pump
Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 4000)
Replacing the 1 mL syringes on the ICT reference pump, ICT

aspiration pump, and wash solution pump consists of the following
procedures.
• Removal
– Locate the 1 mL syringe to be replaced, page 9-117
– Remove the plunger shield and the 1 mL syringe, page 9-117
– Detach and replace the 1 mL syringe, page 9-118
• Replacement
– Reinstall the 1 mL syringe and plunger shield, page 9-118
• Verification
NOTE: The same procedure is used to replace the 1 mL syringes in all

three pumps.
required
Tools/materials Absorbent towels
required
Replacement parts LN 09D41-02 - 1 mL syringe
NOTE: The same 1 mL syringe is used for the ICT

reference pump, the ICT aspiration pump, and the
wash solution pump.



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Removal
Locate the 1 mL syringe to be replaced

1. Open the supply center door. Open the pump center
door.
2. Locate the 1 mL syringe to be replaced:

– ICT reference pump [1]
– Wash solution pump [2]
– ICT aspiration pump [3]
Remove the plunger shield and the 1 mL syringe

1. Remove the clear plunger shield [1] by removing the
two black knobs [2].
2. Pull the 1 mL syringe [3] forward to remove it from

the syringe holder.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Detach and replace the 1 mL syringe

1. Place an absorbent towel under the pump area to
absorb any liquid.
2. Unscrew the syringe assembly [1] from the check

valve [2].
3. Screw the new syringe assembly [1] onto the check

valve [2].
NOTE: Be sure to replace the syringe and plunger
(components of the syringe assembly) as a pair.
Replacement
Reinstall the 1 mL syringe and plunger shield

1. Reinstall the syringe [1].
2. Verify the plunger flange [2] is below the U-shaped

holder and the bottom of the syringe barrel is in the
groove at the bottom of the syringe holder [3].
3. Reinstall the clear plunger shield [4] and secure it

with the black knobs [5].
4. Remove the absorbent towel from the pump area.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

1. Perform the following as-needed maintenance
procedures to remove any air that may be present:
– 6063 Flush ICT Module, page 9-43, for the ICT
reference and ICT aspiration pumps
– 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-40, for the
wash solution pump
2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush.

procedure.
Verification
Run quality control

Replace check valves (c 4000)
Replacing the check valves on the ICT reference pump, ICT aspiration
pump, or wash solution pump consists of the following procedures.
• Removal
– Locate the check valve to be replaced, page 9-120
– Remove the plunger shield and the 1 mL syringe, page 9-121
– Remove the check valve tubing, page 9-121
• Replacement
– Replace the check valve, page 9-122
– Reinstall the check valve tubing, page 9-122
• Verification
required

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

required
Replacement parts • LN 09D35-02 - ICT Reference or ICT Aspiration
Check Valve
• LN 09D34-02 - Wash Solution Check Valve
NOTE: The ICT reference and aspiration pumps use

the same list number. The wash solution pump uses
a different list number. Ensure the correct part is
used.


Removal
Locate the check valve to be replaced

1. Open the supply center and pump center doors.
2. Locate the check valve to be replaced:

– ICT reference pump [1]
– Wash solution pump [2]
– ICT aspiration pump [3]

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


the syringe holder.
Remove the check valve tubing

1. Place absorbent towels under the pump area to
absorb any liquid.
2. Disconnect the top [1] and side [2] tubing from the
check valve [3].

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Replace the check valve

1. Unscrew the syringe body [1] from the check valve
[2].
2. Install the new check valve onto the syringe, and

finger-tighten.
Reinstall the check valve tubing

Reattach the top [1] and side [2] tubing to the check
valve [3].

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

1. Reinstall the 1 mL syringe [1].
2. Verify the syringe plunger flange [2] is below the

U-shaped holder and the bottom of the syringe barrel
is in the groove at the bottom of the syringe holder
[3].
3. Reinstall the clear plunger shield [4] and tighten the

black knobs [5] finger-tight.

wash solution pump

procedure.

Change ICT Asp Check Valve, page 9-33, to
document the ICT aspiration check valve
replacement in the Maintenance log.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Verification
Run quality control

Replace the ICT reference solution filter (c 4000)
Replacing the ICT reference solution filter consists of the following

procedures:
• Removal
– Remove the ICT reference solution tubing, page 9-125
– Remove the ICT reference solution filter, page 9-125
• Replacement
– Replace the ICT reference solution filter and tubing, page 9-126
• Verification
– Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2155, page 9-126
required
required
Replacement parts LN 09D43-02 - Reference/wash solution line filter

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Removal
Remove the ICT reference solution tubing

The ICT reference solution filter is located at the end
of the tubing in the ICT reference solution bottle [1].
2. Remove the tubing from the ICT reference solution

bottle and set it aside on an absorbent towel.
Remove the ICT reference solution filter

1. Pull the filter [1] from the connector that is attached
to the end of the ICT reference solution tubing [2].
2. Discard the filter into the appropriate waste

receptacle.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Replace the ICT reference solution filter and tubing

1. Insert the new ICT reference filter [1] in the tubing
connector [2].
2. Insert the tubing in the ICT reference solution bottle,

and ensure the tubing reaches the bottom of the
bottle.
Verification

Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-40.
2. Observe all connections to ensure there are no

leaks.
procedure.
Run quality control

Run quality control samples to verify performance prior
to reporting patient results.
Replace the wash solution filter (c 4000)
Replacing the wash solution filter consists of the following procedures:

• Removal
– Remove the tubing, page 9-127
– Remove the wash solution filter, page 9-128

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Replacement
– Replace wash solution filter and tubing, page 9-128
• Verification
required
required
Replacement parts LN 09D43-02 - Reference/wash solution filter

Removal
Remove the tubing

Wash solution filters are located at the end of the
tubing in the alkaline [1] and acid [2] wash solution
bottles.
2. Remove the tubing from the wash solution bottle and

set it aside on an absorbent towel.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the wash solution filter

1. Pull the filter [1] from the connector that is attached
to the end of the wash solution tubing [2].
2. Discard the filter in the appropriate waste receptacle.
Replacement
Replace wash solution filter and tubing

1. Insert the new filter [1] in the tubing connector [2].
2. Insert the tubing in the appropriate wash solution

bottle, and ensure the tubing reaches the bottom of
the bottle.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Verification

Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-40.
2. Observe all connections to ensure there are no

leaks.
procedure.
Run quality control

Run quality control samples to verify performance prior
to reporting patient results.
Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c

4000)
Replacing the wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2
consists of the following procedures.
• Removal
– Remove the clear outer plunger shield, page 9-131
– Disconnect the wash solution syringe block tubing, page 9-132
– Remove the clear inner plunger shield and syringe block,
page 9-133
– Remove the syringe plunger, page 9-133
– Remove the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, page 9-134
• Replacement
– Install the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, page 9-135
– Install the syringe plunger, page 9-135
– Install the syringe block and attach the clear inner plunger shield,
page 9-136
– Connect the wash solution syringe block tubing, page 9-136
– Install the clear outer plunger shield, page 9-137
• Verification

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

required
required • Slotted screwdriver
• 10 mm wrench
• Cotton swabs
• Absorbent towel
Replacement parts • LN 09D52-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe o-ring
• LN 09D37-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe seal tip
#1
#2



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Removal
Remove the clear outer plunger shield

1. Open the supply and pump center door.
2. Locate the wash solution pump.
3. Loosen and remove the black knobs [1] securing the

clear outer plunger shield [2].
4. Remove the shield.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Disconnect the wash solution syringe block tubing

1. Place an absorbent towel under the pump area to
absorb any liquid.
2. Slide the 1 mL syringes [1] out of their drive block; do

not disconnect them.
3. Unscrew the left-top grey knurled connection [2] from

the top of the syringe block.
NOTE: The tubing labeled 2, coming from the
instrument, connects to the left-top connection [2].
The tubing labeled 3, coming from the instrument,
connects to the right-top connection [3]. Do not
interchange the tubing.
4. Unscrew the right-top grey knurled connection [3].
5. Unscrew the grey knurled connections [4] from the

front of the syringe block [5].
NOTE: The tubing coming from the 1 mL syringe on
the left connects to the left-front connection. The
tubing coming from the 1 mL syringe on the right
connects to the right-front connection. Do not
interchange the tubing.
6. Ensure the black seals remain in the syringe block

when the grey knurled connections are
disconnected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the clear inner plunger shield and syringe block

1. Remove the clear inner plunger shield [1] by
removing the two Phillips screws [2] securing the
shield.
2. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the slotted

screw [3] securing the clear syringe block [4] in
place. The screw is captive and cannot be
completely removed.
3. Pull the syringe block forward to allow the plungers to

clear the syringe drive.
4. Lift the syringe block up to remove it from the

module.
5. Identify the syringe needing the new o-ring and seal

tips.
Remove the syringe plunger

1. Use the 10 mm wrench to loosen the nut [1] securing
the syringe plunger [2] on the bottom of the syringe
block [3].
2. Turn the nut by hand, once loosened, until the

syringe plunger can be removed from the syringe
block.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2

The plunger assembly includes the following parts:
• O-ring [1]
IMPORTANT: The o-ring may have remained in the

syringe block when removing the plunger assembly.
• Seal tip 2 [2]
• Spacer [3]
• Seal tip 1 [4]
• Spring [5]
• Nut [6]
• Plunger [7]
• Plunger flange [8]
1. Remove the following. Set aside or discard (except
for spacer) if being replaced:
– O-ring [1]
– Seal tip 2 [2]
– Spacer [3] - set aside, do not discard
– Seal tip 1 [4]
NOTE: Do not remove the spring.
2. Dry the interior of the syringe barrel with a cotton

swab and dry the plunger completely with an
absorbent towel if liquid is present.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2

1. Install seal tip 1 [1] onto the plunger so that it sits
above the spring, with the open side away from the
spring.
2. Install the spacer [2] so that it fits into the open side
of seal tip 1.
3. Install the seal tip 2 [3] on top of the spacer with the
open side toward the spacer.
4. Install the o-ring [4] so that it fits into the groove of

the seal tip 2. Do not push the o-ring out of
alignment. The o-ring must sit flat against the inside
of the syringe block.
5. Press lightly to push all the components together.
Install the syringe plunger

1. Install the plunger assembly into the syringe block
[1].
2. Tighten the nut [2] holding the plunger assembly into

the syringe block until finger-tight.
NOTE: The nut must be flush with the plunger
assembly. If the nut binds when tightening, do not
apply excessive force. Back the nut out a turn, and
then, while pushing in to apply pressure against the
spring, continue to tighten the nut.
3. Use the 10 mm wrench to further tighten the nut [2]

securing the plunger [3]. Do not overtighten.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Install the syringe block and attach the clear inner plunger shield
1. Ensure a black seal remains in each of the tubing
ports in the syringe block.
2. Hold the syringe block [1] so that the slotted screw

[2] faces you.
3. Align the syringe block to the pins [3] on the syringe

holder, verifying that both plunger flanges [4] are
below the U-shaped holders.
4. Hold the syringe block against the alignment pins

and tighten the screw by hand until finger-tight.
Secure with a slotted screwdriver.
5. Attach the clear inner plunger shield [5] and tighten

the Phillips screws [6].
Connect the wash solution syringe block tubing

1. Connect the grey knurled connection labeled 2 from
the 1 mL syringe to the left-front port [1].
2. Connect the grey knurled connection labeled 2

coming from the instrument to the left-top port [2].

the syringe to the right-front port [3].

the instrument to the right-top port [4].
5. Verify the 1 mL syringe tubing connections did not

loosen during the removal and replacement
procedure.
6. Reinstall the 1 mL syringes [5] into the syringe

holder.
7. Ensure the plunger flange is below the U-shaped

holder and that the bottom of the syringe barrel is in
the groove at the bottom of the syringe holder.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Install the clear outer plunger shield

1. Attach the clear outer plunger shield [1] and tighten
the black knobs [2] until finger-tight.

Flush Water Lines, page 9-39, to remove any air that
may be present.

procedure.

Wash Syringe Maintenance, page 9-31, to document
wash solution o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2
replacement in the Maintenance log.
Verification
Run quality control


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2

(c 4000)
Replacing the sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2
consists of the following procedures.
• Removal
– Locate the syringe and remove the plunger shield, page 9-140
– Remove the syringe bracket, page 9-140
– Remove the syringe block, page 9-141
– Remove the syringe plunger, page 9-141
– Remove the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, page 9-142
• Replacement
– Install the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, page 9-143
– Install the syringe plunger, page 9-143
– Install the syringe block, page 9-144
– Install the syringe bracket and plunger shield, page 9-144
• Verification
required

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

required • Slotted screwdriver
• 10 mm wrench
• Cotton swabs
• Absorbent towel
Replacement parts • LN 09D52-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe o-ring
#1
#2
• LN 09D53-02 - Reagent syringe o-ring
• LN 09D39-02 - Reagent syringe seal tip #1
• LN 09D40-02 - Reagent syringe seal tip #2
NOTE: The o-rings and seal tips 1 and 2 for the

sample and reagent syringes are different sizes. Be
sure to install the correct part in the appropriate
syringe.



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Removal
Locate the syringe and remove the plunger shield

2. Locate the appropriate syringe:

– Sample syringe [1]
– R1 syringe [2]
– R2 syringe [3]
3. Remove the two Phillips screws [4] securing the

shield.
4. Remove the shield. [5]
Remove the syringe bracket

Remove the syringe bracket holding the syringe plunger
to the drive block by removing the two Phillips screws
[1] on the syringe bracket [2].
NOTE: Notice that these screws are shorter than the

screws from the clear plunger shield. Do not
interchange the two sets of screws.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the syringe block

1. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the slotted
screw [1] securing the syringe block [2] in place. The
screw is captive and cannot be completely removed.
2. Place an absorbent towel under the syringe drive to

absorb any liquid.
3. Disconnect the tubing at the top [3] and side [4] of

the syringe block by unscrewing the knurled
connections.
4. Ensure the black seal remains in the syringe block

once the tubing is disconnected.
Remove the syringe plunger

1. Use the 10 mm wrench to loosen the nut [1] securing
the syringe plunger [2] on the bottom of the syringe
block [3].
2. Turn the nut by hand, once loosened, until the

syringe plunger can be removed from the syringe
block.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2

The plunger assembly includes the following parts:
• O-ring [1]
NOTE: The o-ring may have remained in the syringe
block when removing the plunger assembly.
• Seal tip 2 [2]
• Spacer [3]
• Seal tip 1 [4]
• Spring [5]
• Nut [6]
• Plunger [7]
• Plunger flange [8]
1. Remove the following. Set aside or discard (except
for spacer) if being replaced:
– O-ring [1]
– Seal tip 2 [2]
– Spacer [3] - set aside, do not discard
– Seal tip 1 [4]
NOTE: Do not remove the spring.
2. Dry the interior of the syringe barrel with a cotton

swab and dry the plunger completely with an
absorbent towel if liquid is present.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2

1. Install seal tip 1 [1] onto the plunger so that it sits
above the spring, with the open side away from the
spring.
2. Install the spacer [2] so that it fits into the open side
of seal tip 1.
3. Install seal tip 2 [3] on top of the spacer, with the

open side toward the spacer.
4. Install the o-ring [4] so that it fits into the groove of

seal tip 2. Do not push the o-ring out of alignment.
The o-ring must sit flat against the inside of the
syringe block.
5. Press lightly to push all the components together.
Install the syringe plunger

1. Install the plunger assembly into the syringe block
[1].
2. Tighten the nut [2] holding the plunger assembly into

the syringe block until finger-tight.
NOTE: The nut must be flush with the plunger
assembly. If the nut binds when tightening, do not
apply excessive force. Back the nut out a turn, and
then, while pushing in to apply pressure against the
spring, continue to tighten the nut.
3. Use the 10 mm wrench to further tighten the nut [2]

securing the plunger [3].

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Install the syringe block

1. Hold the syringe block [1] so that the slotted screw
[2] faces you.
2. Ensure the black seals remain in place in each port.

Reconnect the tubing coming from the pipettor to the
top [3] of the syringe block and the tubing from the
syringe valve to the side [4] by screwing the knurled
connections.
3. Align the syringe block to the pins [5] on the syringe

holder, verifying that the plunger flange is above the
drive block [6]. Move any tubing out of the way.
4. Hold the syringe block against the alignment pins

and tighten the screw [2] by hand until finger-tight.
Secure the screw with a slotted screwdriver.
Install the syringe bracket and plunger shield

1. Attach the syringe bracket [1] to connect the drive
block and syringe plunger.
2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to install the screws [2].

NOTE: Verify the shorter screws are used in the
bracket. Do not use the longer screws for the plunger
shield.
3. Attach the clear plunger shield [3] by tightening the

two (2) Phillips screws [4].
4. Remove the absorbent towel from the syringe drive.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

may be present.

If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation
procedure.

Sample Syringe Maintenance, page 9-30 or 6303
Reagent Syringe Maintenance, page 9-32 to
document sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal
tips in the Maintenance log.
NOTE: Only perform this maintenance procedure if
you replaced the o-ring and seal tips in both the R1
and R2 syringes.
Verification
Run quality control

Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 4000)
Replacing the pump poppet valve set on the cuvette wash pump and
the probe wash pump consists of the following procedures.
• Removal
– Locate the pump poppet valve and clamp the tubing, page 9-147
– Remove the pump poppet valve, page 9-147
• Replacement
– Replace the pump poppet valve, page 9-148
• Verification
Verification occurs during preparation for operation. No further
verification is required.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: The same procedure is used to replace the pump poppet valve
set in both pumps.
required
Tools/materials • Clamp or large hemostats
required • Absorbent towels
• Purified water
Replacement parts LN 09D36-02 - Pump poppet valve set
NOTE: The same pump poppet valve set is used for

both pumps.



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Removal
Locate the pump poppet valve and clamp the tubing

1. Open the supply center and pump center doors.
2. Locate the appropriate pump:

– Cuvette wash pump [1]
– Probe wash pump [2]
3. Clamp the flexible inlet tubing [4] of the pump

containing the poppet valve.
Remove the pump poppet valve

1. Place absorbent towels in the pump area to absorb
any liquid.
2. Unscrew the top or side [1] elbow fitting securing the

tubing to the pump connection.
NOTE: It is recommended that the top and side
poppet valves be replaced at the same time.
3. Remove the poppet valve [3] and o-ring [4] from the
connection [2]. To remove the top poppet valve, it
may be necessary to remove the side connector and
push the top poppet valve up from the bottom.
4. Discard the valve and o-ring.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Replace the pump poppet valve

1. Rinse the new poppet valve and o-ring with purified
water.
2. Install the poppet valve [3] and o-ring [4] onto the
connection [2] as illustrated.
3. Screw the top or side [1] elbow fitting to the

connection [2].
4. Finger-tighten the fitting at the pump connection.
5. Release the clamp on the flexible tubing.
6. Remove the absorbent towels from the pump area.

may be present.

procedure.
Verification

Verification occurs during preparation for operation. No
further Verification is required.
i 1000SR component replacement

Component replacement for i 1000SR includes:
• ARCHITECT i 1000SR internal component cover replacement,
page 9-149
• i 1000SR processing center component replacement, page 9-150
• i 1000SR supply and waste center component replacement, page 9-169

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
ARCHITECT i 1000SR internal component cover replacement
The internal cover protects the internal components of the processing

center. You remove the cover to access the internal components.
See the ARCHITECT i 1000SR internal component cover, page 9-149 for
instructions.
ARCHITECT i 1000SR internal component cover
The internal component cover is located in the following area.
Figure 9.17: Internal component cover
To remove the cover:

1. Raise the lower chute of the RV loader. [1]
NOTE: To move the pipettor probe away from the wash cup,
perform modules diagnostic procedure, 1165 Pipettor Move,
page 10-671.
2. Press the tab located to the right of the wash cup area. [2]
3. Remove the internal cover.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 9.18: Internal component cover
To replace the cover:

1. Raise the lower chute of the RV loader. [1]
2. Insert the tabs on the back of the cover into rear cover. [2].
3. Press the tab into the opening located to the right of the wash
cup area. [3]
4. Lower the chute of the RV loader.
i 1000SR processing center component replacement
You may need to replace certain processing center components due to

normal wear from daily operations. The following procedures provide
step-by-step instructions on replacing these components:
• Replace pipettor probe (i 1000SR), page 9-150
• Replace pipettor probe tubing (i 1000SR), page 9-154
• Replace the wash zone probe (i 1000SR), page 9-157
• Replace the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor (i 1000SR),
page 9-160
• Remove/replace the RV loader assembly (i 1000SR), page 9-162
• Replace the wash cup baffle (i 1000SR), page 9-165
Replace pipettor probe (i 1000SR)
Replacing the pipettor probe consists of the following procedures:

• Removal

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

– Remove the probe, page 9-152
• Replacement
– Install the probe, page 9-153
• Verification
Prerequisite The processing module must be in the Warming or
Ready status.
required
Tools/materials • Absorbent tissue
required • #2 Phillips screwdriver (optional)
Replacement parts LN 08C94-42 - Probe


sharps, page 8-20.
Removal
Prepare for removal

1. Lift the processing center cover to access the probe.
2. Locate the pipettor (P) on the processing center map

inside the processing center cover.
3. Verify the probe is over the wash cup.

To move the pipettor probe over the wash cup,
perform modules diagnostic procedure 1165 Pipettor
Move, page 10-671.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the probe

1. Place an absorbent tissue under the probe tubing
connection.
2. Loosen the screw (captive) on top of the probe clamp

until you feel resistance and move the probe clamp
backward to free the probe. [1]
NOTE: You can use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to
loosen the screw. Loosening the screw beyond the
point of resistance can cause the clip to come apart.
3. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe and remove the

probe tubing from the probe. [2]
4. Lift the probe and remove it from the boom arm. [3]

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the probe

1. Slide the probe into the boom arm. [1]
2. Connect the probe tubing to the probe and finger

tighten the probe fitting. [2]
3. Swing the probe clamp forward and tighten the screw

(captive) on top of the probe clamp. [3]
NOTE: You can use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to
tighten the screw. Do not over tighten as stripping
may result.

Flush Fluids, page 9-61 to remove any air that may
be present.

procedure.
3. Remove the absorbent tissue.
4. Close the processing center cover.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Verification

Perform the following as-needed maintenance
procedure:
• 1110 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-60
Replace pipettor probe tubing (i 1000SR)
Replacing the pipettor probe tubing consists of the following

procedures:
• Removal
– Remove the probe tubing, page 9-155
• Replacement
– Install the probe tubing, page 9-156
• Verification
Verification occurs during preparation for operation. No further
verification is required.
Prerequisite The processing module must be in the Stopped status.
required
Tools/materials Absorbent tissue
required
Replacement parts LN 06L04-01 - Tubing, Probe


sharps, page 8-20.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Removal
Prepare for removal

1. Lift the processing center cover to access the
pipettor probe.
2. Locate the pipettor (P) on the processing center map

inside the processing center cover.
3. Locate the probe tubing to be replaced on the

pipettor.
4. Verify the probe is over the wash cup.

To move the pipettor probe over the wash cup,
perform modules diagnostic procedure 1165 Pipettor
Move, page 10-671.
Remove the probe tubing

1. Place an absorbent tissue under the probe tubing
connection [1].
2. Remove the non-captive screws holding the tubing

routing clips and remove the clips [2].
NOTE: Use care when removing the non-captive
screws as they are easily dropped into the system.
3. Place an absorbent tissue near the tubing

connection at the pressure monitor [3].
4. Disconnect the tubing connection at the pressure

monitor and drain any fluid from the probe tubing
onto the absorbent tissue [3].
5. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe and remove the

probe tubing from the probe [1].
6. Remove the probe tubing from the module.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the probe tubing

1. Support the boom arm when replacing the tubing to
prevent it from moving.
2. Orient the probe tubing so that the green band is

located near the probe.
3. Connect the probe tubing to the pressure monitor [1].
4. Connect the opposite end of the probe tubing to the

probe and finger-tighten the probe metal fitting [2].
5. Place the tubing into the black plastic routing clip and
use the screw to attach the clip to the pipettor [3].
6. Place the tubing into the metal routing clip. Press on

the pressure monitor cable to position it close to the
pipettor frame and use the screw to attach the clip to
the pipettor [4].

handler, page 5-12.
2. Perform as needed maintenance procedure 2137

be present.

procedure.
4. Remove the absorbent tissue.
5. Close the processing center cover.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Verification
Perform probe tubing verification

further verification is required.
Replace the wash zone probe (i 1000SR)
Replacing the wash zone probe consists of the following procedures:

• Removal
– Remove the wash zone probe, page 9-158
• Replacement
– Install the wash zone probe, page 9-159
• Verification
– Perform fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure 2052 WZ Aspiration
Test, page 9-159
– Perform calibration curve verification, page 9-159
Ready status.
Estimated time 40 minutes (includes running quality control samples)
required
required
Replacement parts LN 08C94-35 - Probe, WZ


sharps, page 8-20.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Removal
Prepare for removal

1. Lift the processing center cover to access the wash
zone probe.
2. Locate the wash zone (WZ) on the processing center

map inside the processing center cover.
3. Locate the wash zone probe that needs to be

replaced on the wash zone. [1]
4. Verify the pipettor probe is away from the wash cup

toward the rear of the process path.
To move the pipettor probe away from the wash cup,
perform modules diagnostic procedure,1165 Pipettor
Move, page 10-671.
Remove the wash zone probe

1. Loosen the thumb screw(s) holding the wash zone
clip(s), which is located at the top side of the wash
zone motor assembly. [1]
2. Grasp the tab(s) on the wash zone clip(s), which is

located at the top side of the wash zone motor
assembly. Rotate the clip(s) counterclockwise, so the
notch in the clip(s) moves away from the wash zone
probe. [2]
3. Remove the wash zone tubing from the tubing guide,

and then lift the probe and the attached tubing out of
the wash zone motor assembly. [3]
4. Remove the tubing from the probe by gently pulling

the tubing and sliding it from the probe.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the wash zone probe

1. Push the wash zone tubing onto the wash zone
probe until it passes the ridge on the probe. [1]
NOTE: The tubing should be halfway between the
bend in the probe and the ridge.
2. Slide the probe in the wash zone motor assembly

until it is fully seated. Pull up on the wash zone motor
to raise it if the probes do not fit into the openings on
the wash zone motor assembly. [2]
3. Place the tubing in the tubing guide. [3]
4. Grasp the tab(s) on the clip(s) and rotate the clip(s)

clockwise toward the probes. [4]
NOTE: If the clips do not rotate to their locked
position, ensure that the probes are completely
seated in the wash zone motor assembly.
5. Tighten the thumb screw(s) holding the wash zone

clip(s). [5]

Close the processing center cover.
Verification
Perform fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure 2052 WZ Aspiration Test

Perform fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure 2052 WZ
Aspiration Test, page 10-672.
Perform calibration curve verification

Run all levels of controls to validate the active
calibration curves prior to reporting the patient results.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replace the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor (i

1000SR)
Replacing the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor consists of

the following procedures:
• Removal
– Remove the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly,
page 9-161
• Replacement
– Install the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly,
page 9-162
• Verification
– Perform fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure 2052 WZ Aspiration
Test, page 9-162
– Perform calibration curve verification, page 9-162
Ready status.
required
required
Replacement parts LN 08C94-87 - Tubing/Sensor, Temp, WZ


sharps, page 8-20.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Removal
Prepare for removal

1. Lift the processing center cover to access the tubing.
2. Locate the wash zone (WZ) on the processing center

3. Locate the wash zone temperature tubing/sensor to

be replaced on the wash zone (WZ).

Move, page 10-671.
Remove the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly

1. Remove the wash zone tubing from the tubing guide. See Remove/replace the RV loader assembly (i
[1] 1000SR),
page 9-162.
2. Remove the tubing from the wash zone probe by
gently pulling the tubing and sliding it from the probe.
[2]
3. Remove the RV loader assembly (RVL) for easier

access to the upper waste manifold (optional).
NOTE: See the processing center map on the i
1000SR processing module for RV loader location
(RVL).
4. Disconnect the temperature sensor. [3]
5. Remove the tubing from the tubing guide on top of

the upper waste manifold (UWM). [4]
1000SR processing module for upper waste manifold
location (UWM).
6. Remove the tubing from the barb fitting on the left

side of the upper waste manifold. [5]

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly

1. Connect the tubing to the barb fitting on the upper See Remove/replace the RV loader assembly (i
waste manifold (UWM). [1] 1000SR),
page 9-162.
2. Place the tubing in the tubing guide on top of the
upper waste manifold. [2]
3. Connect the temperature sensor. [3]
4. Replace the RV loader assembly, if removed.
5. Push the wash zone tubing onto the wash zone

probe until it passes the ridge on the probe. [4]
NOTE: The tubing should be halfway between the
bend in the probe and the ridge.
6. Place the tubing in the tubing guide. [5]

Verification
Perform fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure 2052 WZ Aspiration Test

Perform fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure 2052 WZ
Aspiration Test, page 10-672.
Perform calibration curve verification

Run all levels of controls to validate the active
calibration curves prior to reporting results.
Remove/replace the RV loader assembly (i 1000SR)
Perform this procedure to remove the RV loader assembly to allow

easier access to internal components. Removing and replacing the RV
loader assembly consists of the following procedures.
• Removal

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

– Remove the RV loader assembly, page 9-164
• Replacement
– Install the RV loader assembly, page 9-164
• Verification
– Perform modules diagnostic procedure, 4110 Module
Initialization, page 9-165
Ready status.
required
required
Removal
Prepare for removal

1. Lift the processing center cover to access the RV
loader assembly (RVL).
2. Locate the RV loader (RVL).

1000SR processing module for RV loader location
(RVL).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the RV loader assembly

1. Loosen the green captive screw at the base of the
RV loader assembly. [1]
2. Lift the RV loader lower chute and remove the RV

loader assembly.
3. Place the RV loader inside the left back corner of the

processing center cover. [2]
Replacement
Install the RV loader assembly

1. Remove the RV loader assembly from the left back
corner of the processing center cover. [1]
2. Place the RV loader on the mounting base and

tighten the captive screw. [2]
3. Lower the RV loader chute into the load position.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Verification
Perform modules diagnostic procedure, 4110 Module Initialization

Perform modules diagnostic procedure 4110 Module
Initialization, page 10-674.
Replace the wash cup baffle (i 1000SR)
Replacing the wash cup baffle consists of the following procedures.

• Removal
– Remove the wash cup baffle, page 9-167
• Replacement
– Replace the wash cup baffle, page 9-168
• Verification
– Perform modules diagnostic procedure, 4110 Module
Initialization, page 9-169
Ready status.
required
required
Replacement parts LN 01P41-01 - Wash cup baffle



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Removal
Prepare for removal

1. Lift the processing center cover to access the wash
cup baffle.
2. Locate the wash cup (PW) on the processing center


Move, page 10-671.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the wash cup baffle

Remove the wash cup baffle.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Replace the wash cup baffle

Install the wash cup baffle. Ensure the baffle is fully
seated.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Verification
Perform modules diagnostic procedure, 4110 Module Initialization

Perform modules diagnostic procedure 4110 Module
Initialization, page 10-674.
i 1000SR supply and waste center component replacement
You may need to replace certain supply and waste center components
due to normal wear from daily operations.
• Replace the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor (i 1000SR), page 9-169
• Replace the buffer level sensor (i 1000SR), page 9-171
• Replace the buffer outlet assembly (i 1000SR), page 9-175
See Supply and waste center (i 1000SR), page 1-66, for component
locations when performing replacement procedures.
Replace the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor (i 1000SR)
Replacing the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor consists of the

following procedures:
• Removal
– Remove the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor, page 9-170
• Replacement
– Install the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor, page 9-171
• Verification
– Perform solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure 3420 Level
Sensors Test, page 9-171
Ready status.
required

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Tools/materials Absorbent tissue

required
Replacement parts • LN 08C94-27 - Sensor, Level, Pre-Trigger
• LN 08C94-26 - Sensor, Level, Trigger

Removal
Prepare for removal

Open the supply and waste center door.
Remove the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor

1. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray out.
2. Disconnect the pre-trigger or trigger electrical

connector. [1]
3. Use absorbent tissue to catch any spilled liquid and

unscrew the tubing fitting from the level sense tube.
[2]
4. Unscrew the level sensor cap. [3]
5. Remove the level sensor and wipe the outside of the

assembly with an absorbent tissue.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor

1. Place the level sensor into the container with the
arrow on the cap facing towards the front.
2. Tighten the cap. [1]

NOTE: When the level sensor is correctly installed,
the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing
is on the left.
3. Connect the pre-trigger or trigger electrical

connector. [2]
4. Connect the tubing fitting to the level sensor tube. [3]
5. Slide the tray into place.

be present.

procedure.
Verification
Perform solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure 3420 Level Sensors Test

Perform solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure 3420
Level Sensors Test, page 10-676.
Replace the buffer level sensor (i 1000SR)
Replacing the buffer level sensor consists of the following procedures:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Removal
– Remove the wash buffer reservoir and wash buffer level sensor,
page 9-173
• Replacement
– Install the wash buffer level sensor and wash buffer reservoir,
page 9-174
• Verification
Ready status.
required
required
Replacement parts LN 06L01-01 - Sensor, Level, Buffer


Removal
Prepare for removal


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Remove the wash buffer reservoir and wash buffer level sensor
1. Push on the quick disconnect tab to remove the
tubing from the buffer filter. [1]
2. Disconnect the gray level sensor cable. [2]

tubing from the buffer outlet assembly. [3]
4. Grasp the handle and slide the wash buffer reservoir

outside the processing module on the floor.
5. Unscrew the cap. [4]
6. Remove the level sensor.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Install the wash buffer level sensor and wash buffer reservoir
1. Place the level sensor into the reservoir and tighten
the cap. [1]
2. Grasp the handle and place the wash buffer reservoir

into the supply and waste center.
3. Snap the quick disconnect into the tubing on the

buffer level sensor. [2]
4. Connect the gray level sensor cable. [3]

buffer outlet assembly. [4]

be present.

procedure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Verification

Replace the buffer outlet assembly (i 1000SR)
Replacing the buffer outlet assembly consists of the following

procedures:
• Removal
– Remove the wash buffer reservoir and buffer outlet assembly,
page 9-176
• Replacement
– Replace wash buffer reservoir and buffer outlet assembly,
page 9-177
• Verification
Ready status.
required
required
Replacement parts LN 01P12-01 - Buffer outlet assembly



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Removal
Prepare for removal

Remove the wash buffer reservoir and buffer outlet assembly

tubing from the buffer filter. [1]
2. Disconnect the gray level sensor cable. [2]

tubing from the buffer outlet assembly. [3]
4. Grasp the handle and slide the wash buffer reservoir

outside the processing module on the floor.
5. Unscrew the cap on the buffer outlet assembly. [4]
6. Remove the buffer outlet assembly.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Replace wash buffer reservoir and buffer outlet assembly

1. Place the buffer outlet assembly into the reservoir
and tighten the cap. [1]
2. Grasp the handle and place the wash buffer reservoir

into the supply and waste center.

buffer outlet assembly. [2]
4. Connect the gray level sensor cable. [3]

buffer level sensor. [4]

be present.

procedure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Verification

Optional component replacement

You may need to replace certain optional components due to normal
wear from daily operations.
• Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c System), page 9-178
• Replace the float switch cable (c System), page 9-180
• Replace external waste pump (except for i 1000SR), page 9-183
Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c System)
The high-concentration waste bottle is used to collect the

high-concentration liquid waste from the cuvettes and the ICT unit.
Replacing this component consists of the following procedures.
• Removal
– Remove the high-concentration waste bottle, page 9-179
• Replacement
– Replace the high-concentration waste bottle, page 9-180
• Verification
– Verify waste volume on the Supply status screen, page 9-180
required
required
Replacement parts LN 03E50-26 - High Concentration Waste Bottle


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

CAUTION: Lifting Hazard. The c System

page 8-21.

Removal
Remove the high-concentration waste bottle

1. Disconnect the float switch cable from the
high-concentration waste bottle cap by unscrewing
the locking ring [1] and disconnecting the float switch
cable [2].
2. Unscrew the high-concentration waste bottle from

the cap.
3. Ensure the tubing is not kinked.
4. Carefully remove the tubing from the top of the waste

bottle cap.
5. Discard the old bottle and cap in a biohazardous

waste bottle.
6. Discard waste in accordance with the appropriate

waste disposal regulations.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Replace the high-concentration waste bottle

1. Insert the tubing [1] into the new cap [2].
2. Position the tubing just above, but not touching, the

float switch [3].
3. Screw the waste bottle onto the cap.
4. Ensure the tubing is not kinked.
5. Reconnect the float switch cable by inserting the

cable and tightening the locking ring.
6. Ensure the waste bottle is labeled as waste.
Verification
Verify waste volume on the Supply status screen

Verify the correct volume of waste displays on the
Supply status screen.
Replace the float switch cable (c System)
The float switch cable is used to connect the float switch in the
high-concentration waste bottle. Replacing this component consists of
the following procedures.
• Removal
– Disconnect the cable, page 9-182
• Replacement
– Connect the cable, page 9-182
• Verification

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
– Verify waste volume on the Supply status screen, page 9-182

required
required
Replacement parts LN 03E50-31 - High Concentration Float Switch Cable


CAUTION: Lifting Hazard. The c System

page 8-21.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Removal
Disconnect the cable

1. Disconnect the float switch cable from the
high-concentration waste bottle cap by unscrewing
the locking ring [1] and disconnecting the float switch
cable [2].
2. Disconnect the other end of the float switch cable

from the back of the module using the information in
the previous step.
Replacement
Connect the cable

1. Connect one end of the replacement cable to the
back of the module by inserting the cable and
tightening the locking ring.
NOTE: Both ends of the cable are identical.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the

high-concentration waste bottle by inserting the
cable and tightening the locking ring.
Verification
Verify waste volume on the Supply status screen

Verify the correct volume of waste displays on the

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replace external waste pump (except for i 1000SR)
Replacing the external waste pump consists of the following

procedures:
• Removal
– Remove the external waste pump, page 9-184
• Replacement
– Replace the external waste pump, page 9-185
• Verification
– Perform the appropriate maintenance procedure, page 9-186
Ready status.
required
required
Replacement parts • LN 08C94-99 - i 2000/i 2000SR external waste pump
• LN 09D61-02 - c System external waste pump


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Removal
Prepare for removal

1. Power off the external waste pump [1].
2. Unplug the power cord from the waste pump [2].
Remove the external waste pump

1. Disconnect the waste outlet quick disconnect [1].
2. Disconnect the inlet quick disconnect [2].

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Replace the external waste pump

1. Place the voltage select switch on the waste pump
assembly to the correct position (115 V or 230 V) for
your country [1].
2. Attach the power cord [2].
3. Connect the inlet line(s) [3].
4. Connect the outlet waste line [4].
5. Power on the waste pump [5].

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

1. Press and hold the manual operating switch in until
the pump turns on [1].
2. Release the switch to leave the pump in Automatic

mode.
Verification
Perform the appropriate maintenance procedure

Perform the appropriate maintenance procedure to
verify the pump turns on and transports the waste fluid
to the drain.
For c Systems perform Daily maintenance description
(c System processing module), page 9-21 2
consecutive times.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Troubleshooting and diagnostics
Section 10
Introduction
<F=0>
Problems with your ARCHITECT System are characterized by

symptoms. Troubleshooting tools, references, and suggested
techniques are provided to help you trace the symptom(s) to one or
more root causes. You can then perform the corrective actions to
resolve the problem.
Troubleshooting and diagnostic topics include:
• Approach to troubleshooting, page 10-2
Provides a general model for troubleshooting your ARCHITECT
System.
Provides a description of the software screens and windows
associated with system records of error-related messages, and
software upgrades that have been installed.
• Error codes, page 10-21
Lists possible error codes and their messages, and provides
detailed information on probable causes and corrective actions.
• Observed problems, page 10-573
Lists symptoms you may observe and provides detailed
information on probable causes and corrective actions.
• System diagnostics, page 10-651
Provides a description of all system diagnostic procedures, the
software screens and windows associated with diagnostic
activities, and step-by-step instructions for performing related
procedures.
• Miscellaneous corrective action procedures, page 10-687
Includes procedures that are frequently provided as corrective
actions for resolving error codes and/or observed problems.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Approach to troubleshooting Section 10
Approach to troubleshooting
Troubleshooting consists of implementing a practical, systematic
approach to problem solving. This approach focuses on:
• Observing, recognizing, and categorizing symptoms
• Identifying the probable cause(s)
• Systematically eliminating each potential problem (from most
likely to least likely)
The troubleshooting model that follows describes a five step approach
to defining symptoms, identifying problems, and implementing
solutions. When troubleshooting your ARCHITECT System, you
should also include considerations appropriate to your specific
environment.
1. Observe and recognize symptoms
To properly analyze and correct a problem you must first identify the
symptoms. Symptoms can be, but are not limited to:
• Error messages
• Observed problems, such as a noise, fluid leak, trend in controls,
and so forth
NOTE: If you are able to resolve the observed problem, no

further action is required.
2. Categorize the symptom(s)
By grouping like symptoms into categories, you automatically

eliminate some problems as probable causes. Categories of symptoms
include:
• System, see:
– System troubleshooting variables (c System), page 10-4
– System troubleshooting variables (i System), page 10-5
• Reagents, see:
– Reagent troubleshooting variables (c System), page 10-7
– Reagent troubleshooting variables (i System), page 10-8
• Operator troubleshooting variables, page 10-9
• Environmental troubleshooting variables, page 10-9

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 10 Approach to troubleshooting
3. Isolate the root cause and create a plan of action
Based on the probable causes you identify, devise a plan that begins by
addressing the most likely first and progresses to the least likely.
By addressing one probable cause at a time you are able to isolate the
resolution, and then reproduce the solution to a specific problem.
Diagnostic resources and tools include:
• Error code and message
• ARCHITECT System Operations Manual and/or Help
– Section 10 Troubleshooting and diagnostics
– Appendix B Verification of ARCHITECT i System assay
claims
– Section 4 Performance characteristics and specifications
• System logs (Message history and Temporary)
• Levey-Jennings graph
• Diagnostic procedures
• Maintenance logs
• Maintenance procedures
• Reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a
package insert or reagent application sheet)
4. Resolve the problem
Carefully perform the steps required to solve the problem. Problems

are corrected by:
• Making adjustments, such as tightening connections or
removing jams
• Calibrating system components or assays
• Replacing or repairing system components
• Running new controls
5. Verify the resolution worked
Verify the symptoms no longer exist:

• Perform the appropriate verification procedure
• Check control values, if appropriate

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
If you continue to observe the symptoms, perform the steps to resolve

the next most likely problem. Repeat this process until the problem is
resolved.
System troubleshooting variables (c System)

The system category is a high level group of symptoms that relate to
system performance. Within this category, there are more specific
subcategories or variables. By tracing an error or problem to one of
these variables, you can begin to isolate the probable cause(s).
System troubleshooting variables include:
• Fluidic subsystems, page 10-4
• Optical subsystem, page 10-4
• Hardware, page 10-5
• Software, page 10-5
• Consumables, page 10-5
Fluidic subsystems
Fluidic subsystems consist of hardware components that control the

precision and accuracy of liquid level sensing, aspiration, and
dispense. Additionally, these components distribute the fluids used to
wash the probes.
Examples Pipettors, probes, pressure monitors, syringes and valves,
tubing, processing module circuit boards, pumps, and ICT
unit
Symptoms Liquid level sense error messages (3000-3999), imprecise
results, and/or erratic results
Optical subsystem
The optical subsystem consists of hardware components and

accessories that control concise and accurate optical readings.
Examples Lamp, heat absorbing filter, lenses, cuvettes, water bath,
optics unit
Symptoms Optical-read error messages (6000-6999) and/or shift in
values

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Hardware
Hardware consists of the mechanical components that move

consumables and samples through the system and distribute power
and electrical signals.
Examples Carousels, sensors, circuit boards, and bar code readers
Symptoms Homing failures, jams, step loss, and motor stalls (robotic
and sensor error messages 5000-5999) and/or bar code
reader error messages (4000-4999)
Software
Software consists of computer instructions that interpret system and

assay information, calculate results, and provide the interface for
controlling the system hardware.
Examples System, assay, maintenance, and diagnostic software
Symptoms Software error messages (9000-9999), cannot power on the
SCC
Consumables
Consumables are supplies that are required to run assays.

Examples Sample cups, bulk solutions, reagent cartridges, and
onboard solutions
Symptoms Imprecise results and/or erratic results
System troubleshooting variables (i System)

The system category is a high level group of symptoms that relate to
system performance. Within this category, there are more specific
System troubleshooting variables include:
• Fluidic subsystems, page 10-6
• Optical subsystem, page 10-6
• Hardware, page 10-6
• Software, page 10-6
• Consumables, page 10-7

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Fluidic subsystems
Fluidic subsystems are the hardware components that control the

precision and accuracy of liquid level sensing, aspiration, and
dispense. Additionally, these components distribute the fluids used to
wash the probes.
Examples Pipettors, probes, LLS (liquid level sense) antennae,
syringes and valves, dispensers, tubing, pumps, processing
module circuit boards, and WAM (wash aspirate monitor)
thermistors
Symptoms Liquid level sense error messages (3000-3999), imprecise
results, and/or erratic results
Optical subsystem
The optical subsystem consists of hardware components that control

concise and accurate optical readings.
Examples CMIA reader, shutter, and reader magnet
Symptoms Optical-read error messages (6000-6999) and/or shift in
values
Hardware
Hardware consists of the mechanical components that move

consumables and samples through the system and distribute power
and electrical signals.
Examples Carousel, sensors, RV (reaction vessel) loader, circuit
boards, and bar code readers
Symptoms Homing failures, jams, step loss, and motor stalls (robotic
and sensor error messages 5000-5999) and/or bar code
reader error messages (4000-4999)
Software
Software consists of computer instructions that interpret system and

assay information, calculate results, and provide the interface for
controlling the system hardware.
Examples System, assay, maintenance, and diagnostic software
Symptoms Software error messages (9000-9999), cannot power on the
SCC

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Consumables
Consumables are supplies that are required to run assays.

Examples Sample cups, bulk solutions, and RVs (reaction vessels)
Symptoms Imprecise results and/or erratic results
Reagent troubleshooting variables (c System)

The reagent category is a high level group of symptoms that relate to
processing results. Within this category, there are more specific
Reagent troubleshooting variables include:
• Reagent kits, page 10-7
• Controls, page 10-7
• Calibrators, page 10-7
Reagent kits
Reagent kits contain the consumables that detect and/or measure

specific analyte presence or concentration in samples.
Examples Reagents, sample diluents, and pretreatments
Symptoms Control(s) out of range and/or trends and shifts in control
and/or patient results
Controls
Controls are samples with known concentrations of analytes that

allow performance monitoring within a clinical range.
Examples Analyte-specific and multiconstituent controls
Symptoms Control out of range, imprecise control results, and/or trends
and shifts in control and/or patient results
Calibrators
Calibrators are samples with known concentrations of analytes used to

create the calibration against which samples are measured.
Examples Analyte-specific and multiconstituent calibrators

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Symptoms Shift in control and patient values
Reagent troubleshooting variables (i System)

The reagent category is a high level group of symptoms that relate to
processing results. Within this category, there are more specific
Reagent troubleshooting variables include:
• Reagent kits, page 10-8
• Controls, page 10-8
• Calibrators, page 10-8
Reagent kits
Reagent kits contain the consumables that detect and/or measure

specific analyte presence or concentration in samples.
Examples Antibody coated microparticles, conjugate, and
assay-specific diluent
Symptoms Control(s) out of range and/or trends and shifts in control
and/or patient results
Controls
Controls are samples with known concentrations of analytes that

allow performance monitoring within a clinical range.
Examples Analyte-specific and multiconstituent controls
Symptoms Control out of range, imprecise control results, and/or trends
and shifts in control and/or patient results
Calibrators
Calibrators are samples with known concentrations of analytes used to

create the calibration against which samples are measured.
Examples Analyte-specific calibrators
Symptoms Shift in control and patient results

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Operator troubleshooting variables

The operator category is a group of symptoms that relate to proper
system operation and maintenance. Within this category, the actions
of a single operator and/or the actions of multiple operators can result
in a variety of symptoms.
Examples A new user and a trained operator
Symptoms Bubbles in reagents or samples, particulate matter or fibrin
in samples, general error messages (0001-0999), assay
specific error messages (1000-1999), error code messages
generated as a result of improper maintenance or
component replacement
Environmental troubleshooting variables

The environmental category is a high level group of symptoms that
relate to processing results. Within this category, there are more
specific subcategories or variables. By tracing an error or problem to
one of these variables, you can begin to isolate the probable cause(s).
Environmental troubleshooting variables include:
• Physical requirements, page 10-9
• Electrical requirements, page 10-9
• Host interface components, page 10-10
Physical requirements
Physical requirements identify the environmental conditions needed

to ensure consistent system performance.
Examples Room temperature and/or humidity, location, processing
module and sample handler clearances, and water quality
Symptoms Temperature error messages (7000-7999) and/or
inadequate airflow
Electrical requirements
Electrical requirements identify the power requirements needed to

ensure consistent system performance and optical readings.
Examples Power outlet, voltages, and dedicated line
Symptoms Loss of power to the system

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Host interface components
Host interface components enable communication between the

laboratory information system and the system control center.
Examples Ports, cables, and connections
Symptoms Communication error messages (8000-8999)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 10 System logs screen
System logs screen

From the System logs screen you can view the following information
by module:
• Error message logs -
– Temporary message log - displays non-critical error-related
messages that you can address, and then delete.
– Message history log - displays and stores a record of
error-related messages that you use to troubleshoot
problems associated with system performance and/or results
reporting.
• Software update log - displays a history of ARCHITECT System
software updates that have been installed.
You can also access windows from the System logs screen that allow
you to:
• Print the temporary message log
• Print the message history log
• Print the TSB installation log
• Find specific messages
• Find specific system updates
• System logs screen - Error message logs, page 10-11
System logs screen - Error message logs

The figure below, System logs screen - Error message logs, page 10-12,
shows the System log screen displaying temporary message logs.
(Identical fields are shown for the Message History log).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
System logs screen Section 10
Figure 10.1: System logs screen - Error message logs
For descriptions of these fields, see System logs screen - Error message logs
When accessing the System logs screen - Error message logs the
information sorts by time the error message was generated from the
most recent to the oldest error message.
information is sorted as described in the following table.

DATE/TIME Chronologically in descending order
M Numerically in ascending order
ERROR CODE Numerically in ascending order
To display this screen, see Access the System logs screen, page 10-14.
• Review logs, page 10-14
• Find a specific message, page 10-15
• View low level error messages, page 10-16
• Delete a temporary message, page 10-17

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
System logs screen - Software update log

The figure below, System logs screen - Software update log, page 10-13,
shows the System log screen displaying the software update log.
Figure 10.2: System logs screen - Software update log
For descriptions of these fields, see System logs screen - Software update
log field descriptions, page Appendix E-131.
When accessing the System logs screen - Software update log the
information sorts by time the TSB was installed from the most recent
to the oldest.
information is sorted as described in the following table.

DATE/TIME Chronologically in descending order
TSB Alphanumerically in ascending order
SERIAL # Alphanumerically in ascending order
TSB SUBJECT Alphanumerically in ascending order

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Access the System logs screen

Perform this procedure to display the System logs screen.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the System logs screen:
selecting the LIS, ARM, or LAS button.
Select System from the menu bar, and then select System logs.
The System logs screen displays.
Procedures - System logs screen

Procedures that can be performed from the System logs screen and its
• Review logs, page 10-14
• View low level error messages, page 10-16
• Delete a temporary message, page 10-17
• View log of installed software updates, page 10-17
• Find specific installed software updates, page 10-18
Review logs
Perform this procedure to display the System logs screen. From this
screen you can view the Temporary message and Message history logs,
as well as the Software updates log.
To find specific messages, see Find a specific message, page 10-15.
To view low level messages, see View low level error messages,
page 10-16.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
To find specific software updates, see Find specific installed software

updates, page 10-18.
Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To review logs:
1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select System logs.
The System logs screen displays.
2. Select the Log selection list button, and then select the desired
log.
To print the Message History Report, see Print the Message History Log
report, page 5-304. To print the Temporary Message Log report or the
TSB Installation Log report see Print a report, page 5-295.
Find a specific message
Perform this procedure to search for a specific message(s) in the system

logs when necessary for troubleshooting.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To find a specific message:

1. Select F3 - Find on the System logs screen.
The Find options (System logs) window displays.
NOTE: A wildcard search allows you to type a partial entry

character in all fields except position (P).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
error codes starting with 123 display. This list could include
1234, 1235, or 1236.

The System logs screen displays with the text "Search results:" in
the title bar.
• Find options (System logs - Error message logs) window, page 10-18
View low level error messages
Perform this procedure to view additional error messages when

necessary for troubleshooting.
To find specific error messages, see Find a specific message, page 10-15.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view message details:

1. Select the Log selection list button on the System logs screen,
and then select Message history log.
2. Select F3 - Find.
The Find options window displays.
3. Select the Error level: Low check box.
4. Select Done to display the messages.

The System logs screen displays with the text "Search results:" in
the title bar.
• Find options (System logs - Software update log) window, page 10-19

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Delete a temporary message
Perform this procedure to delete a temporary message(s) after

correcting the issue that caused the error.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To delete a temporary message:

1. Select the desired message(s) from the table on the System logs
screen or select F2 - Select all.
3. Select OK to delete the message(s).
View log of installed software updates
Perform this procedure to view a history of ARCHITECT System

Software updates that have been installed on your system.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view the log of ARCHITECT System Software updates that have

been installed on your system:
Select the Log selection list button, and then select Software update
Log. A list of all installed software updates will be displayed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Find specific installed software updates
Perform this procedure to find information about specific ARCHITECT

System Software updates.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To search for Architect System software updates:

1. Select the Log selection list button, and then select the Software
update log.
2. Select F3 - Find on the System logs - software update log screen.
4. Select Done to initiate the search. The System logs - Software

update log screen displays with the text ‚Search results:” in the
title bar.
Windows - System logs screen

Windows you can access from the System logs screen include:
• Find options (System logs - Software update log) window, page 10-19
Find options (System logs - Error message logs) window
From the Find options (System logs - Error message logs) window, you
can search for specific item(s) in the logs by entering search criteria in
one or more fields.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 10.3: Find options (System logs - Error message logs) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (System logs - Error
message logs) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-131.
Find options (System logs - Software update log) window
From the Find options (System logs - Software update log) window,
you can search for specific system updates that have been installed on
your system.
Figure 10.4: Find options (System logs - Software update log) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (System logs - Software
update log) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-131.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Find specific installed software updates, page 10-18

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 10 Error codes
Error codes
Error codes are divided into ten sections that reflect the major
categories in which errors may occur:
• General error codes (0001-0999), page 10-21
• Assay specific error codes (1000-1999), page 10-125
• Maintenance error codes (2000-2999), page 10-196
• Level sense error codes (3000-3999), page 10-249
• Bar code reader error codes (4000-4999), page 10-331
• Robotic and sensor error codes (5000-5999), page 10-352
• Optics error codes (6000-6999), page 10-432
• Temperature error codes (7000-7999), page 10-443
• Computer hardware error codes (8000-8999), page 10-462
• Software error codes (9000-9999), page 10-499
General error codes (0001-0999)

The general error code category includes error codes between
0001-0999.
If the corrective actions listed under the error code in question do not
resolve the problem, contact your Area Customer Support
representative at:
United States 1-877-4ABBOTT (1-877-422-2688)
International Call your Area Customer Support representative.
NOTE: For corrective actions that involve hazardous activity refer to

Hazards, page 8-1, for precautions you should take to minimize
exposure and prevent personal injury or system damage. Hazard
activities include but are not limited to:
• Replacing system probes
• Handling reagents, calibrators, controls, and specimens
• Removing physical obstructions
• Changing the lamp
• Removing system waste

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error codes Section 10
Error code: 0102

Unable to perform requested operation, Processing Module not in correct status.
Probable cause Corrective action

• Attempted one of the following when the Perform the activity when the processing module
processing module status did not allow the status changes.
activity:
– Start up
– Reagent scanning
– Reagent carousel advance
• The first time run was selected for the processing Cycle power to the processing module and/or
module, error code 4103 - "Reagent bar code sample handler, page 5-11.
reader not responding" occurred during the Run
initialization.
• Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
– Reagent bar code reader hardware failure.
Error code: 0104

Unable to perform requested operation, Sample Handler not in correct status.

Attempted one of the following when the sample Perform the activity when the sample handler status
handler status did not allow the activity: changes.
• Start up
• Pause
Error code: 0105

Batch (x) terminated. Final sample is in a carrier and that carrier label cannot be read.
x = Batch name

A non-bar coded batch is in process and 5 or fewer 1. Determine the samples present in the sample
samples remain to be identified. The bar code label carrier that were not processed.
on the sample carrier cannot be read by the sample
ID bar code reader. The system assumes this 2. Place a new batch order for these samples.
carrier contains the last samples for the batch,
therefore the batch is terminated. 3. Place the samples into a different sample carrier.
4. Refer to error code 4204, for corrective action, if

error continues.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0106

Unable to perform installation, a valid ARCHITECT CD is not in the CD drive.

Software upgrade was attempted without the CD 1. Place the ARCHITECT CD into the drive.
installed in the CD drive.
2. Restart the software upgrade procedure.
Error code: 0107

Unable to perform requested operation, Sample Handler or Processing Module not in
correct status.

• Attempted one of the following when the Perform a different operation or wait until the
processing module status did not allow the module changes status.
activity:
– Selected pause when the status is Stopped.
– Selected start up when the status is Running.
– Keypad hardware failure.
Error code: 0108

Unload Queue at capacity, remove Sample Carriers.

• Unload queue is full of sample carriers. Remove carriers from the unload queue.
– Unload queue sensor hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0109

Unable to process test, Processing Module not Running.

• User selected stop before processing began. Start up the processing module when the reason for
the stop no longer exists. See Start up the
processing module and/or sample handler,
page 5-12.
• Hardware failure. 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 0304 error
codes that occurred at the same time as this
message.
2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the

same time as the 0304 error code.
3. View low level error messages, page 10-16, if

you do not find any error codes that occurred at
the same time as the 0304 error code.
4. Perform the corrective action for the specific

error code.
Error code: 0110

Unable to execute command, Processing Module or Sample Handler Stopped.

• User selected stop for either the sample handler Start up the processing module and/or sample
or processing module. handler, page 5-12, when the reason for the stop no
longer exists.
• Communication or hardware failure. 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 0304 error
message.



error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0111

Unable to perform requested operation, previously requested operation still in progress.

System is currently performing a requested activity Request the new activity when the current activity is
such as flush, reagent scan, or carousel advance. complete.
Error code: 0112

Unable to process test, Sample Handler Stopped.

• User selected stop. Start up the sample handler when the reason for
the stop no longer exists. See Start up the
page 5-12.
• Processing module stopped because of a 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 5000 category
previous hardware failure. error codes that occurred at the same time as
this message.

you do not find any 5000 category error codes.

error code.
– Sample handler keypad hardware failure.
Error code: 0113

Unable to delete assay, at least one module is not in the correct status.

Attempted to delete an assay while the processing Delete the assay when the status for all processing
module(s) are not in the correct status. modules is Stopped, Ready, or Offline.
Error code: 0114

Unable to process test, assay deleted.

Assay deleted, all pending orders for the assay are Reinstall the assay and create new orders for the
sent to exceptions. samples sent to exceptions, if required.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0115

No assay found for reagent kit in position (x).
x = Reagent carousel position

The assay file required for the reagent kit is either Install the correct assay file. See Install or delete an
not installed or it is not the correct version. assay file, page 2-177.
The manually defined reagent name does not Reconfigure the reagent name.
match the name, including capitalization, encoded See Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric
in the bar code. - c System), page 2-65.
Error code: 0116

Invalid order, missing Carrier/Carousel or Position.

Add order was selected when the information in Enter valid data in both the C (carrier/carousel) and
either the carrier/carousel or position data entry box P (position) data entry boxes.
was missing or incorrect.
Error code: 0117

Invalid entry, no assays selected.

• Add order was selected when no assay was Select one or more assays.
selected.
• Done was selected in the Select assays window Select one or more assays.
with no assays selected.
Error code: 0118

Invalid order, missing Sample ID.

Add order was selected before a sample ID was Enter a sample ID in the SID data entry box.
entered in the sample ID field.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0119

Batch (x) deleted, batch (y) has been initiated.
x = Name of deleted batch
y = Name of overlapping batch

A batch was in process when a carrier was loaded No corrective action is required. Remaining tests
containing a sample that is defined as the start of a from the batch in process are deleted. Batch tests
different batch. in process continue. Tests from the new batch start.
To avoid future occurrences, do not start another
batch until the batch in process terminates.
Error code: 0120

Invalid sample type detected in batch (y). Sample is in C/P (x).
x = Carrier and position of sample
y = Name of batch

• When processing a non-bar coded batch, a When processing a non-bar coded batch, do not
sample with a bar code was found for which there place bar coded samples within the batch unless
were no tests ordered. tests are ordered for the sample.
• When processing a bar coded batch, a sample When processing a bar coded batch, do not place
with no bar code was found for which there were non-bar coded samples within the batch unless
no tests ordered. tests are ordered for the sample in the position.
• There are empty positions in a sample carrier When processing a bar coded batch, do not leave
during a bar coded batch. open positions in the sample carrier.
Error code: 0121

Invalid order, Assay (x), number (y) is no longer installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

• The assay file for the test to be rerun was deleted. 1. Delete the rerun test order.
2. Reinstall the assay and create new orders for the

tests to be rerun, if required.
• The assay file for the test to be rerun was deleted 1. Delete the rerun test order.
and then reinstalled.
2. Reorder the test for rerun.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0122

No Reagent kits found during reagent scan.

Processing module does not have any reagents, Load reagents on the specified processing module,
therefore the status cannot change to Running. and then select run.
Error code: 0123

Unable to fail calibration curve, Processing Module (x) Running.
x = Processing module number (1-4)

Attempted to fail an active calibration curve when 1. Pause the processing module, page 5-12.
the processing module status was Running.
2. Fail the desired calibration curve when the status
is Ready. See Fail a calibration curve, page 6-33.
Error code: 0124

Ending Sample ID cannot be the same as the starting Sample ID.

When creating a bar coded batch order, the same Change either the starting or the ending sample ID
number was entered for both the starting and so they are not the same.
ending sample ID.
Error code: 0125

Invalid rerun request, missing Carrier/Carousel and Position for Sample ID (x).
x = Sample ID

Ordered a rerun for an unlabeled tube without Enter the carrier/carousel and position for the rerun
entering carrier/carousel and position information. sample.
Error code: 0126

Unable to delete order, test is in progress.

Requested deletion of an order when the test is in Delete the desired results when all tests for the
process. sample are complete.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0127

Invalid order, Sample ID previously assigned to Patient ID (x).
x = Patient ID

Entered an order for a sample ID already 1. Verify the patient ID associated with the sample
associated with a different patient ID. ID is correct for all orders.
2. Enter the correct sample ID.

NOTE: Patient ID is optional and is entered on
the Details for sample window.
Error code: 0128

Invalid rerun request, Assay (x), number (y) no longer installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

• The assay file for the test to be rerun was deleted. 1. Delete the rerun test order.
2. Reinstall the assay and create new orders for the

tests to be rerun, if required.
• The assay file for the test to be rerun was deleted 1. Delete the rerun test order.
and then reinstalled.
2. Reorder the test for rerun.
Error code: 0129

The end time (x) is earlier than the start time for the specified date (y).
x = The end time
y = The date of the start time

Specified incorrect date and time in a Find window. Enter a correct date and time.
Error code: 0130

Invalid entry, (x) not within range (y - z).
x = Value entered
y = Minimum range value
z = Maximum range value

Value entered was not within the specified range. Enter a value within the specified range.
NOTE: Some data entry boxes may also be left

blank.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0131

Invalid entry, user input (x) for character (y).
x = User input
y = Number of characters from left in data entry box

Character in the position specified is missing or Enter the correct value for the specified position.
incorrect.
Error code: 0132

Unable to install procedure (x), an equal or higher version already exists.
x = Procedure name

The same or higher version of the procedure is No corrective action required if the request was
already installed. made in error.
To install a lower version, delete the procedure and
then install the desired version. See Install or delete
a maintenance or diagnostic procedure file,
page 2-181.
Error code: 0133

Unable to install (x) procedure, system software version not compatible.
x = Procedure name

The procedure requires a newer version of Upgrade the ARCHITECT System software to the
ARCHITECT System software. appropriate version and reinstall the procedure.
(Contact your Area Customer Support.)
Error code: 0134

Procedure (x) does not exist.
x = Procedure number

Wrong procedure number entered when deleting a Enter a valid number for the procedure you are
procedure. deleting.
Error code: 0135

Unable to install software. Processing Module is not in the correct status.

Processing module status is Running, Scheduled Install the software when the processing module
pause, Initializing, or Scanning. status is Stopped, Offline, Ready, or Warming.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0136

Unable to perform procedure, Module (x) not in the correct status.
x = Module number (0-4)

The specified processing module or sample handler Refer to the Version details for procedure
is not in the correct status to perform the procedure. (diagnostics) window, page 10-657, to determine
the status required for performing the procedure.
Error code: 0137

Unable to perform (x) procedure, insufficient user access.
x = Procedure name

The current user does not have access sufficient to Use a logon with the access required to execute the
execute the selected procedure. procedure.
Error code: 0138

Unable to approve maintenance log, insufficient user access.

The current user does not have access sufficient to Log on with system administrator access. See Log
approve a maintenance month. on (system administrator), page 1-22.
Error code: 0139

Unable to modify approval status for a previously approved maintenance log.

Requested an approval status update for a Select the correct month, and then select F4 -
maintenance month that is already approved. Approve.
Error code: 0140

Unable to approve, no maintenance activity.

Requested an approval status change for a month Select the correct month, and then select F4 -
with no maintenance activity. Approve.
Error code: 0141

Unable to approve current month.

Requested an approval status for the current month Select the correct month, and then select F4 -
or a future month. Approve.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0142

Unable to install software, host transmission is in process.

Results are transferring to the host. Software Install the software when the transmission is
cannot be installed during this process. complete.
Error code: 0143

Unable to process test, no reagent kits eligible on the selected Processing Module.

The required reagent kit is not available on the Verify reagent inventory for the assay. See Verify
selected processing module. All of the reagent kits reagent inventory on a single module, page 5-68.
on the module for the assay are either empty,
expired, or not calibrated.
Error code: 0144

Invalid order, manual dilution factor is inconsistent with previous order for Sample ID (x).
x = Sample ID

A manual dilution was requested for a sample ID 1. Order the test using the same manual dilution.
that already has an order using a different manual
dilution. 2. Assign another sample ID to the new dilution, if a
different manual dilution is required.
Error code: 0145

Missing entry, Level name required.

The control level name is not entered in the Enter a control level name.
required field.
Error code: 0146

Missing entry, Lot no. required.

A calibrator or control lot number is not entered in Enter the lot number.
the required field.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0147

Invalid entry, control Level name already exists for this lot.

The entered control level name already exists for Enter a unique control level name.
this lot.
Error code: 0148

Invalid entry, control Lot no. already exists for this assay.

A duplicate lot number was entered. Enter a unique control lot number for the control.
Error code: 0149

Invalid request, unable to delete default control lot.

Attempted to delete the default control lot. 1. Define a new control lot as the default.
2. Delete the desired control lot.
Error code: 0150

Invalid request, select another lot, then specify it as default.

Attempted to deselect the current default calibrator Select another lot and define it as the default lot.
or control lot.
All assays assigned to the calibrator set have not 1. Add all assays assigned to the calibrator set to
been added to the selected lot. the list.
2. Enter the calibrator values.
3. Define the new lot as the default lot.
Error code: 0153

Missing entry, Carrier/Carousel ID required.

Add order was selected when the information in the Enter valid data in the carrier/carousel field.
carrier/carousel field was missing or incorrect.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0154

Missing entry, Position required.

Add order was selected when the information in the Enter valid data in the position field.
position field was missing or incorrect.
Error code: 0155

Unable to delete assay (x), it is part of a batch order on the system.
x = Assay name

The assay is part of a batch order with a status of To delete the assay without processing the batch,
Pending. delete the batch and then delete the assay.
To process the batch, delete the assay when the
batch is complete.
Error code: 0156

Invalid entry, bar code SID must be unique.

The specified bar code SID is used for another Enter a unique bar code SID.
control level in the same control lot or for another
control.
Error code: 0157

Invalid entry, day entered must be valid for the month and year specified.

The day of the month entered in the field is not Enter the correct day for the month and year
correct for the month and year specified. specified.
Error code: 0158

Invalid entry, month entered must be in the range (1 - 12).

The month entered is outside the range 1 - 12. Enter a month from 1 - 12.
Error code: 0159

Invalid entry, year entered must be in range (1800 - 9999).

The year entered is outside the range 1800 - 9999. Enter a year from 1800 - 9999.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0160

Invalid entry, hour entered must be within range (0 - 23).

The hour entered is outside the range 0 - 23. Enter an hour from 0 - 23.
Error code: 0161

Invalid entry, minute entered must be within range (0 - 59).

The minutes entered is outside the range 0 - 59. Enter a value for minutes from 0 - 59.
Error code: 0162

System backup canceled, insufficient disk space for (x).
x = File name

There is not enough disk space to perform a backup Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
procedure. provide information specifying the operation you
were attempting to perform when this error
occurred.
Error code: 0164

Invalid request, select at least one restore option.

Done was selected without selecting a restore Select at least one option from the Restore options
option (module calibrations, system configuration, list, and then select Done.
or database). To exit without performing a restore, select Cancel.
Error code: 0166

Batch (x) deleted. Batch was in process when the SCC was shut down.
x = Batch name

The batch was in process when the SCC was 1. Determine why the SCC was shutdown and
shutdown. All samples with a Scheduled or Running correct the cause.
status go to exceptions.
2. Rerun the tests in exceptions.
3. Order another batch for the remaining samples.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0167

Invalid order, Carrier/Carousel and Position required for previously ordered Sample ID (x).
x = Sample ID

The same sample ID was found in one or more Specify the carrier/carousel ID and position for each
carrier/carousel positions and the carrier/carousel aliquot loaded when using multiple aliquots of the
position was not specified for the test order. same sample ID.
Error code: 0168

Invalid entry, end date is earlier than the start date.

The end date entered is earlier than the start date. Enter the correct date range.
Error code: 0169

Procedure not performed on selected day.

Details was selected from a Maintenance log for a Select a date when the procedure was run, and
date when the procedure was not run. then select F5 - Details.
Error code: 0170

Samples (x) were not processed in batch (y). Unable to read carrier label.
x = Range of Sample IDs that were not processed
y = Batch name

A non-bar coded batch is in process and the bar 1. Determine the samples present in the sample
code label on the sample carrier can not be read by carrier that were not processed.
the sample ID bar code reader. The system
assumes this carrier contains 5 samples for the 2. Place a new batch order for these samples.
batch, increments the sample ID by 5 samples, and
does not process these samples. 3. Place the samples into a different sample carrier.
4. Refer to error code 4204, for corrective action, if

error continues.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0171

Invalid shutdown request, at least one module is currently Running.

• Shutdown was selected from the Snapshot 1. Pause the sample handler and all processing
screen when the status of at least one module modules with a status of Running. See System
was Running. startup, pause, and shutdown, page 5-3.
2. Shutdown the system when the status of all

modules is Ready.
• Shutdown was selected from the Snapshot 1. Wait until the status of the sample handler and
screen when the status of at least one module all processing modules changes to Ready, or
was Scheduled pause. select the sample handler and/or processing
module graphic, and then select Stop.

modules is Ready or Stopped.
• Shutdown was selected from the Snapshot 1. Wait until all maintenance procedures are
screen when the status of at least one module complete, or select the sample handler and/or
was Maintenance. processing module graphic, and then select
Stop.

modules is Ready or Stopped.
• Shutdown was selected from the Snapshot Shutdown the system when the ARM completes
screen while the ARM (Automatic Reconstitution buffer transfer.
Module) was transferring buffer to the wash
buffer reservoir.
Error code: 0172

No assay found for reagent kit in section (x).
x = RSH section number

The assay file required for the reagent kit is either Install the correct assay file. See Install or delete an
not installed or it is not the correct version. assay file, page 2-177.
Error code: 0173

System restore canceled, backup version (x) and current software version (y) are
incompatible.
x = Software version when backup was created
y = Current software version

Attempted to restore a backup with a database Select a backup created with the current version of
created with a different system software version system software.
number.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0174

Invalid order for Sample ID (x), Assay (y) disabled.
x = Sample ID
y = Assay name

Order was received with an assay that is disabled or 1. Change the availability of the assay when the
patient disabled. reason for disabling the assay is corrected. See
Change the availability of an assay, page 2-70.
2. Reorder the test.
Error code: 0175

Attempted to operate an un-initialized assembly (x).
x = Mechanism name

Hardware failure for mechanism indicated. 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any error codes
that occurred at the same time as this message.

you do not find any error codes.

error code.
Error code: 0176

Invalid order, no control levels selected.

Add order was selected when no control level was Select one or more control levels.
selected.
Error code: 0177

Invalid order, Sample ID (x) exists for a different type of order (patient, calibrator, control or
batch).
x = Existing Sample ID

The sample ID is already in use for an existing Assign a different sample ID for the order being
calibrator, control, patient, or batch order. created.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0178

Unable to process test, Sample ID (x) currently configured as a control bar code SID.
x = Sample ID

A patient order was created using a previously Re-order the test using a unique sample ID.
assigned control bar code SID.
Error code: 0179

Data archive failed, previous archive still in progress.

Another archive was selected before the current Request the new archive when the current archive
archive was complete. is complete.
Error code: 0180

Unable to archive, insufficient disk space.

There is not enough space on the disk to archive Select fewer records to archive or insert a new disk.
the selected records.
Error code: 0181

Unable to archive, no disk or incorrect disk type detected.

• A disk wasn't placed in the CD drive. Place a disk in the CD drive.
• An incorrect disk type was used. Use a CD-R disk or non-formatted CD-RW disk.
• The disk is inserted upside down. Turn the disk over and insert it in the drive.
Error code: 0182

Unable to archive, no CD drive detected.

• Software error Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5
• The CD-RW drive is not installed on the SCC. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
– Cables on the CD drive have a poor hardware failure.
connection
– CD drive
– Power cable
– Ribbon cable

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0183

Unable to archive, CD drive is initializing.

Done was selected before initialization was 1. Select OK on the archive message, and then
complete. wait until initialization is complete.
2. Select Done to continue archiving.
Error code: 0184

Unable to archive, disk is read-only.

• A CD-ROM disk was left in the drive. Remove the CD-ROM disk and insert a CD-R or
Example: ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM, non-formatted CD-RW disk.
ARCHITECT System Maintenance and
Diagnostic CD-ROM
• The archive CD disk was used for procedures Use archive disk for archive only.
other than archive.
Error code: 0185

Unable to archive, Processing Module is not in the correct status.

Processing module status is Running, Scheduled Perform the archive when the processing module
pause, Initializing, or Scanning. status is Stopped, Offline, or Ready.
Error code: 0186

Unable to archive, archive device is in use.

The archive device is in the process of reading, Archive results when the device is ready.
writing, or initializing.
Error code: 0187

Data archive failed, duplicate archive file name found.

• Archive disk is used on multiple SCC systems Verify the ARCHITECT System number matches
which have the same ARCHITECT System the label on the SCC. If the number is not correct,
number. contact your Area Customer Support.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• A write error occurred on an earlier archive Use a different disk and archive.
attempt and could not be erased.
• An archive was performed before and after a Use a different disk and archive.
restore was performed.
Error code: 0188

Data archive failed, CD tray is open.

After the CD drive was initialized, the CD tray was Close CD tray and start archive procedure.
opened.
Error code: 0189

Data archive failed, no disk found in drive.

A disk wasn't placed in the CD drive. Place a CD-R disk or non-formatted CD-RW disk in
the CD drive.
Error code: 0190

Data archive failed, incorrect disk type detected.

• An incorrect disk type was used. Use a CD-R disk or non-formatted CD-RW disk.
• The disk is inserted upside down. Turn the disk over and insert it in the drive.
Error code: 0191

Data archive failed, error reading/writing to disk.

• CD disk is dirty. Clean disk. Refer to the CD cover for cleaning and
handling procedures.
• CD disk is defective. Use new disk.
– CD drive hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0192

Data archive failed, error verifying archive data on disk.

• CD disk is defective. Use new disk.
Error code: 0193

Unable to archive, no archive data found. Refresh screen then select data to archive.

The screen was not refreshed before F8 - Archive Select the refresh button, and then repeat the
was selected. archive procedure. See Archive stored patient
results, page 5-231 or Archive stored control
Error code: 0194

Unable to process test, invalid product type.

Reagent bottles for a STAT test are incorrectly Load the reagent bottles on an ARCHITECT
loaded on an i 2000. System with STAT test capability.
Error code: 0195

Invalid order for Sample ID (x), conflicting demographics for Patient ID (y).
x = Sample ID number
y = Patient ID number

The order created contains demographic 1. Create the order with the existing demographics.
information for a PID, which is different than existing
demographics for that PID. 2. Delete all orders and results associated with the
existing demographics and then create the order
with the new demographics.
Error code: 0196

Unable to delete assay (x), pending orders exist for this assay.
x = Assay name

Attempted to delete an assay when pending or Delete the pending orders or wait until the orders
running orders exist for the assay. are complete before trying to delete the assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0197

Missing entry, formula required.

A valid formula is not entered for a calculated assay. Enter a valid formula for the calculated assay.
Error code: 0198

Unable to delete assay (x), the assay is a constituent of a calculated assay.
x = Assay name

Attempted to delete an assay that is a constituent Delete or edit the calculated assay before deleting
for a calculated assay. the constituent assay.
Error code: 0199

Unable to process test from sample carousel, invalid Processing Module for assay type.

A sample was loaded on the sample carousel with Place the sample on the robotic sample handler to
i System assays ordered. run the i System assays.
Error code: 0200

A two position reagent kit loaded in positions 25 and 1.

Bottles from a two-position reagent kit are loaded in Load the reagents in sequential positions.
positions 25 and 1 (not sequentially).
Error code: 0201

No bottle found where expected in position (x) on (y) carousel. Print reagent load error
report.
x = Position in which the bottle was missing
y = Location in which the bottle was missing

• There is no bottle in the indicated position and Load the correct bottle with the kit in the correct
carousel where expected. position.
• Label on a bottle in the indicated position cannot Turn the reagent bottle to expose a different area of
be read. the bar code to the reader.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0202

The reagent kit in position (x) has expired or exceeded the stability time.

The indicated reagent is expired or has exceeded Load a new, in-date reagent kit.
the onboard stability time.
Error code: 0203

Unable to change configuration, Processing Module is not in the correct status.

The processing module status is Running, Perform required configuration changes when the
Scheduled pause, Initializing, or Scanning. processing module status is Offline, Stopped,
Ready, or Warming.
Error code: 0204

Unable to process test, no Reagent kits available to run test on assigned Processing Module.

The processing module does not have adequate Load the required reagent kit.
reagent on board to run the requested test. All of
the reagent kits on the module for the assay are
either empty, expired, or not calibrated.
Error code: 0205

Wrong lot, component or serial number in position (x) on (y) carousel. Print reagent load
error report.
x = Position in which the bottle was detected
y = Location in which the bottle was detected

A bottle with the wrong lot number, component ID, Load the correct bottle for the kit in the correct
or serial number is loaded in the indicated position position.
and carousel.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0206

Bottle mismatch in position (x) on (y) carousel, bottle is already part of another Reagent kit.

A bottle in the indicated position is already part of 1. Print the reagent load error report to determine
another reagent kit. the kit causing the error.
2. Load the correct bottles for the reagent kit or

load a new reagent kit.
Error code: 0207

Calibration version mismatch for reagent kit in position (x).

Calibration version for the reagent kit on the 1. Load a reagent kit matching the currently
processing module does not match the currently installed assay version.
installed assay.
NOTE: Deplete the supply of reagents for the old
assay before installing the new assay.
2. Install the new assay file when the current supply

of reagents is depleted. See Install or delete an
assay file, page 2-177.
Error code: 0208

Reagent Carousel scan error, refer to Reagent status screen for details.

• Bottle mismatch, extra bottle is in the carousel, or 1. View the reagent status screen and correct the
the required bottle is missing. indicated problem.
2. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 0000 category

error codes, if the cause is not obvious.
• Reagent bottle not loaded properly. Reseat the reagent bottle.
• Label cannot be read on a bottle. Clean the bottle label.
• The bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure
3240 Bar Code Calibration, page 10-681 for
c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0209

Number of unreleased patient results reached limit. New orders will not be accepted.

The number of unreleased results has reached the Delete or release results, QC, exceptions, or
limit. pending orders before placing new orders.
Error code: 0210

Selected Carrier/Carousel and Position in use by another Sample ID (x), enter an available
C/P.
x = Sample ID

The carrier/carousel and position is in use by Enter a carrier/carousel and position number that is
another sample. not currently in use.
Error code: 0211

Unable to process test(s), Sample ID (x) does not match scanned sample ID (y).
x = Sample ID ordered
y = Sample ID on sample tube at the bar code reader

• A carrier/carousel and position were assigned for 1. See the Order status screen, page 5-142, for
a sample ID, then a different sample was placed carrier/carousel and position assignment.
into this carrier/carousel and position.
2. Place the correct sample tube into the
carrier/carousel position.
• Sample ID bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure
3240 Bar Code Calibration, page 10-681 for
c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100 if you have a robotic
sample handler.
Error code: 0212

Run request denied. Solid Waste Container not present.

Waste container was not present in a processing Replace the solid waste container.
module when run was selected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0213

Batch is in process. Remaining unprocessed samples will be added to the batch unless you
manually delete the batch.

A batch was in process when the sample handler If you want the batch to continue, no corrective
was paused or the SCC was shutdown. action is required. When you select run for the
sample handler, batch processing continues.
If you do not want the unprocessed samples
remaining on the sample handler to be added to the
current batch, delete the batch before restarting the
sample handler.
Error code: 0214

Pause Load Queue before pressing reverse key.

• User selected reverse while the sample handler Pause the sample handler before pressing the
status is Running. reverse key.
– Keypad hardware failure.
Error code: 0215

Motor command aborted, operator requested Stop.

Unable to complete motor command, user selected Start up the processing module and/or sample
stop. handler, page 5-12, when the reason for the stop no
longer exists.
Error code: 0216

Unable to process test, operator requested Stop or Processing Queue access door opened.

• User selected stop for the sample handler before Start up the sample handler when the reason for
the sample was aspirated. the stop no longer exists. See Start up the
page 5-12
• Processing queue access door was opened Close the door and restart the run.
before the sample was aspirated.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0217

Unable to process test, specified Processing Module not available.

User specified a test be processed on a specific
module, but the module is unable to process the
test for one of the following reasons:
• There are no reagent kits present for the assay. Load reagents for the assay.
• All of the reagents kits on the module for the 1. Replace empty or expired reagents.
assay are either empty, expired, or not calibrated.
2. Order a calibration for the assay if a calibration is
not already in process.
• The module does not have sufficient supplies to 1. Replace empty or expired supplies.
run the assay.
• The module status is not Running. 1. Select run for the processing module.
2. Wait for the processing module status to change

to Running before processing tests.
• Processing module stopped because of a 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 5000 category
this message.


error code.
Error code: 0218

Unable to process test, no Processing Modules available.

User specified that the system automatically assign
the test to a module, but none of the modules are
able to process the test for one of the following
reasons:
• There are no reagent kits for the assay present Load reagents for the assay.
on any of the modules with a status of Running.
• All of the reagents kits for the assay on all the 1. Replace empty or expired reagents.
modules in the Ready or Running status are
either empty, expired, or not calibrated. 2. Order a calibration for the assay if a calibration is
not already in process.
• None of the modules with a status of Running 1. Replace empty or expired supplies.
have sufficient supplies to run the assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• No modules have a status of Running. 1. Select run for a processing module.

to Running before processing tests.
• Processing modules are stopped because of a 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 5000 category
this message.


error code.
Error code: 0219

Run request denied, at least one module must be Running.

Selected run for the sample handler when no Select run for a processing module.
modules have a status of Running.
Error code: 0220

Unable to perform requested operation, Processing Module not in correct status.

The processing module is not in the correct status Establish the correct module status, and then
to perform the requested activity. repeat the activity.
Error code: 0221

Invalid order, selected quality control levels do not all fit onto Carrier/Carousel (x).
x = Carrier/Carousel ID

The number of control levels ordered exceeds the 1. Order fewer control levels for the selected
number of available positions on the carrier/carousel.
carrier/carousel. When requested with one control
order, multiple control levels all must be run in one 2. Create a new order for the remaining control
carrier/carousel. levels on a new carrier/carousel.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0222

Invalid entry, serial number (x) already exists.
x = Serial number currently in system

A serial number was entered that already exists in Enter a valid serial number.
the SCC. Example: i201099
Error code: 0223

Invalid password for (x), enter correct password.
x = User logon name

An invalid password was entered for the user who Enter the correct password.
logged on.
Error code: 0224

Invalid entry, the Sample Handler serial number must be 7 characters.

A sample handler serial number was entered that Enter the sample handler serial number in the
did not contain 7 characters. correct format.
Example: SH01175
Error code: 0225

Invalid entry, date entered must be in range January 1, 1970 to February 5, 2036.

The date entered is outside the range January 1, Enter the correct date within the range January 1,
1970 - February 5, 2036. 1970 - February 5, 2036.
Error code: 0226

Unable to perform Unload, Wash Buffer reservoir empty.

• Wash buffer container is already empty. No corrective action is required.
• Wash buffer transfer tubing is not properly Reconnect all tubing and repeat maintenance
connected or is crimped. procedure.
• Buffer level sensor connection is loose hardware failure.
• Buffer level sensor failed

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0227

Invalid entry, Manual dilution factor not within range of (2 - 999).

A manual dilution factor less than 2 or greater than Enter a value from 2 - 999.
999 was entered.
Error code: 0228

Invalid request, Manual dilution must be defined before selecting assay(s).

Assays for a patient or control order were selected Define the manual dilution option prior to selecting
before the manual dilution factor was entered. assays for a patient order.
Enter a value in the Sample manual dilution
factor data entry box, and then select the desired
assays from the Assays list.
Error code: 0229

Unable to perform Automatic Flush for (x), system door open.
x = Inventory item

• A door or cover is open on the processing Close the door or cover when the reason for
module. opening no longer exists.
– Sensors hardware failure.
Error code: 0230

Duplicate Carrier (x) detected.
x = Carrier ID

Sample carrier cannot be re-used while tests are Wait until tests are complete before re-using a
still in process. sample carrier.
Error code: 0231

Reagent carousel cover has been open for 30 minutes, close cover or remove reagents.

Reagent carousel cover has been open for more Close the reagent carousel cover or remove
than 30 minutes. reagents.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0232

Override for cover interlocks configured to On, all tests will be sent to exception.

Override for cover interlocks is set to on in the 1. Status message. No corrective action is
module configuration screen. required. All tests become exceptions. The PMT
does not read with covers open.
2. Contact your Area Customer Support, if results

are desired.
Error code: 0233

Unable to delete control, order(s) are pending for this Lot no. and Level.

Attempted to delete a control level when orders are Archive all QC results for the control level before
pending for this level. deleting the level.
Error code: 0234

Invalid order, starting Sample ID is missing.

The starting sample ID field is empty. Enter a valid starting sample ID.
Error code: 0235

Unable to delete control level, result(s) exist for this Lot no. and Level.

Attempted to delete a control level when orders are 1. Archive stored control results, page 5-246, with
pending or results exist for this level. Delete records after archive check box
selected.
2. Delete all pending orders for the control level.
Error code: 0236

Invalid request, Processing Module not in the correct status for backup or restore.

Attempted to create a backup or restore when the 1. Pause all modules. Pause the sample handler
status of one or more modules is Running. and Pause the processing module, page 5-12.
2. Repeat the backup or restore procedure, when

the processing module status is Ready.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0237

Invalid automatic system backup request, Processing Module status must be Stopped or
Ready.

Feature not available at this time. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0238

Invalid order, ending Sample ID is missing.

The ending sample ID field is empty. Enter a valid ending sample ID.
Error code: 0239

Run request denied, Processing Module hardware failure.

A previous hardware failure is preventing the Run 1. Wait until all tests in process are completed.
initialization. Module status changes to Stopped.
2. Review logs, page 10-14, for any error codes


error code.
Error code: 0240

Run request denied, Sample Handler hardware failure.

User selected run after a hardware failure. 1. Wait until the sample handler is Stopped.
2. Review logs, page 10-14, for any error codes



error code.
NOTE: If the hardware failure is not corrected
and run is selected again for the sample handler,
no error message is displayed and the sample
handler status does not change to Running.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0241

Invalid entry, date of birth must be today's date or earlier.

A birth date later than today's date was entered. Enter a valid birth date.
Error code: 0242

Bottle mismatch in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y), bottle is part of another
Reagent kit.
x = Reagent carrier position in which the bottle was detected
y = RSH section number

A bottle in the indicated position is already part of Load the correct bottles for the reagent kit or load a
another reagent kit. new reagent kit.
Error code: 0243

Unable to change configuration, (x) not in the correct state.
x = Sample handler or modules.

Attempted to configure settings while the sample 1. Pause the sample handler or Pause the
handler status is Running, or configure assays processing module, page 5-12.
while a processing module status is Running.
2. Perform the required configuration when the
module status is Ready.
Error code: 0244

Version mismatch for reagent kit in position (x).
x = Reagent carousel position.

The Reagent Configuration Version of the onboard Load the expected kit or assay file.
reagent kit is not the expected value.
NOTE: This error occurs if Clinical Investigation

reagents or assay files are used. Clinical
Investigation reagent bottles contain the text
Investigational Use Only. Clinical Investigation
assay files Cal Version parameter is 0 (zero).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0245

Invalid entry. The value for (x) must be less than the value for (y).
x = Field with invalid entry
y = Field with invalid entry

Minimum must be less than the value for maximum. Enter a number for parameter (x) that is less than
parameter (y).
Error code: 0246

Invalid entry. The value for (x) must be less than or equal to the value for (y).
x = Field with invalid entry
y = Field with invalid entry

Minimum range must be less than or equal to the Enter a value for parameter (x) that is less than or
value for maximum range. equal to parameter (y).
Error code: 0247

Invalid entry. One or more fields are empty. Enter valid data.

One or more data fields are empty. Enter valid data in the empty fields.
Error code: 0248

Input out of range.

The number entered is outside the specified range. Enter a number within the acceptable range.
Error code: 0249

Invalid entry, the Processing Module serial number must be in the correct format.

Processing module serial number entered is not in Enter the processing module serial number in the
the correct format. correct format.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0250

The starting Sample ID plus the number of samples exceeds the maximum Sample ID: (x)
allowed.
x = Maximum Sample ID allowed

No orders can be added in a non-bar coded batch Re-enter a valid starting sample ID that is less than
order type for patient orders because the ending the maximum sample ID number allowed. The rule
sample ID number is greater than 999,999,999. is: starting SID + number of samples must be less
than or equal to the maximum sample ID number
allowed.
• The maximum sample ID must be less than or
equal to 9 characters.
• The maximum number of samples allowed in a
non-bar coded batch is 5000.
Error code: 0251

Calibration canceled, calibrator detected during a batch run.

A calibrator was identified at the sample ID bar Wait until the batch has finished processing before
code reader when a batch was in process. The running calibrators.
batch continues processing. Or
Terminate the batch in process then run the
calibration, if a calibration is required immediately.
Error code: 0252

Duplicate Sample ID (x) detected in the batch (y), sample is ignored.
x = Sample ID
y = Batch name

In a bar coded batch, a sample was detected with Rerun the ignored sample.
the same sample ID as a sample already in
process.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0253

Duplicate Sample ID detected at (x) in batch (y). No batch orders are created.
x = Carrier and Position of sample
y = Batch name

In a non-bar coded batch one of two situations Order and run the batch tests for the sample at the
occurred: carrier and position indicated in the message.
• The batch contains the same sample ID as a bar
coded sample detected during the batch.
• Two non-bar coded batches have overlapping
sample IDs and neither of the sample IDs have
completed processing.
Error code: 0254

Unable to process control (x), ID is assigned to more than one control for assay (y).
x = Control ID
y = Assay name

The same bar code SID number is assigned to two Delete the ID number for controls that are not used
different levels within the same control lot number. or assign a different ID number to the new controls.
Error code: 0255

Batch Sample ID (x) not processed, unable to read bar code in C/P: (y).
x = Batch name
y = Carrier and Position

The carrier position number cannot be read by the Place a new batch order for the samples that are
bar code reader. not processed.
Error code: 0256

Invalid entry. The LAS serial number must be 8 characters and in the correct format.

The LAS serial number is entered incorrectly. It Enter the LAS serial number with 8 characters and
must be 8 characters and in the correct format. in the correct format.
Example: LAS00102

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0257

Invalid order, starting carousel position plus number of calibrators cannot exceed 20.

The number of calibrator levels exceeds the number Create a new order for the calibration.
of available positions on the LAS carousel.
Example: When creating a 2-point Adjust calibration
order, the starting position cannot be position 20.
Error code: 0258

C/P (x) already in use and is ignored in batch (y). An additional position will be added to
batch.
x = Carrier and position of the sample.
y = Batch name

A sample carrier, in which tests were still in process, 1. Create a patient order (single order),
was used to load a sample for a non-bar coded page 5-115, for the sample not included in the
batch. The position is not included in the batch and batch.
an additional position is added to the end of the
batch to complete the defined number of samples. If 2. Delete the additional batch sample result, if
a sample is in the added position, results are generated and not required. See Delete a patient
generated. result, page 5-195.
Error code: 0259

Invalid entry, SID field must not start with zero in a non-bar coded batch order.

In a non-bar coded batch order the Sample ID was Enter a number (1-9) as the first digit in the SID
started with a zero. data entry box.
Error code: 0260

Invalid entry, Sample ID length cannot exceed 20 characters.

The sample ID in a patient order is greater than 20 Enter a sample ID with 20 characters or less.
characters long.
Error code: 0261

Invalid entry, Sample ID length cannot exceed 9 characters in a non-bar coded batch order.

The sample ID in a non-bar coded batch order is Enter a sample ID with 9 numeric characters or
greater than 9 numeric characters. less.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0262

The reagent kit in section (x) has expired.

The indicated reagent is expired. Load a new, in-date reagent kit.
See Load reagents on the RSH (i 1000SR),
page 5-100.
Error code: 0263

A panel with the same name exists on the system. Choose a different panel name.

A panel with the same name exists. Enter a different panel name.
Error code: 0264

A panel name must be defined and a panel type must be selected before a panel can be
configured.

A panel name was not entered and/or a panel type Enter a panel name or select a panel type.
was not selected.
Error code: 0265

A panel should have at least 2 assays selected.

A panel was configured with less than 2 assays. Select 2 or more assays when configuring a panel.
Error code: 0266

Invalid entry, at least one dilution replicate must be entered.

The number of replicates was not entered for an Enter a number from 1-10 in the replicates field for
automated or manual dilution. an automated or manual dilution.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0267

The reagent kit in section (x) has exceeded stability time.

The indicated reagent has exceeded the onboard Load a new, in-date reagent kit.
stability time. See Load reagents on the RSH (i 1000SR),
page 5-100.
Error code: 0268

Carrier pick attempt failed at bay (x) section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

• Carrier is inserted backwards in the tray or priority Reposition the carrier in the tray or priority position.
position.
• Carrier is damaged. Rerun the sample in a different carrier.
• The insertion sensor is tripped when you dropped Reposition the carrier in the priority section.
a carrier back into the priority bay during removal.
– Section carrier detect sensor hardware failure.
– Carrier transport flex board
Error code: 0269

The reagent kit in section (x) has expired and exceeded stability time.

The indicated reagent is expired and has exceeded Load a new, in-date reagent kit.
the onboard stability time. See Load reagents on the RSH (i 1000SR),
page 5-100.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0270

Insufficient consecutive positions available for calibration order. (x) sample positions
required.
x = Number of sample positions required for the calibration order

For carriers:
• The number of positions required for the 1. Deselect assays from the calibration order to
calibration order exceeds the maximum number decrease the number of calibrators required for
of positions in five consecutive carriers. the order.
2. Create a new calibration order for the deselected

assays.
• The starting carrier ID plus the number of Re-enter a valid starting carrier ID. Start with a
samples for calibration exceeds the range carrier with a lower number.
(C001-C999) for the carrier. Starting carrier ID
cannot be greater then 995.
For carousels:
• The number of positions required for the 1. Deselect assays from the calibration order to
calibration order exceeds the number of available decrease the number of calibrators required for
positions on the carousel. the order.
2. Create a new calibration order for the deselected

assays.
Error code: 0271

Invalid entry, missing draw date or draw time.

In the patient demographics field, draw date or draw Enter draw date and draw time or leave both empty.
time is empty.
Error code: 0272

Draw date must be greater than January 1, 1970 and less than the current system time.

• A draw date earlier than January 1, 1970 was Enter a draw date greater than January 1, 1970.
entered in the patient demographics field.
• A draw date and time was entered with the Enter a draw time that is less than the current
current date but with the time later than the system time.
current time defined for the system.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0273

Priority carrier in bay (x) section (y) was removed before access was granted.
x = Bay number
y = Section number

• A priority carrier was removed before the access Restart the RSH. See Start up the processing
indicator was activated. module and/or sample handler, page 5-12.
• The insertion sensor is tripped when you dropped Reposition the carrier in the priority section.
a carrier back into the priority bay during removal.
– Carrier/tray sensor hardware failure.
– Unit detect board

– Sensor interface board
Error code: 0274

Tray in bay (x) was removed before access was granted.
x = Bay number

• A tray was removed before the access indicator Restart the RSH. See Start up the processing
was activated. module and/or sample handler, page 5-12.
• A tray is defective. Replace tray.
– Carrier/tray sensor hardware failure.
– Sensor interface board
Error code: 0275

Unable to process test, ICT reference solution inventory empty.

• ICT Reference Solution bottle is empty. Load a new bottle and update the inventory.
See Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
System), page 5-24.
NOTE: ICT Reference Solution can only be

loaded when the processing module status is
Stopped or Ready.
• The supplies screen was not updated when the Update the inventory.
ICT Reference Solution bottle was replaced. See Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
System), page 5-24.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• ICT Reference Solution bottle was removed from 1. Seat the bottle correctly on the weight platform.
the weight platform during the run.
2. Update the inventory.
See Replace bulk solutions and update inventory
(c System), page 5-24.
• Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
Error code: 0276

Invalid selection, a maximum of four constituent assays can be used in the formula.

Selected more than four constituent assays for a Select four or less assays for the calculated assay.
calculated assay.
Error code: 0277

Selected carrier/carousel and position in use by another control order for SID (x). Enter an
available C/P.
x = Sample ID

Carrier/carousel and position is in use by another Enter a carrier/carousel and position number that is
control order. not currently in use.
Error code: 0278

User defined reagent kit in position (x) was unassigned, bar coded cartridge scanned in
same position.
x = Reagent carousel segment and position

A bar coded reagent cartridge is loaded in a 1. If the non-bar coded reagent was moved to a
position in which a non-bar coded reagent was different position, assign the new position.
manually assigned. See Load non-bar coded reagents (c 4000),
page 5-79.
2. If the non-bar coded reagent is no longer

onboard, no action is required until the reagent is
loaded again. At that time, assign a new position.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0279

Invalid number of cartridges detected for (x) carousel segment (y) during reagent scan.
x = Carousel
y = Segment

Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
– Mislabeled reagent segment hardware failure.
Error code: 0280

Reagent kit in position (x) on carousel (y) is missing a required bottle. Print reagent load
error report.
x = Reagent segment and position
y = Reagent carousel

• The R1 reagent is onboard but the R2 reagent is Load both the R1 and R2 reagent cartridges.
not loaded, or the R2 reagent is onboard and the
R1 reagent is not loaded. NOTE: For the c 16000 processing module
ensure the R1 and R2 cartridges are both loaded
in either the outer (A-line) or inner (B-line)
carousels.
• The R1 or R2 reagent is already linked to a Replace with a new unused cartridge if a reagent
different kit. cartridge was used in a previous reagent kit.
• A reagent with a 1D (one-dimensional) bar code Delete the manually configured kit.
label matches a manually configured reagent kit. See Delete a reagent kit (c System), page 2-85.
A manually configured reagent kit requires the R1
and R2 reagent to have the same serial number.
Error code: 0281

Reagent kit in location (x) has component(s) loaded in wrong carousel(s).

• The reagent cartridge was placed in the wrong Move the reagent cartridge to the correct reagent
reagent supply center. supply center.
Error code: 0282

Invalid selection, each reagent supply center position must have different solution.

The same onboard solution is selected for more Select a different onboard solution option for each
than one reagent supply center position on the reagent supply center position.
Configure reagents - supplies screen.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0283

A control with the same name already exists. Choose a different multiconstituent control
name.

The multiconstituent control name entered is Enter a different control name.
already in use.
Error code: 0284

Unable to add control level, all data not defined for assays. Define data or delete assay.

The manufacturer mean and SD and/or expected Enter values for the manufacturer mean and SD
mean and SD are not defined for one or more and for the expected mean and SD for all assays.
assays.
Error code: 0285

Invalid entry, the RSH serial number must be 8 characters and in the correct format.

The RSH serial number is entered incorrectly. It Enter the RSH serial number with 8 characters and
must be 8 characters and start with RSH. in the correct format.
Example: RSH00103
Error code: 0286

Carrier detected in bay (x) section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

• A carrier was placed in a priority section that was Remove the carrier from the priority section.
not available.
– Section carrier detect sensor failure hardware failure.
Error code: 0287

Invalid batch order, Sample ID (x) already defined for batch (y).
x = Sample ID
y = Batch name

The starting sample ID for the bar coded batch Enter a unique starting sample ID for the batch
matches the starting sample ID of an existing batch order.
on the system.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0288

Selected Carrier/Carousel and Position in use by batch (x). Enter an available C/P.
x = Batch name

The starting carrier ID and position for the non-bar Enter a unique starting carrier ID/position for the
coded batch matches the starting carrier ID and batch order.
position for an existing batch on the system.
Error code: 0289

Unable to process test, sample removed from system.

The carrier or tray was removed from the RSH Replace the sample on the RSH and rerun the
before the test or retest was aspirated. exception.
Error code: 0290

Unable to process test, no sample diluent available.

• The required sample diluent is not loaded. Load sample diluent.
See Load sample diluent(s) (c 4000), page 5-76.
• The required sample diluent is empty. Replace sample diluent.
See Replace sample diluent(s) (c 4000), page 5-82.
Error code: 0291

Unable to process test, sample handler not in the correct status.

The sample handler status is not Scheduled pause Start up the sample handler. See Start up the
or Running. processing module and/or sample handler,
page 5-12.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0292

The reagent bottle in position (x) on carousel (y) has an undefined reagent name (z).
z = Scanned reagent name (first 5 digits of the bar code)

• A new reagent with a 1D (one-dimensional) bar Configure the new reagent before scanning the 1D
code label was loaded and scanned before the bar code.
new reagent was configured. See Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric
- c System), page 2-65.
• The reagent name defined for a reagent is not 1. Configure the reagent ensuring the reagent
identical to the first 5 digits of the 1D bar code name is identical to the first five digits of the 1D
label. bar code label.
See Configure a user-defined reagent
(photometric - c System), page 2-65.
2. Delete the incorrectly defined reagent, if desired.

See Delete a reagent (c System), page 2-83
• The 1D bar code label did not print correctly and Reprint the 1D bar code labels ensuring the first five
the first 5 digits do not match the first 5 digits of digits are identical to the defined reagent name.
the defined reagent name.
Error code: 0293

Carrier detected in section (x).

• A carrier was placed in a section that was not Remove the carrier from the section.
available.
– Carrier sensor arm

– RSH distribution board
Error code: 0294

Carrier pick attempt failed at section (x).

• Carrier is inserted backwards in the section. Reposition the carrier in the section.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Carrier is damaged. Use a different carrier.
– Rail guide sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0295

Carrier in section (x) was removed before access was granted.

• A carrier was removed before the access Restart the RSH. Start up the processing module
indicator was activated. and/or sample handler.
• A carrier is not seated in the section. Remove and reseat the carrier. Restart the RSH.
See Start up the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-12.
Error code: 0296

Carrier pick attempt failed at reagent carousel position (x).

• Reagent carrier is not seated correctly in the Remove the reagent carrier and perform a startup
reagent carousel. on the RSH.
Error code: 0297

Processing module stopped, RV unloader removed.

• RV unloader was removed during initialization or Ensure that the RV unloader is placed in the unload
while the system was running. position.
– RV unloader sensor hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0299

No bottle found in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y). Print reagent load error
report.
x = Reagent carrier position in which the bottle was missing

• There is no bottle in the indicated reagent carrier Load the correct bottle with the kit in the correct
position where expected. reagent carrier position.
• Label on a bottle in the indicated reagent carrier Turn the reagent bottle to expose a different area of
position cannot be read. the bar code to the reader.
See Load reagent bottles into reagent carrier(s) (i
1000SR), page 5-98.
Error code: 0300

Run request denied, hardware failure.

Hardware failure on a mechanism. 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 0304 error
message.



error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0301

Unable to process test, hardware failure.

Hardware failure on an item unique to either a 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 0304 error
one-step test or two-step test. codes that occurred at the same time as this
message.



error code.
Error code: 0302

Unable to process test, hardware failure or the user pressed Stop.

• User selected stop. Start up the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-12, when the reason for the stop no
longer exists.
• Hardware failure 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 0304 error
message.

you do not find any 0304 error codes.

error code.
Error code: 0303

Unable to process test, hardware failure or inventory item limited.

The processing module status changed to
Scheduled pause before this test arrived at the
module. This happened for one of the following
reasons:
• User selected pause. Restart the processing module or sample handler
when the reason for the pause no longer exists.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• An inventory item is limited on the module. Review the Supplies status screen. Add and update
the supplies. See Verify supply and waste inventory,
page 5-23.
NOTE: Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions can

only be loaded when the processing module
status is Stopped, Ready, or Warming. Wash
buffer can be loaded when the processing
module is in any status except Initializing,
Stopped, or Offline.
• A hardware failure occurred. 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 0304 error
message.



error code.
Error code: 0304

(x) failure.
x = Mechanism name

Hardware failure for the mechanism indicated. 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any error codes


error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0305

The One Step assay is disabled due to a hardware failure.

Hardware failure on an item required for processing 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 0304 error
a one-step assay. codes that occurred at the same time as this
message.



error code.
Error code: 0306

The Two Step assay is disabled due to a hardware failure.

a two-step assay. codes that occurred at the same time as this
message.



error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0307

Attempted to operate an un-initialized assembly (x).
x = Mechanism name

Hardware failure for mechanism indicated. 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 0304 error
message.



error code.
Error code: 0308

The (x) assay is disabled due to a hardware failure.
x = Assay type

the specified assay type. codes that occurred at the same time as this
message.



error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0310

Unable to process test, sample pipettor failed at sample cup/tube.

• Test is not processed due to sample pipettor that 1. Start up the processing module to remove the
is left in the sample cup or tube due to: probe from the sample cup or tube. See Start up
– User selected stop for the processing module. the processing module and/or sample handler,
page 5-12.
Or
– Damaged pipettor. 2. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve
any hardware failure, if the error continues.
hardware failure.
Error code: 0311

Unable to process test, sample handler component failed.

A sample handler component failed and the sample 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 0304 error
could not be delivered to the aspiration location. codes that occurred at the same time as this
message.



error code.
Error code: 0314

Control point excluded.

User excluded a control point, data is logged to QC Status message. No corrective action is required.
log.
Error code: 0315

Control point excluded by system.

System excluded a control point, data is logged to Status message. No corrective action is required.
QC log.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0316

RV hopper door solenoid activation attempted.

Solenoid activation attempted which allows RV to Status message. No corrective action is required.
drop from the upper hopper to the lower hopper.
Error code: 0317

Processing module stopped, no RV detected in process path.

RV (reaction vessel) inventory is empty. 1. Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 1000SR).
2. Start up the processing module. See Start up the

page 5-12.
Error code: 0350

Unable to process test, lamp failure.

An optics or lamp error occurred before or during 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 6500 category
processing of this test. error codes that occurred at the same time as
this message.


error code.
Error code: 0351

Unable to process test, water bath level low or temperature out of range.

Water bath level or temperature error occurred 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any water bath level
while processing the test. or temperature error codes that occurred at the
same time as this message.

you do not find any water bath level or
temperature category error codes.

error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0352

Unable to process test due to previous processing module error.

The test was not processed due to a previous 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any error codes
failure on the processing module. that occurred at the same time as this message.


error code.
Error code: 0353

System is configured to run in exhibition mode.

– CPU board is configured for Exhibition Mode. hardware failure.
Error code: 0400

Control point excluded by system, outside (x) standard deviation limit.
x = Standard deviation limit.

Control point excluded. The value is outside the 1. Verify the correct level was run.
system configured standard deviation limit, data is
logged to QC log. 2. See Observed Problems for corrective action.
See Controls out of range (c System),
page 10-590.
See Controls out of range (i System),
page 10-601.
3. Rerun the same control level(s) after performing

corrective action.
Error code: 0401

System QC inhibits Assay (x) on Processing Module (y).
x = Assay name
y = Processing module number (1-4)


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0402

Westgard rule (x) enabled for Assay (y).
x = Name of Westgard rule
y = Assay name

A Westgard rule was enabled for the specified Status message. No corrective action is required.
assay, information is logged to QC log.
Error code: 0403

Westgard rule (x) disabled for Assay (y).
y = Assay name

A Westgard rule was disabled for the specified Status message. No corrective action is required.
assay, information is logged to QC log.
Error code: 0404

Westgard rule (x) for Assay (y) changed to Failure.
y = Assay name

A Westgard rule was changed from Warning to Status message. No corrective action is required.
Failure for the specified assay, information is logged
to QC log.
Error code: 0405

Westgard rule (x) assay (y) changed to Warning.
y = Assay name

A Westgard rule was changed from Failure to Status message. No corrective action is required.
Warning for the specified assay, information is
logged to QC log.
Error code: 0406

Control configuration, original data.

The control configuration was edited for a defined Status message. No corrective action is required.
control level, information is logged to QC log.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0407

Control configuration, current data.

The control configuration was edited for a defined Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0408

Control point included.

User included a control point, data is logged to QC Status message. No corrective action is required.
log.
Error code: 0409

Units changed for Assay (x) number (y). Existing QC values will be excluded from the QC
data plot.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The unit used to report results for the indicated Status message. No corrective action is required.
assay was changed. All QC results for the previous
units will be excluded from the QC data
Levey-Jennings plot. Excluded data is not used
during Westgard analysis.
Error code: 0411

System QC uninhibits Assay (x) on Processing Module (y).
x = Assay name

Error code: 0412

Operator inhibits Assay (x) on Processing Module (y).
x = Assay name


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0413

Operator uninhibits Assay (x) on Processing Module (y).
x = Assay name

Error code: 0414

Westgard Warning (x) received for control.
x = Assay name, control name, control level, Westgard rule symbolic name.

The control received a Westgard Warning flag. 1. Review QC results for specified control.
2. See Observed Problems for corrective action.

page 10-590.
page 10-601.

corrective action.
Error code: 0415

System QC excludes result, Westgard rule (x) was activated.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0416

Westgard Failure (x) received for control.
x = Assay name, control name, control level, Westgard rule symbolic name.

The control received a Westgard failure flag. 1. Review QC results for specified control.
2. See Observed Problems for corrective action.

page 10-590.
page 10-601.

corrective action.
Error code: 0418

Lot (x) for control (y) is the default lot.
x = Default control lot number
y = Control name

Control configuration was edited for a defined Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0419

Westgard Run Specification changed.

Changed the Westgard time limit definition for a Status message. No corrective action is required.
Run. Action performed by an Abbott Representative
at the request of the customer.
Error code: 0420

Westgard failure auto-exclusion feature enabled.

Changed the Westgard failure auto-exclusion from Status message. No corrective action is required.
FALSE to TRUE. Action performed by an Abbott
Representative at the request of the customer.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0421

Westgard failure auto-exclusion feature disabled.

Changed the Westgard failure auto-exclusion from Status message. No corrective action is required.
TRUE to FALSE. Action performed by an Abbott
Error code: 0422

Control result outside (x) standard deviation auto-exclusion feature enabled.
x = Standard Deviation limit

Changed the Westgard Standard Deviation Limit or Status message. No corrective action is required.
changed the statistical accumulation criteria from
FALSE to TRUE. Action performed by an Abbott
Error code: 0423

Control result outside (x) standard deviation auto-exclusion feature disabled.
x = Standard Deviation limit

Changed the Westgard Standard Deviation Limit or Status message. No corrective action is required.
changed the statistical accumulation criteria from
TRUE to FALSE. Action performed by an Abbott
Error code: 0424

Reduction of lot or level limits not allowed.

Changed the Westgard control configuration limits Status message. No corrective action is required.
to a smaller size. Action performed by an Abbott
Error code: 0425

QC time interval expired: control (x) level (y) for assay (z). Load specified control.
x = Control name
y = Control level name
z = Assay name

The configured QC time interval was exceeded. Run specified control(s).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0426

QC test count interval expired: control (x) level (y) for assay (z). Load specified control.
x = Control name
y = Control level name
z = Assay name

The configured QC test count interval was Run specified control(s).
exceeded.
Error code: 0500

Operator requested Stop on Sample Handler.

Unable to complete the motor command because Start up the sample handler when the reason for
user selected stop. the stop no longer exists. See Start up the
page 5-12.
Error code: 0501

Power On Self Test (POST) starting on module (x).
x = Module Number (0-4)

Power on self tests (POST) are starting on the Status message. No corrective action is required.
indicated module.
Error code: 0502

Optics values modified.

The optics values for linearity or normalization were Status message. No corrective action is required.
modified by the user.
Error code: 0503

System Control Center (SCC) shutdown.

System control center shutdown correctly. Status message. No corrective action required.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0504

User (x) logged on.
x = User name

The indicated user successfully logged on the Status message. No corrective action is required.
system control center.
Error code: 0505

Configuration changes take effect next time SCC is started.

Edited serial port configuration. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5, for new
configuration to take effect.
Error code: 0506

Retest rule (x) for Assay number (y) was deleted because an assay required for this rule was
deleted.
x = Name of retest rule
y = Assay number

An assay required for the retest rule was deleted. Reinstall the deleted assay and re-define the rule, if
the retest rule is required.
Error code: 0507

Decimal separator changed from (x) to (y). Make sure your host system, if configured,
supports this number format.
x = Previously used separator
y = New separator

The symbol used as the decimal separator was Status message. No corrective action is required.
changed from the SCC Configuration screen.
NOTE: Data generated prior to this change does

not have the new format. All data generated after
this change uses the new format.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0508

Batch (x) deleted, unreleased results are at the limit.
x = Name of Batch

The number of unreleased results is at the Release or delete unreleased patient results,
maximum. quality controls, and exceptions currently on the
system.
Error code: 0509

Unreleased patient results are at 90 percent of capacity. Release patient results or delete
patient exceptions.

Unreleased results are at 90% of the system Release or delete unreleased patient results,
capacity. quality controls, and exceptions currently on the
system.
Error code: 0510

System backup complete.

The system backup procedure is complete. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0511

Thousands separator changed from (x) to (y). Make sure your host system, if configured,
supports this number format.
x = Previously used separator
y = New separator

The symbol used as the thousands separator was Status message. No corrective action is required.
changed using the SCC Configuration screen.
NOTE: Data generated prior to this change does

not have the new format. All data generated after
this change uses the new format.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0512

System (x) restore complete.
x = Name of backup

The requested restore was complete. Status message.
Contact your Area Customer Support if the backup
data was not restored.
Error code: 0513

User manually failed calibration curve.

User manually failed a calibration curve. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0514

Control (x) excluded by system, outside (y) standard deviation limit.
x = Control name, control level, assay name
y = Standard Deviation limit

Control point excluded. The value is outside the 1. Verify the correct level was run.
system configured standard deviation limit, data is
logged to QC log. 2. See Observed Problems for corrective action.
page 10-590.
page 10-601.

corrective action.
Error code: 0515

Control (x) excluded by system, Westgard rule (y) activated.
x = Control name, control level name, assay name
y = Rule name

Auto-exclusion feature is active and a control point Status message. No corrective action is required.
failed the specified Westgard rule. The control point
is not used in statistical analysis.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0516

It will take (x) minutes to pause the modules. Are you sure you want to pause the selected
modules?
x = Number of minutes

User selected pause for a processing module while Select OK to pause the processing module.
test were scheduled or running. Or
Select Cancel if you do not want to pause the
processing module.
Error code: 0517

System time and/or date setting was changed.

The system time, date or daylight savings settings Status message. No corrective action is required.
were changed.
Error code: 0518

Avoid loading calibrators, QC, priority samples or leaving empty spaces in a carrier when
running a non-bar coded batch.

Informational message telling the user to avoid Status message. No corrective action is required.
loading calibrators, controls, priority samples, or
leaving empty spaces in a carrier when running a
non-bar coded batch.
Error code: 0519

Data archive complete.

The requested data archive procedure successfully Status message. No corrective action is required.
completed.
Error code: 0520

System language changed to (x) by user (y).
x = Language
y = User ID

The system language was changed on the system Status message. No corrective action is required.
control center configure screen.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0521

Data archive canceled.

The Cancel button on the progress bar was Status message. No corrective action is required.
selected while archiving data.
Error code: 0522

Retest rule (x) for Assay number (y) was modified because an assay required for this rule was
deleted.
x = Retest rule number
y = Assay number

An assay required for the retest rule was deleted. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0523

For module configuration changes to take effect, the SCC will shutdown.

A change to the module configuration was made. Status message. No corrective action is required.
The system automatically shuts down.
Error code: 0524

Incomplete module configuration, system shutting down.

The Cancel button was selected on the initial 1. Repeat the initial module configuration after
module configuration screen. rebooting the system.
2. Select Done.
Error code: 0525

An automatic screen refresh has been performed.

The screen was automatically refreshed due to a 2 Status message. No corrective action is required.
hour period of inactivity.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0526

Empty tray detected in bay (x).
x = The number of the bay containing the empty tray

• An empty tray was loaded in the bay. Status message. No corrective action is required.
– Carrier/Tray sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0527

Number of Unreleased Control Results reached limit. New orders will not be accepted.

The number of unreleased control results has Delete or release QC results, exceptions, or
reached the limit. pending orders.
Error code: 0528

Unreleased Control Results are at 90 percent of capacity. Release Control Results or delete
exceptions.

Unreleased control results are at 90% of the system Delete or release unreleased control results and
capacity. exceptions currently on the system.
Error code: 0529

c System module powered ON.

The user powered on the module or the module Status message. No corrective action is required.
powered on after a power failure.
Error code: 0530

Suspend processing for sample (x).
x = Sample ID

Suspend was selected for a sample that was 1. Select OK to suspend the sample.
pending.
2. Wait until the RSH indicator lights to signal that
the sample is available to remove.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0531

No test orders found for Carrier (x), Position (y).
x = Carrier ID or CRSL
y = Carrier or carousel position

A bar coded tube scanned by the sample handler Place an order for the sample in the carrier.
did not have pending test orders.
Error code: 0532

Suspend request denied, sample not present.

The sample was removed from the system. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0534

Suspend processing for sample (x) on bay (y).
x = Sample ID
y = Bay number

Suspend was selected for a sample in process on 1. Select OK to suspend the sample.
the RSH.
2. Wait until the RSH indicator lights signal that the
sample is available to remove.
Error code: 0535

Number of calibrator tests reached limit. New Calibration orders will not be accepted.

The number of unreleased calibrator results has Delete calibrator exceptions or pending orders, or
reached the limit. wait until in-process calibrations complete.
Error code: 0536

No database found. A new database will be created. Wait for the snapshot screen to display
(up to 5 minutes).

No database exists, a new database will be created. Status message. No corrective action is required.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0537

Improper shutdown on SCC. Discard samples in carrier if carrier is located on RSH carrier
transport.

Main power source to the SCC was interrupted 1. Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier
causing an improper shutdown. transport and carrier positioner(s).
If the carrier is located on the RSH carrier, see
Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier
transport and aspiration area (RSH -
c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 10-696.
2. Determine the cause of the power interruption

and resolve.
Error code: 0538

RSH has gone offline. Discard samples in carrier if carrier is located on carrier transport.

Main power source to the RSH was interrupted 1. Discard samples in carrier if carrier is located on
while the module status was Scheduled pause or carrier transport.
Running. See Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier
c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 10-696.

and resolve.
3. Power on the processing module and/or sample

handler, page 5-7
Error code: 0540

Dilution for Assay number (y) was modified or deleted. Retest rule (x) may become invalid.
x = Retest rule number
y = Assay number

An assay dilution used in a retest rule was deleted Review the configured retest rules to determine if a
from the assay parameter file. change to an existing retest rule or a new retest rule
is desired. See Viewing assay settings, page 2-67.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0542

Unable to process test, reagent kit is unavailable.

User selected a reagent kit to be unloaded that had Load the required reagent kit.
scheduled tests in process. See Load reagents on the RSH (i 1000SR),
page 5-100.
Error code: 0544

Assay (x) number (y) definition has been changed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

An assay parameter was edited. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0545

Calculated Assay (x) number (y) was created.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

A calculated assay was automatically created Status message. No corrective action is required.
during assay installation.
Error code: 0546

Panel (x) was created.
x = Panel name

A panel name was automatically created during Status message. No corrective action is required.
assay installation.
Error code: 0547

Retest rule for Assay (x) number (y) was created.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

A retest rule was automatically created during Status message. No corrective action is required.
assay installation.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0548

Replenished RVs and updated inventory.

RVs were added to the hopper and the inventory Status message. No corrective action is required.
was updated.
Error code: 0550

Cuvette washing not completed, hardware failure or user pressed Stop. Promptly perform
the Wash cuvettes procedure.

• User selected stop. Restart the run that was in process as soon as the
reason for the stop no longer exists.
Or
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure Wash
Cuvettes if the run will not be restarted immediately.
The cuvettes should not be left dirty for extended
periods of time.
See 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-41.
• Hardware failure. 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any error codes


error code.
4. If the run will not be started immediately, perform

as-needed maintenance procedure Wash
Cuvettes as soon as the instrument is
operational. The cuvettes should not be left dirty
for extended periods of time.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0551

Units changed for CC Assay (x) number (y). Existing QC values will be excluded from the
QC data plot.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The unit used to report results for the indicated Status message. No corrective action is required.
assay was changed. All QC results for the previous
units will be excluded from the QC data
Levey-Jennings plot. Excluded data is not used
during Westgard analysis.
Error code: 0552

Update of c System module CPU firmware complete. Cycle the module power to complete
the update process.

The system has completed the upgrade of the Cycle power to the processing module and/or
c System module CPU firmware that was required sample handler, page 5-11.
during the upgrade of the ARCHITECT System
software.
Error code: 0553

Update of c System module DAQ firmware complete. Cycle the module power to complete
the update process.

The system has completed the upgrade of the Cycle power to the processing module and/or
c System module DAQ firmware that was required sample handler, page 5-11.
during the upgrade of the ARCHITECT System
software.
Error code: 0554

User-defined reagent kit in location (x) was unloaded, new segment type was scanned.

A new reagent supply center segment was scanned Define a new position for the non-bar coded
with fewer positions than the previous segment in reagent.
the location. A non-bar coded reagent was See Load non-bar coded reagents (c 4000),
assigned to a position that no longer exists. page 5-79.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0555

c System CPU firmware update required. Do not perform any module tasks until
completion message appears (up to 20 min).

An upgrade of the c System module CPU firmware Do not perform any activity on the module including
is in process. the following which send commands to the CPU
board:
• Pressing any keypad or sample carousel buttons
• Opening or removing any carousel covers
• Emptying the high-concentration waste bottle
A message displays when the upgrade is complete.
Wait for the message before performing any activity.
Error code: 0556

c System DAQ firmware update required. Do not perform any module tasks until
completion message appears (up to 20 min).

An upgrade of the c System module DAQ firmware Do not perform any activity on the module including
is in process. the following, which send commands to the DAQ
board:
• Pressing any keypad or sample carousel buttons
• Opening or removing any carousel covers
• Emptying the high-concentration waste bottle
Wait for the message indicating the upgrade is
complete.
Error code: 0557

TSB (x) is removed from system.
x = TSB number

A TSB was removed from the system. Status message. No corrective action required.
Error code: 0558

TSB (x) selected to install.
x = TSB number

A TSB was selected for installation. Status message. No corrective action required.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0559

TSB (x) is installed.
x = TSB number

A TSB was installed. Status message. No corrective action required.
Error code: 0560

No information available to print for selected update.

Customer letter or installation instructions are not Status message. No corrective action required.
available for this TSB.
Error code: 0561

Unable to process test, reagent kit is unavailable.

A reagent kit with scheduled tests pending has 1. Load reagent for the scheduled tests.
been removed from the system.
2. Rerun tests.
Error code: 0562

Reagent calibration type changed for the following assays (x).
x = List of the affected assays

The option to run calibrations by kit or lot was Status message. No corrective action required.
changed.
Error code: 0563

Assay (x) has been assigned to assay (y)
x = File assay
y = User-defined system assay

Assay from a calibrator or QC import file was Status message. No corrective action required.
assigned to a user-defined system assay with a
different assay number.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0564

Assay (x) has been unassigned.
x = User-defined system assay

A user-defined system assay was unassigned from Status message. No corrective action required.
a calibrator or control import file assay.
Error code: 0565

Suspend processing for sample (x) on bay (y) section (z).
x = Sample ID
y = Bay number
z = Section number

Suspend was selected for a sample in process on 1. Select OK to suspend the sample.
the RSH.
2. Wait until the RSH indicator lights signal that the
sample is available for removal.
Error code: 0600

Unable to install (x) number (y) as correlation assay, primary assay with same or higher
version exists.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Feature not currently available. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0601

Unable to install (x) number (y) as correlation assay, primary assay does not exist.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Feature not currently available. No corrective action is required.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0602

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, a higher version of the assay is already installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to install an older assay version when a If the older assay version is required:
newer assay version is already installed on the 1. Delete the most recently installed assay version.
system.
2. Install the older assay version. See Install or
delete an assay file, page 2-177.
Error code: 0603

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, assay with a higher calibration version already
installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to install an older assay version when a If the older assay version is required:
version with a higher calibration version is already 1. Delete the most recently installed assay version.
installed on the system.
Error code: 0604

Unable to install assay, at least one module is not in the correct status.

Attempted to install an assay while the processing Install the assay when the status for all processing
module(s) are not in the correct status. modules is Stopped, Ready, or Offline. See Install
or delete an assay file, page 2-177.
Error code: 0605

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, assay with same version is already installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to install an assay when the same Status message. No corrective action is required.
version is already installed on the system.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0606

Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Higher reagent version already installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to install an assay whose reagent If the older assay version is required:
configuration version is less than that of the 1. Delete the most recently installed assay version.
installed assay.
Error code: 0607

Assay (x) number (y) installation error. The module does not support this assay type.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to install a stat assay on the i 2000. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0608

Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid module configuration.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to install an assay not supported by the Configure the system with the appropriate
module configuration. module(s) and reinstall the assay.
Error code: 0609

Primary wavelength cannot be the same as the Secondary wavelength.

The primary wavelength cannot be the same as the Select a different primary or secondary wavelength
secondary wavelength. or select the option of "None" for the secondary
wavelength.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0610

Reaction check Read time A or Read time B not defined.

A Reaction check option is selected on the Define a range for both the Read time A and B
Configure assay parameters window - General - settings or select the Reaction check option of
Validity check view, but the Read time A and/or "None".
Read time B is not defined.
Error code: 0611

Invalid R1 or R2 reagent volume. (Range: 20-345 μL)

A value outside the limit of 20-345 μL is entered for Enter a value between 20-345 μL.
the R1 or R2 reagent volume.
Error code: 0612

Invalid R1 or R2 Water volume. (Range: 45-300 μL, or field can be blank)

A value outside the limit of 45-300 μL is entered for Enter a value between 45-300 μL or leave the field
the R1 or R2 water volume. blank for undiluted reagents.
Error code: 0615

Invalid total dilution volume. Sum of Sample, Diluent, and Water volumes must total
100-360 μL.

The combined sample, diluent, and water volume Change the entries in the Sample, Diluent, and/or
defined for a sample or calibrator dilution is less Water volume data entry boxes so the combined
than 100 μL or greater than 360 μL. volume is 100-360 μL.
At least 100 μL is required to ensure complete
mixing and 360 μL is the volume limit of the cuvette.
Error code: 0616

Diluent volume must be defined if Diluted sample and/or Water volume are defined.

A Diluted sample or Water volume is defined for a Enter a value between 20-345 μL for the Diluent
sample or calibrator dilution, but the Diluent volume volume or leave the Diluted sample and Water
is not defined. volume fields blank for undiluted samples.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0617

Assay name already exists, enter a different name.

The assay name entered is already used for Enter a unique assay name.
another assay parameter file.
Error code: 0618

Assay number already exists, enter a different assay number.

The assay number entered is already used for Enter a unique assay number.
another assay parameter file.
Error code: 0619

Undefined dilution selected as Default dilution. Select a different dilution as default.

The dilution option selected as the default does not Select a different dilution option as the default, or
have sample or diluent volumes defined. define the volumes for the selected option.
Error code: 0621

Invalid Assay Number. Assay Number for user-defined assays must be 2000 - 2999.

A user-defined assay can only be defined with an Enter an assay number between 2000-2999.
assay number between 2000-2999.
Error code: 0622

Last required read value (x) must be greater than or equal to the last read defined for all read
times.
x = Read point value defined in the last required read field

One of the following read times is defined with a Change the last required read to a read point equal
read point larger than the read point defined for the to or greater than the largest read point defined for
last required read. all the read times.
• Main read time
• Blank read time
• Flex read time
• Color correction read time
• Reaction check - Read time A
• Reaction check - Read time B

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0623

Reagent name already exists, enter a different name.

The reagent name entered is already used for Enter a unique reagent name.
another reagent.
Error code: 0624

Missing entry, Reagent name required.

The reagent name was not defined for a new Enter a unique reagent name.
reagent configuration.
Error code: 0625

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, reference assay does not exist.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to install a sample interference index 1. Install the desired reference photometric assay.
assay before installing the photometric assay that is Example: HILref or AST
used as a reference (for example, HILref or AST).
2. Install the sample interference index assay.
Attempted to install an assay that uses a reference 1. Install the desired reference assay.
calibration before installing the assay that is used
as the reference. 2. Install the assay that uses the reference assay.
Error code: 0626

Missing entry, Serial number required.

The serial number was not defined for a new Enter a serial number.
reagent kit configuration.
Error code: 0627

Serial number already exists for this lot number, enter a different Serial number.

The serial number entered is already used for the Enter a unique serial number for the reagent lot.
reagent lot.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0628

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, assay name already exists for a different assay.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

An assay parameter file with the same name but a Rename or delete the assay with the same name
different assay number already exists. prior to installing the new assay.
Error code: 0629

Sum of Sample, R1, and R2 volumes must be 160-360 μL. If R2 is used, Sample and R1
volume must be greater than 100 μL.

• The combined sample and reagent volumes Change the Sample (or Diluted sample) volume, R1
defined for a sample or calibrator dilution is less volume, R1 Water volume, R2 volume, and/or R2
than 160 μL or greater than 360 μL Water volume so the combined volume is 160-360
μL.
• The combined sample and R1 volumes defined Change the Sample (or Diluted sample) volume, R1
for two reagent assay is less than 100 μL. volume, and/or R1 Water volume so the combined
volume is equal to or greater than 100 μL.
Error code: 0630

Calibrator set name already exists, enter a different name.

The calibrator name entered is already used for Enter a unique calibrator name.
another calibrator set.
Error code: 0631

Lot number already exists for a different reagent, enter a unique lot number.

The lot number entered is already used for a Enter a unique lot number for the reagent.
reagent.
Error code: 0632

A sample diluent must be specified when a Diluent volume is defined.

A Diluent volume is defined for a sample or Select the Diluent list button, and then select the
calibrator dilution, but a diluent is not selected. desired sample diluent from the list.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0634

Diluted sample volume must be defined if Diluent volume is defined.

A Diluent volume is defined for a sample or Enter a value between 1.5 - 15.0 μL for the Diluted
calibrator dilution, but the Diluted sample volume is sample volume or leave the Diluent volume field
not defined. blank for undiluted samples.
Error code: 0635

Unable to save assay, missing parameter. Verify all assay parameters are defined.

A required parameter is not defined. Verify all required assay parameters are defined.
Error code: 0636

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, reagent name exists for a different reagent or sample
diluent.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The reagent name defined for the assay being Perform one of the following prior to installing the
installed is used for a different reagent or sample assay:
diluent already defined on the system. The assay • Edit the assay to be installed with a unique
installation does not complete. reagent name.
• Delete or edit the reagent or sample diluent
already defined on the system.
Error code: 0637

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, sample diluent name exists for a reagent.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The sample diluent name defined for the assay Perform one of the following prior to installing the
being installed is used for a reagent already defined assay:
on the system. The assay installation does not • Edit the assay to be installed with a unique
complete. sample diluent name.
• Delete or edit the reagent already defined on the
system.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0638

Missing entry, Lot Number required.

The lot number was not defined for a new reagent Enter a lot number.
kit configuration.
Error code: 0639

Interpretation categories must be defined consecutively starting with the first row.

An interpretation row was skipped when defining Define interpretations consecutively starting with
interpretation names. the first row.
Error code: 0640

Same calibrator selected for more than one level, calibrator concentrations must be the
same.

Entered different concentrations for the same Enter the same concentration for each use of the
calibrator level. calibrator level.
Error code: 0641

Reagent Lot contains non-alphanumeric characters.

The reagent lot entered contains a space or other Remove the space and make sure the reagent lot
non-alphanumeric character. contains only alphanumeric characters.
Error code: 0642

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, assay is already installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Attempted to import an assay when the same assay If the new assay is required:
is already installed on the system. 1. Delete the assay file currently installed. See
Install or delete an assay file, page 2-177.
2. Import the new assay file.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0643

Dilution Protocols must be defined in consecutive order starting from the first dilution.

The sample dilution protocols were not defined Define the dilution protocols in the correct order
consecutively. The first and/or second row was left starting from the first row. Do not leave a row empty
undefined. and define a row below it.
Error code: 0644

Sample probe wash type converted to Maximum Wash for Assay (x) number (y).
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The sample probe wash changed from Optimized No corrective action required.
throughput (c 8000 only) to Maximum wash (c 8000 For more information see Descriptions of import
and c 16000) for an assay file exported and then status messages, page Appendix E-150.
imported between an ARCHITECT c 8000 and
c 16000 System.
Error code: 0645

One or more wavelengths were changed for Assay (x) number (y).
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

A wavelength was changed for an assay file No corrective action required.
exported and then imported between an For more information see Descriptions of import
ARCHITECT c 8000 and c 16000 System. status messages, page Appendix E-150.
Error code: 0646

Reagent/Diluent dispense mode converted to type 1 for assay (x) number (y).
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

An assay file with a dispense mode of either Type 3 No corrective action required.
or Type 4 was installed on a CC module. For more information see Configure assay
parameters window - General - Reaction definition
view (photometric - c System) field descriptions,

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0700

Run request denied, Processing Module cover open.

• A processing module cover is open. Close all covers, and then select run.
– Cover sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0701

Processing Module Stopped, cover opened.

• A processing module cover was opened during a Close the cover and restart the run.
run.
• A processing module cover was opened during a Select OK. No corrective action required.
diagnostic procedure.
Error code: 0702

Reagent scan canceled, Reagent Carousel Cover opened.

• Reagent carousel cover is open. Close the cover and repeat the scan.
Error code: 0703

Request canceled, Reagent Carousel Cover is open.

• Reagent carousel cover is open. Close the reagent carousel cover.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0704

Run request denied, Processing Queue access door open module (x), close door and press
Run.

• Processing queue access door is open on the Close the processing queue access door.
sample handler.
– Sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0705

Processing Queue access door opened on Processing Module (x).

• A processing queue access door was opened 1. Close the processing queue access door.
2. Start up the sample handler if status is Stopped.

See Start up the processing module and/or
sample handler, page 5-12.
– Sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0706

Run request denied, LAS Carousel cover is open. Close cover and press Run.

• LAS carousel cover is open. Close the LAS carousel cover and select run.
– LAS carousel cover sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0707

LAS Carousel cover opened.

• LAS carousel cover was opened while the LAS 1. Close the LAS carousel cover.
carousel status was Running or Scheduled
pause. 2. Start up the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-12.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0708

Run request denied, cover(s) open. Close cover(s) and press Run.

• A processing module or RSH cover was open Close the cover and select run.
when starting a run.
– RSH cover sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0709

RSH stopped, cover opened.

• A processing module or RSH cover was opened 1. Close the cover.
while the sample handler status was Running,
Scheduled pause, or Initializing. 2. Start up the sample handler. See Start up the
page 5-12.
Error code: 0710

Reagent supply center cover is open.

A reagent supply center cover is open: 1. Close the reagent supply center covers.
• When attempting to initiate a run.
2. Restart the run or perform another reagent scan.
• During a run when the access light on the keypad
is not illuminated.
• When attempting a reagent scan.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0711

Sample carousel cover is open.

• The sample carousel cover is open: 1. Close the sample carousel cover.
– When attempting to initiate a run.
2. Restart the run.
– During a run when the sample carousel
access indicator (square) is not illuminated.
• Sample carousel cover sensor did not detect that 1. Verify the status of the sample carousel access
the cover was closed. indicator button. If the button is not illuminated,
select the button to pause the sample carousel.
2. Open and then firmly close the sample carousel

cover.
Error code: 0712

Startup request denied, Processing Module cover open.

• The processing module cover was open when Close the processing module cover.
start up was selected.
Error code: 0713

Startup request denied, cover(s) open. Close cover(s) and press Startup.

• A processing module or RSH cover was open 1. Close the cover.
when start up was selected.
2. Start up the sample handler. See Start up the
page 5-12.
Error code: 0714

Startup request denied, LAS Carousel cover is open.

• The LAS carousel cover was open when start up Close the LAS carousel cover.
was selected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0715

Reagent supply center cover is open or the reagent supply center maintenance cover not
detected.

• The reagent supply center cover is open. Close the cover and restart the run.
• The reagent supply center maintenance cover Install or reseat the reagent supply center
has been removed or is not seated correctly. maintenance cover.
Error code: 0716

Front processing center cover is open.

• The front processing center cover is open. Close the cover and restart the run.
Error code: 0717

Rear processing center cover is open.

The rear processing center cover is open. No corrective action required.
Error code: 0718

Reagent access door is open.

The reagent access door is open. No corrective action required.
Error code: 0800

Unable to perform requested operation, remove carrier(s) from carrier positioner(s).

Carriers are present on the carrier positioner while Remove carrier(s) from carrier positioner(s).
attempting to perform a start up for the RSH.
Carriers may be present because a user selected
stop while the RSH was running, power to the
processing module(s) and RSH was interrupted, or
the RSH was stopped due to hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0801

Unable to save edits when orders exist for the selected assay (x).
x = Assay name

Attempted to edit an assay when pending or Delete the pending orders or wait until the orders
running orders exist for the assay. are complete before trying to edit the assay.
Error code: 0802

Carrier in carrier transport arm. Please remove.

• The RSH was stopped and a carrier was detected Remove carrier(s) from transport arm.
in the transport arm. See Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier
The RSH may be stopped because a user transport and aspiration area (RSH -
selected stop while the RSH was running, power c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 10-696.
to the processing module(s) and RSH was
interrupted, or the RSH was stopped due to
hardware failure.
Error code: 0803

Unable to delete assay (x), it is being referenced by another assay (y).
x = Assay name of the assay to be deleted
y = Assay name of the assay that is referring to assay to be deleted

The assay to be deleted is referenced in another Perform one of the following to the assay that is
assay file. referring to the assay to be deleted:
• Delete the assay. See Install or delete an assay
file, page 2-177.
• For a photometric assay, select the Use Cal
Factor from the list button, and then select a
different assay.
• For a sample interference assay, select the
Reference photometric assay list button, and
then select a different assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0804

Unable to delete reagent until all kits are deleted and any assay file defined to use this
reagent is edited.

• Reagent kits are defined for the reagent. Delete all reagent kits prior to deleting the reagent.
Contact your Area Customer Support.
• The reagent is defined for use in an assay Perform one of the following prior to deleting the
parameter file. reagent:
• Change the Reagent parameter in the assay to
use a different reagent.
• Delete the assay that uses the reagent. See
Install or delete an assay file, page 2-177.
Error code: 0805

Unable to configure, a reagent is currently assigned to position D1.

A bar coded reagent was scanned or non-bar Unload the reagent in position D1 prior to
coded reagent was assigned in position D1 of configuring an onboard solution into the position.
reagent supply center 1 and/or 2.
Error code: 0806

Unable to use (x) inventory in position (y), bar coded reagent found in the same location.
x = Inventory item
y = Reagent carousel segment and position

A bar coded reagent was scanned in an onboard 1. Unload the reagent.
solution position of the reagent supply center. See Unload bar coded reagents (c 4000),
page 5-87.
2. Load the expected onboard solution.

See Replace onboard solutions in the reagent
supply center and update inventory (c 4000),
page 5-29.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0808

Unable to perform requested operation, cuvette segment alignment tool was not removed.

• The cuvette segment alignment tool was not Remove the cuvette segment alignment tool and
removed after performing a pipettor calibration replace the cuvette segment into the position.
procedure.
• Water is present on the slotted edges of a cuvette Dry off the slotted edge of the cuvette segment.
segment.
• Cuvette tab is broken. Replace the cuvette segment.
See Replace a cuvette segment (c 4000),
page 9-100.
– Optics trigger sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0809

Unable to change level, level has not been added.

A multiconstituent control level was not added Add the multiconstituent control level before
before the user tried to create another level. selecting another level.
Error code: 0810

Unable to change lot number, level for current lot has not been added.

Attempted to edit the lot number for a Add the control level for the current lot before trying
multi-constituent control before adding the control to change the lot number.
level.
Error code: 0811

Unable to delete assay (x), it is being referenced by another assay.
x = Assay name of the assay to be deleted

Attempted to delete an assay that is referenced in Delete or edit the assay file that is referencing the
another assay parameter file. assay before deleting the assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0812

Unable to delete assay (x), the assay is a constituent of a calculated assay (y).
x = Assay name
y = Calculated assay name

Attempted to delete an assay that is defined as a Delete or edit the calculated assay before deleting
constituent of a calculated assay. the constituent assay.
Error code: 0813

Unable to process test, carrier cannot be transported.

The carrier could not be picked up from either a tray
section or carrier positioner pocket due to:
position.
• Carrier transport is not aligned. Perform Transport Calibration.
See as-needed maintenance procedure 1114
Carrier Transport Calibration, page 9-70
(c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100).
Error code: 0815

Unable to process test, carrier ID/position bar code read error at aspiration point.

If error occurs for one carrier:
• Carrier bar code label is damaged, wet, or dirty. 1. Clean the carrier bar code label.
2. Use a different carrier, if error continues.

If error occurs for multiple carriers:
• Bar code reader window is dirty. Clean the bar code reader window, page 10-687.
– Bar code reader hardware failure.
Error code: 0816

Unable to process test, sample suspend requested.

Suspend was selected on the Sample status screen Rerun the sample.
and the sample becomes an exception and is not
processed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0817

Unable to suspend processing, sample located on sample carousel.

Suspend was selected on the Sample status screen 1. Verify the status of the sample carousel access
for a sample processing on the sample carousel. indicator button.
2. If the button is not illuminated, select the button

to pause the sample carousel or wait until the
sample carousel is finished processing all the
samples before accessing the sample.
Error code: 0818

Unable to suspend processing, sample has not been scanned by the RSH.

Suspend was selected for a sample that was not Wait until the sample is identified before attempting
scanned by the RSH. to suspend the sample.
Error code: 0819

Unable to suspend processing, sample handler not in correct status.

Suspend was selected for a sample when the RSH Sample access is allowed unless the RSH status is
status is not Running or Scheduled pause. Running or Scheduled pause.
Error code: 0820

Unable to suspend processing, batch is in process.

Suspend was selected for a sample when batch Wait until the batch is completed or delete the
was in process. batch.
Error code: 0821

Unable to suspend processing, blank calibrator sample selected.

Suspend was selected for a water blank calibrator Select a different calibrator level located on the
sample. RSH.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0822

Unable to delete calibrator set, calibrator is used by an assay.

The calibrator set is defined for use in an assay Perform one of the following prior to deleting the
parameter file. calibrator set:
• Assign the assays to a different calibrator set.
See Change photometric assay calibrator
settings (c System), page 2-147.
• Delete the assay that uses the calibrator set.
See Delete a reagent kit (c System), page 2-85
and Delete a reagent (c System), page 2-83.
Error code: 0823

Unable to reduce number of calibrator set levels.

Attempted to reduce the number of calibrator set You must perform one of the following to reduce the
levels for a calibrator. number of levels for the calibrator set:
• Edit the number of calibrator levels used in the
Configure assay parameters - Calibration -
Calibrators view window.
See Configure a photometric assay (c System),
page 2-59.
• Reassign the assay to a different calibrator set
that uses fewer calibrator levels.
See Change photometric assay calibrator
settings (c System), page 2-147.
Error code: 0824

You have selected too many results. Select no more than (x) results for each Absorbance
report print request.
x = Maximum number of results

More than 1000 results were selected when Select less than 1000 results when printing an
attempting to print an Absorbance report. Absorbance report and try again.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0825

Unable to perform the selected procedure, another procedure is already in process on the
module.

Attempted to perform a diagnostic procedure or a Wait until the maintenance procedure currently in
new maintenance procedure on a module that process is complete before starting a diagnostic
already has a maintenance procedure in process. procedure or a new maintenance procedure.
Error code: 0826

Unable to perform the selected procedure, a required module is being used by another
procedure already in process.

Attempted to perform a maintenance procedure on Wait until the maintenance procedure currently in
a module that is being used by a maintenance process is complete before starting a new
procedure in process on another module. maintenance procedure.
Error code: 0827

Unable to perform diagnostic procedures while module is in the Maintenance state.

Attempted to perform a diagnostic procedure on a Wait until the maintenance procedure currently in
module that has a maintenance procedure in process is complete before starting a diagnostic
process. procedure.
Error code: 0828

Unable to unload reagent carrier, RSH sections full.

• Carriers are loaded in every RSH section. Remove a carrier from an RSH section to make
room to unload the reagent carrier.
– Carrier sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0829

Unable to load reagent carrier, all reagent carousel positions full.

• Reagent carriers are loaded in every reagent Unload a reagent carrier for an assay that is no
carousel position. longer required for testing to make room to load the
reagent carrier.
– Reagent carrier detect sensor hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0830

Request canceled, RV unloader is not detected.

• RV unloader was not detected during Ensure that the RV unloader is placed in the unload
initialization. position.
• RV unloader is not seated correctly. Reseat the RV unloader.
– RV unloader sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 0831

Unable to perform requested operation, remove carrier from aspiration area.

A carrier is present in the aspiration area while Remove the sample carrier(s) from the carrier
attempting to perform a Startup on the RSH. A transport and aspiration area.
carrier may be present because a user selected
stop while the RSH was running, power to the
processing module and RSH was interrupted, or the
RSH was stopped due to hardware failure.
Error code: 0832

Carrier transport preventing (x) from performing initialization.
x = Mechanism name

Attempted to initialize the processing module when 1. Start up the sample handler.
the carrier transport is not initialized.
2. Start up the processing module. See Start up the
page 5-12.
Error code: 0833

Invalid entry. None is not a valid calibrator set name. Define a different calibrator set name.

The word "None" was entered as a calibrator set Enter a different calibrator set name.
name.
Error code: 0834

Invalid entry. Lot number already exists for this calibrator set.

A duplicate calibrator lot number was entered. Enter a unique calibrator lot number.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0835

Unable to delete assay from the calibrator set default lot.

Attempted to delete an assay from the default lot of Assign the assay to a different calibrator set.
a calibrator set.
Error code: 0836

Assay cannot be enabled. Calibrator values must be defined for the calibrator set.

Calibrator values have not been entered for this 1. Enter the calibrator values. See Change
assay in the calibrator set. photometric assay calibrator settings (c System),
page 2-147.
2. Enable the assay.
Error code: 0837

Unable to delete this lot, pending orders exist or it is the default lot.

Attempted to delete a calibrator lot when pending or Delete the pending orders or wait until the orders
running orders exist for an assay included in the lot. are complete before deleting the lot.
Attempted to delete the default calibrator lot. A 1. Define a new default calibrator lot.
default lot must be defined.
2. Delete the desired calibrator lot.
Error code: 0838

Unable to import data, no eligible file found.

Import data file is not found on the CD-ROM or flash 1. Locate the CD or flash drive with the files to be
drive. imported.
2. Repeat the data import procedure. See Import

calibrator data (c System), page 2-152, Import
control data (c System), page 2-150, or Import
control data (i System), page 2-151.
Attempted to import a file after a previous import 1. Remove and reinsert the flash drive.
without removing the USB flash drive
2. Repeat the data import procedure. See Import
calibrator data (c System), page 2-152, Import
control data (c System), page 2-150, or Import
control data (i System), page 2-151.
System calibrator set name does not match the Select the system calibrator set that corresponds to
import file. the import file.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Attempted to import a QC data file in the Configure Select the appropriate function for the file type.
calibrator set window.
Attempted to import a calibrator set data file in the Select the appropriate function for the file type.
Configure multiconstituent control window.
CD disk is dirty. Clean disk. Refer to the CD cover for cleaning and
CD disk is defective. Copy data files to a new disk.
Error code: 0900

Wrong lot, component or serial number in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y).

A bottle with the wrong lot number, component ID, 1. Print the reagent load error report.
or serial number is loaded in the indicated reagent
carrier position and RSH section. 2. Load the correct bottle for the kit in the correct
position.
Error code: 0901

Calibration version mismatch for reagent kit in section (x).

Calibration version for the reagent kit in the RSH 1. Load a reagent kit matching the currently
section indicated does not match the currently installed assay version.
installed assay.
NOTE: Deplete the supply of reagents for the old
assay before installing the new assay.
2. Install the new assay file when the current supply

of reagents is depleted. See Install or delete an

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0902

Version mismatch for reagent kit in section (x). This kit cannot be used on the i 1000

The Reagent Configuration Version of the reagent Load the expected kit or assay file.
kit in the RSH section indicated is not the expected
value.
NOTE: This error occurs if Clinical Investigation

reagents or assay files are used. Clinical
Investigation reagent bottles contain the text
Investigational Use Only. Clinical Investigation
assay files Cal Version parameter is 0 (zero).
Error code: 0903

Reagent kit in location (x) has R1 and R2 components loaded on different reagent lines.

A reagent kit with 2 cartridges (R1 and R2) has Load the reagent cartridges for the assay on the
cartridges loaded on different lines (outer and inner) same line in both the R1 and R2 reagent supply
in the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers. centers. Choose one of the following options:
• Load the reagent cartridges for the assay on the
outer (A-line) carousel of R1 and R2 reagent
supply centers.
• Load the reagent cartridges for the assay on the
inner (B-line) carousel of R1 and R2 reagent
supply centers.
Error code: 0904

Reagent carrier in section (x) is a 500 test reagent kit. This kit cannot be used on this system.

A 500 test reagent kit was loaded on the i1000SR. Remove the 500 test reagent kit.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0905

Unload the two carrier reagent kit in sections (x) before trying to reload.

• One reagent carrier of a two carrier kit was Remove both carriers of a two carrier reagent kit
removed from the load/unload area. before reloading the reagent kit on the system.
• A two carrier reagent kit's on board stability has Remove both carriers of a two carrier reagent kit
been overridden and one reagent carrier has from the load/unload area and reload them.
been removed from the load/unload area.
Error code: 0906

Reagent packs for Assay (x) loaded on both reagent lines.
x = Assay

Reagent packs for the same assay were found on Load reagent cartridges for the same assay on the
both the outer (A-line) and inner (B-line) carousels same line, either outer (A-line) or inner (B-line), in
for the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers. the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.
Error code: 0908

Invalid calibration order, Sample ID (x) already exists.
x = Sample ID

A duplicate calibration order was requested for an Wait until the first calibration completes for the
assay. assay before creating another calibration order for
the same assay.
Error code: 0909

Invalid entry. The value for Low Linearity must not be less than 0.

A value less than zero was entered. Enter a value above zero.
Error code: 0910

Invalid entry. The value for High Linearity must be less than (x) for dilution description 1.
x = Assay default High Linearity

A value greater than the assay default High Enter a value lower than the assay default High
Linearity was entered. Linearity.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0911

Carrier partially inserted, inserted too slowly, or inserted then dropped into section (x).

Carrier was partially inserted or inserted too slowly. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0912

Carrier detected in section (x). This section is not available. Remove carrier.

A carrier was placed in a section that was not Remove the carrier and place the carrier in a
available. section that is available.
Error code: 0913

Unable to save calibrator set, missing data. Define calibrator values for assay (x) in lot (y).

Required calibrator values have not been entered Enter the calibrator values. See Change
for the assays and lots indicated. photometric assay calibrator settings (c System),
page 2-147.
Error code: 0914

Carrier detected in bay (x) section (y). This section is not available. Remove carrier.
x = Bay number
y = Section number

A carrier was placed in a section that was not Remove the carrier and place the carrier in a

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0915

Carrier detected in bay (x) section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

• A carrier was placed in a section that was not Remove the carrier and place the carrier in a
– Carrier sensor arm

Error code: 0916

Carrier pick attempt failed at bay (x) section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

Error code: 0917

Carrier in bay (x) section (y) was removed before access was granted.
x = Bay number
y = Section number

• A carrier was removed before the access Restart the RSH. See Start up the processing
indicator was activated. module and/or sample handler, page 5-12.
• A carrier is not seated in the section. 1. Remove and reseat the carrier.
2. Remove and reseat the carrier. Restart the RSH.

See Start up the processing module and/or

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 0918

Carrier partially inserted, inserted too slowly, or inserted then dropped into the bay (x)
section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

Carrier was partially inserted or inserted too slowly. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Assay specific error codes (1000-1999)

The assay specific error code category includes error codes between
1000-1999.
representative at:


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1000

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, Cal 1 or Cal 2 final read is below specifications.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

• Wrong Cal 1 or Cal 2 used for the assay If other assays are performing without error, place
calibration. fresh Cal 1 and Cal 2 into sample cup ensuring they
are for the correct assay and are placed in the
correct positions.
• Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions were loaded in 1. Rinse the floats with DI water, and then dry.
the wrong positions or the tubing assemblies
were switched. 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger.
See Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution
and update inventory (i 1000SR), page 5-46.

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
– 2137 Flush Fluids, page 9-61
– 2162 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger,
page 9-62
• Level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the pre-trigger or
trigger bottle so the arrow faces toward the front.
When the level sensor is correctly installed, the
electrical connector is on the right and the tubing
is on the left.
2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure

2137 Flush Fluids, page 9-61 for i 1000SR.
• Pre-trigger or trigger solution volume is too low. Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and
update inventory (i 1000SR), page 5-46.
• Pre-trigger and trigger bottles were replaced Perform the following as-needed maintenance
while processing tests, so air may have been procedures:
aspirated instead of reagent. • For i 1000SR:
page 9-62
– Pre-trigger or trigger pumps hardware failure.
– Pre-trigger or trigger valves

– Pre-trigger or trigger tubing connections are
loose
– Motor driver board has a poor connection or
failed

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1001

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, final read too high for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

• Wrong calibrator was used or the calibrator was Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or
loaded incorrectly. tubes ensuring they are placed in the correct
positions.
• Calibrators are not performing as expected. Open new calibrator bottles.
• Reagent is not performing as expected. Load new reagent bottles.
Error code: 1002

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, final read too low for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1003

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, final read too high for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1004

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, final read too low for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1005

Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside the specification of the lowest
calibrator.

RLU read is outside the specification for the
ascending curve assay.
If error occurs on one sample:
• Normal for some non-reactive samples. 1. Follow the sample handling instructions in the
ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package
insert.
2. Rerun the sample.
3. Source another sample.
4. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve.

• Sample handling error. 1. Follow the sample handling instructions in the
insert.

If error occurs for more than one sample:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62
is on the left.

• Pre-trigger or trigger bottles were replaced while Perform the following as-needed maintenance
processing tests so air may have been aspirated procedures:
instead of reagent. • For i 1000SR:
page 9-62

loose
failed
– DC driver I/O board in the card cage has a
poor connection or failed

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1006

Unable to process test, background read failure.

• Ambient light level is too high. 1. Move the processing module or block it from
direct sunlight.
2. Ensure all system panels are properly installed.

• Optics linearity and/or Normalization values are Update the Configure modules window with the
not entered correctly on the Configure modules correct values from the optics assembly.
window. See Configure modules window (i 1000SR),
page 2-32.
– Pre-trigger or trigger or pumps hardware failure.

loose
– Dirty light pipes
– CMIA reader
Error code: 1007

Unable to process test, activated read failure.

• Wrong Cal 1 or Cal 2 is used for the assay If other assays are performing without error, place
correct positions.

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

is on the left.

• Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solution is expired. Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and
processing tests, so air may have been aspirated procedures:
page 9-62
page 2-32.
• Ambient light level is too high. 1. Move the processing module or block it from
direct sunlight.

– Pre-trigger or trigger valve hardware failure.
– Pre-trigger or trigger pumps

loose
– Pre-trigger or trigger level sensor is broken
failed

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1008

Unable to process test, final read failure.

correct positions.

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62
is on the left.

• Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solution is expired. Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and
• Pre-trigger and trigger bottles were replaced Perform the following as-needed maintenance
while processing tests, so air may have been procedures:
aspirated instead of reagent. • For i 1000SR:
page 9-62
page 2-32.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Ambient light level too high. 1. Move the processing module or block it from
direct sunlight.

– Pre-trigger and trigger valve hardware failure.
– Pre-trigger and trigger pumps

– Pre-trigger and trigger tubing connections are
loose
– Pre-trigger and trigger level sensor is broken
failed
Error code: 1009

Unable to calculate result, constituent assay (x) number (y) result is not available.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

• A constituent result was deleted before other Reorder the constituent assay.
constituents of a calculated result completed.
• The constituent result was flagged outside the Rerun the constituent assay with manual or
linear range of the assay. automatic dilution, if available.
• One of the constituent results became an Determine the cause of the exception, correct and
exception. rerun the sample.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1050

Unable to calculate result, absorbance collection error.

• Lamp is not performing as expected. Replace the lamp.
See quarterly maintenance procedure 1003
Change Lamp, page 9-30.
• Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Repeat lamp replacement procedure.
– Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against
the lamp plate and in the housing.
– Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the
screws in terminal block.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1051

Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeded optical limits.

• Sample concentration is too high. Dilute the sample and rerun. For the dilution
protocol, see the reagent manufacturer's
assay-specific documentation (such as a package
• Sample is lipemic. Ultra-centrifuge the sample and rerun the
infranatant. For details on sample integrity, see the
reagent manufacturer's assay-specific
documentation (such as a package insert or
• Cuvettes are dirty. Clean the cuvettes.
Clean cuvettes - manually, page 9-43.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Cuvette washer is not functioning properly. 1. Clean the cuvettes.
Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018
Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-28.
2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure to

wash the cuvettes and observe the cuvette
washer nozzles for hanging drops or leaks.
– If drops or leaks are observed for any of the
other nozzles, replace the cuvette wash pump
poppet valve.
See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c
4000), page 9-145.
3. Check for blockage in tubing.

Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6308
Check HC Waste Pump Tubing, page 9-27. If
blockage is observed, contact your Area
Customer Support.
• Cuvette dry tip is damaged. Replace the cuvette dry tip.
See Replace the cuvette dry tip (c 4000),
page 9-103.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1052

Unable to calculate result, endpoint absorbance reads are unstable.

• Debris in the water bath incubator. Change water bath.
Change Water Bath, page 9-39.
• Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to the Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within
pressure of the incoming water. specifications.
See c System processing module water and liquid
waste specifications and requirements, page 4-17.
• Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to a high Contact your Area Customer Support.
gas content of the incoming water.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Dispense system is not performing correctly. Check dispense components.
Check Dispense Components, page 9-27.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1053

Unable to calculate result, rate reaction linearity failure.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


poppet valve.
4000), page 9-145.

Customer Support.
page 9-103.
• R2 pipettor is out of alignment. Calibrate the pipettor.
R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-38.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1054

Unable to calculate result, Reaction check failure.

If error occurs for patient or control samples:
NOTE: View the reaction graph to confirm the

high sample concentration.
See View the reaction graph and absorbance
data for a result (c System), page 5-192.
• Sample interferences (e.g., hemolysis, lipemia, Visually inspect the sample for possible interference
etc.). due to hemolysis, icterus, and/or turbidity and
perform one of the following:
• Redraw and rerun the sample if interference is
present.
• Rerun the sample if no interference is observed.
NOTE: You may use the Sample interference

indices to determine increased interference
levels, or you may view the reaction graph to
confirm abnormal absorbance readings during
the Blank read time (compare to normal result
with this error).
See View the reaction graph and absorbance
data for a result (c System), page 5-192
• High anticoagulant to plasma ratio (i.e., sample Redraw the sample into a sufficiently-filled
tube is improperly filled). anticoagulant tube or use a serum sample.
For specimen collection and handling information,
see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific
If error occurs for calibration samples:
loaded incorrectly tubes ensuring they are placed in the correct
positions.
If error occurs for all samples:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Error code: 1055

Unable to calculate result, Flex read absorbance invalid for calibration.

loaded incorrectly. tubes.
• Calibrators or reagents are not performing as Open new calibrators or reagents.
expected.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1056

Unable to calculate result, absorbance below calibration curve lower limit.

• Sample concentration is too low. Rerun the sample.
• Calibration curve is not optimal. Recalibrate the assay.
• Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the
reagent. reagent using a clean applicator stick for each
bottle.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Reagent probe is damaged. Replace reagent probe.
See Replace reagent probes (c 4000), page 9-78.
• Reagent is not performing as expected. Open new reagent(s).
hardware failure.
Error code: 1057

Unable to calculate result, the Last required read in reference assay (x) number (y) must be
defined as 5 or 33.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The reference photometric assay selected in the Change the last required read setting in the
sample interference assay file does not have the reference assay to a value of 5 or 33 as indicated in
Last required read setting defined as 5 or 33. the reference photometric assay file.
Error code: 1100

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation between reference and fit curve too large
for Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1101

for Cal B
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1102

for Cal C.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1103

for Cal D.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1104

for Cal E.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1105

for Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1106

for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1107

for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1108

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too large for Cal B/Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1109

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too small for Cal B/Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1110

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, Log: Logit slope exceeds maximum parameter.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1111

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, Log: Logit slope is below minimum parameter.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1112

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, RMSE too large.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1113

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, minimum upper curve asymptote exceeded.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1114

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, maximum lower curve asymptote exceeded.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1115

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, minimum lower curve asymptote exceeded.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1116

Unable to calculate result, index formula error, parameter to LOG function.

correct positions.

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62
is on the left.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

page 9-62
– Pre-trigger or trigger valve hardware failure.
– Pre-trigger or trigger pumps

loose
– Pre-trigger or trigger level sensor is broken
failed
Error code: 1117

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, intercept out of range.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1118

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, maximum upper curve asymptote exceeded.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1119

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, curve validity check failed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1120

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit response too low for Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1121

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit response too low for Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1122

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit response too low for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1123

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit response too low for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1124

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too small for Cal 1/Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1125

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too large for Cal 1/Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1126

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too small for Calibrators.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1127

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too large for Calibrators.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1150

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, insufficient calibrator replicates.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Required number of replicates for a calibrator failed Review exceptions to determine the reason for the
to complete due to an error. failed calibrator replicate(s). Refer to the corrective
action for the specific error.
Error code: 1151

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, convergence error.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

• Bubbles or foam are on top of the liquid. Remove air bubbles or foam from the surface of the
sample using a clean disposable pipette or
applicator stick.
• Reaction mode is incorrectly defined. Select the Reaction mode list button on the
Configure assay parameters window - General -
Reaction Definition view, and then select the
appropriate reaction mode.
Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003
expected.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1152

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, maximum curve fit too large.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

expected.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1153

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, Slope is too low.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

• ICT module is expired or has exceeded time or Change ICT module.
sample warranty (> two months after installation Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309
or > 15,000 samples). Change ICT Module, page 9-43.
• ICT module o-rings are missing or are not seated Replace or reseat the o-rings.
correctly. See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 4000),
page 9-108.
• ICT probe is not connected correctly. Finger tighten the probe to the ICT module.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• ICT aspiration tubing is not connected correctly. Tighten the tubing connections at the top of the ICT
module and at the top of the 1 mL syringes in the
ICT aspiration pump.
• ICT reference solution tubing is not connected Tighten the connections at the top and side of each
correctly. check valve in the ICT reference solution pump.
• ICT check valves are not connected correctly. Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the
ICT reference solution pump and ICT aspiration
pump.
• ICT check valves are not functioning. Replace check valves.
See Replace check valves (c 4000), page 9-119.
• 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration or ICT Reseat the 1 mL syringes.
reference solution pumps are not seated
correctly.
• 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration or ICT Replace the 1 mL syringes.
reference solution pumps are leaking. See Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 4000),
page 9-116.
• ICT module is not performing as expected. Change ICT module.
Change ICT Module, page 9-43.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1154

Unable to calculate result, convergence error.

• The sample absorbance is on the border between Rerun the sample.
two segments of a Spline calibration curve and
the system cannot confirm the correct segment
was used for calculation.
• An invalid Spline calibration curve was Recalibrate the assay.
generated.
Error code: 1155

Unable to calculate result, calibration curve allows multiple solutions.

An invalid Spline calibration curve was generated. Recalibrate the assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1156

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, slope is outside of defined range.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

page 9-108.
• ICT reference solution tubing is not connected Tighten the tubing connections at the top and side
correctly. of each check valve in the ICT reference solution
pump.
pump.
correctly.
page 9-116.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1200

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1201

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal B.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1202

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal C.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1203

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal D.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1204

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal E.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1205

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1206

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1207

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal B.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1208

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal C.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1209

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal D.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1210

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal E.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1211

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1212

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1213

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1214

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1215

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1216

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1217

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal B.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1218

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal C.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1219

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal D.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1220

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal E.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1221

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1222

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1223

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal B.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1224

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal C.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1225

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal D.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1226

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal E.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1227

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1228

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1229

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1230

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1231

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1232

Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside the specification of the highest
calibrator.

RLU read is outside the specification for the
descending curve assay.
• Sample concentration is too high. Dilute the sample and rerun. See the Sample
Dilution Procedures in the ARCHITECT i System
• Sample contains an interfering substance. 1. See the Limitations of the Procedure in the
insert.
2. Redraw and rerun the sample if interference is

present.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Sample handling error. 1. Follow the sample handling instructions in the
insert.

If error occurs for more than one sample:

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62
is on the left.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

page 9-62

loose
failed
Error code: 1250

Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeds highest calibrator.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


poppet valve.
4000), page 9-145.

Customer Support.
page 9-103.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1251

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, concentration out of range for ICT index.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

• Wrong index calibrator was used for calibration. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or
tubes ensuring they are placed in the correct
positions.
• Index calibrator is not performing as expected. Open new calibrator bottles.
• Index concentration or index range is incorrectly Define the correct Index concentration and Index
defined. range on the Configure assay parameters -
Calibration window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1300

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1301

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal B.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1302

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal C.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1303

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal D.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1304

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal E.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1305

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1306

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1307

x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1308

x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1309

x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1310

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range too large Cal A to Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1311

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range too small Cal A to Cal F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1312

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL A.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1313

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL B.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1314

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL C.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1315

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL D.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1316

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL E.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1317

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL F.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1318

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1319

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
Error code: 1320

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, CV too large for Cal 1.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Calibrator 1 failed the CV specification defined in 1. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or
the assay settings. tubes.
2. Repeat calibration.
3. See Sample results observed problems for

corrective action if error continues.
See Sample results observed problems
(i System), page 10-600.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1321

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, CV too large for Cal 2.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Calibrator 2 failed the CV specification defined in 1. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or
the assay settings. tubes.

Error code: 1322

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, CV too large for a Calibrator.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

One of the calibrator replicates (A-F) failed the CV 1. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or
specification defined in the assay settings. tubes.

Error code: 1323

Unable to calculate result, constituent assay (x) number (y) result is out of specified range.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

A constituent result was outside of the constituent Status message. No corrective action is required.
range specified in the calculated assay file.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1324

Unable to calculate result, result exceeds numerical limits.

A calculated result cannot be computed because Modify the calculated result formula or constituent
the result exceeds the numerical limit of the assay ranges. See Configure a calculated assay,
software. page 2-55.
Error code: 1350

Unable to calculate result, no absorbance reads within absorbance range.

bottle.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


poppet valve.
4000), page 9-145.

Customer Support.
page 9-103.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1351

Unable to calculate result, insufficient absorbance reads within absorbance range.

bottle.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


poppet valve.
4000), page 9-145.

Customer Support.
page 9-103.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1352

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, calibrator deviation too large.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

• Bubbles in the calibrator sample cup. Remove any bubbles in the sample cup using a
clean applicator stick for each calibrator.
expected.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1353

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, calibration factor out of range.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

• Calibrator concentration values are incorrectly Verify the correct values for the lot number used.
defined. See Change photometric assay calibrator settings
(c System), page 2-147. Refer to the
calibrator-specific value sheet for the correct
calibrator values.
• Calibrators were onboard too long. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or
tubes.
expected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Expected cal factor or expected cal factor Perform the following steps, if it becomes necessary
tolerance% values need to be re-evaluated. to re-evaluate the expected cal factor for your
laboratory:
1. Collect Cal factor values from multiple calibration
curves, or review calibration curve details reports
for recent historical curves. (A thorough study
requires multiple cartridges and multiple reagent
lots.) During this collection period, be sure the
control values run against those Cal factors are
in range and do not display trends or shifts.
2. Average the acceptable Cal factors and enter the

mean in the expected cal factor field on the
Configure assay parameters - Calibration -
Validity checks window.
3. If the average expected cal factor is correct and

the control values have been in range, consider
slightly increasing the expected cal factor
tolerance%.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1354

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, defined Span out of range.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

• Bubbles in the calibrator sample cup. Remove any bubbles in the sample cup using a
clean applicator stick for each calibrator.
expected.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1355

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, Blank absorbance out of range.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

• Water quality is below specifications (if the blank Check DI water purity.
calibrator is defined to use water). Perform daily maintenance procedure 6028 Check
DI Water Purity, page 9-22.
• Calibrator is not performing as expected (if the Open new calibrator bottles.
blank calibrator is defined to use a zero
concentration calibrator rather than water).

poppet valve.
4000), page 9-145.

Customer Support.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

page 9-103.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1356

Unable to calculate calibrator result, insufficient absorbance reads within absorbance range.

• Bubbles for foam on the surface of the reagent. Remove the bubbles or foam from the surface of the
reagent using a clean applicator stick for each
bottle.
expected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


poppet valve.
4000), page 9-145.

Customer Support.
page 9-103.
hardware failure.
Error code: 1400

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, inadequate number of replicates.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 1401

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure did not receive results for all calibrator levels.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

No results for all replicates of one or more calibrator Review exceptions to determine the reason for the
levels. failed calibrator replicate(s). Refer to the corrective

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1402

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, calibrators incorrectly loaded.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.
• Wash buffer not correctly prepared. 1. Remove the buffer reservoir and rinse with
purified water.
2. Replace buffer reservoir and load new wash

buffer.
Error code: 1403

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, unable to generate calibration curve.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Unable to converge points on calibration curve.
positions.
Error code: 1404

Unable to calculate result, assay is not calibrated.

No Active calibration currently stored for the assay 1. Run assay calibration before running samples.
and no assay calibration in process. Patients run Always priority load carriers containing
after a failed calibration cannot be calculated if calibrators.
there is no previously stored calibration data.
2. Refer to specific assay calibration report or
calibration detail screen to determine reason for
the failed calibration.
3. Refer to the corrective action for the specific

error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1405

Calibrator out of order, calibration failed.

• Carriers loaded out of order. Load the carriers in sequential order.
In the robotic sample handler priority bay or section,
you must physically place the carriers in the
positions in sequential order. Carriers are
processed in the order they are placed on the
sample handler, not by position number.
• The carriers arrived at the aspiration position out Reorder the calibration.
of order due to robotic sample handler routing.
• A bar code label was detected in a position in Load the calibrators in the ordered positions
which there was a calibrator order. ensuring there are no bar codes on the calibrator
cups or tubes.
• Bar code reader detecting sample cups. Use clean sample cups. Do not write on the sample
cups or use tape or labels on the sample cups.
Error code: 1406

Calibration canceled, processing interrupted between carriers containing calibrators.

longer exists.
• Hardware failure. 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 0304 error
message.



error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1407

Unable to process test, constituent assay (x) number (y) is disabled.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

An assay used for computing a calculated assay The assay should be enabled prior to processing a
was disabled. calculated result which uses the assay as a
constituent.
Error code: 1408

Unable to calculate result, constituent assay (x) number (y) does not support manual
dilution.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

A calculated assay was ordered on a manually Order the calculated assay for a patient sample that
diluted patient sample. The calculated assay has a is undiluted or that uses an automated dilution
constituent assay which does not support a manual protocol.
dilution.
Error code: 1409

Unable to calculate result, constituent assays used two different reagent lot numbers.

Constituent assays of a calculated assay that use Ensure enough reagent of the same lot is onboard
the same reagent kit were not run on the same the system. Rerun the calculated assay.
reagent lot number.
Error code: 1410

Unable to calculate result. Duplicate calculation detected.

A calculated assay was added to an order which Rerun the calculated assay.
contained the same calculated assay. Constituent
assay results do not exist for the added calculated
assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1411

Unable to process test, constituents for this calculated assay cannot be ordered by the
system.

The calculated assay ordered does not allow for Order the calculated assay and the constituent
system orderable constituents. assay with proper dilutions.
Error code: 1450

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
provide information about the operation you were
attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error code: 1451

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, invalid mathematical calculation occurred.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

• Wrong calibrator was used, or the calibrator was Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or
expected.
Error code: 1452

Unable to calculate result, invalid mathematical calculation occurred.

• Sample concentration is too low. Rerun the sample.
• Bubbles for foam on the surface of the reagent. Remove the bubbles or foam from the surface of the
bottle.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

hardware failure.
Error code: 1453

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, assay configuration error.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

• The combined sample and reagent volume is less Verify the combined volume defined for:
than 160 μL at a defined read time. • Sample (or Diluted sample)
• R1 reagent
• R1 water
is greater than or equal to 160 μL, if the assay uses
a read point less than 17 for any defined read time.
• An assay setting is defined incorrectly. Verify the settings on the Windows - Configuration
screen - Assay settings view, page 2-91.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1454

Unable to calculate result, assay configuration error.

• The combined sample and reagent volume is less Verify the combined volume defined for:
than 160 μL at a defined read time. • Sample (or Diluted sample)
• R1 reagent
• R1 water
is greater than or equal to 160 μL, if the assay uses
a read point less than 17 for any defined read time.
• An assay setting is defined incorrectly. Verify the settings on the Windows - Configuration
screen - Assay settings view, page 2-91.
Error code: 1455

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, calibrator out of order.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

• Calibrator concentration values are incorrectly Verify the correct values for the lot number used.
defined. See Change photometric assay calibrator settings
(c System), page 2-147. Refer to the
calibrator-specific value sheet for the correct
calibrator values.
expected.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1456

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, no calibration curve available for adjustment.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

No active full calibration curve currently stored for 1. Create a calibration order, page 6-12, and then
the assay. An adjustment calibration cannot be select Calibration type: Full.
performed if there is no previously stored full
calibration curve. 2. Create an adjustment type calibration order
when the full calibration is complete, if desired.
Error code: 1457

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, calibration curve full interval has expired.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Adjustment calibration order failed because the full 1. Create a calibration order, page 6-12, and then
calibration interval has expired or the full calibration select Calibration type: Full.
failed.
2. Create an adjustment type calibration order
when the full calibration is complete, if desired.
Error code: 1458

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, did not complete results for all calibrator levels.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 1461

Unable to recalculate result, assay does not exist.

Assay was deleted since the original result was run. Install the assay and create new test orders for the
sample, if required.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1462

Unable to edit result, assay does not exist.

Assay was deleted since the original result was Install the assay and create new test orders for the
generated. sample, if required.
Error code: 1463

Unable to recalculate result, a reaction definition assay parameter was edited.

An assay parameter setting was edited making Rerun the sample.
recalculation of the result invalid (ex. Primary
wavelength or Sample volume)
Error code: 1464

Unable to recalculate a result that is a constituent of a calculated result.

The system prevents recalculation of a result used Rerun the sample.
for computing a calculated result.
Error code: 1465

Unable to edit a result that is a constituent of a calculated result.

The system prevents editing of a result used for Status message. No corrective action is required.
computing a calculated result.
Error code: 1500

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, correlation coefficient is out of range.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

positions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1600

Unable to calculate result, mV reading outside measurable range of ICT Unit.

• Black electrical connector for the ICT module is Reseat the connection.
loose or not connected. See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 4000),
page 9-108.
page 9-108.
pump.
pump.
correctly.
page 9-116.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1601

Unable to calculate result, ICT reference solution voltage drift error.

loose or not connected. See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 4000),
page 9-108.
page 9-108.
pump.
pump.
correctly.
page 9-116.
sample warranty (> 2 months after installation or Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309
> 15,000 samples). Change ICT Module, page 9-43.
• The ICT Reference Solution is not performing as 1. Replace the ICT Reference Solution bottle.
expected. See Replace bulk solutions and update inventory
2. Flush ICT cup.

Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
2131 Flush ICT Cup, page 9-39.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 1602

Unable to calculate result, ICT reference solution voltage out of range.

page 9-108.
pump.
pump.
correctly.
page 9-116.
sample warranty (> 2 months after installation or Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309
> 15,000 samples). Change ICT Module, page 9-43.
2. Flush ICT cup.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Maintenance error codes (2000-2999)

The maintenance error code category includes error codes between
2000-2999.
representative at:

Error code: 2000

Solid waste chute full. Install empty waste container, update supplies and press Run.

• The solid waste chute is full. This chute is
designed to hold approximately 50 used RVs
(reaction vessels) while the waste container is
removed for emptying.
– Waste chute sensor board #7 hardware failure.
Error code: 2001

RV Hopper empty, add RVs, update supplies and press Run.

• No RVs (reaction vessels) in the RV Hopper. Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 1000SR),
page 5-40.
– RV Hopper sensor hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2003

(x) inventory discrepancy, update supplies and press Run.
x =Inventory item

For iSystem:
• Expected inventory does not match the available 1. Check the physical inventory level of the item
inventory. against the reported inventory shown on the
2. Update supplies on the Update supplies window

as required.
– Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solution Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and
– RVs (reaction vessels) Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 1000SR),
page 5-40.
– Wash buffer Replenish wash buffer manually and update
• During manual buffer transfer, not enough buffer Fill the buffer reservoir until the icon shows full.
was transferred to trip the full sensor.
– Cables to the pre-trigger, trigger, or wash hardware failure.
buffer level sensors are loose
– Level sensor
For cSystem:
• Expected inventory does not match the available 1. Check the physical inventory level of the item
inventory. against the reported inventory shown on the
2. Update supplies on the Update supplies window

as required.
– Alkaline Wash Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
– Acid Wash System), page 5-24.
– ICT Reference Solution

– Sensor cable to the weight platform is loose hardware failure.
– Weight platform sensor

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2004

(x) inventory is close to empty, update supplies.
x =Inventory item

For iSystem:
• The indicated inventory item is low.
page 5-40.
– Solid waste Remove solid waste and update inventory (i
1000SR), page 5-36.
• Wash buffer inventory close to empty during a Select OK and proceed with the maintenance
maintenance procedure. procedure.
For cSystem:
• The indicated inventory item is low.
– Alkaline Wash Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
– Acid Wash System), page 5-24.
Error code: 2006

(x) inventory has exceeded on-board stability, update supplies.
x =Inventory item

Onboard stability for either Pre-Trigger or Trigger Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and
Solution is exceeded. update inventory (i 1000SR), page 5-46.
NOTE: Pre-trigger and trigger can only be loaded

when the processing module status is Stopped,
Ready, or Warming.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2007

Unable to process test, insufficient supplies.

• The available inventory for Pre-Trigger and/or Load the required inventory items on the system
Trigger Solution, wash buffer, or RVs (reaction and update inventory.
vessels) is not sufficient to complete the test
order. NOTE: Pre-trigger and trigger can only be loaded
Ready, or Warming. Wash buffer can be loaded
when the processing module is in any status
except Initializing, Stopped, or Offline.
Onboard stability for either Pre-Trigger or Trigger Load a new bottle of pre-trigger and/or trigger.
Solution is exceeded. See Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and

Ready, or Warming.
• RVs are bridged above the sensor in the RV 1. Stir the RVs in the hopper.
hopper.
2. Pause the processing module, page 5-12, if error
continues. When the status is Ready, remove
RVs from the RV hopper then reload them.
Error code: 2008

Unable to process test, Pre-Trigger expired.

Onboard stability for Pre-Trigger Solution is Load a new bottle of pre-trigger.
exceeded. See Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and

Ready, or Warming.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2009

Unable to process test, Trigger expired.

Onboard stability for Trigger Solution is exceeded. Load a new bottle of pre-trigger.
See Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and

Ready, or Warming.
Error code: 2010

Empty reagent kit in position (x).
x =Reagent carousel position

Reagent carousel contains an empty reagent kit in Load a new reagent kit or continue processing
the indicated position. samples with the other reagent kits on the module.
NOTE: Reagents can only be loaded when the

processing module status is Ready.
Error code: 2011

Extra reagent bottle detected in position (x) on (y) carousel. Print reagent load error report.
x = Position in which extra bottle was detected.
(1-25 for i System; A1-D20 for c 8000/c 16000; A1-06 for c 4000)
y = Location in which extra bottle was detected.
(Inner, Middle, or Outer for i System; R1 or R2 for c 8000/c 16000)

For c System:
• The R1 and R2 reagent cartridges onboard are Load R1 and R2 reagent cartridges with the same
not the same lot number. lot number.
For i System:
• An extra bottle not belonging to the reagent kit in Load the correct bottle for the kit in the correct
this position was detected by the system. position.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2012

Extra reagent bottle detected in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y).
x = Reagent carrier position in which extra bottle was detected

An extra bottle not belonging to the reagent kit in 1. Print the reagent load error report.
this reagent carrier position was detected by the
system. 2. Load the correct bottle for the kit in the correct
position.
Error code: 2013

Empty reagent kit in section (x).
x =RSH section number

Reagent carrier contains an empty reagent kit in the Load a new reagent kit.
RSH section indicated.
Error code: 2014

Inventory discrepancy between hardware and software, update supplies.

Error code: 2015

Insufficient or expired inventory, update supplies.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2017

(x) inventory full, empty the container.
x = Inventory item

The waste container is full or the inventory was not Remove solid waste and update inventory (i
updated the last time the container was emptied. 1000SR), page 5-36.
Empty liquid waste and update inventory (i 1000SR),
page 5-38.
The waste drawer is pulled out during a 1. Select OK.
maintenance procedure (i 1000SR).
2. Push the waste drawer back into place and
proceed with the maintenance procedure.
Error code: 2018

Unable to perform procedure, insufficient supplies on Processing Module (x).
x = Processing module (1-4)

• The available inventory for Pre-Trigger and/or Load the required inventory items on the system
Trigger Solution, wash buffer, or RVs (reaction and update inventory.
vessels) is not sufficient to complete the
requested procedure.
• RVs are bridged above the sensor in the RV 1. Stir the RVs in the hopper.
hopper.
Error code: 2019

(x) inventory empty, update supplies.
x = Inventory item

For i System:
• The indicated inventory item is empty or the
supplies status screen was not updated when the
inventory item was added.
page 5-40.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

– Solid waste Remove solid waste and update inventory (i
1000SR), page 5-36.
– Pre-trigger or trigger sensor hardware failure.
– Wash buffer sensor

– RV sensor
For c System:
• The indicated inventory item is empty or the Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
supplies status screen was not updated when the System), page 5-24.
– Alkaline Wash
– Acid Wash
– Weight platform sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 2020

Inventory error, review Supplies status screen.

• One or more inventory items are low or empty. Load the required inventory items on the system
and update inventory.

Ready, or Warming. Wash buffer can be loaded
when the processing module is in any status
except Initializing, Stopped, or Offline.
• RVs (reaction vessels) are bridged above the 1. Stir the RVs in the hopper.
sensor in the RV hopper.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2021

Solid waste pan full. Install empty solid waste container, update supplies and press Run.

The limit has been exceeded for the number of RVs 1. Remove the solid waste and update inventory.
to drop into the solid waste pan while the waste
container has been removed for emptying. 2. After the tests in process have completed,
remove the solid waste container and clean the
solid waste pan. See the supply and waste
center instructions of as-needed maintenance
procedure 6038 External Decontamination,
page 9-72 for more information.
Error code: 2022

RV unload not performed. Solid waste chute full.

• The solid waste chute is full. This chute is Remove the solid waste and update inventory.
designed to hold approximately 50 used RVs
(reaction vessels) while the waste container is
removed for emptying.
– Waste chute sensor board in slot #7 in the hardware failure.
lower card cage.
Error code: 2050

(x) inventory low.
x = Inventory item

The indicated bulk solution inventory is low. Replace bulk solutions and update inventory.
System), page 5-24.
Error code: 2051

(x) inventory empty, update supplies.
x = Inventory item

• The indicated bulk solution is empty. Replace bulk solutions and update inventory.
System), page 5-24.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• The supply status was not updated when the Update the inventory of the solution.
solution was added. See Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
System), page 5-24.
– Weight platform sensor cable has a poor hardware failure.
connection
– Weight platform not adjusted properly
– Weight platform sensor
Error code: 2054

High concentration waste container is Full.

• The high-concentration waste bottle is full. Empty the high-concentration waste bottle.
See Empty the high-concentration waste bottle (c
System), page 5-34.
• The high-concentration waste bottle float switch Clean the high-concentration waste sensor.
is dirty. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 6307
Check/Clean HC Waste Sensor, page 9-35.
• Float switch cable has a poor connection. Reseat the float switch cable to the module and to
the high-concentration waste bottle.
• Float switch cable failed. Replace the float switch cable.
See Replace the float switch cable (c System),
page 9-180.
• Float switch failed. Replace the high-concentration waste bottle.
See Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c
Error code: 2100

Wash Buffer reservoir full, ignored fill request.

• Wash buffer container was full when a request to Do not attempt to add wash buffer if wash buffer
fill was made. container is full.
NOTE: Wash buffer can be loaded when the

processing module is in any status except
Initializing, Stopped, or Offline.
– Buffer level sensor hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2101

Wash Buffer transfer canceled, Processing Module stop requested.

Wash buffer transfer canceled because of a 1. Start up the processing module. See Start up the
processing module stop. processing module and/or sample handler,
page 5-12.
2. When processing module status is Ready, load

wash buffer.
Error code: 2102

Unable to prime Wash Buffer transfer pump, transfer canceled.

• Wash buffer container is empty. Replenish wash buffer manually and update
NOTE: Wash buffer can be loaded when the

processing module is in any status except
Initializing, Stopped, or Offline.
• Wash buffer transfer tubing is not connected. Reconnect the wash buffer transfer tubing to the
quick disconnect fitting.
– Buffer level sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 2103

Wash Buffer transfer timed out, transfer canceled.

• Wash buffer transfer tubing is crimped. Reposition the wash buffer transfer tubing.
• Wash buffer transfer tubing is not connected Reconnect the transfer tubing.
properly.
– Transfer pump hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2104

Unable to perform automatic Flush, (x) inventory is not adequate.
x = Inventory item

• The indicated inventory item is empty or the
supplies screen was not updated when the

Ready, or Warming.
– RVs (reaction vessels) or wash buffer Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 1000SR),
page 5-40.
– Liquid Waste Empty liquid waste and update inventory (i 1000SR),
page 5-38.
– Pre-trigger or trigger sensor hardware failure.
– Wash buffer sensor

– RV sensor
Error code: 2200

(x) procedure failed, refer to Activity window for details.
x = Procedure name

• A system error message occurred. Refer to corrective action for the error indicated in
the Activity list on the Maintenance Perform or
Diagnostic perform window.
• Criteria for acceptance specified in the procedure If there is no error in the Activity list, the criteria for
was not met. acceptance specified in the maintenance or
diagnostic procedure was not met.
Error code: 2201

(x) procedure canceled by user.
x = Procedure name

User selected Quit while performing a procedure. Status message. No corrective action is required.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2202

(x) procedure report not available.
x = Procedure name

Requested to print a report for a procedure not Select a different module or perform the procedure
performed on the selected module. for the selected module, and then select print.
Error code: 2203

Procedure (x), version mismatch due to restored database. Install version (y).
x = Maintenance or diagnostic procedure number
y = Procedure version number

The database was restored but the correct version Install all maintenance and diagnostic procedures
of the maintenance or diagnostic procedures has from the hard drive. See Install or delete a
not been installed. maintenance or diagnostic procedure file,
page 2-181.
Error code: 2204

Unable to perform procedure (x), version mismatch due to restored database. Install version
(y).
x = Maintenance or diagnostic procedure number
y = Procedure version number

The database was restored but the correct version Install all maintenance and diagnostic procedures
of the maintenance or diagnostic procedure has not from the hard drive. See Install or delete a
been installed. maintenance or diagnostic procedure file,
page 2-181.
Error code: 2300

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, sample carousel cover is closed.

• The sample carousel cover was closed during the Do not close the sample carousel cover unless
procedure. instructed to do so in the procedure.
Repeat as-needed maintenance procedure 1120
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2301

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, reagent 1 carousel cover is closed.

• The reagent carousel cover was closed during Do not close the reagent carousel cover unless
the calibration procedure. instructed to do so in the procedure.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2302

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, reagent 2 carousel cover is closed.

• The reagent carousel cover was closed during Do not close the reagent carousel cover unless
the calibration procedure. instructed to do so in the procedure.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2303

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, sample carousel homing failed.

• A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstructions.
the sample carousel.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2304

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, reagent outer carousel homing failed.

the reagent 1 outer carousel (c 8000/c 16000) or
reagent outer carousel (c 4000).
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2305

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, reagent inner carousel homing failed.

the reagent 1 inner carousel (c 8000/c 16000) or
reagent inner carousel (c 4000).
hardware failure.
Error code: 2306

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, reagent 2 carousel homing failed.

the reagent 2 carousel.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2307

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor homing error.
x = Pipettor name

• A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions.
of the pipettor.
• Probe is damaged. Perform the appropriate probe replacement
procedure.
• Replace the sample probe (c 4000), page 9-74.
• Replace reagent probes (c 4000), page 9-78.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2308

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, error while moving Sample carousel.

• A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstruction.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2309

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, error while moving Reagent 1 outer
carousel.

the reagent 1 outer carousel.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2310

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, error while moving Reagent 1 inner
carousel.

the reagent 1 inner carousel.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2311

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, error while moving Reagent 2 carousel.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2312

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor horizontal movement error.
x = Pipettor name

the pipettor.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2313

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor error while moving down.
x = Pipettor name

• A physical interference is preventing the pipettor Look for and remove any physical obstruction.
from moving down.
procedure.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2314

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor error while moving up.
x = Pipettor name

• A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction.
of the pipettor.
procedure.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2315

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, sample carousel rotation error.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2316

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, reagent outer carousel rotation error.

the reagent 1 outer carousel (c 8000/c 16000) or
reagent outer carousel (c 4000).
hardware failure.
Error code: 2317

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, reagent inner carousel rotation error.

the reagent 1 inner carousel (c 8000/c 16000) or
reagent inner carousel (c 4000).
hardware failure.
Error code: 2318

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, reagent carousel rotation error.

• A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstruction
the reagent 2 carousel (c 8000/c 16000) or
reagent supply center carousel(s) (c 4000).
hardware failure.
Error code: 2319

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, exceeded sample carousel target vertical
range.

• Sample carousel is not seated properly. Reseat the sample carousel properly on the
alignment pins.
• Sample carousel is not present. Place the sample carousel in position.
of the pipettor.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover.
screw is loose.
2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground
wire screw with a slotted screwdriver.
3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover

is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor
shaft.
• Sample probe is dirty. Clean sample probe.
Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-26.
• Sample probe is damaged. Replace sample probe.
See Replace the sample probe (c 4000),
page 9-74.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2320

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target vertical range.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.
• The cuvette segment alignment tool is not seated Reseat the cuvette segment alignment tool on the
properly. alignment pins.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2321

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, exceeded sample handler target vertical
range.

• Carrier calibration tool is not present. Place the carrier calibration tool in the carrier.
• Carrier calibration tool is not seated properly. Reseat the carrier calibration tool in the carrier.
of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2322

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target vertical range.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
• Reagent probe is dirty. Clean reagent probe.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

hardware failure.
Error code: 2323

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, exceeded outer carousel target vertical
range.

• A segment with a calibration target is not present Install a segment with the calibration target into the
in the outer carousel of the reagent supply center outer carousel of the reagent supply center
(c 4000). (c 4000).
• The segment with the calibration target is not Reseat the segment with the calibration target in
seated properly in the outer carousel of the the outer carousel of the reagent supply center
reagent supply center (c 4000). (c 4000).
of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2324

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, exceeded inner carousel target vertical
range.

in the inner carousel of the reagent supply center inner carousel of the reagent supply center
(c 4000). (c 4000).
seated properly in the inner carousel of the the inner carousel of the reagent supply center
of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2325

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target vertical range.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

hardware failure.
Error code: 2326

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, exceeded carousel target vertical range.

in the outer or inner carousel of the reagent outer or inner carousel of the reagent supply center
supply center (c 4000). (c 4000).
seated properly in the outer or inner carousel of the outer or inner carousel of the reagent supply
the reagent supply center (c 4000). center (c 4000).
of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2327

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, exceeded wash cup target horizontal range.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2328

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target horizontal range.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

hardware failure.
Error code: 2329

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target horizontal range.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2330

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, exceeded wash cup target horizontal range.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

hardware failure.
Error code: 2331

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target horizontal range.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2332

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, exceeded wash cup target horizontal range.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2333

(x) pipettor calibration failed probe straightness check.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
procedure.
screw is loose.

shaft.
• Probe is dirty. Clean the probe.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2334

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, cuvette segment alignment tool not found.
x = Pipettor name

• The cuvette segment alignment tool was not Install the cuvette segment alignment tool when
installed. instructed to do so in the procedure.
• Water is present on the slotted edges of the Remove the cuvette segment alignment tool and
cuvette segment alignment tool. dry the slotted edges before reinstalling it to repeat
the procedure.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2335

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, sample carousel target not found.

alignment pins.
of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2336

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, cuvette target not found.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2337

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, cuvette target not found.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

hardware failure.
Error code: 2338

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, outer carousel target not found.

(c 4000). (c 4000).
of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2339

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, inner carousel target not found.

(c 4000). (c 4000).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2340

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, cuvette target not found.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2341

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, carousel target not found.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2342

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, unable to determine target position.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

page 9-74.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2343

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, calibration target not found in outer
carousel.

• A reagent segment with a calibration target was Install a segment with a calibration target in the
not found in the outer carousel (c 4000). outer carousel (c 4000).
• The reagent segment with a calibration target is Reseat the reagent segment with the calibration
not seated properly (c 4000). target (c 4000).
hardware failure.
Error code: 2344

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, calibration target not found.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2345

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, water bath level low.
x = Pipettor name

• DI water system failure. 1. Turn on the water supply.
2. Flush water lines.

2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-39.
• System power was off. Perform either Daily Maintenance or Change Water
Bath procedures to fill the water bath.
See daily maintenance procedure 6070 Daily
Maintenance, page 9-22 or as-needed
maintenance procedure 2134 Change Water Bath,
page 9-39.
– Module is not level hardware failure.
– Level sensor is dirty or failed
Error code: 2346

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at sample carousel.

alignment pins.
screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Water quality is below specifications. Check DI water purity.
Perform daily maintenance procedure 6028 Check
– Liquid level sense board (threshold voltage is hardware failure.
out of range)
– Liquid level sense cable
– Liquid level sense board
– Loose connector on SMC board
Error code: 2347

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at wash cup.

screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.
out of range)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2348

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at cuvette.

screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.
out of range)
Error code: 2349

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at sample handler.

of the pipettor.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.
out of range)
Error code: 2350

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at cuvette.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

out of range)
Error code: 2351

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at wash cup.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2352

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at outer carousel.

(c 4000). (c 4000).
of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range)
Error code: 2353

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at inner carousel.

(c 4000). (c 4000).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range)
Error code: 2354

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at cuvette.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

out of range)
Error code: 2355

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at wash cup.
x = Pipettor name

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

out of range)
Error code: 2356

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at carousel.

of the pipettor.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

out of range)
Error code: 2357

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at sample
carousel.

• A physical interference is blocking the movement Remove any obstruction from the area of movement
of the sample pipettor. of the sample pipettor.
• Probe is damaged. Replace the sample probe.
page 9-74.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2358

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at wash cup.

page 9-74.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2359

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at cuvette.

page 9-74.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2360

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at sample
handler.

page 9-74.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2361

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at cuvette.
x = Pipettor name

of the reagent pipettor. of the reagent pipettor.
• Probe is damaged. Replace the reagent probe.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2362

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at wash cup.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 2363

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at outer
carousel.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2364

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at inner
carousel.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2365

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at cuvette.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 2366

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at wash cup.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 2367

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at carousel.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2368

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, sample handler target not found.

of the pipettor.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2369

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor is not properly aligned with cuvette
target.
x = Pipettor name

screw is loose.

shaft.
– Reagent 2 pipettor requires manual alignment. hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2370

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, reagent 2 outer carousel homing failed.

• A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Remove any obstruction from the area of movement
the reagent 2 outer carousel. of the carousel.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2371

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, reagent 2 inner carousel homing failed.

the reagent 2 inner carousel. of the carousel.
hardware failure.
Error code: 2372

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, error while moving Reagent 2 outer
carousel.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2373

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, error while moving Reagent 2 inner
carousel.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2374

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, Reagent 2 inner carousel rotation error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2375

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, Reagent 2 outer carousel rotation error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2376

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, exceeded outer carousel target vertical
range.

(c 4000). (c 4000).
of the pipettor. of the pipettor.
screw is loose.
3. Replace the pipettor cover ensuring the cover is

seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2377

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, exceeded inner carousel target vertical
range.

(c 4000). (c 4000).
screw is loose.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2378

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, outer carousel target not found.

(c 4000). (c 4000).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

screw is loose.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2379

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, inner carousel target not found.

(c 4000). (c 4000).
screw is loose.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 2380

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, calibration target not found in outer
carousel.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2381

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at outer carousel.

(c 4000). (c 4000).
screw is loose.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

out of range)
Error code: 2382

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at inner carousel.

(c 4000). (c 4000).
screw is loose.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

out of range)
Error code: 2383

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at outer
carousel.

hardware failure.
Error code: 2384

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at inner
carousel.

hardware failure.
Level sense error codes (3000-3999)

The level sense error code category includes error codes between
3000-3999.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
representative at:

Error code: 3000

Unable to process test, Liquid not found for (x) at (y).
x = Pipettor name
y = Location

For sample pipetting:
• A sample cup or tube is not present. Ensure sample cup or tube is present.
• Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See
inadequate. Sample volume requirements, page 5-164.
• Pipettor probe clamp is loose. Tighten the probe clamp finger tight.
• Liquid level sense and Z cable has a poor Tighten the screw holding the cable to the probe
connection. clamp, then perform the appropriate fluidics/wash
diagnostic procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
– 3630 LLS Test, page 10-672, for the pipettor
• Probe is out of alignment. Perform the appropriate as-needed maintenance
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
– 1110 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-60
• Probe is damaged. Perform the appropriate replacement procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
– Replace pipettor probe (i 1000SR), page 9-150

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

– Liquid level sense and Z cable hardware failure.
– Antenna board or cables have a poor

connection or failed
– Liquid level sense board in the upper card
cage has a poor connection or failed in:
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
– Indexer board in the upper card cage has a
poor connection or failed in:
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)
For reagent pipetting:
• Reagent bottle is empty. Replace empty reagents.
• WZ probe maintenance water bottle was filled Repeat the appropriate daily or as-needed
with DI water instead of tap water or saline during maintenance procedure, ensuring the WZ probe
a procedure. maintenance water bottle is 1/2 to 3/4 full of tap
water or saline:
NOTE: Do not use DI water for these procedures:

• For i 1000SR:
– 6440 Daily Maintenance, page 9-56
• WZ probe maintenance water bottle was Repeat the appropriate daily or as-needed
over-filled with tap water or saline during a maintenance procedure, ensuring the WZ probe
procedure. maintenance water bottle is 1/2 to 3/4 full of tap
water or saline:
• For i 1000SR:
• Maintenance cleaning bottle was overfilled with Repeat the appropriate daily or as-needed
sodium hypochlorite solution during a procedure. maintenance procedure, ensuring the WZ probe
maintenance water bottle is 1/2 to 3/4 full of sodium
hypochlorite solution:
• For i 1000SR:
– 6445 Pipettor/WZ Probe Cleaning, page 9-57
• WZ probe maintenance water bottle was not Repeat the appropriate daily or as-needed
loaded or was not loaded in the correct position maintenance procedure, ensuring the WZ probe
during a procedure. maintenance water bottle is 1/2 to 3/4 full of tap
water or saline:
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Maintenance cleaning bottle was not loaded or Repeat the appropriate daily or as-needed
was not loaded in the correct position during a maintenance procedure, ensuring the WZ probe
procedure. maintenance water bottle is 1/2 to 3/4 full of sodium
hypochlorite solution:
• For i 1000SR:
– 6445 Pipettor/WZ Probe Cleaning, page 9-57
• Pipettor probe clamp is loose. Tighten the probe clamp finger tight.
• For i 1000SR:
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)
Error code: 3001

Unable to process test, liquid not found for sample pipettor at (x) position (y).
x = Sample wash solution (c 4000)
y = Position number


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Bubbles or foam are on top of the liquid. Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the
applicator stick.
screw is loose.

shaft.
• Sample probe is out of alignment. Perform sample pipettor calibration.
• Sample probe is damaged or has been in use for Replace sample probe.
greater than one year. See Replace the sample probe (c 4000),
page 9-74.
out of range)
– SMC board has a poor connection or failed

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3002

Unable to process test, liquid not found for (x) pipettor at position (y).
x = Pipettor name

• No reagent cartridge present or the cartridge is Load reagents or replace empty reagents.
empty.
• Reagent cartridge is not seated properly. Verify there is nothing preventing the reagent
cartridge from seating against the bottom of the
carousel.
For reagents using the 20 mL (bottle) cartridge in
the adapter, verify the bottle was pressed down
against the bottom of the carousel.
bottle.
screw is loose.

shaft.
• Reagent probe is out of alignment. Perform pipettor calibration.
See as-needed maintenance procedure 1121 R1
Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37.
– Liquid level sense board threshold voltage is hardware failure.
out of range
– Liquid level sense cable is defective
– Liquid level sense board is defective

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3003

Unable to process test, liquid not found for (x) pipettor at position (y).
x = Pipettor name

empty.
carousel.
bottle.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3004

Unable to process test, liquid not found for sample pipettor at sample carrier.

applicator stick.
screw is loose.

shaft.
• Sample probe is damaged or has been in use for Replace the sample probe.
page 9-74.
out of range

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3005

Unable to process test, liquid not found for reagent 1 pipettor.

empty.
carousel.
For reagents using the 20 mL (bottles) cartridge in
bottle.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3006

Unable to process test, liquid not found for reagent 2 pipettor.

empty.
carousel.
bottle.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3050

Unable to process test, Liquid too low for (x) at (y).
x = Pipettor name
y = Location

• Pipettor probe clip is loose. Tighten the probe clip finger tight.
connection. clip, then perform the appropriate fluidics/wash
• For i 1000SR:
procedure:
• For i 1000SR
• For i 1000SR

connection or failed.
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)
connection. clip, then perform the appropriate fluidics/wash
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:

Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)
Error code: 3051

Unable to process test, liquid too high for (y) at (x).
x = Pipettor name
y = Location

• Too much sample in cup or tube. Load a properly filled sample cup or tube. See
Sample volume requirements, page 5-164.
• Probe is dirty. Wipe the exterior of the sample probe with a lint
free tissue dampened with DI water.
• Pipettor probe clip loose. Tighten the probe clip finger tight.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

– Pipettor pressure monitor cables have a poor hardware failure.
– Pipettor pressure monitor board
– Pipettor pressure monitor
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)
• Liquid on reagent bottle septum. 1. Verify reagent bottle is not over filled.
2. Place a new septum on all reagent bottles.

• Probe is dirty. Wipe the exterior of the probe with a lint free tissue
dampened with DI water.
• Pipettor probe clip loose. Tighten the probe clip finger tight.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
– Pressure monitor cables have a poor hardware failure.
connection
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3052

Unable to process test, liquid too low for sample pipettor at (x) position (y).
y = Position number

screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.
out of range

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3053

Unable to process test, liquid too low for (x) pipettor at position (y).
x = Pipettor name

empty.
carousel.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3054

Unable to process test, liquid too low for (x) pipettor at position (y).
x = Pipettor name

empty.
carousel.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3055

Unable to process test, liquid too high for sample pipettor at (x) position (y).
y = Position number

• Too much sample in cup or tube. Load a properly filled sample cup or tube. See
applicator stick.
screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.
out of range

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3056

Unable to process test, liquid too high for (x) pipettor at position (y).
x = Pipettor name

carousel.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3057

Unable to process test, liquid too high for (x) pipettor at position (y).
x = Pipettor name

carousel.
screw is loose.

shaft.
out of range
Error code: 3058

Unable to process test, liquid too low for sample pipettor at sample carrier.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.
out of range
Error code: 3059

Unable to process test, liquid too high for sample pipettor at sample carrier.

• Too much sample is in cup or tube. Load a properly filled sample cup or tube. See
applicator stick.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.
out of range
Error code: 3060

Unable to process test, liquid too high for reagent 1 pipettor.

bottle.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

out of range
Error code: 3061

Unable to process test, liquid too high for reagent 2 pipettor.

bottle.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

out of range
Error code: 3100

Liquid contact broken during aspiration for (x) at (y).
x = Pipettor name
y = Location

applicator stick.
• Sample cup or tube is tilted in the carrier. Reposition the sample cup or tube in the carrier so
that it is not tilted.
• Drop of liquid on the side of the sample cup or Transfer the sample to a new sample cup or tube.
tube.
• Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Tighten probe tubing connections finger tight.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
• Probe tubing is damaged. Perform the appropriate replacement procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
– Replace pipettor probe tubing (i 1000SR),
page 9-154

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

– Pipettor syringe
– Antenna board
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)
reagent. reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle
• Liquid on the reagent septum. Place a new septum on all reagent bottles.
• Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Tighten probe tubing connections finger tight.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• For i 1000SR:
page 9-154
– Antenna board
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)
Error code: 3101

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for sample pipettor at (x)
position (y).
y = Position number

applicator stick.
• Sample cup or tube is tilted in the carousel. Reposition the sample cup or tube in the carousel
so that it is not tilted.
tube.
screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

page 9-74.
• Sample probe tubing connections are loose or Tighten the tubing connections or replace the
leaking. tubing.
See Replace the sample probe tubing (c 4000),
page 9-82.
• Sample probe tubing is damaged. Replace the sample probe tubing.
page 9-82.
out of range
Error code: 3102

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for (x) pipettor at position
(y).
x = Pipettor name

screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Reagent probe tubing connections are loose or Tighten the tubing connections or replace the
leaking. tubing.
See Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 4000),
page 9-85.
• Reagent probe tubing is damaged. Replace the reagent probe tubing.
page 9-85.
out of range
Error code: 3103

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for (x) pipettor at position
(y).
x = Pipettor name

screw is loose.

shaft.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

leaking. tubing.
page 9-85.
page 9-85.
out of range
Error code: 3104

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for sample pipettor at
sample carrier.

sample using a clean disposable pipette applicator
stick.
• Sample cup or tube is tilted in the carrier. Reposition the sample cup or tube in the carrier so
that it is not tilted.
tube.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

screw is loose.

shaft.
page 9-74.
leaking. tubing.
page 9-82.
page 9-82.
out of range
Error code: 3105

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for reagent 1 pipettor.

bottle.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

screw is loose.

shaft.
leaking. tubing.
page 9-85.
page 9-85.
out of range
Error code: 3106

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for reagent 2 pipettor.

bottle.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

screw is loose.

shaft.
leaking. tubing.
page 9-85.
page 9-85.
out of range

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3200

Unable to process test, maximum number of LLS errors exceeded for a reagent.

Consecutive liquid level sense, aspiration or 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 3000 or 5000
movement restriction errors detected for the category error codes that occurred at the same
indicated pipettor. time as this message to determine the specific
error with the R1 or R2 pipettor.

you do not find any 3000 or 5000 category error
codes.

error code.
NOTE: After the cause has been corrected and

the system status is Ready, perform the
appropriate procedure to remove the reagent
pack LLS error status:
• Scan the reagent carousel(s) (except for i
1000SR), page 5-73.
• Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and
SSH), page 5-177.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3201

Maximum number of LLS errors exceeded for reagent located in position (x) on carousel (y).
x = Position in which the error occurred (A1 - D20 for c System; 1 - 25 for i System)
y = Location in which the error occurred (R1 or R2 for c System; inner, middle, or outer ring
for i System)

indicated pipettor in the indicated position. time as this message to determine the specific
error with the R1 or R2 pipettor.

codes.

error code.
NOTE: After the cause has been corrected and

the system status is Ready, perform the
appropriate procedure to remove the reagent
pack LLS error status:
• Scan the reagent carousel(s) (except for i
1000SR), page 5-73.
• Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and
SSH), page 5-177.
Error code: 3202

Maximum number of LLS errors exceeded in (x) position of reagent carrier located on
reagent carousel position (y).
x = Reagent carrier position in which the error occurred
y = Reagent carousel position

indicated reagent carrier position. time as this message to determine the specific
error with the pipettor.

codes.

error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3300

High or low pressure detected on (x).
x = Pipettor name

• Bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots in the sample. Remove bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots using a clean
disposable pipette or applicator stick.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
• Tubing connections are loose. Tighten tubing connections finger tight.
connection or have failed
– Antenna board
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)
bottle.
• Liquid on the reagent septum Place a new septum on all reagent bottles.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Tubing connections are loose. Tighten tubing connections finger tight.
– Antenna board
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)
Error code: 3350

Unable to process test, aspiration error for (x) at (y).
x = Pipettor name
y = Location

tube.
• Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Tighten tubing connections finger tight.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• For i 1000SR:
page 9-154
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)
bottle.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• For i 1000SR:
page 9-154
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)
Error code: 3351

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), output enable bit value.
x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = P (slot 2 - i 1000SR)

– Liquid level sense board in the indicated hardware failure.
position in the upper card cage has a poor
Error code: 3352

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), invalid syringe start.

– Cables to the pressure monitor board for the hardware failure.
pipettor indicated have a poor connection or
failed
– Liquid level sense board in the indicated
– Pressure monitor board for the indicated
pipettor has a poor connection or failed

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3354

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), foam detection failure.

failed
Error code: 3355

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), incomplete aspiration.

failed
Error code: 3356

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), clot score.

tube.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-154
failed
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)
• Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the
bottle.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-154
failed
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)
Error code: 3358

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), back end average pressure.

failed

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3359

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), front end and back end average pressure
correlation.

failed
Error code: 3360

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), communication failure.

failed

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3361

High pressure detected on liquid level sense board (x).

• Probe for the specific pipettor is obstructed. Perform the appropriate replacement procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
failed
Error code: 3362

Low pressure detected on liquid level sense board (x).

failed

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3363

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), invalid detail status code.

failed
Error code: 3364

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), output enable bit number.

failed

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3365

(x) disabled, maximum number of aspiration errors exceeded.
x = Pipettor name

• Communication or hardware failure. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
failed
connection or failed (S = slot 10, R1 = slot 8,
R2 = slot 6, STAT = slot 4)
pipettor has a poor connection or failed (S =
slot 10, R1 = slot 8, R2 = slot 6, STAT = slot 4)
• Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
Error code: 3366

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), pressure discord score.

tube.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-154
failed
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)
bottle.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• For i 1000SR:
page 9-154
failed
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)
Error code: 3367

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), slope score failure.

– Cables to the pipettor board for the pipettor hardware failure.
have a poor connection or failed
– Pipettor board for the pipettor has a poor
connection or failed (i 1000SR)
pipettor has a poor connection or failed.
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3368

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), shape conform score.

tube.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-154
failed
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the
bottle.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-154
failed
Slot 2 (i 1000SR)
Slot 3 (i 1000SR)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3375

Unable to process test, aspiration error occurred.

• Bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots present in the Remove bubbles or foam using a clean disposable
sample. pipette or applicator stick.
Remove fibrin clots using an applicator stick, or
recentrifuge the sample.
• Sample cup or tube not seated properly in sample Ensure sample cup or tube is pushed completely
carrier or sample carousel. down into the sample carrier or sample carousel.
• Sample probe is obstructed. Clean the sample probe.
• Sample probe is damaged. Replace the sample probe.
page 9-74.
page 9-82.
• Drop of liquid on the side of the sample cup or Transfer the sample to a new cup or tube.
tube.
• Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Tighten tubing connection finger tight.
– PM Sensor defective hardware failure.
– PM sensor cable disconnected

– PM board defective
Error code: 3376

Unable to process test, dispense error occurred.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3377

Unable to process test, wash error occurred.

leaking. tubing.
page 9-82.
page 9-74.
page 9-82.
• Water source supply was interrupted. 1. Verify the water source supply is functioning.

• Air bubbles are present in the water source 1. Check the tubing connections.
supply tubing.
– Probe wash pump hardware failure.
– Tubing damaged
– PM sensor
– PM board
– Solenoid valve
Error code: 3378

Unable to initialize run, wash error occurred.

leaking. tubing.
page 9-82.
page 9-74.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

page 9-82.

supply tubing.
– Probe wash pump hardware failure.
– Tubing damaged
– PM sensor
– PM board
– Solenoid valve
Error code: 3380

Unable to process test, aspiration error (x) pipettor at position (y).
x = Pipettor name

• Bubbles or foam in reagent container. Remove bubbles or foam from the reagent surface
using a clean applicator stick for each bottle.
• Reagent probe is dirty. Perform weekly maintenance procedure to clean
probe.
See 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes,
page 9-26.
Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37 or 1122 R2 Pipettor
Calibration, page 9-38.
• Reagent probe is damaged. Replace the probe.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Reagent cartridge level low or empty. Load reagents or replace empty cartridges.
– PM PCB defective hardware failure.
– PM sensor defective
– Solenoid valve
Error code: 3381

Unable to process test, dispense error (x) pipettor at position (y).
x = Pipettor name

probe.
page 9-26.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3382

Unable to process test, internal wash pressure (x) error (y) pipettor.
x = Error type
y = Pipettor name

leaking. reagent probe tubing.
page 9-85.
page 9-85.
– Defective internal probe wash pump hardware failure.
– Defective reagent valve assembly

– PM PCB defective
Error code: 3385

Unable to process test, Reagent 1 aspiration error occurred.

probe.
page 9-26.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Error code: 3386

Unable to process test, Reagent 2 aspiration error occurred.

page 9-85.
probe.
page 9-26.
– Solenoid valve

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3500

Pressure monitoring failure on liquid level sense board (x).

failed
Error code: 3501

LLS Command timeout on liquid level sense board (x).

failed
• Software error Contact your Area Customer Support. Please

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3502

LLS data read timeout on liquid level sense board (x).

failed
Error code: 3503

LLS data write timeout on liquid level sense board (x).

failed

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3504

Pressure Monitoring timeout on liquid level sense board (x).

failed
Error code: 3505

Pressure Monitoring data read timeout on liquid level sense board (x).

failed

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3506

Pressure Monitoring data write timeout on liquid level sense board (x).

failed
Error code: 3507

Invalid timeout bit on liquid level sense board (x).

failed

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3508

Communication failure on liquid level sense board for (x).
x = Pipettor name

failed
Error code: 3550

Self test failure on liquid level sense board (x).

Error code: 3551

Self test failure on liquid level sense board (x).


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3552

No response from liquid level sense board (x).

Error code: 3553

Invalid address detected on liquid level sense board (x).

Error code: 3554

Self test timeout on liquid level sense board (x).

Error code: 3556

Self test failed on liquid level sense board (x).


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3557

POST failed on Liquid level sense board (x).

Error code: 3574

PM code invalid at end of dispense.

Communication failure with PM board. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
Error code: 3575

DI water tank is empty.


• Water source supply is restricted. 1. Verify tubing from the water source is not
crimped or blocked.

• Incoming DI water pressure is too low. Increase the incoming DI water pressure to within
specifications.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

supply tubing.
– Supply water tubing is disconnected hardware failure.
– Incoming On/Off valve failure

– Float sensor is disconnected or defective
– AC/DC driver board is defective
– AC/DC controller board is defective
Error code: 3576

DI water tank, timeout during automatic fill.


crimped or blocked.

specifications.
supply tubing.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3577

DI water tank not filling.


crimped or blocked.

specifications.
supply tubing.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3578

DI water tank, timeout during initialization.


crimped or blocked.

specifications.
supply tubing.

Error code: 3579

Internal Low concentration waste tank is full.

• Drainage or overflow tubing is crimped. Reposition the drainage and overflow tubing so
there are no crimps.
• Waste tubing is too high. Adjust the waste tubing so it is less than 4 inches
(100 mm) from the ground.
– Drain line is plugged hardware failure.
– Float switch is defective

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3580

PM board not in ready mode.

• Communication failure with PM board. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 3581

PM board does not respond.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3582

PM board POST error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3583

PM board not in ready mode to request PM software version.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3584

PM board does not respond to request for PM software version.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3585

PM board not in ready status during seek.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3586

PM board not in ready status beginning aspiration.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3587

PM board not in ready status ending aspiration.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3588

PM board not in ready status before dispense.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3589

PM board not in ready status at start of dispense.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3590

PM board not in ready status at end of dispense.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3591

PM board not in ready status before wash.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3592

PM board not in ready status at start of wash.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3595

PM board not in ready status at end of wash.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3596

PM board not responding at end of aspiration.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3597

PM board not responding at end of dispense.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3598

PM board not responding at end of wash.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3599

PM code invalid at end of aspiration.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3600

PM code invalid at end of wash.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3601

Invalid data terminator received from Liquid Level Sense board (x).

Error code: 3602

(x) liquid level sense antenna verification failure.
x = Pipettor name

– The liquid level sense antenna indicated in the hardware failure.
message is not responding.
Error code: 3603

POST passed, Liquid level sense board (x), version (y).
y = Firmware revision

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the indicated Status message. No corrective action is required.
liquid level sense board.
Error code: 3604

PM board not in ready status at beginning of seek.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3700

Unable to process test, (x) wash aspiration error for probe(s) (y).
x = Wash Zone
y = Probe number

• Fibrin or clots in the sample. Remove fibrin clots with a clean applicator stick.
If error occurs on multiple samples:
• Poor tubing connections to the wash zone Reconnect tubing to the affected probe(s) for the
probes. indicated wash zone.
• Temperature sensor connected to wrong probe Reconnect the wash zone tubing/sensor cable to
tubing. the correct probe.
• Wash zone probe obstructed. 1. Perform the appropriate as-needed
maintenance procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
– 6445 Pipettor/WZ Probe Cleaning,
page 9-57.
2. Perform the appropriate replacement procedure:

• For i 1000SR:
– Replace the wash zone probe (i 1000SR),
page 9-157.
• Wash zone temperature sensor obstructed. Perform the appropriate replacement procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
– Replace the wash zone temperature tubing
and sensor (i 1000SR), page 9-160.
• Poor tubing connections to the vacuum vessels. Reseat the tubing connection at the vacuum valve
of the vacuum vessel.
– DC driver I/O board in slot 4 in the lower card hardware failure.
cage has a poor connection or failed (i 1000SR)
– Wash zone manifold valve failure
If error occurs after daily maintenance:
• Processing module status is in the Warming Repeat daily maintenance once the processing
status. module is in the Ready status.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3701

(x) disabled, maximum number of wash aspiration errors exceeded.
x = Wash Zone name

Error 3700 occurred shortly before or at the same
time as this message. Determine the specific
probe(s) 1, 2, or 3 experiencing the 3700 error
message.
• Poor tubing connections to the wash zone Reconnect tubing to the affected probe(s) for the
probes. indicated wash zone.
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-57.

• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157.
• Wash zone temperature sensor obstructed. Perform the appropriate replacement procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
and sensor (i 1000SR), page 9-160
• Poor tubing connections to the vacuum vessels. Reseat the tubing connection at the vacuum valve
of the vacuum vessel.
cage has a poor connection or failed (i 1000SR)
– Wash zone manifold valve failure
Error code: 3702

Wash water supply warning (x), decreased flow detected, (y/z).
x = Wash cup name
y = Measured water flow rate
z = Minimum flow rate

Fluctuation or a slight decrease in water wash flow. No corrective action required.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3703

Unable to process test, wash water supply failure (x), (y/z).
x = Wash cup name
y = Measured water flow rate
z = Minimum flow rate

Wash water supply is restricted or requires Contact your Area Customer Support.
adjustment.
Error code: 3840

(x) timeout during rotation.
x = High concentration waste pump name

hardware failure.
Error code: 3841

(x) homing failure.
x = High concentration waste pump name

hardware failure.
Error code: 3850

(x) timeout while moving to upper limit.
x = Probe wash pump name

hardware failure.
Error code: 3851

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving (x) to upper limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3852

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving (x) to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3853

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving (x) to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3854

(x) timeout while moving to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3855

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving (x) to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3856

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving (x) to lower limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3857

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving (x) to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3858

Cuvette wash pump timeout while moving to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3859

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump
to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3860

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump to
upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3861

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump to
upper limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3862

Cuvette wash pump timeout while moving to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3863

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump
to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3864

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump to lower
limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3865

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump to
lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3866

Cuvette wash pump timeout while homing.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3867

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while homing Cuvette wash pump.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3868

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while homing Cuvette wash pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3869

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while homing Cuvette wash pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3870

Wash solution pump timeout while moving to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3871

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving Wash solution pump
to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3872

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Wash solution pump to
upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3873

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Wash solution pump to
upper limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3874

Wash solution pump timeout while moving to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3875

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving Wash solution pump
to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3876

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving Wash solution pump to lower
limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3877

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Wash solution pump to
lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3878

Wash solution pump timeout while homing.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3879

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while homing Wash solution pump.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3880

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while homing Wash solution pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3881

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while homing Wash solution pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3882

High concentration waste pump timeout while moving to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3883

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving High concentration
waste pump to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3884

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving High concentration waste
pump to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3885

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving High concentration waste
pump to upper limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3886

High concentration waste pump timeout while moving to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3887

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving High concentration
waste pump to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3888

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving High concentration waste
pump to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3889

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving High concentration waste
pump to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3890

High concentration waste pump timeout while homing.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3891

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while homing High concentration
waste pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3892

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while homing High concentration waste
pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3893

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while homing High concentration
waste pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3894

Sample syringe drive timeout during movement.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3895

Sample syringe drive homing failure.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3896

(x) syringe drive timeout during movement.
x = Syringe drive name

hardware failure.
Error code: 3897

(x) syringe drive homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3898

(x) syringe drive timeout during movement.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3899

(x) syringe drive homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 3900

The Processing Module is (x), inlet valve cannot be opened for ARM buffer transfer.
x = Processing module status

User manually requested buffer transfer and the Processing module cannot be in an Offline or
processing module is not in the correct status for Stopped status.
receiving buffer from the ARM.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 3901

(x) failed: (y).
x = Type of request
y = Text that describes the failure

The ARM cannot respond to the SCC request to Refer to the ARM Observed Problems in this
transfer buffer to a processing module. section, for the text in the last field of the ARM error
code:
Error code: 3902

(x): (y)
x = Type of message
y = Text that describes the failure

The ARM is not able to respond to a request to Refer to the ARM Observed Problems in this
transfer buffer to a processing module, because it is section, for the text in the last field of the ARM error
not in the correct status. code:
Error code: 3903

Unable to configure Wash Buffer transfer to automatic, ARM port error.

• The ARM RS-232 cable was not connected when Connect the RS-232 cable to the SCC port then
the SCC was configured to automatic wash buffer configure the SCC to automatic wash buffer
transfer. transfer.
• Another cable is connected to the port used for Reseat the RS-232 cable connection to the SCC
the ARM RS-232 cable. port and to the ARM.
• The SCC hyperterminal program is running. Contact your Area Customer Support.
Error code: 3904

ARM turned off, SCC communication to a Processing Module failed.

Buffer was transferring to a processing module 1. Determine why the communication failed
when communication to the SCC failed. between the SCC and the processing module
and correct the cause.
2. Cycle power to the processing module and/or


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Bar code reader error codes (4000-4999)

The bar code reader error code category includes error codes between
4000-4999.
representative at:

Error code: 4000

Unable to read reagent bar code in position (x) on (y) carousel.
x = Position in which the unreadable bar code was detected.
(1-25 for i System; A1-D20 for c 8000/c 16000; A1 - O6 for c 4000)
y = Location in which the unreadable bar code was detected.
(Inner, Middle, or Outer ring for i System; R1 or R2 for c System)

• Reagent bottle bar code label is dirty. Clean the label.
• Condensation on reagent bottle bar code label. Wipe the label with a clean lint-free tissue.
• Reagent bottle bar code label is damaged. Load a new reagent kit.
• Bar code reader window is dirty. Clean the bar code reader window, page 10-687, if
error occurs with multiple reagent bottles.
For c System:
• 1D reagent bar code label has an invalid See 1D reagent bar code label data format,
checksum. page 4-25.
hardware failure.
For i System:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Reagent bar code reader requires calibration. Calibrate the bar code reader.
• Reagent bar code reader was not calibrated Repeat bar code readers diagnostic procedure
correctly. and ensure the bar code calibration tools are not
tilted and the bar codes face the center of the
reagent carousel.
hardware failure.
Error code: 4001

Unable to read reagent 1 bar code in position (x).

• The bar code label on the 20 mL (bottle) cartridge Reposition the 20 mL cartridge in the adapter so it
is not facing the bar code reader. faces the outside of the reagent supply center.
hardware failure.
Error code: 4002

Unable to read reagent 2 bar code in position (x).

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4003

Unable to read reagent 1 bar code.

hardware failure.
Error code: 4004

Unable to read reagent 2 bar code.

• Reagent bottle bar code is damaged Load a new reagent kit.
hardware failure.
Error code: 4005

Unable to read segment ID bar code on reagent carousel 1 segment (x).
x= Reagent carousel segment

• Segment bar code label is dirty. Clean the label.
• Segment bar code label is damaged. Replace the reagent carousel segment.
• Communication failure with the reagent bar code Cycle power to the processing module and/or
reader. sample handler, page 5-11.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4006

Unable to read segment ID barcode on reagent carousel 2 segment (x).
x= Reagent carousel segment

• Segment bar code has too much condensation. Wipe the label with a clean lint-free tissue.
• Segment bar code label is dirty. Clean the label.
• Segment bar code label is damaged. Replace the reagent carousel segment.
hardware failure.
Error code: 4007

User-defined reagent kit in location (x) was unloaded, bar code read error in same position.
x= Reagent carousel segment and position

A bar coded reagent cartridge was detected in a 1. If the non-bar coded reagent was moved to a
position in which a non-bar coded reagent was different position, assign the new position.
manually assigned. See Load non-bar coded reagents (c 4000),
page 5-79.
2. If the non-bar coded reagent is no longer

onboard, no action is required until the reagent is
loaded again. At that time, assign a new position.
Error code: 4008

Unable to read reagent bar code in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y).
x = Position in which the unreadable bar code was detected
y = RSH bay/section number

• Bar code reader window is dirty. Perform bar code reader test or bar code reader
calibration if error occurs with multiple reagent
bottles.
See Bar code reader diagnostics description (RSH -
c 4000/i 1000SR /ci 4100), page 10-680.
• Bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure.
See 3240 Bar Code Calibration, page 10-681.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Bar code reader was not calibrated correctly. Repeat bar code readers diagnostic procedure.
– Bar Code Reader hardware failure.
– RSH Distribution Board
Error code: 4100

Termination character not received from Reagent bar code reader.

Error code: 4101

Invalid checksum received from Reagent bar code reader.

Error code: 4102

Invalid command sent to Reagent bar code reader.

– Controller board in slot 14 in the upper card

cage has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 4103

Reagent bar code reader not responding.

• Communication failure with the Reagent bar code Cycle power to the processing module and/or

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4104

Acknowledge command not received from Reagent bar code reader.

Error code: 4105

POST failed, Reagent bar code reader.

• Communication failure with the Reagent bar code Cycle power to the processing module and/or
Error code: 4106

POST passed, Reagent Bar code Reader (x).
x = Firmware Version.

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the reagent Status message. No corrective action is required.
bar code reader.
Error code: 4200

Unable to read bar code label at Carrier (x) Position (y).
x = Carrier ID
y = Position

If error code 4203 occurred at the same time, the
carrier label cannot be read. If there is no other
error code, the sample label cannot be read.
• A cup or tube is not in position. No corrective action is required.
• A bar code label is not on the sample tube. Place a bar code label on the sample tube.
• Tube is not correctly positioned in the carrier. Place the tube in the carrier so the bar code is
visible through the slot.
• Sample tube bar code label is dirty or damaged. Clean the sample bar code label or replace if
damaged.
• Sample cup or tube is scratched or dirty. 1. Clean the sample cup or tube.
2. Replace if damaged.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Bar code label does not meet specifications. See Sample bar code label requirements,
page 4-27 for guidelines.
• System bar code configuration does not match Edit the bar code configuration as required for the
bar code label. bar code label symbology. See Change the sample
bar code settings for codabar, page 2-20, Change
the sample bar code settings for code 39,
page 2-20, or Change the sample bar code settings
for I 2 of 5, page 2-21.
• Sample ID bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure
3240 Bar Code Calibration, page 10-681 if you have
a robotic sample handler (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100).
– RSH bar code reader or sample load queue hardware failure.
bar code reader
Error code: 4201

Unable to read Carrier ID (x) at Load Queue bar code reader, samples will not be processed.
x = Carrier ID

Carrier ID read at the processing queue bar code
reader but was unable to be read at the load queue
bar code reader.
2. Place carrier on the load queue.

• Sample ID bar code reader requires calibration. Calibrate the bar code reader.
– Load queue SID bar code reader hardware failure.
Error code: 4202

Carrier position numbers detected out of sequence on Carrier (x).
x = Carrier ID

• Carrier mis-labeled. Use a different carrier.
• Load queue bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code reader calibration.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4203

Unable to read Position number (x) on Carrier at the Load Queue bar code reader.
x = Position


• Sample ID bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code reader calibration.
– Load queue SID bar code reader hardware failure.
Error code: 4204

Unable to read Carrier ID at Sample ID bar code reader.


• Sample ID bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code reader calibration.
– Sample ID bar code reader hardware failure.
Error code: 4205

Unable to read carrier ID (x) at RSH bar code reader.
x = Carrier ID


• Bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code reader calibration.
Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure
3240 Bar Code Calibration, page 10-681
(c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100).
– Sample ID bar code reader hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4206

Unable to read Carrier ID for carrier in bay (x) section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

• Carrier bar code label is wet or dirty. Clean and dry the carrier bar code label.
• Carrier bar code is damaged. Use a different carrier.
If error occurs for more than one carrier:
• Bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code reader calibration.
Error code: 4207

Unable to read Carrier ID for carrier in section (x).

Error code: 4208

Invalid Sample ID scanned by the Sample ID bar code reader. The Sample ID contains an
invalid character.

The sample ID contains an invalid character. Use valid characters only.
Valid characters are defined by Abbott Laboratories
as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and the special characters , / >
< ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and
<space>.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4209

Unable to read Carrier ID for carrier in bay (x) section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

Error code: 4300

Unable to read position number (x) on Carrier at the (y).
x = Position number
y = Bar code reader

• Carrier bar code label is damaged or dirty. 1. Clean the carrier bar code label.

– Processing queue bar code reader hardware failure.
Error code: 4301

Unable to read Carrier ID at the (x) on module (y).
x = Bar code reader


– Processing queue bar code reader. hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4302

Invalid Carrier ID detected at (x) on module (y).
x = Bar code reader


Error code: 4400

Sample ID bar code reader not responding.

– Controller board has a poor connection or hardware failure.
failed (ci System/i System - slot 3 in the upper
card cage, c System - slot 2 in lower card
cage)
– RSH bar code reader or sample load queue
bar code reader
Error code: 4401

Invalid checksum received from sample ID bar code reader.

bar code reader
Error code: 4402

Termination character not received from sample ID bar code reader.

bar code reader

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4403

Sample ID bar code reader not detected.

bar code reader
– Controller board has a poor connection or
cage)
Error code: 4404

Invalid command sent to sample ID bar code reader.

bar code reader
Error code: 4405

Sample ID bar code reader communication error.

bar code reader
Error code: 4406

Unable to perform read, sample ID bar code reader in use.

bar code reader
Error code: 4407

Invalid configuration for sample ID bar code reader.

bar code reader

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4408

POST failed, sample ID bar code reader.

• Communication failure with the sample ID bar Cycle power to the processing module and/or
code reader. sample handler, page 5-11.
– Controller board has a poor connection or hardware failure.
cage)
– RSH bar code reader or sample load queue
bar code reader
Error code: 4409

POST passed, sample ID bar code reader, version (x).
x = Firmware version

Power on self tests (POST) passed for the sample Status message. No corrective action is required.
load queue bar code reader or RSH bar code
reader.
Error code: 4410

Timing sequence error detected with RSH bar code reader.

• RSH bar code reader calibration was not Perform bar code reader calibration.
performed.
– RSH bar code reader hardware failure.
Error code: 4411

Invalid checksum received from the bar code reader.

– Bar code reader (i 1000SR) hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4412

Invalid command sent to the bar code reader.

Error code: 4413

Bar code reader communication error.

Error code: 4414

Bar code reader not detected.

– Controller board has a poor connection or

failed
Error code: 4415

Termination character not received from the bar code reader.

Error code: 4416

Unable to perform read, bar code reader in use.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4417

Invalid configuration for the bar code reader.

Error code: 4418

Reagent bar code reader communication error.

Error code: 4419

Invalid configuration for reagent bar code reader.

Error code: 4420

Unable to perform read, reagent bar code reader in use.

Error code: 4500

(x) not responding on Processing Module (y).
x = Bar code reader
y = Processing module number (1 - 4)

• Communication failure with the bar code reader. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4501

Processing Queue bar code reader (x) in use.
x = Processing module number (1 - 4)

• Communication failure with the processing queue Cycle power to the processing module and/or
bar code reader. sample handler, page 5-11.
Error code: 4502

Invalid reader number (x) requested for Processing Queue bar code reader.
x = Reader number

Error code: 4503

Invalid configuration on Processing Queue bar code reader (x).

Error code: 4504

Processing Queue barcode reader (x) communication error.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4505

Invalid checksum received from Processing Queue bar code reader (x).

Error code: 4506

Termination character not received from Processing Queue bar code reader (x).

Error code: 4507

Invalid terminator received from Processing Queue bar code reader (x).

Error code: 4508

Processing Queue bar code reader (x) not detected.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4509

Invalid reader address received from Processing Queue bar code reader (x).

Error code: 4510

Invalid command received from Processing Queue bar code reader (x).

Error code: 4511

Processing Queue bar code reader (x) not responding.

bar code reader sample handler, page 5-11.
– Controller board in slot 3 in the upper card hardware failure.
– Processing queue bar code reader
Error code: 4520

POST passed, Processing Queue Bar code Reader (x) version (y).
y = Firmware version

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the Status message. No corrective action is required.
processing queue bar code reader.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4530

POST failed, Processing Queue bar code reader (x).

– Processing Queue bar code reader
Error code: 4600

Unable to read carousel ID at Processing Queue bar code reader.

• Carousel is not present. Place carousel on the LAS carousel platform.
• Carousel ID label is not on the carousel. Apply a carousel ID label to the carousel.
• The carousel is not seated correctly. Seat the carousel correctly.
• Carousel bar code label is damaged, wet, or dirty. 1. Clean the carousel bar code label or replace the
label if damaged.
2. Place carousel on the LAS carousel platform.
3. Use a different carousel, if error continues.

• Processing queue bar code reader (used to read Perform bar code reader calibration.
the LAS carousel) requires calibration.
– Processing queue bar code reader. hardware failure.
Error code: 4601

LAS bar code read failed for SID (x).
x - Sample ID

damaged.
• Sample tube is not correctly positioned in the Position the tube in the carrier so the bar code is
carrier. visible.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Bar code label does not meet specifications. 1. See Sample bar code label requirements,
page 4-27, for guidelines.
2. Contact your LAS vendor.

Error code: 4602

LAS bar code read mismatched for SID (x).
x = Sample ID ordered

The bar code read by the LAS did not match the
SID data ordered.
• The wrong tube is at the aspiration point. 1. Rerun the sample.
2. Contact your LAS vendor.
Error code: 4800

Unable to read Sample ID at sample carousel position (x).
x = Sample carousel position

• Tube is not correctly positioned in the carousel. Place the tube in the carousel so the bar code is
damaged.
If error occurs with multiple samples:
bar code labels. bar code label symbology. See Change the sample
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4801

Unable to read Sample ID at sample carousel.

damaged.
If error occurs with multiple samples:
hardware failure.
Error code: 4900

(x) bar code reader Power On Self Test failure.
x = Sample Carousel, Reagent 1, or Reagent 2

• Communication failure with bar code reader. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 4901

(x) bar code reader failure (port initialize error).

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 4902

(x) bar code reader failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 4906

(x) bar code reader parity error.

For sample carousel:
damaged.
For Reagent 1 or 2:
For all bar code readers:
hardware failure.
Robotic and sensor error codes (5000-5999)

The robotic and sensor error code category includes error codes
between 5000-5999.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
representative at:

Error code: 5000

(x) movement restricted at (y) step number (z).
x = Pipettor name
y = Location
z = Position

• Stopper not removed from the sample tube. Remove stopper from sample tube.
• Sample cup or tube was not properly placed in Ensure sample cup or tube is fully seated into
the carrier. sample carrier and is positioned straight.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• For i 1000SR:
– 3630 LLS Test, page 10-672
• Sample carrier is damaged. Use a different carrier.
– Indexer board has a poor connection or failed hardware failure.
– Liquid level sense board has a poor
– Liquid level sense and Z cable failure
– Pipettor
• Reagent bottle cap was not removed. Remove the cap from the reagent bottle, and then
install septum.
• Vacuum vessel tubing obstructing probe. Adjust vacuum vessel tubing so the pipettor does
not touch it when washing the probe.
• Reagent bottle is not seated correctly in the Reseat the reagent bottle in the carousel.
reagent carousel.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
– 3630 LLS Test, page 10-672
– Liquid level sense board has a poor hardware failure.
– Indexer board has a poor connection or failed
– Liquid level sense and Z cable
– Pipettor

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5001

Sample Pipettor probe may be in sample cup/tube on Processing Module (x) due to prior
hardware failure.

Sample pipettor failure occurred on the specified 1. Start up the processing module to remove probe
processing module that could possibly leave the from sample cup or tube. Do not perform start up
probe inside the sample cup or tube. on the sample handler at the same time. See
Start up the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-12.
2. Perform a start up on the sample handler when

3. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 3000 or 5000

category error codes that occurred at the same
time as this message.

codes.

error code.
Error code: 5002

Sample pipettor timeout during vertical movement.

of the sample pipettor in the cuvette dispense or
wash cup positions.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5003

Sample pipettor vertical homing failure.

of the sample pipettor.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5004

Sample pipettor timeout during horizontal movement.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5005

Sample pipettor horizontal homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5006

(x) pipettor timeout during vertical movement.
x = Pipettor name

of the reagent 1 pipettor in the cuvette dispense
or wash cup positions.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5007

(x) pipettor vertical homing failure.
x = Pipettor name

of the reagent 1 pipettor.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5008

(x) pipettor timeout during horizontal movement.
x = Pipettor name

the reagent 1 pipettor.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5009

(x) pipettor horizontal homing failure.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 5010

(x) pipettor timeout during vertical movement.
x = Pipettor name

of the reagent 2 pipettor in the cuvette dispense
or wash cup positions.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5011

(x) pipettor vertical homing failure.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5012

(x) pipettor timeout during horizontal movement.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 5013

(x) pipettor horizontal homing failure.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 5014

Sample pipettor movement restricted at (x) position (y).
y = Position number

• Sample cup or tube was not seated or aligned Ensure sample cup or tube is fully seated and is
properly. positioned straight.
• Sample carousel cover is not seated properly. Reseat the sample carousel cover.
page 9-74.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5015

(x) pipettor movement restricted at (y).
x = Pipettor name

• Cap not removed from a reagent cartridge. Remove cap from reagent bottles.
• Reagent cartridge and/or adapter is not seated Reseat the reagent cartridge and/or adapter.
correctly.
• Empty reagent cartridge. Replace the reagent.
• Carousel cover is not seated properly. Reseat the carousel cover.
of the reagent pipettor.
• Non-bar coded reagent is not loaded or is not Load the non-bar coded reagent in the correct
loaded in the correct position. assigned position.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5016

(x) pipettor movement restricted at (y).
x = Pipettor name

correctly.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

hardware failure.
Error code: 5017

Unable to perform horizontal movement, sample pipettor not in up position.

• The sample pipettor was physically pushed down 1. Select the processing module graphic, and
from its vertical home position. then select Stop.
2. Start up the processing module when the status

is Stopped. See Start up the processing module
and/or sample handler, page 5-12.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5018

Sample pipettor movement restricted at sample carrier.

• Sample cup or tube was not properly placed in Ensure sample cup or tube is fully seated into the
the carrier. sample carrier and is positioned straight.
page 9-74.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5019

Unable to process test, (x) pipettor movement restricted.
x = Pipettor name

correctly.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5020

Unable to process test, (x) pipettor movement restricted.
x = Pipettor name

correctly.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

hardware failure.
Error code: 5021

Sample pipettor movement restricted at LAS.

• Sample cup or tube was not properly placed in Ensure sample cup or tube is fully seated into the
the carousel. carousel and is positioned straight.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5022

Sample pipettor movement restricted at dilution cuvette position.

page 9-74.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5023

Sample pipettor movement restricted.

• Sample cup or tube was not properly placed in Ensure sample cup or tube is fully seated into
the carrier or carousel. sample carrier or carousel and is positioned
straight.
page 9-74.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5024

Unexpected SMC status after (x) movement.
x = Hardware component

of the pipettor.
• Probe is out of alignment. Perform pipettor calibration.
Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36, 1121 R1
Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37, or 1122 R2 Pipettor
hardware failure.
• Communication failure with SMC board. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5025

Sample Pipettor (vertical) did not stop as expected.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5026

(x) pipettor (vertical) did not stop as expected.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 5027

(x) pipettor (vertical) did not stop as expected.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 5100

(x) disabled, maximum number of errors exceeded.
x = Name of mechanism taken offline

For vortexer:
– Cable for the specified vortexer has a poor hardware failure.
– Vortexer in the indicated position
– DC Driver I/O board in the card cage has a

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

For other motors:
– Cable for the specified motor has a poor hardware failure.
Error code: 5101

(x) did not disengage from RV.
x = Vortexer number

– Vortexer in the specified position
Error code: 5102

Unable to process test, failure on (x).
x = Mechanism name

Intermittent failure with the specified mechanism. 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 5000 or 7000

codes.

error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5103

(x) did not mix RV for required time.
x = Vortexer number

Error code: 5104

(x) did not reach required speed.
x = Vortexer number

Error code: 5105

(x) did not engage with RV.
x = Vortexer number


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5106

Process path jam was detected and a recovery was successfully performed. Process path may
require servicing.
NOTE: Frequent occurrences of this error code may indicate a pending
hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.

• An RV (reaction vessel) was jammed in the A recovery was performed to clear the jammed RV.
process path track. No further action required.
• RVs are damaged or have an irregular shape. A recovery was performed to clear the jammed RV.
No further action required.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5107

Process path jam was detected and a recovery was successfully performed. Process path may
require servicing.
NOTE: Frequent occurrences of this error code may indicate a pending
hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.

• An RV (reaction vessel) was jammed in the A recovery was performed to clear the jammed RV.
process path track. No further action required.
• RVs are damaged or have an irregular shape. A recovery was performed to clear the jammed RV.
No further action required.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5151

Reaction carousel timeout during rotation.

the reaction carousel.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5152

Reaction carousel homing failure

the reaction carousel.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5153

Reagent 1 outer carousel timeout during rotation.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5154

Reagent 1 outer carousel homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5155

Reagent 1 inner carousel timeout during rotation.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5156

Reagent 1 inner carousel homing failure.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5157

Reagent 2 carousel timeout during rotation.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5158

Reagent 2 carousel homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5159

Sample carousel rotation error from (x) to (y).
x = Start position
y = Destination

hardware failure.
Error code: 5160

Sample carousel failure.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5161

Reagent 1 outer carousel rotation error from (x) to (y).
x = Start position
y = Destination

hardware failure.
Error code: 5162

Reagent 1 outer carousel failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5163

Reagent 1 inner carousel rotation error from (x) to (y).
x = Start position
y = Destination

hardware failure.
Error code: 5164

Reagent 1 inner carousel failure.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5165

Reagent 2 carousel rotation error from (x) to (y).
x = Start position
y = Destination

hardware failure.
Error code: 5166

Reagent 2 carousel failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5167

Cuvette tab not detected at cuvette (x).
x = Cuvette #

• Water is present on the slotted edges of the Dry off the slotted edge of the cuvette segment.
cuvette segment.
• Cuvette tab is broken. Replace cuvette segment.
page 9-100.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5168

Cuvette tab not detected.

cuvette segment.
page 9-100.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

hardware failure.
Error code: 5169

Optics trigger sensor auto adjustment value (x) out of range.
x = Trigger value

cuvette segment.
page 9-100.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5170

Sample carousel timeout during rotation.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5171

Sample carousel homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5172

Optics trigger sensor auto adjustment error.

cuvette segment.
page 9-100.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5173

Unable to complete reagent scan.

provide information specifying the operation you
occurred.
Error code: 5174

Duplicate reagent bottle detected in position (x) on carousel (y). The bottle will not be used.

• Reagent bar code reader requires calibration. Calibrate the bar code reader.
• The reagent carousel is slipping and the same Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
bottle was scanned twice. hardware failure.
Error code: 5175

Duplicate reagent bottle detected in position (x) on carousel (y). The bottle will not be
created.
x = Reagent segment and position

A user printed reagent bar code was created with Remove the duplicate bottle and recreate the
the same lot number and serial number as a reagent bar code with a unique serial number.
reagent already scanned on the system.
Error code: 5176

No carrier detected at reagent carousel position (x).
x = Reagent carousel position number


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5177

Carrier detected in reagent carousel position (x).

Error code: 5178

Reagent carrier detect sensor failed.

Error code: 5179

Duplicate reagent bottle detected in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y).

Bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure.
Error code: 5180

Unable to load reagent carrier from section (x) due to a previous mechanism failure.

A mechanism failure prevented loading of the Restart the RSH.
reagent carrier.
Error code: 5181

Unable to unload reagent carrier from reagent carousel position (x) due to a previous
mechanism failure.
x = Position number on the reagent carousel

A mechanism failure prevented unloading of the Restart the RSH.
reagent carrier.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5182

Carrier not detected in reagent carousel position (x).
x = Position number on the reagent carousel

– Carrier detect sensor
Error code: 5183

Reagent 2 outer carousel failure.

• Hardware failure Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
Error code: 5184

Reagent 2 inner carousel failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5185

Reagent 2 outer carousel rotation error from (x) to (y).
x = Start position
y = Destination

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5186

Reagent 2 inner carousel rotation error from (x) to (y).
x = Start position
y = Destination

hardware failure.
Error code: 5187

Reagent 2 outer carousel homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5188

Reagent 2 inner carousel homing failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5189

Reagent 2 outer carousel timeout during rotation.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5190

Reagent 2 inner carousel timeout during rotation.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5191

Unable to reset reagent carousel cover monitor.

• The reagent access door was opened. Close the reagent access door and perform a
Startup.
– Reagent access door sensor hardware failure.
– Reagent cooler monitor sensor
Error code: 5192

Unable to load reagent carrier from bay (x) section (y) due to a previous mechanism failure.

A mechanism failure prevented loading of the Restart the RSH.
reagent carrier.
Error code: 5193

Reagent supply center cover failed to open or close.

– Cover sensors hardware failure.
– Reagent supply center cover motor

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5200

RV detected below drop point when none was expected.

• An RV is jammed at the load point in the RV 1. Remove the RV transport shield.
transport.
2. Remove RV from the RV loader drop point on the
RV transport.
3. Replace the RV transport shield.

handler, page 5-12.
– CMIA optics board in slot 12 in the upper card hardware failure.
– RV loader drop point sensor is dirty or dusty
– RV loader drop point sensor board
Error code: 5201

RVs have not been picked up for an extended period of time.

• RVs (reaction vessels) are blocking the access 1. Open the RV access door and stir the RVs in the
path to the RV loader wheel. hopper by hand.
2. Wait until all tests in process are complete if the

RVs are still not picked up, and then Pause the
processing module, page 5-12.
3. Remove all RVs from the hopper, when the

4. Inspect the path to the RV loader wheel and

remove any RVs.
5. Place RVs back into the Hopper.

– RV loader wheel missing fingers hardware failure.
– CMIA optics board in slot 12 in the upper card


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5202

Drop point sensor on RV Loader failed.

– RV loader drop point sensor is dirty or dusty
– RV transport drop point sensor board
Error code: 5203

RV Loader Transport assembly depleted of RVs.

• There are no RVs (reaction vessels) in the Add reaction vessels to the RV loader hopper and
hopper. then select Run.
• The hopper baffle is not attached to the RV Secure the baffle on the hopper to the RV loader.
loader.
– RV loader hardware failure.
– RV loader wheel is missing fingers

– RV HOP LVL SNSR W104 cable underneath
the hopper has a poor connection
Error code: 5204

RV load verification sensor failure detected.

For i1000SR:
• An RV (reaction vessel) is jammed at the load 1. Raise the lower chute or remove the lower chute
point on the process path. cover to remove the jammed RV.

handler, page 5-12.
• Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve
– RV present sensor hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5205

Sensor detected an RV in the Process Path when attempting to load a new RV.

If error is infrequent, it is probably due to an No corrective action is required.
occasional failure to move a clean RV into the
processing path.
Sensor board #6 not calibrated. Calibrate a self-calibrating RV transport sensor
board.
– Sensor board #6 hardware failure.
– Load diverter
– STAT diverter
Error code: 5207

No RV detected at drop point.

• RV fell off the orienter wheel before reaching the If this occurs infrequently (three times a day or less)
chute. no corrective action is required.
– RV sensor cable has a poor connection
– RV sensor

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5208

Unable to process test, RVs are not available.

• RVs (reaction vessels) blocking the access path 1. Open the RV access door and stir the RVs in the
to the RV loader wheel. hopper by hand.
2. Wait until all tests in process are complete if the

RVs are still not picked up, and then Pause the
processing module, page 5-12.
3. Remove all RVs from the hopper, when the

4. Inspect the path to the RV loader wheel and

remove any RVs.
5. Place RVs back into the Hopper.

• RV pickers are broken off the RV loader wheel. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
Error code: 5209

No RV detected in process path after RV load attempt.

• RV loader chute is not in position to load RVs. Reseat the RV loader chute into the wash zone
manifold.
Error code: 5210

RV detected in process path when no RV was expected.

Error code: 5211

An RV could not be loaded in the allotted time.

– RV pickup assembly hardware failure.
– RV picked sensor

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5212

Empty RV hopper detected during initialization. Add RVs, update supplies and press Run.

No RVs (reaction vessels) in the RV Hopper. Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 1000SR),
page 5-40.
– RV hopper sensor hardware failure.
– RV hopper door solenoid (i 1000SR)
Error code: 5213

RV Loader Transport assembly depleted of RVs.

Temporarily unable to load RVs in the RV Loader No corrective action required. Error code 5203
Transport assembly. occurs if the error continues.
Error code: 5214

Unable to process test, RV not loaded.

If error is infrequent, it is probably due to an No corrective action is required.
occasional failure to move a clean RV into the
processing path.
Sensor board #6 not calibrated. Calibrate a self-calibrating RV transport sensor
board.
– Sensor board #6 hardware failure.
– Load diverter
– STAT diverter
Error code: 5251

Wash Buffer Transfer sensor failed, transfer canceled.

– Air sensor hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5252

Wash buffer level sensor disconnected.

• Wash buffer level sensor cable has a poor Reconnect the buffer level sensor.
connection.
• Wash buffer level sensor failed. Perform the appropriate replacement procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
– Replace the buffer level sensor (i 1000SR),
page 9-171
– Buffer level sensor cable hardware failure.
Error code: 5300

(x) vacuum failure during aspiration.
x = Wash Zone name

• Tubing/sensor at probe on one of the wash zones Reseat the wash zone tubing onto each probe one
has a poor connection. at a time.
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-57

• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• Tubing/sensor for one of the wash zones was Perform the appropriate replacement procedure:
obstructed or failed. • For i 1000SR:
and sensor (i 1000SR), page 9-160
• Wash zone probe is dirty. Clean the exterior of the probes on the wash zone
indicated in the error message.
– Vacuum filter hardware failure.
– Vacuum valve
– Vacuum vessel drain valve
– Vacuum pump

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5301

Vacuum system failure.

– Vacuum tubing hardware failure.
– Vacuum vessel drain blocked

– Vacuum valve
– Vacuum pump
– Vacuum filter
Error code: 5302

Vacuum initialization failed, vacuum sensor.

– Vacuum vessel hardware failure.
– Vacuum vessel drain valve

– Vacuum valve
– Vacuum sensor has a poor connection
Error code: 5303

Vacuum system failure, vacuum too low.

• Vacuum low pressure sensor hardware failure.
• Vacuum pump
• Vacuum tubing
• Vacuum valve
• Vacuum filter
• Heater cooler board (i 1000SR)
Error code: 5304

Vacuum system failure, liquid too high.

For i 1000SR
• External waste tubing is crimped. Reposition the external waste tubing so there are
no crimps.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Liquid waste quick disconnect is not connected. Connect the liquid waste quick disconnect.
– Waste pump hardware failure.
– Heater cooler board
Error code: 5305

Liquid too high in vacuum accumulator.
NOTE: Processing module will go to paused if

running tests.
• Liquid waste is full. Empty liquid waste container.
• Liquid waste tubing is not connected at the quick Reconnect the liquid waste container tubing at the
disconnect. quick disconnect.
• Liquid waste tubing is crimped or obstructed. Remove any obstructions.
• External waste tubing is obstructed. Remove any obstructions.
Error code: 5306

Run request denied, liquid too high in vacuum accumulator. Wait (x) minute(s) and try
again.

Attempted to run a test when there is still too much Wait the designated amount of time before trying to
liquid in the vacuum accumulator. initiate a run.
Error code: 5307

Liquid waste high pressure condition detected.

• Liquid waste is full. Empty liquid waste container.
• Liquid waste tubing is not connected at the quick Reconnect the liquid waste container tubing at the
disconnect. quick disconnect.
• Liquid waste tubing is crimped or obstructed. Remove any obstructions.
• External waste tubing is obstructed. Remove any obstructions.
• While performing a maintenance procedure the 1. Select OK.
liquid waste tubing:
2. Reconnect the liquid waste tubing to the quick
– Was not connected as instructed
disconnect fitting on the liquid waste container.
– Has been disconnected for an extended
period of time
– Is not properly connected at the quick
disconnect fitting on the liquid waste container

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5350

POST failed, Indexer board (x).
x = Board number 0 = slot 11, 1 = slot 9, 2 = slot 7, 3 = slot 5

• Communication failure between the processing Cycle power to the processing module and/or
module and the SCC. sample handler, page 5-11.
– Indexer board in the indicated position in the hardware failure.
upper card cage has a poor connection or
failed
Error code: 5351

DC Drive I/O board not present.

– DC Driver I/O board in the card cage has a hardware failure.
Error code: 5352

POST passed, DC Driver I/O board, version (x).
x = Firmware revision

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the DC Status message. No corrective action is required.
Driver I/O board.
Error code: 5353

POST failed, DC Driver I/O board.

– DC Driver I/O board in the card cage has a hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5354

Controller board failed.

– Module controller board in the upper card cage hardware failure.
has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 5355

Controller board register reset failure.

Error code: 5356

System Stopped, I/O communication error.

longer exists.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5357

Digital I/O interrupt failure.

Generic 6000 or 8000 error code. 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 6000 or 8000

codes.

error code.
Error code: 5358

POST passed, Controller board version (x).
x = Version number

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the controller Status message. No corrective action is required.
board.
Error code: 5359

POST failed, Controller board.

Error code: 5360

Controller board checksum failed.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5361

POST passed, Motor Indexer board (x) version (y).
x = Board number
y = Firmware revision

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the Motor Status message. No corrective action is required.
indexer board.
Error code: 5362

False interrupt generated on bit (x).
x = Digital I/O bit number

A false signal is sent to a sensor, the sensor is read This message is used to aid in troubleshooting
and determined to be in the correct state. The electronic noise on the system. No corrective action
message is ignored. is required.
Error code: 5363

DC Driver I/O board overcurrent failure.

Error code: 5364

POST passed, Sensor Interface Board, version (x).

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the Sensor Status message. No corrective action is required.
Interface Board.
Error code: 5365

POST failed, Sensor Interface Board.

• Communication failure with Sensor Interface Cycle power to the processing module and/or
Board. sample handler, page 5-11.
– Sensor Interface Board hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5366

Sensor Interface Board not present.

• Communication failure with Sensor Interface Cycle power to the processing module and/or
Board. sample handler, page 5-11.
– Sensor Interface Board hardware failure.
Error code: 5370

DAQ failure, invalid interrupt.

• Communication failure with DAQ board. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 5371

Invalid command received by the AC/DC controller board from the CPU board.

• Communication failure with CPU board. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 5372

Timeout: AC/DC board busy.

• Communication failure with AC/DC board. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5373

AC/DC controller board failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5374

Communication error between SMC and CPU board.

• Communication failure between SMC and CPU Cycle power to the processing module and/or
board. sample handler, page 5-11.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5375

Disk On Chip failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5376

System memory check error for main CPU.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5377

DAQ backup memory error.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5378

Communication error between DAQ board and CPU board.

• Communication failure between DAQ board and Cycle power to the processing module and/or
CPU board. sample handler, page 5-11.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5379

Communication error between SMC board and CPU board.

• Communication failure between SMC board and Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 5380

Communication error between AC/DC board and CPU board.

• Communication failure between AC/DC board Cycle power to the processing module and/or
and CPU board. sample handler, page 5-11.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5381

Communication error between PM board and CPU board.

• Communication failure between PM board and Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 5382

Initialization error for AC/DC board.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5383

Initialization error for SMC board.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5384

c System CPU floppy disk error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5385

Initialization error for DAQ board.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5386

Step loss detected for (x).

For pipettors:
of the pipettor.
• Probe is out of alignment. Perform probe calibration.
hardware failure.
For other components:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

of the component.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5387

Acknowledge command not received from RSH distribution board.

– RSH distribution board hardware failure.
Error code: 5388

Invalid checksum received from RSH distribution board.

Error code: 5389

Termination character not received from RSH distribution board.

Error code: 5390

Invalid command sent to RSH distribution board.

Error code: 5391

RSH distribution board command timeout.

• RSH distribution board hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5392

Communication error between SM AC/DC board and CPU board.

• Communication failure between the SM AC/DC Cycle power to the processing module and/or
board and CPU board. sample handler, page 5-11.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5393

Initialization error for SM AC/DC board.

• Communication failure with the SM AC/DC board. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 5400

Load or Unload Transfer assembly or multi-module Load Queue Gate failed to transfer
Sample Carrier.

• A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions
of the load or unload queue (load queue gate for found in the load queue, unload queue or load
multi-module systems). queue gate (multi-module only).
– Load transfer sensor board failure hardware failure.
– Unload transfer sensor board failure

– Unload transfer motor failure
Error code: 5402

Unable to move carrier into Unload Queue.

• A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions
of the load or unload queue (load queue gate for found in the load queue, unload queue or load
multi-module systems). queue gate (multi-module only).
– Unload queue transfer assembly hardware failure.
– Micro switch

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5403

Outer Load Queue or Outer Unload Queue not available.

Hardware failure: 1. If the outer load queue is not working, continue
– Outer lane of the load queue or the unload processing samples by placing sample carriers
queue on the inner load queue.
2. If the outer unload queue is not working, remove

sample carriers from the inner unload queue
more frequently to avoid filling the queue with
sample carriers.
3. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve

any hardware failure.
Error code: 5404

Solenoid (x) failed.
x = Sample Handler or Processing Module solenoid name

– Specified solenoid on sample handler or hardware failure.
processing module
poor connection or failed.
Error code: 5405

Sample Handler (x) failed.
x = Mechanism name

Hardware failure: 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 5000 category
– Sample handler error codes that occurred at the same time as
this message.


error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5406

Carrier jammed on Unload Transfer assembly.

• A physical interference is blocking the movement 1. Remove carrier from the processing queue at the
of the carrier to the unload queue. unload transfer.
2. Look for and remove any physical obstructions

on the processing queue.
– Unload queue sensor failure hardware failure.
– Processing module skin alignment
Error code: 5407

Sensor (x) blocked by sample carrier.
x = Sensor name

• Sample carrier is blocking the sensor. 1. Remove sample carrier from the sample handler
area where the indicated sensor is located.

handler, page 5-12.
– Sensor connector cable not connected hardware failure.
– Sensor failure
Error code: 5408

Carrier transport not aligned with tray section.

• Carrier transport not aligned. Perform carrier transport calibration.
– Section align sensor hardware failure.
– Carrier transport drive belt slipped

– Carrier transport motor

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5409

Step loss detected on (x) actual (expected), (y).
x = Stepper motor name
y = Actual and expected interrupt counts

For carrier transport motors:
• Carrier transport not aligned. Calibrate the carrier transport.
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure1114
Carrier Transport Calibration, page 9-70 (i 1000SR).
– Carrier transport drive belt slipped hardware failure.
– Carrier transport X, Z, or Theta motor
– Carrier transport pulley assembly
For carrier positioner motors:
• Carrier positioner not aligned. Perform carrier transport calibration.
– Reagent bottle rotator motor (i 1000SR) hardware failure.
Error code: 5410

Carrier pick attempt failed at positioner pocket (x) module (y).
x = Carrier positioner pocket
y = Processing module number

• Carrier transport is not aligned. Perform carrier transport calibration.
(c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100).
Error code: 5411

Theta transport alignment error.

• Theta transport not aligned. Perform carrier transport calibration.
– Carrier transport theta motor hardware failure.
– Carrier transport theta home sensor

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5412

No carrier detected in bay (x) section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

Error code: 5413

Transport Z not aligned.

– Carrier transport Z home sensor hardware failure.
– Carrier transport Z motor
Error code: 5414

Carrier removed from carrier transport arm.

• Carrier came off the carrier transport arm due to 1. Remove the carrier from the RSH.
an obstacle in the path.
2. Clear any obstacles.
Error code: 5415

No carrier in carrier transport arm.

• Carrier came off the carrier transport arm due to 1. Remove the carrier from the RSH.
an obstacle in the path.
2. Clear any obstacles.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5416

No carrier detected in positioner pocket (x) module (y).
x = Pocket on carrier positioner

– Carrier positioner carrier detect sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 5417

(x) sensor failure.
x = sensor

– An RSH sensor has failed hardware failure.
Error code: 5418

Interrupt count discrepancy on (x), actual (expected), (y).
y = Actual and expected interrupt counts

Movement of the carrier positioner did not return the Status message. No corrective action is required.
expected interrupt count.
Error code: 5419

Carrier transport not aligned with carrier positioner.

• Carrier transport not aligned. Perform carrier transport calibration.
– Carrier positioner align sensor failure hardware failure.
– Carrier positioner motor failure

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5420

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at bay (x) section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

position.
Error code: 5421

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at positioner pocket (x) module (y).
x = Carrier positioner pocket

(c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100).
Error code: 5422

Solenoid (x) failed to extend.
x = Solenoid name

– Specified solenoid or verification sensor on hardware failure.
sample handler or processing module
– DC driver I/O board
– CMIA optics board
– Module controller

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5423

Solenoid (x) failed to retract.
x = Solenoid name

Error code: 5424

Solenoid (x) failed to remain in the last commanded position.

Error code: 5425

Unknown carrier type detected in section (x), remove carrier.

• Carrier is inserted too slowly into the section. Select OK to the error message. No further
corrective action is required.
• Carrier is not fully inserted in the section. Reposition the carrier in the section or use a
different section.
Error code: 5426

Carrier pick attempt failed at aspiration area. Remove sample carrier when modules are
Ready or Stopped.

• Carrier transport is not aligned. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5427

No carrier detected at aspiration area.

Error code: 5428

No carrier detected in section (x).

Error code: 5429

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at section (x).

hardware failure.
Error code: 5430

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at aspiration area.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5431

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at reagent carousel position (x).

• Reagent carrier is not seated correctly in the Remove the reagent carrier and perform a Startup
reagent carousel. on the RSH.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

hardware failure.
Error code: 5435

Sample carrier in aspiration area. Remove carrier when modules are Ready or Stopped.

A sample carrier is present in the aspiration area. A Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport
user selected stop while the RSH was running or a and aspiration area.
hardware failure occurred.
Error code: 5436

Unable to verify carrier type in section (x), remove carrier.

• A carrier is not seated in the section. Remove and reseat the carrier.
– Load - Unload board sensor hardware failure.
Error code: 5437

No carrier detected in bay (x) section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

Error code: 5438

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at bay (x) section (y).
x = Bay number
y = Section number

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5501

Sample Handler Stopped, hardware failure.

Sample handler stopped because of a previous 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 5000 category
hardware failure. error codes that occurred at the same time as
this message.


error code.
Error code: 5502

(x) blown.
x = Fuse name

– Fuse hardware failure.
Error code: 5503

Step loss detected on (x), actual (expected), y.
y = Actual and (expected) steps

• Air is in tubing. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
2137 Flush Fluids, page 9-61 (i 1000SR) for the
affected dispense pump (wash buffer, pre-trigger,
or trigger).

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
– 2160 Prime Wash Zone, page 9-62
page 9-62
for the affected dispense pump.
– Dispense pump hardware failure.
– Tubing crimped or clogged

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5504

Invalid position for (x).

• Communication failure with SMC, CPU, or DAQ Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 5505

Keypad communication failure.

• Communication failure with keypad or DAQ Cycle power to the processing module and/or
hardware failure.
Error code: 5506

Water bath level low.

• System power was off. Perform either Daily Maintenance or Change Water
Bath procedures to fill the water bath.
See daily maintenance procedure 6070 Daily
page 9-39.

specifications.
– Level sensor is dirty or defective

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5507

Water bath drain time exceeded.

• Water bath drain tubing is crimped. Uncrimp the drain tubing.
• External drain is obstructed. Clear the obstruction from the external drain.
– Level sensor is dirty or defective hardware failure.
Error code: 5508

Water bath fill time exceeded.


crimped or blocked.

specifications.
supply tubing.
– Supply water tubing is disconnected

– Level sensor is dirty or defective

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5512

Unexpected sensor status for DI water tank.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5513

DI water tank overflow detected.

• Incoming DI water pressure is too high. Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within
specifications.
• Maintenance is being performed on the DI water Do not operate the system while the DI water
system. system is undergoing cleaning or maintenance.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5514

Degasser pressure high.

• Incoming DI water has a high gas content. Contact your Area Customer Support.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5515

Unexpected sensor status after (x) movement.

For pipettors:
of the pipettor.
• Probe is out of alignment. Perform probe calibration.
hardware failure.
For other components:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

of the component.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5516

(x) did not stop as expected.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5517

Backplane +12V fuse blown.

Error code: 5518

Backplane -12V fuse blown.

Error code: 5519


Error code: 5520



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5600

ICT aspiration pump timeout while moving to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5601

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump
to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5602

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump to
upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5603

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump to
upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5604

ICT aspiration pump timeout while moving to lower limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5605

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump
to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5606

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump to lower
limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5607

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump to
lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5608

ICT aspiration pump timeout while homing.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5609

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while homing ICT aspiration pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5610

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while homing ICT aspiration pump.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5611

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while homing ICT aspiration pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5612

ICT reference solution pump timeout during movement.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5613

Unexpected sensor status (not activated) while moving ICT reference solution pump.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5614

ICT unit timeout during vertical movement.

of the ICT unit.
– ICT probe is out of alignment hardware failure.
Error code: 5615

ICT unit vertical homing failure.

of the ICT unit.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5616

ICT unit timeout during horizontal movement.

the ICT unit.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5617

ICT unit horizontal homing failure.

the ICT unit.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5618

ICT measurement failure for (x).
x = Analyte

hardware failure.
Error code: 5619

ICT offset adjustment error for (x).
x = Analyte(s)

page 9-108.
pump.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• ICT check valves are not connected correctly. Tighten the check valve connections to the 1 mL
syringes in the ICT reference solution pump and
• 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration or ICT Reseat the 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration
reference solution pumps are not seated pump and the ICT reference solution pump.
correctly.
page 9-116.
2. Flush ICT cup.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5620

Unexpected ICT unit vertical home status at ICT reference solution cup.

of the ICT unit.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5621

Unexpected ICT unit horizontal home status at ICT reference solution cup.

of the ICT unit.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5622

Unable to process test, ICT reference solution cup not filling.

• The ICT reference solution bottle is empty, but 1. Replace the ICT reference solution bottle.
the weight platform failed to detect it. See Replace bulk solutions and update inventory

the weight platform failure.
pump.
• ICT reference solution tubing is crimped or 1. Inspect the tubing.
damaged.
2. Contact your Area Customer Support if any
damage is observed.
ICT reference solution pump.
• 1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump Reseat the 1 mL syringes.
are not seated correctly.
• 1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump Replace the 1 mL syringe.
are leaking. See Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 4000),
page 9-116.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5623

Unable to process test, ICT reference solution not aspirated.

• A single flush did not remove all air from the ICT Flush the ICT reference solution tubing.
reference solution tubing after you replaced the Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2131
ICT reference bottle. Flush ICT Cup, page 9-39.
• ICT module 0-rings are missing or not seated Replace or reseat the o-rings.
page 9-108.
• ICT probe is damaged. Replace the ICT probe.
See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 4000),
page 9-108.
• ICT reference solution tubing is crimped or 1. Inspect the tubing.
damaged.
2. Contact your Area Customer Support if any
damage is observed.
ICT reference solution pump.
• 1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump Reseat the 1 mL syringes.
are not seated correctly.
• 1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump Replace the 1 mL syringe.
are leaking. See Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 4000),
page 9-116.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5650

Cuvette washer timeout while moving to upper limit.

of the cuvette washer.
• Black knob holding cuvette washer is loose. Tighten the black knob.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Dry tip on cuvette washer is out of alignment. Align the cuvette dry tip.
page 9-103.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5651

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK not activated) while moving Cuvette
washer to upper limit.

page 9-103.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5652

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Cuvette washer to upper
limit.

page 9-103.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5653

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Cuvette washer to upper
limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5654

Unexpected sensor status (only Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to upper
limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5655

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to
upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5656

Unexpected sensor status (Down and Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to
upper limit.

page 9-103.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5657

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette
washer to upper limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5658

Cuvette washer timeout while moving to lower limit.

page 9-103.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5659

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK not activated) while moving Cuvette
washer to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5660

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving Cuvette washer to lower limit.

page 9-103.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5661

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Cuvette washer to lower
limit.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

page 9-103.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5662

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Cuvette washer to lower
limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5663

Unexpected sensor status (Only Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to lower
limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5664

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to
lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5665

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette
washer to lower limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5666

Unexpected sensor status (Down and Down OK not activated) while moving cuvette washer
to lower limit.

page 9-103.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5667

Unexpected sensor status (Down activated and Down OK not activated) during Cuvette
washer step down movement.

page 9-103.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5700

Mixer timeout while moving to upper limit.

• A physical interference is blocking the movement 1. Look for and remove any physical obstructions.
of the mixer unit.
2. Replace any bent mixers.
See Replace the mixer (c 4000), page 9-106.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5701

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK not activated) while moving Mixer to
upper limit.

of the mixer unit.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5702

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Mixer to upper limit.

of the mixer unit.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5703

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Mixer to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5704

Unexpected sensor status (only Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5705

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to upper limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5706

Unexpected sensor status (Down and Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to upper
limit.

of the mixer unit.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5707

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to
upper limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5708

Busy status: AC/DC board.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5709

Mixer timeout while moving to lower limit.

• Bent mixer blade. Replace the mixer.
of the mixer unit.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5710

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK not activated) while moving Mixer to
lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5711

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5712

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.

of the mixer unit.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5713

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5714

Unexpected sensor status (only Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5715

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5716

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to
lower limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 5717

Vibration error, (x).
x = Mixer name

hardware failure.
Error code: 5718

Vibration error, (x).
x = Mixer name

hardware failure.
Error code: 5719

x = Mixer name

• A physical interference is blocking the rotation of 1. Look for and remove any physical obstructions.
the mixer unit.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5720

(x) homing failure.
x = Mixer name

of the mixer unit.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5721

x = Mixer name

• A physical interference is blocking the rotation of 1. Look for and remove any physical obstructions.
the mixer unit.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5722

(x) homing failure.
x = Mixer name

of the mixer unit.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5723

Unable to perform mixer arm movement, upper sensor not detected.

of the mixer unit.
hardware failure.
Error code: 5900

Step loss detected on (x).
x = Motor name

For process path motor:
An RV is jammed in the process path. Clear the RV jam in the process path.
For pipettors:
• A physical interference is blocking the up/down Look for and remove any physical obstructions
movement of the pipettor. around the specified pipettor, and if no obstruction
is found, then perform the appropriate pipettors
• For i 1000SR:
– 4150 Functional Area Tests, page 10-674
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
• An empty sample tube is loaded. Remove the empty sample tube.
For wash zones:
• Probes are not inserted into the manifold. If weekly maintenance was recently done, press the
wash zone motor assembly down so the probes are
inserted into the manifold.
For all motors:
of the device.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Power to the module fluctuated. Contact your Area Customer Support.
– Sensor is dirty or dusty hardware failure.
– Sensors have a poor connection or failed

– Motor and/or cables have a poor connection or
failed
failed
– Fuse
Error code: 5901

Motor command timeout on device (x).
x = Device name

For process path motor:
An RV is jammed in the process path. Clear the RV jam in the process path.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
• Empty reagent bottle. Replace the reagent.
procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
For all motors:
of the device.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Power to the module fluctuated. Contact your Area Customer Support.
– Sensor is dirty or dusty hardware failure.
– Sensors have a poor connection or failed

– Motor and/or cables have a poor connection or
failed
failed
– Fuse
Error code: 5902

Stepper motor (x) not present.
x = Motor number

Hardware failure: 1. Verify the jumper placement is correct, if the
– Communication failure with indexer board indexer board was recently replaced.

any hardware failure, if error continues.
Error code: 5903

Motor command error, device (x) failed to respond.
x = Motor number or indexer number

– Motor or indexer board in the specified hardware failure.
position has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 5904

(x) homing failure.
x = Motor name

– Homing sensor cable in the indicated position hardware failure.
failed

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5905

Motor (x) is not initialized.
x = Motor name

longer exists.
• The specified motor stopped due to a module 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any error codes
stop. that occurred at the same time as this message.


error code.
Error code: 5906

Automatic Prime failed, affected mechanism disabled.

Prime failed for one of the following: 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 5000 category
• Wash zone error codes that occurred at the same time as
this message.
• Pre-Trigger
• Trigger dispense pumps 2. View low level error messages, page 10-16, if

error code.
Error code: 5907

Automatic Flush failed.

A flush operation failed due to a hardware failure or 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 0229, 0304, or
inventory failure. 2104 error codes.

error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 5908

Command on motor (x) detected fluid or over travel.
x = Motor number

hardware failure.
Error code: 5909

Stepper motor encoder (x) not present.
x = Stepper Motor Encoder number

– Communication failure with indexer board hardware failure.
Error code: 5910

Invalid absolute encoder (x) position value.
x = Encoder name

– Absolute encoder or cabling hardware failure.
Optics error codes (6000-6999)

The Optics error code category includes error codes between
6000-6999.
representative at:


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Error code: 6000

Zero read detected.

– Optics assembly hardware failure.
Error code: 6050

Optics check failed, Run initialization canceled.

• Optics linearity and/or normalization values are Update the configures module windows with the
window.
– CMIA reader hardware failure.
Error code: 6051

CMIA Optics board not responding.

Error code: 6100

CMIA Optics board failed.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 6101

POST passed, CMIA Optics board.

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the CMIA Status message. No corrective action is required.
optics board.
Error code: 6102

Register read back failure, CMIA Optics board.

– CMIA Optics board in slot 12 in the upper card hardware failure.
Error code: 6103

Optics timer interrupt failure, Controller board.

Error code: 6200

POST failed, CMIA Optics board.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 6300

Register reset failure, CMIA Optics board.

Error code: 6500

DAQ board failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 6501

Optics system error, lamp failure.

• Water bath level is low. Perform Change Water Bath as-needed
maintenance procedure
See 2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-39.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 6502

Optics system error, lamp intensity too high.

hardware failure.
Error code: 6503

Optics system error, lamp intensity too low.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 6504

Optics system error, transmittance above maximum range.

hardware failure.
Error code: 6505

Photometer conversion error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 6506

Cuvette integrity check failed on cuvette (x).
x = Cuvette #

• Cuvette is dirty. Clean cuvettes manually.
• Cuvette is damaged. Replace the cuvette or cuvette segment.
See Replace a cuvette (c 4000), page 9-96 or
Replace a cuvette segment (c 4000), page 9-100.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Water or wash solutions are not aspirated or Clean cuvette washer nozzles.
dispensed correctly into the reaction cuvettes. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018
hardware failure.
Error code: 6507

Optics type mismatch detected. Call Abbott.

The optics assembly setting does not match the Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
module configuration setting. hardware failure.
Error code: 6510

Optics system warning, fluctuation detected, monochromatic check.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

hardware failure.
Error code: 6511

Optics system failure, fluctuation above maximum range, monochromatic check.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 6512

Optics system warning, fluctuation detected, bichromatic check.

• Lamp in use for > 3 months. Replace the lamp.

poppet valve.
4000), page 9-145.

Customer Support.
• R2 probe is damaged. Replace reagent probe.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

– Reaction carousel is not aligned with the light hardware failure.
path
– Optics assembly incorrectly grounded to
chassis
– DC lamp power supply
Error code: 6513

Optics system failure, fluctuation above maximum range, bichromatic check.

• Lamp in use for > 3 months. Replace the lamp.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


poppet valve.
4000), page 9-145.

Customer Support.
• R2 probe is damaged. Replace reagent probe.
– Reaction carousel is not aligned with the light hardware failure.
path
– Optics assembly incorrectly grounded to
chassis
– DC lamp power supply

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 6516

Optics system failure, ADC above maximum range at lamp check.

hardware failure.
Temperature error codes (7000-7999)

The temperature error code category includes error codes between
7000-7999.
representative at:


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 7000

Temperature stability failed, channel (x).
x = Channel number

Specified heater is not able to maintain temperature
within specifications.
x = 28 (For Ambient):
Room temperature is out of specification. Modify room temperature to be within specification.
For Pre-Trigger or Trigger
• x = 16 (Pre-Trigger/Trigger - i 1000SR) Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
• Hardware failure: hardware failure.
– Heater-specific tubing
– Heater and/or heater thermistor specific cable
has a poor connection
For Process path:
• x = 4 (zone 1) Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
• x = 5 (zone 2) hardware failure.
• x = 8 (zone 3)
• x = 9 (zone 4)
• x = 12 (zone 5)
• x = 13 (zone 6)
• Hardware failure:
– Process path thermistor for the specific heater
zone has a poor connection or failed
– Process path heater
x = 7 (For Reagent cooler):
– Reagent cooler cable has a poor connection hardware failure.
(i 1000SR)
– Reagent cooler control thermistor (i 1000SR)
x = 17 (For Reagent Carousel Cover Heater):
• Hardware failure: Unload reagent kits from the system.
– Reagent cover heater failure See Unload reagents from reagent carousel (i
– Reagent cover heater cable to the reagent 1000SR), page 5-102 and Unload reagents from
distribution board has a poor connection RSH (i 1000SR), page 5-103.
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
For Wash Zone:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• x = 21 (Wash Zone - i 1000SR) Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
– Thermistor cable for the specific wash zone

buffer heater has a poor connection
– Wash zone buffer heater
For Wash Zone temperature sensor:
Wash Zone temperature sensor (i1000SR): Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
• x = 6 (probe 1)
• x = 10 (probe 2)
• x = 14 (probe 3)
Hardware failure:
• Wash zone-specific temperature sensor failure
• Wash zone tubing sensor
For all channels:
– Temperature controller board in the card cage hardware failure.
Error code: 7001

Temperature failed channel (x).
x = Channel number

For Pre-Trigger or Trigger:
For Process path:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• x = 8 (zone 3)
• x = 9 (zone 4)
• x = 12 (zone 5)
• x = 13 (zone 6)
(i 1000SR)
For Wash Zone:

hardware failure.
• x = 6 (probe 1)
• x = 10 (probe 2)
• x = 14 (probe 3)
Hardware failure:
For all channels:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 7002

Channel (x) below minimum temperature.
x = Channel number

For Process path:
• x = 8 (zone 3)
• x = 9 (zone 4)
• x = 12 (zone 5)
• x = 13 (zone 6)
(i 1000SR)
hardware failure.
For Wash Zone:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


hardware failure.
• x = 6 (probe 1)
• x = 10 (probe 2)
• x = 14 (probe 3)
Hardware failure:
For all channels:
– Temperature controller board in the upper hardware failure.
card cage has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 7003

Temperature alarm from channel (x), reading (y).
x = Channel number
y = Temperature in thousandths of degrees C

Temporary out of range condition. No corrective action is required. If the out of range
condition continues, error code 7000 occurs.
Error code: 7004

(x) operation canceled, temperature failure.
x = Mechanism name

Hardware failure: 1. Review logs, page 10-14,for any 7000 category
– Pre-trigger or trigger heater error codes that occurred at the same time as
this message.
– Wash zone heater

error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 7005

Unable to process test, temperature not within range, channel (x).
x = Channel number

Room temperature is out of specification. Modify room temperature to be within
specifications.
For Process path:
• x = 8 (zone 3)
• x = 9 (zone 4)
• x = 12 (zone 5)
• x = 13 (zone 6)
• Reagent cooler cable has a poor connection hardware failure.
(i 1000SR)
• Reagent cooler control thermistor (i 1000SR)
For Wash Zone:


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

hardware failure.
• x = 6 (probe 1)
• x = 10 (probe 2)
• x = 14 (probe 3)
Hardware failure:
For all channels:
Error code: 7006

Channel (x) above maximum temperature.
x = Channel number

specifications.
For Process path:
• x = 8 (zone 3)
• x = 9 (zone 4)
• x = 12 (zone 5)
• x = 13 (zone 6)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

(i 1000SR)
hardware failure.
For Wash Zone:
hardware failure.
hardware failure.
• x = 6 (probe 1)
• x = 10 (probe 2)
• x = 14 (probe 3)
Hardware failure:
For all channels:
Error code: 7007

Temperature failure channel (x), cannot reach Ready status.
x = Channel number


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

specifications.
For Process path:
• x = 8 (zone 3)
• x = 9 (zone 4)
• x = 12 (zone 5)
• x = 13 (zone 6)
(i 1000SR)
hardware failure.
For Wash Zone:


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

hardware failure.
• x = 6 (probe 1)
• x = 10 (probe 2)
• x = 14 (probe 3)
Hardware failure:
For all channels:
Error code: 7008

Run request denied, temperature stability failure.

User selected run after a temperature stability 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any error codes
failure occurred. that occurred at the same time as this message.


error code.
Error code: 7100

Acknowledge command not received from Temperature Controller board.

– Controller board in the upper card cage has a

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 7102

Invalid response received from Temperature Controller board.

Error code: 7103

Temperature controller mode not correct.

Error code: 7104

Temperature Controller board not responding.

Error code: 7106

Invalid Temperature Controller board response.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 7107

Unable to communicate to Temperature Controller board for channel (x).
x = Channel number

Error code: 7108

Temperature Controller board not initialized.

– Power supply
Error code: 7109

Temperature Controller board not communicating.

Error code: 7110

Reagent cooler control error detected.

– Reagent cooler hardware failure.
Error code: 7200

POST failed, Temperature Controller board.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 7201

POST passed, Temperature Controller board, version (x).

Power on self tests (POST) passed on the Status message. No corrective action is required.
temperature controller board.
Error code: 7501

Water bath temperature below minimum range.

• Water in water bath is not circulating because the Change water bath.
system was idle for an extended period of time. Perform daily maintenance procedure 6070 Daily
page 9-39.
• System was just powered on. Check the temperature status to verify the
temperature returns to specifications within five
minutes.
Temperature Status, page 9-40.
• Water bath is filling after an extended idle time. Check the temperature status to verify the
minutes.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7502

Water bath temperature above maximum range.

• Room temperature is too high. Modify room temperature to be within
specifications.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 7503

Temperature detector failure, water bath temperature exceeded lower detectable limit.

minutes.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7504

Temperature detector failure, water bath temperature exceeded upper detectable limit.

specifications.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7505

Sample carousel temperature below minimum range.

• Room temperature is too low. Modify room temperature to be within
specifications.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7506

Sample carousel temperature above maximum range.

minutes.
• Carousel cover is open. Close the carousel cover.
• Carousel cover is not installed. Install the carousel cover.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

specifications.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7507

Temperature detector failure, sample carousel temperature exceeded lower detectable limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 7508

Temperature detector failure, sample carousel temperature exceeded upper detectable limit.

minutes.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7509

Reagent 1 supply center temperature below minimum range.

specifications.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7510

Reagent supply center temperature above maximum range.

minutes.
• Reagent supply center cover is open. Close the cover.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Reagent supply center maintenance cover is not Install the cover (c 4000).
installed (c 4000).
• Numerous reagent cartridges were just loaded 1. Close the reagent supply center cover.
into the reagent supply center.
2. Check the temperature status to verify the
minutes.
3525 Temperature Status, page 9-40.
specifications.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7511

Temperature detector failure, reagent supply center temperature exceeded lower detectable
limit.

– Reagent supply center (c 4000) hardware failure.
Error code: 7512

Temperature detector failure, reagent supply center temperature exceeded upper detectable
limit.

minutes.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7513

Reagent 2 supply center temperature below minimum range.

specifications.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 7514

Reagent 2 supply center temperature above maximum range.

minutes.
• Carousel cover is open. Close the carousel cover.
• Carousel cover is not installed. Install the carousel cover.
• Numerous reagent cartridges were just loaded 1. Cover the reagent supply center.
into the reagent supply center.
2. Check the temperature status to verify the
minutes.
3525 Temperature Status, page 9-40.
specifications.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7515

Temperature detector failure, reagent 2 supply center temperature exceeded lower
detectable limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 7516

Temperature detector failure, reagent 2 supply center temperature exceeded upper
detectable limit.

minutes.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 7517

Internal temperature below minimum range.

specifications.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7518

Internal temperature above maximum range.

specifications.
hardware failure.
Error code: 7519

Temperature detector failure, internal temperature exceeded lower detectable limit.

hardware failure.
Error code: 7520

Temperature detector failure, internal temperature exceeded upper detectable limit.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 7521

Run request denied, water bath temperature is out of range.

• Water in water bath is not circulating because the Change water bath.
system was idle for an extended period of time. Perform daily maintenance procedure 6070 Daily
page 9-39.
minutes.
• Water bath is filling after an extended idle time. Check the temperature status to verify the
minutes.
specifications.
hardware failure.
Computer hardware error codes (8000-8999)

The computer hardware error code category includes error codes
between 8000-8999.
representative at:


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8000

Power supply AC failed.

• User cycled power to the processing module. Restart the Processing module after the module
power is restored.
• Power fluctuated. Contact your Area Customer Support.
Please provide information that describes the
failure.
– Power supply hardware failure.
Error code: 8001

Power supply over voltage.

power is restored.
Error code: 8002

Power supply under voltage.

power is restored.
• Power fluctuated. Contact your Area Customer Support.
Please provide information that describes the
failure.
Error code: 8003

Power supply over temperature.

power is restored.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8004

UNICODE data could not be sent to (x).
x = Remote system

– Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter hardware failure.
Error code: 8005

Communication error reading data from port (x).
x = Remote system

– Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter hardware failure.
Error code: 8008

Motor driver over temperature.

• Inadequate ventilation underneath instrument. Remove any objects from underneath the
Processing module that might be blocking the free
flow of air to the card cage.
• Card cage filter is dirty. Clean the card cage air filter. (Contact your Area
Customer Support.)
– Card cage fan hardware failure.
– DC Driver I/O board with fault LED lit

– Motor driver board

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8009

Power board fault condition detected.

• The extension tubing with the gray connector(s) 1. Select OK.
was not connected as instructed while performing
2190 Internal Decontamination maintenance 2. Connect the gray connector(s) as instructed in
procedure. the maintenance procedure.
See 2190 Internal Decontamination graphics,
page 9-64.
– Motor driver board hardware failure.

Error code: 8010

RSH distribution board CPLD fault condition detected.

– Cable from carrier transport board to RSH hardware failure.
distribution board has poor connection or
failed
Error code: 8011

RSH load/unload board LED fault condition detected.

– LEDs on RSH load/unload board hardware failure.
Error code: 8012

RSH load/unload board sensor fault condition detected.

• Sensors on RSH load/unload board hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8050

Unable to open (x) port for (y).
x = Serial port (COM1 - COM10)
y = Remote system

For host:
– Cable from LIS to SCC has a poor connection hardware failure.
or failed
– Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter
For ARM:
• Cable from ARM to SCC has a poor connection hardware failure.
or failed
• Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter
For LAS:
– Cable from LAS to SCC has a poor connection hardware failure.
or failed
Error code: 8053

Failed opening CLI serial port.

• Serial port configuration. See Configure serial ports window, page 2-35, for
more information.
– LIS cables have a poor connection or failed hardware failure.
Error code: 8054

CLI communication error.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8100

Unable to write (x) file to designated drive.
x = File name

• Floppy disk is not in drive. Insert the floppy disk in the floppy drive.
• Floppy disk is write protected. Ensure the write protect tab on the floppy disk is in
the correct position.
• Floppy disk is not formatted. Format the floppy disk or use a disk that is already
formatted.
• Floppy disk is defective. Use a new floppy disk.
• Software error If not writing to a floppy disk when this error occurs,
contact your Area Customer Support. Please
– Floppy drive hardware failure.
– Hard drive
Error code: 8101

Failure in compression of log file.

• Floppy disk is not in drive. Insert the floppy disk in the floppy drive.
• Floppy disk is not formatted. Format the floppy disk or use a disk that is already
formatted.
• Floppy disk is defective or is not blank. Use a new floppy disk.
Error code: 8102

ASCII data could not be sent to (x).
x = Remote system

For host:
or failed
For ARM:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

– Cable from ARM to SCC has a poor hardware failure.
For LAS:
– Cable from LAS to SCC has a poor connection hardware failure.
or failed
Error code: 8103

Field (x) in section (y) truncated for printing.
x = Field name
y = Report section name

The data entered in the data entry box is too long to Print a screen image if a hard copy is required.
print.
Error code: 8104

Print job for (x) canceled by the user.
x = Report name

User cancelled a print job. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 8105

A printer error has occurred.

A printer error occurred. Refer to the printer documentation for assistance.
Error code: 8107

Printer out of paper.

• Printer is out of paper. Add paper to the printer.
• Printer is offline. Change the printer status to online.
• Printer is not connected. Connect the printer cable to the SCC printer port.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8110

Printer status unavailable at this time.

Printer is not available. 1. Verify the printer is plugged in, on, and ready.
2. Verify the cable from the SCC to the printer is

connected.
3. Refer to the printer documentation if printer is

still unavailable.
Error code: 8115

(x) printer not properly installed.
x = Default printer name

Configured printer is not installed properly or does Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
not exist. provide information specifying the operation you
occurred.
Error code: 8150

Invalid Host order, Sample ID (x) already exists.
x = Sample ID

The system received an order from the host and the If this error occurs frequently without obvious
order already exists. The new order from the host is explanation, check the function of the host interface.
ignored by the system.
Error code: 8151

Invalid Host cancel, Sample ID (x) does not exist.
x = Sample ID

The system received a cancellation request from If this error occurs frequently without obvious
the host on a test order and the order does not exist explanation, check the function of the host interface.
in the database. The cancellation request from the
host is ignored by the system.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8152

Orders received for Sample ID (x) did not match the Sample ID sent to the Host.
x = Sample ID

The sample ID returned from the host did not match
the sample ID queried for by the system because:
• The host is responding to a previous query, which Increase the host query timeout value.
has timed out on the system. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6.
• The host sent an order not requested by the Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
system. Interface RS-232 Manual for information about
communications.
Error code: 8153

Invalid Host order, no quality control information for Assay (x) number (y).
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

The system received a QC order for an assay from Use the Control configuration screen to configure a
the host but a control is not configured for the assay. control for the requested assay, and then download
The order from the host is ignored by the system. the order from the host. See Configure a single
analyte control, page 2-123 or Configure a new
multiconstituent control, page 2-127.
Error code: 8154

Invalid Host order for Sample ID (x), specified dilution for Assay number (y) not found.
x = Sample ID
y = Assay number

The system received a test order from the host Order a dilution available for the specified assay.
requesting an undefined dilution. The order from Dilution Name is case sensitive, verify the host
the host is ignored by the system. dilution name is exactly the same as the Dilution
Name in the SCC.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8155

Invalid Host order for Sample ID (x), Assay number (y) not installed.
x = Sample ID
y = Assay number

• The system received a test order from the host Install the requested assay. See Install or delete an
requesting an assay that is not installed. assay file, page 2-177.
• The assay number is incorrectly defined in the Correct the assay number in the host system.
host.
Error code: 8156

Error detected when parsing record (x) from (y).
x = Record string or field string
y = Remote system

An error was detected when parsing an ASTM
record received. The record may not utilize the
delimiters correctly.
For host:
• Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual.
For ARM:
Error code: 8158

Required data (x) is missing from message received from (y).
x = Component string
y = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8159

Incoming frame from (x) is too long. <NAK> has been sent.
x = Remote system

Frame received exceeds ASTM length limit.
For host:
For ARM:
• Communication failure. Condition may be temporary, if so, no corrective
action is required. If condition is not temporary,
error code 3901 occurs. Follow the corrective action
for this specific code.
Error code: 8160

Field (x) received from (y) is not repeatable.
x = Field name
y = Remote system

Data field in a record received contains an illegal
repeat delimiter.
For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8161

(x) sent illegal record type (y). The remainder of the message will be ignored.
x = Remote system
y = Record text

Record received is an invalid record type not
defined by the ASTM E1394 Standard.
For host:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

For ARM:
Error code: 8162

(x) sent record (y) which contained an incorrect sequence number.
x = Remote system
y = Record received

Message received contained a record which was
out of sequence.
For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8163

Host sent record (x) for a negative query response.
x = Record received

Record received from the host contains an invalid Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
query response. Interface RS-232 Manual.
Error code: 8165

(x) sent record (y) which contained an improper level transition.
x = Remote system
y = Record received

Message received contained a record which
caused an improper message hierarchy level
transition.
For host:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

For ARM:
Error code: 8166

Invalid ASTM record (x) in test order message.
x = Record name

Test order message received from the host contains Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
an unacceptable ASTM record. Acceptable records Interface RS-232 Manual.
in a test order message: Header, Patient, Test
Order, Comment, and Terminator records.
Error code: 8169

Invalid message sent by (x).
x = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8170

Negative query response for Sample ID (x) received after a host query timeout.
x = Sample ID

Negative query response message contained a SID
which was different than the one contained in the
earlier issued query message.
• A query message was never issued to the Host. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
Interface RS-232 Manual for information about
communications.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8172

Host query time-out exceeded for Sample ID (x).
x = Sample ID

The host did not respond to the query message Increase the host query timeout value.
within the time period specified in the configuration. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6.
Error code: 8173

Message received from (x) did not end with a terminator record.
x = Remote system

For host:
• Host is busy or not responding. 1. Verify the host system is functional.
2. Re-enable host communications.

3. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.

from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual for information about the
ASTM protocol.
or failed
For ARM:
Error code: 8174

Record (x) received from (y) did not terminate in a carriage return.
x = Record string
y = Remote system

For host:
• Incorrectly formatted record or message was Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
received from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Cabling was not properly shielded or was too Use shorter or shielded cable.
long.
For ARM:
Error code: 8175

Length of data (x) received from (y) exceeded specified maximum length.
x = Component string
y = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8176

Data field (x) received from (y) must be a numeric value.
x = Data field
y = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8177

Data field (x) received from (y) must be an alphanumeric value.
x = Data field
y = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8178

Data field (x) received from (y) must be an alpha value.
x = Data field
y = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8179

Invalid host order for Sample ID (x), Assay number (y) status type does not exist.
x = Sample ID
y = Assay number

The system received a test order from the host for
an assay that is not installed.
• The assay is not installed. Install the requested assay. See Install or delete an
• The assay number is incorrectly defined in the Correct the assay number in the host system.
host.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8180

Required field (x) was not populated by (y).
x = Field name
y = Remote system

Mandatory ASTM field was blank in the message
received. The remainder of the message is ignored
by the system.
For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8181

Invalid host order, incorrect birth date (y) for Sample ID (x).
x = Sample ID
y = Birth date

The system received an order from the host Correct the birth date in the host system, and then
containing a birth date later than the current date. re-send the order.
Error code: 8182

Unsupported character received from the host in a record. Original: (x), Translated: (y).
x = Input string
y = Output string

Record received from the host containing a Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
character not supported in the ASI Code page. This Interface RS-232 Manual. Acceptable characters
character is translated as the copyright symbol (© are defined in the ASI Code page for ARCHITECT
or code 0169). table.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8183

Unsupported character sent to the host in a record. Original: (x), Translated: (y).
x = Input string
y = Output string

Record sent to the host containing a character not Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
supported in the ASI Code page. This character is Interface RS-232 Manual. Acceptable characters
translated as the registered mark (® or code 0174). are defined in the ASI Code page for ARCHITECT
table.
Error code: 8184

Invalid message type sent by LAS.

• The LAS sent out an unknown message type. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
your LAS vendor.
– Cable from LAS to SCC (COM6, Connector hardware failure.
P4) has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 8185

Invalid <ACK> or <NAK> message length sent by LAS.

The system received an invalid <ACK> or <NAK>
message length by LAS.
• LAS sent incorrect message length. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8186

Invalid Sample ID length sent by LAS. Sample ID length cannot be zero.

The system received a sample ID from the LAS with Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
a length of zero. Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
your LAS vendor.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8187

Invalid Sample ID length sent by LAS. Sample ID length cannot be greater than 20
characters.

The system received a sample ID from the LAS with Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
a length greater than 20 characters. Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8188

Invalid Sample ID sent by the LAS. The Sample ID contains an invalid character.

The system received a sample ID from the LAS Use valid characters only.
containing an invalid character. Valid characters are defined by Abbott Laboratories
< ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and
<space>.
Error code: 8189

Invalid message sent by LAS. Message exceeded maximum length.

The system received a message from the LAS that Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
exceeded the maximum allowable length. Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8190

Invalid SID (x) sent by LAS.
x = Sample ID

The system received an invalid sample ID from the Contact your LAS vendor.
LAS.
Error code: 8191

Invalid message sent by LAS.

• System bar code configuration does not match Contact your LAS vendor.
bar code label.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8192

Invalid formatted bar code read: (x) sent by LAS for SID (y).
x = Bar code read data
y = Sample ID

The system received an invalid SID from the LAS Contact your LAS vendor.
bar code reader.
Error code: 8193

Invalid host order, incorrect draw date (x) for Sample ID (y).
x = Sample draw date
y = Sample ID

Host order received containing a draw date later Correct the draw date in the host, then resend the
than the current date. order from the host.
Error code: 8194

Invalid Sample ID sent by the LIS. The Sample ID contains an invalid character.

An invalid character was encoded in a host Use valid characters only.
download or query response. Valid characters are defined by Abbott Laboratories
< ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and
<space>.
Error code: 8250

Invalid frame number received from (x). <NAK> has been sent.
x = Remote system

Record received did not contain the frame in
sequence.
For host:
For ARM:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8251

Received <NAK> for outgoing frame from (x).
x = Remote destination name

For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8252

No terminating <CR> in received frame from (x). <NAK> has been sent.
x = Remote system

Frame received did not terminate in a carriage
return.
For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8253

Invalid checksum received in incoming frame from (x). <NAK> has been sent.
x = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8254

Restricted character in message text from (x). <NAK> has been sent.
x = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8255

No terminating <LF> in received frame from (x). <NAK> has been sent.
x = Remote system

Frame received did not contain a terminating line
feed.
For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8256

Data field (x) received from (y) must be a printable string.
x = Data field
y = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8257

Data field (x) received from (y) must be a valid date.
x = Data field
y = Remote system

For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8258

Record (x) was received in message from (y) prior to a required header record.
x = Record string which was received as the first record of the message
y = Remote system

Message received without the Header record as the
first record of the message.
For host:
For ARM:
Error code: 8259

Record received from (x) contained an invalid field (y).
x = Remote system
y = Field name

For host:
For ARM:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8260

(x) sent an unsupported record type (y). The record will be ignored.
x = Remote system
y = Record received

Record received was a valid ASTM format but is not
supported by the system.
For host:
• Unsupported record or message received from Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
the host. Interface RS-232 Manual.
For ARM:
Error code: 8261

Negative query received for Sample ID (x), in Carrier/Position (y).
x = Sample ID
y = Carrier or CRSL and Position number

• The sample ID has not been entered into the host Enter the sample ID and test order(s) for the sample
computer. ID into the host computer.
• There are no ARCHITECT System test orders for Enter the test order(s) for the sample ID into the
the specified sample ID. host computer.
• Host computer is not functioning properly. Create a patient order (single order), page 5-115.
• SID (sample identification) is truncated. See Sample ID is truncated, page 10-641.
Error code: 8262

Invalid Message ID sent by LAS.

The system received an invalid message ID from Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
the LAS. Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
your LAS vendor.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8263

Invalid Recovery Type sent by LAS.

The SCC is unable to re-initialize communication 1. Re-initialize communication with the LAS.
due to LAS message containing Invalid Recovery
Type. 2. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
Automation System Interface Manual and/or
contact your LAS vendor, if error continues.
Error code: 8264

Invalid Cyclical Redundancy Check sent by LAS.

The system received an invalid Cyclical Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
Redundancy Check. Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8265

Invalid message sent by LAS. LAS message length mismatch.

The LAS sent a message to the system that did not Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
match what the system expected. The message is Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
ignored. your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8266

The <ACK> message sequence number sent by LAS does not match outgoing message
sequence number.

The <ACK> message sequence number sent by the Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
LAS does not match the outgoing sequence Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
number. The message is ignored. Previous your LAS vendor.
message is resent by the system.
Error code: 8267

The <NAK> message sequence number sent by LAS does not match outgoing message
sequence number.

The system received a <NAK> sequence number Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
that did not match the sequence number sent to the Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
LAS. The message is ignored. Previous message is your LAS vendor.
resent by the system.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8268

Received <NAK> from LAS for outgoing message.

Not able to interpret message sent from the SCC. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
The message is ignored. Previous message is Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
resent by the system. your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8269

Message sequence number sent by LAS is out of order.

The system received a sequence number from the Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
LAS that does not match the expected sequence Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
number. your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8270

Unexpected <ACK> or <NAK> message sent by LAS.

Unexpected <ACK> or <NAK> message sent by Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
LAS. The message is ignored. Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact
your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8271

Invalid checksum sent by LAS.

The system received an invalid checksum. Contact your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8272

A message was received from the LAS before the previous message was complete.

A message was received from the LAS that was out Contact your LAS vendor.
of order.
Error code: 8273

The LAS detected an internal error.

The LAS detected an internal error. Contact your LAS vendor.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8274

Result for Sample ID (x), Assay Number (y) could not be transmitted to the Host.
x = Sample ID
y = Assay number

• Communication failure. Retransmit the result.
• Host is not configured for the expected result Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
format. Interface RS-232 Manual.
Error code: 8275

Sample presentation error. LAS sent SID (x), when SID (y) in sampling position.
x = SID being positioned
y = SID in place

• Error in reading the tube carrier. Do not report results for either SID. Refer to your
• Sample aspirated from incorrect tube. LAS documentation for troubleshooting sample
presentation errors.
Error code: 8350

Maximum number of query timeouts exceeded. Host query mode disabled.

Three consecutive timeouts received while
requesting orders from the host. The host port is
disabled after this error.
• Host did not respond within the time period Increase host query timeout value.
configured. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6.
• Incorrect baud rate on host port. Reconfigure the host baud rate. See Configure
serial ports window, page 2-35, for more
information.
– Cable from LIS to SCC (COM5, Connector P3) hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8351

(x) connection cannot be established because of contention.
x = Remote system

For host:
• Both systems request a connection at the same Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
time by sending an <ENQ> and this creates Interface RS-232 Manual.
contention.
For ARM:
Error code: 8353

Maximum retries exceeded for outgoing frame sent to (x).
x = Remote system

Unable to send frame to the remote system,
because the remote system sends a negative
acknowledgment <NAK> for the frame received.
For host:
– Checksum is invalid.
– Frame is not received in sequence.
For ARM:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8354

(x) connection cannot be established, no response was received.
x = Remote system

For host:


information.
• Message response is incorrectly defined for the Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
host. Interface RS-232 Manual for information about the
ASTM protocol.
For ARM:
Error code: 8355

Time out on frame sent to (x).
x = Remote system

System timed out waiting for confirmation that the
remote system received a frame. The connection is
terminated by the system.
For host:


ASTM protocol.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

For ARM:
Error code: 8356

Query for sample ID (x) has been deleted.
x = Sample ID



• Host query option was turned off due to a Re-enable the Bidirectional host option in system
previous communication failure or was turned off settings.
by the user. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6.
information.
ASTM protocol.
Error code: 8357

Unable to transmit results to Host, Host access turned off.

System attempted to transmit approved results but
the host is turned off
• Host is not responding or is turned off. Turn on the host interface and re-transmit the data.
• Bidirectional host option is turned off. Re-enable the Bidirectional host option in system
settings.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8358

Time out on incoming frame from (x).
x = Remote system

System timed out waiting to receive a frame. The
connection is terminated by the system.
For host:


ASTM protocol.
For ARM:
Error code: 8359

Time out exceeded on message sent to LAS.

The LAS did not respond within the designated time
period. The connection is terminated by the system.
• LAS response time is too slow. Optimize the LAS response timeout value.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8360

Maximum number of consecutive LAS message timeouts and/or LAS <NAK> messages
exceeded.

• The LAS did not respond to the outgoing Re-initialize communication with the LAS.
message.
• Communication failed. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
• The system received an invalid checksum. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8361

LAS message communication error.

System is unable to send a message to the LAS.
• The LAS did not respond to the outgoing Re-initialize communication with the LAS.
message.
• The SCC is not configured correctly for the LAS Reconfigure the serial port parameter settings. See
settings. Configure serial ports window, page 2-35, for more
information.
• LAS response time is too slow. Optimize the LAS response timeout value.
• The system received an invalid checksum. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Laboratory
Automation System Interface Manual.
Error code: 8362

Time out on message sent from LAS.

The connection between the SCC and the LAS was
terminated.
• LAS not responding. Contact your LAS vendor.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8363

(x) connection cannot be established, remote system is busy.
x = Remote system

System attempted to connect with the remote
system, but the remote system was busy and
responded with a <NAK>.
For host:
• Host is busy. Wait for host system to become available.
For ARM:
action is required. If condition is not temporary, a
for this specific error code.
Error code: 8364

The maximum number of connection attempts has been reached for (x).
x = Remote system

Multiple failures while attempting to establish
communication with the remote system.
For host:


information.
ASTM protocol.
For ARM:
action is required. If condition is not temporary, a
for this specific error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8457

(x) port disabled.
x = Remote system

The communication port is disabled due to multiple
failures while attempting to establish
communication with the remote system.
For host:


• Incorrect baud rate on host port. 1. Reconfigure the host baud rate. See Change the
LIS serial port settings, page 2-22.
2. Re-enable the Bidirectional host option, after

correcting the baud rate.
ASTM protocol.
or failed
For ARM:
• ARM is busy or not responding Re-enable the Wash buffer transfer option for
automatic buffer transfer, after the ARM is
functional. See Configuration screen - System
settings view, page 2-4.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8458

Unable to accept test orders from Host.

System has reached unreleased result capacity, 1. If configured for host, release patient and QC
regardless if you are connected to a host or not. results.
This includes unreleased patient and QC results,
test orders, and exceptions. 2. Delete or release exceptions or pending orders
below 10% of maximum capacity. (Currently,
maximum capacity is 6,500, therefore 90% =
5,850). Once unreleased patient results, QC
results, and exceptions are released or deleted,
the system accepts test orders from the host.
NOTE: If not configured for a host, this message
should be ignored.
Error code: 8459

Test orders may be downloaded from the Host.

The number of unreleased patient and QC results, No corrective action is required. Test orders from
pending orders, and exceptions was reduced to a the host are accepted if the feature is enabled in the
level that is 10 percent below the maximum system configuration.
capacity.
Error code: 8460

Unable to process backup or restore request, host transfer in process.

Backup or restore selected when data is Wait until all host transfers are complete, or Cancel
transferring to the host. result transmission, page 5-230, before performing
the backup or restore procedure.
Error code: 8462

Negative query response for Sample ID (x), did not match the Sample ID sent to the host.
x = Sample ID

The sample ID returned from the host did not match
the sample ID queried for by the system.
• The host sent an order not requested by the Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
system. Interface RS-232 Manual for information about
communications.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8463

Unable to change configuration, host transmission is in process.

Host transmission was in process while attempting Wait until all host transfers are complete, or Cancel
to configure a new processing module. result transmission, page 5-230, before configuring
the new processing module.
Error code: 8464

LAS initialization communication failed.

• Communication failure between the SCC and the Re-initialize communication with the LAS.
LAS.
• Serial port settings configured on SCC do not 1. Verify/reconfigure the serial port settings.
match LAS configured settings.
• LAS is inoperable. Contact your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8465

Host transmission canceled by the user.

User cancelled result transmission to the host. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 8466

Incoming connection from (x) has been rejected, unreleased result capacity has been
reached on the system.
x = Remote system

The number of unreleased results is at the Release or delete unreleased patient results,
maximum. quality control results, and exceptions currently on
the system.
Error code: 8550

Unable to process test; power supply + 5 V failure.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8551

Unable to process test; power supply - 15 V failure.

hardware failure.
Error code: 8552


hardware failure.
Error code: 8553


hardware failure.
Error code: 8554

Unable to process test; power supply + 11.5 V failure.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 8555


hardware failure.
Software error codes (9000-9999)

The software error code category includes error codes between
9000-9999.
representative at:

Error code: 9000

Call Abbott. Invalid command.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9001

Call Abbott. Parameter (x) out of range.
x = CLI parameter number

Error code: 9002

Missing Failure response detected in work hierarchy, child work type (x), Test ID (y).
x = Work order child type
y = Test ID

An operation could not be performed on the
indicated device due to a conflict with another
device.
• User selected stop while a module was in This message may occur several times. Start up the
Running status. processing module and/or sample handler,
page 5-12, when the reason for the stop no longer
exists.
• Previous hardware failure. 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 0304 error
message.



error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9003

Missing Failure response detected in work hierarchy, child work type (x), not a test or a
work order.
x = Work order child type

device.
exists.
message.



error code.
Error code: 9004

Call Abbott. CLI parser error.

Error code: 9005

Call Abbott. Destination module not found.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9006

Call Abbott. Software error, CLI Parser error.

Error code: 9007

Call Abbott. CLI Parser, unknown error.

Error code: 9008

Call Abbott. CLI Parser, stack overflow.

Error code: 9009

Concurrency of (x) exceeded.
x = Mechanism name

device.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

exists.
message.



error code.
Error code: 9010

(y) preventing (x) from operating.
x = Mechanism experiencing failure
y = Mechanism causing failure

device.
exists.
message.

you do not find any 0304 error codes.

error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9011

Previous lockstep operations were not complete when new lockstep operation was
scheduled.

device.
exists.
message.



error code.
Error code: 9012

Call Abbott. Unknown / pSOS+ error number (x) received by IT domain.
x = Error message

Error code: 9013

Call Abbott. Invalid bit number (x).
x = Bit number


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9014

Call Abbott. Invalid module type requested.

Error code: 9015

Call Abbott. Required command argument was not specified.

Error code: 9016

Call Abbott. Request denied, experiment not found.

Error code: 9017

Call Abbott. TCB Command, memory allocation error.

Error code: 9018

Call Abbott. CLI command, incorrect increment/resolution parameter (x).
x = Parameter number


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9019

Call Abbott. TCB command, invalid parameter (x).
x = Count variable

Error code: 9020

Call Abbott. An Invalid OMS command sent to motor indexer device (x).
x = Motor or indexer board number

Error code: 9021

Call Abbott. Invalid command for module.

Error code: 9022

Call Abbott. Invalid liquid level sense command on liquid level sense board (x).
x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)

Error code: 9023

Call Abbott. Invalid liquid level sense board status bit on liquid level sense board (x).


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9026

Call Abbott. Digital I/O bit (x) interrupt in use.
x = Bit number

Error code: 9027

Microparticle Dispersion Mechanism is active, unable to execute request.

Error code: 9028

Call Abbott. Digital I/O bit (x) interrupt not in use.
x = Bit number

Error code: 9029

Call Abbott. A CLI command initiated while the instrument was in a status not permitting
such commands.

Error code: 9030

Call Abbott. Unknown error category number (x) received by IT domain.
x = Error number


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9031

Call Abbott. Invalid liquid level sense board (x).

Error code: 9032

Call Abbott. Invalid pressure monitor command on liquid level sense board (x).

Error code: 9033

Call Abbott. Invalid command sent to liquid level sense board (x).

Error code: 9034

Call Abbott. Sample Handler status does not allow execution of command.

Error code: 9035

Call Abbott. Invalid pressure monitor command on liquid level sense board (x).


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9037

Invalid Temperature Controller command.

Error code: 9038

Call Abbott. Invalid flow/clog detection channel (x).
x = Channel number

Error code: 9039

Call Abbott. Invalid temperature channel (x).
x = Temperature channel number

Error code: 9040

Call Abbott. Mechanism command sent to invalid destination.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9041

Missing failure response detected in work hierarchy, child work type (x), parent work type
(y).
x = Child work type
y = Parent work type

Could not perform an operation on the indicated
device due to a conflict with another device.
exists.
message.



error code.
Error code: 9042

The lockstep operation detected a timing error.

exists.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

message.



error code.
For STAT assays:
• Software error. Repeat the test, see Rerun a test, page 5-193.
Error code: 9043

Call Abbott. Command error, not yet implemented.

Error code: 9044

Call Abbott. Set_module CLI command failed.

Error code: 9045

The lockstep operation detected a timing failure.

exists.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

message.



error code.
Error code: 9046

Call Abbott. Motor command error on motor indexer device (x), parameter error.
x = Motor number or indexer board number

Error code: 9047

Call Abbott. Motor command sent to motor (x) and it was still processing a previous
command.
x = Motor number

Error code: 9048

Call Abbott. Motor mailbox error on motor indexer device (x).
x = Motor number or indexer number


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9049

Call Abbott. Invalid context used to load the motor data table.

Error code: 9050

Call Abbott. Solenoid task not created, call back cannot be executed.

Error code: 9051

Call Abbott. O/S Error.

Error code: 9052

Call Abbott. O/S ISR Error.

Error code: 9053

Call Abbott. Software error.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9054

File (x) not found.
x = File name

• Incorrect information entered when installing an Enter the correct information.
assay file or maintenance or diagnostic
procedure.
• Software error, when the error occurs at the Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
beginning of the procedure. provide information about the operation you were
Error code: 9055

Call Abbott. Invalid OMS command sent to motor indexer device (x).
x = Motor number or indexer board number

Error code: 9056

Call Abbott. Invalid DEBUG command parameter.

Error code: 9057

Call Abbott. Run request denied, at least one module must be Running.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9058

The lockstep operation detected a timing error.

exists.
message.



error code.
Error code: 9059

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), Carrier ID or Position are invalid.
x = Load list name
y = Load list line number

Error code: 9061

Discrepancy during report generation for parameter (x) in report (y).
x = Parameter number
y = Report name


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9062

Read interval of 0 msec. sent to data reduction.

Error code: 9063

Reporting database access error, table (x).
x = Database table write error

For x = generic framework error:
• Software error. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
For x = any other error:
Error code: 9064

Call Abbott. Unable to print report.

provide information specifying the report you were
attempting to print when the error occurred.
Error code: 9065

Unable to print report, field (x) data in (y) not present.
x = Field name
y = Report section name

Requested report is missing information required to Perform the procedure before attempting to print a
generate the report. report.
Error code: 9066

Unable to generate report, error accessing data.

Software reporting error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9068

Call Abbott. Unable to print (x), print job failed.
x = Report name

Error code: 9069

Call Abbott. Unknown error (x) detected in Instrument Control.
x = Error number

Error code: 9070

Call Abbott. Error occurred while attempting Automatic Prime.

Error code: 9071

Run-time error encountered while running (x) procedure.
x = Procedure name

Error code: 9073

Call Abbott. Software error, unable to open database. (No backup database exists)

The database is corrupted. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9074

Call Abbott. Software error, unable to open database. (Backup database exists)

The database is corrupted. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
Error code: 9075

System backup or restore canceled, unknown file access failure for (x).
x = Description of file

• Software error: Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
– Hard drive is full provide information about the operation you were
– File system on hard drive is corrupt
– Hard drive hardware failure.
Error code: 9076

Call Abbott. System backup canceled, system file (x) missing.
x = Description of file

Error code: 9077

Unable to communicate to Sample Handler or Processing Module, error (x), (y).
x = Architecture error number
y = String associated with architecture error

For x = 37:
• Processing module is powering on. Wait until the power on is complete and the module
status is Stopped.
• Ethernet cable has a poor connection. Reconnect the Ethernet cable.
See Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-698.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Network hub is turned off. 1. Turn on the power switch to the network hub.
2. Cycle power to the processing module and to the

sample handler. See Cycle power to the
page 5-11.
• Network hub power cord is disconnected. 1. Connect the power cord to the network hub and
plug into a UPS or wall outlet.
2. Cycle power to the processing module and to the

sample handler. See Cycle power to the
page 5-11.
• Communication failure between the SCC and a Cycle power to the processing module and to the
processing module or sample handler. sample handler. See Cycle power to the processing
module and/or sample handler, page 5-11.
• Network hub failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
hardware failure.
For x = 82:
status is Stopped.
– Sample handler controller board in the upper
For x = any other number:
status is Stopped.
hardware failure. Please provide the error
information displayed in the error message.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9078

Run request denied, Sample Handler must be Ready.

Error code: 9079

Unable to perform procedure, module (x) incorrect module type.
x = Module number

Error code: 9080

Process Path Index response not received when expected. Attempting to initiate response.

Software status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 9081

Data archive failed, error (x).
x = Error message

• CD disk is dirty Clean disk. Refer to the CD cover for cleaning and
• CD disk is defective Use a new disk.
Error code: 9082

Call Abbott. Data archive failed, error writing data to hard drive.

• The C drive is out of disk space. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
– Hard drive

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9083

Call Abbott. Unknown c System Error (x).
x = Error code number/status

For x = (0225 0001/0000/0000):
• The last reagent scan performed did not Perform a reagent scan.
complete successfully. See Scan the reagent carousel(s) (except for i
1000SR), page 5-73
• Both types of ICT sample diluents (ICT and Remove the appropriate ICT sample diluent and
ICTD5) are loaded on the sample carousel. perform a reagent scan.
See Scan the reagent carousel(s) (except for i
1000SR), page 5-73
For x = any other number:
– CPU board hardware failure.
– DAQ board
Error code: 9084

Processing module received an invalid sample order from the SCC.

Error code: 9085

c System CPU software error.

– CPU board has a poor connection or failed hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9086

Connection error between SCC and processing module.

• Power is turned off to the module. Power on the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-7.
• Processing module is powering on. Wait until power on is complete and processing
module status is Stopped.
• Communication failure. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
sample handler, page 5-11, if the module stopped
running as a result of the error.
• Network hub is turned off. Turn on the power switch to the network hub.
• Network hub power cord is disconnected. Connect the power cord to the network hub and
– CPU board has a poor connection or failed hardware failure.
Error code: 9087

Communication error between SCC and processing module.

• Power is turned off to the module. Power on the processing module and/or sample
handler, page 5-7.
• Processing module is powering on. Wait until power on is complete and processing
module status is Stopped.
• Communication failure. Cycle power to the processing module and/or
• Network hub is turned off. Turn on the power switch to the network hub.
• Network hub power cord is disconnected. Connect the power cord to the network hub and
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9088

Call Abbott. Invalid solenoid number (x).
x = Solenoid number

Error code: 9089

Call Abbott. Invalid DC motor number (x).
x = DC motor number

Error code: 9090

Call Abbott. Invalid DC motor speed.

Error code: 9091

Call Abbott. Invalid solenoid duty cycle value.

Error code: 9092

Call Abbott. Software error, unsolicited sample complete received by module (x).
x = ID of the processing module with the software defect


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9093

Call Abbott. Unknown error exporting assay file (x). Error code (y).
x = Assay number
y = Error code

• Error while formatting or writing to the floppy disk. Use a new floppy disk.
– Floppy drive hardware failure.

Error code: 9094

Call Abbott. Unknown assay file.

Error code: 9095

Call Abbott. Reagent bottle timeout, response not received within 30 seconds of run
initialize.

A new reagent supply center segment was loaded Scan the reagent carousel prior to initiating the run.
with fewer positions than the previous segment and See Scan the reagent carousel(s) (except for i
a manual reagent scan was not performed prior to 1000 ), page 5-73.
SR
initiating the run.
Error code: 9096

Error message received from c System (x).
x = Error code number and statuses

Low level informational message displaying the Review logs, page 10-14, for an error code that
error number received from the c System occurred at the same time as this message.
processing module.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9097

Call Abbott. Invalid optical read data received fromc System module.

Error code: 9098

Call Abbott. Unable to calculate result, optical read data not received from c System
module.

Error code: 9099

Call Abbott. Excessive scheduling locksteps detected.

Too many tests ordered for the carrier. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
Error code: 9100

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) Calibration failure, too many calibrators.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9101

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) Calibration failure, unknown math model.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9102

Call Abbott. Calibrator response for lot (x) has a value that is equal to or less than zero.
x = Reagent lot number

Error code: 9103

Call Abbott. Calculation error, divide by zero.

Error code: 9104

Call Abbott. Unable to calculate cutoff/index for Assay (x) number (y).
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9105

Call Abbott. Invalid variable in index formula for Assay (x) number (y).
x = Assay name
y = Assay number


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9107

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, memory allocation error.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9108

Call Abbott. Unable to perform scan, experiment reagent kit(s) exist.

Error code: 9109

Call Abbott. Reference Cal Curve for Assay number (x) with cal version (y) deleted, no assay
exists.
x = Assay number
y = Calibration version

Error code: 9110

Call Abbott. (x) does not exist.
x = Mechanism name


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9112

Call Abbott. Module specified for the experiment reagent kit in position (x) does not exist.

Error code: 9113

Call Abbott. Unable to process calibration, Reference Cal Curve missing.

Error code: 9200

Call Abbott. Duplicate reagent kit size code found in the system file for size code (x).
x = Size code

Error code: 9201

Call Abbott. Error parsing ALD system file for reagent kit size maps.

Error code: 9202

Call Abbott. Parser error, value specified in the parser formula does not exist.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9203

Call Abbott. Unable to create reagent bottles, one of the lists has a zero length.

Error code: 9204

Call Abbott. Invalid bar code in position (x) on (y) carousel.
x = Position in which the invalid bar code was detected.
(1-25 for i System; A1 - D20 for c 8000/c 16000; A1 - O6 for c 4000)
y = Location in which the invalid bar code was detected.

Error code: 9205

Call Abbott. No pack size exists for a scanned reagent kit with size code (x).
x = Size code on the reagent kit


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9206

Unrecognized bar code version or format in position (x) on (y) carousel.
x = Position in which the unrecognized bar code version was detected.
(1-25 for i System; A1 - D20 for c 8000/c 16000; A1 - O6 for c 4000)
y = Location in which the unrecognized bar code version was detected.

For c System only:
• A reagent cartridge with an invalid ID or Abbott 1. Remove the label from the reagent.
AEROSET (version 1) bar code was loaded.
2. Configure a reagent and reagent kit.
See Configure a user-defined reagent
(photometric - c System), page 2-65, and
Configure a user-defined reagent kit
(photometric - c System), page 2-66.
3. Manually assign a position for the reagent.

• A user printed reagent bar code has invalid Recreate the bar code verifying all parameter
information for one of the parameters encoded specifications
into the bar code. See 1D reagent bar code requirements (c System),
page 4-23.
For all systems:
Error code: 9207

Call Abbott. No reagent kits found.

Error code: 9208

Call Abbott. A no assay, load error, mismatch or bad master lot experiment reagent pack
loaded.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9210

Position not defined for detergent B solution in the sample carousel or sample wash
solution area.

Error code: 9211

Position not defined for ICT cleaning fluid in the sample carousel or sample wash solution
area.

• Position information was not sent from the SCC 1. Initiate a run (it is not necessary to have any
to the module after cycling power to the module. orders). See Initiating or resuming sample
processing, page 5-176.

to Running.
3. Select the processing module graphic, and

then select F6 - Stop.

to Stopped, and then select F5 - Start-up.
5. Restart the desired procedure.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9212

Position not defined for 0.5 percent acid wash solution in the sample carousel or sample
wash solution area.


to Running.



Error code: 9213

Position not defined for 10% detergent B solution for R1 pipettor.

The solution was not configured in an onboard Configure the solution into a position.
solution position for the reagent supply center. See Change the onboard solution options (c 4000),
page 2-23.
Error code: 9214

Position not defined for 0.5 percent acid wash solution for R1 pipettor.

page 2-23.
Error code: 9215

Position not defined for detergent A solution for R1 pipettor.

page 2-23.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9216

Position not defined for 10% detergent B solution for R2 pipettor.

page 2-23.
Error code: 9217

Position not defined for 0.5 percent acid wash solution for R2 pipettor.

page 2-23.
Error code: 9218

Position not defined for detergent A solution for R2 pipettor.

page 2-23.
Error code: 9219

Position not defined for water bath additive.

• Unable to read segment ID bar code on reagent 1. Review message logs for error code 4006.
carousel.
2. Perform the corrective action for this error code.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


to Running.



Error code: 9220

Position not defined for detergent A solution in the sample carousel or sample wash
solution area.


to Running.




(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9221

Unrecognized bar code version or format in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y).
x = Reagent carrier position in which the unrecognized bar code version was detected.

Error code: 9222

Call Abbott. Invalid bar code in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y).
x = Reagent carrier position in which the unrecognized bar code version was detected.

Error code: 9223

Reagent kit is unavailable.

Error code: 9300

Call Abbott. Value required for Assay (x) parameter (y) is not specified.
x = Assay name
y = Assay parameter


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9301

Call Abbott. Unable to delete assay (x), the assay is part of a loaded experiment.
x = Assay name

Error code: 9302

Call Abbott. Parameter out of range Assay number (x) status (y).
x = Assay number
y = Assay status

Error code: 9303

Call Abbott. Invalid value in unit formula for assay (x) number (y).
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9304

Assay (x) installation error, system software version not compatible.
x = Assay name

The assay can only be used with a later version of Install required system software. Contact your Area
System software. The software must be upgraded Customer Support.
before the assay can be run.
The assay being imported can only be used with a For Abbott assays install the assay from the
later version of System software. ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM. For more
information see Install or delete an assay file,
page 2-177.
For user-defined assays see Configuring
user-defined assays, page 2-54.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9305

Call Abbott. Unable to delete assay, assay number (x) does not exist.
x= Assay number

Error code: 9306

Call Abbott. No assays found.

Error code: 9307

Call Abbott. Calibration Curve specified in experiment already exists for lot number (x).
x = Lot number

Error code: 9308

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), dilution protocol not defined for the
assay.
x = Load list name


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9309

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), specified assay is not installed.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9310

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. A required reagent does not exist for
bottle type.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9311

Call Abbott. Syntax error detected in system file (x), section (y).
x = File name
y = Section where error occurred

Error code: 9312

Call Abbott. (x) procedure contains invalid inventory usage specification.
x = Procedure name


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9313

Call Abbott. Procedure (x) contains a range error.
x = Procedure name

Error code: 9314

Call Abbott. No procedures found.

Error code: 9315

Call Abbott. Value required for calculated assay (x) number (y), is not specified.
x = Name of the calculated assay
y = Number of the calculated assay

Error code: 9320

Processing module received invalid assay parameters from the SCC, sample volume out of
range.

Error code: 9321

Processing module received invalid assay parameters from the SCC, reagent volume out of
range.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9322

Processing module received invalid assay parameters from the SCC, total sample volume
out of range.

Error code: 9323

Processing module received invalid assay parameters from the SCC, total R1 volume out of
range.

• Previous level sense or hardware error. 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 3000 or 5000
category error codes that occurred just prior to
this message.
2. Perform the corrective action for the error code.

Error code: 9324

Processing module received invalid assay parameters from the SCC, total R2 volume out of
range.

• Previous level sense or hardware error. 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 3000 or 5000
category error codes that occurred just prior to
this message.
2. Perform the corrective action for the error code.

Error code: 9325

Call Abbott. Unable to create retest rule (x), dilution(s) do not exist in DAT file.
x = Dilution name


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9326

Call Abbott. Unable to create (x), number of characters cannot exceed (y).
x = Name of the panel or assay
y = Maximum number of characters

Error code: 9327

Call Abbott. Unable to create assay (x), number (y). Assay number must be in the range
3000 to 3099.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9328

Call Abbott. Parameter specified for (x) was out of range.
x = Name of component which contains the range parameter

Error code: 9329

Unable to install procedure (x), the language files are incorrect or not found.
x = Procedure name

The procedure has one or more language files Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
missing. provide information about the operation you were

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9400

Call Abbott, Sample Handler Run request denied, experiment exists. Use the run_exp CLI
command.

Error code: 9401

Unable to delete, specified reagent kit does not exist.

FSR only. (Incorrect data typed when deleting the Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
Buffer Run assay. Must enter SN and lot number provide information about the operation you were
from the Microparticle bottle.) attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error code: 9402

Unable to execute CLI commands, insufficient access level.

Error code: 9403

Call Abbott. Wash Aspirate integrity compromised when initiating a wash aspirate from a
non-park position.

Error code: 9404

Call Abbott. Toggle ARM transfer failed.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9405

Unable to execute CLI command, carrier detected in aspiration area.

Error code: 9406

Call Abbott. Invalid context used to load the DC motor solenoid data table.

Error code: 9410

Unable to execute CLI command, carrier detected on carrier positioner pocket (y) module
(x).
x = Processing module number
y = Carrier positioner pocket

Error code: 9413

Unable to execute CLI command, carrier pick attempt failed.

Error code: 9414

Unable to execute CLI command, unexpected carrier detected.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9418

Unable to execute CLI command, no carrier detected.

Error code: 9420

Module (x) is offline.
x = Module number

Error code: 9421

Module (x) has been reserved for execution.
x = Module that has been reserved

Error code: 9422

Module (x) is executing a command and is unavailable.
x = Module that is busy executing another command

Error code: 9424

Unable to execute CLI command, carrier verification failure detected.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9451

Unable to execute CLI command, invalid device referenced.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9452

Unable to execute CLI command, invalid command received.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9453

Unable to execute CLI command, invalid parameter length.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9454

Unable to execute CLI command, invalid parameter 1 received.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9455

Unable to execute CLI command, invalid device position.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9456

Unable to execute CLI command, device not recognized.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9457

Unable to execute CLI command, unspecified command.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9458

Unable to execute CLI command, module not in correct status.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9459

Unable to execute CLI command, multiple commands.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9460

Unable to execute CLI command, device busy.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9461

Unable to execute CLI command, file error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9462

Unable to execute CLI command, no sample handler order.

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9463

Unable to execute CLI command, sample present on sample handler.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9464

Unable to execute CLI command, incomplete sample order.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9465

(x) error occurred while executing CLI command.
x = Error code number/status

longer exists.
hardware failure.
Error code: 9466

Unable to execute CLI command, carousel not homed.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9467

Unable to execute CLI command, PM board communication error.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9468

Unable to execute CLI command, sample pipettor movement restricted.

hardware failure.
Error code: 9469

Unable to execute CLI command, (x) pipettor movement restricted.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.
Error code: 9470

Unable to execute CLI command, (x) pipettor movement restricted.
x = Pipettor name

hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9500

Call Abbott. Error parsing ALD system file for assay modules.

Error code: 9501

Call Abbott. Error parsing ALD system file for assay module configurations.

Error code: 9502

Call Abbott. Error parsing ALD system file for assay module wedge maps.

Error code: 9505

Call Abbott. Error parsing ALD system file for LLS Error default.

Error code: 9506

Call Abbott. Invalid parameter received by (x).
x = Mechanism name


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9507

Call Abbott. Motor system file corrupt.

Error code: 9508

Call Abbott. Motor system file not found.

Error code: 9509

Call Abbott. System file error, NA found in section (x).
x = Keyword section header name

Error code: 9510

Call Abbott. Error parsing system file (x).
x = File name

Error code: 9511

Call Abbott. Module (x) specified in this procedure does not exist in current system
configuration.
x = Module number


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9512

System backup failed, see Message History log.

Backup failed while attempting to backup one or 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any 0162, 0237,
more individual files. 9075, or 9076 error codes that occurred at the
same time as this message.

error code.
Error code: 9513

Call Abbott. Reporting database error.

Error code: 9514

Call Abbott. Duplicate configuration file entry in keyword section (x).
x = Keyword section

Error code: 9515

Call Abbott. System Parameters.ini file not found or corrupt.

Error code: 9516

Call Abbott. Solenoid system file corrupt.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9517

File error, required token (x), is missing or misspelled in (y).
x = Field name
y = TSB number

TSB file error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
Error code: 9518

The required (x) file is missing for TSB (y).
x = Field name
y = TSB number

Error code: 9519

System file error. TSB number in (x) does not match file name.
x = TSB number

Error code: 9520

TSB (x) token (y) has an invalid value.
x = TSB number
y = Field name


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9521

Call Abbott. TSB (x) installation failed.
x = TSB number

Error code: 9522

Call Abbott. Reagent cartridge in (x), position (y) cannot be used until physical dimensions
are defined.
x = Reagent supply center

A reagent cartridge type was scanned that does not Contact your Area Customer Support.
have the physical height and volume specifications
defined.
Error code: 9523

Unable to open (x) file from (y).
x = Name of import file
y = Drive where file is located

File was corrupted in the download process. 1. Replace media and repeat download.
2. If not resolved manually configure the data.

Hardware failure: 1. Use an alternative drive if possible or manually
– CD drive configure the data.
– USB port 2. Contact your Area Customer Support.
Error code: 9600

Call Abbott. Load request denied, module in load list (x) line (y) not configured for system.
x = Load list name


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9601

Call Abbott. Load request denied, experiment (x) already loaded.
x = Experiment file name

Error code: 9602

Call Abbott. Experiment file error, no load list files found.

Error code: 9603

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), reagent kit not defined in experiment file.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9604

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), calibrator order type is inconsistent with other calibrators.
x = Load list name


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9605

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), first calibrator order missing for calibration.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9606

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), module assignment required when reagent kit specified.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9607

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), selected carrier and position in use by another sample.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9608

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), location not specified for first calibrator.
x = Load list name


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9609

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), specified reagent kit is not valid for assay.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9610

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), missing a required calibrator order.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9611

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), calibrator order type invalid for the assay.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9612

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), module or kit specified inconsistent with other calibrator
orders
x = Load list name


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9614

Call Abbott. Invalid Control order, assay not configured. Load list (x), line number (y).
x = Load list name

Error code: 9615

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), illegal kit location.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9616

Call Abbott. Load request denied, illegal kit location (x) in experiment file.
x = Illegal reagent position

Error code: 9617

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), specified assay is invalid for module.
x = Load list name


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9618

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), number of replicates greater than 5.
x = Load list name

Error code: 9619

Call Abbott. Invalid assay ordered on processing module in load list (x) line (y).
x = Load list name

Error code: 9620

Call Abbott. Specified reagent pack invalid for the module specified in load list (x) line (y).
x = Load list name

Error code: 9621

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), number of replicates is 0.
x = Load list name
y = Load list line number.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9700

Call Abbott. Syntax error in file (x).
x = File name

For c System: Edit the normal or extreme range before exporting.
• Attempted to export an assay with a negative
value defined for a normal or extreme range.
For i System: Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
• Software error. provide information about the operation you were
Error code: 9701

Call Abbott. Syntax error detected in assay file with assay number (x) and status (y).
x = Assay number
y = Assay status

Error code: 9702

Call Abbott. (x) procedure contains a syntax error. Refer to scripting log.
x = Procedure name

Error code: 9703

Syntax error in formula.

Calculated assay formula is incorrect. Correct the formula for the Calculated assay.
Ensure all selected assays are included in the
assay formula.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9800

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error, not a quantitative assay.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9801

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid calibration method specified.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9802

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid calibration validity error
specification.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9803

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Quantitative adjuster level already
exists.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9805

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Duplicate parameter weighting term.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9808

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid interpretation category.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9810

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Duplicate interpretation specification.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9811

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Calibrator adjusters have equal
concentration.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9813

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid default dilution.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9814

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid calibration dilution.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9815

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Incorrect number of calibrator
replicates.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9816

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Units do not match specifications.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9817

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Adjuster conc. does not match
calibrator conc.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9818

Call Abbott. File (x) installation error, checksum failure.
x = File name

For c System: Re-export the assay from the original system and
• Attempted to import an assay that was modified use the new file to repeat the import procedure.
or corrupted on the floppy disk.
For i System: Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
• Software error. provide information about the operation you were
Error code: 9819

Call Abbott. File (x) installation error, parameter specified in the file was out of range.
x = File name

• Linearity parameter (c System) in an imported file Edit the linearity parameters to be within
is out of range. -999,999.0000 to 999,999.000 prior to exporting the
assay file.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9821

Call Abbott. Lot number with a different reagent configuration exists. Cannot install lot (x).
x = Lot number

Error code: 9822

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Assay with different result type already
installed.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9823

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. No adjusters present for calibration type
ADJUST.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9824

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. No calibrators present.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9825

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Not enough bottles in reagent kit.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9826

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid interpretation cutoff type.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9828

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Reagent kit size does not exist.
x = Assay name
y = Assay number

Error code: 9830

CPU firmware update failure (TFTP).


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9831

DAQ firmware update failure (TFTP).

Error code: 9832

DAQ firmware update failure (handling main CPU).

Error code: 9833

DAQ firmware update failure (Data file format).

Error code: 9834

Call Abbott. Update of c System module CPU firmware did not complete successfully.

Error code: 9835

Call Abbott. Unable to perform automatic update ofc System module CPU, missing file list.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9836

Call Abbott. Update of c System module DAQ firmware did not complete successfully.

Error code: 9837

Call Abbott. Unable to perform automatic update ofc System module DAQ, missing file list.

Error code: 9838

Call Abbott. CPU firmware configuration does not match application firmware.

Error code: 9839

Call Abbott. Software installation error. Perform a Shutdown and restart.

Software error. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
Error code: 9840

Call Abbott. Firmware configuration does not match the SCC sample handler
configuration.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9900

Call Abbott. Exception number (x). System shutting down. Error data (y).
x = Software architecture exception number
y = Supplemental exception data provided with some software architecture exceptions

• SCC shutdown due to an error or corrupted file. 1. Press ALT + PRINT SCREEN on the keyboard
to obtain a printout of the specific information on
the screen.
2. Power off the SCC, page 5-4.
3. Wait five minutes.
4. Power on the SCC, page 5-3.

handler, page 5-12, when the processing module
status is Stopped.
Error code: 9901

Call Abbott. User access level error, unable to locate system file. General user and Admin
access only.

Error code: 9902

Call Abbott. The server process is currently not running. Perform a shutdown and restart.

• SCC shutdown due to an error. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9903

Call Abbott. Server process is currently running. Perform a shutdown and restart.

• SCC shutdown due to an error. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
Error code: 9904

Call Abbott. O/S LLS/PM ISR Error.

Error code: 9905

Call Abbott. Invalid sample data received during data processing.

Error code: 9906

Call Abbott. Fatal Architecture Exception on SCC. The error has been logged. The
application will now shutdown.

• SCC shutdown due to an error or corrupted file. 1. Press ALT + PRINT SCREEN on the keyboard
to obtain a printout of the specific information on
the screen.
2. Power off the SCC, page 5-4.
3. Wait five minutes.

handler, page 5-12, when the processing module
status is Stopped.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9907

Call Abbott. Invalid solenoid ramp time value.

Error code: 9908

Call Abbott. Invalid solenoid ramp duty cycle value.

Error code: 9909

Call Abbott. Invalid scheduler input detected.

Error code: 9910

Call Abbott. Unable to process test, invalid carrier ID.

Error code: 9911

Call Abbott. Reagent carousel access conflict detected.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Error code: 9912

Memory pool limit exceeded for object (x) by (y) instances.
x = Object name
y = Number of instances

Error code: 9913

Data import failed, error parsing file for Calibrator/Control (x) Lot (y).
x = Name of control or calibrator
y = Lot number of control or calibrator

Selected file for import is corrupted. 1. Obtain an alternate copy of the file and repeat
the data import procedure.
2. If unresolved manually configure the data.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 10 Observed problems
Observed problems
Observed problems provides information on problems that may occur
with an ARCHITECT System, ARCHITECT c System, ARCHITECT
i System, and ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module),
and the corrective action steps you can follow to help resolve the
problem.
Observed problem topics include:
• Processing module observed problems (c System), page 10-573
• Processing module observed problems (i System), page 10-584
• Sample results observed problems (c System), page 10-586
• Sample results observed problems (i System), page 10-600
• Sample handler observed problems, page 10-627
• SCC observed problems, page 10-629
• Peripheral devices observed problems, page 10-647
If performing the corrective actions do not resolve the problem,
contact your Area Customer Support representative at:
Processing module observed problems (c System)

Observed problems for the c System processing module include:
• 1 mL wash solution syringe leaks (c System), page 10-574
• Assay using the Factor calibration mode is disabled after importing
the assay (c System), page 10-575
• Bar coded reagents do not appear on the Reagent status screen after a
reagent scan was performed (c System), page 10-575
• Bubbles in ICT module tubing (c System), page 10-576
• Bubbles in sample/reagent probe tubing (c System), page 10-577
• Bubbles in the sample/reagent syringes (c System), page 10-578
• Debris on the reaction carousel (c System), page 10-578
• High-concentration waste not aspirated from cuvettes (c System),
page 10-578
• ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump syringes leak

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Observed problems Section 10
• ICT probe leaks (c System), page 10-579

• Lamp is not on (c System), page 10-579
• Liquid around the top of the cuvettes after washing (c System),
page 10-580
• Mixer is bent or is making an unexpected noise, page 10-580
• No alarm when high-concentration waste is full (c System),
page 10-581
• Non-bar coded reagents not recognized (c System), page 10-581
• No water in reagent supply center 1 (c System), page 10-581
• Reagent probe tubing is discolored or contains precipitate (c System),
page 10-582
• Sample/reagent probe is damaged/clogged (c System), page 10-582
• Sample/reagent probe tubing leaks (c System), page 10-582
• Sample/reagent probe leaks or drips (c System), page 10-582
• Sample/reagent solenoid valve leaks (c System), page 10-583
• Sample/reagent syringe leaks (c System), page 10-583
• Solution/dried solution under bulk solution bottles (c System),
page 10-584
• Wash solution is not being used (level not falling over time)
1 mL wash solution syringe leaks (c System)
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT c System.

• Syringe is not tightened at the check valve Tighten the connection.
connection.
• Syringe plunger is damaged. Replace the 1 mL syringe.
See Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 4000),
page 9-116.
• Check valve is defective. Replace the check valve.
• Tubing is crimped or damaged. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay using the Factor calibration mode is disabled after importing the assay
(c System)

The Blank calibrator level is undefined after 1. Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings
importing the assay. - Assay parameters view, page 2-37.
2. Select the assay from the Assays list, and then

select F6 - Configure.
The Configure assay parameters window -
General view displays.

Calibration - Calibrators view displays.
4. Select the Blank Calibrator level list button, and

then select the desired option.
5. Enter the concentration for the Blank calibrator

level.
6. Select the Volumes option.

Calibration - Volumes view displays.
7. Enter the volumes for the Blank calibrator level.
8. Select the General option.

General view displays.
9. Select the Assay availability list button, and

then select the Enabled option.
10.Select Done to save your changes.
Bar coded reagents do not appear on the Reagent status screen after a reagent
scan was performed (c System)

See Load bar coded reagents (c 4000), page 5-74.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• A reagent cartridge with an invalid 1D (one 1. Remove the label from the reagent.
dimensional) reagent bar code was loaded.
2. Configure a reagent and reagent kit. See
Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric -
c System), page 2-65 and Configure a
user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c
System), page 2-66.
3. Assign a position for the reagent.

See Load bar coded reagents (c 4000),
page 5-74.
For information about valid 1D reagent bar codes,
see 1D reagent bar code requirements (c System),
page 4-23.
• Bar code label on a 20 mL (bottle) cartridge is not Reposition the 20 mL bottle in the adapter so it
facing the bar code reader. faces the outside of the reagent supply center.
• A communication failure occurred with the Cycle power to the processing module and/or
reagent bar code reader. sample handler, page 5-11.
hardware failure.
Bubbles in ICT module tubing (c System)

• The ICT reference solution bottle is empty, but 1. Replace the ICT reference solution bottle. See
the weight platform failed to detect it. Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
System), page 5-24.

the weight platform failure.
• ICT module o-rings are missing or are not seated Reseat or replace the o-rings.
page 9-108.
page 9-108.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• ICT check valves are not functioning. Replace the check valves.
• 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or in the Reseat the 1 mL syringes.
ICT reference solution pump are not seated
correctly.
• 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or in the Replace the 1 mL syringes.
ICT reference solution pump are leaking. See Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 4000),
page 9-116.
– Solenoid hardware failure.
Bubbles in sample/reagent probe tubing (c System)

• Tubing connection to the syringe is loose. 1. Tighten the side and top tubing connections to
the syringe body.

• Probe tubing is damaged. Replace the tubing between the probe and the
connector on top of the pipettor.
For c 4000 see Replace the sample probe tubing (c
4000), page 9-82 or Replace the reagent probe
tubing (c 4000), page 9-85.
• Syringe seal(s) and/or o-ring have failed. Replace the syringe o-ring and seal tips.
For c 4000 see Replace sample or reagent syringe
o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 4000), page 9-138.
– Degasser hardware failure.
– Solenoid

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Bubbles in the sample/reagent syringes (c System)

• Tubing connection to the syringe is loose. 1. Tighten side and top tubing connections to the
syringe body.

– Degasser hardware failure.
– Solenoid
Debris on the reaction carousel (c System)

• Debris accumulating on the reaction carousel Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6064
around the cuvettes. Clean Reaction Carousel, page 9-43.
High-concentration waste not aspirated from cuvettes (c System)

• Obstruction is present in the high-concentration Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018
waste nozzle. Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-28.
• High-concentration waste pump tubing is Contact your Area Customer Support.
obstructed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump syringes leak (c System)

• ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump Replace the ICT aspiration or ICT reference
syringes are damaged. solution pump syringes that are damaged.
See Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 4000),
page 9-116.
• ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the
syringe connections to the check valve or tubing ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump.
are loose.
ICT probe leaks (c System)

page 9-108.
• ICT probe is not connected correctly. Finger tighten the ICT probe to the ICT module.
• ICT probe is damaged. Replace ICT probe.
page 9-108.
Lamp is not on (c System)

• Cable terminals were not securely connected to Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003
the terminal block when the lamp was replaced. Change Lamp, page 9-30, and ensure the lamp
cables are secured by the screws in the terminal
block.
• Lamp is out. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Liquid around the top of the cuvettes after washing (c System)

• Cuvette washer is not functioning properly. 1. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018

6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-41, and observe
the cuvette washer nozzles for hanging drops or
leaks.
– If drops or leaks are observed for the
high-concentration waste nozzle, replace the
high-concentration waste (bellows) pump
poppet valve (c 8000).
poppet valve.
4000), page 9-145.

Customer Support.
page 9-103.
• Reagent probe is damaged. Replace the reagent probes.
• Reagent probe is out of alignment. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1121
R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37 or 1122 R2
hardware failure.
Mixer is bent or is making an unexpected noise

Mixer is installed incorrectly or is out of alignment Replace the mixer.
and hitting the side of the cuvette. See Replace the mixer (c 4000), page 9-106.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
No alarm when high-concentration waste is full (c System)

• Float switch cable has a poor connection. Reconnect the float switch cable to the module and
the high-concentration waste bottle. See Replace
the float switch cable (c System), page 9-180.
• Float switch is dirty. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 6307
Check/Clean HC Waste Sensor, page 9-35.
• Float switch cable has failed. Replace the float switch cable (c System),
page 9-180.
• Float switch has failed. Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c
Non-bar coded reagents not recognized (c System)

A position was not assigned for the non-bar coded Assign a position for the reagent.
reagent. See Load non-bar coded reagents (c 4000),
page 5-79.
No water in reagent supply center 1 (c System)

• System DI water source is not functioning. 1. Check the DI water system.

3. Check for water delivery to the reagent supply

center.
• Cuvette wash pump poppet valve has failed. Replace the pump poppet valve set.
See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 4000),
page 9-145.
– DI water cuvette wash hardware failure.
– Cuvette wash pump bellows

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reagent probe tubing is discolored or contains precipitate (c System)

Reagent probe tubing is discolored or contains Replace the reagent probe tubing.
precipitate. See Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 4000),
page 9-85.
Sample/reagent probe is damaged/clogged (c System)

• Particulate matter in the sample is causing Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023
obstruction in the probe. Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-26.
• Sample or reagent probe is damaged. Replace the damaged probe.
For c 4000 see Replace the sample probe (c 4000),
page 9-74 or Replace reagent probes (c 4000),
page 9-78.
Sample/reagent probe tubing leaks (c System)

• Sample or reagent pipettor tubing is damaged or Replace the tubing.
stretched. For c 4000 see Replace the sample probe tubing (c
• Probe is obstructed. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023
Sample/reagent probe leaks or drips (c System)


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

the syringe body.

• Probe wash poppet valve has failed. Replace the pump poppet valve set.
page 9-145.
Sample/reagent solenoid valve leaks (c System)

• Tubing connection to the solenoid valve is loose. Tighten the tubing connection at the solenoid valve.
– Tubing is damaged hardware failure.
– Solenoid valve
Sample/reagent syringe leaks (c System)

• Tubing connection to the syringe is loose. 1. Tighten side and top tubing connections to the
syringe body.

• O-ring is not seated correctly or is missing in the Reseat or replace the o-ring.
incoming water line connection at the side of the For c 4000 see Replace sample or reagent syringe
syringe. o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 4000), page 9-138.
• Tubing connector is defective. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Solution/dried solution under bulk solution bottles (c System)

• Solution was spilled by the operator. Clean the spill.
• Bulk solution bottle is damaged. Clean the spill, and then replace the bulk solution
bottle. See Replace bulk solutions and update
inventory (c System), page 5-24.
• Wash valve failure occurred allowing solution and Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
water to flow back into the bottle. hardware failure.
Wash solution is not being used (level not falling over time) (c System)

• Wash solution filter is obstructed. Replace the wash solution filter.
See Replace the wash solution filter (c 4000),
page 9-126.
• Cuvette washer nozzle is obstructed. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018
Wash solution valve failure hardware failure.
Processing module observed problems (i System)

Observed problems for the i System processing modules include:
• 2052 WZ Aspiration Test failure (i 1000SR), page 10-585
• Black powder observed in reagent carousel area (i System),
page 10-585
• Condensation in the external reagent carousel area (i 1000SR),
page 10-585
• Wash buffer volume did not update (i System), page 10-586

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2052 WZ Aspiration Test failure (i 1000SR)
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT i System.

• Poor tubing connections to the wash zone. Reconnect tubing to the affected probe(s) for the
wash zone.
• Incorrect tubing/sensor cable connections. Reconnect the wash zone tubing/sensor cable to
the correct probe.
• Wash zone probe obstructed. See Replace the wash zone probe (i 1000SR),
page 9-157.
• Wash zone temperature sensor obstructed. See Replace the wash zone temperature tubing
and sensor (i 1000SR), page 9-160.
• Poor tubing connections to the upper waste Reseat the tubing connection at the upper waste
manifold. manifold.
– DC driver I/O board has a poor connection or hardware failure.
failed
– Wash zone manifold valve failures
– Wash zone dispense pump motor failure
Black powder observed in reagent carousel area (i System)

Wearing of the brass wheel on the outer carousel is Replace the septum if black powder is visible on the
occurring. reagent septum.
If you only observe black powder in the reagent
carousel area no corrective action is required.
Wearing is expected and does not impact hardware
or assay performance.
Condensation in the external reagent carousel area (i 1000SR)
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT i 1000SR.

Condensation is present on the lower left front Remove condensate using absorbent tissues.
portion of the reagent carousel cover due to high
humidity.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Wash buffer volume did not update (i System)

The wash buffer reservoir was not filled to the top Load wash buffer until the wash buffer reservoir is
sensor when using the ARCHITECT ARM full.
(Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory.
Sample results observed problems (c System)

Sample results observed problems for the c System include:
• A#1 Result flag, page 10-587
• A#2 Result flag, page 10-588
• All ICT results have similar values, Na = 140 / K = 4.0 / Cl = 100
mmol/L (c System), page 10-590
• Controls out of range (c System), page 10-590
• Depressed concentration - ICT results entire run (c System),
page 10-592
• Depressed concentration - ICT results single assay (c System),
page 10-592
• Depressed concentration - K+ results single assay (c System),
page 10-592
• Depressed concentration - photometric results entire run (c System),
page 10-593
• Depressed concentration - photometric results single assay (c System),
page 10-593
• Elevated concentration - ICT results entire run (c System),
page 10-594
• Elevated concentration - ICT results single assay (c System),
page 10-594
• Elevated concentration - photometric results single assay (c System),
page 10-594
• Erratic results, poor precision - ICT results (c System), page 10-595
• Erratic results, poor precision - photometric results (c System),
page 10-597
• FLEX Result flag, page 10-600
• PSHH Result flag, page 10-600

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
A#1 Result flag

bottle.
• Reagent probe is damaged. Replace the reagent probes.
• Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003
• Lamp is not performing as expected. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003
• Cuvettes are dirty. Perform 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually,
page 9-43.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


leaks.
poppet valve.
4000), page 9-145.

Customer Support.
page 9-103.
hardware failure.
A#2 Result flag

bottle.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Reagent probe is damaged. Replace the reagent probe.
• Cuvettes are dirty. Perform 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually,
page 9-43.

leaks.
poppet valve.
4000), page 9-145.

Customer Support.
page 9-103.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
All ICT results have similar values, Na = 140 / K = 4.0 / Cl = 100 mmol/L (c System)

page 9-108.
• ICT probe is not connected correctly. Finger tighten the probe to the ICT Module.
page 9-108.
correctly.
page 9-116.
Controls out of range (c System)

• Controls are expired or have exceeded open vial Open new controls.
stability. For information on multiconstituent control open vial
stability, see the multiconstituent control package
insert.
• Controls were stored improperly. Open new controls.
• Controls were improperly reconstituted. If controls require reconstitution verify condition of
diluent, water, or pipettors.
For information on multiconstituent control
reconstitution, see the multiconstituent control
package insert.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• A change to the system has occurred: 1. Verify bulk solutions were loaded correctly if new
– New bulk solutions were loaded bulk solutions were recently loaded.
– Component was replaced 2. Verify components were replaced correctly if

– Instrument was calibrated components were recently replaced.
3. Recalibrate the assay.

• Wrong control lot was used. 1. Use the correct control lot for the established
control ranges.
2. Establish new control ranges, as required, if a

new lot of control was used.
• Scheduled maintenance is due. Perform all required maintenance.
• Assay parameter file has changed. 1. Update settings if they are incorrect.
2. If assay file is updated, recalibrate the assay.

• Cuvette washer is malfunctioning. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018
For more information on troubleshooting to resolve this problem, see:

• Depressed concentration - ICT results single assay (c System),
page 10-592
• Depressed concentration - photometric results single assay (c System),
page 10-593
• Elevated concentration - ICT results single assay (c System),
page 10-594
• Elevated concentration - photometric results single assay (c System),
page 10-594
• Erratic results, poor precision - photometric results (c System),
page 10-597

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Depressed concentration - ICT results entire run (c System)

• ICT module is expired or has exceeded time or Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309
sample warranty (> 2 months after installation or Change ICT Module, page 9-43.
> 15,000 samples).
• ICT module is not performing as expected. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309
• Dispense system is not performing correctly. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6016
Depressed concentration - ICT results single assay (c System)

> 15,000 samples).
Depressed concentration - K+ results single assay (c System)

• Cuvettes are dirty. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6056
Clean Cuvettes with Detergent, page 9-26.
• ICT module is contaminated See Bleach the ICT module (c System),
page 10-689.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Depressed concentration - photometric results entire run (c System)

• Dispense system is not performing correctly. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6016
See Replace the sample probe (c 4000), page 9-74
or Replace reagent probes (c 4000), page 9-78.
• Sample probe is out of alignment. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120
DAQ board hardware failure.
Depressed concentration - photometric results single assay (c System)

• Reagent is not performing as expected. 1. Open new reagent(s).
2. Recalibrate the reagent(s), if required.

• Water bath temperature is too low. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
3526 Check Water Bath Temperature,
page 9-41.

any hardware failure if temperature is out of
range.
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Elevated concentration - ICT results entire run (c System)

>15,000 samples).
Elevated concentration - ICT results single assay (c System)

>15,000 samples).
hardware failure.
Elevated concentration - photometric results single assay (c System)


• Water bath temperature is too high. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
3526 Check Water Bath Temperature,
page 9-41.

any hardware failure if temperature is out of
range.
• Sample or reagent carryover from a user-defined Perform sample and reagent carryover studies for
assay occurred. any user-defined assay and create appropriate
SmartWash definitions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Protein buildup inside reagent probe 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
6055 Detergent B Probe Wash, page 9-42.
2. Replace the probe.

See Replace reagent probes (c 4000),
page 9-78.
hardware failure.
Erratic results, poor precision - ICT results (c System)

• Scheduled maintenance is due. Perform the scheduled maintenance.
• Sample contains fibrin clots or particulate matter. 1. Examine samples for fibrin or other large
particles.
2. Remove fibrin clots with a clean applicator stick

or centrifuge samples.
• Sample was not collected and/or prepared 1. Follow the specimen collection and handling
correctly. instructions in the reagent manufacturer's
assay-specific documentation (such as a
3. Source another sample if not resolved.

• ICT module o-rings are missing or not seated Reseat or replace the o-rings.
page 9-108.
• ICT module is contaminated See Bleach the ICT module (c System),
page 10-689.
correctly.
page 9-116.
>15,000 samples).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• ICT probe is not connected correctly. Finger tighten the ICT probe to the ICT module.
page 9-108.
loose. See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 4000),
page 9-108.
• Sample or reagent probe is partially obstructed. 1. Perform the appropriate as-needed
See 6053 Probe Water Wash, page 9-41, 6054
Probe Acid Wash, page 9-42, and/or 6055
Detergent B Probe Wash, page 9-42.
2. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023

page 9-78.
• ICT Reference Solution is not performing as Replace the ICT reference solution bottle. See
expected. Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c
System), page 5-24.
• ICT sample diluent is not performing as expected. 1. Open new cartridge of ICT sample diluent.
2. Recalibrate the ICT assays.

– ICT aspiration tubing hardware failure.
– ICT aspiration pump

– Cuvette washer
– DAQ board
– AC/DC driver board

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Erratic results, poor precision - photometric results (c System)

• Scheduled maintenance is due. Perform the scheduled maintenance.
particles.

• Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the Remove all bubbles or foam from the sample with a
sample. clean disposable pipette or applicator stick.
correctly. instructions in the reagent manufacturer's
assay-specific documentation (such as a

See Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and
seal tips 1 and 2 (c 4000), page 9-138.
• Probe tubing connections are loose or leaking. Tighten the tubing connections or replace the
tubing.
• Reagent probe tubing is discolored or contains Replace the reagent probe tubing.
precipitate. See Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 4000),
page 9-85.
the syringe body.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Sample or reagent probe is partially obstructed. 1. Perform the appropriate as-needed
See 6053 Probe Water Wash, page 9-41, 6054
Probe Acid Wash, page 9-42, and/or 6055
Detergent B Probe Wash, page 9-42.
2. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023

• Protein buildup inside reagent probe 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
6055 Detergent B Probe Wash, page 9-42.
2. Replace the probe.

See Replace reagent probes (c 4000),
page 9-78.
• Probe wash pump poppet valve has failed. Replace the pump poppet valve set.
page 9-145.
• Debris is in the water bath incubator. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2134
• Debris accumulating on the reaction carousel Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6064
around the cuvettes. Clean Reaction Carousel, page 9-43.
• Bubbles are in the water bath incubator due to the Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within
pressure of the incoming water. specifications. See c System processing module
water and liquid waste specifications and
• Bubbles are in the water bath incubator due to a Contact your Area Customer Support.
high gas content.
page 9-78.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


leaks.
poppet valve.
4000), page 9-145.

Customer Support.
page 9-103.
• Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the Remove all bubbles and foam from the surface of
reagent. the reagent using a clean applicator stick.

• Cuvettes are dirty. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6310
• Cuvette segment screws are loose. Tighten the cuvette segment screws with a
screwdriver.
• Cuvette is damaged. Replace the cuvette.
See Replace a cuvette (c 4000), page 9-96.
– Mixer malfunction hardware failure.
– Cuvette Washer malfunction

– Optics
– DAQ board
– AC/DC driver board

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
FLEX Result flag

Sample concentration is high. Evaluate the result before reporting.
The sample can be diluted and rerun. For the
dilution protocol, see the reagent manufacturer's
PSHH Result flag

The ICT sample run immediately before this sample Rerun the sample to verify there was no effect from
had a concentration outside the dynamic or linear the previous sample.
range or outside the defined extreme range.
Sample results observed problems (i System)

Sample results observed problems for the i System include:
• Calibration curves stable for less than 30 days - control drift
(i System), page 10-601
• Controls out of range (i System), page 10-601
• Depressed concentration - entire run, direct assay, with decreased
RLUs (i System), page 10-603
• Depressed concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with increased
• Depressed concentration - single point, direct assay, with decreased
• Depressed concentration - single point, indirect assay, with increased
• Elevated concentration - entire run, direct assay, with increased RLUs
• Elevated concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with decreased
• Elevated concentration - single point, direct assay, with increased

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Elevated concentration - single point, indirect assay, with decreased

• Erratic assay results (i System), page 10-623
Calibration curves stable for less than 30 days - control drift (i System)

Control values for some assays are drifting out of To minimize the frequency of calibration adopt one
the QC range. Under a combination of the following of the following options:
operating conditions microparticles may adhere to
the sides of the reagent bottle:
• A microparticle bottle with low testing frequency • Remove, on a daily basis, the assay specific
is used. microparticle bottle from the processing module
Or and hand swirl to resuspend the adhered
microparticles. Reposition the bottle.
• Reagents are stored onboard.
NOTE: You must be careful when moving and
Or
swirling the bottle so microparticles do not come
• The instrument is in continuous run mode. in contact with the septum.
• Remove the assay specific reagent pack from the
processing module at the completion of testing.
• Module contaminated • For i 1000SR:
– Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
2190 Internal Decontamination, page 9-58.
Controls out of range (i System)

• Controls are expired or have exceeded open vial Open new controls.
stability. For information on multiconstituent control open vial
stability, see the multiconstituent control package
insert.
• Controls were stored improperly. Open new controls
• Controls were improperly reconstituted. If controls require reconstitution verify condition of
diluent, water, or pipettors.
For information on multiconstituent control
reconstitution, see the multiconstituent control
package insert.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• A change to the system has occurred: 1. Verify bulk solutions were loaded correctly if new
– New bulk solutions were loaded bulk solutions were recently loaded.
– Component was replaced 2. Verify components were replaced correctly if

– Instrument was calibrated components were recently replaced.
3. Recalibrate the assay.

• Wrong control lot was used. 1. Use the correct control lot for the established
control ranges.
2. Establish new control ranges, as required, if a

new lot of control was used.
• Scheduled maintenance is due. Perform all required maintenance.
For more information on troubleshooting to resolve this problem, see:

• Depressed concentration - entire run, direct assay, with decreased
• Depressed concentration - single point, direct assay, with decreased
• Depressed concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with increased
• Depressed concentration - single point, indirect assay, with increased
• Elevated concentration - entire run, direct assay, with increased RLUs
• Elevated concentration - single point, direct assay, with increased
• Elevated concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with decreased
• Elevated concentration - single point, indirect assay, with decreased
• Erratic assay results (i System), page 10-623

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Depressed concentration - entire run, direct assay, with decreased RLUs

(i System)

Perform the appropriate procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
– Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution
and update inventory (i 1000SR), page 5-46

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62
is on the left.

• Trigger solution was used instead of 1. Measure the pH of the prepared wash buffer. If it
Concentrated Wash Buffer. is not within the 7.0 to 7.6 range, go to Step 2.
2. Remove the buffer reservoir from the system.
3. Rinse buffer reservoir with deionized water.
4. Rinse the float with deionized water and then dry.
5. Replace buffer reservoir, and then load prepared

wash buffer.

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Wash zone manifold is leaking. 1. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around
wash manifold valves and/or fittings.
2. Contact your Area Customer Support if crystals

or liquid are observed.
• Pipettor or wash zone manifold tubing Tighten the pipettor and/or wash zone manifold
connections are loose. tubing connections.
• Buffer level sensor assembly is cracked or Perform the appropriate replacement procedure:
leaking. • For i 1000SR:
page 9-171
• Bubbles are in wash buffer tubing. Perform the following as-needed maintenance
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
• Wash zone probes are not properly seated in the Reseat the wash zone probes. Refer to the
wash zone motor assembly. appropriate replacement procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• Wash zone probes are bent or damaged. Perform the appropriate replacement procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• Wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is 1. Perform the following precision diagnostic
inadequate. procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
– 2075 Wash Zone Check, page 10-680
2. Contact your Area Customer Support if

insufficient volume is dispensed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Probe is obstructed. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
2137 Flush Fluids, page 9-61 for i 1000SR and
observe that pipettors dispense liquid and no
leaks or bubbles are observed in tubing.
2. Replace the appropriate probe as required.

Perform the appropriate replacement procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
– Replace pipettor probe (i 1000SR),
page 9-150
Vortexer hardware failure.
Depressed concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with increased RLUs

(i System)

• Trigger Solution was used instead of 1. Measure the pH of the prepared wash buffer. If it

wash buffer.

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
• Wash zone manifold is leaking. 1. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around
2. Contact your Area Customer Support if crystals

or liquid are observed.
• Tubing connections are loose. Tighten the tubing connections.
• Tubing is kinked. Contact your Area Customer Support if tubing
needs to be replaced.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

page 9-171
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR
page 9-157
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• Wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is 1. Perform the following precision diagnostic
• For i 1000SR:
2. Contact your Area Customer Support if

insufficient volume is dispensed.
Depressed concentration - single point, direct assay, with decreased RLUs

(i System)

• Reagent was stored incorrectly. Use a reagent kit that was stored under the correct
conditions. See the ARCHITECT assay-specific
package insert.
• Bubbles or foam are on surface of reagent. Remove all foam and bubbles from the surface of
the reagent using a clean applicator stick.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Reagent was not properly mixed before loading. Mix the reagent thoroughly before placing septums
on the reagent bottle.
NOTE: If brown microparticle build-up is

observed on the septum, discard reagent.
• Reagent is contaminated. Load a new reagent kit.
• For i 1000SR:

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62
is on the left.


wash buffer.

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Pre-trigger or trigger sensor is cracked. Perform the appropriate replacement procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
– Replace the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor
(i 1000SR), page 9-169
• Bubbles are in tubing. Perform the following as-needed maintenance
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62
• Pre-trigger or trigger dispense is inadequate. Perform the following precision diagnostic
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
– 2072 Pre-Trigger Check, page 10-679
– 2073 Trigger Check, page 10-679
Contact your Area Customer Support if insufficient
volume is dispensed.
• Wash zone manifold is leaking. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around
Contact your Area Customer Support if crystals or
liquid are observed.
page 9-171
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• Wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is Perform the following precision diagnostic
• For i 1000SR:
• Probe is dirty or partially clogged. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure
2. Replace the appropriate probe. Perform the

appropriate replacement procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-150
• Probe is damaged. Replace the appropriate probe as required. Perform
the appropriate replacement procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
• Probe is not positioned correctly. Perform the following as-needed maintenance
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
• Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the Remove all bubbles or foam from the sample using
sample. a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick.
• Pipettor probes are not straight. 1. Perform pipettor diagnostic procedure 1152
Probe Straightness/Align Test, page 10-670 for
i 1000SR.
2. Replace the probe if the probe is not straight.

• For i 1000SR:
page 9-150

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Syringe assembly or valve is leaking. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid around all
syringes and/or valve.
• Pipettor aspiration or dispense is insufficient. Perform the following precision diagnostic
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
– 2070 Pipettor Check, page 10-679
• Wash zone manifold is not properly seated on Contact your Area Customer Support.
process path.
– CMIA Optics reader hardware failure.
– Vortexer
Depressed concentration - single point, indirect assay, with increased RLUs

(i System)

• Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the Remove all bubbles or foam from the sample using
sample. a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick.
• Sample cup or tube was not properly placed in Reseat the sample cup or tube.
the sample carrier or LAS carousel.
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
process path.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• For i 1000SR:

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62
is on the left.


wash buffer.

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
(i 1000SR), page 9-169

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Bubbles are in pre-trigger or trigger tubing. Perform the following as-needed maintenance
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-171
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• For i 1000SR:
Elevated concentration - entire run, direct assay, with increased RLUs (i System)

• Trigger Solution was used instead of 1. Measure the pH of the prepared wash buffer. If it

wash buffer.

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
• Wash buffer dispense is inadequate. Tighten the pipettor and wash zone manifold tubing
connections.
page 9-171

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Elevated concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs

(i System)

• For i 1000SR:

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62
is on the left.


wash buffer.

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Pipettor or wash zone manifold tubing Tighten the pipettor and/or wash zone manifold
connections are loose. tubing connections.
page 9-171
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
wash zone motor assembly. appropriate procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• Wash zone probes are bent or damaged. Perform the appropriate procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• For i 1000SR:
• Probe is obstructed. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure

• For i 1000SR:
page 9-150

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Elevated concentration - single point, direct assay, with increased RLUs (i System)

package insert.

• Septums were not installed on the reagent 1. Discard the open reagent kit.
bottles.
2. Load new reagents.
3. Ensure septums are properly installed.

• For i 1000SR:

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

is on the left.


wash buffer.

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
(i 1000SR), page 9-169
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-171
• Wash zone probes are not properly seated in Reseat the wash zone probes. Refer to the
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• For i 1000SR:

• For i 1000SR:
page 9-150

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• For i 1000SR:
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
process path.
Elevated concentration - single point, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs

(i System)

package insert.
• Reagent was not properly mixed before loading. Mix the reagents thoroughly before placing septums


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• For i 1000SR:

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62
is on the left.

2137 Flush Fluids, page 9-61 for the i 1000SR.

wash buffer.

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
• Pre-trigger or trigger sensors are cracked. Perform the appropriate replacement procedure:
• For i 1000SR:
(i 1000SR), page 9-169

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62
• Pre-Trigger or trigger dispense is inadequate. Perform the following precision diagnostic
procedures:
• For i 1000SR
page 9-171
• Wash zone probes are not properly seated in Reseat the wash zone probes. Refer to the
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• For i 1000SR:
Contact your Area Customer if insufficient volume is
dispensed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


• For i 1000SR:
page 9-150
• For i 1000SR:
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
• Syringe assembly or valve is leaking. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around
the R1 and R2 syringe assembly or valve.
process path.
– CMIA reader hardware failure.
– Vortexer
Erratic assay results (i System)

package insert for reagent kit storage conditions.
• Bubbles or foam are on surface of reagent. Remove all bubbles and foam from the surface of

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


• Septums were not installed on the reagent 1. Discard the open reagent kit.
bottles.
2. Load a new reagent.
3. Ensure septums are properly installed.

• For i 1000SR:

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62
is on the left.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


wash buffer.

procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
• For i 1000SR:
(i 1000SR), page 9-169
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-62
procedures:
• For i 1000SR

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

page 9-171
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• For i 1000SR:
page 9-157
• For i 1000SR:
correctly. instructions in the ARCHITECT assay-specific
package insert.

particles.

• Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the Remove all bubbles or foam from the sample with a
sample. clean disposable pipette or applicator stick.
• Probe tip is bent or damaged. Replace the appropriate probe as required. Perform
• For i 1000SR:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Pipettor probes are not straight. 1. Perform pipettor diagnostics procedure or 1152
Probe Straightness/Align Test, page 10-670 for
i 1000SR.
2. Replace the probe if the probe is not straight.

• For i 1000SR:
page 9-150
procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
• Water quality is poor. Ensure the water quality is purified water.
• Syringe assemblies or valves are leaking. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid around all
syringes or valves.
• Wash buffer dispense of pipettors is inadequate. Perform precision diagnostic procedure 2070
Pipettor Check, page 10-679 (i 1000SR).
Sample handler observed problems

Observed problems for the sample handlers include:
• Power to the processing module(s) and sample handler is interrupted,
page 10-628
• Sample handler will not go to Running status, page 10-628
• Sample is not automatically re-aspirated after adding or rerunning a
test (RSH), page 10-628
• Sample tubes in a carrier are scanned, but are not processed,
page 10-629

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Power to the processing module(s) and sample handler is interrupted
This problem may be observed for any sample handler on an

ARCHITECT System.

• Main power source to the processing module(s) For systems with an RSH (robotic sample handler):
and sample handler is interrupted. 1. Perform one of the following procedures:
• For i 1000SR:
– Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier
c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 10-696

and resolve.
3. Perform Power on the processing module and/or

Sample handler will not go to Running status
This problem may be observed for any sample handler on an

ARCHITECT System.

Run was selected for the sample handler, but a 1. Review logs, page 10-14, for any error codes
hardware failure was not corrected from the last that occurred at the same time as this message.
run.

error code.
Sample is not automatically re-aspirated after adding or rerunning a test (RSH)
This problem may be observed for the RSH (robotic sample handler)
on an ARCHITECT System.

• The sample was removed from the RSH. Reinsert the carrier or tray.
• The RSH status changed to Ready or Stopped 1. Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and
before adding or rerunning a test. SSH), page 5-177.
2. Reinsert the carrier or tray.

• The RSH is not configured to automatically Change the automatic repositioning setting. See
reposition samples for retest. Change automatic repositioning for retest setting
(RSH), page 2-18.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Different patient demographic information was 1. Delete and reorder the test, if the patient
entered when creating the order for additional demographics were entered in error.
tests.
NOTE: Do not enter patient demographic
information when adding tests to a sample. See
Add a test to a patient order, page 5-125.
2. Assign another sample ID to the order, if the

sample is from a different patient.
• A different Sample manual dilution factor was 1. Delete and reorder the test using the same
entered when creating the order for additional manual dilution.
tests.
2. Assign another sample ID to the new dilution, if a
different manual dilution is required.
• The option to not automatically re-aspirate from Reinsert the carrier or tray.
the sample was selected when the confirmation
message displayed after adding new tests for the
sample.
• The same sample ID was found in one or more Specify the carrier/carousel ID and position for each
carrier/carousel positions and the aliquot loaded when using multiple aliquots of the
carrier/carousel position was not specified for the same sample ID.
test order.
• The host computer sent an action code with the Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard
order that indicated to the SCC to create a new Interface RS-232 Manual.
order instead of adding to an existing order.
Sample tubes in a carrier are scanned, but are not processed
This problem may be observed for the robotic or standard sample

handler on an ARCHITECT System.

• No bar code label on the sample tube. Place a bar code label on the sample tube.
• Tube is not correctly positioned in the carrier. Place the tube in the carrier so the bar code is
damaged.
bar code label. bar code label symbology.
SCC observed problems

Observed problems for the SCC (system control center) include:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• "&" character appears as an underline when defining a single analyte

control name, page 10-632
• All reagent kits display after performing a search by selecting the R1 or
R2 checkbox on the Find options window, page 10-632
• All reagent kits display after performing a search for only kits with the
Extra Bottle status, page 10-632
• Bay number and sample carousel position display on the Details for
results windows, page 10-632
• Bi-directional host communication is not working, page 10-633
• c System processing module status on Snapshot screen does not go to
Stopped, page 10-633
• c System processing module status on Snapshot screen does not go to
Ready, page 10-634
• c System processing module status on Snapshot screen is Running, but
tests are not processing, page 10-634
• C/P information is not printed on the Rerun list report, page 10-634
• Dr Watson error, on tapisrv.exe (file name in middle of message
window), page 10-635
• Error code column on the Exception status screen does not sort as
expected, page 10-635
• Gray screen displays during an archive, page 10-635
• icwserver.exe error Message "Address space is full", page 10-635
• Intel Active Monitor System Alert! message is displayed, page 10-636
• Internet Explorer Script Error displayed when using the online
documentation, page 10-637
• Keyboard fails to respond, page 10-637
• Maintenance history report prints with 00:00:00 in the Time column,
page 10-638
• Maintenance log contains blank spaces for Daily Maintenance items,
page 10-638
• Many error messages are displayed, page 10-638
• Non-system disk or disk error message displays or NTLDR is missing
message displays, page 10-638
• Order Status report does not print all the codes, page 10-639
• Progress indicator is blank and the software is not responding,
page 10-639

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• QC data does not appear on the Levey-Jennings graph and does not
print on the QC reports, page 10-640
• Reagent and calibration curve stability expires when daylight savings
time arrives, page 10-640
• Result column does not sort as expected, page 10-640
• Results did not display or print, page 10-641
• Results or exceptions are deleted or released and the result or exception
is not removed from the screen, page 10-641
• Sample ID is truncated, page 10-641
• SCC does not boot to the Snapshot screen, page 10-642
• Shutdown screen displays during concurrent maintenance,
page 10-642
• Shutdown screen displays unexpectedly, page 10-642
• Slow screen response, page 10-642
• Software Architecture Exception 38 displays, page 10-643
• Software Architecture Exception 50, 99 (ARCH 99), or 100 displays,
page 10-643
• Tests remain in Pending Transmission status, page 10-643
• Tests remain in Running status and the module will not go to Stopped
status, page 10-644
• Tests remain in Scheduled status, page 10-644
• The message "The location (x) has a bar coded kit. Do you still want
to assign this location?" displays when assigning a location for a
non-bar coded reagent., page 10-644
• Touchscreen monitor display is blank, page 10-645
• Touchscreen monitor fails to respond, page 10-645
• Unable to delete results, page 10-645
• Unable to find specific patient or QC results, page 10-646
• Undefined fields for assay parameters display and print differently,
page 10-646
• UPS (uninterruptible power supply) is activated, page 10-646

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
"&" character appears as an underline when defining a single analyte control

name
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT System.

Software error. Do not use the "&" character when defining control
names.
All reagent kits display after performing a search by selecting the R1 or R2

checkbox on the Find options window

The R1 or R2 checkbox was selected on the Enter a position in the Position data entry box
Reagent status Find options window without before selecting the R1 or R2 checkboxes on the
entering a position in the Position data entry box. Reagent status Find options window.
The R1 and R2 checkboxes are only functional if a
position is entered, and they determine if the
system searches in one or both carousels when
searching for a specified position.
All reagent kits display after performing a search for only kits with the Extra Bottle
status

The option to find reagent kits with the Extra Bottle Select one other Reagent status checkbox along
status using Reagent status Find options window is with Extra Bottle, and the system correctly finds
not working correctly. reagent kits with either status.
Bay number and sample carousel position display on the Details for results
windows
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT c 8000 or c 16000

System.

The original test order was run on the RSH and the No corrective action is required.
retest order was run on the sample carousel.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Bi-directional host communication is not working

Failure occurred with either the host or the SCC 1. Refer to the probable cause and corrective
(system control center). action for the error code observed.
2. Re-enable bi-directional host communications.

c System processing module status on Snapshot screen does not go to Stopped
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT ci System or

c System.

• Ethernet cable is not connected or has a poor 1. Verify the Ethernet cable is connected at the
connection. module and at the hub. See Reseat cables to the
SCC, page 10-698.
NOTE: If this occurs on an integrated system,

wait until all i 2000SR tests are complete before
cycling the power.
• Ethernet hub is turned off. 1. Verify the Ethernet hub is turned on.

cycling the power.

cycling the power.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
c System processing module status on Snapshot screen does not go to Ready

With no tests processing, it may take up to one No corrective action is required.
minute after pause is selected for the c System
processing module to change from Running to
Ready status.
c System processing module status on Snapshot screen is Running, but tests are
not processing
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT ci System or

c System.

Software error. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.

cycling the power.
C/P information is not printed on the Rerun list report

The C/P information does not print on the Rerun list View the C/P information on the Rerun status,
report if you are using the robotic sample handler Order status, or Sample status screen.
with the automatically reposition samples for retest
option selected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Dr Watson error, on tapisrv.exe (file name in middle of message window)

• Modem is not connected. 1. Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-698.
3. Contact your Area Customer Support, if the

modem will not be used, for instructions to
change pcANYWHERE startup from automatic
to manual.
• Modem is not turned on. 1. Turn on the modem.
Error code column on the Exception status screen does not sort as expected

The Error code column sorts by an internal software Sort using a different column or use the Find
error code number rather than by the visible error options window to search for a specific error code.
code number. See Find a specific exception, page 5-258.
Gray screen displays during an archive

Screen timeout is activated while an archive is in No corrective action is required.
process. Allow the archive to complete.
icwserver.exe error Message "Address space is full"

Software error. 1. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
2. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Intel Active Monitor System Alert! message is displayed
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT System when using

the SCC Intel Active Monitor software to monitor voltage, fan speeds,
and temperature status of the SCC.

Voltage (x) has gone outside of its
recommended range
x = specific voltage
• Vents in the SCC have become blocked, 1. Remove any obstacles preventing adequate
restricting airflow to the fans. airflow around the SCC.
2. Remove dust or foreign objects from vents.

• Hardware failure 1. Document the message displayed.
2. Select Close or select View Details and then

Exit. You may continue to operate the system.
3. Create a system software backup, page 2-175.
4. Perform utilities diagnostic procedure 6004

Copy backup software, page 10-684.
5. If this message reoccurs, contact your Area

Customer Support to resolve any hardware
failure.
Fan (x) has stopped or slowed
x = fan 1 or fan 2
• An obstacle is preventing the SCC fan from Remove any objects obstructing the fan that prevent
spinning. it from spinning.



Your system has exceeded its recommended
maximum temperature
• The SCC fan(s) have slowed or stopped. Remove any objects obstructing the fan that prevent
it from spinning.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• The SCC is in a location that is not allowing Ensure there is proper airflow in and around your
optimal airflow. SCC. Ensure your SCC is not located near walls or
in corners. If vents in the SCC become blocked,
airflow to the fans may be restricted.
• Room temperature is out of specifications. Modify room temperature to be within
specifications. See Environmental specifications
and requirements, page 4-20.



Internet Explorer Script Error displayed when using the online documentation

The Print button on the Help window was selected, Select No on the Internet Explorer Script Error
and then the Close button was selected before the message.
Print window displayed. Allow the print dialog window to display and
complete the steps for printing prior to closing the
Help window.
Keyboard fails to respond

• Keyboard cable is loose or disconnected. 1. Reseat or reconnect the keyboard cable. See
Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-698.
3. Verify keyboard operation.

• Keyboard has failed. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Maintenance history report prints with 00:00:00 in the Time column

A Maintenance History report was printed for a No corrective action is required.
procedure that had not been performed. When the procedure has been performed, print the
report. The time the procedure was performed
appears on the report.
Maintenance log contains blank spaces for Daily Maintenance items

A maintenance procedure was initiated on one day Avoid performing a maintenance procedure if it will
and completed the following day. not complete on the same day.
Many error messages are displayed

Some error conditions can generate a large number 1. Press and hold the Enter key on the keyboard
of error messages. until all messages close.
2. Review recent messages in the Message history

log. See Review logs, page 10-14.
NOTE: You must review messages to ensure you
do not overlook a different error condition.
Non-system disk or disk error message displays or NTLDR is missing message

displays

A floppy disk is in the floppy drive during the Remove the floppy disk and follow the instructions
powering on of the SCC. on the screen.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Order Status report does not print all the codes

More than three codes are associated with the Review the appropriate window for a listing of all
order. The Order Status report prints up to three codes:
codes for each order. • Details for order (Order status/Rerun status)
window - single order view, page 5-151.
• Details for order (Order status) window - batch
(bar coded) view, page 5-152.
• Details for order (Order status) window - batch
(non-bar coded) view, page 5-153.
Progress indicator is blank and the software is not responding

• Results/exceptions were released or deleted and No corrective action is required.
the software did not remove them from the A progress indicator displays until the process is
screen. complete. It may take up to 15 minutes. After the
process is complete, results or exceptions no longer
display on the screen.
• Previously released or deleted results/exceptions No corrective action is required.
were selected for release or deletion. A progress indicator displays until the process is
complete. It may take up to 15 minutes. After the
process is complete results or exceptions no longer
display on the screen.
For additional information see Observed problem:
Results or exceptions are deleted or released and
the result or exception is not removed from the
screen, page 10-641.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
QC data does not appear on the Levey-Jennings graph and does not print on the
QC reports

• Assay result units were changed. No corrective action is required.
Or To capture all QC data print the QC report(s) prior
• Module serial number was changed. to:
• Editing or configuring assay result units
• Editing or configuring the module serial number
• The expected mean and SD data is not • To capture QC data in a QC report define the
configured. expected mean and SD.
Reagent and calibration curve stability expires when daylight savings time arrives

Reagent and calibration stabilities are not tracked 1. Load a new reagent kit.
with daylight savings time transitions. See Load bar coded reagents (c 4000),
page 5-74 or Load non-bar coded reagents (c
4000), page 5-79.
2. Create a calibration order, page 6-12 for the

assay.
Result column does not sort as expected

The result column sorts by interpretation. If a result No corrective action is required.
does not have an interpretation, the data in the Do not sort by results if the results do not contain
result column is not consistently sorted. interpretations.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Results did not display or print

• When creating an order or adding a test(s) to an Create the order or add the test(s) by selecting both
order, a calculated assay was selected without the constituent assays and the calculated assay.
selecting the constituent assays.
• Constituent assay results that were processing Create a new patient order or add the test(s) by
for a calculated assay order met the criteria for a selecting all tests desired for display or print.
retest rule configured to run another assay.
Results or exceptions are deleted or released and the result or exception is not
removed from the screen

The time needed to update the information on the No corrective action is required.
screen is longer than the time needed to delete or Select the Refresh button to update the information
release the results from the database. on the screen.
Sample ID is truncated
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT System when using

codabar bar code labels that do not contain checksums.
IMPORTANT: When using codabar bar code labels with checksums

disabled, a SID (sample identification) may be truncated. For example,
an actual SID of 123456 is shortened to 1234.
When using variable SID lengths and a SID is truncated, a result(s)
may be attached to an incorrect SID for which an order exists. To
eliminate this:
• Enable checksums
Or
• Use fixed lengths SIDs

Bar code reader misinterprets bar code label. • Place tube in carrier so the bar code fills the width
of the window.
• Use labels that meet guidelines. See Sample bar
code label guidelines, page 4-28.
• Enable checksums. See Change the sample bar
code settings for codabar, page 2-20.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
SCC does not boot to the Snapshot screen

provide information specifying errors that were
received.
• The database is corrupt. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please
Shutdown screen displays during concurrent maintenance


Shutdown screen displays unexpectedly

2. Perform utilities diagnostic procedure 6009 Log

Utilities, page 10-684 to collect system logs.

Slow screen response

Database is close to capacity. Archive results or delete stored results.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Software Architecture Exception 38 displays

• Ethernet cable has a poor connection. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure (i 1000SR).
• Network hub is turned off. 1. Turn on the power switch to the network hub.

• Network hub power cord is disconnected. 1. Connect the power cord to the network hub and

hardware failure.
Software Architecture Exception 50, 99 (ARCH 99), or 100 displays

Software error 1. Obtain a screen image of the software error, see
Print a screen image, page 5-307.

Tests remain in Pending Transmission status

Software error 1. Reconfigure the host communication to off. See
Cancel result transmission, page 5-230.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Tests remain in Running status and the module will not go to Stopped status

Communication is lost between the SCC and the Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
processing module.
Tests remain in Scheduled status

NOTE: Wait until all tests processing are

complete before cycling the power.
• LLS (liquid level sense) error occurred with an Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply
onboard solution. centers and update inventory.
After the sample bar code was read and before all Change the processing module status to Stopped
tests were aspirated, one of the following occurred: to change the test status to Exception.
• Processing module was paused 1. Stop the processing module by performing one
• LAS became inoperable of the following:
– Press the stop key on the processing module
keypad.
– Select the processing module graphic on the
Snapshot screen, and then select F6 - Stop.
2. Delete the exceptions, see Delete an exception,

page 5-261.
3. Start up the processing module, seeStart up the

page 5-12.
The message "The location (x) has a bar coded kit. Do you still want to assign this
location?" displays when assigning a location for a non-bar coded reagent.

• A bar coded reagent is in the position entered for 1. Locate an empty position.
the non-bar coded reagent.
2. Enter this position for the non-bar coded reagent
• A bar coded reagent was removed but the 1. Select OK to allow the system to assign this
reagent carousel was not rescanned to update location for the non-bar coded reagent.
the availability of the position entered.
2. Verify the position is empty.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Touchscreen monitor display is blank

• Power was turned off to the monitor. Power on the monitor.
• Monitor power cable is unplugged. Plug in the monitor power cable.
• Monitor data cable is unplugged. Plug in the monitor data cable. See Reseat cables
to the SCC, page 10-698.
• Monitor has failed. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
Monitor port failure on CPU hardware failure.
Touchscreen monitor fails to respond

• Touch-screen connector is loose or 1. Reseat or reconnect the touch-screen connector.
disconnected. See Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-698.
3. Verify the touch-screen operation.

• Monitor has failed. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
Monitor not calibrated hardware failure.
Unable to delete results

• Results are being transmitted to the host. Result No corrective action is required.
status is "Pending Transmission". Wait until transmission is complete, and then delete
the results.
• Transmission was requested when the system is 1. Reconfigure the host communication to off. A
configured for host communication but a host message displays.
computer is not connected. Result status is
"Pending Transmission". 2. Select OK to clear results waiting to be sent to
the host, and then delete results.
• The host mode is set to collate and not all of the No corrective action is required. Release or delete
results have been released. Result status is the associated SIDs, and then delete the result.
"Pending Collation".

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Unable to find specific patient or QC results

The find was performed using time only and the Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a
time range spanned two days. specific time interval.
Undefined fields for assay parameters display and print differently

Undefined fields for assay parameters may display No corrective action is required.
as zero or are blank.
UPS (uninterruptible power supply) is activated

Main power source to the processing module(s) and For system with an RSH (robotic sample handler):
sample handler is interrupted. 1. Stop the sample handler by performing one of
the following:
– Press the stop key on the sample handler
keypad.
– Select the sample handler graphic on the
Snapshot screen, and then select F6 - Stop.
NOTE: You have a maximum of ten minutes to
stop the RSH before losing backup power from
the UPS.
2. Perform one of the following procedures:

• For i 1000SR:
– Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier
c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 10-696

and resolve.
4. Perform Power on the processing module and/or


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Peripheral devices observed problems

Observed problems for ARCHITECT System peripheral devices are
grouped by:
• Printer observed problems, page 10-647
• External waste pump observed problems, page 10-649
Printer observed problems
Observed printer problems include:

• Incomplete comment printed on the Maintenance History Report,
page 10-647
• Print window displays behind the Help window, page 10-648
• Print is cut off at the bottom of the page when printing from the online
documentation, page 10-648
• Print on reports is too light to read, page 10-648
• Report will not print, page 10-648
• Sample report does not print, page 10-649
• Windows printer error displays, page 10-649
Incomplete comment printed on the Maintenance History

Report

The comment was more than 255 characters in Limit the comment length to 255 characters or view
length. the comment on the Details for maintenance log
The Details for maintenance log window allows you window.
to enter 275 characters, but the Maintenance
History Report only prints 255 characters.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Print window displays behind the Help window

The option Print the selected heading and all No corrective action is required. To print:
subtopics was selected on the Print Topics window. 1. Minimize the Help window.
2. Select Print on the Print Window.
3. Select the ARCHITECT System Operations

Manual icon to restore the Help window.
Print is cut off at the bottom of the page when printing from the
online documentation

HTML functionality does not support page breaks. No corrective action is required.
Compare the information on the printout to the
information on the screen.
Print on reports is too light to read

• Printer cartridge is empty. Replace printer cartridge.
• Printer head is damaged. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any
hardware failure.
Report will not print

• Report was initiated while a print screen request No corrective action is required.
was printing. Wait until the print screen has printed to avoid
having problems with printed reports.
• Printer is out of paper. Add paper to the printer.
• Paper tray is open. Close the paper tray.
• Printer is disconnected or not powered on. Verify the printer is plugged in, on, and ready.
• Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• Failed print job is in the printer queue. Select the Printer status icon on the Snapshot
screen, and then delete the failed print job in the
printer queue.
• Printer cartridge is damaged or heat stressed. Replace the printer cartridge.
Sample report does not print

The system is configured to print reports No corrective action is required.
automatically and all tests associated with the Access the Sample status screen to verify the
sample are not complete or not released. status of all tests ordered for the sample. Wait until
all tests are complete or released and the report will
print.
Windows printer error displays

Error occurred with the printer. 1. Select Cancel on the Printers Folder message to
respond to the printer error.
NOTE: Do not select the Retry button.
2. Resolve the printer problem.
3. Reprint the report.
External waste pump observed problems
Observed external waste pump problems include:

• External waste pump audible alarm is on, page 10-649
External waste pump audible alarm is on

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Clog, kink, or other restriction in the waste outlet 1. Check the outlet tubing for clogs, kinks, or
tubing. restrictions.
2. Remove any restriction, if possible.

Drain is blocked. 1. Disconnect the waste outlet tubing and raise the
tubing to see if liquid will flow down the drain. If
liquid does not flow the drain is blocked.
2. Clear the blockage from the drain.

Obstruction inside the pump. 1. Power off the external waste pump.
2. Wait 30 seconds and then power on the external

waste pump.
– External waste pump hardware failure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 10 System diagnostics
System diagnostics
Diagnostic procedures allow you to check the status of assemblies and
mechanisms in reaction to certain hardware malfunctions on your
ARCHITECT System.
The ARCHITECT System software provides a user-friendly interface for
performing diagnostic activities. The Diagnostic screen displays the
available diagnostic procedures. Once you initiate a procedure,
step-by-step instructions walk you through its completion.
System diagnostics topics include:
Provides a description of the software screens and windows
associated with diagnostic activities and step-by-step
instructions for performing related procedures.
• Diagnostic categories and procedure descriptions, page 10-658
Provides a description of all diagnostic procedures.
Diagnostics screen
From the Diagnostics screen you can initiate a diagnostic procedure.
You can also access windows to view information for a procedure prior
to performing it and print the Procedure report.
The procedures display by module and by category (tab). Each tab on
the screen displays the procedures available for the selected module.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
System diagnostics Section 10
Figure 10.5: Diagnostics screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Diagnostics screen field descriptions,

To display this screen, see Access the Diagnostics screen, page 10-652.
• View diagnostic procedure information, page 10-653
• Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-654
Access the Diagnostics screen
Perform this procedure to display the Diagnostics screen.

Prerequisite NA
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To access the Diagnostics screen:

Select System from the menu bar, and then select Diagnostics.
The Diagnostics screen displays with the Reaction Mechanisms tab
selected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Procedures - Diagnostics screen
Procedures you can perform from the Diagnostics screen and its
View diagnostic procedure information
Perform this procedure to display the Version details for procedure

(Diagnostics) window. From this window you can view information
for a diagnostic procedure prior to performing it. This information
includes the version number, required module status, and required
user access level.
Module status Any
Supplies NA
To view diagnostic procedure information:

1. Select the desired Module option on the Diagnostics screen.
The diagnostic procedures for the selected module display on the
Reaction Mechanisms tab.
2. Select a different tab to display the diagnostic procedures for that

category. (optional)
The diagnostic procedures for the selected category display.
3. Select the desired procedure from the DIAGNOSTICS

PROCEDURES box, and then select F6 - Version.
The Version details for procedure window displays.
• Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window, page 10-657

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Perform a diagnostic procedure
Perform this procedure to:

• Install assays
• Install procedures
• Verify component replacement procedures
• Diagnose hardware malfunctions
NOTE: Before you perform a specific procedure, be sure you are

familiar with the purpose of the procedure and are aware of the
required materials and module statuses.
CAUTION: Moving Parts. Diagnostic procedures may
expose operators to moving parts that can potentially
cause personal injury. Untrained operators should not
perform these procedures.

Module status Procedure dependent
User access level Procedure dependent
Supplies Procedure dependent
To perform a diagnostic procedure:

1. Select the desired Module option on the Diagnostics screen.
The diagnostic procedures for the selected module display on the
Reaction Mechanisms tab.
2. Select a different tab to display the diagnostic procedures for that

category. (optional)
3. Select the desired procedure from the DIAGNOSTICS

PROCEDURES list, and then select F5 - Perform.

The Diagnostic perform window displays. A description of the
procedure displays in the INSTRUCTIONS box.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
5. Select Proceed, and then follow the instructions in the

INSTRUCTIONS box.
You are prompted to enter information if the procedure requires
additional data.
6. Enter the required information in the User input data entry box,
and then select Continue.
7. Select Activity to view the progress of the procedure. (optional)

The activity of the module displays in the Activity list. To return
to the Result list, select Results.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
8. Select Print to print the Procedure report. (optional)
Windows - Diagnostic screen
Windows you can access from the Diagnostic screen include:

• Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window, page 10-657
Diagnostic perform window
From the Diagnostic perform window you can initiate a procedure.
NOTE: The display of the Diagnostic perform window is dependent on

the selected module, category, and procedure.
To view an associated graphic, see:
• i 1000SR processing module associated maintenance graphics,
page 9-63

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 10.6: Diagnostic perform window
For descriptions of these fields, see Diagnostic perform window field

Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window
From the Version details for procedure window you can view
information for diagnostic procedures such as:
• Procedure category and name
• Current version
• Required module status
• Required user access level

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Figure 10.7: Version details for procedure window
For descriptions of these fields, see Version details for procedure

(diagnostics) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-130.
Diagnostic categories and procedure descriptions

Diagnostic procedures are grouped by module type, and then by
category. Each category is represented by a tab on the Diagnostics
screen.
Diagnostic categories/procedures by module type include:
• Processing module - the type of processing module determines
the categories and related procedures that are available.
– c System processing module diagnostic categories, page 10-659
– i 1000SR System processing module diagnostic categories,
page 10-668
• Sample handler - the type of sample handler determines the
categories and related procedures that are available.
– RSH diagnostic categories (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100),
page 10-680

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
c System processing module diagnostic categories
Diagnostic procedures for the c System processing module are grouped

by category (tab) on the Diagnostics screen. Procedures are available in
the following categories:
• Reaction mechanism diagnostics description (c System processing
module), page 10-659
• Pipettor diagnostics description (c System processing module),
page 10-660
• Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (c System processing module),
page 10-661
• Bar code reader diagnostics description (c System processing module),
page 10-662
• Module diagnostics description (c System processing module),
page 10-663
• Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (c System processing modules),
page 10-663
• Fuse/motor diagnostics description (c System processing module),
page 10-664
• Optic/temperature diagnostics description (c System processing
• Carousel diagnostics description (c System processing module),
page 10-666
• Precision diagnostics description (c System processing module),
page 10-667
Reaction mechanism diagnostics description (c System

processing module)
One reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure, 3126 Mixer Vibration

Test, is available. You may need to perform this procedure when
replacing a reaction mechanism component or diagnosing error
messages or observed problems associated with reaction mechanisms.
To perform this procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure,
page 10-654.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3126 Mixer Vibration Test
Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to test the

vibration function of Mixer 1 and 2 at low and high frequencies.

Pipettor diagnostics description (c System processing module)
You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when

replacing pipettor components or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems associated with pipettors:
• 1151 Probe Alignment Test, page 10-660
• 1161 Probe Move, page 10-661
• 5405 Crash Sensor Test, page 10-661
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-654.
1151 Probe Alignment Test
Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to move the probe to

individual locations, allowing visual observation of the probe position
in the wash cup and carousel positions.

10 minutes • Saline Stopped or Ready
• Sample cups
• Reagent cartridges
vary depending on
sample handler
configuration.
• Sample carrier
(RSH)
• Sample tube (LAS)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
1161 Probe Move
Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to move the sample

pipettor to the sample carousel and the reagent pipettors to the
onboard solution areas in preparation for component replacement.

Time variable None Stopped or Ready
5405 Crash Sensor Test


Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to test the pipettor probe

crash sensor for all pipettors.

Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (c System processing

module)

replacing liquid level sense or wash components or diagnosing error
messages or observed problems associated with liquid level sense or
wash components:
• 3610 Sample Handler LLS Test, page 10-662
• 3625 Pipettors LLS Test, page 10-662

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3610 Sample Handler LLS Test
Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to test the ability of

the sample probe to detect liquid in the sample carrier.

3 minutes • Tap water or saline Ready
• Sample cups
vary depending on
sample configuration.
• Sample carrier
(RSH)
• SH bar code tool
(LAS)
3625 Pipettors LLS Test

the sample probe and reagent probes (R1 and R2) to detect liquid in
the wash cups and carousel positions.

5 minutes • DI water Stopped or Ready
• 20 mL sample
• 2-90 mL reagent
cartridges
Bar code reader diagnostics description (c System processing

module)
CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid

eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam.

replacing a bar code reader or diagnosing error messages or observed
problems associated with bar code readers:
• 3206 Reagent Bar Code Test, page 10-663

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3206 Reagent Bar Code Test
Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to test the ability
of the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers to read reagent cartridge bar
code labels at any position on the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.

5 minutes Bar coded reagent Stopped or Ready
cartridges
Module diagnostics description (c System processing module)

diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with
processing module components or the keypad:
• 3720 Keypad Test, page 10-663
• 4080 Module Initialization, page 10-663
3720 Keypad Test
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test the processing

module keypad function.
NOTE: You cannot test the run, carousel advance, and stop keys on
the keypad during this procedure.

4080 Module Initialization
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to perform a processing

module initialization.

Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (c System processing

modules)
One solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure, 3400 Interlock Sensors

Test, is available. You may need to perform this procedure when

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
replacing solenoids, or diagnosing error messages or observed

problems associated with solenoids and sensors.
page 10-654.
3400 Interlock Sensors Test


Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test all the

interlock sensors: R1 reagent supply center cover, R2 reagent supply
center cover, sample carousel cover, and RSH (robotic sample handler)
covers.

Fuse/motor diagnostics description (c System processing

module)
Perform the 5142 Wash Station Up/Down, page 10-664 diagnostic

procedure when replacing the cuvette dry tip or diagnosing error
messages or observed problems associated with the wash station
motor.
5142 Wash Station Up/Down
Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to check the up and

down function of the cuvette wash assembly and to visually check the
cuvette wash nozzles and dry tip for alignment.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Optic/temperature diagnostics description (c System

processing module)

replacing optics or temperature components or diagnosing error
messages or observed problems associated with optics or temperature:
• 1000 Absorbance Reads, page 10-665
• 1008 Optics Total Test, page 10-665
• 1010 Cuvette Integrity Test, page 10-666
1000 Absorbance Reads


Perform this optics/temperature diagnostic procedure to take

wavelength reads for a user-defined sample. You can select the number
of read cycles, delay in seconds between read cycles, and the primary
and/or secondary wavelengths.

5 minutes • DI water Stopped or Ready
• Sample
• Calibrated pipette
1008 Optics Total Test
Perform this optics/temperature diagnostic procedure to test the

variability in the optics reads throughout a 30 or 33 read test. You can
perform one or all of the following optics tests:
• Quick test
• Dark current test

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Shutter test

10-30 minutes depending • DI water Stopped or Ready
on option chosen • Calibrated pipette
1010 Cuvette Integrity Test
Perform this optics/temperature diagnostic procedure to verify

cuvettes meet acceptance criteria for sample testing.

Carousel diagnostics description (c System processing

module)

replacing sample, reagent, or reaction carousel components, or
diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with
carousels:
• 3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move, page 10-666
• 3011 Reagent / Sample Carousel Home, page 10-666
3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move
Perform this carousels diagnostic procedure to test the reaction

carousel movement, home the carousel, and check for step loss.

3011 Reagent / Sample Carousel Home
Perform this carousels diagnostic procedure to test R1 and R2 reagent

supply centers and sample carousel movement, home R1 and R2
reagent supply centers and sample carousel, and check for step loss.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Precision diagnostics description (c System processing

module)

replacing fluidics components or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems associated with precision and accuracy:
• 2043 Sample Pipettor Check, page 10-667
• 2044 R1 Pipettor Check, page 10-668
• 2045 R2 Pipettor Check, page 10-668
2043 Sample Pipettor Check
Perform this precision diagnostic procedure to visually check the

dispensing accuracy of the sample pipettor using a calibrated manual
pipette.

• Sample cups
capable of
dispensing 20 μL
vary depending on
sample handler
configuration.
• Sample carrier
(RSH)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2044 R1 Pipettor Check

dispensing accuracy of the R1 pipettor using a calibrated manual
pipette.

• 10 sample cups
• 1 large (90 mL)
reagent cartridge
• 10 small (55 mL) or
large (90 mL)
reagent cartridges,
as appropriate
capable of
dispensing 100 μL
2045 R2 Pipettor Check

dispensing accuracy of the R2 pipettor using a calibrated manual
pipette.

• 10 sample cups
• 1 large (90 mL)
reagent cartridge
• 10 small (55 mL) or
large (90 mL)
reagent cartridges,
as appropriate
capable of
dispensing 100 μL
i 1000SR System processing module diagnostic categories
Diagnostic procedures for an i 1000SR processing module are grouped

by category (tab) on the Diagnostics screen.
Procedures are available for the following categories:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Reaction mechanism diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing

• Pipettor diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing module),
page 10-670
• Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing module),
page 10-671
• Module diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing module),
page 10-673
• Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing module),
page 10-675
• Fuse/motor diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing module),
page 10-676
• Optic/temperature diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing
• Carousel diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing module),
page 10-678
• Precision diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing module),
page 10-678
Reaction mechanism diagnostics description (i 1000SR

processing module)

replacing components associated with RVs (reaction vessels) or
diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with RV
mechanisms:
• 3120 Vortexer Test, page 10-669
• 3155 Diverter Test, page 10-670
3120 Vortexer Test
Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to test

vortexer function.

2 minutes per vortexer None Stopped, Warming, or
Ready

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3155 Diverter Test
Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to test the

wash zone inlet, wash zone outlet, and RV unload diverter
functionality.

2 minutes None Stopped, Warming, or
Ready
Pipettor diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing module)

replacing pipettor components or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems associated with pipettors:
• 1152 Probe Straightness/Align Test, page 10-670
• 1165 Pipettor Move, page 10-671
• 5420 Crash Sensor Test, page 10-671
1152 Probe Straightness/Align Test


Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to check the pipettor

probe straightness and/or alignment.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
1165 Pipettor Move
Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to move the pipettor to

the wash cup to remove the pipettor probe or toward the rear of the
process path for accessing processing center components.

Ready
5420 Crash Sensor Test


Perform this pipettor diagnostic procedure to test the pipettor probe

crash sensor.

Ready
Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing

module)

replacing liquid level sense or wash zone components, or diagnosing
error messages or observed problems associated with liquid level sense
or the wash zone:
• 2052 WZ Aspiration Test, page 10-672
• 3630 LLS Test, page 10-672
• 3810 Pressure Monitoring Test, page 10-672
• 6410 WZ Probe Straightness, page 10-672

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
2052 WZ Aspiration Test

Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to test wash zone

aspiration. The wash zone dispenses and aspirates buffer from 14 RVs
(reaction vessels).

3630 LLS Test

the pipettor probe to detect liquid at the RV2, sample, and reagent
carousel inner, middle, and outer locations.

8 minutes • Sample cups Warming or Ready
• Sample tubes
• One - Three
Reagent Bottles
3810 Pressure Monitoring Test
Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to test the operation

of the pipettor board and pressure monitor for the pipettor.

6410 WZ Probe Straightness


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to visually check the

straightness of the wash zone probes.
NOTE: You should run diagnostic procedure 2052 WZ Aspiration Test

after completing this test.

Ready
Module diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing module)

preparing for a long-term shutdown or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems associated with the vacuum:
• 2138 Long Term Shutdown, page 10-673
• 3180 Vacuum System Test, page 10-674
• 4110 Module Initialization, page 10-674
• 4150 Functional Area Tests, page 10-674
2138 Long Term Shutdown



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to flush all pumps with

water, then air, and remove all RVs (reaction vessels) in preparation for
long term shutdown of the ARCHITECT System.

30 minutes • 4 Liter (minimum) Warming or Ready
container of
deionized water
• Empty 4 Liter
container
• Wash buffer
reservoir
tubing
• Deionized water
3180 Vacuum System Test
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test the operation of the

vacuum system, vacuum accumulator, and drain valves.

5 - 10 minutes depending None Warming or Ready
on option chosen
4110 Module Initialization
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to perform a processing

module initialization.

Ready
4150 Functional Area Tests
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test the functionality of

the following areas: RV loading, process path, reagent carousel, and
pipettor.

Variable None Stopped, Warming, or
Ready

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing

module)

replacing solenoids and sensors or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems associated with solenoids or sensors:
• 3190 Waste Sensors Test, page 10-675
• 3405 Interlock/Carousel Sensor Test, page 10-675
• 3420 Level Sensors Test, page 10-676
• 5145 Wash Cup Valves Test, page 10-676
• 5165 Valve Tests, page 10-676
3190 Waste Sensors Test

Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test the waste

pump pressure switch, the liquid waste container full sensor, and the
solid waste container present sensor.

Variable Tap water Stopped, Warming, or
Ready
3405 Interlock/Carousel Sensor Test
Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test the sensors

for the processing center cover and reagent carousel cover.

Ready

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3420 Level Sensors Test
Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test wash

buffer, pre-trigger, and trigger level sensors.

1 - 2 minutes, depending None Stopped, Warming, or
upon the option chosen Ready
5145 Wash Cup Valves Test
Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to verify the wash

cup valves are connected correctly.

Ready
5165 Valve Tests
Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test wash zone,

pre-trigger, trigger, vacuum, pipettor syringe, wash cup drain, and
liquid waste valves.

1 - 2 minutes depending on None Stopped, Warming, or
option chosen Ready
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing

module)

replacing motors or diagnosing error messages or observed problems
associated with motors:
• 5150 Motor Tests, page 10-677
• 5160 Pump Motor Tests, page 10-677
• 5720 Fuse Status, page 10-677

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
5150 Motor Tests
Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to home the pipettor,

syringe, process path, and reagent carousel motors.

Ready
5160 Pump Motor Tests
Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to home the

pre-trigger, trigger, wash buffer, and wash zone pump motors.

Ready
5720 Fuse Status
Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to display the status of

+5, +12, -12, and +24 volt fuses.

Ready
Optic/temperature diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing

module)

replacing optics or diagnosing error messages or observed problems
associated with optics:
• 1022 Optics Background, page 10-677
• 1032 Shutter Test, page 10-678
1022 Optics Background
Perform this optics/temperature diagnostic procedure to determine

the optics background reading. The system takes three readings; first

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
with no RV (reaction vessel), second with an empty RV, and third with
Pre-Trigger Solution in the RV.
NOTE: The system does not use normalization and linearity

parameters during this procedure. Raw counts must be between 3 RLU
- 500 RLU.

1032 Shutter Test
Perform this optics/temperature diagnostic procedure to verify correct

shutter operation.

Ready
Carousel diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing module)
One carousels diagnostic procedure, 3002 Reagent Carousel Test, is

available. You may need to perform this procedure when replacing the
reagent carousel or diagnosing error messages or observed problems
associated with the reagent carousel.
page 10-654.
3002 Reagent Carousel Test
Perform this carousels diagnostic procedure to test the reagent

carousel movement and check for step loss.

10 minutes Reagent carriers Stopped, Warming, or
Ready
Precision diagnostics description (i 1000SR processing module)

replacing fluidics components or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems associated with precision and accuracy:
• 2070 Pipettor Check, page 10-679
• 2072 Pre-Trigger Check, page 10-679

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• 2073 Trigger Check, page 10-679

• 2075 Wash Zone Check, page 10-680
2070 Pipettor Check

dispensing precision and accuracy of the pipettor.

10 minutes • Saline or tap water Warming or Ready
• Sample
carriers/cups
• Calibrated manual
pipettor (capable of
pipetting 50, 250, or
900 μL)
2072 Pre-Trigger Check

dispensing precision and accuracy of Pre-Trigger Solution.

pipetting 100 or
300 μL)
2073 Trigger Check


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

dispensing precision and accuracy of the Trigger Solution.

pipetting 300 or
900 μL)
2075 Wash Zone Check

dispensing precision and accuracy of the wash zone manifold.

pipetting 400 or
1200 μL)
RSH diagnostic categories (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
Diagnostic procedures for the RSH (robotic sample handler) are

grouped by category (tab) on the Diagnostics screen. Procedures are
available in the following categories:
• Bar code reader diagnostics description (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR
/ci 4100), page 10-680
• Module diagnostics description (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR /ci 4100),
page 10-681
• Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR
/ci 4100), page 10-682
• Fuse/motor diagnostics description (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR /ci 4100),
page 10-683
Bar code reader diagnostics description (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR

/ci 4100)

eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

replacing the bar code reader or diagnosing error messages or observed
problems associated with the bar code reader:
• 3230 Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-681
• 3240 Bar Code Calibration, page 10-681
3230 Bar Code Reader Test
Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to test the bar code
reader.
NOTE: Only the first 20 characters of each bar code display.

1 - 4 minutes, depending • Sample carriers Stopped, Warming, or
on the number of carriers • SH bar code tool or Ready
tested. bar coded tubes
(i 1000SR)
• Reagent kit bottles
(100 test kits only)
(i 1000SR)
3240 Bar Code Calibration
Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to calibrate

positions for bar coded sample tubes and reagent bottles.

2 minutes • Sample carrier Stopped, Warming, or
• SH bar code tool Ready
Module diagnostics description (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR /ci 4100)

replacing RSH (robotic sample handler) components or diagnosing
error messages or observed problems associated with the sample
handler:
• 3310 RSH Test, page 10-682
• 4120 RSH Initialization, page 10-682

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3310 RSH Test
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test the operation of the

RSH (robotic sample handler) and bar code reader.

5 - 10 minutes depending • Sample carriers Stopped, Warming, or
on option chosen • 5 bar coded sample Ready
tubes
(i 1000SR)
• Reagent kit bottles
(100 test kits only)
(i 1000SR)
4120 RSH Initialization
Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to perform a sample

handler initialization.

Ready
Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR

/ci 4100)
You may need to perform the following procedures when replacing

RSH (robotic sample handler) sensors or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems associated with sensors.
• 5555 RSH Sensor Tests, page 10-682
5555 RSH Sensor Tests
Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test the sensors

associated with the carrier transport, load/unload area, and reagent
access door.

5 minutes • Reagent carrier with Stopped, Warming, or
at least one reagent Ready
bottle (i 1000SR)
• Sample carrier

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR

/ci 4100)
One fuses/motors diagnostic procedure, 5550 RSH Motor Tests, is

available. You may need to perform this procedure when replacing
sample handler motors or diagnosing error messages or observed
problems associated with sample handler motors.
page 10-654.
• 5550 RSH Motor Test, page 10-683
5550 RSH Motor Test
Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to test the motors

associated with the carrier transport, reagent bottle rotator, and the
reagent access door.

Ready
SCC diagnostic categories
Diagnostic procedures for the SCC (system control center) display on

the Utilities tab on the Diagnostics screen.
installing assays and procedures or diagnosing error messages or
observed problems:
• 6004 Copy backup software, page 10-684
• 6008 Controller Configuration, page 10-684
• 6009 Log Utilities, page 10-684
• 6029 Assay Information, page 10-685
• 6114 Install/Delete Assays, page 10-685
• 6115 Install/Delete Procedures, page 10-685
• 6116 Update 6115 Procedure, page 10-685
• 6500 MAC Hardware Address, page 10-686

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6004 Copy backup software
Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to copy a system software

backup to a CD or to replace a backup on your SCC (system control
center) with one on a CD.
NOTE: Performing this procedure does not backup the system

software. To backup system information, see Create a system software
backup, page 2-175.

Time variable Blank or appendable Stopped, Warming, or
CDR/CDRW or a CD Ready
containing a backup
6008 Controller Configuration
Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to configure the processing

module and sample handler controller board after you replace the
board or upgrade your software.

Ready
6009 Log Utilities
Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to retrieve current logs,

copy the database to CD, or copy archived logs to CD.

Time variable Materials vary Stopped, Warming, or
depending on the Ready
option selected.
Required materials
may include:
• CD-R (compact disk
recordable) or
Unformatted
CD-RW (compact
disk read/write)
• One or more floppy
disks

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
6029 Assay Information
Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to print:

• A complete list of all assays installed on the ARCHITECT System
to verify the most current assay version is in use. The list
contains the assay number, assay name, and version.
• Calibrator bar code labels
• A range of numeric SID bar code labels

2 minutes Bar code labels may Any status
be required depending
on option selected.
6114 Install/Delete Assays
NOTE: Requires system administrator logon.

Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to install all or selected
assays. You also use this procedure to delete selected assays.

2 minutes ARCHITECT c System Stopped, Warming, or
CD-ROM Ready
or
ARCHITECT i System
CD-ROM
6115 Install/Delete Procedures

Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to install all or selected
maintenance and diagnostic procedures. You also use this procedure
to delete selected maintenance and diagnostic procedures.

Ready
6116 Update 6115 Procedure

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to install an updated

version of diagnostic procedure 6115 Install/Delete Procedures, when
required.

Ready
6500 MAC Hardware Address
Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to determine the MAC

(media access control) address of the secondary network interface card
installed in an SCC (system control center).

< 1 minute None Stopped, Warming, or
Ready

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Section 10 Miscellaneous corrective action procedures
Miscellaneous corrective action procedures

Corrective action procedures are:
• A series of steps recommended to resolve a probable cause(s)
associated with an error message or observed problem
• Common to more than one error code or observed problem
Miscellaneous corrective action procedures topics include:
• Processing module corrective action procedures, page 10-687
• Sample handler corrective action procedure, page 10-696
• SCC corrective action procedure, page 10-698
Processing module corrective action procedures

Procedures that are often recommended as corrective actions for
resolving error messages and/or observed problems associated with the
processing module(s) include:
• Clean the bar code reader window, page 10-687
• Enable or disable the ICT module (c System), page 10-689
• Bleach the ICT module (c System), page 10-689
• Evaluate the check valve (c System), page 10-691
• Manually unloading reagent carrier(s) from the reagent carousel
(i 1000SR), page 10-696
Clean the bar code reader window
Perform this procedure to clean the bar code reader window when
suggested by the corrective action of an error code. This procedure
includes the steps to clean the bar code reader window in the:
• RSH (robotic sample handler)
• Reagent supply center(s) (c System)
Prerequisite NA
Module status Warming or Ready
Supplies • Soft, lint-free tissue or lens paper
• Deionized water

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Miscellaneous corrective action procedures Section 10


eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam. Class
2 Laser radiation when open for all processing modules
except the c 4000 and c 16000 reagent carousels. Use of
controls or adjustments or performance of procedures
other than those specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
To clean the bar code reader window:

1. Access the bar code reader window.
For the... Perform the following...

RSH Open the processing center cover.
(c 4000/i 1000SR)
Reagent supply a. Open the reagent supply center cover.
center (c 4000)
b. Remove a segment from the outer carousel.
c. Select the reagent supply center advance button to

move the empty position to the bar code reader
window (lower left area of the reagent supply center).
2. Locate the bar code reader window and gently wipe with a
moistened lint-free tissue.
3. Dry the bar code reader(s) window with a lint-free tissue.
4. Prepare for operation.
For the... Perform the following...

RSH Close the processing center cover.
(c 4000/i 1000SR)
Reagent supply a. Select the reagent supply center advance button to
center (c 4000) move the empty position to the front of the reagent
supply center.
b. Replace the segment.
c. Replace the reagent supply center cover.
To verify the bar code reader is functioning properly, perform one of

the following bar code readers diagnostic procedures:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• 3206 Reagent Bar Code Test, page 10-663 (c System)

• 3230 Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-681 (i 1000SR)
• Reagent hardware components (c 4000), page 1-32
Enable or disable the ICT module (c System)
Perform this procedure to enable or disable the ICT module. You

disable the module to prevent the system from processing
potentiometric assays when a performance issue occurs. After you
resolve the issue you enable the module to allow the system to process
the assays.
page 2-5
Supplies NA
To enable or disable the ICT module:

1. Select Modules from the System categories list on the
The Configure modules window displays.
3. Select the desired ICT Module Installed option.
• Configure modules window (c 4000), page 2-31
Bleach the ICT module (c System)
Perform this procedure to bleach an ICT module which has not

expired and is still within the warranty period. You bleach the module
to resolve performance issues such as depressed potassium (K+) slopes
and results, erratic ICT results, and poor precision.
NOTE: During this procedure o-rings at the top and bottom of the ICT
module may become displaced when the module is being flushed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Displaced o-rings should be retrieved from the container, rinsed well

with several mL of deionized water, and dried before installing on the
module prior to installing the module on the system.
Prerequisite Access the appropriate component replacement
procedure:
• Replace the ICT module or probe (c 4000),
page 9-108
Supplies • Absorbent towel
• Deionized water
• 15 mL of ICT Reference solution
• Container, large enough to hold 250 mL fluid
• 10 mL of 0.5% sodium hypochlorite, for information
on diluting sodium hypochlorite see Decontamination
procedure requirements, page 8-14
• 5 mL, 10 mL, or 20 mL syringe (with or without Luer
Lock) and no needle attached
• Timer



To bleach the ICT module:

1. Remove the ICT module by following the instructions contained
in the appropriate component replacement procedure.
2. Fill the syringe with a minimum of 5 mL of 0.5% sodium

hypochlorite and attach it to either end of the ICT module.
Using the container to catch any extra fluid, slowly flush most of
the solution through the module. Place a finger on the opposite
end of the module and fill the module with the remaining fluid.
The module must be completely filled with solution.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
3. Allow the ICT module to sit horizontally for 15 - 30 minutes. Do

not allow the sodium hypochlorite solution to remain in the
module for more than 30 minutes.
4. Rinse the syringe at least 3 times with deionized water to

completely remove the sodium hypochlorite solution.
5. Fill the syringe with ICT reference solution. Attach the syringe to
the ICT module and slowly flush most of the solution through
the module over the container. Depending on the syringe size
you may need to repeat this in order to flush most of the 15 mL
of reference solution. Place a finger on the opposite end of the
module and fill the module with the remaining fluid. The
module must be completely filled with solution.
6. Allow the ICT module to sit horizontally for 5 - 10 minutes.
7. Moisten an absorbent towel with deionized water and clean the

outside of the ICT module and side connector pins to remove
any residual sodium hypochlorite or ICT reference solution. Use
a dry absorbent towel to then dry the module. The module and
the connector pins must be dry before installation.
8. Follow the installation instructions contained in the appropriate

component replacement procedure.
9. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6063 Flush ICT

Module, page 9-43 three times to flush the module with ICT
reference solution.
10. Calibrate the ICT assays and run quality control samples to
verify the calibration.
This procedure can be repeated once to further improve performance.
If continued performance issues are observed perform additional
troubleshooting steps and/or replace the ICT module.
• Depressed concentration - K+ results single assay (c System),
page 10-592
Evaluate the check valve (c System)
Evaluating the check valve consists of the following procedures:

• Removal
– Locate the check valve to be evaluated (c 4000), page 10-692

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
– Remove the check valve tubing, page 10-693

• Replacement
– Evaluate the check valve, page 10-694
– Reinstall the check valve tubing, page 10-694
• Verification
– Verification occurs during preparation for operation. No
Prerequisite The processing module must be in the Offline, Stopped,
or Ready status.
Time required 15 minutes
Tools required • Container large enough to accommodate the
syringes with check valves installed
• Purified water
• Absorbent towel
Replacement parts NA


Removal
Locate the check valve to be evaluated (c 4000)

Steps Graphic / Reference
Locate the check valve to be evaluated:
– ICT reference pump
– Wash solution pump
– ICT aspiration pump
NOTE: See ARCHITECT c 4000 supply and pump

center components, page 9-115.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


the syringe holder.
Remove the check valve tubing

1. Place absorbent towels under the pump area to
absorb any liquid.
2. Disconnect the top [1] and side [2] tubing from the
check valve [3].

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Replacement
Evaluate the check valve

1. Place the check valve end [1] into a container of
purified water [2].
2. Pull and push the plunger [3] several times to cycle

water through the valve.
3. Place a finger over the side port [4] while you pull the
plunger. If you can draw water into the syringe, the
check valve must be replaced.
4. Place a finger over the top port [5] while you push the
plunger. If you can push water out of the syringe, the
check valve must be replaced.
5. Reinstall the check valve tubing, page 10-694, if the

check valve does not need to be replaced.
Reinstall the check valve tubing

1. Reattach the top [1] and side [2] tubing to the check
valve [3].

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

1. Reinstall the 1 mL syringe [1].
2. Verify that the syringe plunger flange [2] is below the

U-shaped holder and the bottom of the syringe barrel
is in the groove at the bottom of the syringe holder
[3].
3. Reinstall the clear plunger shield [4] and tighten the

black knobs [5] finger-tight.

wash solution pump.
2. Check for leaks while performing the flush. If drips or

leaks are observed, see Processing module
observed problems (c System), page 10-573.
Verification


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Manually unloading reagent carrier(s) from the reagent carousel (i 1000SR)
Prerequisite NA
Module status Stopped
Supplies NA


To unload a reagent carrier:

1. Open the processing center cover to access the reagent carousel
door.
2. Turn the reagent carousel cover knob counterclockwise 180

degrees to open the carousel cover.
3. Push in and pull up on the reagent carrier to remove the carrier.
Sample handler corrective action procedure

A procedure that may be recommended as a corrective action for
resolving error messages and observed problems associated with the
RSH (robotic sample handler) is:
• Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and aspiration
area (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), page 10-696
Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and aspiration area (RSH -
c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
Perform this procedure to remove sample carrier(s) from the RSH

(robotic sample handler) carrier transport and aspiration area after
power is interrupted to the processing module(s).
Prerequisite NA
Module status Offline
Supplies NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

To remove sample carrier(s) from the RSH (robotic sample handler)

carrier transport and aspiration area:
1. Open the processing module cover and observe the carrier
transport and aspiration area for the presence of a sample
carrier(s).
NOTE: If there are no carrier(s) on the carrier transport or

aspiration area, no further action is required.
2. Remove the carrier(s) carefully by lifting them up and out of

their location.
IMPORTANT: When removing or transporting sample carriers,

avoid splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes.
3. Close the processing module cover.

To resume processing:
• If a UPS (uninterruptible power supply) was powering the system
and the RSH was stopped prior to the loss of power, no further
action is required.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• If power was lost prior to stopping the RSH the samples in the
sample carrier on the carrier transport and the surrounding area
may have been contaminated by sample splashing as the RSH
carrier transport motor loses power. Discard all sample cups
and/or tubes in this carrier.
Perform as-needed maintenance procedures 6400 RSH Cleaning,
page 9-70 (i 1000SR) to decontaminate the carrier transport and
6038 External Decontamination, page 9-72 to clean the sample
carrier.
SCC corrective action procedure

A procedure that is often recommended as a corrective action for
resolving error messages and observed problems associated with the
SCC (system control center) is Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-698.
Reseat cables to the SCC
Perform this procedure to reseat the cables to the SCC (system control
center) when communication timeout errors occur and/or when
suggested by the corrective action of an error code.
Prerequisite Power off the SCC, page 5-4
Module status NA
Supplies NA
To reseat cables to the SCC:

1. Locate the desired cable(s) on the Network hub and CPU back
panel, page 1-8.
2. Disconnect, and then reconnect the cable(s).
NOTE: Do not proceed to the next step until the system control
center displays the Snapshot screen.
4. Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7.
• Network hub and CPU back panel, page 1-8

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Printed report examples
Appendix A Printed report examples
Introduction
The following printed reports are generated by the ARCHITECT

System:
• Absorbance Data Report (c System), page Appendix A-3
A-20
page Appendix A-26
• Cal Curve Summary Report, page Appendix A-38
• Exception Details Report, page Appendix A-40
• Exception Status Report, page Appendix A-43
• Maintenance History Report, page Appendix A-48
• Message History Log Report, page Appendix A-50
• Order Status Report, page Appendix A-54
• QC Result Details Report, page Appendix A-65
• QC Results List Report, page Appendix A-68
• Reagent History Report, page Appendix A-72
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Appendix A-1

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A

• Rerun List Report, page Appendix A-80
• Result Details Report, page Appendix A-82
• Sample Status Report, page Appendix A-91
• Temporary Message Log Report, page Appendix A-93
• TSB Installation Log Report, page Appendix A-95
Appendix A-2 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Absorbance Data Report (c System)
Absorbance Data Report (c System)

Use this report to troubleshoot assay results.
Legend:
1. Report title:
Shows the name of the report.
2. Operator ID:
Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the report was printed.
3. System serial number:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Absorbance Data Report (c System) Appendix A
Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System.

4. Assay:
Shows the name of the assay.
5. Sample ID:
Shows the bar code number or ID assigned to the sample.
6. Assay number:
Shows the number defined for the assay.
7. Name:
Shows the name of the patient or control.
8. Module:
Shows the module number on which the assay was run.
9. Serial no.:
Shows the serial number of the module on which the assay was run.
10. C / P:
Shows the carrier or carousel (CRSL) ID and position for the sample.
11. Result:
Shows the value and (where applicable) interpretation of the result.
12. Units:
Shows the units for the result.
13. Flags:
Shows the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result
flags, page 5-187.
14. Code:
Shows the code(s) to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of
15. Cuvette:
Shows the number of the cuvette used to process the result.
16. Primary wavelength and Secondary wavelength:
Shows the primary and secondary wavelengths used to measure the assay
concentration.
17. Point (column):
Shows the read points 1 through 33.
18. Primary (column):
Shows the absorbance readings for each read point at the primary
wavelength.
19. Secondary (column):
Shows the absorbance readings for each read point at the secondary
wavelength.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Absorbance Data Report (c System)
20. Primary - Secondary (column):

Shows the difference in absorbance of the primary wavelength minus the
secondary wavelength.
21. F---F:
Indicates the photometric points included in the flex read time window for the
assay.
22. M-----M:
Indicates the photometric points included in the main read time window for
the assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay Parameter Report (c System) Appendix A
Assay Parameter Report (c System)

Use this report as a hardcopy record of your configured assay
parameters.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Assay Parameter Report (c System)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:
4. Name:
5. Assay type:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Shows the assay processing protocol type defined for the assay.
Options are:
– Photometric
– Potentiometric
– Sample Interference Index
6. Assay number:
NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an assay that affects result

measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterisk displays next to
the assay number to indicate the assay was modified.
7. Assay availability:
Shows the availability of the assay for ordering.
Options are:
– Enabled
– Disabled
– Patient Disabled
8. Assay version:
Shows the version number of the assay.
9. Cal version:
Shows the calibration version of the assay.
10. Reaction mode:
Shows the mathematical model used to determine the concentration of the
assay in the sample.
Options are:
End up
End down
Rate up
Rate down
11. Main read time:
Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric points for the main
read time.
12. Primary wavelength:
Shows the primary wavelength used to measure the assay concentration.
13. Flex read time:
Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric read points for the
flex read time.
14. Secondary wavelength:
Shows the secondary wavelength used to measure the assay concentration.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
15. Color correction read time:

Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric points for the color
correction read time.
16. Last read required:
Shows the last read (1-33) required for test calculation so the result can be
calculated sooner than the entire ten minute protocol.
17. Blank read time:
Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric points for the blank
read time.
18. Absorbance range:
Shows the upper and lower limit of absorbance within which all reads for a
sample should measure. If any read is outside the absorbance limits during
main or flex time reads, the data is not used to calculate the result.
19. Sample blank type:
Shows the type of sample blank configured for the assay.
Options are:
– None
– Self
20. Blank assay:
This feature is not available at this time.
21. Reagent:
Shows the reagent used for the assay.
22. R1 reagent volume:
Shows the R1 reagent volume the module dispenses into the cuvette.
23. R2 reagent volume:
Shows the R2 reagent volume the module dispenses into the cuvette.
24. R1 water volume:
Shows the volume of water the module dispenses along with the R1 reagent
when concentrated reagents are used.
25. R2 water volume:
Shows the volume of water the module dispenses along with the R2 reagent
when concentrated reagents are used.
26. R1 dispense mode:
Shows the reagent pipetting profile the system uses to aspirate and
dispense R1 reagents.
27. R2 dispense mode:
dispense R2 reagents.
28. Diluent name:
Shows the sample diluent the module uses for the assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
29. Diluent dispense mode:

dispense sample diluent reagents.
30. Dilution name (column):
Shows the name(s) of the dilutions defined for the assay.
31. Sample volume (column):
Shows the volume of the sample to be aspirated from the sample cup or
tube for the dilution.
32. Diluted sample volume (column):
Shows the volume of diluted sample to be aspirated from the cuvette for the
dilution.
33. Diluent volume (column):
Shows the volume of the diluent to be aspirated from the cuvette for the
dilution.
34. Water volume (column):
Shows the volume of water to be dispensed along with the diluent when
concentrated diluents are used for the dilution.
35. Dilution factor (column):
Shows the sample dilutions the system calculated based on the volumes
you specified.
36. Reaction check type:
Shows the reaction check type defined for the assay.
Options are:
– End Subtraction
– End Ratio
– Rate Subtraction
– Rate Ratio
– None
37. Read time A range:
Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric points for read time
A.
38. Read time B range:
Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric points for read time
B.
39. Calculation limit:
Shows the lower and upper limits for the acceptable range for the calculated
results of the comparison of the two read times.
40. Minimum absorbance:
Shows the minimum acceptable absorbance variation (0 - 3.2) allowed for
absorbance readings within the main read time.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
41. Rate linearity %:

Shows the allowable percent variation in the change in absorbance
measured during the first three reads as compared to the last three reads in
the main and flex read time.
42. Maximum absorbance variation:
Shows the maximum acceptable absorbance variation (0 - 3.2) allowed for
absorbance readings within the main read time.
43. Calibration method:
Shows the calibration method defined for the assay.
Options are:
– Abs
– Factor
– Linear
– Logit 4
– Spline
– Use Cal Factor / Blank
44. Use cal factor from:
Shows the assay to be referenced for calibration information to be used for
result calculation.
45. Factor:
Shows the factor used to calculate the concentration of a result for the
assay.
46. Full interval hours:
Shows the amount of time, in hours, that the full calibration curve is valid.
47. Adjustment interval hours:
Shows the amount of time, in hours, that the adjustment calibration curve is
valid.
48. Adjustment type:
Shows the type of adjustment calibration defined for the assay.
Options are:
– None
– Blank
– 1 Point
– 2 Point
49. Adjustment level:
Shows the calibrator level(s) used for the 1-point or 2-point adjustment
calibration.
50. Expected cal factor:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Shows the expected target value for the cal factor assay when the system
calculates the calibration curve.
51. Default ordering type:
Shows the default calibration ordering type for the assay if the Calibration
type: Adjust type is defined.
52. Expected cal factor tolerance %:
Shows the percent tolerance from the expected target value for the Cal
factor that is allowed when the system calculates the calibration curve.
53. Blank absorbance range:
Shows the upper and lower limits for the acceptable blank absorbance range
if a data check is desired.
54. Span:
Shows the calibrator level used to perform the calibration data check.
55. Span absorbance range:
Shows the upper and lower limits for the acceptable absorbance range if a
span check is desired.
56. Maximum curve fit:
Shows the maximum limit of the sum of the absolute values of the difference
between the approximated absorbance of the calculated calibration curve
and the measured absorbance.
57. Calibrator set name:
Shows the name defined for the calibrator set.
58. Replicates:
Shows the number of calibrator replicates the system uses when calculating
the calibration curve.
59. Cal level (column):
Shows the name configured for each calibrator level for the assay.
60. Concentration (column):
Shows the concentration value configured for each calibrator level for the
assay.
61. Sample volume (column):
Shows the sample volume configured for each calibrator level for the assay.
62. Diluted sample volume (column):
Shows the diluted sample volume configured for each calibrator level for the
assay.
63. Diluent volume (column):
Shows the diluent volume configured for each calibrator level for the assay.
64. Water volume (column):
Shows the water volume configured for each calibrator level for the assay.
65. Smart wash:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Shows the SmartWash parameters configured for the assay.

66. Linearity range:
Shows the linearity range defined for the assay.
67. Flag range specifications:
Shows the age and gender-specific normal and extreme flags specified for
the assay.
68. Interpretation Parameters:
Shows the interpretation parameters defined for the assay.
69. Result concentration units:
Shows the result concentration units configured for the assay.
70. Correlation factor:
Shows the correlation factor configured if the result required calculation to
match another system.
71. Result decimal places:
Shows the number of digits specified to the right of the decimal for the result
concentration units.
72. Intercept:
Shows the intercept configured if the result requires a calculation to match
another system.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Assay Parameter Report (i System)
Assay Parameter Report (i System)

Use this report as a hardcopy record of your configured assay
parameters.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay Parameter Report (i System) Appendix A
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:
4. Name:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
5. Assay type:
Shows the assay processing protocol type defined for the assay.
Options are:
– Two step 18 - 4
– One step 25
– Two step 4 - 4
– One step 11
6. Assay number:
7. Pretreatment option:
Shows the pretreatment option the system uses in the assay protocol.
8. Assay version:
Shows the version number of the assay.
9. Assay availability:
Shows the availability of the assay for ordering.
Options are:
– Enabled
– Disabled
– Patient Disabled
10. Cal version:
Shows the calibration version of the assay.
11. Assay status:
Shows the assay status defined for the assay.
Options are:
– Primary
– Correlation
12. Type:
Shows the assay type defined for the assay.
Options are:
– Full
– Adjust
– Index
Shows the calibration method defined for the assay.
Options are:
– Point to Point
– Linear Regression

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay Parameter Report (i System) Appendix A
– 4PLC X
– 4PLC Y
– Cutoff
– Reference
NOTE: If the calibration method is Reference an additional field not

shown in the example above will print.
– Use Calibration From: (Shows the assay referenced for calibration
information used for result calculation.)
14. Adjustment method:
Shows the adjustment method defined for the assay.
Options are:
– Linear Transformation
– Parameter adjustment
– Ratio techniques (Ratio A, Ratio AB, Adjustment)
– Curve shape
15. Replicates:
Shows the number of calibrator replicates the system uses when calculating
the calibration curve.
16. Standard concentrations (column):
Shows the concentrations for the standard calibrators (A - F) defined for the
assay.
17. Adjustors (column):
Shows the concentrations for the adjustor calibrators defined for the assay.
18. Manual dilution:
Shows the availability of using the manual dilution option for the assay.
19. Default dilution:
Shows the default dilution configured for the assay.
21. Dilution ranges:
Show the dilution names and ranges specified for the assay.
22. Flag range specifications:
Shows the age and gender-specific normal and extreme flags specified for
the assay.
23. Interpretation parameters:
Shows the interpretation parameters defined for the assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
25. Result decimal places:

Shows the number of digits specified to the right of the decimal for the result
concentration units.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System) Appendix A
Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric

(c System)
Use this report as a hardcopy record of your assay calibration details.
You can configure this report to print automatically. See Configure
report settings, page 2-7.
Legend:
1. Report title:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System)
2. Operator ID:
4. Assay name:
5. Assay number:
Shows the number assigned to the assay.
6. Reagent lot:
Shows the lot number of the reagent.
7. Expiration date:
Shows the expiration date of the reagent kit used for the calibration.
8. Serial no.:
Shows the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the calibration curve.
9. Cal status:
Shows the status of the calibration.
10. Module/Serial no.:
Shows the module and serial number on which the assay was calibrated.
11. Cal date:
Shows the date the calibration completed.
12. Cal time:
Shows the time the calibration completed.
13. Cal type:
Shows the type of calibration performed.
14. Operator ID:
Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed.
15. Calibrator lot:
Shows the lot number of the calibrator used to calibrate the assay.
16. Curve expiration date / time:
Shows the expiration date and time for the full and/or adjust calibration
curve.
17. Lot expiration:
Shows the expiration date of the calibrator lot number used to calibrate the
assay.
18. Cal ID (column):
Shows the name for each calibrator.
19. Concentration / Units (column):
Shows the concentration and units for the result.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System) Appendix A
20. Cal mV (column):

Shows the median millivolt value for each calibrator level.
21. Slope (column):
Shows the percent response of the ICT (integrated chip technology) module
for the low and high calibrators.
22. Rep. 1 mV (column):
Shows the millivolt value for replicate 1.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System)
Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System)

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System) Appendix A

4. Assay name:
5. Assay number:
6. Reagent lot:
7. Expiration date:
8. Serial no.:
9. Cal status:
11. Cal date:
12. Cal time:
Shows the mathematical procedure used to analyze the data.
14. Operator ID:
15. Cal type:
16. Curve expiration date / time:
curve.
17. Calibrator lot:
18. Lot expiration:
Shows the expiration date of the calibrator lot.
Shows the concentration value for each level of calibrator as defined in the
assay parameters.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System)
21. Cal absorbance (column):

Shows the median absorbance value for the calibrator levels.
22. Cal factor (column):
Shows the calibration factor for the calibrator levels.
23. Rep. 1 absorbance (column):
Shows the absorbance value for replicate 1.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System) Appendix A
Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank

(c System)
Legend:
1. Report title:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System)
2. Operator ID:
4. Assay name:
5. Assay number:
6. Reagent lot:
7. Expiration date:
8. Serial no.:
9. Cal status:
11. Cal date:
12. Cal time:
Shows the mathematical procedure used to analyze the data.
14. Operator ID:
15. Cal type:
16. Curve expiration date/time:
curve.
17. Calibrator lot:
18. Lot expiration:
Shows the expiration date of the calibrator lot.
19. Reference assay:
Shows the name of the assay from which the calibration data is referenced
when the calibration method is Use Cal factor / Blank.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System) Appendix A

assay parameters.
22. Cal absorbance (column):
Shows the median absorbance value for the calibrator levels.
23. Cal factor (column):
Shows the calibration factor for the calibrator levels.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System)
Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System)

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System) Appendix A
4. Assay name:
5. Assay number:
6. Reagent lot:
7. Expiration date:
8. Serial no.:
9. Cal status:
11. Cal date:
12. Cal time:
13. Cal type:
14. Operator ID:
15. Calibrator lot:
16. Expiration date:
assay.
17. Cal 1 ratio and Cal 2 ratio:
Shows the ratios for the calibration adjustment.
19. Mean RLU (column):
Shows the mean RLU (relative light unit) for the calibrator replicates.
20. Rep. 1 RLU (column):

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System)
Shows the RLU value for replicate 1.

assay parameters.
23. Ref. Cal RLU (column):
Shows the reference (master cal) data read from the 2-D bar code label.
24. Fit curve RLU:
Shows the fit curve RLU data for each concentration.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System) Appendix A
Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System)

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System)

4. Assay name:
5. Assay number:
6. Reagent lot:
7. Expiration date:
8. Serial no.:
9. Cal status:
11. Cal date:
Shows the date the calibration was completed.
12. Cal time:
Shows the time the calibration was completed.
13. Cal type:
14. Operator ID:
15. Calibrator lot:
assay.
assay parameters.
19. Fit curve RLU (column):
Shows the fit curve RLU (relative light unit) data for each concentration.
Shows the mean RLU data for the calibrator replicates.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System) Appendix A

Shows the RLU values for replicate 1.
Shows the RLU values for replicate 2.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System)
Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System)

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System) Appendix A

4. Assay name:
5. Assay number:
6. Reagent lot:
7. Expiration date:
8. Serial no.:
9. Cal status:
11. Cal date:
12. Cal time:
13. Cal type:
14. Operator ID:
15. Calibrator lot:
assay.
Shows the mean RLU (relative light unit) for the calibrator replicates.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System)


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Cal Curve Summary Report Appendix A
Cal Curve Summary Report

Use this report to quickly identify reagent lots with an expired
calibration or no calibration.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Cal Curve Summary Report

4. Module (column):
Shows the module on which the reagent lot was calibrated.
5. Assay (column):
6. Reagent lot (column):
7. Cal status (column):
Shows the calibration status of the reagent lot.
8. Cal date / time (column):
Shows the date and time the reagent lot was calibrated.
9. Cal expiration date / time (column):
Shows the date and time the calibration curve expires for the reagent lot.
(c System)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Exception Details Report Appendix A
Exception Details Report

Use this report to troubleshoot your system.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Exception Details Report

4. Name:
Shows the name of the patient, control, or calibrator.
5. Sample ID:
6. Assay:
7. Patient ID:
Shows the ID assigned to the patient.
8. Assay number:
9. Draw date / time:
Shows the date and time the sample was drawn.
Shows the module and serial number on which the exception was
generated. This field is blank when the test cannot be assigned to or
processed on a module.
11. Sample comment:
Shows the comment entered for the test.
12. Cal. lot:
Shows the calibrator lot number for the calibration used to calculate the
result.
13. Cal. date / time:
Shows the calibration date and time for the reagent lot used to calculate the
result.
14. Reagent master lot:
Shows the reagent master lot for the calibration used to calculate the result.
15. Serial no.:
16. Date completed:
Shows the date the exception completed.
17. Location:
Shows the location associated with the patient.
18. Time completed:
Shows the time the exception completed.
19. Doctor:
Shows the name of the patient's doctor.
20. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Exception Details Report Appendix A
21. C / P (column):
Shows the sample location for one of the following:
– Carrier ID and position (P) (RSH/SSH)
– CRSL - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the sample carousel
(c System)
– LAS - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the LAS track
– LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000)
22. Dilution (column):
Shows the dilution used for the test.
23. Code (column):
24. Abs. (column):
Shows the absorbance value for the test.
25. Cuvette (column):
Shows the number of the cuvette used to process the exception.
26. Error code / Description (column):
Shows the error code number and description.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Exception Status Report
Exception Status Report

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Exception Status Report Appendix A

4. C / P (column):
(c System)
5. SID (column):
6. Name (column):
Shows the name of the patient, control, or calibrator for the order.
7. Assay (column):
8. Module (column):
Shows the module that generated the test exception. This field is blank
when the test cannot be assigned to or processed on a module.
9. Error code (column):
Shows the numeric error code for the exception and the message text that
describes the error that occurred.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Levey - Jennings Report
Levey - Jennings Report

Use this report as a hardcopy record of QC data.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Levey - Jennings Report Appendix A

4. Assay Name:
5. Module:
Shows the module number on which the controls were run.
6. Control Name:
Shows the name of the control.
7. Module Serial Number:
Shows the serial number of the module on which the controls were run.
8. Control Level:
Shows the level of the control.
9. Date Range:
Shows the date range selected for the Levey - Jennings report.
10. Control Lot Number:
Shows the lot number of the control.
11. Control Expiration Date:
Shows the expiration date of the control.
12. Calculation Type:
Shows the calculation type, which includes cumulative data for both the
module and the system.
13. Date / Time (column):
Shows the date and time for each control result.
14. Results (column):
Shows the results for each control. Results with an asterisk are excluded
from the calculations.
15. Reagent Lot Number:
Shows the lot number for the reagent kit used to run the control.
16. Flags:
Shows the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of quality
17. ±2SD:
Shows ±2 SD (standard deviation) for the control data.
18. ±1SD:
Shows ±1 SD (standard deviation) for the control data.
19. Mean:
Shows the mean for the control data.
20. EXPECTED:
Shows the expected mean and standard deviation configured.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Levey - Jennings Report
21. MANUFACTURER:
Shows the manufacturer's mean and standard deviation configured.
22. MODULE CUMULATIVE:
Shows the module cumulative data for the control run on the specified
module.
23. SYSTEM CUMULATIVE:
Shows the system cumulative data for the control run on the system. This
data is the same as the module cumulative data when there is only one
module.
24. MODULE DATA FOR DATE RANGE:
Shows the module data calculated for the specified module and date range.
25. SYSTEM DATA FOR DATE RANGE:
Shows the system data calculated for the date range. This data is the same
as the module data for date range when there is only one module.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Maintenance History Report Appendix A
Maintenance History Report

Use this report as a hardcopy record of the maintenance performed on
your system.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Module no.:
Shows the module on which the maintenance procedure was performed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Maintenance History Report
3. Approval status:
Shows the status of approval for the maintenance log.
4. Serial no.:
Shows the serial number of the module on which the maintenance
procedure was performed.
5. Approval date:
Shows the date of approval for the maintenance log.
6. Operator ID:
Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the procedure was performed.
7. Approved by:
Shows the ID of the operator who approved the maintenance log.
8. Category:
Shows the maintenance category of the procedure.
9. Procedure:
Shows the name of the maintenance procedure.
10. Date (column):
Shows the date the maintenance procedure was performed.
11. Time (column):
Shows the time the maintenance procedure was performed.
12. Operator ID (column):
13. Status (column):
Shows the status of the maintenance procedure.
14. Comments:
Shows the comments entered for the maintenance procedure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Message History Log Report Appendix A
Message History Log Report

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Message History Log Report

4. Date (column):
Shows the date the error/message was generated.
5. Time (column):
Shows the time the error/message was generated.
6. Module (column):
Shows the module that generated the error/message.
7. Error code / Message text (column):

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Order List Report Appendix A
Order List Report

Use this report to aid in loading samples.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Order List Report

4. C / P (column):
(c System)
NOTE: This field is blank for pending orders that have not been assigned a
carrier or carousel position.
5. SID (column):
6. Name (column):
Shows the name of the patient, control, or calibrator for the order.
7. Code (column):
Shows the code(s) to indicate a sample processing condition(s). See
Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-145.
NOTE: Only sample processing codes (M and S) will print.

8. Minimum sample volume (column):
Shows the minimum sample cup volume required to process the test.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Order Status Report Appendix A
Order Status Report

Use this report to check the status of an order.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Order Status Report

4. C / P (column):
(c System)
NOTE: This field is blank for pending orders that have not been assigned a
carrier or carousel position.
5. SID (column):
6. Name (column):
Shows the name of the patient, control and level, or calibrator for the order.
7. Assay (column):
8. Status (column):
Shows the current status of the test ordered.
9. Time (column):
Shows the time the test with a status of Running will complete (in 24 hour
format).
10. Code (column):

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Patient Report Appendix A
Patient Report
Use this report as a hardcopy patient record.
Legend:
1. Report header:
Shows the configured report header information.
2. Name:
Shows the name of the patient.
3. Gender:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Patient Report
Shows the gender of the patient.

4. Patient ID:
5. Birthdate:
Shows the patient's birthdate.
6. Sample ID:
8. Location:
9. Doctor:
10. Assay (column):
11. Result (column):
12. Units (column):
13. Flags (column):
flags, page 5-187.
14. Range (column):
Shows the normal / therapeutic range of the assay, if configured.
15. Date Completed / Time completed:
Shows the date and time the result completed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Procedure Report, Basic Appendix A
Procedure Report, Basic

Use this report as a hardcopy record of a maintenance or diagnostic
procedure performed on your system. You can configure this report to
print automatically. See Configure report settings, page 2-7.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Procedure:
Shows the name of the procedure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Procedure Report, Basic
3. Procedure version:
Shows the version of the procedure.
4. Date:
Shows the date the procedure was performed.
5. Module no.:
Shows the number of the module on which the procedure was performed.
6. Time:
Shows the time when the procedure was performed.
7. Serial no.:
Shows the serial number of the module on which the procedure was
performed.
8. Status:
Shows the status of the procedure.
9. Operator ID:
10. Results:
Shows the results of the procedure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Procedure Report, Columnar Appendix A
Procedure Report, Columnar

Use this report as a hardcopy record of a maintenance or diagnostic
procedure performed on your system. You can configure this report to
print automatically. See Configure report settings, page 2-7.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Procedure:
Shows the name of the procedure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Procedure Report, Columnar
3. Procedure version:
Shows the version of the procedure.
4. Date:
Shows the date the procedure was performed.
5. Module no.:
Shows the number of the module on which the procedure was performed.
6. Time:
Shows the time when the procedure was performed.
7. Serial no.:
Shows the serial number of the module on which the procedure was
performed.
8. Status:
Shows the status of the procedure.
9. Operator ID:
10. Results:
Shows the results of the procedure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
QC Analysis Report Appendix A
QC Analysis Report
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A QC Analysis Report

4. Assay Name:
5. Module:
Shows the module number on which the controls were run.
6. Control Name:
8. Control Level:
9. Date Range:
Shows the date range selected for the QC report.
11. Control Expiration Date:
Shows the expiration date of the control.
12. Calculation Type:
Shows the calculation type, which includes cumulative data for both the
module and the system.
Shows the date and time for each control result.
14. Results (column):
Shows the results for each control. Results with an asterisk are excluded
from the calculations.
15. Units (column):
Shows the units for each control result.
16. Reagent Lot Number:
Shows the lot number for the reagent kit used to run the control.
17. Operator ID:
18. Flags:
19. Code (column):
20. EXPECTED:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
QC Analysis Report Appendix A

21. MANUFACTURER:
Shows the manufacturer's mean and standard deviation configured.
22. MODULE CUMULATIVE:
Shows the module cumulative data for the control run on the specified
module.
23. SYSTEM CUMULATIVE:
Shows the system cumulative data for the control run on the system. This
data is the same as the module cumulative data when there is only one
module.
24. MODULE DATA FOR DATE RANGE:
Shows the module data calculated for the specified module and date range.
25. SYSTEM DATA FOR DATE RANGE:
Shows the system data calculated for the date range. This data is the same
as the module data for date range when there is only one module.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A QC Result Details Report
QC Result Details Report

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
QC Result Details Report Appendix A

4. Control name:
Shows the name and level of the control.
5. Assay:
6. Sample ID:
7. Assay number:
8. Control lot number:
9. Module / Serial no.:
Shows the module and serial number on which the assay was run.
10. Control comment:
Shows the comment entered for the control.
11. Cal. lot:
result.
12. Cal. date / time:
result.
14. Serial no.:
15. Date completed:
Shows the date the control completed.
16. Time completed:
Shows the time the control completed.
17. Operator ID:
18. C / P (column):
(c System)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A QC Result Details Report

Shows the value of the control result.
20. Units (column):
Shows the units for the control result.
21. Range (column):
Shows the range configured for the control.
23. Flags (column):
24. Code (column):
25. mV (column):
Shows the millivolt value for the control result.
26. Cuvette (column):
Shows the number of the cuvette used to process the control.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
QC Results List Report Appendix A
QC Results List Report

Use this report to troubleshoot your system and as a hardcopy record
of QC results.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A QC Results List Report

4. C / P (column):
(c System)
5. Module (column):
Shows the module that generated the control result.
6. SID (column):
7. Control name (column):
Shows the name and level for the control.
8. Assay (column):
9. Result (column):
Shows the value of the control result.
10. Flags (column):
11. Code (column):
Shows the date and time the control result was completed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
QC Summary Report Appendix A
QC Summary Report
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A QC Summary Report

4. Start Date:
Shows the Start Date entered in the QC summary review screen.
5. End Date:
Shows the End Date entered in the QC summary review screen.
6. Control Name:
7. Module:
Shows the module that generated the control result(s).
Shows the lot number of the control
10. Assay:
11. Level:
12. N:
Shows the number of samples for that control level within the specified date
range.
13. Actual:
Shows the Mean, SD, and %CV for that control level within the specified
date range.
14. Expected:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reagent History Report Appendix A
Reagent History Report

Use this report to identify the number of remaining tests and
expiration dates of the last 3000 reagent packs.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Reagent History Report

4. M / P (column):
Shows the module and position in which the reagent kit is located.
5. Assay (column):
6. Cal status (column):
Shows the status of the calibration for the reagent lot.
Shows the lot number of the reagent kit.
8. Remaining tests (column):
Shows the number of tests remaining for the reagent kit (i 2000).
9. Reagent status (column):
Shows the status of the reagent kit.
10. Exp date (column):
Shows the date on which the reagent kit expires.
11. Stability (column):
Shows the number of onboard stability days/hours remaining for the reagent
kit.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reagent Load Error Report Appendix A
Reagent Load Error Report

Use this report to troubleshoot reagent load errors.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Reagent Load Error Report

4. Module:
Shows the number of the module in which the reagent is located.
5. Reagent status:
6. Assays:
7. Location (column):
Shows the position in which you loaded the reagent bottle/cartridge.
8. Serial number / Onboard (column):
Shows the serial number of the reagent bottle/cartridge loaded on board the
reagent carousel(s).
9. Serial number / Expected (column):
Shows the serial number of the reagent bottle/cartridge expected to be
loaded on the reagent carousel(s).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reagent Status Report (except for i 1000SR) Appendix A
Reagent Status Report (except for i 1000SR)

Use this report to quickly identify empty reagent kits.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Reagent Status Report (except for i 1000SR)

4. M / P (column):
5. Assay (column):
6. Cal status (column)
Shows an estimated number of tests remaining for the reagent kit
(c System).
Shows the number of tests remaining for the reagent kit (i System).
10. Exp. date (column):
11. Stability (column):
kit.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reagent Status Report (i 1000SR) Appendix A
Reagent Status Report (i 1000SR)

Use this report to quickly identify empty reagent kits.
* Expiration Date and Stability columns are not shown.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Reagent Status Report (i 1000SR)

4. M / P (column):
5. Assay (column):
6. Cal status (column)
Shows the number of tests remaining for the reagent kit (i System).
10. Carrier Status (column):
Shows the status of the reagent carriers for loading or unloading.
11. *Exp. date (column - not shown):
12. *Stability (column - not shown):
kit.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Rerun List Report Appendix A
Rerun List Report

Use this report to find samples that have reruns ordered.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Rerun List Report

4. *C / P (column):
(c System)
5. SID (column):
6. Name (column):
Shows the name of the patient or control.
7. Assay (column):
8. Code (column):

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Result Details Report Appendix A
Result Details Report

Use this report to troubleshoot your system. Up to three result details
print per page.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Result Details Report

4. Name:
5. Sample ID:
6. Assay:
7. Patient ID:
8. Assay number:
10. Module / Serial no.:
Shows the module and serial number on which the test was run.
11. Sample comment:
Shows the comment entered for the test.
12. Cal. lot:
result.
13. Cal. date/time:
result.
15. Serial no.:
16. Date completed:
Shows the date the result completed.
17. Location:
18. Time completed:
Shows the time the result completed.
19. Doctor:
20. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Result Details Report Appendix A
21. C / P (column):
(c System)
23. Units (column):
24. Range (column):
Shows the normal / therapeutic range for the assay, if configured.
26. Flags (column):
flags, page 5-187.
27. Code (column):
28. RLU (column):
Shows the RLU (relative light unit) value for the result.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Results List Report
Results List Report

Use this report as a hardcopy record of the results generated by your
system. You can configure this report to print automatically. See
Configure report settings, page 2-7.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Results List Report Appendix A
4. C / P (column):
(c System)
5. Module (column):
Shows the module that generated the test result.
6. SID (column):
7. Name (column):
Shows the name of the patient associated with the result.
8. Assay (column):
9. Result (column):
10. Flags (column):
flags, page 5-187.
11. Code (column):
Shows the date and time the test result was completed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Sample Report
Sample Report
Use this report as a hardcopy sample record. If you add a test to an
existing order, the system generates a separate sample report for that
test unless the original order is still pending.
Legend:
1. Report header:
Shows the configured report header information.
2. Name:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Sample Report Appendix A
3. Gender:
4. Patient ID:
5. Birthdate:
Shows the birthdate of the patient.
6. Sample ID:
8. Location:
9. Doctor:
10. Assay:
11. Result:
12. Units:
13. Flags:
flags, page 5-187.
14. Range:
15. Date Completed / Time completed:
Shows the date and time the result completed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Sample Laboratory Report
Sample Laboratory Report

Use this report as a hardcopy sample record for the laboratory of the
results generated by your system.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Name:
3. Sample ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Sample Laboratory Report Appendix A

4. Gender:
6. Patient ID:
7. Doctor:
8. Birthdate:
Shows the birthdate of the patient.
9. Location:
10. Assay (column):
12. Range (column):
13. Flags (column):
flags, page 5-187.
14. Code (column):

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Sample Status Report
Sample Status Report

Use this report to check the status of a sample or as a hardcopy record
of the results generated by your system.
Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Sample Status Report Appendix A

4. Sample ID:
5. C / P:
Shows the carrier or carousel (CRSL) ID and position for the sample.
6. Name:
7. Bay (column):
Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH)
8. Assay (column):
9. Status / Result (column):
Displays the:
– Status - current status of the test, see Descriptions of test statuses,
page 5-145
– Time the order will complete (in 24- hour format), for all samples with a
status of Running
– Result - value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of result
– Date and time the result was completed
10. Flags (column):
flags, page 5-187.
11. Code (column):

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A Temporary Message Log Report
Temporary Message Log Report

Legend:
1. Report title:
2. Operator ID:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Temporary Message Log Report Appendix A

4. Date (column):
Shows the date the temporary message occurred.
5. Time (column):
Shows the time the temporary message occurred.
6. Module (column):
Shows the module that generated the temporary message.
7. Error code / Message text (column):

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix A TSB Installation Log Report
TSB Installation Log Report

Use the TSB (Technical Service Bulletin) Installation Log Report to
show which ARCHITECT System Software updates, identified by their
associated TSB number, have been installed on your system.
Legend:
1. TSB:
Shows the unique identifier of the TSB (Technical Service Bulletin).
2. Serial No.:
Shows the serial number of the module the TSB was installed on.
3. Operator ID:
Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the software update was
installed.
4. TSB subject:
Shows the title of the software update.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Verification of i System assay claims
Appendix B Verification of i System assay claims
Introduction
You can verify the ARCHITECT i System assay claims by performing

verification protocols. These protocols are categorized into method
groups. You can find the method group number for an assay under
QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES/Verification of Assay Claims
section in the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert.
Not all protocols are required for all assays in the group. You can find
the protocols performed for the assay and the assay performance
under the SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS section in
the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert.
Method groups for verification protocols
Method Group Number
Protocol Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6

Sensitivity:
– Limit of Blank Method 1 Method 1 N/A N/A N/A Method 1
– Analytical Method 1 Method 1 N/A Method 2 N/A Method 1
– Limit of Detection Method 1 Method 1 N/A N/A N/A Method 1
– Functional Method 2 Method 2 N/A N/A Method 1 Method 2
– Limit of Method 1 Method 1 N/A N/A N/A Method 1
Quantitation
Precision Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 Method 1
Reportable range / Method 1 Method 2 Method 1 Method 1 N/A Method 3
calibration verification
Automated dilution Method 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
verification
Methods comparison Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 N/A Method 1
(correlation)
Methods comparison N/A N/A N/A Method 2 Method 2 N/A
(concordance)
Analytical specificity Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 N/A Method 1
Reference range Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 N/A N/A Method 1
Verification of i System assay claims topics include:

• Limit of Blank - method 1, page Appendix B-3
• Analytical sensitivity - method 1, page Appendix B-6
• Analytical sensitivity - method 2, page Appendix B-9
• Limit of Detection- method 1, page Appendix B-14
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Appendix B-1

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B
• Functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial dilution), page Appendix

B-17
• Functional sensitivity - method 2, page Appendix B-20
• Limit of Quantitation - method 1, page Appendix B-22
• Precision - method 1, page Appendix B-25
• Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1, page Appendix
B-27
• Reportable range/calibration verification- method 2, page Appendix
B-33
• Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3, page Appendix
B-39
• Automated dilution verification - method 1, page Appendix B-45
• Methods comparison - method 1 (correlation), page Appendix B-48
• Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance), page Appendix B-50
• Analytical specificity - method 1, page Appendix B-54
• Reference range - method 1, page Appendix B-55
Appendix B-2 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Limit of Blank - method 1
Limit of Blank - method 1

This method verifies a LoB (Limit of Blank) claim based on the
definition from CLSI document EP17- A using proportions of false
positives less than 5%.
A worksheet and example are provided:
• Limit of Blank - method 1 data sheet, page Appendix B-4
• Limit of Blank - method 1 data sheet example, page Appendix B-5
Procedure
Run a 0 level sample in replicates of 20.
NOTE: MasterCheck Level 0, the A calibrator, or other appropriate

material may be used.
Data evaluation
Count the number of replicates that fall above the LoB (Limit of
Blank).
For a sample size of 20 measurements, when 3 or less replicates are
above the LoB claim then the claim is verified.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Limit of Blank - method 1 Appendix B
Limit of Blank - method 1 data sheet

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Limit of Blank - method 1
Limit of Blank - method 1 data sheet example

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 Appendix B
Analytical sensitivity - method 1

This method is defined as the concentration at 2 standard deviations
from the mean RLU value of the Calibrator A or MasterCheck level 0,
and represents the lowest measurable concentration of analyte that
can be distinguished from 0.
• Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet, page Appendix B-7
• Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet example, page Appendix
B-8
Procedure
1. Run MasterCheck Level 0 (zero conc.) in replicates of 10.
2. Run MasterCheck Level 1 in replicates of 4.
NOTE: If MasterCheck is not available, substitute other

appropriate material.
Data evaluation
1. Calculate the mean and standard deviation for the MasterCheck
Level 0 (zero conc.) replicates and the mean for the MasterCheck
Level 1 replicates.
2. Determine the sensitivity using the following formula:
NOTE: The concentration of MasterCheck Level 1 changes with

each lot. Therefore, insert the concentration listed on the data
sheet for that particular lot.
Analytical sensitivity = __________

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Analytical sensitivity - method 1
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet example

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Analytical sensitivity - method 2

This method uses the concentration value of the last dilution at which
the observed values still fall inside the tolerance limits established for
MasterCheck Level 1, to determine assay sensitivity on an ARCHITECT
i System.
Worksheets and examples are provided:
• Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet, page Appendix B-10
• Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph, page Appendix B-11
• Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet example, page Appendix
B-12
• Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph example, page Appendix
B-13
Procedure
1. Prepare the following serial dilutions of MasterCheck Level 1
with MasterCheck Level 0.
1:2, 1:4, 1:8, 1:16, 1:32, and so forth until the expected value is
well below the claimed value.

Dilution Volume of Level 1 Volume of Level 0 Expected Value

1 Level 1 _____ μL 0 μL Label Value
2 1:2 400 μL 400 μL Label Value/2
3 1:4 400 μL of Dilution 2 400 μL Label Value/4
2. Run the serial dilutions and the undiluted MasterCheck Level 1

in replicates of 4.
Data evaluation
1. Calculate the mean for each level.
2. Determine the tolerance limits acceptable to your laboratory.

Your laboratory is responsible for determining acceptable
tolerance limits.
3. Calculate the tolerance limit ranges, and then record the upper
and lower tolerance limits on the data sheet.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
4. Plot the assayed value mean versus the expected value on the
graph, and then the tolerance limits.
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet example

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph example

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Limit of Detection- method 1 Appendix B
Limit of Detection- method 1

This method verifies a LoD (Limit of Detection) claim based on the
definition from CLSI document EP17- A using proportions of false
negatives less than 5%.
• Limit of Detection - method 1 data sheet, page Appendix B-15
• Limit of Detection - method 1 data sheet example, page Appendix
B-16
Procedure
1. Obtain 4 suitable samples with a concentration level equal to the
claimed LoD by testing with a reference method. You may spike
or dilute a sample to obtain the correct concentration.
NOTE: Dilutions of MasterCheck Level 1, the B calibrator, or

other appropriate material may be used.
2. Run the 4 samples in replicates of 5 for a total of 20 results.

Data evaluation
Count the number of replicates that fall below the LoB (Limit of
Blank).
NOTE: LoB assay data is found in the SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE

CHARACTERISTICS section in the ARCHITECT i System
For a sample size of 20 measurements, when 3 or less replicates are
below the LoB claim the LoD claim is verified.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Limit of Detection- method 1
Limit of Detection - method 1 data sheet

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Limit of Detection- method 1 Appendix B
Limit of Detection - method 1 data sheet example

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial dilution)
Functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial

dilution)
This method uses serial dilution of positive samples and comparison
of performance to a reference method to determine the sensitivity of a
qualitative assay on an ARCHITECT i System. If an assay has
comparable sensitivity the dilution factor should be equivalent or
better than the reference method.
• Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet,
page Appendix B-18
• Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet example,
page Appendix B-19
Procedure
1. Prepare the following serial dilutions of 5 or more positive
samples (mid to high-range) with a known negative sample:
1:2, 1:4, 1:8, 1:16, 1:32 (and so forth until the sample is
nonreactive)
NOTE: The positive and negative samples should be serum or

plasma of the same anticoagulant type.
2. Run 2 replicates of the undiluted sample and each dilution for

each method.
Data evaluation
1. Average the 2 replicates for each sample.
2. Determine the highest dilution at which the sample was reactive

for each method.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial dilution) Appendix B
Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial dilution)
Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet

example

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Functional sensitivity - method 2 Appendix B
Functional sensitivity - method 2

This method verifies functional sensitivity where the sensitivity is the
concentration at which imprecision is 20% CV or less.
A worksheet is provided, see Functional sensitivity - method 2 data sheet,
page Appendix B-21.
Procedure
1. Prepare a suitable sample with a concentration at or below the
functional sensitivity stated in the ARCHITECT i System
2. Run the sample a total of 20 times across multiple days, for

example 4 replicates on each of 5 days.
Data evaluation
Calculate the mean, SD, and %CV for the 20 replicates.
The claim is verified if the calculated %CV is less than or equal to 20%.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Functional sensitivity - method 2
Functional sensitivity - method 2 data sheet

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Limit of Quantitation - method 1 Appendix B
Limit of Quantitation - method 1

This method verifies a LoQ (Limit of Quantitation) claim based on the
definition from CLSI document EP17- A. The LoQ is defined as the
lowest amount of analyte in a sample that can be quantitatively
determined with the stated acceptable precision and trueness.
• Limit of Quantitation - method 1 data sheet, page Appendix B-23
• Limit of Quantitation - method 1 data sheet example,
page Appendix B-24
Procedure
1. Obtain a suitable sample with a concentration level equal to the
claimed LoQ by testing with a reference method. You may spike
or dilute a sample to obtain the correct concentration.
2. Run the sample in replicates of 25.

Data evaluation
1. Obtain the target concentration (reference value) of the sample
using a reference method other than the method being verified.
2. Determine the % total allowable error goal for the method.

% Total allowable error = % imprecision x 2 + % bias*
*% Bias can be determined from the % interference
NOTE: The % imprecision and % interference assay data is found

in the SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS section
in the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert.
3. Count the number of measurements that fall outside the total

allowable error goal for the assay by comparing each replicate to
the tolerance interval below.
Tolerance interval = A - (B/100 x A) to A + (B/100 x A)
Where:
A = reference value of the sample
B = % total allowable error
4. For a sample size of 25 measurements, when 3 or less replicates

are outside the % total allowable error the LoQ claim is verified.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Limit of Quantitation - method 1
Limit of Quantitation - method 1 data sheet

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Limit of Quantitation - method 1 Appendix B
Limit of Quantitation - method 1 data sheet example

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Precision - method 1
Precision - method 1
This method uses the calculation of mean values to determine assay
precision on an ARCHITECT i System. Precision indicates how well the
assay or system provides the same result when a given sample is tested
repeatedly.
Within-run and total precision is used to evaluate the performance of
an assay or system. Within-run precision provides a "best case"
estimate of the expected performance since there is minimal
opportunity for conditions to change during the course of the run.
Total precision is the most realistic assessment of the performance
because it includes variables such as different operators and laboratory
conditions.
Precision data for assays on the ARCHITECT i System is found under
the SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS section in the
ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert.
A worksheet is provided:
• Precision - method 1 data sheet, page Appendix B-26
Procedure
1. Determine the material to use (Abbott control material,
commercial control material, or patient pool).
2. Run the material in duplicate, twice a day.
NOTE: The runs should be at least two hours apart.

Data evaluation
1. Calculate the mean values for both runs.
2. Perform the appropriate calculation to determine the precision.

See the SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS section of
the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Precision - method 1 Appendix B
Precision - method 1 data sheet

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1
Reportable range/calibration verification -

method 1
This method uses the measurement of samples throughout the
reportable range to determine the reportable range/calibration
verification for an assay on an ARCHITECT i System. The terms
reportable range and calibration verification are interchangeable and
use the same protocol.
When MasterCheck is available for an i System this method uses the
measurement of MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3. If MasterCheck is not
available, substitute other appropriate material.
If the value exceeds the assay range, method 1 uses an 8:10 dilution of
MasterCheck Level 3. If MasterCheck is not available, substitute
Calibrator F when available.
NOTE: By adding MasterCheck Level 4 to the run you can perform

this procedure concurrently with the automated dilution verification
procedure.
• Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 data sheet,
page Appendix B-29
• Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph,
page Appendix B-30
• Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 - data sheet
example, page Appendix B-31
• Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph example,
page Appendix B-32
Procedure
1. Determine the number of replicates (up to 3) to run.
2. Run MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 as unknown samples.

If the value of MasterCheck Level 3 exceeds the assay range,
make an 8:10 dilution of MasterCheck Level 3 using eight parts
MasterCheck Level 3 to two parts MasterCheck Level 0.

3. Use the appropriate sensitivity method for the specific assay to

determine the limit of detection.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 Appendix B
Data evaluation
tolerance limits.
3. Average the replicates for each level if you ran more than one
replicate.
4. Plot the assayed MasterCheck value on the Y-axis of the graph

versus the expected MasterCheck value on the X-axis.
If the value of MasterCheck Level 3 exceeds the calibrator range,
plot the calculated value of the 8:10 dilution of MasterCheck
Level 3.
5. Plot the lower tolerance limit on the Y-axis versus the expected
values of MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 on the X-axis.
6. Plot the upper tolerance limit on the Y-axis versus the expected
7. Connect the points for each of the three lines.

If the line formed by connecting the points for the assayed
MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 values falls between the upper
and lower tolerance limits, the reportable range is verified.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 data

sheet

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 - data

sheet example

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

example

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Reportable range/calibration verification- method 2
Reportable range/calibration verification-

method 2
If the value exceeds the assay range, method 2 uses an 9:10 dilution of
MasterCheck Level 3.
page Appendix B-35
page Appendix B-36
• Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 data sheet
page Appendix B-38
Procedure

If the value of MasterCheck Level 3 exceeds the assay range,
make a 9:10 dilution of MasterCheck Level 3 using nine parts
MasterCheck Level 3 to one part MasterCheck Level 0.

3. Use the appropriate analytical sensitivity method for the specific

assay to determine the limit of detection.
Data evaluation
tolerance limits.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reportable range/calibration verification- method 2 Appendix B
replicate.

plot the calculated value of the 9:10 dilution of MasterCheck
Level 3.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

sheet

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

sheet example

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

example

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reportable range/calibration verification -

method 3
page Appendix B-41
page Appendix B-42
• Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 data sheet
page Appendix B-44
Procedure

3. Use the appropriate analytical sensitivity method for the specific

assay to determine the limit of detection.
Data evaluation
tolerance limits.
replicate.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

sheet

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

sheet example

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

example

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Automated dilution verification - method 1
Automated dilution verification - method 1

This method uses the calculation of a mean value to verify the
automated dilution for an assay on an ARCHITECT i System.
NOTE: By adding MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 to the run you can

perform this procedure concurrently with the reportable range
procedure.
• Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet,
page Appendix B-46
• Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet example,
page Appendix B-47
Procedure
2. Run MasterCheck Level 4 using the automated dilution protocol.

3. Perform the following steps if the value of MasterCheck Level 4

exceeds the assay range:
a. Prepare the desired manual dilution of MasterCheck Level 4
(for example, 8:10) using MasterCheck Level 0.
b. Run the diluted MasterCheck Level 4 with the automated

dilution protocol in replicates of up to 3.
Data evaluation
tolerance limits.
2. Calculate the tolerance limit ranges. Record the upper and lower
tolerance limits on the data sheet.
3. If more than one replicate was run, average the results obtained.
evaluate the calculated value of the manual dilution for
MasterCheck Level 4.
4. If the assayed MasterCheck Level 4 value falls between the upper

and lower tolerance limits, the automated dilution for this assay
is verified.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Automated dilution verification - method 1 Appendix B
Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Automated dilution verification - method 1
Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet

example

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Methods comparison - method 1 (correlation) Appendix B
Methods comparison - method 1 (correlation)

This method uses correlation to determine the method comparison
between your existing assay method and the ARCHITECT i System
assay method.
A worksheet is provided:
• Methods comparison - method 1 correlation data sheet,
page Appendix B-49
Procedure
1. Determine the number of samples to run ensuring adequate
distribution throughout the assay range.
2. Run the samples.
3. Record the sample values using the X column for your existing
method and the Y column for the ARCHITECT i System method
values.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Methods comparison - method 1 (correlation)
Methods comparison - method 1 correlation data sheet

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance) Appendix B
Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance)

This method uses concordance to determine the method comparison
between your existing assay method and the ARCHITECT i System.
Concordance is a study used to compare the agreement between two
methods when assessing the distribution of values in specific
concentration ranges (for example, at a cut-off value).
• Methods comparison - method 2 concordance data sheet,
page Appendix B-51
• Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation sheet,
page Appendix B-52
• Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation sheet
Procedure
1. Determine the number of samples to run ensuring adequate
distribution throughout the assay range.
2. Run the samples.
3. Record the sample values using the X column for your existing
method and the Y column for the ARCHITECT i System method
values.
4. Determine the concordance using the following formula.

% Concordance = (total true positives and true negatives)/total
samples x 100
5. Determine the specificity, correct true negative results, using the

following formula. (optional)
% Specificity = true negatives/(total true negatives and false
positives) x 100
6. Determine the sensitivity, correct true positive results, using the

following formula. (optional)
% Sensitivity = true positives/(total true positives and false
negatives) x 100
Where:
True negative = Negative by both reference and test method
True positive = Positive by both reference and test method

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance)
False negative = Negative by test method; positive by reference method

False positive = Positive by test method; negative by reference method
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance data sheet

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance) Appendix B
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation

sheet

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance)
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation

sheet example

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Analytical specificity - method 1 Appendix B
Analytical specificity - method 1

See the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert for the
description of the procedure used and the results for specificity and
interferences studies.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix B Reference range - method 1
Reference range - method 1

Initially use the reference range for the specific ARCHITECT i assay as
stated in the assay-specific package insert.
NOTE: Your laboratory is responsible for determining the appropriate

reference range(s).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
Appendix C Math models
Introduction
Data reduction/calibration methods use various math models to

analyze a set of given data and calculate results. These math models
may range in complexity from simple subtraction to polynomial
equations.
Math model topics include:
• c System data reduction methods, page Appendix C-2
• i System data reduction methods, page Appendix C-14
• i System adjustment methods, page Appendix C-20
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Appendix C-1

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
c System data reduction methods Appendix C
c System data reduction methods

The ARCHITECT c System uses photometric and potentiometric
technology to measure analyte concentrations in samples. Data
reduction/calibration methods are specific to the technology type.
c System data reduction methods topics include:
• Photometric data reduction methods, page Appendix C-2
• Potentiometric data reduction method, page Appendix C-8
Photometric data reduction methods

Photometric data reduction/calibration methods analyze photometric
read data to calculate results.
Photometric data reduction methods include:
• Absorbance method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-2
• Factor method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-2
• Linear method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-3
• Logit-4 method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-5
• Spline method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-6
• Use factor and blank method (photometric - c System),
page Appendix C-7
Absorbance method (photometric - c System)
The absorbance data reduction method uses the comparison between

the absorbance of the sample and the absorbance of water to calculate
results. For end-point assays the data is expressed as absorbance and
for rate assays the data is expressed as the rate of absorbance
change/minute.
Factor method (photometric - c System)
The Factor data reduction method uses a reagent blank and a fixed cal
factor value to calculate results. This method is applicable to assays for
which the reaction is linear and stable across all reagent lots. It is ideal
for measuring enzyme activity in a sample at a predictable and steady
rate that can be determined for the chromophore, wavelengths, and
instrument in use.
The enzyme activity or sample concentration is calculated using the
following equation:
Appendix C-2 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
Appendix C c System data reduction methods
X = (A-Ablk) x Factor
Where:
X = Activity or concentration of the sample (unknown)
A = Absorbance or absorbance change of the unknown
Ablk = Absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank
Factor = Calibration factor
Linear method (photometric - c System)
The linear data reduction method uses a reagent blank and one to six
calibrators to generate a point-to-point calibration curve. The slope is
calculated for each segment of the curve between the calibrator levels.
Figure Appendix C.1: Linear calibration curve - six calibrators
Legend:
blk Concentration of the reagent blank
C1 to C6 Concentration of calibrator
Ablk Absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank
Ac1 to Ac6 Absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrator
The absorbance or absorbance change measured for the sample

determines which of the following equations are used to calculate the
sample concentration.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
When A Ac1
X = F1 × (A - Ablk) + blk
When Ac1 < A Ac2

X = F2 × (A - Ac1) + C1
When Ac2 < A Ac3

X = F3 × (A - Ac2) + C2
When Ac3 < A Ac4

X = F4 × (A - Ac3) + C3
When Ac4 < A Ac5

X = F5 × (A - Ac4) + C4
When Ac5 < A

X = F6 × (A - Ac5) + C5
Where:
A = Absorbance or absorbance change of the sample
(unknown)
Ac1 to Ac6 = Absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrator

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
Ablk = Absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank

X = Concentration of the sample (unknown)
C1 to C6 = Concentration of calibrator
blk = Concentration of the reagent blank
F1 to F6 = Cal factor (1 / slope)
Logit-4 method (photometric - c System)
The Logit-4 data reduction method uses a reagent blank and three to
six calibrators to generate a calibration curve. This method is
applicable to assays for which the absorbance or absorbance change
increases as the calibrator concentration increases.
Figure Appendix C.2: Logit-4 calibration curve - three to six

calibrators
Legend:
C1 to C(n) Concentration of calibrator
X Concentration of unknown sample
Ac1 to Ac(n) Absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrator
A Absorbance or absorbance change of the unknown sample

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
The equation used in the approximation is:
Where:
(unknown)
Kc, a, b = Constants of the approximation expression
Ablk = Approximate value of the absorbance or absorbance
change of the reagent blank
X = Concentration of sample (unknown)
ln = Natural log
When the concentration is close to 0, the Logit-4 calibration curve

converges asymptotically toward the absorbance or absorbance
change of the reagent blank as the concentration approaches 0. This
convergence may not show on the graph if the scale is too large.
The approximation expression is simple and the constant is
determined through approximation by non-linear regression.
Therefore, the curve may not always pass through the absorbance (or
absorbance change) data points of the calibrator.
It is possible to set a parameter to detect an error if the SD (standard
deviation) of the absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrators
exceeds the user-specified value.
Spline method (photometric - c System)
The spline data reduction method uses a reagent blank and three to six
calibrators to generate a calibration curve. The concentration axis of
the calibration curve graph is divided into multiple sections with the
divisions corresponding to the concentrations of the calibrators. Each
section of the curve is interpolated using a polynomial expression so
that the adjoining sections are connected smoothly.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
Figure Appendix C.3: Spline calibration curve - three to six calibrators
Legend:
C1 to C(n) Concentration of calibrator
Ac1 to Ac(n) Absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrator
The polynomial equation used is:
Where:
(unknown)
a(n), b(n), = Constants of the approximation expression
c(n), d(n)
X = Concentration of sample (unknown)
Use factor and blank method (photometric - c System)
The use factor and blank data reduction method uses the factor and
reagent blank of a calibration curve generated for another assay

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
(reference assay) to calculate results. This method is used when two or

more assays use the same reagents. The reference assay is defined in
the assay parameter file.
Figure Appendix C.4: Use factor and blank - linear calibration curve
Legend:
Ac1' Absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrator used for
the reference test
Ablk' Absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank for
the reference test
C1' Concentration of the calibrator used for the reference test
The equation used is:
Potentiometric data reduction method

The potentiometric data reduction method analyzes electrical
potential data to calculate electrolyte results.
There are three components to the potentiometric method:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
• Electromotive force measurement (potentiometric - c System),

page Appendix C-9
• Slope calculation (potentiometric - c System), page Appendix C-10
• Sample measurement (potentiometric - c System), page Appendix
C-11
Electromotive force measurement (potentiometric - c System)
The electromotive force measurement uses the difference (potential

difference) between the electromotive force of an unknown sample
and the electromotive force of the ICT Reference Solution, measured
immediately after the sample, to determine electrolyte concentration.
Figure Appendix C.5: Electromotive force calculation
Where:
ΔEi = Potential difference between the sample and ICT
Reference Solution for each electrode
= Potential of each electrode (i), in contact with ICT
Reference Solution
Es,i = Potential of each electrode (i), in contact with the

sample
i = Ion of interest (Na+, K+, and Cl-)
EMF = Electromotive force expressed in millivolts

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
Slope calculation (potentiometric - c System)
The slope calculation uses the differences (potential differences)

between the electromotive forces of two calibrators and the
electromotive force of the ICT Reference Solution and compares them
to the calibrator concentrations to generate a calibration curve. Two
graphs are generated:
• Calibration graph showing the relationship of the ion electrolyte
concentration to the electromotive force
• Electrode response curve during calibration
Figure Appendix C.6: Relationship between ion electrolyte

concentration and electromotive force
Where:
S = Slope (mV/decade) of each electrode
CL, CH = Concentration of the Low and High Calibrators
CN = Concentration of ICT Reference Solution
ΔEL, ΔEH = Difference in potential of each electrode between the
ICT Reference Solution and the calibrator
Ci = Concentration of the specific ion of interest

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
Figure Appendix C.7: Electrode (mV) response curve during

calibration
Where:
CL, CH = Concentration of the Low and High Calibrators
ΔEL, ΔEH = Difference in potential of each electrode between the
ICT Reference Solution and the calibrator
Ci = Concentration of the specific ion of interest
Sample measurement (potentiometric - c System)
The sample measurement uses the following data to determine the

electrolyte (ICT) concentration in an unknown sample:
• The difference between the electromotive forces of the unknown
sample and the ICT Reference Solution
• The difference between the electromotive forces of the low
calibrator and the ICT Reference Solution
• The slope of the specific ICT electrode
The following equation is used:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
Figure Appendix C.8: Electrode (mV) response curve during sample

measurement
Where:
Ci = Concentration of the specific ion of interest in the
sample
CL = Concentration of the ion of interest in the Low Calibrator
(This is the baseline for sample calculations.)
S = Slope of the ICT electrode of interest
ΔEi = Difference in electrode potential when exposed to the
sample and ICT Reference Solution
ΔEL = Difference in the ICT electrode potential when exposed
to ICT Reference Solution and the Low Calibrator
during calibration
ICT Index
An Index solution can be used to compensate for differences between

ICT modules, day-to-day instrument variations, and matrix differences
between calibrators and patient samples. The Index solution is a
sample with a known concentration and is used during calibration of
an ICT analyte. After calibration sample measurements are then
automatically adjusted.
Measured sample values are adjusted using the following equation:
Conc' = Conc - (Comp' - Comp)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
Where:
Conc' = Adjusted ICT sample value
Conc = Measured ICT sample value (not adjusted)
Comp' = Measured value of Index solution
Comp = Nominal Index concentration (known value)
(Comp' - Comp) = Adjustment value
The Index solution concentration for the specific analyte is calculated

using the following equation:
Comp' = 10^[(Vcomp - B)/S]
Where:
Vcomp = Voltage of the Index solution
B = Calibration curve intercept
S = Calibration curve slope
NOTE: When the Index concentration is set to zero the Index value is
not calculated.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
i System data reduction methods Appendix C
i System data reduction methods

The ARCHITECT i System uses CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle
immunoassay) technology to measure analyte concentrations in
samples. Data reduction/calibration methods are specific to this type
of technology.
i System data reduction methods topics include:
• Point to point method (i System), page Appendix C-14
• Linear regression method (i System), page Appendix C-15
• 4PLC methods (i System), page Appendix C-16
• Cutoff assay method (i System), page Appendix C-18
• Reference method (i System), page Appendix C-19
Point to point method (i System)

The point to point data reduction method uses the average RLU
(relative light unit) value obtained for each calibrator compared to the
calibrator concentration to generate a calibration curve. A straight line
is used to connect each point and the slope is calculated for each line
segment. Concentrations of unknown samples are calculated from the
line segment that brackets the sample RLU values.
Figure Appendix C.9: Point to point calibration method
For example, if a sample has an RLU value between the RLU values for
Calibrator B and Calibrator C, the unknown sample concentration is
calculated using the following equation:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
Appendix C i System data reduction methods
Linear regression method (i System)

The linear regression data reduction method uses the linear
relationship between the RLU (relative light unit) value and the
concentration of the analyte in the sample as follows to generate a
calibration curve:
The intercept in this case is the RLU value at concentration zero. The
slope defines how much the concentration increases when the RLU
value increases.
Figure Appendix C.10: Linear regression calibration method
The unknown specimen concentration is calculated using the

following equation:
Slope and intercept are obtained from the calibration. The parameters
are determined by minimizing the sum of squares of the difference
between the observed and predicted (by the regression equation)
values for all calibrators as shown in the following formulas:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
Where:
= Standard deviation associated with a calibrator
= Observed calibrator concentration
= Observed calibrator RLU value
4PLC methods (i System)

4PLC (four-parameter logistic curve fit or four-parameter logistic
calibration) data reduction methods use the difference between the
predicted and observed calibrator concentration or signal to generate a
calibration curve.
4PLC is calculated as follows:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
The four parameters (P1 through P4) control the shape of the curve.
Depending on the data generated a 4PLC curve can be either
sigmoidal (S-shaped) or have no second bend at all.
The four parameters are used as follows:
Defines the signal at an infinite concentration
Defines the maximum theoretical range of the RLU (relative

light unit) value from concentration zero to infinity
Defines the concentration that yields a signal midway

between the highest and the lowest possible signal
Determines if the curve is S-shaped. The curve is S-shaped

when P4>1.
These parameters are calculated to find the P values that result in a

curve with the lowest sum of squares.
There are two types of 4PLC curve fit methods:

• 4PLC with x residual minimization (x weighted)
• 4PLC with y residual minimization (y weighted)
4PLC with x residual minimization (x-weighted) method (i System)
The 4PLC (four-parameter logistic curve fit) with x-residual

minimization data reduction method uses the difference between the
predicted and observed calibrator concentration to generate a
calibration curve. The four parameters are computed to result in the
lowest possible sum of squares using the following equation:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
Where:
= Observed calibrator concentration
= Predicted calibrator concentration
4PLC with y residual minimization (y-weighted) method (i System)
The 4PLC (four-parameter logistic curve fit) with y-residual

minimization data reduction method uses the difference between the
predicted and observed calibrator signals to generate a calibration
curve. The four parameters are computed to result in the lowest
possible sum of squares using the following equation:
Where:
= Observed calibrator signal (RLU)
= Predicted calibrator signal (RLU)
Cutoff assay method (i System)

The cutoff assay data reduction method uses a one or two point
calibration to determine the point (cutoff) where reactive and
non-reactive samples are differentiated. Cutoff formulas can use
addition, subtraction, and multiplication and it is possible to add
constants. Once the cutoff is determined the unknown sample RLU
(relative light unit) value is divided by the cutoff to determine the
cutoff ratio (index).
For more information on the methods, see:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
• One-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System),

page Appendix C-19
• Two-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System),
page Appendix C-19
One-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System)
The one point qualitative data reduction method uses one calibrator
in the index formula. Depending on the cutoff formula, the calibrator
can be either reactive or non-reactive for the assay.
The following is an example of a one-point cutoff formula where a and
b are assay-specific constants:
Cutoff = a x Calibrator Signal + b
Two-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System)
The two point qualitative data reduction method uses two calibrators
in the index formula. Depending on the cutoff formula, the calibrators
for the assay can be:
• Both reactive
• Both non-reactive
• One reactive and the other non-reactive
The following is an example of a two-point cutoff formula where a
and b are assay-specific constants:
Cutoff = a x Calibrator 1 Signal + Calibrator 2 Signal - b
Reference method (i System)

The reference data reduction method uses the calibration curve
generated from another assay (reference assay) to calculate results.
This method is used when two or more assays use the same reagents.
The reference assay is defined in the assay parameter file.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
i System adjustment methods Appendix C
i System adjustment methods

Adjustment methods allow you to run two calibrator levels instead of
six to calibrate an assay. The two calibrator levels (adjusters) are used
to adjust the master calibration curve stored in the reagent bar code to
reflect the actual RLU (relative light unit) values measured on your
system.
The ARCHITECT i System offers the following methods of calibration
adjustment:
• Ratio technique method (i System), page Appendix C-20
• Linear transformation method (i System), page Appendix C-21
• Parameter method (i System), page Appendix C-22
• Curve shape method (i System), page Appendix C-22
Ratio technique method (i System)

The ratio technique adjustment method compares the RLU (relative
light unit) value of the calibrators to the corresponding calibrator
values from the master calibration curve. This technique is used when
the lower end of the calibration curve has different characteristics
than the rest of the curve, but the general behavior of the curve is still
proportional and linear.
Ratios are calculated for calibrator 1 and calibrator 2 using the
following formulas:
Where:
Calibrator1 = RLU (value) measured for Calibrator 1
Master1 = RLU (value) stored in the reagent bar code for the
calibrator corresponding to Calibrator 1
Where:
Calibrator2 = RLU (value) measured for Calibrator 2
Master2 = RLU (value) stored in the reagent bar code for the
calibrator corresponding to Calibrator 2

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
Appendix C i System adjustment methods
Two types of ratio techniques, A and AB, are used depending on which
master calibrator level(s) is multiplied by ratio 1 and ratio 2.
The ratio A technique adjustment method produces an estimate of
RLU values by multiplying the RLU (relative light unit) value stored in
the reagent bar code for:
• Calibrator A by ratio 1
• Calibrator B through F by ratio 2
The ratio AB technique adjustment method produces an estimate of
RLU values by multiplying the RLU (relative light unit) value stored in
the reagent bar code for:
• Calibrators A and B by ratio 1
• Calibrators C through F by ratio 2
The estimated instrument specific RLU values are used to generate the
calibration curve.
Linear transformation method (i System)

The linear transformation adjustment method assumes a linear
relationship between the calibrator RLU (relative light unit) values
generated by the system and the master calibration information stored
in the reagent bar code.
The following is an example where the slope and intercept that
describe the linear relationship are based on the RLU values of
calibrator 1 and calibrator 2 generated by the system and their
corresponding values stored in the reagent bar code.
The slope is calculated as follows:
The intercept is calculated as follows:
The instrument RLU values for the six calibrators in the master
calibration can be estimated as follows:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
i System adjustment methods Appendix C
The resulting estimated instrument RLU values for the six calibrators
are then used to generate the calibration curve using the appropriate
calibration curve model.
Parameter method (i System)

The parameter adjustment method uses the RLU (relative light unit)
values stored in the reagent bar code for calibrators A through F to
determine the 4PLC (four parameter logistic curve) parameters of the
master calibration. Calibrator 1 and calibrator 2 adjusters are then
used to provide an instrument specific calibration curve based on the
parameters.
The following equation is used to calculate the residual sum of squares
for the parameter adjustment method:
Where:
= Population average parameter
= System specific parameter
= Standard deviation parameter
= Predicted calibrator signal
= Observed calibrator signal
= Standard deviation of calibrator signal
Curve shape method (i System)

The curve shape adjustment method uses the RLU (relative light unit)
values stored in the reagent bar code for calibrators A through F to
determine the 4PLC (four parameter logistic curve) parameters of the
master calibration. Calibrator 1 and calibrator 2 adjusters are then

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Math models
Appendix C i System adjustment methods
used to provide an instrument-specific calibration curve based on the

shape of the curve.
The following equation is used to calculate the residual sum of squares
for the curve shape adjustment method:
Where:
= Population average shape parameter
= System specific shape parameter
= Standard deviation shape parameter
= Predicted calibrator signal
= Observed calibrator signal
= Standard deviation of calibrator signal

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
List numbers
Appendix D List numbers
ARCHITECT System
List numbers are unique identifiers that are used when ordering
products. These numbers are provided for guidance only and are
subject to change. Contact your Abbott representative for the most
current list numbers.
List numbers topics include:
• Consumable list numbers (c System), page Appendix D-2
• Consumable list numbers (i System), page Appendix D-3
• Accessory kit list numbers (c 4000), page Appendix D-4
• Accessory kit list number (i System), page Appendix D-7
• Additional accessory list numbers, page Appendix D-9
• Electronic media list numbers, page Appendix D-10
• SCC component list numbers, page Appendix D-11
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Appendix D-1

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
List numbers
Consumable list numbers (c System) Appendix D
Consumable list numbers (c System)

ARCHITECT c System. Contact your Abbott representative to order the
following consumables.
ARCHITECT c System consumables
Item Quantity List Number
Acid Wash Solution 2 x 500 mL 06K01-20
Alkaline Wash Solution 2 x 500 mL 09D31-20
ICT Reference Solution 2x2L 01E49-20
ICT Cleaning Fluid 10 x 12 mL 01E50-20
ICT module 1 09D28-03
Detergent A 2 x 500 mL 01J72-20
Detergent B 4 x 250 mL 02J94-20
Water Bath Additive 2 x 500 mL 09D29-20
Sample Cups 1000/box 07C14-01
Small Cartridge, Natural (55 mL) 20/bag 03E20-20
Small Cartridge, White (55 mL) 20/bag 03E21-20
Large Cartridge, Natural (90 mL) 20/bag 03E22-20
Large Cartridge, White (90 mL) 20/bag 03E23-20
20 mL Truncated, Clear 20/bag 04J67-20
20 mL Truncated, Opaque 20/bag 04J66-20
Container Caps 20/bag 03E24-20
Appendix D-2 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
List numbers
Appendix D Consumable list numbers (i System)
Consumable list numbers (i System)

ARCHITECT i System. Contact your Abbott representative to order the
following consumables.
ARCHITECT i System consumables
Concentrated Wash Buffer:
• Concentrated Wash Buffer (1 L bottle) 4 x 975 mL 06C54-55
• Concentrated Wash Buffer, ARCHITECT ARM (10 L 1 x 9.75 L 06C54-85
cubitainer) (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Filter, Buffer 1 08C94-28
Multi-Assay Manual Diluent 1 x 100 mL 07D82-50
Pre-Trigger Solution 4 x 975 mL 06E23-65
Probe Conditioning Solution 4 x 25 mL 01L56-40
Trigger Solution 4 x 975 mL 06C55-60
Reaction Vessels 2000/box 07C15-01
Replacement Caps 100/box 04D19-01
Septums 200/box 04D18
Sample Cups 1000/box 07C14-01

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
List numbers
Accessory kit list numbers (c 4000) Appendix D
Accessory kit list numbers (c 4000)

There are three accessory kits for the ARCHITECT c 4000 System:
• Accessory kit 1 (c 4000) - LN 02P68-01, page Appendix D-4 -
contains items used for the installation of the system, items used
to perform maintenance and troubleshooting procedures, and
some spare accessories for as-needed component replacement.
• Accessory kit 2 (c 4000) - LN 02P73-01, page Appendix D-5 -
contains some items used during installation of the system and
two calibration tools used for some maintenance procedures.
• Customer maintenance kit (c 4000) - LN 02P69-01, page Appendix
D-5 - contains all accessories required to perform scheduled
maintenance for one year.
Your Abbott representative orders the accessory kits for you. Contact
your Abbott representative to order individual items.
For other accessories such as sample carriers and cuvette segments see
Additional accessory list numbers, page Appendix D-9.
Accessory kit 1 (c 4000) - LN 02P68-01
Installation components
10 Micron Filter, Water Bath 1 NA
High Concentration Waste Tubing Kit 1 NA
ICT O-Ring, Probe, and Probe Holder 1 NA
Large Cartridge Segment, Inner 2 02P80-01
Large Cartridge Segment, Outer (Target) 1 02P83-01
Large Cartridge Segment, Outer 1 02P84-01
Small Cartridge Segment, Inner 2 02P79-01
Small Cartridge Segment, Outer 9 02P81-01
Small Cartridge Segment, Inner (Target) 1 02P82-01
Reagent Probe 2 01G47-03
Reagent Probe Tubing 2 02P76-01
Sample Probe 1 01G48-03
Sample Probe Tubing 1 02P77-01
Sample Wash Solution Carrier 1 02P78-01
Waste and Water Tubing Kit 1 NA
Maintenance components
10 mm Wrench 1 NA
Container, Parts Case 1 NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
List numbers
Appendix D Accessory kit list numbers (c 4000)
Accessory kit 1 (c 4000) - LN 02P68-01 (continued)

Cuvette Segment Alignment Tool 1 02P86-01
Nozzle, Cleaning Wire 5 09D50-02
Phillips Screwdriver 1 NA
Slotted Screwdriver 1 NA
Spare components
1 mL Syringe 6 09D41-02
20 mL reagent Cartridge Adaptor 5 09D22-12
Cuvette Dry Tip 1 09D51-02
Cuvette Pair Replacement Set 2 01G46-02
ICT Probe 1 096D63-03
ICT Probe Holder 1 NA
Mixer 1 09D59-02
Probe Screw, Sample / Reagent 1 NA
Reagent Probe 2 01G47-03
Reagent Probe Tubing, c 4000 1 02P76-01
Reagent Syringe O-ring 4 09D53-02
Reagent Syringe Seal Tip # 1 2 09D39-02
Sample Probe 1 01G48-03
Sample Probe Tubing, c 4000 1 02P77-01
Sample/Wash Solution Syringe O-ring 2 09D52-02
Sample/Wash Solution Syringe Seal Tip #1 1 09D37-02
Source Lamp 1 09D45-02
Accessory kit 2 (c 4000) - LN 02P73-01

Carrier Calibration Tool 1 01P16-01
Pressure Monitor PCB 1 NA
Sample Carriers 30 NA
SH Bar code Tool 2 06E69-01
Customer maintenance kit (c 4000) - LN 02P69-01

1 mL Syringe 24 09D41-02
ICT Reference Solution Check Valve 4 09D35-02
Reagent Syringe O-ring 8 09D53-02

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
List numbers
Accessory kit list numbers (c 4000) Appendix D
Customer maintenance kit (c 4000) - LN 02P69-01 (continued)

Sample/Wash Solution Syringe O-ring 12 09D52-02
Source Lamp 4 09D45-02

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
List numbers
Appendix D Accessory kit list number (i System)
Accessory kit list number (i System)

The ARCHITECT i System accessory kit contains items used for the
installation of the system, items used to perform maintenance and
troubleshooting procedures, and some spare accessories for as-needed
component replacement. Your Abbott representative orders the
accessory kits for you. Contact your Abbott representative to order
individual items.
For other accessories such as an external thermometer, sample carriers,
and carrier trays see Additional accessory list numbers, page Appendix
D-9.
ARCHITECT i 1000SR components - LN 01L87-01
Bag, Biohazard 6 NA
Bleach Preparation Container 1 08C94-63
Buffer filter 1 08C94-28
Buffer outlet assembly 1 01P12-01
Card cage/SCC door filter 1 03L99-01
Card cage filter 1 06L00-01
External Waste Tubing 1 NA
Internal Decon Extension Tubing/Cable Kit 1 01P83-01
Maintenance Kit: 1
• Bar Code Calibration Tool 2 06E67-01
• Buffer Reservoir Cap 1 NA
• Carrier Calibration Tool 1 01P16-01
• Flashlight 1 NA
• Fuse Kit 2 NA
• Grease 1 NA
• Lens Paper 1 NA
• Maintenance Cleaning Bottle 1 02G16-99
• Optics Cap 1 NA
• WZ Probe Maintenance Water Bottle 1 06E68-01
• Screwdriver #1 Phillips 1 NA
• Screwdriver #2 Phillips 1 NA
• SH Bar Code Tool 2 06E69-01
• Thermistor Removal Wrench 1 NA
• Valve Removal Tool 1 NA
• Ground strap 1 NA
• O-ring Removal Tool 1 NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
List numbers
Accessory kit list number (i System) Appendix D
ARCHITECT i 1000SR components - LN 01L87-01 (continued)

Probe (Sample/Reagent) 1 08C94-42
Probe, Wash Zone 3 08C94-35
Reagent Carriers 30 NA
Sample Carriers 30 NA
Sensor, Level, Buffer 1 06L01-01
Sensor, Level, Pre-Trigger 1 8C94-27
Sensor, Level, Trigger 1 8C94-26
Tubing, Probe 1 06L04-01
Tubing/Sensor, Temp, WZ 2 08C94-87
Tubing, Wash Buffer Transfer 1 08C94-21
Unloader 1 NA
Wash Cup Baffle 6 01P41-01
Wash Buffer Preparation Container 1 08C94-56
Wash Buffer Reservoir 1 06L06-01
Waste pressure switch to floor tubing 1 NA

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
List numbers
Appendix D Additional accessory list numbers
Additional accessory list numbers

Additional accessories are products not included in an accessory kit.
These products are used during routine processing, in maintenance
procedures, and for component replacement. Contact your Abbott
representative to order the following accessories.
Additional accessories
Alternate c 4000 Reagent Supply Center Segments:
• Large Cartridge Segment, Inner 1 02P80-01
• Large Cartridge Segment, Outer 1 02P84-01
• Large Cartridge Segment, Outer (Target) 1 02P83-01
• Small Cartridge Segment, Inner 1 02P79-01
• Small Cartridge Segment, Outer 1 02P81-01
• Small Cartridge Segment, Inner (Target) 1 02P82-01
Cuvette Segment (c 4000) 1 02P75-01
External Waste Pump:
• c System 1 09D61-02
High Concentration Waste Bottle 1 03E50-26
High Concentration Float Switch Cable 1 03E50-31
Liquid Waste Container (i 1000SR) 1 06L05-01
Pump Poppet Valve Set (c System) 1 09D36-02
Reagent carriers (i 1000SR) 10 08L20-01
RSH Sample Carrier Trays 2 04J49-01
Sample Carriers 10 05E15-01
Thermometer, External (i System) 1 08C94-88

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
List numbers
Electronic media list numbers Appendix D
Electronic media list numbers

Some products are distributed on electronic media such as assay files,
maintenance and diagnostic procedure files, and online
documentation. Contact your Abbott representative to order the
following electronic media.
Electronic media
Item List Number
Assay disk, ARCHITECT c System:
• Assay disk (Conventional Units) 08G98
• Assay disk (SI Units) 04J62
Assay CD-ROM, ARCHITECT i System:
• Assay CD-ROM - WW (excluding US) 06E59
• Assay CD-ROM - US 06E58
• Assay CD-ROM - Japan only 05F94
• Assay CD-ROM - WW (excluding US) Addition A 03K52
• Assay CD-ROM - US Addition A 03K50
• Assay CD-ROM - WW (excluding US) Addition B 03K53
• Assay CD-ROM - US Addition B 03K51
• Assay CD-ROM - WW (excluding US) Addition C 08K30
• Assay CD-ROM - US Addition C 06L81
• Assay CD-ROM - WW (excluding US) Addition E 01L66
• Assay CD-ROM - US Addition E 01L65
System Software CD-ROM, ARCHITECT System 05F48
NOTE: Electronic files of manuals are available on the Abbott

Diagnostics web site.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
List numbers
Appendix D SCC component list numbers
SCC component list numbers

The following products are required and optional SCC (system control
center) components. Contact your Abbott representative to order the
following components.
SCC components
Item List Number
Required
Keyboard:
• English Keyboard 07D11-01
• French Keyboard 07D11-20
• German Keyboard 07D11-30
• Italian Keyboard 07D11-40
• Spanish Keyboard 07D11-50
Monitor - Touchscreen LCD 03L97-01
Mouse 07D01-99
Network HUB (USB Powered) 07D04-60
Optional
Bar Code Scanner 07D09-02
ARCHITECT and AxSYM Bar Code Scanner User's Guide 02K93
Component Stand 09D19-01
Modem (USB) 07D07-12
Printer:
• Printer (110V) 07D08-11
• Printer (220V) 07D08-22
UPS for SCC only:
• UPS 110V 07D06-11
• UPS 220V 07D06-22

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Descriptions of screen elements
Appendix E Descriptions of screen elements
Introduction
Screen elements are items on each screen that allow you to interact
with the system software. Screen elements can be any of the following:
• Icons, which allow you to display a menu
• Menus, which allow you to display a screen
• Buttons, which allow you to initiate a command such as:
– Display another screen or window
– Add items to a list
– Refresh the data on the screen or window
– Confirm that you want to save the changes you have
entered
– Delete items from the system
– Display help for a screen, window, or error message
• Data entry boxes, which allow you to enter text
• List buttons, which allow you to display a list so you can select
an item
• Options, which allow you to select one item from the displayed
choices
• Check boxes, which allow you to select one or more items from
the displayed choices
Descriptions of screen elements topics include:
• Icons and menus, page Appendix E-2
Shows each icon and its related menu items, and describes what
each icon and menu displays.
• Buttons, page Appendix E-6
Shows each button and provides a description of what the
button does.
• Field descriptions, page Appendix E-16
Describes each field found on the user interface screens and
windows.
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Appendix E-1

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Icons and menus Appendix E
Icons and menus

Icons and menus allow you to display screens. Also, icons blink to
inform you that a condition requires your attention.
Overview icon
The Overview icon provides access to overall system monitoring data. When
you select it, a menu displays the following options:
• Snapshot - Select to navigate to the Snapshot screen, which displays
system status information.
• Sample status - Select to navigate to the Sample status screen, which
allows you to:
– View all unreleased tests for a sample regardless of test status
– Rerun patient results
– Release completed patient results
– Suspend a bay or section on the RSH to allow immediate access to a
sample in process
• Operations manual - Select to access the online ARCHITECT System
Operations Manual.
Orders icon
The Orders icon provides access to test ordering functions and illuminates to
notify you that new orders have been downloaded by the host computer but
have not been viewed.
When you select the Orders icon, a menu displays the following options.
• Order status - Select to navigate to the Order status screen, which displays
information on the patient, control, and calibration orders currently
managed by the ARCHITECT System. An indicator next to this menu item
displays when new orders have been downloaded by the host computer
but have not been viewed.
• Patient order - Select to navigate to the Patient order screens and views,
which allows you to enter a patient order.
• Control order - Select to navigate to the Control order screen and views,
which allows you to enter single analyte or multiconstituent control orders.
• Calibration order - Select to navigate to the Calibration order screen, which
allows you to enter a calibration order.
Appendix E-2 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix E Icons and menus
Results icon
The Results icon provides access to patient results and illuminates to notify
you results have completed and are awaiting review prior to release.
When you select the Results icon, a menu displays the following options.
• Results review - Select to navigate to the Results review screen, which
displays information on the completed patient results awaiting review and
release. An indicator next to this menu item displays to notify you results
have completed. From this screen you can select the patient results to
rerun.
• Stored results - Select to navigate to the Stored results screen, which
allows you to:
– View patient results that have been reviewed and released
– Retransmit patient results to the host computer
– Archive patient results

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Icons and menus Appendix E
QC-Cal icon
The QC-Cal icon provides access to QC results, QC graphs, and calibration
results. The icon illuminates to notify you that QC samples have completed
and are awaiting review prior to release, or that a calibration is within 1 hour
of expiration or has an Expired or Failed status.
When you select the QC-Cal icon, a menu displays the following options:
• QC result review - Select to navigate to the QC result review screen, which
displays information on completed QC results awaiting review and
release. An indicator next to this menu item displays to notify you QC
results have completed. From this screen you can select the QC results to
rerun.
• QC summary - Select to navigate to the QC summary review screen,
which provides a summary of QC data for all assay control levels. You can
select and review individual control level QC data details and the
associated Levey-Jennings graph. From this screen you can also print the
QC analysis, QC summary, and Levey-Jennings reports.
• Levey-Jennings graph - Select to view and manipulate QC data. From this
screen you can also print the Levey-Jennings report.
• Calibration status - Select to navigate to the Calibration status screen,
which provides a summary list of the calibration status of each assay and
reagent lot loaded on the system. You can select and review individual
calibration curves. An indicator next to this menu item displays to notify
you when a calibration is within 1 hour of expiration or has an Expired or
Failed status.
• Calibration history - Select to navigate to the Calibration history screen,
which provides a summary list of the calibration status for current and
previously performed calibrations. You can select, review, and archive
individual calibration curves.
• Stored QC results - Select to navigate to the Stored QC results screen,
which allows you to:
– View QC results that have been reviewed and released
– Retransmit QC results to the host computer
– Archive QC results
• QC reports - Select to navigate to the QC reports screen, which allows you
to print the QC analysis, QC summary, and Levey-Jennings reports.
Exceptions icon
The Exceptions icon provides access to patient, QC, and calibration result
exceptions and illuminates to notify you of new order exceptions.
When you select the Exceptions icon, a menu displays the following options:
• Exception status - Select to navigate to the Exception status screen, which
provides a summary listing of the exceptions that have occurred. An
indicator next to this menu item displays to notify you there are new
exceptions. From this screen you can select the patient and QC exception
results to rerun.
• Rerun status - Select to navigate to the Rerun status screen, which
provides a listing of the orders scheduled to be rerun.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix E Icons and menus
Reagents icon
The Reagents icon provides access to reagent inventory management
functions and illuminates to notify you that a reagent kit has a status other
than OK, Mixing (i System), or Overridden.
When you select the Reagents icon, a menu displays the following options:
• Reagent status - Select to navigate to the Reagent status screens, which
provides a summary and listing of the current inventory status of the
onboard reagents, and allows you to request a scan of the current reagent
kits for a selected processing module. An indicator next to this menu item
displays to notify you that a reagent kit has a status other than OK, Mixing
(i System), Overridden, or Low Alert.
• Reagent history - Select to navigate to the Reagent history screen, which
provides a historical summary listing of the reagent kits that have been
scanned by the reagent bar code reader.
Supplies icon
The Supplies icon provides access to supply inventory management
functions and illuminates to notify you that an inventory item has a status
other than OK.
When you select the Supplies icon, a menu displays the following option:
• Supply status - Select to navigate to the Supply status screens, which
provides inventory information for the onboard supplies for each
processing module. An indicator next to this menu item displays to notify
you that an inventory item has a status other than OK. From this screen
you can update the status for each item.
System icon
The System icon provides access to system diagnostics, maintenance, and
configuration functions and illuminates to notify you that an in-process
maintenance procedure requires user interaction or that a new message has
been entered into the Temporary message log.
When you select the System icon, a menu displays the following options:
• Maintenance - Select to navigate to the Maintenance screen, which allows
you to perform system maintenance procedures. An indicator next to this
menu item displays when an in-process maintenance procedure requires
user input or is complete.
• Diagnostics - Select to navigate to the Diagnostics screen, which allows
you to perform system diagnostic procedures.
• System logs - Select to navigate to the System logs screen, which allows
you to review the Temporary message log and Message history log. An
indicator next to this menu item displays when a new message has been
entered into the Temporary message log.
• Configuration - Select to navigate to the System configuration, which
allows you to configure system, assay, and QC-Cal parameters.
• Utilities - Select to navigate to the Software installation and backup, which
allows you to perform system software maintenance tasks.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Buttons Appendix E
Buttons
Each screen, window, and message has buttons. Buttons allow you to
display other screens or windows, add, edit, or delete information
from the system, print reports, or toggle between two views of a screen
or window.
Activity
Allows you to toggle from the Result list to the Activity list
during maintenance and diagnostic procedures.
Add
Saves the information you enter and updates the
corresponding list or table. Also clears data from the window
so you can add the next new item.
Add kit (c System)
Allows you to configure a new reagent kit.
This button is unavailable until you select a lot.
Add level
Allows you to add the control level information you define.
Once added, the new control level displays in the Level list.
This button is unavailable until you select a lot.
Add rule
Displays the Add / edit assay retest rules window.
In this window you can configure or edit retest rules for the
assay you selected.
Assign assay
Allows you to assign an import file assay with an assay
number from 2000 - 2999 to a user-defined assay on the
system. When the button is selected the system displays
the Select assay window, page 2-120. When importing a
calibrator the window lists all the user-defined assays
configured on the system assigned to that calibrator set.
When importing a control the window lists all the
user-defined assays configured on the system.
Cancel
Cancels your selections or entries and displays the screen
or window you were previously viewing.
Carousel (c System)
Allows you to order a sample to be run on the carousel.
Carrier
Allows you to order a sample to be run on the carrier.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix E Buttons
Close window
Allows you to close the Maintenance Perform window of an
in-process procedure so you can perform a maintenance
procedure on another module or access other screens and
windows.
Continue
Allows you to continue to the next step of a maintenance or
Define data
Displays the Define control data window allowing you to
enter expected values for multiconstituent controls.
This button is unavailable until you select an assay(s).
Delete all
Allows you to delete all the print jobs from the printer queue.
Delete assay
Allows you to delete an assay(s) for a multiconstituent
control.
This button is unavailable until you select an assay(s).
Delete kit (c System)
Allows you to delete a reagent kit.
This button is unavailable until you select a reagent kit.
Delete level
Allows you to delete the control level(s) you selected.
This button is unavailable until you select a control level.
Delete rule
Allows you to delete the retest rule(s) you selected.
This button is unavailable until you select a retest rule.
Delete
Allows you to delete the item(s) you selected.
Deselect all
Allows you to deselect all items in a list.
This button toggles between Deselect all and Select all.
Details view (c System)
Displays the details window(s) for QC and patient results.
This window displays information for a test run using a
photometric assay (c System).
Done
Accepts or saves your selections or entries and displays the
screen or window you were previously viewing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Buttons Appendix E
Edit result
Displays an edit result window allowing the system
administrator to edit the result.
The result flag EDIT displays for the result to indicate it was
edited by the system administrator.
This button is available only for photometric or
potentiometric test results.
Edit rule
Displays the Add / edit assay retest rules window allowing
you to edit a retest rule to create a new one.
This button is unavailable until you select a retest rule.
Edit
Allows you to edit the item(s) you selected.
Error ?
Displays help for the probable cause and corrective action
for the error.
Export
Initiates the process of exporting an assay file.
F1 - Exit
Displays the Snapshot screen.
F2 - Add order
Saves the order information and clears data from the screen
so that you can add the next order.
F2 - Batch details
Displays the Details for batch window allowing you to name
the batch and add comments for the current batch order.
This button is available only when the order type is batch.
F2 - Log on
Displays the Log on window allowing you to log on to the
system.
F2 - Maint. Log
Displays the Maintenance log screen.
This button toggles between F2 - Maint. Log and F2 - To do.
F2 - Print
Displays the Print options window allowing you to select the
report you want to print.
F2 - QC selection
Displays the QC selection window allowing you to select the
data to display on the Levey-Jennings graph screen.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix E Buttons
F2 - Sample details
Displays the Details for sample window allowing you to
enter patient demographic information and comments for
the current sample.
This button is available only when the order type is single.
F2 - Select all / F2 - Deselect all
Allows you to select or deselect all items in a list or table.
This button toggles between Select all and Deselect all.
F2 - To do
Displays the Maintenance screen with the To do tab
selected.
This button toggles between F2 - To do and F2 - Maint. Log.
F2 - Update supplies
Displays the Windows - Supply status screen allowing you
to update the inventory for the supplies.
F3 - Add order
Saves the order information and clears data from the screen
so that you can add the next order.
F3 - Find
Displays a find options window allowing you to search for
specific data.
F3 - Import (c System)
Displays the Import assay window allowing the system
administrator to import a clinical chemistry assay parameter
file(s).
F3 - Install
Scans the CD and initiates the system software installation
program.
This button is available only if your log on is system
administrator, CSC, or FSE.
F3 - Print
F3 - Shutdown
Displays a message asking you to confirm that you want to
shut down the system.
F4 - Approve
Displays the Approve maintenance log window allowing the
system administrator to approve the maintenance log.
This button is unavailable for the months when no
procedures were performed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Buttons Appendix E
F4 - Create backup
Displays the Create backup window allowing you to initiate a
system backup.
F4 - Export (c System)
Displays the Export assay window allowing you to export a
clinical chemistry assay parameter file(s) to a floppy disk.
F4 - Print
F4 - Scan
Allows you to request a scan of the reagent carousel(s) for a
selected module for the assay(s) you selected.
F5 - Assay options
Displays an assay options window allowing you to select or
enter assay-specific data for the assay(s) you selected.
F5 - Delete
delete the selected item(s).
F5 - Details
DIsplays the details window allowing you to view detailed
information for the item(s) you selected.
F5 - Perform
Displays the Maintenance perform window or Diagnostic
perform window for the selected procedure.
F5 - Print
F5 - Start-up
start-up the system.
F6 - Assign location (c System)
Displays the assign location window allowing you to select a
specific location for the reagent.
F6 - Configure
Displays the configuration window allowing you to configure
the information for the selected item(s).
F6 - Delete
F6 - Rerun
Displays a rerun options window allowing you to schedule
the selected tests to be rerun, the module on which you
want to rerun them, and the dilutions for the assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix E Buttons
F6 - Suspend
suspend the selected bay or section to access the sample
you selected.
F6 - Stop
stop the selected module.
F6 - Transmit to host
Allows you to transmit the selected result(s) to the LIS.
This button is unavailable until bidirectional host
communication is configured to On or On with query.
F6 - Version
Displays the Version details for procedure (maintenance)
window, or the Version details for procedure (diagnostics)
window.
This button is unavailable until you select a maintenance
item from one of the categories.
F7 - Delete
F7 - Details
Displays the details window allowing you to view detailed
information for the item(s) you selected.
F7 - Pause
pause the selected module.
F7 - Unload (i 1000SR)
Allows you to manually unload a reagent kit from the
reagent carousel. This button is unavailable until you select
a reagent(s) to unload.
F8 - Archive
Displays the Archive results window, page 5-239 so that you
can save the selected results or calibration curves to a
floppy disk.
This button is unavailable until you select a result or
calibration curve.
F8 - Cancel Unload (i 1000SR)
Allows you to cancel an unload request when a reagent(s) is
in the scheduled unload status.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Buttons Appendix E
F8 - Release
Releases the selected test results.
NOTE: On the Sample status screen this button is not

available if any of the selected items are exceptions (red
text) or are already released (blue text).
F8 - Reset (c System)
reset the volume and onboard stability for the non-bar
coded reagent kit you selected.
F8 - Run
initialize the selected module to running status.
F8 - Transmit to host
Allows you to transmit the selected result(s) to the host
(LIS).
This button is unavailable until bidirectional host
communication is configured to On or On with query.
Fail Curve
Displays a message asking that you confirm you are failing
the selected curve so that it can no longer be used to
calculate results.
Formula tool
Allows the system administrator to enter a formula when
creating a calculated assay.
Buttons on the formula tool provide the following functions:
/ = Divide
* = Multiply
+ = Add
- = Subtract
= Backspace
= Calculate square root
exp = Perform an exponential calculation
Graph scroll buttons
Allows you to scroll left and right one page at a time.
Graph view (c System)
Displays the reaction graph and absorbance data for QC
and patient results.
Help
Provides access to context-sensitive help for the active SCC
screen, window, or error message.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix E Buttons
Import (c System)
Initiates the process of importing an assay file.
L1
Corresponds to the processing module keypad L1 key.
When you are instructed to select this button during a
maintenance or diagnostic procedure, you can select either
the screen button or the keypad button.
L2
L3
L4
Left scroll arrow
Allows you to move left one grid square at a time to select a
procedure.
Line scroll down arrow
Allows you to scroll down one line at a time.
Line scroll up arrow

Allows you to scroll up one line at a time.
List
Displays a list of items from which to choose. You can select
one of the items from the list or press the Esc key on the
keyboard to exit.
This button is unavailable (gray background) if there are no
items in a list.
Next
Allows you to display the next item when you have selected
more than one.
OK
Allows you to acknowledge a displayed message and
displays the screen or window you were previously viewing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Buttons Appendix E
Page scroll down

Allows you to move the cursor down one page (view) at a
time.
Page scroll up
Allows you to move the cursor up one page (view) at a time.
Point details scroll buttons

Allows you to scroll left or right one point at a time.
Previous
Allows you to display the previous item when you have
selected more than one.
Print
Allows you to print the results of the procedure you
selected.
Proceed
Allows you to continue to the next step of the maintenance
or diagnostic procedure.
Quit
Cancels your selection and displays the screen or window
you were previously viewing.
Recalc (c System)
Allows you to recalculate results based on a new active
calibration curve.
Refresh
Allows you to refresh the screen to see any new items that
may be available.
Rescale (c System)
Allows you to adjust the Y axis scale for the reaction graph
based on the range provided.
Results
Allows you to toggle from the Activity list to the Result list
during maintenance and diagnostic procedures.
Right arrow
Allows you to move right one grid square at a time to select
a procedure.
Select all
Allows you to select all items in a list.
This button toggles between Select all and Deselect all.
Select assays
Displays the Select assay window, page 2-120 allowing you
to select one or more assays from the list.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix E Buttons
Unassign assay
Allows you to delete an assay assignment. When this button
is selected the previously assigned assay is deleted from
the System Assay/Number column and the status is
changed to No Assay.
Unload (c System)
Notifies the system that the selected non-bar coded reagent
kit is no longer in the selected position.
Update
Allows you to update the screen to view data for the
selected date range.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Field descriptions Appendix E
Field descriptions
Field descriptions explain the kinds of information you can enter,
select, or view.
Field description topics include:
• Overview icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-16
• Orders icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-23
• Results icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-39
• QC-Cal icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-61
• Exceptions icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-96
• Reagents icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-109
• Supplies icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-117
• System icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-120
Overview icon screens and windows

The Overview icon allows you to access the menu items Snapshot,
Sample status, and Operations manual.
Overview icon screens and windows topics include:
• Snapshot screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-16
• Log on window field descriptions, page Appendix E-20
• Sample status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-20
• Find options (Sample status) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-22
Snapshot screen field descriptions
To see a description of the function bar buttons on this screen, see

Buttons, page Appendix E-6.
Field descriptions are listed from left to right, top to bottom of the
screen or window.
Operator
Displays the ID of the operator who is logged on.
Date
Displays the current system date.
Time
Displays the current system time.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Appendix E Field descriptions
Sample handler graphic

Displays the status of the sample handler graphic.
Processing module graphic (cSystem)

Displays the module number in an integrated system and
the current status of the module.
Processing module graphic (iSystem)

Displays the module number in a multi-module/integrated
system and the current status of the module.
Order status button

Displays the number of tests currently processing for the
module you selected.
When you select the Order status button, the Order status
screen, page 5-142 displays.
Reagent status button
Displays the total number of reagent kits on the module you
selected. If you select the Reagent status button, the
Reagent status screens, page 5-49 display. A caution
symbol displays if any kit has a status other than OK, Mixing
(i System), or Overridden.
Once you resolve the problem(s), the caution symbol no
longer displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Calibration status button

Displays the status of the calibration curves for the c System
module.
When you select the Calibration status button, the
Calibration status screen, page 6-16 displays.
OK displays if all calibration curves for the onboard reagents
have an Active or Overridden status.
A caution symbol displays if any calibration curve for the
onboard reagents is within 1 hour of expiration or has an
Expired or Failed status.
Once you resolve the problem(s), the caution symbol no
longer displays.
Supply status button (cSystem)
Displays the status of bulk and onboard solutions and liquid
waste for the processing module.
For bulk and onboard solutions, OK displays if all liquids
have inventory of 20% volume or more.
For bulk and onboard solutions, a caution symbol displays if
liquid inventory is either empty or the volume is less than
20%.
For onboard solutions in the sample carousel, OK displays if
the sample carousel contains adequate volume.
For onboard solutions in the sample carousel, a caution
symbol displays if the sample carousel does not contain
adequate volume.
Once you replenish the solution(s), the caution symbol no
longer displays.
For liquid waste, OK displays until the waste is full. A
caution symbol displays when the waste is full.
Once you empty the waste, the caution symbol no longer
displays.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Supply status button (iSystem)

Displays the status of bulk solutions, solid waste, and RVs
(reaction vessels) for the processing module. If you select
the Supply status button, the Supply status screen - i
System view displays. See Supply status screens,
page 5-17.
For bulk solutions, OK displays if all liquids have inventory of
20% volume or more.
For bulk solutions, a caution symbol displays if liquid
inventory is either empty or the volume is less than 20%.
Once you replenish the solution, the caution symbol no
longer displays.
For solid waste, OK displays until the waste inventory is at
80%. A caution symbol displays when the waste is 80% or
more.
Once you empty the waste, the caution symbol no longer
displays.
For RVs, OK displays until inventory is at 20%. A caution
symbol displays when inventory is below 20%.
Once you add RVs, the caution symbol no longer displays.
Reruns status button
Displays the number of tests waiting to be rerun. The tests
may have been ordered manually or automatically. After the
system software schedules the tests, the button no longer
displays.
When you select the Reruns status button, the Rerun status
Exceptions status button
Displays the number of exceptions for review.
When you select the Exceptions status button, the
Exception status screen, page 5-255 displays.
Printer status button
Displays only if a printer is available.
When you select the Printer status button, the Printer
window, page 5-309 displays.
The Printer status button displays a caution symbol if an
alert condition exists.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
LIS status button

Displays only when the LIS (host) is enabled. The number of
results pending transmission to the host display below the
button.
When you select the LIS status button, the System logs
The button displays a caution symbol when a
communication problem exists with the LIS.
ARM status button
Displays only when the system is configured with the
ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module
accessory).
When you select the ARM status button, the System logs
The button displays a caution symbol when a problem exists
with the ARM.
Updates button
Displays when one or more ARCHITECT System Software
updates is available for installation. When you select the
Updates button, the Utilities screen - System updates view,
page 2-171 displays.
Sample Find button
When you select the Sample Find button the Find options
(Sample status) window, page 5-160 displays
Log on window field descriptions
To see a description of all buttons on this screen or window, see

screen or window.
User name Allows you to enter your operator ID, up to 12 alphanumeric

characters, or type ADMIN to log on as an administrator.
Password Displays if you type ADMIN in the User name field and allows you to
enter the system administrator password.
NOTE: General operators are not required to enter a password.
Sample status screen field descriptions


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
screen or window.
SID and Name Displays the sample ID, which can be one of the following:
• The bar code number or ID assigned to the patient sample
• The SID of the first sample in the batch
• The control name and level
• The calibrator name and level
Displays the first 15 characters of the name, which can be one of the
following:
• The patient's name for patient orders
• The batch name for batch orders
• The control name and level for control orders
• The calibrator name and level for calibration orders
C / P and B / S Displays one of the following sample locations:

• Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH)
• Bay / section numbers (RSH)
• CRSL (c System sample carousel)
• LAS (laboratory automation system)
• LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000)
NOTE: For pending orders when you have not manually assigned a
carrier or carousel position, this field is blank.
ASSAY and Displays the:

CODES
• Assay - name of the test requested for processing and displays:
– Black if the test has a status of Pending, Scheduled, or
Running
– Green if the test is completed but not released
– Blue if the test is completed and released
– Red if the test is an exception
• Codes - up to four single character codes to indicate processing
condition(s) and displays:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-145.
STATUS/RESULT Displays the:

• Status - current status (Pending, Scheduled, or Running) of the
test displays black. See Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-145.
• Date and time (estimated time of completion) - displays black
• Result - value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of
result and displays:
• Date and time (time of completion) and displays:
• Error code and message (where applicable) - displays red
Find options (Sample status) window field descriptions

screen or window.
SID Allows you to enter the sample ID you want to search for. You can
enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
This field supports a wildcard (*) search.
PID Allows you to enter the patient ID you want to search for.
Last name Allows you to enter the last name of the patient you want to search
for.
First name Allows you to enter the first name of the patient you want to search
for.
Date Allows you to enter a date range you want to search on.
C Allows you to enter one of the following:

• Carrier ID (RSH/SSH)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• LAS for samples aspirated from the LAS track
• LAS carousel ID (i 2000)
This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS.
P Allows you to enter the position number you want to search on.
Bay or Section Allows you to enter the bay or section number you want to search for.
(RSH)
Orders icon screens and windows

The Order icon allows you to access the menu items Order status,
Patient order, Control order, and Calibration order.
Orders icon screens and windows topics include:
• Patient order screen - Single patient view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-24
• Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-25
• Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-26
• Assay options (Patient order) window - Manual dilution view field
descriptions, page Appendix E-27
• Assay options (Patient order) window - Automated dilution view field
• Details for sample window field descriptions, page Appendix E-29
• Details for batch window field descriptions, page Appendix E-30
• Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-30
• Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-31
• Assay options (Control order) window - Manual dilution view field
• Assay options (Control order) window - Automated dilution view field
• Order status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-34

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window field descriptions,

page Appendix E-35
• Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - Single order
view field descriptions, page Appendix E-36
• Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (bar coded) view field
• Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (non-bar coded) view
field descriptions, page Appendix E-38
Patient order screen - Single patient view field descriptions

screen or window.
Order type Allows you to specify whether you want to create a single patient or
batch order.
NOTE: Batch ordering is not available on the sample carousel (c

System) or if your system is configured with an LAS (laboratory
automation system).
Sampling Allows you to indicate the priority of the sample on the Order List
priority Report, page Appendix A-52. If you select the STAT option, an S code
displays on the Order List report. You MUST priority load the samples
with the S code to process these samples first.
C/P Allows you to select the carrier or carousel button to specify whether
to run the sample on the sample carrier or the sample carousel (c
System).
C Displays when you select the carrier button. Allows you to enter the ID
for the carrier or LAS carousel (i 2000) in which you place the sample
for processing. (Optional when using bar coded samples.)
P Allows you to enter the position for the sample carrier or carousel in
which you place the sample for processing. (Optional when using bar
coded samples).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
SID Allows you to enter the sample ID. You can enter up to 20
alphanumeric characters, which are defined by Abbott Laboratories as
A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and the special characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ #
$ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and <space>.
IMPORTANT: Contact your host system vendor to verify that your

host computer handles special characters (if used in sample IDs) as
characters rather than functions. Some computers may interpret
special characters as a line return, line feed, delimiter, or wildcard.
Panels (list) Lists the panels available on the system. When you select a panel, all
assays in that panel are selected.
NOTE: If you deselect an assay from the panel, the panel name is
deselected.
Assays (list) Lists the assays available on the system. You must select at least one
assay before you can create an order using the F3 - Add order button.
Sample manual Allows you to specify a manual dilution factor for a sample.
dilution factor: 1:
The system uses the dilution factor to automatically calculate the
sample concentration and report the result.
NOTE: The entry range that is allowed for a manual dilution factor is 2
- 999.
Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions

screen or window.
batch order.

automation system).
Starting SID Allows you to enter the starting sample ID of the batch to be
processed. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters, which are
defined by Abbott Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and the special
characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and <space>.
IMPORTANT: Contact your host system vendor to verify your host

computer handles special characters (if used in sample IDs) as

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Ending SID Allows you to enter the ending sample ID of the batch to be processed.
You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters, which are defined by
Abbott Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and the special characters , / > <
? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and <space>.
IMPORTANT: Contact your host system vendor to verify your host

computer handles special characters (if used in sample IDs) as
deselected.
dilution factor: 1:
- 999.
Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view field descriptions

screen or window.
batch order.

automation system).
Starting C Allows you to enter the starting carrier ID.
P Allows you to enter the starting carrier position for the sample.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Starting SID Allows you to enter the starting sample ID of the batch to be
processed. You can enter up to nine numeric characters.
Number of Allows you to enter the number of samples to be tested as part of this
samples batch.
dilution factor: 1:
- 999.
deselected.
Assay options (Patient order) window - Manual dilution view field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations:

Assay Displays the name of the assay(s) you ordered.
SID Displays the sample ID.
Name Displays the patient's name if entered on the Details for sample window,
page 5-130

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Module selection Allows you to select a processing module other than the default
(iSystem) module when you have a multi-module (i System). If you select
Manual, a check box displays for each processing module.
Module Displays a check box for each processing module if you select manual
(iSystem) as the Module selection option.
Dilution Allows you to enter the number of replicates for the specified manual
protocols / dilution factor when you desire more than one replicate.
number of
replicates
Assay options (Patient order) window - Automated dilution view field descriptions

screen or window.

Name Displays the patient's name if entered on the Details for sample window,
page 5-130.
(iSystem) module when you have a multi-module (i System). If you select
Manual, a check box displays for each processing module.
Dilution Allows you to select an automated dilution and number of replicates.

protocols /
number of
replicates

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Details for sample window field descriptions

screen or window.
SID Displays the sample identification number that you entered on the
Patient order screens and views, page 5-110.
PID Allows you to enter a patient ID number. You can enter up to 20

alphanumeric characters.
NOTE: When you enter a PID, enter only details that you know to be
accurate. If you do not know the information, leave this field empty.
Never edit information entered previously in a field. If you make edits,
the software recognizes the PID as a different and unique patient.
Last name Allows you to enter a patient's last name. You can enter up to 20
First name Allows you to enter a patient's first name. You can enter up to 20
M. Allows you to enter the patient's middle name. You can enter up to 12
Date of birth Allows you to enter the month, year, and the day of the patient's birth.
This information provides an age-specific reference range if you have
configured the assay to provide reference ranges.
Gender Allows you to select a gender.

This information provides a gender-specific reference range if you
have configured the assay to provide reference ranges.
Draw date Allows you to enter the date the sample was drawn.
Time Allows you to enter the time the sample was drawn.
Location Allows you to enter the location associated with the patient. You can
Doctor Allows you to enter the name of the patient's doctor. You can enter up
to 20 alphanumeric characters.
Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the sample. You can enter up to 50
characters.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Details for batch window field descriptions

screen or window.
Batch name Displays the name of the batch. The default name is
BATCHXX:XX:XX, where XX:XX:XX represents a timestamp. The
timestamp is based on when the patient order batch screen was
entered, or the time after the previous order was added. The name can
be edited to contain up to 20 alphanumeric characters. The name
displays for all samples in the batch order.
Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the samples in the batch. You can
enter up to 50 characters. The comment displays for all samples in the
batch order.
Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions

screen or window.
Order type Allows you to specify whether you want to create a single analyte or
multiconstituent control order.
prints on the Order List report. You MUST priority load the samples
System).
Starting C Displays when you select the carrier button. Allows you to enter the
starting ID for the carrier or LAS carousel (i 2000) in which you place
the first control for processing.
NOTE: All control levels selected must fit on one carrier/carousel.
Starting P Displays the position (P) in which you place the first control for
processing.
(Optional when using bar coded samples).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: All control levels selected must fit on one carrier/carousel.
Assays (list) Lists the assays available on the system. You must first select an assay
to display the control level(s) and lot number(s) configured for that
assay.
Sample manual Allows you to select a manual dilution for the sample. You must then
dilution factor: 1: enter the manual dilution factor.
- 999.
Lot (list) Displays a list of control lots configured for the assay. The default lot
displays when you select the assay.
Levels Required field that allows you to select user-configured control levels
for the selected assay. You can select one or more levels to process.
Based on the assay selected, up to six levels of controls are supported.
Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions

screen or window.
Order type Allows you to specify whether you want to create a single analyte or
multiconstituent control order.
displays on the Order List report. You MUST priority load the samples
System).
Starting P Displays the position (P) in which you place the first control for
processing.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
SID (list): Displays a list of the multiconstituent bar code sample IDs configured
for the selected control lot and level.
Control (list) Displays a list of the multiconstituent control names configured on

the system.
Sample manual Allows you to select a manual dilution for the sample. You must then
dilution factor: 1: enter the manual dilution factor.
- 999.
Lot (list) Displays a list of lot numbers configured for the control. The default
lot displays when you select the control.
Levels Allows you to select the user-configured control levels for the control.
Based on the control you select, up to three levels are supported.
Panels (list) Lists the QC panels available on the system. When you select a panel,
all assays in that panel are selected.
deselected.
Assays (list) Lists the assays configured for the control level on the system. You
must select at least one assay before you can create an order using the
F2 - Add order button.
Assay options (Control order) window - Manual dilution view field descriptions

screen or window.

carrier or carousel position, this field is blank

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Control name Displays the name of the control you selected on the Control order
screen.
Control level Displays the control level you selected on the Control order screen.
Control lot Displays the control lot number you selected on the Control order
screen.
(iSystem) module when you have a multi-module i System. If you select Manual,
a check box displays for each processing module.
Dilution Allows you to enter the number of replicates for the dilution when
protocols / more than one replicate is desired.
number of
replicates
Assay options (Control order) window - Automated dilution view field descriptions

screen or window.

Control name Displays the name of the control you selected on the Control order
screen.
Control level Displays the control level you selected on the Control order screen.
Control lot Displays the control lot number you selected on the Control order
screen.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Dilution Allows you to select an automated dilution and number of replicates.

protocols /
number of
replicates
Order status screen field descriptions

screen or window.

SID Displays the sample ID, which can be one of the following:
• The SID of the first sample in the batch
• The control name and level
• The calibrator name and level
NAME Displays the first 15 characters of the name, which can be one of the
following:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
ASSAY Displays the name of the test you ordered.
STATUS Displays the current status of the assay you ordered. See Descriptions of
test statuses, page 5-145.
TIME Displays the time the order will complete (in 24 hour format). Time
information displays for all samples with a status of Running.
CODE Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing

condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-145.
Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Allows you to select the module in a multi-module/integrated system

to search on.
Name Allows you to enter the patient or control name you want to search
for.

(RSH)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay Allows you to search for a specific assay ordered.

Time from / to Allows you to enter a time range you want to search for.
Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - Single order view field
descriptions

screen or window.

Bay / Section Displays the numbers of the bay / section in which the sample is
located. (RSH)
Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient.
Name Displays the name, which can be one of the following:

Gender Displays the gender of the patient.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
PID Displays the assigned patient ID, if entered on the Details for sample
window, page 5-130 or sent by the host.
(For patient samples only)
Draw date/time Displays the date and time the sample was drawn.
Assay Displays the name of the assay you ordered.
Dilution Displays the dilution requested for the assay.
Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay.
Status Displays the status of the order. See Descriptions of test statuses,
page 5-145.
Codes Displays the codes that indicate processing conditions. See Descriptions
of processing codes, page 5-145.
Time to Displays the time and date the test will complete.
completion
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test was ordered.
Location Displays the location associated with the patient.
Doctor Displays the name of the patient's doctor.
Reference assay Displays the photometric reference assay. (For sample interference
index assays only - c System)
Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the order. You can enter up to 50
characters.
Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions

screen or window.
Starting C / P Displays the starting carrier (C) and position (P) for the first sample in
the batch.
Starting SID Displays the sample ID of the first sample in the batch.
Ending SID Displays the sample ID of the last sample in the batch.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Name Displays the name of the batch.
Samples Displays the number of samples in the batch order scanned by the
scanned sample handler.
Assay info Displays the assay(s) and dilution(s) ordered for the batch.
(table)
• Assay
• Dilution
Status Displays the status of the batch order. See Descriptions of test statuses,
page 5-145.
Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the batch. You can enter up to 50
characters.
NOTE: If the status is Pending, the comment is applied to all orders

within the batch. If the status is In Process, a comment cannot be
entered for batch orders and must be entered for each individual
sample.
If you entered a comment on the Details for batch window, page 5-131,
the comment displays here.
Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (non-bar coded) view field
descriptions

screen or window.
Starting C / P Displays the starting carrier (C) and position (P) for the first sample in
the batch.
Starting SID Displays the sample ID of the first sample in the batch.
Number of Displays the number of samples to be processed in the batch.

samples
Name Displays the name of the batch.
Samples Displays the number of samples in the batch order scanned by the
scanned sample handler.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay info Displays the assay(s) and dilution(s) ordered for the batch.
(table)
• Assay
• Dilution
Status Displays the status of the batch order. See Descriptions of test statuses,
page 5-145.
Operator ID Displays the ID that of the operator logged on when the test was
ordered.
Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the batch. You can enter up to 50
characters.
NOTE: If the status is Pending, the comment is applied to all orders

within the batch. If the status is In Process, a comment cannot be
entered for batch orders and must be entered for each individual
sample.
If you entered a comment on the Details for batch window, page 5-131,
the comment displays here.
Results icon screens and windows

The Results icon allows you to access the menu items Results review
and Stored results.
Results icon screens and windows topics include:
• Results review screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-40
• Find options (Results review) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-41
• Details for result (Results review) window - Calculated view field
• Details for result (Results review) window - Data view (c System) field
• Details for result (Results review) window - Photometric - graph view
(c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-45
• Details for result (Results review) window - Sample interference index
view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-46
• Details for result (Results review) window (i System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-48
• Rerun options window field descriptions, page Appendix E-49
• Stored results screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-50

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Find options (Stored results) window field descriptions,

page Appendix E-51
• Details for result (Stored results) window - Calculated view field
• Details for result (Stored results) window - Data view (c System) field
• Details for result (Stored results) window - Photometric - graph view (c
System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-56
• Details for result (Stored results) window - Sample interference index
• Details for result (Stored results) window (i System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-59
• Archive results window field descriptions, page Appendix E-61
Results review screen field descriptions

screen or window.

NAME Displays the name of the patient.
ASSAY Displays the name of the assay.
RESULT Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the
result.
FLAG Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Find options (Results review) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Allows you to select the module in a multi-module system to search

on.
for.

(RSH)
This field supports a wildcard (*) search

Reagent lot Allows you to search by the reagent lot number.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Results with Allows you to search for results with flags or interpretations.
option
Date from / to Allows you to enter a date range you want to search for.
NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific time
interval.
interval.
Operator ID Allows you to search for the operator ID logged on to the system at the
time the order was placed.
Details for result (Results review) window - Calculated view field descriptions

screen or window.

Module / Serial Displays the module number and system serial number.
No.
Name Displays the name of the patient or batch.
Bay / Section Displays the bay / section in which you loaded the sample. (RSH)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay Displays the assay that was processed.
Constituent Displays the names, results, and flags for the constituent assays used to
assays (table) determine the calculated result.
• Module (M)
• Assay
• Result
• Flags
Result Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the
result.
Normal range Displays the normal / therapeutic range of the assay.
Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient
Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing

Status Displays the status of the result as follows:

• Complete - Results have completed processing
Time completed Displays the date and time the result was completed.
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed.
Draw date / time Displays the date and time the sample was drawn.
Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the result. You can enter up to 50
characters.
Details for result (Results review) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH)

Module / Serial Displays the module number and serial number of the module on
No. which the assay was run.
result.
Absorbance Displays the response value used in calculating the result.

• mV (ICT only)
• absorbance (photometric assays only)
NOTE: This field does not display for sample interference index assays.
Normal range Displays the normal / therapeutic range of the assay.
Cuvette Displays the number of the cuvette used to process results.
Dilution Displays the dilution used for this test.



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reagent lot Displays the reagent lot used to process the sample and generate the
result.
Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the result.
Time of cal Displays the date and time the reagent lot calibration was completed.
characters.
Details for result (Results review) window - Photometric - graph view (c System)
field descriptions

screen or window.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
POINT (table) Displays the read points and absorbance readings.

• Point - Displays the read points 1 through 33.
• Primary - Displays the absorbance readings for each read point at
the primary wavelength.
• Secondary - Displays the absorbance readings for each read point
at the secondary wavelength.
• PRIM - SEC - Displays the difference of the primary wavelength
minus the secondary wavelength absorbance.
NOTE: If no absorbance data is available, no information displays in

this table.
Wavelength Displays the wavelength and reaction type.
Graph Indicates the type of absorbance data that displays on the graph.
Y axis scale Allows you to specify the absorbance axis range to view on the graph.
When you edit these fields, the Rescale button becomes available.
Assay Displays the name of the assay that was processed.
result.
Details for result (Results review) window - Sample interference index view (c
System) field descriptions

screen or window.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
No.: which the assay was run.
result.
Normal range Displays the normal range configured for the assay.


result.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reference assay Displays the photometric reference assay.
characters.
Details for result (Results review) window (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.

result.
RLU Displays the response value in RLUs (relative light units) used to
calculate the result.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Normal range Displays the normal range configured for the assay.


result.
characters.
Rerun options window field descriptions

screen or window.
to rerun the sample on the sample carrier or the sample carousel (c
System).
C Allows you to enter the RSH/SSH carrier ID or i 2000 LAS carousel ID

(C) in which the sample will be rerun. The default carrier or carousel
ID and position are the same location as the original order.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: If the original order did not have a carrier or carousel ID (C)
and position (P) manually assigned, these fields are blank.
P Allows you to enter the position (P) in which you place the sample for
rerun.
SID Displays the identifier for the sample or control being rerun.
Assay Displays the name of the assay to be used for rerun.
Name Displays the name of the patient or control.
result.
a check box displays for each processing module. Selecting multiple
modules results in processing being performed on each module.
Dilution Displays the dilution at which the original order was run. Allows you
protocols / to select an automated dilution and number of replicates.
number of
If the original order was a manual dilution, only Number of replicates
replicates
is available. The rerun must use the original manual dilution. To use a
different dilution protocol, you must generate a new order.
If the original order was undiluted or an automated dilution, you can
select a dilution protocol and replicates.
Stored results screen field descriptions

screen or window.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NAME Displays the name of the patient.
RESULT Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the
stored result.
FLAG Displays the flags associated with the stored result. See Descriptions of
patient result flags, page 5-187.

Find options (Stored results) window field descriptions

screen or window.

on.
for.

(RSH)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


Results with Allows you to search for results with flags or interpretations.
option
interval.
interval.
Status Allows you to search by result status. See Descriptions of test statuses,
page 5-145.
Details for result (Stored results) window - Calculated view field descriptions

screen or window.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Module / Serial Displays the module number and system serial number.
No.
Name Displays the name of the patient.
Constituent Displays the following information for the constituent assays used to
• Module (M)
• Assay
• Result
• Flags
result.
Normal range Displays the normal / therapeutic range for the assay.


• Complete - Results have completed and are not pending
transmission to the host (when connected to a host computer).
• Pending transmission - Results have completed and are pending

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Pending collation - Results have been selected for release to the

host and, depending on the collation option setting:
– all results associated with the SID have not completed or
have not been selected for release.
OR
– all results associated with the SID on a particular processing
module have not completed or have not been selected for
release.
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test completed.
Comment Displays the comment entered for the result.
Details for result (Stored results) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions

screen or window.

Module / Serial Displays the module number and the serial number on which the
No. assay was run.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
result.

• mV (ICT only)


OR
release.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reagent lot Displays the master lot number of the reagent used to process the
sample and generate the result.
Time of cal Displays the date and time the reagent lot calibration was calibrated.
Details for result (Stored results) window - Photometric - graph view (c System)
field descriptions

screen or window.

No. assay was run.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
POINT (table) Displays the following information.


this table.
Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed.
result.
Details for result (Stored results) window - Sample interference index view (c

screen or window.

No. assay was run.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
result.


OR
release.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reference assay Displays the photometric reference assay.
Details for result (Stored results) window (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.

No. assay was run.
PID Displays the assigned patient ID if entered on the Details for sample

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
result.


OR
release.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Archive results window field descriptions

screen or window.
INSTRUCTIONS Displays the step-by-step instructions you must perform.

(box)
Archive name Displays the name the system uses to archive the file. You cannot
change the name. The naming convention displays in the format
xxxxx\yyyyyyyy.Pzz, where:
• xxxxx represents the ARCHITECT System number
• yyyyyyyy represents that day's date
• Pzz represents the archive number
The patient archive identifier (.Pzz) starts at 01 and increments for
each patient archive created on each new day.
Number of Displays the number of results you selected for the archive from the
results selected Stored results screen, page 5-224.
Space required Displays the approximate amount of space needed on the CD to

perform the archive.
Space available Displays the amount of space available on the CD currently in the CD
drive. If the correct CD is not recognized, an information message
displays in this field. See Descriptions of archive messages, page 5-233.
Delete records Allows you to delete the result records after you archive them.
after archive
Default: Delete records after archive.
QC-Cal icon screens and windows

The QC-Cal icon allows you to access the menu items QC result
review, QC summary, Levey-Jennings graph, Calibration status,
Calibration history, Stored QC results, and QC reports.
QC-Cal icon screens and windows topics include:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• QC result review screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-63

• Find options (QC result review) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-64
• Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Data view (c
• Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Photometric - graph
• Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System) field
• Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated view
• Rerun options (QC result review) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-70
• Levey-Jennings graph screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-71
• QC selection window field descriptions, page Appendix E-72
• Point detail window field descriptions, page Appendix E-73
• Calibration order screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-74
• Assay options (Calibration order) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-75
• Calibration status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-75
• Find options (Calibration status and Calibration history) window
• Calibration curve window - Linear assay view (c System) field
• Calibration curve window - Use cal factor / blank assay view (c
• Calibration curve window - Potentiometric assay view (c System) field
• Calibration curve window - Adjust assay view (i System) field
• Calibration curve window - Index assay view (i System) field
• Calibration curve window - Full assay view (i System) field
• Calibration history screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-84

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Archive calibration curves window field descriptions, page Appendix

E-85
• Stored QC results screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-85
• Find options (Stored QC results) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-86
• Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Data view (c
• Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Photometric - graph
• Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System) field
• Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Calculated view
• Archive QC results window field descriptions, page Appendix E-93
• QC reports screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-94
• QC summary review screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-94
• Find options (QC summary review) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-95
• Details for QC summary window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-95
QC result review screen field descriptions

screen or window.
M Displays the number of the module that processed the control.
NOTE: Calculated assay results are assigned to module 5.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
CONTROL NAME Displays the name of the control that processed.
LEVEL Displays the level of the control that was processed.
RESULT Displays the value and units of the result.
FLAG Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of quality
Find options (QC result review) window field descriptions

screen or window.

on.
Control name Allows you to enter the control name you want to search for.
Control lot Allows you to enter the lot number of the control you want to search
for.

P Allows you to enter the position (P) number you want to search on.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
(RSH)


Results with Allows you to search for results with flags.

option
interval.
interval.
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Data view (c System) field
descriptions

screen or window.

Control name Displays the name of the control.
Control lot Displays the lot number for the control.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Control level Displays the level that was run for the control.
Result Displays the value and unit of the result.

• mV (ICT only)
Control range Displays the control range configured when you created the control
during QC configuration.
Dilution Displays the dilution value used for this control.


• Complete - Results have completed.
No. assay was run.
Time completed Displays the date and time the control was processed.
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the control

completed.
Reagent lot Displays the reagent lot used to process the control and generate the
result.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
characters.
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Photometric - graph view (c

screen or window.

POINT (table) Displays the following information.


this table.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


No. assay was run.

completed.
result.
characters.
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated view field descriptions

screen or window.

No. assay was run.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Module (M)
• Assay
• Result
• Flags



completed.
characters.
Rerun options (QC result review) window field descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
to rerun the sample on the sample carrier or the sample carousel (c
System).
C Allows you to enter the RSH/SSH carrier ID or i 2000 LAS carousel ID

(C) in which the sample will be rerun. The default carrier or carousel
ID and position are the same location as the original order.
NOTE: If the original order did not have a carrier or carousel ID (C)
and position (P) manually assigned, these fields are blank.
P Allows you to enter the position (P) in which the sample will be placed
for rerun.
Assay Displays the name of the assay you requested for the control.
Control level Displays the name of the level for the control.
a check box displays for each processing module. Selecting multiple
modules results in processing being performed on each module.
Dilution Displays the dilution at which the original order was run. Allows you
protocols / to select an automated dilution and number of replicates.
number of
If the original order was a manual dilution, only Number of replicates
replicates
is available. The rerun must use the original manual dilution. To use a
different dilution protocol, you must generate a new order.
Levey-Jennings graph screen field descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Displays the name of the assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Comparison type Displays the source of the mean used to compare to the expected
mean.
Control Displays the name of the control selected.
Exp. date Displays the expiration date of the control lot selected.
Module Displays the number of the module used to process the control(s).
Status Displays the current status of the assay on the selected module.
Statistics (fields) Displays the following statistical data elements related to a specific
level of control:
• Level
• Mean
• SD
• N
• Comparison mean
• Visible data range
See Levey-Jennings graph statistical data elements, page 5-276.
Date range Displays the date range used for the calculation.
Date Displays the date for the selected point on the graph.
Value Displays the value of the selected point on the graph.
QC selection window field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Allows you to select a processing module other than the default
module.
Date range for Allows you to enter the date range of the data to display.
calculations / to

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Comparison type Allows you to select the source of the mean used to compare to the
expected control mean.
Options are:
• None
• Manufacturers
• Module cumulative
• System cumulative
Assay (list) Allows you to select one assay to include in the Levey-Jennings graph.
Control name Allows you to select one control name to include in the
(list) Levey-Jennings graph.
Control lot (list) Allows you to select one control lot to include in the Levey-Jennings
graph. The system uses the configured default lot number if you do
not make another selection.
Control level Allows you to select one or more levels to include in the
Point detail window field descriptions

screen or window.
Point value Displays the value and units of the control point selected.
Point SD Displays the point value's standard deviation from the mean.
Mean Displays the expected mean of the control data selected.
1 SD Displays the +/- 1 standard deviation of the control data selected.
Time completed Displays the date and time the control result completed.

completed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
result.

Include / Exclude Allows you to include the point again or exclude it.
NOTE: You must enter a comment before the point is included again
or excluded.
Westgard Allows you to re-evaluate a selected control result after including or

re-evaluation excluding the point.
Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the control point. You can enter up
to 50 characters.
Calibration order screen field descriptions

screen or window.
C/P Allows you to specify whether to run the sample on the sample carrier
or the sample carousel (c System).
NOTE: This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS.
NOTE: The system automatically increments the correct number of

positions required for the calibration for up to five consecutive
carriers.
Starting P Displays the starting carousel position (P) in which the calibrator will
be placed for processing.
NOTE: This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS.
Assays (list) Lists the assays installed on the system. If you select the carousel
button, only c System assays display.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay options (Calibration order) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Displays the name of the assay to be processed.
Calibrator name Displays the name of the calibrator set used to calibrate the assay.
Lot (list) Allows you to enter a calibrator lot (i System).

Displays the default calibrator lot number and allows you to select an
alternate lot if more than one is configured (c System).
Expiration date Allows you to enter the calibrator expiration date (i System).
Displays the expiration date configured for the selected lot (c System).
Calibration type Displays the calibration type for the assay selected. (i System)
Allows you to select the calibration type if configured for the assay. (c
System)
Number of levels Displays the number of levels defined for the assay.
Calibration status screen field descriptions

screen or window.
M Displays the module on which the calibration was ordered and

processed for the reagent lot.
REAGENT LOT Displays the lot number of the reagent.
CAL DATE / TIME Displays the date and time of the last calibration.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
CAL STATUS Displays the calibration status for the reagent lot. See Calibration
EXP DATE / TIME Displays the date and time the calibration curve expires. (c System)
Find options (Calibration status and Calibration history) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Allows you to select the module on which you want to search.
Assay Allows you to search by assay name.

Reagent lot Allows you to search by reagent lot number.

Curves with an Allows you to enter an expiration time interval from 1-24 hours for a c
expiration less System calibration curve(s).
than
Status Allows you to search by calibration Descriptions of calibration statuses,

page 6-19.
Calibration curve window - Linear assay view (c System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Reagent lot Displays the lot number of the reagent kit used to calibrate the assay.
Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the
calibration curve.
Expiration date Displays the expiration date of the reagent lot number used for
calibration.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Calibration Displays the current Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-19 of the
status assay.
Cal date / time Displays the date and time the calibration completed.
Cal method Displays the mathematical procedure used to analyze the data.
Calibration type Displays the calibration type for this assay.
Calibrator lot Displays the lot number of the calibrator used to calibrate the assay.
Expiration date Displays the expiration date of the calibrator lot used to calibrate the
assay.
No. assay was run.
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the calibration was
performed.
Error code Displays the calibration error code and message text, if any.
Curve expiration Displays the expiration date and time for the full and adjust (assay
date / time specific) calibration curve. If the curve is expired, the date/time
displays in red.
Override curve Allows you to override the calibration curve expiration date if the
expiration date calibration expiration override is configured On.
CAL ID Displays the name of the calibrator.
CONC / UNITS Displays the concentration value for each level of calibrator defined in
the assay parameters.
CAL / Displays the median absorbance value for the calibrator level.
ABSORBANCE
CAL FACTOR Displays the calibration factor for the calibration level(s).
REP 1 Displays the absorbance value or mV value for replicate 1.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Calibration curve window - Use cal factor / blank assay view (c System) field
descriptions

screen or window.
calibration curve.
calibration.
Calibration Displays the current calibration Descriptions of calibration statuses,

status page 6-19 of the assay.
assay.
No. assay was run.
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the last calibration
was performed.
Curve expiration Displays the expiration date and time for the full and adjust (assay
date / time specific) calibration curve. If the curve is expired, the date and time
displays in red.
Reference assay Displays the name of the assay from which the calibration data is
referenced when the calibration method is Use Cal factor/Blank.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
CAL / Displays the median absorbance value for the calibrator level.
ABSORBANCE
CAL FACTOR Displays the calibration factor for the calibration level(s).
Calibration curve window - Potentiometric assay view (c System) field

descriptions

screen or window.
calibration curve.
calibration.
Calibration Displays the current Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-19 of the
status assay.
assay.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
No. assay was run.
was performed.
Curve expiration Displays the expiration date and time for the calibration curve. If the
date / time curve is expired, the date and time displays in red.
Override curve Allows you to override the calibration curve expiration date if the
expiration date calibration expiration override is configured On.
CAL / mV Displays the median millivolt value for each calibrator level.
CAL / SLOPE Displays the percent response of the ICT (integrated chip technology)
module for the low and high calibrators.
Calibration curve window - Adjust assay view (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.
calibration curve.
calibration.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

If Cal method is reference, calibration information is from the
reference assay.
assay.
No. assay was run.
was performed.
referenced when the calibration method is Reference. This field is not
shown in the example provided.
Cal 1 ratio Displays the calibration 1 adjustment ratio.
Cal 2 ratio Displays the calibration 2 adjustment ratio.
MEAN RLU Displays the mean of the calibrator replicates RLU (relative light
units).
REP 1 RLU Displays the RLU value for replicate 1.
NOTE: The displayed concentration is the default unit.
REF CAL RLU Displays the reference (master cal) data read from the 2-D reagent bar
code label on the microparticle bottle.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
FIT CURVE RLU Displays the fit curve RLU data for each calibrator.
Calibration curve window - Index assay view (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.
calibration curve.
calibration.

reference assay.
assay.
No. assay was run.
was performed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
MEAN RLU Displays the mean of the calibrator replicates RLU (relative light
units).
Calibration curve window - Full assay view (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.
calibration curve.
calibration.

reference assay.
assay.
No. assay was run.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
was performed.
NOTE: The displayed concentration is the default unit.
FIT CURVE RLU Displays the fit curve RLU (relative light units) data for each calibrator.
MEAN RLU Displays the mean of the calibrator replicates.
Calibration history screen field descriptions

screen or window.
M Displays the module on which the calibration was ordered and

processed for the reagent lot.
REAGENT LOT Displays the lot number of the reagent.
CAL DATE / TIME Displays the date and time of the last calibration.
CAL STATUS Displays the calibration status for the reagent lot. See Calibration
EXP DATE / TIME Displays the date and time the calibration curve expires (c System).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Archive calibration curves window field descriptions

screen or window.

(box)
xxxxx\yyyyyyyy.Czz, where:
• Czz represents the archive number
The calibration curve archive identifier (.Czz) starts at 01 and
increments for each calibration curve archive created on each new
day.
results selected Calibration history screen, page 6-26.

Delete inactive Allows you to delete the inactive curves after you archive them.
curves after
Default: Delete inactive curves after archive.
archive
Stored QC results screen field descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

CONTROL NAME Displays the name of the control that processed.
LEVEL Displays the level of the control that processed.
RESULT Displays the value and units of the stored result.
FLAG Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of quality
Find options (Stored QC results) window field descriptions

screen or window.

on.

P Allows you to enter the position (P) number you want to search on.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
SID Allows you to enter the sample ID. You can enter up to 20
(RSH)
for.


Results with Allows you to search for results with flags.

option
interval.
interval.
time the control order was placed.
Status Allows you to search by result status. See Descriptions of test statuses,
page 5-145.
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Data view (c System) field
descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Control level Displays the name of the level for the control result.
Result Displays the value and units of the control result.

• mV (ICT only)



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
No. assay was run.
Time completed Displays the date and time the control completed.
was performed.
result.
Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the QC result.
Comment Displays the comment entered for the QC result.
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Photometric - graph view (c


screen or window.

POINT (table)
this table.
• POINT - Displays the read points 1 through 33.
• PRIMARY- Displays the absorbance readings for each read point
at the primary wavelength.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• SECONDARY - Displays the absorbance readings for each read

point at the secondary wavelength.
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


No. assay was run.

completed.
Time of cal Displays the date and time the reagent lot calibration completed.
result.
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Calculated view field

descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

No. assay was run.
• Module (M)
• Assay
• Result
• Flags



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


completed.
Archive QC results window field descriptions

screen or window.

(box)
xxxxx\yyyyyyyy.Qzz, where:
• Qzz represents the archive number
The QC archive identifier (.Qzz) starts at 01 and increments for each
QC archive created on each new day.
results selected Stored results screen, page 5-224.

Delete records Allows you to delete the result records after you archive them.
after archive
Default: Delete records after archive.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
QC reports screen field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Allows you to select a processing module to be used for the report.
Date from / to Allows you to enter the date range to be used for the report.
Controls Allows you to select the control(s) to include in the report.
QC summary review screen field descriptions

screen or window.
Date range Displays the date range used for the calculation.
CONTROL Displays the name and lot number of the control.

NAME/LOT
Level Displays the name of the control level.
N Displays the number of control points within the specified date range.
ACTUAL MEAN Displays the calculated mean of the QC data.
ACTUAL SD Displays the calculated standard deviation of the QC data.
% CV Displays the calculated percent coefficient of variation of the QC data.
EXPECTED Displays the expected mean configured for the control level.
MEAN
EXPECTED SD Displays the expected standard deviation configured for the control
level.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Find options (QC summary review) window field descriptions

screen or window.
for.
Level Allows you to search for a specific control.

Results with Allows you to search for results with Flags.
Details for QC summary window field descriptions

screen or window.
Control lot Displays the lot number of the control.
Control level Displays the name of the control level.
Date range Displays the date range entered for the QC summary.
Module/Serial Displays the module number and the serial number on which the
No. assay was run.
Expected Displays the expected mean and standard deviation configured.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Manufacturer Displays the manufacturer's mean and standard deviation configured.
Actual data for Displays the data calculated for the specified module and date range.
date range
System data for Displays the data calculated for the specified date range for all
date range processing modules in a multi-module i System. This data is the same
as the actual data for date range for other system configurations.
Module Displays the cumulative data calculated for the specified module.
cumulative
System Displays the cumulative data calculated for all processing modules in a
cumulative multi-module i System. This data is the same as the module
cumulative data for other system configurations.
Exceptions icon screens and windows

The Exceptions icon allows you to access the menu items Exception
status and Rerun status.
Exceptions icon screens and windows topics include:
• Exception status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-97
• Find options (Exception status) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-97
• Details for exceptions window - Data view (c System) field
• Details for exceptions window - Photometric - graph view (c System)
• Details for exceptions window (i System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-101
• Details for exceptions window - Calculated view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-103
• Details for exceptions window - Control view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-104
• Details for exceptions window - Calculated control view field
• Details for exceptions window - Calibrator view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-106
• Rerun status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-108

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Exception status screen field descriptions

screen or window.

NAME Displays the name or PID, which can be one of the following:
• The patient's name for patient samples
ASSAY Displays the name of the assay requested for processing.
M Displays the number of the module that generated the exception. This
field is blank when the test cannot be assigned to or processed on a
module.
ERROR CODE Displays the numeric error code for the exception and the error code
text that describes the error that occurred.
Find options (Exception status) window field descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

on.
Name Allows you to enter the patient, control, or calibrator name you want
to search for.

(RSH)
This field supports a wildcard (*) search
Assay Allows you to search for a specific assay.

Error code Allows you to enter the error code you want to search for.
Status Allows you to search by the following statuses:

• Pending transmission
• Pending collation
See Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-145.
Details for exceptions window - Data view (c System) field descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Module / Serial Displays the module number and the serial number of the module
No. that processed the exception.
Dilution Displays the dilution used for the test.

• mV (ICT only)

Cuvette Displays the number of the cuvette used to process the exception.
NOTE: The cuvette number does not display if the test was not
dispensed.
Error code Displays the exception error code number and text.
Time completed Displays the date and time the test exception occurred.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reagent lot Displays the reagent lot used to process the test and generate the
exception.
Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used when the exception
occurred.
characters.
Details for exceptions window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field

descriptions

screen or window.

PID Displays the patient ID.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
POINT (table)
this table.
Displays the following information:

Cuvette Displays the number of the cuvette used to process the exception.
NOTE: The cuvette number does not display if the test was not
dispensed.
Details for exceptions window (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Time completed Displays the date and time the test was ordered.
exception
occurred.
characters.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Details for exceptions window - Calculated view field descriptions

screen or window.

Module / Serial Displays the module number and the system serial number.
No.
Constituent Displays the following for the constituent assays used to determine
assays (table) the calculated result.
• Module (M)
• Assay
• Result
• Flags


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
characters.
Details for exceptions window - Control view field descriptions

screen or window.

Lot Displays the control lot run.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
RLU Displays the response value used in calculating the result:

• RLU (i System)
• Absorbance (photometric)
• mV - (ICT)

Result This field is blank for control exceptions.
exception
Doctor This field is blank for control exceptions.
occurred.
Location This field is blank for control exceptions.
Draw date / time This field is blank for control exceptions.
characters.
Details for exceptions window - Calculated control view field descriptions

screen or window.


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Module / Serial Displays the module number and the system serial number that
No. processed the exception.
Lot Displays the control lot run.
Constituent Displays the following for the constituent assays used to determine
assays (table) the calculated result.
• Module (M)
• Assay
• Result
• Flags

characters.
Details for exceptions window - Calibrator view field descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Name Displays the name and level of the calibrator.
Lot This field is blank for calibrator exceptions.
Type Displays the type of calibration run.
RLU Displays the response value used in calculating the result:

• RLU (i System)
• Absorbance (photometric)
• mV - (ICT)

Result Displays a blank field as the system is unable calculate the result due
to the exception error.
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the calibration was
ordered.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
exception
occurred.
Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the result. You can enter up to
approximately 50 characters.
Rerun status screen field descriptions

screen or window.

NAME Displays the name or PID, which can be one of the following:
• The patient's name for patient samples
STATUS Displays the current status of the assay you ordered. See Descriptions of
test statuses, page 5-145.
TIME Displays the time the order will complete (in 24 hour format). Time
information displays for all samples with a status of Running.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Reagents icon screens and windows

The Reagents icon allows you to access the menu items Reagent status
and Reagent history.
Reagents icon screens and windows topics include:
• Reagent status screen - c 4000 field descriptions, page Appendix
E-109
• Reagent status screen - i 1000SR field descriptions, page Appendix
E-110
• Reagent status screen - View all view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-111
• Details for reagent (Reagent status) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-112
• Assign location window - c 4000 field descriptions, page Appendix
E-113
• Find options (Reagent status) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-114
• Find options (Reagent status - View all) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-114
• Reagent history screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-115
• Details for reagent (history) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-116
Reagent status screen - c 4000 field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Allows you to select an individual module or all modules to view

reagent status information.
R1, R2 carousel Displays the Reagent supply center segments and positions. Positions
graphic may be colored as follows:
• White - No reagent is loaded in the position
• Teal - Reagent with an OK status loaded in the position

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Gold - Reagent with a Low Alert or Overridden status loaded in

the position
• Red - Reagent with an error condition that requires your
attention loaded in the position
R1, R2 Displays the reagent supply center position of a specific R1 and R2

reagent.
ASSAY Displays the name of the assay using the reagent kit.
CAL STATUS Displays the calibration status for the assay using the reagent kit. See
REMAINING Displays an estimated number of tests remaining in the reagent kit.

TESTS
NOTE: When you load a new bar coded reagent and it is scanned, the
system calculates the number of remaining tests in the cartridge using
the maximum cartridge capacity instead of the actual fill volume. The
remaining tests number updates when the system aspirates the reagent
and a liquid level sense occurs.
REAGENT Displays the status of the reagent kit. See Descriptions of reagent statuses
STATUS (except for i 1000SR), page 5-57.
For statuses other than OK, Overridden, and Low Alert text in the list
associated with the reagent kit displays red. In addition, the caution
symbol displays on the Reagent status button on the processing
module graphic on the Snapshot screen, page 1-17. See Descriptions of
reagent statuses (except for i 1000SR), page 5-57.
Reagent status screen - i 1000SR field descriptions

screen or window.

Reagent Displays the reagent carousel positions. Positions may be colored as

carousel graphic follows:
• White - No reagent is loaded in the position
• Teal - Reagent with an OK status loaded in the position
• Gold - Reagent with a Low Alert or Overridden status loaded in
the position

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Red - Reagent with an error condition that requires your

attention loaded in the position
• Cross hatch - Reagent is being loaded or unloaded from the
position
P Displays the carousel position or RSH position of a specific reagent.

Some assays require two carousel positions.
REMAINING Displays the number of tests remaining in the reagent kit.

TESTS
REAGENT Displays the status of the reagent kit.

STATUS
For statuses other than OK, Overridden, and Low Alert, text in the list
associated with the reagent kit displays red. In addition, the caution
symbol displays on the Reagent status button on the processing
module graphic on the Snapshot screen, page 1-17. See Descriptions of
reagent statuses (i 1000SR), page 5-58.
CARRIER Displays the status of loading or unloading of the reagent carrier.

STATUS
SCHEDULED Displays the number of scheduled tests for the reagent kit.
TESTS
READY TO Displays the time the reagent kit is ready to unload.

UNLOAD
Reagent status screen - View all view field descriptions

screen or window.

M/P Displays the module and position of a specific reagent kit.
CAL STATUS Displays the calibration status for the assay using the reagent kit.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
REAGENT LOT Displays the reagent lot number.
REMAINING Displays an estimated number of tests remaining in the reagent kit (c

TESTS System).
system calculates an estimated number of tests remaining in the
cartridge using the maximum cartridge capacity instead of the actual
fill volume. This number updates when the system aspirates the
reagent and a liquid level sense occurs. (c System)
Displays the number of tests remaining in the reagent kit (i System).

STATUS
For statuses other than OK, Mixing (i System), and Overridden, text in
the list associated with the reagent kit displays red. In addition, the
caution symbol displays on the reagent status button on the
processing module graphic on the Snapshot screen, page 1-17.
See Descriptions of reagent statuses (except for i 1000SR), page 5-57.
See Descriptions of reagent statuses (i 1000SR), page 5-58.
EXP. DATE Displays the date the reagent expires. If you override the expiration,
Overridden displays.
STABILITY Displays the number of onboard stability days remaining for the
reagent kit. If the time remaining is less than 24 hours, <1 displays. (c
System)
Details for reagent (Reagent status) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Reagent lot Displays the lot number for the reagent kit.
number
Reagent status Displays the status for each reagent kit.

Expiration date Displays the expiration date of the reagent kit.
Remaining tests Displays an estimated number of tests remaining in the reagent kit (c
System).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Onboard Displays the number of hours remaining for stability tracking.

stability:
Assay info Displays the following information for each assay using the selected
(table) reagent kit:
• Module
• Assay / Number
• Assay Version
• Cal Status
Component info Displays the following information for each bottle / cartridge in the
• Position
• S/N
• Remaining Tests (c System)
• Control No. (i System)
Assign location window - c 4000 field descriptions

screen or window.
Reagent kits Displays non-bar coded reagent and sample diluent kits currently
(table) configured on the system and their locations if they have already been
assigned a location.
• R1 / R2 - Displays the location of the reagent kit
• Reagent - Displays the name of the reagent kit
Lot number Displays the lot number for the reagent kit.
Serial number Displays the serial number for the reagent kit.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Expiration date Displays the expiration date for the reagent kit.
R1 / R2 cartridge Displays the size of the cartridge the reagent kit is using for R1 and R2.
size
NOTE: If the kit is an R1 cartridge only, R2 cartridge size does not
display.
Select location - Allows you to select the segment and position in which you will load
R1 Cartridge / R2 the cartridge.
Cartridge
Find options (Reagent status) window field descriptions

screen or window.
P Allows you to search on the position in which the reagent is loaded.
NOTE: For c System processing modules, if a carousel position is not

selected the search includes the R1 and R2 reagent carousels.
Carousel Allows you to search for the reagent kit by its specific carousel
(cSystem) location.
NOTE: You must enter a position before the R1 and R2 checkboxes

become available.
Reagent status Allows you to search for the reagent kit by its status.
Cal status Allows you to search for the reagent kit by its calibration status. See
Find options (Reagent status - View all) window field descriptions
NOTE: The same Find options window displays from both the Reagent
status screen - View all view and the Reagent history screen.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
screen or window.
Module Allows you to search by module to locate the reagent kit.
P Allows you to search on the position in which the reagent is loaded.
NOTE: For c System processing modules, if a carousel position is not

selected the search includes the R1 and R2 reagent carousels.
Carousel Allows you to search for the reagent kit by its specific carousel
(cSystem) location.
NOTE: You must enter a position before the R1 and R2 checkboxes

become available.
S/N Allows you to search by the serial number of the reagent kit.
Control no. Allows you to search by the control number of the reagent kit.
(iSystem)
Reagent lot Allows you to search by the reagent lot number for the reagent kit.
Reagent status Allows you to search for the reagent kit by its status.
Cal status Allows you to search for the reagent kit by its calibration status. See
Reagent history screen field descriptions

screen or window.
M/P Displays the module and position of a specific reagent kit.
REAGENT LOT Displays the reagent lot number.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
REMAINING Displays an estimated number of tests remaining in the reagent kit (c

TESTS System).

STATUS
For statuses other than OK, Mixing (i System), and Overridden, text in
the list associated with the reagent kit displays red. In addition, the
caution symbol displays on the reagent status button on the
processing module graphic on the Snapshot screen.
EXP. DATE Displays the date the reagent expires. If the user overrides the
expiration, Overridden displays.
STABILITY Displays the number of onboard stability days remaining for the
reagent kit. If the time remaining is less than 24 hours, <1 displays (c
System).
Details for reagent (history) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Reagent lot Displays the lot number for the reagent kit.
number
Reagent status Displays the status for each reagent kit.

Expiration date Displays the expiration date of the reagent kit.
Remaining tests Displays an estimated number of tests remaining in the reagent kit (c
System).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Onboard stability Displays the number of hours remaining for stability tracking. (c
System)
Displays the number of days remaining for stability tracking. (i
System)
Assay info Displays the following information for each assay using the selected
• Module
• Assay / Number
• Assay version
• Cal status
Component info Displays following information for each bottle / cartridge in the
• Position
• S/N
• Remaining Tests (c System)
• Control no. (i System)
Supplies icon screens and windows

The Supplies status icon allows you to access the menu item Supply
status.
Supplies icon screens and windows topics include:
• Supply status screen - c 4000 view field descriptions, page Appendix
E-118
• Supply status screen - i 1000SR view field descriptions, page Appendix
E-118
• Update supplies window - c 4000 view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-119
• Update supplies window - i 1000SR view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-120

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Supply status screen - c 4000 view field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Allows you to select a module to view supply status information.
ICT reference Displays the volume remaining in mL and % for the supply of ICT
(integrated chip technology) reference solution onboard. When
approximately 400 mL (20%) remains, the arrow changes from gray to
red.
NOTE: If the system is configured with no ICT module installed, the

ICT reference solutions icon is grayed out.
Alkaline wash Displays the volume remaining in mL and % for the supply of alkaline
wash solution onboard. When approximately 100 mL (20%) remains,
the arrow changes from gray to red.
Acid wash Displays the volume remaining in mL and % for the supply of acid
wash solution onboard. When approximately 100 mL (20%) remains,
the arrow changes from gray to red.
Reagent supply Displays the position and onboard solution name as configured for
center the reagent supply center.
Sample wash Displays the sample wash solution carrier position for the wash
solutions solutions and the onboard status.
Cup/tube icon status:
• Gray - OK
• Red - Empty
Waste icon Displays the high-concentration waste bottle status.
NOTE: If the system is configured with no high-concentration waste

bottle installed, the waste icon is grayed out.
Supply status screen - i 1000SR view field descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Module Allows you to select a module to view supply status information.
Solid waste Displays the amount of available space in the container measured in
number of RVs (reaction vessels) and % remaining. When
approximately 20% remains the arrow changes from gray to red.
Liquid waste Displays the amount of liquid waste remaining on the system
measured in liters. When approximately 20% (2 liters) remains, the
arrow changes from gray to red.
RVs remaining Displays the approximate number of RVs remaining on the system.
When approximately 20% remains the arrow changes from gray to
red.
Wash buffer Displays the amount of wash buffer remaining on the system
measured in liters. When approximately 20% (2.4 liters) remains, the
arrow changes from gray to red.
Trigger Displays the amount of trigger remaining on the system measured in

milliliters. When approximately 20% (195 mL) remains, the arrow
changes from gray to red.
NOTE: Stability displays the number of days remaining for onboard

stability of the trigger solution. When the stability reaches zero days,
EXPIRED displays next to the name. If trigger solution is configured
for expiration override, OVERRIDDEN displays next to the name.
Pre-Trigger Displays the amount of pre-trigger remaining on the system measured

in milliliters. When approximately 20% (195 mL) remains, the arrow
changes from gray to red.
NOTE: Stability displays the number of days remaining for onboard

stability of the pre-trigger solution. When the stability reaches zero
days, EXPIRED displays next to the name. If pre-trigger solution is
configured for expiration override, OVERRIDDEN displays next to the
name.
Update supplies window - c 4000 view field descriptions

screen or window.
Bulk solutions Select the following bulk solution to indicate that you loaded a new
bottle in the supply center:
• ICT reference

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Alkaline wash
• Acid wash
Reagent supply Select the following onboard solutions to indicate that you loaded a
center new cartridge in the reagent supply center:
• Detergent A
• 10% Detergent B
• 0.5% Acid wash
Sample wash Select the following wash solutions to indicate that you loaded a new
solution area sample cup/tube with wash solution:
• 0.5% Acid wash
• Detergent A
Update supplies window - i 1000SR view field descriptions

screen or window.
Solid waste Select the check box to indicate that you emptied the solid waste
container.
Liquid waste Select the check box to indicate that you emptied the liquid waste
container.
RVs added Select the check box to indicate that you filled the hopper.
Wash buffer Select to load buffer into the 12 L wash buffer reservoir.
Trigger Select to indicate you loaded a new bottle of trigger solution.
Pre-Trigger Select to indicate you loaded a new bottle of pre-trigger solution.
System icon screens and windows

The System icon allows you to access the menu items Maintenance,
Diagnostics, System logs, Configuration, and Utilities.
System icon screens and windows topics include:
• Maintenance screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-124
• Maintenance Perform window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-125

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Version details for procedure (maintenance) window field descriptions,

page Appendix E-126
• Details for maintenance item window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-126
• Maintenance log screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-127
• Approve maintenance log window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-127
• Details for maintenance log screen field descriptions, page Appendix
E-127
• Diagnostics screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-128
• Diagnostic perform window field descriptions, page Appendix E-129
• Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-130
• System logs screen - Error message logs field descriptions,
page Appendix E-130
• Find options (System logs - Error message logs) window field
• Configuration screen - System settings view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-132
• Configure sample ordering window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-133
• Configure host - release mode window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-133
• Configure reports printing window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-136
• Configure reagents - supplies window (ci 4100) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-137
• Configure password window field descriptions, page Appendix E-139
• Configure system control center window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-140
• Configure modules window (c 4000) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-142
• Configure modules window (i 1000SR) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-143
• Configure sample handler window (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Configure bar codes window field descriptions, page Appendix E-144

• Configure serial ports window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-146
• Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view field
• Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view field
• Import assay window field descriptions, page Appendix E-149
• Export assay window field descriptions, page Appendix E-151
• Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System) field
• Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated) field
view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix
E-155
(photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-158
• Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view field
• Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System) field
view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix
E-166
• Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System) field

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System)

• Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System) field
• Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System) field
• Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System) field
• Configure assay parameters window - Results view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-172
• Configure results parameters window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-173
• Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view field
• Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view
• Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - User-defined assay
view field descriptions, page Appendix E-174
• Configure result units window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-176
• Configure panel definitions window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-177
• Configure assay retest rules window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-177
• Add / edit assay retest rules window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-178
• Select assay window field descriptions, page Appendix E-180
• Configuration screen - QC-Cal settings view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-180
• Configure single analyte window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-181
• Configure multiconstituent control window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-182
• Assign assays for multiconstituent control window field descriptions,
page Appendix E-183
• Define control data window field descriptions, page Appendix E-183

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window field descriptions,

page Appendix E-184
• Configure Westgard window field descriptions, page Appendix E-185
• Configure calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-185
• Define calibrator data window (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-186
• Assign assays for calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions,
page Appendix E-186
• Import lot file selection window field descriptions, page Appendix
E-187
• Utilities screen - Software install view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-187
• Utilities screen - System updates view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-188
• Utilities screen - Backup software view field descriptions,
page Appendix E-188
• Create backup window field descriptions, page Appendix E-189
• Print options window field descriptions, page Appendix E-189
• Printer window field descriptions, page Appendix E-189
Maintenance screen field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Allows you to select the module on which you want to perform
maintenance.
MAINTENANCE Displays a list of procedures you can perform for the selected module
PROCEDURES and category.
(box)
Categories Displays the following categories for maintenance procedures that can
be performed on a selected module:
• To do
• Daily

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Weekly
• Monthly
• Quarterly
• As needed
• In process
See Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions, page 9-20.
Maintenance Perform window field descriptions

screen or window.
Category Displays the category of the maintenance procedure you selected.
Procedure Displays the name of the maintenance procedure you selected.
Operator ID Displays the name of the operator who is currently logged on to the
system.
Module Displays the module on which the maintenance procedure will be

performed on.
Status Displays the status of the maintenance procedure. See Maintenance

INSTRUCTIONS Displays the instructions for each step of the maintenance procedure.
(box)
User Input Allows you to select the Proceed button to continue the procedure.
NOTE: Input field buttons change depending on the procedure.
Keypad Displays buttons specific to the procedure. These buttons correspond

to the L1 - L4 keys on the processing module keypad. You can select
the keys on the SCC (system control center) or the processing module
keypad.
Result Displays the results of the procedure.
Activity Displays the activity of the module while performing the procedure.
When you select Activity, the Results window toggles to the Activity
window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Version details for procedure (maintenance) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Procedure name Displays the name of the procedure.
Current version Displays the current version of the maintenance procedure you
selected.
Category Displays the category of the maintenance procedure.
Status to Displays the status the module must be in for you to perform the
perform procedure. See Maintenance statuses, page 9-20.
procedure
User access Displays the user access level required to perform the procedure.
level
Details for maintenance item window field descriptions

screen or window.
Procedure name Displays the name of the maintenance procedure you performed.
Performed with Displays the version of the maintenance procedure when last
version performed. If the procedure has not been performed, this field is
blank.
Date Displays the date and time on which you last performed the
procedure. If the procedure has not been performed, this field is blank.
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the procedure was
performed. If the procedure has not been performed, this field is
blank.
Status Displays the last status of the selected maintenance procedure. If the
procedure has not been performed, this field is blank. See Maintenance

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Maintenance log screen field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Allows you to select the module for which you want to view the log.
Status Displays the approval status of the log you selected.

Statuses are:
• Approved
• Unapproved
Operator ID Displays the ID of the system administrator who approved the log.
Date / time Displays the date and time the log was approved. If the maintenance
log has not been approved, this field is blank.
MAINTENANCE Displays the maintenance procedures that have been performed.

PROCEDURES
(box)
Approve maintenance log window field descriptions

screen or window.
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the log was approved.
Maintenance log Displays the month of the maintenance log to be approved.

month
Approve log Allows the system administrator to approve the maintenance log for
option the displayed month.
Details for maintenance log screen field descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Procedure name Displays the name of the maintenance procedure.
Category Displays the maintenance category of the procedure you selected.
Performed with Displays the version of the maintenance procedure performed on the
version displayed date and time.
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator who was logged on when the
maintenance procedure was performed.
Completion Date Displays the date and time when the procedure was performed.
and Time
Status Displays the status of the maintenance procedure. See Maintenance

Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the maintenance procedure

selected. You can enter up to approximately 200 characters.
NOTE: The comment window is not available for a procedure with a

status of Pending or Scheduled.
Diagnostics screen field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Allows you to select the module on which you want to perform the
DIAGNOSTIC Displays the list of diagnostic procedures available for the selected
PROCEDURES module and category.
Categories Displays the following categories for diagnostic procedures that can be
performed on a module:
• Reaction Mechanisms
• Pipettors
• Fluidics / Wash
• Syringes / Pumps
• Bar code Readers
• Modules
• Solenoids / Sensors

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Fuses / Motors
• Optics / Temperature
• Carousels
• Precision
• ICT
• Utilities
• Other
See Diagnostic categories and procedure descriptions, page 10-658.
Diagnostic perform window field descriptions

screen or window.
Category Displays the category for the diagnostic procedure you selected.
Procedure Displays the name of the diagnostic procedure you selected.
Operator ID Displays the name of the operator who is currently logged on to the
system.
Module Displays the module you selected to perform the diagnostic procedure
on.
Status Displays the status of the selected diagnostic procedure. See

Maintenance statuses, page 9-20 for a description of the statuses.
INSTRUCTIONS Displays the instructions for each step of the diagnostic procedure.
(box)
User Input Allows you to select the Proceed button to continue the procedure.
NOTE: Input field buttons change depending on the procedure.
Keypad Displays buttons specific to the procedure. These buttons correspond

to the L1 - L4 keys on the processing module keypad. You can select
the keys on the SCC (system control center) or the processing module
keypad.
Result Displays the results of the procedure.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Activity Displays the activity of the module while performing the procedure.
When you select Activity, the Results window toggles to the Activity
window.
Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Procedure name Displays the name of the selected procedure.
Current version Displays the version of the diagnostic procedure currently on the
system.
Category Displays the category of the diagnostic procedure.
Status to Displays the status the module must be in for you to perform the
perform procedure. See Maintenance statuses, page 9-20 for descriptions of
procedure statuses.
User access Displays the log on level required to perform the procedure.
level
System logs screen - Error message logs field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Allows you to select the module on which you want to view the
Temporary Message log or the Message History log.
Log selection Allows you to select the following logs:

(list)
• Temporary Message log
• Message History log
• Software Update log
DATE / TIME Displays the date and time the error occurred on the module.
M Displays the module on which the error occurred.
ERROR CODE - Displays the numeric error code and text that describes the error that
TEXT occurred.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
System logs screen - Software update log field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Allows you to select the module on which you want to view the
Software updates installation log.
Log selection • Temporary Message log

(list)
• Message History log
• Software Update log
DATE/TIME Displays the date and time the software update occurred on the
module.
TSB Displays the unique identifier for the TSB (Technical Service Bulletin).
Serial # Displays the serial number for the module on which the update was
installed.
TSB Subject Displays the title of the software update.
Find options (System logs - Error message logs) window field descriptions

screen or window.
Module Allows you to select the module to search on
Date from / to Allows you to enter a date range you want to search on.
Error code Allows you to enter an error code to search on.
Error category Allows you to select error categories to search on.
Error level Allows you to select an error level to search on.
Find options (System logs - Software update log) window field descriptions


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
screen or window.
Module Allows you to select the module to search on.
Date from to: Allows you to enter a date range you want to search on.
TSB Allows you to enter a TSB (Technical Service Bulletin) number to

search on.
Serial # Allows you to enter the serial number of the module on which the
software update was installed.
time the software update was installed.
Configuration screen - System settings view field descriptions

screen or window.
Configure Allows you to select one of the following categories for configuration:
• System settings
• Assay settings
• QC-Cal settings
System Allows you to select the following system configuration items:

categories (list)
• Sample ordering
• Password
• Modules
• Sample handler
• Serial ports

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Configure sample ordering window field descriptions

screen or window.
NOTE: The Details window displays the current settings.
Batch ordering Allows you to select the sample identification type used when
ordering samples in a batch.
Options are:
• Bar coded - Only bar coded samples are used in the batch run.
(Default)
• Non-bar coded - Only non-bar coded samples are used in the
batch run.
NOTE: If a batch order is pending, you cannot change the options.

This option is not available for systems configured with a LAS
(laboratory automation system).
IA Sample Allows you to enter the average number of tests ordered per sample.
options This setting is used for multi-module systems to optimize the
scheduling of tests per module.
Range: 1.0 - 25.0 (Default: 1.4)
CC Sample Allows you to select whether the calibration curve can be overridden
options or not overridden.
Options are:
• On
• Off (Default)
Configure host - release mode window field descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Communications Bi-directional host:

Allows the general operator to enable the bidirectional host mode, so
the system can receive orders from and transmit results to a host
computer.
Options are:
• On
• On with query
• Off (Default)
NOTE: Turning bidirectional host off allows you to clear all results
waiting to be sent to the host.
Host query timeout:
Allows the general operator to enter the maximum time period (in
seconds) that the system waits for the host computer to respond to a
query.
Range: 5 - 60 seconds
(Default: 10 seconds)
NOTE: System throughput may degrade if this timeout period is

greater than ten seconds.
Error code number and text:
Allows the general operator to define the information transmitted to
the host for error messages.
Options are:
• Both - Allows both the numeric error code and the message text
to be sent to the host computer.
• Number only - Allows only the numeric error code to be sent to
the host computer.
Transmission code page:
Options are:
• Abbott Standard Interface - Uses a subset of Window OEM code
page 850 (Multilingual Latin 1) for LIS transmission. This option
is currently used by the ARCHITECT and AxSYM Systems.
• Language default - Uses the language default code page (code
page 1252 - Latin 1) for German, English, Spanish, French, and
Italian and code page 932 for Japanese for LIS transmission.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Unicode (UTF-8) - Uses code page 65001 (Wide Character To

Multi-Byte API) with the code page parameter set to CP_UTF8.
This option allows every Unicode character to be transmitted
and completely supports the keyboard entry of Unicode
characters.
Release and Allows the general operator to select patient or QC results for
Transmit options configuration.
Patient results or Release mode:

QC results
Allows the general operator to select the release mode for results:
Options are:
• Manual - All results must be manually released. (Default)
• Hold - All results with flags must be manually released.
• Automatic - Results are released automatically.
• Automatic with exceptions - Results and exceptions are
automatically released.
Transmit approved results:
Allows the general operator to define the method for transmitting
approved results to the host computer:
Options are:
• Collated (Default) - Allows for results for multiple orders for a
single sample ID to be sent within a message.
• Collated by module (patient results only) - Allows for results for
multiple orders for a single sample ID on a processing module to
be sent within a message.
NOTE: Results (both completed results and exceptions) are collated.

Released results are held in Pending collation status until all
completed results for a sample ID are released and all exceptions for
the sample ID have been reported. All test orders and reruns for the
sample ID must produce an outcome, either a completed result or an
exception, before any released results for the sample ID are sent to the
host computer.
• Single - Allows for a single result for a single sample ID to be sent
within a message.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Off (QC results only) - Approved QC results are not sent to the
host computer.
Doctor, Location, and Draw Date/Time (patient results only):
Allows the general operator to enable the release of doctor, location,
and draw date/time to the host computer.
Options are:
• On - Allows doctor, location, and draw/date time to be sent to
the host computer (if data is available) in result messages.
• Off (Default) - Does not allow doctor, location, draw date/time to
be sent to the host computer in result messages even if the data
is available.
Configure reports printing window field descriptions

screen or window.
Print flags on Allows you to enable the printing of flags on sample and patient
reports reports.
Options are:
• On (default)
• Off
NOTE: The control (CNTL), expired (EXP), expired calibration curve (c

System only) (EXPC), and EDIT (c System only) flags print on the
sample and patient reports whether the feature is turned on or off.
Automatic report Allows you to enable automatic printing of the Procedure

printing (Maintenance), Sample, Sample laboratory, Results List, and Cal Curve
Details (Calibration curve results) reports.
Options are:
• On
• Off (Default)
NOTE: The Results List Report prints after 24 results have been
generated and released or ten minutes have elapsed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Header for Allows you to enter up to five lines (approximately 50 characters per
sample and line) of text which print on each sample and patient report. Each field
patient reports on the screen represents one line of the report header.
Configure reagents - supplies window (ci 4100) field descriptions

screen or window.
Default reagent Allows you to specify a low alert level for reagent kits for CC tests and
low alert IA tests.
Default:
CC tests - 100
IA tests - 0
Reagent Indicates that the system allows you to override a reagent's expiration.
expiration
Options are:
override
• On
• Off (Default)
Reagent stability Indicates that the system allows you to override a reagent's onboard
override stability.
Options are:
• On
• Off (Default)
Run controls for Allows you to specify which reagent kits you want to run for QC.
onboard
Options are:
reagents by
• Lot: Run QC on only one kit per lot (Default)
• Kit: Run QC for every kit in lot
NOTE: Controls for constituents of calculated assays are automatically

run on one kit on one module (selected by the system software)
regardless of the option selected.
Wash buffer Allows you to select the current setting for wash buffer transfer.
transfer
Options are:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Manual (Default)
• Automatic
NOTE: Automatic option should be selected when the ARCHITECT

ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) is installed.
Pre-Trigger / Allows you to specify whether the pre-trigger and trigger stability dates
Trigger stability can be overridden.
override
Options are:
• On
• Off (Default)
Detergent A - Allows you to select the segment in the reagent supply center for
Segment (list) loading the Detergent A solution.
Default: A
Detergent A - Allows you to select the segment position in the reagent supply center
Position (list) for loading the Detergent A solution.
Default: 1
Detergent A - Allows you to select the cartridge size for the Detergent A solution.
Size (list)
Options are:
• Large (90 mL cartridge) (Default)
• Small (55 mL cartridge)
• 20 mL (cartridge)
• 20 mL (bottle)
10% Detergent B Allows you to select the segment in the reagent supply center for
- Segment (list) loading the 10% Detergent B solution.
Default: A
10% Detergent B Allows you to select the segment position in the reagent supply center
- Position (list) for loading the 10% Detergent B solution.
Default: 2
10% Detergent B Allows you to select the cartridge size for the 10% Detergent B
- Size (list) solution.
Options are:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

• 20 mL (bottle)
0.5% Acid Wash - Allows you to select the segment in the reagent supply center for
Segment (list) loading the 0.5% Acid Wash solution.
Default: A
0.5% Acid Wash - Allows you to select the segment position in the reagent supply center
Position (list) for loading the 0.5% Acid Wash solution.
Default: 3
0.5% Acid Wash - Allows you to select the cartridge size for the 0.5% Acid Wash solution.
Size (list)
Options are:
• 20 mL (bottle)
Configure password window field descriptions

screen or window.
System Allows you to enter a password of up to 20 alphanumeric characters.

administrator The password you enter is case sensitive.
password
Default - ADM

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
System Requires that the password be entered a second time to confirm the
administrator original entry. The password you enter displays as asterisks.
password
confirm
Configure system control center window field descriptions

screen or window.
System date Allows you to edit the system date.
System time Allows you to edit the system time.
Date format Allows you to edit the date format setting.

Options are:
• MM.DD.YYYY (Default)
• DD.MM.YYYY
• YYYY.MM.DD
Time zone (list) Allows you to select the area-specific time zone used to automatically
adjust for daylight savings time.
Automatically Allows you to select the check box to automatically adjust the clock
adjust clock for for daylight savings.
daylight savings
Default: checked
time
Thousands Allows you to select the number format for the thousands separator.
separator
Options are:
• Comma
• None (Default)
NOTE: Previously generated results are not updated to the new

format.
System no. Allows the Abbott service representative to enter the ARCHITECT
serial number.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
SCC serial no. Allows the Abbott service representative to enter the SCC serial
number.
System Allows the general operator to select the system language.

language (list)
Options are:
• English
• French
• German
• Italian
• Spanish
• Japanese
Unicode input Allows you to select the desired unicode input option:
• Enabled
NOTE: The Transmission code page selection on the Configure

host - release mode window cannot be defined as Abbott
Standard Interface as this option does not support Unicode
characters.
• Disabled (Default)
Screen timeout Allows you to edit the setting for screen timeout.
Range: 0 - 60 minutes
Default: 0
NOTE: System generated information or information messages do not

remove the screen saver. To restore the screen, press Enter on the
keyboard.
QC run definition Allows you to enter the run definition start time. This information is
- Start time used during Westgard rule application, page 5-271.
Default: Start time - 6:00
QC run definition Allows you to enter the run definition number of hours per run. This
- No. of hours information is used during Westgard rule analysis.
per run
Default: Hours per run - 12
Beep volume Allows you to enter a value for the beep volume for the following
audible tones:
• Alert (occurs when an information message displays)
• Invalid key (occurs when you press an invalid keyboard key)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Range: 0 - 10
Default: 5
NOTE: This setting is only available if your system is configured with

speakers.
Configure modules window (c 4000) field descriptions

screen or window.
Module (list) Allows you to select the desired module.
Type Displays the current settings for a module.
NOTE: Only an Abbott service representative can edit this

information.
Serial No. Displays the module serial number

information.
Sample saving Allows you to enable or disable the sample saving mode. When this
mode mode is enabled, the system aspirates an over-aspiration volume once
per sample rather than each time it aspirates a test.
Options are:
• Enabled - Yes (Default)
• Enabled - No
ICT Module Allows you to define whether or not the ICT module is installed.
Options are:
• Installed - Yes (Default)
• Installed - No
High Allows you to indicate whether or not the high-concentration waste

concentration container is used.
waste container
Options are:
• Installed - Yes

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Installed - No (Default)
Configure modules window (i 1000SR) field descriptions

screen or window.
Module (list) Allows you to select the desired module.
Type Displays the current settings for a module.

information.
Serial number Displays the module serial number.

information.
Optics values - Allows you to edit the optics normalization value.

Normalization
Optics values - Allows you to edit the optics linearity value.

Linearity
Liquid waste Allows you to indicate whether or not the liquid waste container is
container used.
Options are:
• Installed - Yes (Default)
• Installed - No
Configure sample handler window (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100) field

descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Type (list) Allows the Abbott service representative to select the sample handler
type.

information.
Serial No. Allows you to enter the serial number for the module.

information.
Retest options Allows you to enable or disable, automatically repositioning samples

for retest.
Options are:
• Yes (Default)
• No
Priority sections Allows you to enter the number of priority sections.

Range (c 4000 or i 1000SR): 0 - 7 (Default: 4)
Range (ci 4100): 0 - 10 (Default: 7)
Configure bar codes window field descriptions

screen or window.
Bar code type Allows you to select the bar code type. Select the list button to view all
(list) the bar code types from which to choose.
Options are:
• Code 128
• Code 39
• Codabar
• I 2 of 5
See Bar code configuration options, page Appendix E-146.
Bar code type Allows you to enable or disable a bar code type.
Options are:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Enabled (Default)
• Disabled
Checksums Allows you to enable checksums if the selected bar code type supports
checksums.
Send checksum Allows you to specify whether or not checksums are sent to the SCC
digits to the SCC (system control center) if the selected bar code supports it.
Send the Allows you to specify whether or not start/stop characters are sent to
start/stop the SCC if the selected bar code type supports it.
characters to the
SCC
Code length #1 Allows you to specify the length for the primary bar code. The range is
2 to 20 with an incremental value of 2.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Code length #2 Allows you to specify the length for the secondary bar code. The range
is 2 to 20 with an incremental value of 2.
Table Appendix E.1: Bar code configuration options
Default Start/stop
Bar code type Checksums Code length
option characters
Code 39 Enabled Select N/A N/A
Enabled if a
checksum is
used. Select
the check box
if the
checksum is to
be sent to the
SCC (system
control
center).
Codabar Enabled Select Default setting N/A
Enabled if a is Disabled.
checksum is
used. Select
the check box
if the
checksum is to
be sent to the
SCC.
Code 128 Enabled N/A N/A N/A
I 2 of 5 Enabled Select N/A Code length
Enabled if a #1: Enter an
checksum is even number
used. Select between 2 and
the check box 20. (Default is
if the 10.)
checksum is to Code length
be sent to the #2: (Optional)
SCC. If a second
code length is
required, enter
an even
number
between 2 and
20. (Default is
8.)
Configure serial ports window field descriptions


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
screen or window.
Port type (list) Allows you to select the list button to view the port types supported by
the system, and then select the desired port type(s).
Options are:
• LIS (Default)
• ARM
• LAS
Port ID Displays the unique ID for the port.
Baud rate (list) Allows you to select the baud rate for the selected port.
Options are:
• 1200
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600 (Default)
• 14400
• 19200
• 28800
• 38400
• 57600
• 115200
NOTE: You cannot edit the baud rate for the ARCHITECT ARM serial
port
Parity Allows you to select from the following parity options:

• None (Default)
• Even
• Odd
NOTE: You cannot edit the parity option for the ARCHITECT ARM
serial port.
Data bits Allows you to select from the following options:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• 7
• 8 (Default)
NOTE: You cannot edit data bits for the ARCHITECT ARM serial port.
Stop bits Allows you to select from the following options:

• 1 (Default)
• 2
NOTE: You cannot edit stop bits for the ARCHITECT ARM serial port
Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view field descriptions

screen or window.
Configure Allows you to select the configuration category.

Categories include:
• System settings
• Assay settings
• QC-Cal settings
Assay categories Displays the configuration items in the Assay settings category.
(list)
• New assay
• Result units
• Retest rules
Assays (list) Allows you to select the assays to configure.
Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view field descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Configure Allows you to select the configuration category.

Categories include:
• System settings
• Assay settings
• QC-Cal settings
Assay categories Displays the configuration items in the Assay settings category.
(list)
• New assay
• Result units
• Retest rules
Select assay Allows you to select the type of user-defined assay to configure.
type
Options are:
• Calculated (default)
• Photometric
Import assay window field descriptions

screen or window.
INSTRUCTIONS Displays step-by-step instructions for importing assay file(s) to another

(box) ARCHITECT c System.
ASSAY / Displays the assay name and number of the exported ARCHITECT c
NUMBER System assays on the floppy disk.
ASSAY VERSION Displays the version of the exported ARCHITECT c System assay(s) on
the floppy disk.
IMPORT STATUS Displays the status of import for each assay file. See Descriptions of
import status messages, page Appendix E-150.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Descriptions of import status messages
The following table lists the import status messages and their
meanings.
Table Appendix E.2: Descriptions of import status messages
Message Description
Floppy disk error A general floppy drive hardware error
occurred.
Assay already installed The assay has already been installed
on your system.
No disk in drive You did not place a floppy disk in the
drive.
File was not found You removed the floppy disk from the
drive.
Sample diluent / reagent name exists The sample diluent or reagent name
exists for another diluent or reagent.
Delete the reagent or diluent before
importing the assay.
Reference assay not installed The selected assay requires a
reference assay that is not installed on
your system.
Module not in correct state The module(s) must not be in Running
or Scheduled pause.
OK No errors reported.
OK - Multiple parameters converted, The following assay parameters were
review Message History. changed:
• Sample wash protocol for sample
probe changed from Optimized
throughput (c 8000 only) to
Maximum wash (c 8000 and c
16000). See Add / edit SmartWash
window - Sample probe view (c
System) field descriptions,
• Primary wavelength and/or
Secondary wavelength. See
Configure assay parameters window
- General - Reaction definition view
(photometric - c System) field

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Table Appendix E.2: Descriptions of import status messages

Message Description
OK - Sample wash protocol for sample • Sample wash protocol for sample
probe converted to Maximum wash. probe changed from Optimized
throughput (c 8000 only) to
Maximum wash (c 8000 and c
16000). See Add / edit SmartWash
window - Sample probe view (c
System) field descriptions,
OK - One or more wavelengths were • Primary wavelength and/or
changed. Secondary wavelength. See
Configure assay parameters window
- General - Reaction definition view
(photometric - c System) field
Export assay window field descriptions

screen or window.
INSTRUCTIONS Displays step-by-step instructions for exporting assay file(s).

(box)
ASSAY / Displays the assay name and identifier.

NUMBER
ASSAY VERSION Displays the assay definition revision number.
EXPORT STATUS Displays the status of export for each assay file. See Descriptions of
export status messages, page Appendix E-152.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Descriptions of export status messages
The following table lists the export status messages and their
meanings.
Table Appendix E.3: Descriptions of export status messages
Message Description
Floppy disk error A general floppy drive hardware error
occurred or the assay file contains one
of the following characters:
\ / : * ? "< > |
Disk full The floppy disk does not have enough
space for the assays selected for
export.
No disk in drive You did not place a floppy disk in the
drive.
Disk write protected You inserted a floppy disk that is write
protected.
Module not in correct state The module(s) must not be in Running
or Scheduled pause.
File syntax error The exported assay file has a file
format error.
Non-English character used Assay contains a non-English or
non-alphanumeric character.
OK No errors reported.
Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Assay name Allows you to edit the name of the assay. You can enter up to ten
characters.
NOTE: You must use a unique name for each assay.

The assay number must be the same number used for a LIS (laboratory
information system) and a LAS (laboratory automation system).

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterisk displays next
to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified.
Assay Allows you to enable an assay so that it can be selected on the Patient
availability (list) order screen, Calibration order screen, or Control order screen.
Options are:
• Disabled
• Patient Disabled
General assay Allows you to view assay-specific parameters used in assay formulas for
parameters (list) some i System assays. This general assay parameters list is not available
for all assays and you cannot edit the list.
This field is not shown in the example provided.
Current value Allows you to edit the current value for the selected general assay
parameter.
Range Allows you to edit the current range for the selected general assay
parameter.
Additional fields display on the Details window
Assay type Displays the assay protocol types.
Pretreatment Displays the pretreatment option the system uses in the assay
option protocol.
Assay version Displays the version number of the assay.
Cal version Displays the calibration version of the assay.
Current value / Displays the current value and allowable range for the general assay
Range parameter.
Assay status Displays the assay status defined for the assay.
Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated) field descriptions


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
screen or window.
Assay Allows you to enter the name for the calculated assay. You can enter
up to ten characters.
Type Displays calculated as the type of assay.
Operator Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the calculated assay
was created.
Date Displays the date the calculated assay was created.
Number Allows you to enter the number for the user-defined assay.
A calculated assay automatically created during assay installation has
an assay number ranging from 3000-3099. This number cannot be
edited.
Assay Allows you to enable the user-defined assay so that it can be selected
availability (list) on the Patient order screen, Calibration order screen, or Control order
screen.
Options are:
• Disabled
Time Displays the time the calculated assay was created.
Formula Allows you to enter a calculated formula by using the keypad keys.
NOTE: The keypad does not display for assays with assay numbers
from 3000 - 3099. The calculated assay formula is automatically
created during assay installation and cannot be edited.
Selected assays Allows you to enter the minimum and maximum value for each
constituent assay selected for the calculated formula. The minimum
and maximum values define the valid range for each constituent
assay. You can select up to four constituent assays for each calculated
formula.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view

(photometric - c System) field descriptions

Application Guide.
screen or window.
Type Displays the type of assay.
Version Displays the version of the ARCHITECT c System assay. This field is
blank for user-defined assays.
Operator Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the assay was last
edited.
Number Displays the number defined for the ARCHITECT c System assay and
allows you to enter a number for a user-defined assay.

Assay Allows you to enable the assay so that it displays on the Patient order
availability (list) screen, Calibration order screen, or Control order screen.
Options are:
• Disabled
Date Displays the date the assay was last edited.
Time Displays the time the assay was last edited.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reaction mode Allows you to select the type of reaction that occurs for the assay.
(list)
Options are:
• End Up (default)
• End Down
• Rate Up
• Rate Down
Primary Allows you to select the primary wavelength used to measure the assay
wavelength (list) concentration.
Options are:
• 340 (default)
• 380
• 404
• 412 (c 8000) or 416 (c 4000/c 16000)
• 444 (c 8000) or 450 (c 4000/c 16000)
• 476
• 500
• 524
• 548
• 572
• 604
• 628
• 660
• 700
• 748
• 804
Secondary Allows you to select the secondary wavelength used to measure the
wavelength (list) assay concentration.
Options are:
• None (default)
• 340
• 380
• 404

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• 412 (c 8000) or 416 (c 4000/c 16000)

• 444 (c 8000) or 450 (c 4000/c 16000)
• 476
• 500
• 524
• 548
• 572
• 604
• 628
• 660
• 700
• 748
• 804
Main read time Allows you to enter the starting (1 - 33) and ending (1 - 33)
photometric points for the main read time.
Last required Allows you to specify the last read (1 - 33) required for test calculation
read so the result can be calculated sooner than the entire ten minute
protocol.
Default is 33
Flex read time Allows you to enter the starting (1 - 33) and ending (1 - 33)
photometric points for the flex read time used for rate assays if all
main read times are outside the absorbance range.
Absorbance Allows you to define the upper and lower limit of absorbance within
range which all reads for a sample should measure. If any read is outside the
absorbance limits during main or flex time reads, the data is not used
to calculate the result.
Color Allows you to enter the starting (1 - 33) and ending (1 - 33)
corrections read photometric points to specify a read time for color correction. The
time color correction is used to adjust the absorbance range limits based on
measured sample color.
Sample blank Allows you to select the type of sample blank.

type (list)
Options are:
• None
• Self Blank

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Blank read time Allows you to enter the starting (1 - 33) and ending (1 - 33)
photometric reads for the blank read time.
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view


Application Guide.
screen or window.
Assay Allows you to enter/edit the name of the assay. You can enter up to ten
characters.
edited.

Assay Allows you to enable the assay so that it can be selected on the Patient
Options are:
• Disabled

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Reagent (list) Allows you to select the reagent to use for the assay. You must scan bar
coded reagents for them to display in the list. You must configure
non-bar coded reagents in the Configure reagents window for them to
display in this list.
R1 & R2 Reagent Allows you to enter the R1 and R2 reagent volume that is dispensed
volumes into the cuvette.
Diluent (list) Allows you to select the sample diluent that is used.
R1 & R2 Water Allows you to enter the volume of water the system dispenses along
volumes with the R1 and R2 reagent when you use concentrated reagents.
Diluent dispense Allows you to select the reagent pipetting profile the system uses to
mode (list) aspirate and dispense diluent(s).
Options are:
• Type 0
• Type 1
• Type 2
• Type 6
R1 & R2 Allows you to select the reagent pipetting profile the system uses to
Dispense mode aspirate and dispense reagent(s).
(list)
Options are:
• Type 0
• Type 1
• Type 2
• Type 5 (R2 only)
• Type 6 (R1 only)
Dilution name Allows you to enter the names of up to three dilutions to be defined.
Sample Allows you to enter the sample volume to be aspirated from the
sample cup or tube for each of up to three dilutions.
Diluted sample Allows you to enter the diluted sample volume to be aspirated from
the cuvette used for each dilution for each of up to three dilutions.
Diluent Allows you to enter the diluent volume to be dispensed in the cuvette
used for each dilution for each of up to three dilutions.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Water Allows you to enter the water volume to be dispensed along with the
diluent, if you are using concentrated diluent(s), for each of up to
three dilutions.
Dilution factor Displays the sample dilution factor the system calculated based on the
volumes you specified.
Default dilution Allows you to select the default dilution performed for patient samples
when you do not select a dilution option when ordering the test.
Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric

- c System) field descriptions

Application Guide.
screen or window.
edited.

Options are:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Disabled
Reaction check Allows you to select the reaction check type used to evaluate
(list) unexpected reaction performance.
Options are:
• End subtraction - Difference between the absorbance measured
during read time A and read time B (A-B)
• End ratio - Ratio of the absorbance measured during read time A
and read time B (A/B)
• Rate subtraction - Differences between the rate per minute
measured during read time A and read time B (A-B)
• Rate ratio - Ratio of the rate per minute measured during read
time A and read time B (A/B)
• None - No check (default)
NOTE: The absorbances for this check are measured at the primary
wavelength only.
A and B Read Allows you to enter the starting (1 - 33) and ending (1 - 33)
time photometric points for the A and B read times used for the reaction
check.
Calculation Allows you to enter the lower and upper limits for the acceptable
limits range for the calculated results of the comparison of the data from the
two read times.
Maximum Displays if you select a reaction mode option of:

absorbance
• End up or End down - The maximum absorbance variation data
variation / Rate
entry box displays allowing you to enter the acceptable
linearity %
absorbance variation (0 - 3.2) allowed for absorbance readings
within the main read time. When the absorbance variation
exceeds the defined limit, the assay becomes an exception and is
not processed.
• Rate up or Rate down - The rate linearity % data entry box
displays allowing you to enter the allowable percent variation
change in absorbance measured during the first three reads, and
then compared to the last three reads for the main and flex read
time.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Minimum Allows you to enter a minimum absorbance change acceptable for read
time B if the reaction check type is End ratio or Rate ratio.
Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view field descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Allows you to edit the name of the assay. You can enter up to ten
characters.
Version Displays the version of the ARCHITECT c System assay.
edited.
Number Displays the number defined for the ARCHITECT c System assay.

Options are:
• Disabled
Reagent 1 Displays the name of the reagent associated with the assay selected.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System) field

descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Displays the name of the selected assay.


Calibration Allows you to edit the number of replicates for the calibrator. The
replicates assay-specific minimum number of replicates allowed displays as the
default as well as the allowable range.
Additional fields display on the Details window.
Type Displays the calibration type Adjust, Full, 1-point Index, or 2-point
Index.
Calibration Displays the data reduction used in the calibration math model.
method
Use Calibration Shows the assay referenced for calibration information and used for
From: result calculation. This field only displays if the calibration method is
Reference.
Adjustment Displays the type of adjustment used in the calibration mode. For
method information on calibration adjustment methods, see i System data
reduction methods, page Appendix C-14 and i System adjustment
methods, page Appendix C-20.
Replicates Displays the number of replicates of the calibrator used in the

calculation of the calibration curve.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Standard Displays the concentrations of the standard calibrators (Calibrators A -

concentrations / F) and calibrator adjustors (Calibrator 1 / Calibrator 2) used for the
Adjustors assay selected.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric -

c System) field descriptions

Application Guide.
screen or window.
Assay Displays the name of the assay selected.
Calibration Allows you to select the calibration method.

method (list)
Options are:
• Abs
• Factor
• Linear (default)
• Logit-4
• Spline
• Use Cal factor/Blank
Calibrator (list) Allows you to select the name of the calibrator set.
Calibrator level Allows you to select a level name from the levels defined for the
(list) selected calibrator set. The list also includes the Water option.
Replicates Allows you to enter the number of replicates for the Blank and all
calibrator levels defined.
Concentration Allows you to enter the concentration value for the Blank.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Application Guide.
screen or window.
Calibration Displays the calibration method.

method
Options are:
• Abs
• Factor
• Linear
• Logit-4
• Spline
Calibrator Displays the name of the calibrator set.
Calibrator level Displays the level names defined for the calibrators.
Sample Allows you to enter the sample volume for the Blank and each defined
calibrator level.
Diluted sample Allows you to enter the diluted sample volume for the Blank and each
calibrator level.
Diluent Allows you to enter the diluent volume for the Blank and each defined
calibrator level.
Water Allows you to enter the water volume for diluting concentrated
diluent for the Blank and each defined calibrator level.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c


Application Guide.
screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

method
Options are:
• Abs
• Factor
• Linear
• Logit-4
• Spline
Full interval Allows you to enter the amount of time, in hours, that the full
calibration curve is valid.
Adjust interval Allows you to enter the amount of time, in hours, that the adjust
calibration is valid. This field displays when an adjust type is defined.
Adjust type (list) Allows you to select the type of adjust calibration to be performed for
the assay.
Options are:
• None
• Blank adjust
• 1-point adjust
• 2-point adjust
Adjust level Allows you to select the calibrator level to be used for 1-point or
2-point adjust.
Default ordering Allows you to select the full or adjust ordering type as the default type
type selected in the Assay options (Calibration order) window.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks view


Application Guide.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
screen or window.

method
Options are:
• Abs
• Factor
• Linear
• Logit-4
• Spline
Blank Allows you to specify the upper and lower limits for the acceptable
absorbance blank absorbance range if a data check is desired.
range
Span (list) Allows you to select the calibrator level used to perform the calibration
data check.
Span Allows you to specify the upper and lower limits for the acceptable
absorbance absorbance range if a span check is desired.
range
Expected cal Allows you to enter the expected target value for the cal factor that
factor you expect when the calibration curve is calculated.
Expected cal Allows you to enter the percent tolerance from the expected cal factor
factor tolerance target value that is allowed when the calibration curve is calculated.
%
Maximum curve Allows you to enter the maximum acceptable calibrator differences to
fit check the curve fit and accuracy.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System) field

descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Full interval Allows you to enter the amount of time, in hours, that the full
calibration is valid.
Refer to the ARCHITECT c System assay specific-package insert for
calibration interval.
Slope limit (%) Allows you to specify the upper and lower limits for the acceptable
slope limits for the ICT (integrated chip technology) calibration curve.
The slope cannot be defined below 45% or above 120%.
Calibrator low Displays the name of the low calibrator.
Low Allows you to enter the concentration for the low calibrator.
concentration
Calibrator high Displays the name of the high calibrator.
High Allows you to enter the concentration for the high calibrator.
concentration
Replicates Allows you to enter the number of replicates for the low and high
calibrators and for the index, if defined.
Default: 3
Index used Allows you to select whether or not to use an index solution during a
calibration.
Options are:
• Yes
• No (default)
Index Allows you to enter the concentration for the index solution.
concentration
Index range Allows you to specify the upper and lower limits for acceptable range
for the index concentration calculated during the ICT calibration.
Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System) field descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay Displays the name of the selected assay.


Default dilution Allows you to select the default dilution performed for patient samples
when you do not select a dilution option when ordering the test. Each
assay has up to six dilutions. Dilution options valid for the assay
display.
Refer to the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert for
dilution information.
Additional fields display on the Details window.
Manual dilution Indicates whether the selected assay uses the manual dilution option
selected from the Patient order screen or Control order screen.
Result units Displays the result concentration units selected for the assay.
Dilution ranges Displays the minimum and maximum concentrations allowable for
(table) the dilution options.
• Dilution name
• Low
• High
Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System) field

descriptions

Application Guide.
screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Volume Displays the amount of wash solution to use for the selected
SmartWash definition.
• For reagent probes, you can define the volume to any volume
from 20 to 345 μL.
• For cuvettes, the volume is fixed at 345 μL.
Replicates Displays the number of times the reagent probe wash protocol is
performed for the selected SmartWash definition.
Sample wash Displays the type of sample probe wash to be performed for the
protocol selected SmartWash definition.
Options are:
• Maximum wash (c System) - The system always performs the
defined wash before each sample regardless of the order in which
tests aspirate.
SmartWash Displays the following parameters defined for SmartWash for the assay
parameters selected:
(table)
• Components - Displays the hardware components related to
SmartWash. (R1, R2, Sample probe, or Cuvette)
• Reagent/Assay - Displays the reagent for Rgt 1 probe and Rgt 2
probe reagent prewash option, the assay for cuvettes, and a
blank field for sample probes.
• Wash - Displays the wash solution to be used.
Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Reagents (list) Allows you to select the name of the reagent that interferes with the
reagent used for the assay you are configuring. List items are
dependent on the reagent probe option selected.
• For the Rgt 1 probe the list includes an All option and the name
of each configured reagent and sample diluent.
• For the Rgt 2 probe the list includes an All option and the name
of each reagent defined as type R1 and R2.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: If you select the All option, the system always performs the
defined wash before aspirating the reagent(s) for this assay unless the
previous aspiration was the same reagent. The system does not
perform the wash between aspirations of the same reagent unless you
configure a separate wash protocol to define this wash.
Wash (list) Allows you to select a solution to wash the Rgt 1 and Rgt 2 probes.
Options are:
• Water
• Reagent
• 0.5% Acid Wash
• Detergent A
• 10% Detergent B
Volume Allows you to define the amount of wash solution to use. For reagent
probes, you can define the volume to any volume from 20 to 345 μL.
Replicates Allows you to specify the number of times the defined wash protocol
is performed.
Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Wash (list) Allows you to select a solution to wash the sample probe.
Options are:
• Water
• 0.5% Acid Wash
• Detergent A
Sample wash Allows you to select the type of sample probe wash to be performed.
protocol
Options are:

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Maximum wash (c System) - The system always performs the

defined wash before each sample regardless of the order in which
tests aspirate.
Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Assays (list) Allows you to select one of the c System assays to be used for washing
the cuvettes.
Wash (list) Allows you to select a solution to wash the cuvettes.

Options are:
• 0.5% Acid Wash
• Detergent A
• 10% Detergent B
Volume Displays the amount of wash solution to use. For cuvettes, the volume
is fixed at 345 μL.
Configure assay parameters window - Results view field descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Displays the assay selected on the Configuration screen - Assay

settings view.



(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Result units Displays the result concentration units selected for the assay.
Low-Linearity Allows you to edit the low limit value for the linearity range of the
assay.
For i System assays this field can only be edited when the first default
dilution option is configured.
High-Linearity Allows you to edit the high limit value for the linearity range of the
assay.
For i System assays this field can only be edited when the first default
dilution option is configured. This value cannot be edited above the
assay default high linearity.
Gender and age Displays the following information for the selected assay.
specific ranges
• Gender
(table)
• Age (Units)
• Normal range
• Extreme range
Configure results parameters window field descriptions

screen or window.
Flag range Allows you to define a flag range, which includes the following
specifications parameters:
• Gender (Male, Female, or Either)
• Age units (Days, Months, Years) and age range
• Normal range for the defined gender and age range
• Extreme range for the defined gender and age range (optional)
Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view field descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009


Name (list) Allows you to select the interpretation name from the list
(assay-specific).
Range Allows you to enter the range for interpretations for the assay.
Results review Allows you to select the settings at which results are held until they
required are manually reviewed and released.
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view field
descriptions

screen or window.
Reagent name Displays the name of the reagent you selected.
Reagent type Displays the type of reagent or diluent cartridge.
Run calibrations Allows you to calibrate by lot number or by a specific reagent kit.
for reagents by
Reagent low Allows you to enter the number of tests remaining in a reagent kit,
alert which defines the level at which a reagent low alert notification
displays.
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - User-defined assay view field
descriptions


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
screen or window.
Reagent name Allows you to enter the name for the new user-defined reagent.
Reagent low Allows you to enter the number of tests remaining in a reagent kit,
alert which defines the level at which a reagent low alert notification
displays.
Reagent type Allows you to select the reagent type for the new user-defined assay.
(list)
Options are:
• R1 only
• R1 and R2
• Sample diluent
Onboard stability Allows you to enter the onboard stability time, in hours, for the new
user-defined reagent.
Lot number (list) Allows you to enter the lot number for new reagent kits. It also
displays previously configured lot numbers.
Configured kits Displays the following configuration information for the selected
• Lot number
• Serial number
• Expiration date
• R1 cartridge size
• R2 cartridge size
Serial number Allows you to enter the serial number for the new user-defined reagent
kit.
Expiration date Allows you to enter the expiration date for the new user-defined
reagent kit.
R1 cartridge size Allows you to select the cartridge size for the R1 reagent.
(list)
Options are:
• Large (90 mL cartridge)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• 20 mL (bottle)
R2 cartridge size Allows you to select the cartridge size for the R2 reagent.
(list)
Options are:
• Large (90 mL cartridge)
• 20 mL (bottle)
Configure result units window field descriptions

screen or window.
Version Displays the version of the assay.
Result units Allows you to change the concentration units reported for the assay.
IMPORTANT: If you edit the result concentration unit, all previous

Levey-Jennings and QC summary information is deleted. For c System
assays, the system changes the result unit name displayed but does not
automatically adjust any values. To ensure the appropriate parameters
are adjusted, see Change the result units setting, page 2-87.
Decimal places Allows you to edit the number of decimal places currently configured
for the assay.
Range: 0 - 4 (c System)
Range: assay-specific (i System)
Default: assay-specific

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Correlation Allows you to enter a factor for c System assays if results require a
factor calculation to match another system.
Intercept Allows you to enter an intercept for c System assays if results require a
calculation to match another system.
Configure panel definitions window field descriptions

screen or window.
New panel name Allows you to enter the name for the panel.
Panel type Allows you to select the panel type. The type indicates whether the
panels display on the Patient order screen and/or Control order
screen.
Options are:
• Patient
• QC
• Both
Panels (list) Lists the configured panels. When you select a panel, all assays in that
panel are displayed.
Assays (list) Lists available assays that may be configured for the panel.
NOTE: You must select at least two assays before you can add the
panel.
Configure assay retest rules window field descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Displays the name of the assay you selected from the Configuration
screen - Assay settings view.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Units Displays the result units for the assay selected.
Assay retest List that displays the current name and settings for each rule. See
rules Assay retest rule settings, page Appendix E-178.
Original dilution Displays the dilution run on the original test. The original test must be
run at this dilution to be considered for a retest.
Retest indicator Allows you to enter minimum and maximum limits that the original
test must fall within to be considered for an auto retest.
NOTE: An entry in both fields is not required. You can enter either a
minimum or maximum limit.
Replicates Displays the number of replicates to be run for the retest assay(s).
NOTE: The number of replicates entered is run for all retest assays.
Retest assays Displays the assay(s) and the dilution that is run if the original assay
(table) result falls within the defined limits.
• Assay
• Dilution
NOTE: You can define any number of assays to be retested for a given
rule.
Table Appendix E.4: Assay retest rule settings
Original dilution The dilution run on the original test. The original test
must be run at this dilution to be considered for a
retest.
Result range Displays the minimum and maximum limits for the
result at the original dilution in order to be
considered for a retest.
Replicates The number of replicates to be run for the retest
assay(s).
NOTE: The number of replicates entered is run

for all retest assays.
Retest assays The assay(s) and the dilution that are run if the
original assay result falls within the defined limits.
NOTE: You can define any number of assays to

be retested for a given rule.
Add / edit assay retest rules window field descriptions


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
screen or window.
Assay Displays the name of the assay you selected from the Configuration
screen - Assay settings view.
Rule name Allows you to enter the retest rule name. You can enter up to 18
characters.
Replicates Allows you to enter the number of replicates to be run for the retest
assay(s).
NOTE: The number of replicates you enter runs for all retest assays for
that rule.
Retest indicator Allows you to specify whether the retest rule is based on a result range
or an error with result.
NOTE: If you have selected the error code option and one of the
following error codes occur, the result is retested.
• 1005 - Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside the
specification of the lowest calibrator.
• 1007 - Unable to process test, activated read failure.
• 1008 - Unable to process test, final read failure.
• 1051 - Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeded optical
limits.
• 1053 - Unable to calculate result, rate reaction linearity failure.
• 1054 - Unable to calculate result, Reaction check failure.
• 1232 - Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside the
specification of the highest calibrator.
• 1250 - Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeds highest
calibrator.
• 1350 - Unable to calculate result, no absorbance reads within
absorbance range.
• 1351 - Unable to calculate result, insufficient absorbance reads
within absorbance range.
Result range Allows you to enter minimum and maximum limits that the original
test must fall within to be considered for an auto retest.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
NOTE: An entry in both fields is not required. You can enter either a
minimum or maximum limit.
Original dilution Allows you to select the dilution for running the original test in order
to be considered for an auto retest. You must run the original test at
this dilution to be considered for a retest.
Selected retest Displays the selected retest assay(s) to be run.

assays
rule.
Retest dilution Allows you to select the dilution protocol for each of the selected
assays to use for the auto retest.
Select assay window field descriptions

screen or window.
Assays (list) Allows you to select or deselect the assay(s) you want to retest.
rule.
Configuration screen - QC-Cal settings view field descriptions

screen or window.
Configure Allows you to select one of the following categories for configuration:
• System settings
• Assay settings
• QC-Cal settings
QC-Cal Allows you to select the following QC-Cal configuration items:

categories (list)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• Westgard rules
• Calibrator set
Assays (list) Allows you to select the assay to configure.
Configure single analyte window field descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Displays the assay you selected on the Configuration screen - QC - Cal
settings view.
Lot number (list) Allows you to enter the lot number for the control. You can enter up
to 20 different lot numbers.
You can also select the New Lot - Copy Data option which allows you
to use the same data configured for the default lot.
Default Allows you to select the default lot number for the control.
Exp. date Allows you to enter the expiration date for the control.
Level name Allows you to enter a name for the specific control level. You can enter
up to 10 alphanumeric characters for the level name and 6 different
levels per lot number.
Manufacturer Allows you to enter the manufacturer mean for the control level.
mean
Manufacturer 1 Allows you to enter the manufacturer value that represents one
SD standard deviation for the control level.
Expected mean Allows you to enter the expected mean for the control level.
Expected 1 SD Allows you to enter the expected value that represents one standard
deviation for the control level.
Default dilution Allows you to select a dilution option other than the default.
(list)
Bar code SID Allows you to enter a specific bar code SID, up to 20 characters, to
identify a sample as a control.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Display order Allows you to select a display order position on the Control order
(list) screen.
QC time interval Allows you to enter the amount of time, in hours, that the next
automated QC will be processed for an analyte.
QC test count Allows you to enter the number of tests to be completed for an analyte
interval before the next automated QC will be processed.
Configure multiconstituent control window field descriptions

screen or window.
Control Displays the name of the multiconstituent control you selected. If you
select New, you may enter a name for the multiconstituent control.
Lot number Allows you to enter a lot number for the multiconstituent control. You
can enter up to 20 different lot numbers.
Level (list) Allows you to select a multiconstituent control level.

Options are:
• Level 1 (default)
• Level 2
• Level 3
Expiration date Allows you to enter the expiration date for the multiconstituent
control.
ASSAY (table) Displays the following information:

• Assay - Displays the name of the assays configured for the
multiconstituent control level.
• Default Dilution - Displays the default dilution for the assays
configured for the multiconstituent control level.
• Expected Mean - Displays the expected mean for the assays for
the multiconstituent control level.
• Expected 1 SD - Displays the expected value that represents one
standard deviation for the assays for the multiconstituent
control level.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
• QC Time Interval - Displays the amount of time, in hours, that

the next automated QC will be processed for an analyte.
• QC Test Interval - Displays the number of tests to be completed
for an analyte before the next automated QC will be processed.
Assign assays for multiconstituent control window field descriptions

screen or window.
Control Displays the name of the multiconstituent control to be imported.
Lot number Displays the lot number.
Expiration date Displays the expiration date.
Assay Displays the following information:

assignment
• File assay / number - Displays the assay name and number from
(table)
the imported file.
• System assay / number - Displays the assay name and number of
the assigned assay on the system.
• Status - Displays the status of the system assay assignment. The
following statuses may be displayed:
– Assigned - System (c System)
– Assigned - User (c System)
– No Assay
– OK
– Previously Defined
– Units Mismatch (c System)
• System units - Displays the units of the system assay.
• File units - Displays the available units in the imported file.
Define control data window field descriptions

screen or window.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Control name Displays the name of the multiconstituent control.
Level Displays the name of the multiconstituent control level.
Assay Displays the name of the assay you selected on the Configure
Lot number Displays the lot number for the assay you selected on the Configure
Manufacturer Allows you to enter the manufacturer mean value for the
mean multiconstituent control level.
Manufacturer 1 Allows you to enter the manufacturer value that represents one
SD standard deviation for the multiconstituent control level.
Expected mean Allows you to enter the expected mean value for the multiconstituent
control level.
Expected 1 SD Allows you to enter the expected value that represents one standard
deviation for the multiconstituent control level.
Default dilution Allows you to select a dilution for the assay.

(list)
QC time interval Allows you to enter the amount of time, in hours, that the next
automated QC will be processed for an analyte.
QC test count Allows you to enter the number of tests to be completed for an analyte
interval before the next automated QC will be processed.
Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window field descriptions

screen or window.
Bar codes Displays the configured multiconstituent bar code SIDs.
New bar code Allows you to enter a specific bar code SID, up to 20 characters, to
SID identify a sample as a control.
Control Allows you to select the multiconstituent control for the bar code SID.
Lot Allows you to select the control lot number.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Level Allows you to select the control level.
Assays Allows you to select the assays for the multiconstituent bar code SID.
Configure Westgard window field descriptions

screen or window.
Assay Displays the assay you selected.
Rules (list) Allows you to select each Westgard rule.
NOTE: The default configuration setting for all assays is:

• 1 - 2s Enabled, Warning
• 1 - 3s Enabled, Failure
Status Allows you to select the status for the rule.

Options are:
• Enabled
• Disabled
Flag type Allows you to select the type of Westgard flag for the rule.
Options are:
• Warning
• Failure
Configure calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Calibrator set Displays the name of the calibrator set you selected.
If you select NEW, you may enter a name for the calibrator.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Lot number Allows you to enter a new lot number or import a lot number.
Number of levels Allows you to enter the number of levels that the calibrator set
contains.
Expiration date Allows you to enter the expiration date for the calibrator set.
Assay (table) Displays the calibrator values configured for each assay in the
calibrator set.
Define calibrator data window (c System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Calibrator set Displays the name of the calibrator set.
Lot number Displays the lot number for the calibrator set.
Assay Displays the name of the assay you selected on the Configure
calibrator set window.
Concentration Allows you to enter the concentration values for each calibrator level
defined.
Assign assays for calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions

screen or window.
Calibrator set Displays the name of the calibrator set to be imported.
Lot number Displays the lot number.
Number of levels Displays the number of levels.
Expiration date Displays the expiration date.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Assay Displays the following information:

assignment
• File assay / number - Displays the assay name and number from
(table)
the imported file.
• System assay / number - Displays the assay name and number of
the assigned assay on the system.
• Status - Displays the status of the system assay assignment. The
following statuses may be displayed:
– Assigned - System
– Assigned - User
– Cal Set Mismatch
– No Assay
– OK
– Previously Defined
– Units Mismatch
• System units - Displays the units of the system assay.
• File units - Displays the available units in the imported file.
Import lot file selection window field descriptions

screen or window.
File name Displays the name of the files available to import.
Drive Displays the drive location (CD-ROM or USB Flash) of the files.
Utilities screen - Software install view field descriptions

screen or window.
Software install Displays the software install options.

(option)
System updates Displays the system software update options.

(option)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Current software Displays the current system software version.

version
Backup software Displays the backup options.

(option)
Utilities screen - System updates view field descriptions

screen or window.

(option)

(option)

(option)
System date / Displays the current date and time.

time
Available Displays a list of available software updates to be installed.

updates (list)
Update Displays instructions for procedures to be performed before installing

instructions the TSB.
Utilities screen - Backup software view field descriptions

screen or window.

(option)

(option)

(option)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Date / Time Displays the date and time of the selected backup.
Available Displays a list of the backup files that have been created.
backups (list)
Comment Displays any comments that were entered when the selected backup
was created.
Create backup window field descriptions

screen or window.
Backup name Displays the file name for the backup you are creating.
Comment Allows you to enter a comment, You can enter up to approximately 50

characters.
Print options window field descriptions

screen or window.
Printer name Displays the name of the printer.
Printer status Displays the current status of the printer.
NOTE: Printer status is specific to the type of printer you are using.
Print selection Allows you to select one or more items to print.
Reports Lists the names of the reports available to print. For a complete list of
available (list) available reports, see Print a report, page 5-295.
Number of Allows you to enter the number of copies you want to print.
copies
Default: 1
Printer window field descriptions


(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
screen or window.
Printer status Displays the current status of the printer.
NOTE: Printer status is specific to the type of printer you are using.
Printer queue Displays a list of the reports you requested, including printing status
(list) and the time you requested the report.
Printing statuses include:
• Failed
• Pending
• Printing
• Downloading records
• Deleting
NOTE: If more than one report is in the queue and the first report has
a status of Failed, you must delete this report before the other reports
in the queue will print.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
AbbottLink A data-sharing software between laboratory instrumentation and Abbott internal

systems for the transfer of instrument data.
absorbance limit c System; Configured range of absorbance values that are considered acceptable
for measurement purposes. Values outside this range are not used for calculation.
absorbance limit c System; Calibration data check that evaluates the absorbance or change in
check absorbance obtained during sample measurement. If the absorbance or change
in absorbance is outside the specified range an error message is generated.
absorbance c System; Calibration mode in which results are based on the absorbance of
mode water and are represented as absorbance for an end-point assay or as
absorbance change (rate of absorbance change per minute) for a rate assay.
accessory Item that is used repeatedly such as a sample carrier, carrier tray, and reagent
segment.
Acid Wash c System; Acidic wash solution used by the cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes
after sample analysis. A dilution of the acid wash solution may also be used for
probe washing.
active curve Calibration curve that has passed all instrument verifications and is stored in
memory (processing module-specific) for a specific reagent lot. The ARCHITECT
System can store active calibration curves for four (4) reagent lots for each assay
per processing module.
active screen Screen that is currently displayed.
active window Window that is currently displayed.
adjustment c System; Adjustment method that allows you to run a reagent blank or fewer
calibration calibrator levels to adjust a calibration curve. See also one-point adjust,
page Glossary-11, and two-point adjust, page Glossary-19.
i System; Adjustment method that allows you to run two calibrator levels instead of
six to calibrate an assay. The two calibrator levels (adjusters) are used to adjust
the master calibration curve stored in the reagent bar code on the microparticle
bottle. See also curve shape method, page Glossary-5, linear transformation
method, page Glossary-9, parameter method, page Glossary-11, and ratio
technique method, page Glossary-14.
administrator SCC (system control center) access level (user ID and password) required to
logon perform administrator functions such as configuring settings, performing specific
diagnostic procedures, and approving the maintenance log.
aliquot tube Tube (75 mm - 100 mm in height) that contains an aliquot of sample. Aliquot tubes
may be used in conjunction with sample cups. If used alone, you must use the
sample gauge to verify adequate sample is present.
Alkaline Wash c System; Alkaline wash solution used by the cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes
after sample analysis.
alphanumeric Characters defined by Abbott Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and the special
characters characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and <space>.
ARCHITECT Refers to a c System and/or i System.
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Glossary-1

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
ARM accessory i 2000/i 2000SR; Automatic Reconstitution Module, optional component that
automatically dilutes Concentrated Wash Buffer to the proper concentration and
delivers it to the wash buffer reservoir.
assay Analysis to determine the presence, absence, or quantity of one or more analytes.
assay calibration Method of analyzing samples of known concentrations, recording the instrument
response value(s), and plotting the measured value(s) against the known
concentration to create a curve.
assay file File containing assay-specific parameters.
assay Values that define specific characteristics or verify the performance of an assay.
parameters
assay settings Settings within each assay configuration category that the system administrator
configures to meet site-specific requirements.
assay software Software used to install assay files.
assay-specific Assay-specific information included with each reagent kit.

package insert
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials; Organization that defines the
specifications for the transfer of information between laboratory instruments and
computer systems.
auto retest Process the system uses to automatically generate rerun orders for patient
samples.
bar code label Unique identifier comprised of black bars that represent patient information.
bar code reader Glass window that prevents debris and liquid from collecting on the bar code
window reader components.
bar code Optional component used to scan sample bar codes to allow positive sample
scanner identification.
batch Type of sample processing where each sample has the same assay(s) ordered.
processing
biological hazard Activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material.
blank adjust c System; Calibration type that uses the absorbance data for the reagent blank to
adjust the calibration curve.
boards Printed circuit board.
bulk solutions Liquid solutions provided in large quantities that are used in sample processing.
bulk solution c System; Onboard storage area for Acid Wash, page Glossary-1, Alkaline Wash,
supply center page Glossary-1, and ICT Reference Solution, page Glossary-8.
c 16000 c System; Chemistry analyzer that processes up to 1600 photometric and 600
processing potentiometric tests per hour.
module
Glossary-2 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
module
module
calculated c System; Rate of absorbance change per minute as calculated using the linear
absorbance least squares method.
calibration, i System; Calibration method in which six calibrators (A-F) are measured and a
6-point calibration curve is generated using these data points.
calibration, c System; Calibration or data reduction method in which only the reagent blank is
factor measured and a user defined factor is used to calculate results.
calibration, index i System; Calibration method used for qualitative (cutoff) assays in which an index
calibrator is run to generate the cutoff value for the assay.
calibration, c System; Calibration or data reduction method in which a reagent blank and one
linear mode calibrator are measured, and a calibration curve is generated using these two
(1-point method) data points.
calibration, c System; Calibration or data reduction method in which a reagent blank and two
linear mode to six calibrators of different concentrations are measured, and a point-to-point
(multi-point calibration curve is generated using these data points.
method)
calibration, c System; Non-linear calibration or data reduction method that measures a
logit-4 reagent blank and three to six calibrators for which the absorbance or absorbance
change increases as the concentration increases.
calibration, c System; Non-linear calibration or data reduction method in which a reagent
spline blank and three to six calibrators are measured, and a multiple sectioned
calibration curve is generated using a polynomial expression so that the adjoining
sections are connected smoothly.
calibration, use c System; Calibration method in which the concentration or activity is calculated
factor and blank using the factor and reagent blank from a calibration curve generated for another
assay.
calibration i System; Method used to determine the reportable range of an assay.
verification
card cage Housing that contains the printed circuit boards that provides the power
distribution and signal interconnection for the system.
carrier Accessory used on the RSH (robotic sample handler) or SSH (standard sample
handler) to transport patient samples, calibrators, or controls to the sample
pipettor(s).
carrier Mechanism on the RSH (robotic sample handler) that positions sample carriers at
positioner the appropriate processing module sample aspiration position.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
carrier tray Accessory used to hold sample carriers for loading on the RSH (robotic sample
handler). Each tray holds up to five sample carriers.
carrier transport Mechanism used to transport sample carriers from a bay on the RSH (robotic
sample handler) to the carrier positioner.
carousel Rotating mechanism on which samples or reagents are placed.
CD-ROM drive Compact Disc Read Only Memory drive; Read device used for installing system
and assay software and online documentation.
CE marking Symbol that indicates the product is in conformance with the EC (European
Community) Directives.
check box Software interface element that allows you to select one or more items from the
displayed choices. A black check mark in the box indicates it is selected.
Chemiflex i System; Assay protocols which incorporate chemiluminescent detection
technology with flexible assay pipetting protocols.
chemiluminesce i System; Emission of light produced by a chemical reaction.
nse
ci System Integrated System; Refers to a ci 4100, ci 8200, or ci 16200 system.
CLSI Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute; Nonprofit organization that provides a
communication forum for the development, promotion, and use of standards for
the world’s medical science community.
CMIA i System; Chemiluminescent Microparticle Immunoassay; Detection technology
used to perform automated immunoassays.
CMIA optics i System; Sub-assembly that houses the PMT (photomultiplier tube) and optics
reader reader and produces the chemiluminescent reads by collecting the emitted
photons of light and translates them to yield RLUs, which are then used by the
system to calculate results.
color correction c System; Adjustment performed on the absorbance range limits to correct for
sample color so that only flags and error messages associated with the
absorbance of the analyte are generated. Color correction does not adjust the
reported result.
Concentrated i System; Solution containing phosphate buffered saline that must be diluted prior
Wash Buffer to use. See also wash buffer, page Glossary-20.
configuration Process you use to define system, assay, and QC-Cal settings to meet your
site-specific requirements.
consumables Replenishable items required to run assays on an ARCHITECT System, such as
bulk and onboard solutions, calibrators, controls, reagents, sample cups, and so
forth.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
context available Buttons on the function bar that have yellow lettering and are available (green
function bar background) or unavailable (gray background) based on selections you make from
buttons the screen. For example, from the Order status screen you can only select the F5
- Details function button after you select an order. See also screen available
function bar buttons, page Glossary-17.
context-sensitive Information that displays online and is specific to the screen, window, or error
help message currently displayed.
control Material with a known concentration of a specific analyte. Controls are run with
patient samples and are used to monitor assay and system performance over
time. See also single constituent control, page Glossary-18 and multiconstituent
control, page Glossary-11.
C/P Carrier/position; Identifier that indicates the location of a sample, its position within
a carrier, and the specific carrier in which it is loaded. For example, a C/P of
A001/4 indicates the sample is located in position 4 of sample carrier A001.
C/P (LAS) Carousel/position; Identifier that indicates the location of a sample, its position
within an LAS (laboratory automation system) sample carousel (i 2000), and the
specific carousel it is loaded onto. For example, a C/P of A/4 indicates the sample
is located in position 4 of LAS sample carousel A.
CPU Central processing unit; Computational and control unit of the SCC (system
control center) that interprets and executes instructions.
c System Refers to a c 4000, c 8000 or c 16000 instrument.
curve shape i System; Adjustment method that uses the RLU (relative light unit) values stored
method in the reagent bar code for calibrators A through F to determine the 4PLC (four
parameter logistic curve) parameters of the master calibration.
cuvette c System; Rectangular glass container that contains the assay reaction
components for analysis.
cuvette tab c System; Plastic tab on top of the cuvette segment that is used to detect the
positioning of the reaction carousel for optical readings.
cuvette segment c System; Segments that sit in the reaction carousel and hold cuvettes. Each
cuvette segment holds 15 cuvettes.
cuvette segment c System; Accessory placed in the reaction carousel during the sample and
alignment tool reagent pipettor calibration procedures.
cuvette washer c System; Device with eight nozzles that washes and dries the cuvettes after each
use.
cycle power Process of removing power and then applying it again.
decontamination Process that removes contamination.
depressed Concentration that is less than expected.

concentration
diagnostic Procedure you perform to check the status of assemblies and mechanisms in
procedure reaction to certain hardware malfunctions on your ARCHITECT System.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
dry tip c System; Absorbent material on the end of the cuvette washer nozzle used to dry
the cuvette after it has been washed and before a sample is dispensed.
elevated Concentration that is greater than expected.
concentration
end ratio c System; Assay validity check that uses a ratio of absorbances (A/B) measured
at two different times during the reaction to check for prozone effect or other
reaction anomalies.
end subtraction c System; Assay validity check that uses the difference between absorbances
(A-B) measured at two different times during the reaction to check for prozone
effect or other reaction anomalies.
end-point assay c System; Reactions that are allowed to react until all reactant is depleted and the
absorbance is stable. When the reaction is complete, the system measures the
absorbance readings used for calibration and calculating results.
erratic results Results that exceed the expected tolerance limits.
error code Numeric identifier for an error message.

error message Displayed message informing the operator of an error condition.
exception Test order that failed to complete.
external modem Optional component that connects the ARCHITECT System to a telephone line,
which allows communication with Abbott personnel for training and
troubleshooting purposes.
extrapolated c System; Calculation used in linear calibration methods to extend the calibration
calculation curve for samples with concentrations higher than the calibrators.
factor method c System; Calibration or data reduction method in which only the reagent blank is
measured and a user defined factor is used to calculate results.
failed curve Calibration curve with values that fall outside the predetermined range, that was
manually failed, or could not be completed due to a hardware error.
field Software interface element that displays a specific type of data (for example,
alphabetic or numeric).
FlexRate method c System; Method used to extend the linear range of an enzymatic assay. Data
points in the flex read time are used for high-activity and high-concentration
samples. Results calculated using these data points are identified by the FLEX
result flag.
flush Procedure performed to flush solution through the fluidic system to remove
bubbles.
full calibration c System; Measurement of a reagent blank and all data points specified for an
assay plotted against known concentrations to create a curve for evaluating
unknown samples.
i System; Measurement of all data points specified for an assay plotted against
known concentrations to create a curve for evaluating unknown samples.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
function bar Buttons at the bottom of every software screen that allow you to perform actions
buttons or access windows associated with the screen. They correspond to the function
keys on the keyboard. See also screen available function bar buttons,
page Glossary-17 and context available function bar buttons, page Glossary-5.
general operator SCC (system control center) identifier that is used to add your operator ID to
logon printouts and reports.
GUI Graphical user interface; Software display format that allows you to initiate
commands or make choices by selecting icons, buttons, items from lists, and so
forth. You can use the mouse, touch-screen monitor, and/or keyboard to make
your selections.
hazards Situations that could cause physical harm to a user or damage to the system or
laboratory environment.
Help? Online documentation that provides information on the screen, window, or error
message currently displayed.
help button Button located on every software screen, window, and error message that
provides access to Help?.
Help window Window in which the content of the online operations manual or Help? display. In
addition to displaying information, Help windows provide several functional
elements to help you find and use the information.
high - c System; Optional bottle that collects the high-concentration liquid waste from the
concentration cuvettes and the ICT unit.
waste bottle
home Starting position for mechanical components.
host Auxiliary computer system that can communicate with an ARCHITECT System.
host interface Act of communication between the ARCHITECT System and a host computer.
operation
host query The length of time the ARCHITECT System waits for a response from the host.
timeout
hot spot Area on an image map that when selected provides access to further information
about the area it represents.
hypertext A text hyperlink (predefined link) to related information that displays as blue,
underlined text in the online documentation.
i 1000SR i 1000SR; Immunoassay analyzer that processes up to 100 CMIA tests per hour
processing when using a one step 11 STAT protocol.
module
i 2000 i 2000; Immunoassay analyzer that processes up to 200 CMIA (chemiluminescent
processing microparticle immunoassay) tests per hour.
module

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
i 2000SR i 2000SR; Immunoassay analyzer that processes up to 200 CMIA tests per hour
processing and provides STAT processing.
module
icon Navigational element on the menu bar that allows you to display specific screens.
Additionally, icons serve as blinking indicators to inform you that a condition
requires your attention.
ICT c System; Integrated chip technology; Method for measuring Na+, K+, and Cl-
potentiometrically using ion-selective electrodes that are combined into a single
electronic device.
ICT aspiration c System; Syringe-drive pump that aspirates samples or ICT Reference Solution
pump into the ICT module for measurement. Once measurement is complete, the pump
aspirates waste from the ICT unit and moves it into the water bath/waste overflow
area.
ICT cleaning c System; Cleaning agent prepared by the operator and used during daily
fluid maintenance procedures to clean the ICT module.
ICT diluent c System; Reagent (ICTD/ICTD5) used to dilute samples for electrolyte analysis.
ICT module c System; Integrated chip located within the ICT unit that contains the Na+, K+,
Cl-, and reference electrodes.
ICT Reference c System; Mid-concentration standard that is aspirated and analyzed by the ICT
Solution module before and after each sample to provide a reference concentration used to
calculate results.
ICT reference c System; Metal tube located within the water bath through which the ICT
solution Reference solution flows to preheat the solution before it is used to fill the ICT
preheater reference solution cup.
ICT reference c System; Pump that aspirates ICT Reference Solution through the ICT reference
solution pump solution pre-heater into the ICT reference solution cup, and then drains the cup.
ICT unit c System; Device that consists of the ICT probe and ICT module that is used to
perform indirect potentiometric analysis. The ICT probe aspirates the sample. The
ICT module simultaneously measures Na+, K+, and Cl- using integrated chip
technology.
image map Image that contains graphical hyperlinks with selectable areas or "hot spots" that
provide access to additional information about the area they represent.
index method i System; Calibration method used for qualitative (cutoff) assays in which an index
calibrator is run to generate the cutoff value for the assay.
information area Main area of software screens and windows that displays data and allows you to
make selections and/or enter information to perform various functions.
infranatant fluid Clear fluid that, after the settling out of an insoluble liquid or solid by the action of
normal gravity or of centrifugal force, takes up the lower portion of the contents of
a vessel.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
input device Hardware (for example mouse, touch-screen monitor, keypad, and so forth) that is
used to enter information into the SCC (system control center).
i System Refers to a single or multi-module i 2000, i 2000SR, or i 1000SR.
keyboard Computer hardware component used with the mouse and/or touch-screen
monitor to enter information. You can use the keyboard as an alternate means of
performing most functions.
lamp c System; Tungsten-halogen lamp used to provide the light source for photometric
measurement.
LAS carousel i 2000; Transport system used for loading calibrators, controls, and patient
sample handler samples and presenting them to an i 2000 processing module that is integrated
with an LAS (Laboratory automation system) track.
LAS sample i 2000; Carousels used on the LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel
carousels sample handler to transport patient samples, calibrators, or controls to the sample
pipettor.
Levey-Jennings Control graphs that are used to monitor mean and range of control measurement
graphs values from run to run.
linear method c System; Calibration or data reduction method in which a reagent blank and one
to six calibrators are measured, and a point-to-point calibration curve is generated
using these data points.
linear i System; Adjustment method that assumes a linear relationship between the
transformation calibrator RLU (relative light unit) values generated by the system and the master
method calibration information stored in the reagent bar code on the microparticle bottle.
linearity range Minimum and maximum reportable values of an assay.
liquid level Detection of liquid level as measured by the change in capacitance.

sensing
liquid waste arm i 2000/i 2000SR; Device that removes liquid from RVs (reaction vessels) prior to
unloading them to the solid waste container.
list button Software interface element that displays a list of items from which to choose.
LLS error Liquid level sense error; Error that occurs when there is not enough fluid present,
when there are bubbles or extra drops of fluid, or due to incorrect probe
positioning.
load diverter i System; Mechanism to move RVs from the inner track to the outer track of the
process path when RVs are needed for processing.
LoB Limit of Blank is the highest value that is likely to be observed in a series of results
on a sample that contains no analyte.
LoD Limit of Detection is the actual concentration at which an observed test result is
very likely to exceed the LoB (Limit of Blank) and may therefore be declared as
“detectable”.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
LoQ Limit of Quantitation is the lowest actual concentration at which the analyte is
reliably detected and at which the uncertainty of the observed test result is less
than or equal to the goal of uncertainty.
log off Process of signing off the SCC (system control center).
log on Process of signing in or gaining access to certain SCC functionality.
logit-4 method c System; Non-linear calibration or data reduction method that measures a
reagent blank and three to six calibrators for which the absorbance or absorbance
change increases as the concentration increases.
logon SCC identifier that controls access to SCC functionality. See also administrator
logon, page Glossary-1 and general operator logon, page Glossary-7.
lot Unique number used by Abbott to distinguish preparations of reagents or
commodities. Identified as "Lot" on labels and boxes.
low level error Detailed error message that can be found in the Message history log and is used
message for advanced troubleshooting.
maintenance Procedures performed on the ARCHITECT System to ensure continued proper

function.
Maintenance log Electronic log updated by the system to track performance of maintenance
procedures.
maximum c System; The maximum acceptable absorbance variation (0 - 3.2) allowed for
absorbance absorbance readings within the main read time.
variation
menu Software interface element that displays when you select an icon. Menus list the
selection of available screens and when you select an item, the associated screen
displays.
menu bar Area at the top of software screens where icons that provide navigational and
status indication support are located.
menu item Item on a menu that represents an available screen. When you select a menu
item, the associated screen displays.
message Software interface element that provides important information during the course
of normal system operation. Messages display in front of the currently displayed
screen or window and require an acknowledgement.
Message history Electronic log that displays and stores a record of error-related messages that you
log use to troubleshoot problems associated with system performance and/or results
reporting. The log holds a capacity of 12,000 messages. When capacity is
reached messages are replaced on a first in - first out basis. See also Temporary
message log, page Glossary-19.
Mils One one-thousandth of an inch.
mixer unit c System; Device that houses two mixers (1 and 2) that mix the sample and
reagent(s) together.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
module status Operational mode of the processing module or sample handler.
multimedia Video clips and animations in the online documentation that illustrate procedures,
system functionality, and chemical reactions.
multiconstituent Control material that contains multiple analytes. Up to 3 levels of each control can
control be configured and analyzed.
network hub External device that joins communication lines and enables the electronic transfer
of information between the SCC (system control center) and processing
module(s).
onboard c System; Detergents used to wash the sample and reagent probes, mixers, and
solutions reaction cuvettes.
onboard solution c System; Storage locations for probe wash solutions used for the SmartWash
areas function and maintenance procedures.
onboard stability Amount of time that a reagent or solution remains stable when it is opened and
placed on the system in its designated location.
one-point adjust c System; Calibration type that uses the absorbance data for a single calibrator to
adjust the calibration curve.
option Software interface element that allows you to select one item from the displayed
choices. A black-filled circle indicates it is selected.
o-ring Flexible seal used in many fluidics connections to prevent leakage at the
connections.
OSS c 8000 processing module; Optimum sampling sequence; Feature that maximizes
the processing speed when SmartWash is in use by rearranging the sampling
sequence so that the number of empty reaction cuvettes is minimized.
over-aspiration Additional volume of sample aspirated by the system to prevent the water in the
volume sample probe from diluting the sample.
panel Option that allows you to quickly order multiple tests by selecting one button
instead of individual assay buttons.
parameter i System; Adjustment method that uses the RLU (relative light unit) values stored
method in the reagent bar code for calibrators A through F to determine the 4PLC (four
parameter logistic curve) parameters of the master calibration.
password String of characters entered during logon that is used in conjuction with your user
ID to provide access to SCC (system control center) functionality.
pause Procedure that changes the status of the processing module or sample handler
from Running to Ready without losing tests currently in process. Use when you
need to load sample carriers, reagents, and bulk solutions or perform
maintenance and diagnostic procedures.
photometer c System; Device that uses a concave diffraction grating capable of taking
measurements at 16 different wavelengths to measure luminous intensity,
luminous flux, illumination, and brightness.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
photometric c System; Series of absorbance measurements taken for each reaction cuvette as
reads it passes the photometric read position. These measurements are used to
calculate result concentration.
photometric c System; Progression of a reaction from the initial sample dispense to the final
timing read phase represented as the elapsed time at each of the 33 photometric points.
photomultiplier i System; Detector on the CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay)

tube reader assembly that receives and amplifies light signals from the reaction
solution.
pipetting Process of transferring liquid.
pipettor Devices that detect, aspirate, transfer, and dispense reagents or samples. See
also reagent pipettor, page Glossary-15, sample pipettor, page Glossary-17, and
STAT pipettor, page Glossary-18
pipettor Automated maintenance procedure that optimizes probe positioning.
calibration
PMT See photomultiplier tube, page Glossary-12.
pointing device Input device (mouse) included with the SCC.
pointer Position indicator that you control with the mouse. Typically, the pointer is an arrow
and the text entry position pointer is a blinking underscore or vertical bar. In the
online Operations Manual and Help? the pointer turns into a pointing hand when it
is pointed to an object that can be selected.
power supply Device that provides DC and AC voltages to various parts of the module.
pre-trigger level i System; Assembly with a magnetic float sensor that indicates when the liquid
sensor level in the pre-trigger bottle is low.
pre-trigger / i System; Device that dispenses Pre-Trigger Solution, and then Trigger Solution
trigger manifold into RVs.
Pre-Trigger i System; Hydrogen peroxide solution used to split the acridinium dye off the
Solution conjugate bound to the microparticle complex. This process prepares the
acridinium dye for the addition of Trigger Solution.
pre-trigger / i System; Platform in the supply and waste center that holds the Pre-Trigger
trigger tray Solution and Trigger Solution bottles.
pre-trigger / i System; Location in the supply and waste center that provides onboard storage
trigger storage for the Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution, which are necessary for test
area processing.
primary tube Tube (75 mm - 100 mm in height) that contains a sample obtained by
venipuncture. Primary tubes may be used in conjunction with sample cups. If used
alone, you must use the sample gauge to verify there is adequate sample volume.
prime i System; System process of dispensing solutions into RVs (reaction vessels) to
ensure the fluidics system is primed.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
priority bay or Holding area of the RSH (robotic sample handler) that positions samples for
section priority processing.
priority loading Procedure used to position a sample carrier(s) for priority processing.
priority Sample processing in which samples that were priority loaded are pipetted first.
processing
processing Main activity area of the processing module where samples and reagents are
center dispensed and mixed, and where all assay processing is performed.
processing i System; Label attached to the front and rear processing center covers to assist
center map you in locating components. Each component is labeled with a letter and/or
number identifier. The additional components of the i 2000SR, which are used
when processing STAT assay protocols, are indicated in pink.
processing Analyzer that performs all sample processing activities from aspiration to final
module read. The type(s) and number(s) of processing module(s) determines your system
configuration. See also c 8000 processing module, page Glossary-3, c 16000
processing module, page Glossary-2, i 1000SR processing module,
page Glossary-7, i 2000 processing module, page Glossary-7, and i 2000SR
processing module, page Glossary-8.
processing Graphic(s) on the Snapshot screen that indicates the status of the processing
module graphic module(s) and displays other key system information.
processing Input device used by the operator to direct processing center activities.
module keypad
processing Operational mode of the processing module. Statuses include Offline, Stopped,
module status Warming (IA modules only), Ready, Scheduled Pause, Running, Initializing, and
Scanning.
prompt Software interface element that allows you to continue or cancel the requested
operation. Prompts display in front of the currently displayed screen or window
and require a response.
pumps Devices that provide accurate amounts of specific fluids to components in the
processing center.
pump center c System; Area that houses the processing module pumps.
purified water Water with a resistivity of 1.0 megohm/centimeter or greater and a microbiological
content of 1000 colony-forming units/mL or less.
QC-Cal settings Settings within each quality control/calibrator configuration category that the
system administrator configures to meet site-specific requirements.
quality control Process of monitoring control activity. The ARCHITECT System allows you to
analysis monitor control activity using standard Levey-Jennings graphs and Westgard
rules. Control data includes both unreleased and released results.
query message Message sent to a host computer system from the SCC (system control center) to
request orders for a sample when a sample bar code is scanned by a system bar
code reader.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
rate assay c System; Reactions that are allowed to reach a stable rate in which the change in
absorbance between readings is constant. The system performs several readings
during this time, calculates absorbance change per minute (rate), and then uses
the rate to calculate results.
rate linearity % c System; The allowable percent variation change in absorbance measured
during the first three reads, and then compared to the last three reads for the main
and flex read time.
rate ratio c System; Assay validity check that uses a ratio of rates (A/B) measured at two
different times during the reaction to check for prozone effect or other reaction
anomalies.
rate subtraction c System; Assay validity check that uses the difference between rates (A-B)
measured at two different times during the reaction to check for prozone effect or
other reaction anomalies.
ratio technique i System; Adjustment method compares the RLU (relative light unit) value of the
method calibrators to the corresponding calibrator values from the master calibration
curve.
reaction c System; Device that holds the cuvettes and rotates counter-clockwise to position
carousel them for sample processing.
reaction cuvette Rectangular glass cuvette.
reaction timing See photometric timing, page Glossary-12.

reaction vessel i System; Disposable container in which the CMIA (chemiluminescent
microparticle immunoassay) reaction takes place. RVs (reaction vessels) are
stored in bulk in the RV hopper and are automatically loaded into the process path
as needed. The maximum onboard storage is 1200 RVs. You can add RVs to the
hopper at any time.
read time c System; Range (or window) of photometric reads that are defined in the assay
parameter file and determine which of the 33 photometric reads measured for
each assay reaction are used to calculate result concentration.
reagent bar code Device that reads bar code labels on reagent bottles.
reader
reagent carousel c System; Refrigerated carousels that are part of the reagent supply center(s) and
provide cooled, temperature-controlled storage for reagent cartridges.
i System; Refrigerated carousel located in the processing center that provides
cooled, temperature-controlled storage for reagent bottles.
reagent cartridge c System; Container used in the reagent supply centers to hold the reagents used
during operation.
reagent cartridge c System; Positioners used to ensure correct alignment of the small (55 mL
adapters cartridge), 20 mL (cartridge), and 20 mL (bottle) reagent cartridges placed in
reagent supply centers 1 and 2.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
reagent kit Consumable that contains all reagent components necessary to run an assay on
the ARCHITECT System.
c System; Reagent kits may include only R1 reagent or may include both R1 and
R2 reagents,
i System; Reagent kits may include from two to six bottles.
reagent label Unique identifier on Abbott pre-packaged reagents that contains a 2D
(two-dimensional) bar code.
reagent lot Unique number used by Abbott for tracking purposes.
reagent pipettor c System; Devices that detect, aspirate, transfer, and dispense reagents into the
cuvette. Reagent pipettor 1 also transfers sample diluents from reagent supply
center 1 into a cuvette to be used for onboard sample dilution.
i System; Devices that detect, aspirate, transfer, and dispense reagents into the
RV. Each pipettor assembly includes a fluid sense/pressure monitoring system
that helps to identify errors in aspiration.
reagent probe c System; Active wash station that washes any remaining fluid from the probe
wash cup exterior, interior, and tip.
reagent scan Process of rotating the reagent carousels and reading the bar codes on each of
the reagents to update reagent inventory after reagents are added or removed.
reagent segment c System; Section of each reagent supply center that hold reagents and diluents.
Some segments have a target for pipettor calibration used for aligning sample or
reagent pipettors when necessary.
reagent supply c System; Area of the processing center that includes refrigerated reagent
center carousels and locations for additional onboard solutions.
reagent syringe Devices that control the aspiration and dispense of reagents.
reagent wash i System; Active wash stations that wash any remaining fluid from the probe
stations 1 and 2 interior and exterior surfaces. A vacuum source dries the exterior of the probe.
(R1S/R2S)
reference range Normal clinical range of an analyte.
refresh Function that allows you to update the data displayed on the screen.
released result Control or patient result that was determined to be acceptable. You can view
released results from the Stored QC result and Stored results screens. If your
system interfaces with a host computer the results transmit to the host.
replacement cap i System; Teal-colored caps used when storing reagents that are temporarily
removed from the processing module. The color visually indicates that reagent
bottles have been opened.
replicate Duplicate test measurement on the same sample performed within the same run.
reportable range See linearity range, page Glossary-9.
retest rules User-specified criteria for each assay that determines whether the system
automatically reorders the assay for samples that meet the criteria.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
routine bay or Holding area of the RSH (robotic sample handler) that positions samples for
section routine processing.
RSH Robotic sample handler; Transport system used for loading calibrators, controls,
and patient samples and presenting them to a c 8000 and/or i 2000SR processing
module.
RSH keypad Input device on the RSH (robotic sample handler) used by the operator to control
the sample handler.
RV i System; See reaction vessel, page Glossary-14.
RV access door i System; Opening used for diagnostic purposes only that allows access to one
RV position on the outer track of the process path. You should always make sure it
is closed during system operation.
RV hopper cover i System; Cover that allows you to add RVs to the RV hopper.
RV loader and i System; Device that provides onboard storage for RVs and transports the RVs
hopper assembly into the process path.
RV unloader i System; Device that removes used RVs from the process path and discards
them into the solid waste container after assay processing.
sample and c System; Location for the sample and reagent syringes and drives.
reagent syringe
area
sample bar code Device that scans the sample carrier ID, sample position, and sample tube bar
reader code IDs to verify the position of the sample(s).
sample carrier Accessory used on the RSH (robotic sample handler) or SSH (standard sample
handler) to transport patient samples, calibrators, or controls to the sample
pipettor(s).
sample carrier ID Four digit alphanumeric identifier used to indicate where a sample is loaded.
sample cup Disposable container (1400 μL) that holds patient samples, calibrators, and
controls. You can load a sample cup directly into a carrier or into a bar coded tube.
sample handler Component that transports samples through an ARCHITECT System. Each
system has a single, primary sample handler regardless of the number of
processing modules and types. See also LAS carousel sample handler,
page Glossary-9, RSH, page Glossary-16, or SSH, page Glossary-18.
sample handler Input device used by the operator to direct sample handler activities.
keypad
sample handler Operational mode of the sample handler. Statuses include Offline, Stopped,
status Ready, Running, and Load queue paused.
sample load i 2000; Track that transfers sample carriers to the sample processing queue on the
queue standard sample handler.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
sample load i 2000; Device that reads the sample carrier ID, position, and sample ID.
queue bar code
reader
sample pipettor c System; Device that detects, aspirates, transfers, and dispenses samples into
the cuvettes. The pipettor assembly includes a fluid sense/pressure monitoring
system that helps to identify errors in aspiration.
i System; Device that detects, aspirates, transfers, and dispenses samples into
the reaction vessel. The pipettor assembly includes a fluid sense/pressure
monitoring system that helps to identify errors in aspiration.
sample probe c System; Active wash station that washes any remaining fluid from the probe
wash cup exterior, interior, and tip to eliminate carryover.
sample i 2000; Track that transfers sample carriers to the sample pipettor. Once samples
processing are aspirated, the sample carriers are transferred to another processing module or
queue to the sample unload queue.
sample saving Setting that allows the system to aspirate an over-aspiration volume once per
mode sample rather than each time it aspirates a test.
sample syringe Device that controls the aspiration and dispense of samples.
sample unload i 2000; Track on the right side of the processing module where sample carriers are
queue unloaded.
sample wash c 4000; Storage location for sample probe wash solutions used for the
solution area SmartWash function and maintenance procedures.
sample wash i System; Passive wash station where the sample probe dispenses excess sample
station and any remaining fluid is washed from the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
SCC System control center; Computer system that provides the software interface to
the ARCHITECT System and can provide an interface to a host computer.
screen Software interface element that provides access to all related system information
and functions.
screen available Buttons that have white lettering and are always available (green background)
function bar when you access the screen. For example, from the Order status screen you can
buttons always select F3 - Find. See also context available function bar buttons,
page Glossary-5.
scroll bar Vertical or horizontal bar at the side or bottom of a Help window that you use to
move or "scroll" through topic content.
scroll box Box on a scroll bar that displays the current position in a topic and allows you to
drag it to another location.
self blank c System; Blank read time used to correct the absorbance for sample coloring due
to lipemia, hemolysis, bilirubin, and so forth.
septum i System; Membrane with a slit that is used to prevent reagent evaporation and
contamination, and to ensure reagent integrity. You place septums on all open
reagent bottles prior to loading the bottle into the processing module.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
serial port A connection point between the SCC and an external device.
SSH i 2000; Standard sample handler; Transport system used for loading calibrators,
controls, and patient samples and presenting them to an i 2000 processing
module(s).
SSH keypad i 2000; Input device on the SSH (Standard sample handler) used by the operator
to control the sample handler.
shutdown Procedure used to turn off the power to the processing module and SCC.
single Assay-specific sample that contains known concentrations of analyte. Single

constituent constituent controls are typically labeled L, M, and H, or Pos and Neg.
control
SmartWash c System; Additional wash for the reagent probes, sample probe, and cuvette to
feature prevent assay-to-assay interference.
Snapshot screen Main ARCHITECT System software screen that displays key system information
and provides quick access to related screens.
software Portion of the computer program with which you interact by making selections and
interface entering information. The interface is common among all ARCHITECT Systems.
See also GUI, page Glossary-7.
solenoid valve c System; Valves (six) located at the top of the sample and reagent syringe drives
that open or close as required for flushing, aspiration, and dispense.
solid waste i System; Location in the supply and waste center that provides a storage area for
storage area the solid waste container that holds used RVs (reaction vessels).
spline method c System; Non-linear calibration or data reduction method in which a reagent
blank and three to six calibrators are measured, and a multiple sectioned
calibration curve is generated using a polynomial expression so that the adjoining
sections are connected smoothly.
startup Procedure used to home motors and initialize the processing module and sample
handler. Changes the processing module and sample handler status from
Stopped to Ready.
STAT assay i 2000SR; Assay protocol with a shorter incubation time than the routine assay
protocol protocol and provides faster result completion. The STAT assay protocol does not
determine sampling priority. See also priority processing, page Glossary-13.
STAT diverter i 2000SR; Device that moves RVs from the inner track to the outer track of the
process path when the RVs are needed for STAT assay protocols.
STAT pipettor i 2000SR; Device that detects, aspirates, transfers, and dispenses samples
processed using a STAT assay protocol(s) into the RV.
STAT syringe i 2000SR; Device that controls the aspiration and dispense of samples processed
using a STAT assay protocol(s).
STAT wash i 2000SR; Passive wash station where the STAT probe dispenses excess sample
station and any remaining fluid is washed from the probe exterior, interior, and tip.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
supernatant fluid Clear fluid that, after the settling out of an insoluble liquid or solid by the action of
normal gravity or of centrifugal force, takes up the upper portion of the contents of
a vessel.
supply and c System; Storage area for processing module pumps, bulk solutions, and sample
pump center and reagent syringes and drives.
supply and i System; Storage area for bulk solutions and solid waste.
waste center
syringe Device that controls the aspiration and dispense of sample or reagents by moving
the piston in the syringe body. See also reagent syringe, page Glossary-15 and
sample syringe, page Glossary-17.
system control Optional mobile shelf unit which holds the computer, monitor, keyboard, and
center stand printer.
system settings Settings within each system configuration category that the system administrator
configures to meet site-specific requirements.
system software Software application that controls operation of an ARCHITECT System.
system status Operational modes of the processing module and/or sample handler.
Technical A document used to notify Abbott Service and Support personnel how to make a
Service Bulletin physical change or modification to an instrument that requires implementation by
(TSB) Abbott personnel.
Temporary Electronic log that displays non-critical error-related messages that you can
message log address, and then delete. The log holds a capacity of 200 messages.
timeout Error that may occur for software communication functions when a defined time
limit is exceeded while waiting for a response from a device.
title bar Area under the menu bar of every screen or at the top of every window that
contains the name of the screen or window.
touch-screen Main interface between the operator and the ARCHITECT System that allows you
monitor to make onscreen selections by touching text areas and graphics, icons and menu
items, and function bar buttons.
Trigger Solution i System; Sodium hydroxide solution used to produce the chemiluminescent
reaction that provides the final read.
trigger level i System; Assembly with a magnetic float sensor that indicates when the liquid
sensor level in the trigger bottle is low.
two-point adjust c System; Calibration type that uses the absorbance data for the reagent blank
and a calibrator to adjust the calibration curve.
UPS Uninterruptible power supply; Optional component that provides a temporary,
continuous flow of power to the processing module during a power failure.
unreleased Control or patient result that has not been reviewed and released. You can view
result unreleased results from the QC result review and Results review screens.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
USB flash drive A removable flash memory device that plugs into a computer USB port. This drive
may be used to import calibrator set or multiconstituent control file data.
user defined c System; Non-bar coded reagents or reagents not supplied by Abbott, which
reagent must be configured and manually assigned to positions in the reagent supply
centers.
user ID String of characters entered during logon that may be used in conjuction with a
password to provide access to SCC (system control center) functionality.
vortexer i System; Device that mixes the sample and reagents in an RV (reaction vessel) to
suspend the microparticles.
wash buffer i System; Solution containing phosphate buffered saline. Wash buffer is used
throughout assay processing and is pumped to the sample and reagent pipetting
assemblies and the two wash zones.
wash buffer level i System; Assembly containing a tube with three magnetic float sensors that
sensor indicate when the wash buffer reservoir is full, needs to be filled by the
ARCHITECT ARM (automatic reconstitution module) accessory, or is empty.
wash buffer i System; Onboard container in the supply and waste center that holds up to 25
reservoir liters of wash buffer.
wash buffer i System; Location in the supply and waste center for onboard storage of wash
storage area buffer, which is used in test processing.
wash buffer filter i System; Assembly containing material used to eliminate particulates that might
damage the fluidics components of the system.
wash solution c System; Syringe drive pump that aspirates and dilutes Alkaline and Acid Wash
pump Solutions to wash cuvettes during daily operation and maintenance procedures.
wash zone i System; Device that directs RVs to one of two paths. One path moves RVs
diverter through the wash zone where a wash occurs. The other path moves RVs around
the wash zone.
wash zone i System; Device that removes and discards unbound analyte from the reaction
manifold mixture in an RV.
waste chute and i System; Device in the supply and waste center that receives used RVs by gravity
trap door and directs them into the solid waste container. The trap door holds up to 50 RVs
when you remove the solid waste container during processing.
water bath c System; Incubator that surrounds the reaction cuvettes and maintains the
reaction temperature.
Water Bath c System; Antimicrobial solution used to minimize bacterial growth in the water
Additive bath. During the daily maintenance procedure, the solution is dispensed into the
water bath.
Westgard rules Control rules that use various standard deviation limits to monitor the performance
of the system by detecting trends or shifts.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Glossary
window Software display that provides additional information or functions related to the
active screen. You access windows by selecting a button on the screen. The
window displays on top of, or in front of, the screen.

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Revision history
Document control
Revision date Content revised
numbers
201837-102 10/2006 Original issue
201837-103 04/2007 Read me first, Sections 1,
2, 3, 5, 8, 10, and
Appendix E.
201837-104 06/2007 Sections 2, 5, 9, 10, and
Appendix E.
201837-105 05/2008 All except section 7.
201837-106 12/2008 Section 2, 4, 5, and 10
201837-107 04/2009 All sections.
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Revision history-1

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration (c System)

quality control result flag description, maintenance description, 9-38
5-208 1151 Probe Alignment Test
result flag description, 5-187 diagnostics description, 10-660
Symbols 1161 Probe Move
* processing code diagnostics description, 10-661
description of, 5-146 1D reagent bar code labels
Numerics guidelines, 4-24
0.5% Acid wash (c System) 2043 Sample Pipettor Check (c System)
replacing onboard solutions (c 4000), diagnostics description, 10-667
5-32 2044 R1 Pipettor Check (c System)
1 mL syringes (c 4000) diagnostics description, 10-668
checking (illustration), 9-45 2045 R2 Pipettor Check (c System)
replacing the, 9-116 diagnostics description, 10-668
1 mL syringes (c System) 2129 Add Water Bath Additive
changing, 9-33 maintenance description, 9-39
checking, 9-22
2131 Flush ICT Cup
1000 Absorbance Reads maintenance description, 9-39
diagnostics description, 10-665
2132 Flush Water Lines
1003 Change Lamp maintenance description, 9-39
maintenance description, 9-30
2134 Change Water Bath
1008 Optics Total Test maintenance description, 9-39
2136 Air Flush
1010 Cuvette Integrity Test maintenance description, 9-61
2137 Flush Fluids
1022 Optics Background maintenance description, 9-61
2138 Long Term Shutdown
1110 Pipettor Calibration diagnostics description, 10-673
2155 Flush Bulk Solutions
1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration (c 8000) maintenance description, 9-40
illustration of, 9-52
2160 Prime Wash Zone
1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration (c System) maintenance description, 9-62
2162 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger
1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration (c 4000) maintenance description, 9-62
2190 Internal Decontamination
1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration (c System) maintenance description, 9-58
3002 Reagent Carousel Test
1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration (c 4000) diagnostics description, 10-678
ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Index-1

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
3010 Reaction Carousel Home Move 4080 Module Initialization diagnostics

diagnostics description, 10-666 description
3011 Reagent Sample Carousel Home c System, 10-663
diagnostics description, 10-666 4100 Buffer Run
3120 Vortexer Test maintenance description, 9-63
diagnostics description, 10-669 4PLC methods (i System)
3126 Mixer Vibration Test description of, Appendix C-16
diagnostics description, 10-660 x residual minimization (x-weighted),
Appendix C-17
3180 Vacuum System Test y residual minimization (y-weighted),
diagnostics description, 10-674 Appendix C-18
3190 Liquid Waste Sensors Test 5145 Wash Cup Valves Test
diagnostics description, 10-675 diagnostics description, 10-676
3206 Reagent Bar Code Test (c System) 5150 Motor Tests
3230 Bar Code Reader Test 5160 Pump Motor Tests
3240 Bar Code Calibration 5165 Valve Tests
3310 RSH Test 5405 Crash Sensor Test (c System)
3400 Interlock Sensors Test diagnostics 5420 Crash Sensor Test
description diagnostics description, 10-671
c System, 10-664
5555 RSH Sensor Test
3405 Interlock Carousel Sensor Test diagnostics description, 10-682
6008 Controller Configuration
3420 Level Sensors Test diagnostics description, 10-684
6009 Log Utilities
3525 Temperature Status (c System) diagnostics description, 10-684
6016 Check Dispense Components
3526 Check Water Bath Temperature maintenance description, 9-27
6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles
3535 Temperature Check - Manual maintenance description, 9-28
6019 Check ICT Probe and Tubing
3540 Temperature Status illustration of (c 4000), 9-47
maintenance description, 9-63 maintenance description, 9-25
3610 Sample Handler LLS Test diagnostics 6021 Clean Mixers
description maintenance description, 9-25
c System, 10-662
6023 Clean Sample Reagent Probes
3625 Pipettors LLS Test maintenance description, 9-26
6024 Check 1 mL Syringes
3720 Keypad Test (c System) illustration of (c 4000), 9-45
diagnostics description, 10-663 maintenance description, 9-22
Index-2 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
6026 Check Syringes and Valves 6304 Change 1 mL Syringes

illustration of (c 4000), 9-50 maintenance description, 9-33
maintenance description, 9-28 6305 Change ICT Asp Check Valve
6027 Clean Reagent Supply Center (c 4000) maintenance description, 9-33
maintenance description, 9-41 6306 Check ICT Ref Check Valves
6028 - Check DI Water Purity maintenance description, 9-34
maintenance description, 9-22 6307 Check Clean HC Waste Sensor
6029 Assay Information maintenance description, 9-35
diagnostics description, 10-685 6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing
6038 External Decontamination illustration of (c 4000), 9-49
6052 Wash Cuvettes 6309 Change ICT Module
6053 Probe Water Wash 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually
6054 Probe Acid Wash 6405 Air Filter Cleaning
6055 Detergent B Probe Wash 6407 Pipettor Probe Cleaning
6056 Clean Cuvettes with Detergent 6410 WZ Probe Straightness
maintenance description, 9-26 diagnostics description, 10-672
6062 Wash ICT with Cleaning Fluid 6440 Daily Maintenance
6063 Flush ICT Module 6445 Pipettor WZ Probe Cleaning
6070 Daily Maintenance (c System) 6450 Wash Cup Cleaning
6114 Install Delete Assays 6500 MAC Hardware Address Procedure
6115 Install Delete Procedures A
diagnostics description, 10-685 A#1
6116 Update 6115 Procedure c System quality control result flag,
diagnostics description, 10-685 5-208
6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip c System result flag, 5-187
illustration of (c 4000), 9-51 A#2
maintenance description, 9-29 c System quality control result flag,
6301 Sample Syringe Maintenance 5-208
description of, 9-30 c System result flag, 5-187
6302 Wash Syringe Maintenance Abbott assays
description of, 9-31 procedures associated with configuring,
2-41
6303 Reagent Syringe Maintenance
description of, 9-32 ABBOTT System Software updates
installing, 2-172

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
Absorbance Data Report accessing patient and control order screens

illustration of, Appendix A-3 Control order screen - Multiconstituent
absorbance method (photometric - c view, 5-135
System) Control order screen - Single analyte
description of, Appendix C-2 view, 5-133
Order status screen, 5-144
absorbance reads (c System) Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded)
1000 diagnostics description, 10-665 view, 5-113
accessing Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar
Snapshot screen, 1-20 coded) view, 5-114
accessing calibration screens Patient order screen - Single patient
Calibration order screen, 6-12 view, 5-111
Calibration status screen, 6-18 Sample status screen, 5-156
accessing configuration screens accessing patient and QC result review
Configuration screen - Assay settings screens
(Assay parameters view), 2-37 QC result review screen, 5-207
Configuration screen - Assay settings Rerun status screen, 5-221
(New assay view), 2-39 Results review screen, 5-186
Configuration screen - QC-Cal settings accessing patient and QC stored results
view, 2-122 screens
Configuration screen - System settings Stored QC results screen, 5-242
view, 2-5 Stored results screen, 5-226
accessing consumable inventory accessing quality control management
management screens screens
Supply status screen - c 4000 view, 5-18 QC reports screen, 5-293
Supply status screen - i 1000SR view, accessing reagent inventory management
5-20 screens
accessing diagnostic screens Reagent history screen, 5-66
Diagnostics screen, 10-652 Reagent status screen - c 4000 view, 5-51
System logs screen, 10-14 Reagent status screen - i 1000SR view,
accessing exception management screens 5-54
Exception status screen, 5-257 Reagent status screen - View all view,
5-56
accessing maintenance screens
Maintenance log screen, 9-16 accessing software installation and backup
Maintenance screen, 9-4 screens
Utilities screen - Backup software view,
accessing online documentation
2-174
Help?, System documentation-28
Utilities screen - Software install view,
Help? for error message, illustration,
2-170
System documentation-8
Help? for screen or window, illustration, accessories
System documentation-7 list numbers, Appendix D-9
operations manual, System Reagent carriers, 1-116
documentation-27 RSH and SSH sample carriers, 1-113
operations manual from the system accessory kit 1 list numbers
software, illustration, System c 4000 System LN 02P68-01, Appendix
documentation-6 D-4

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
accessory kit list numbers assay to a retest rule, 2-73

c 4000 System, description, Appendix comment to a control result, 5-211
D-4 comment to a Levey-Jennings point,
i System, description, Appendix D-7 5-282
Acid Wash (c 4000) comment to a maintenance procedure,
replacing onboard solutions in reagent 9-17
supply center, 5-29 comment to a patient result, 5-191
comment to an exception, 5-260
Acid Wash (c System) comment to an order, 5-149
description of, 1-98 lot to a single analyte control, 2-135
illustration of, 1-99 test to a patient order, 5-125
preparing, 5-26
replacing, 5-24 adjust assay view - Calibration curve
updating supply status, 5-24 window (i System)
description of, 6-23
active calibration curve illustration of, 6-24
guidelines, 6-2
storage, 6-10 adjust calibration (i System)
description, 6-9
active calibration status
description of, 6-19 adjustment calibration (c System)
sampling rules, 6-4 1-point adjustment, 6-7
verification by system, 6-16 2-point adjustment, 6-8
blank adjustment, 6-7
Add edit assay retest rules window description, 6-6
field descriptions, Appendix E-178 adjustment methods (i System)
illustration of, 2-120 curve shape, Appendix C-22
linear transformation, Appendix C-21
Add edit SmartWash window (c System) parameter, Appendix C-22
Cuvette view description, 2-111 ratio technique, Appendix C-20
Cuvette view field descriptions,
Appendix E-172 administrator, system
Cuvette view illustration, 2-111 changing password, 1-23
Rgt 1 probe view description, 2-109 log on window illustration, 1-21
Rgt 1 probe view field descriptions, user log on, 1-22
Appendix E-170 air filter cleaning (i 1000SR)
Rgt 1 probe view illustration, 2-110 6405 maintenance description, 9-59
Sample probe view description, 2-110 aliquot sample tube
Sample probe view field descriptions, illustration of, 5-163
Appendix E-171 specifications, 5-163
Sample probe view illustration, 2-110 volumes, 5-166
Add Water Bath Additive (c System) Alkaline Wash (c System)
2129 maintenance description, 9-39 description of, 1-97
Adding illustration of, 1-98
an assay to a multiconstituent bar code replacing, 5-24
SID, 2-142 updating supply status, 5-24
adding analytical sensitivity - method 1
assay to a multiconstituent control, data sheet, Appendix B-7
2-139 data sheet example, Appendix B-8

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
description of, Appendix B-6 status button, 1-17

analytical sensitivity - method 2 ARM status button
data sheet, Appendix B-10 description of, Appendix E-20
data sheet example, Appendix B-12 as-needed maintenance (i 1000SR)
description of, Appendix B-9 description of, 9-60
graph, Appendix B-11
graph example, Appendix B-13 as-needed maintenance description
c System, 9-35
analytical specificity - method 1 SCC, 9-72
description of, Appendix B-54
assay calibration methods
animations c System photometric, 6-4
playing, using online operations c System potentiometric, 6-4
manual, System documentation-41
assay calibrations
Approve Maintenance log automated, 6-3
description of window, 9-18 description, 6-2
description of window field descriptions, guidelines, 6-2
Appendix E-127 mandatory, 6-2
illustration of window, 9-19 optional, 6-3
procedure, 9-17 viewing status, 6-30
ARCHITECT System assay claims (i System)
components of, 1-2 verifying, Appendix B-1
general specifications, 4-3
overview, 1-2 assay configuration
calculated assay, 2-55
Architect System Software
updates, 2-171 assay configuration settings
procedures associated with changing,
Archive calibration curves window 2-68
field descriptions, Appendix E-85 assay file management
illustration of, 6-30 managing assay files, 2-177
Archive QC results window assay files

description of, 5-253 c System exporting, 2-180
field descriptions, Appendix E-93 c System importing, 2-178
illustration of, 5-254 installing or deleting, 2-177
Archive results window assay information (SCC)

description of, 5-239 6029 diagnostics description, 10-685
field descriptions, Appendix E-61 Assay options (Calibration order) window
illustration of, 5-240 description of, 6-14
Archived field descriptions, Appendix E-75
test status description, 5-145 illustration of, 6-14
archiving Assay options (Control order) window -

calibration curves, 6-34 Automated dilution view
messages, 5-233 description of, 5-141
stored control results, 5-246 field descriptions, Appendix E-33
stored patient results, 5-231 illustration of, 5-142
ARM (i System) components Assay options (Control order) window -

Manual dilution view

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
description of, 5-140 changing availabilty of, 2-70

field descriptions, Appendix E-32 changing the name of, 2-69
illustration of, 5-141 configuring photometric, 2-59
Assay options (Patient order) window - removing from retest rule, 2-75
Automated dilution view Assign assay for calibrator set window
description of, 5-129 field descriptions, Appendix E-186
field descriptions, Appendix E-28 Assign assay for multiconstituent control
illustration of, 5-130 window
Assay options (Patient order) window - description of, 2-159
Manual dilution view Assign assays for calibrator set window
description of, 5-128 description of, 2-165
field descriptions, Appendix E-27 illustration of, 2-165
Assign assays for multiconstituent control
Assay Parameter Report window
c System illustration, Appendix A-6 field descriptions, Appendix E-183
i System illustration, Appendix A-15 illustration of, 2-160
printing (all assays), 5-305
printing (specified assays), 5-304 Assign location window (c 4000)
procedures associated with printing, description of, 5-61
2-91 field descriptions, Appendix E-113
assay processing
description of (c 4000), 3-13 Assigned - System import status
assay protocol types
c 4000, 3-17, , 3-18, , 3-19 Assigned - User import status
assay protocol types (i 1000SR)
one step 18, 3-34 auto retest patient samples
one step 25, 3-31 description of, 5-109
pretreatment, 3-36 automated dilution verification - method 1
STAT, one step 11, 3-38 data sheet, Appendix B-46
STAT, one step 4, 3-42 data sheet example, Appendix B-47
STAT, two step 4-4, 3-40 description of, Appendix B-45
two step 11-4, 3-35 automated multiconstituent control
two step 18-4, 3-33 ordering
assay reaction (c System) configuring, 2-130
end-point, 3-3 automated ordering
rate, 3-3 controls, 5-108
assay retest rule settings host computer download, 5-107
description of, Appendix E-178 host order query, 5-108
assay specific error codes patient samples auto retest, 5-109
descriptions of error codes 1000-1999, automatic processing module activities
10-125 c System automatic rotation of reagent
assay technology supply center(s), 1-128
c System, 3-2, , 3-6 c System processing module wash, 1-128
i System, 3-24 c System system flush, 1-126
assays

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
i System system flush, 1-127 bar code scanner

i System system prime, 1-127 connector, 1-8
B description of, 1-9
B processing code bar coded reagents (c 4000)

description of, 5-146 loading, 5-74
unloading, 5-87
bar code configuration options
description of, Appendix E-146 bar coded samples
RSH - loading for batch processing, 5-172
bar code label guidelines
1D reagent, 4-24 batch processing
1D reagent labels, bar code print quality, description of, 5-180
4-24 batch sample ordering type
1D reagent labels, density, 4-25 changing, 2-11
1D reagent labels, label stock, 4-24 BC Fail reagent status
1D reagent labels, length, 4-24 description of, 5-57
1D reagent labels, printer type, 4-24
biohazard bag
1D reagent labels, quiet zone, 4-25
dimensions of, 4-8
1D reagent labels, ratio, 4-25
sample labels, bar code print quality, Blank
4-28 maintenance status description, 9-20
sample labels, density, 4-29 blank adjustment (c System)
sample labels, label stock, 4-28 description of, 6-7
sample labels, printer type, 4-28
bleaching the ICT module (c System)
sample labels, quiet zone, 4-29
procedure for, 10-689
sample labels, ratio, 4-29
sample labels, symbology, 4-28 boolean operators
description of, System
bar code label requirements
documentation-37
1D reagent bar code data format, 4-25
using to search, System
1D reagent labels, 4-24
documentation-37
1D reagent labels, placement, 4-26
sample labels, length, 4-29 buffer level sensor (i 1000SR)
sample labels, placement, 4-30 replacement, 9-171
sample labels, SID length, 4-29 buffer outlet assembly (i 1000SR)
bar code reader diagnostics (i1000SR) replacement, 9-175
RSH, 10-680 bulk solution supply center (c 4000)
bar code reader diagnostics description description of, 1-47
c System, 10-662 illustration of, 1-48
bar code reader error codes bulk solutions
descriptions of error codes 4000-4999, storing and using, 7-5
10-331 bulk solutions (c 4000)
bar code readers illustration of supply center, 9-115
c System, 4-5 bulk solutions (c System)
cleaning the window, 10-687 2155 maintenance description, 9-40
i 2000/i 2000SR, 4-5 Acid Wash, 1-98
RSH sample, location (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci Alkaline Wash, 1-97
4100), 1-83 capacities, 4-6

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
description of, 1-96 ICT module or probe, replacing the,

flushing, 9-40 9-108
ICT reference solution, 1-96 ICT reference solution filter, replacing
replacing and updating inventory, 5-24 the, 9-124
bulk solutions (i System) lamp or lamp plate, replacing the, 9-89
capacities, 4-7 mixer, replacing the, 9-106
Concentrated Wash Buffer, 1-109 pump poppet valve set, replacing the,
description of, 1-107 9-145
Pre-Trigger Solution, 1-107 reagent probe tubing, replacing the, 9-85
Trigger Solution, 1-108 reagent probes, replacing the, 9-78
sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal
Busy (archive message) tips 1 and 2, replacing the, 9-138
description of, 5-233 sample probe tubing, replacing the, 9-82
buttons sample probe, replacing the, 9-74
function bar, 1-12 wash solution filter, replacing the, 9-126
toolbar of Help window, System wash solution syringe o-ring and seal
documentation-12 tips 1 and 2, replacing the, 9-129
buttons - Snaphsot screen c 4000 processing center components
ARM status, Appendix E-20 illustration of, 1-29
cal status, Appendix E-18 c 4000 processing module
exception status, Appendix E-19 illustration of front view, 1-26
LIS status, Appendix E-20 illustration of rear view, 1-27
order status, Appendix E-17
printer status, Appendix E-19 c 8000 maintenance kit
reagent status, Appendix E-17 list number, Appendix D-5
reruns status, Appendix E-19 C processing code
supply status (c System), Appendix E-18 description of, 5-146
supply status (i System), Appendix E-19 c System
C bar code readers, 4-5
c 4000 processing module specifications,
description of, 1-3 dispense volume, 4-5
illustration of, 1-4 specifications, dispensing volume, 4-5
processing center component c System component replacement
replacement procedures, 9-73 procedures
processing center components float switch cable, replacing the, 9-180
description, 9-74 high-concentration waste bottle,
processing center map, 9-74 replacing the, 9-178
supply and pump center component cables (SCC)
replacement, 9-114 reseating the, 10-698
supply and pump center illustration,
Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System)
9-115
illustration of, Appendix A-29
c 4000 component replacement procedures
Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System)
1 mL syringes, replacing the, 9-116
check valves, replacing the, 9-119
cuvette dry tip, replacing the, 9-103 Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System)
cuvette segment, replacing a, 9-100 illustration of, Appendix A-35
cuvette, replacing the, 9-96 Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
illustration of, Appendix A-23 Calibration curve window - Potentiometric

Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c assay view (c System)
System) description of, 6-22
illustration of, Appendix A-20 field descriptions, Appendix E-79
Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor
Blank (c System) Calibration curve window - Use cal factor
illustration of, Appendix A-26 blank assay view (c System)
Cal Curve Summary Report field descriptions, Appendix E-78
illustration of, Appendix A-38 illustration of, 6-22
Cal Set Mismatch import status calibration curves
description of, 2-167 archiving, 6-34
cal status button c System status, 1-17
description of, Appendix E-18 failing an active, 6-33
calculated assay storing active curves, 6-10
changing, 2-89 storing failed curves, 6-11
configuration, 2-55 storing inactive curves, 6-11
viewing information, 6-32
calibration
finding a specific, 6-32 calibration guidelines
verifying, 6-16 automated calibration, 6-3
description of, 6-2
calibration adjustment type and interval (c
mandatory calibration, 6-2
System - photometric)
optional calibration, 6-3
configuring, 2-48
calibration history
Calibration curve window - Adjust assay
viewing, 6-31
view (i System)
description of, 6-23 Calibration history screen
field descriptions, Appendix E-80 accessing the, 6-28
illustration of, 6-24 Archive calibration curves window
illustration, 6-30
Calibration curve window - factor, linear,
and non-linear assay views (c System)
field descriptions, Appendix E-84
Calibration curve window - Full assay view (i sorting options, 6-27
System) windows associated with, 6-28
calibration methods
c System photometric, 6-4
c System potentiometric, 6-4
Calibration curve window - Index assay view i System, 6-5
(i System)
Calibration order screen
accessing the, 6-12
Calibration curve window - Linear assay illustration of, 6-11
view (c System) procedures associated with, 6-12
field descriptions, Appendix E-76 windows associated with, 6-14
calibration orders

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
creating, 6-12 calibrator set (c System)

viewing test status, 5-146 configuring, 2-132
Calibration review deleting, 2-148
procedures associated with, 6-30 calibrator settings (photometric - c System)
calibration sampling rules change, 2-147
description of, 6-4 calibrators (c System)
Calibration status screen description of, 1-92
accessing the, 6-18 illustration of, 1-93
description of, 6-16 calibrators (i System)
field descriptions, Appendix E-75 description of, 1-106
illustration of, 6-17 illustration of, 1-107
sorting options, 6-18 calibrators (ICT - c System)
windows associated with, 6-19 description of, 1-94
calibration statuses illustration of, 1-95
description of, 6-19 calibrators troubleshooting
viewing, 6-30 c System, 10-7
calibration types i System, 10-8
c System 1-point adjustment, 6-7 canceling
c System 2-point adjustment, 6-8 print job, 5-307
c System blank adjustment, 6-7 result transmission, 5-230
c System description, 6-5
c System full, 6-6 capacities
i System adjust, 6-9 bulk solutions, 4-6, , 4-7
i System description, 6-9 c System, 4-7
i System full, 6-10 i System, 4-7
i System index, 6-10 sample handlers, 4-8
SCC, 4-6
calibrator concentration settings
(potentiometric - c System) card cage door
changing, 2-82 i 1000SR processing module, 1-50
calibrator curve information carousel diagnostics description

viewing the, 6-32 c System, 10-666
i 1000SR, 10-678
calibrator data (c System)
importing, 2-152 carrier positioner (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci
4100)
calibrator data (photometric - c System) location of, 1-83
importing, 2-154
unassign assay, 2-156 carrier transport (RSH - c 4000/i 1000SR/ci
4100)
calibrator expiration date location of, 1-83
Assay options (Calibration order)
window, 6-14 carrier trays (RSH - i 1000SR)
entering a, 6-12 location of, 1-86
calibrator lot number cart (SCC)

Assay options (Calibration order) description of, 1-9
window, 6-14 cartridges
entering the, 6-12 c System reagent, description, 1-91
c System reagent, illustration, 1-92

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
caution symbol normal and extreme ranges, 2-71

definition of messages, 1-15 patient or QC panel, 2-72
CD drive is initializing changing QC-Cal settings
archive message description, 5-233 c System photometric assay calibrator,
CD-RW drive 2-147
SCC standard component, 1-7 default dilution for a single analyte
specifications for, 4-21 control level, 2-139
multiconstituent control settings, 2-141
change 1 mL syringes (c 4000) single analyte control settings, 2-137
6304 maintenance location, 9-115 Westgard rule settings, 2-146
change 1 mL syringes (c System) changing system settings
6304 maintenance description, 9-33 automatic report printing settings, 2-11
change ICT asp check valve (c System) automatic repositioning for retest setting
6305 maintenance description, 9-33 (RSH), 2-18
change ICT module (c 4000) batch sample ordering type, 2-11
description and illustration, 9-108 c 4000 onboard solution options, 2-23
date and time settings, 2-17
change ICT module (c System)
LIS serial port settings, 2-22
6309 maintenance description, 9-43
option for running controls, 2-24
change lamp (c 4000) printing flags option, 2-13
description and illustration, 9-89 report header text, 2-13
change lamp (c System) result unit setting, 2-87
1003 maintenance description, 9-30 sample bar code settings for codabar,
2-20
change water bath (c System)
sample bar code settings for code 39,
2-20
changing sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5, 2-21
c System potentiometric calibrator system language setting, 2-15
concentration, 2-82 system low alert setting for reagent kits,
Levey-Jennings graph, 5-279 2-14
system administrator password, 1-23
check 1 mL syringes (c 4000)
changing assay configuration settings 6024 maintenance illustration, 9-45
assay availability, 2-70
check 1 mL syringes (c System)
c System - photometric default
calibration type, 2-80
c System default dilution setting check clean HC waste sensor (c System)
(photometric), 2-79 6307 maintenance description, 9-35
c System last required read setting check DI water purity (c System)
(photometric), 2-78 6028 maintenance description, 9-22
c System linearity range, 2-76
check dispense components (c System)
c System reagent-specific low alert
setting, 2-82
correlation factor and intercept settings, check HC waste pump tubing (c 4000)
2-81 6308 maintenance description, 9-49
i System default dilution setting, 2-85 6308 maintenance location, 9-49
i System interpretation settings, 2-86 check ICT probe and tubing (c 4000)
name of an assay, 2-69 6019 maintenance illustration, 9-47

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
check ICT probe and tubing (c System) clean sample reagent probes (c System)
6019 maintenance description, 9-25 6023 maintenance description, 9-26
check ICT ref check valves (c System) cleaning
6306 maintenance description, 9-34 bar code reader window, 10-687
check syringes and valves (c 4000) spills, 8-11
6026 maintenance location, 9-50 clearances
check syringes and valves (c System) c System processing module with RSH,
6026 maintenance description, 9-28 4-13
check valve (c System), evaluating the, CMIA reaction sequence
10-691 description of, 3-24
check valves (c 4000) CMIA reader (i 1000SR)
replacing the, 9-119 description of, 1-63
check water bath temperature (c System)
3526 maintenance description, 9-41 CMIA technology
checking
system operation after installation, 2-2 CNTL
patient result flag description, 5-187
chemical hazards
precautions, 8-9 codes
risk and safety numbers and phrases, 8-9 processing, 5-145
sensitizers, precautions for, 8-10 collecting specimens
sodium azide, precautions for, 8-9 requirements, 7-8
ci 8200 integrated system comments, adding
c 8000 processing module, 1-2 to a control result, 5-211
i 2000SR processing module, 1-2 to a Levey-Jennings point, 5-282
illustration of, 1-3 to a patient result, 5-191
RSH, 1-2 to an exception, 5-260
SCC, 1-2 to an order, 5-149
ci integrated system Complete
description of, 1-2 test status description, 5-145
clean cuvette washer nozzles (c System) Completed
6018 maintenance description, 9-28 maintenance status description, 9-20
clean cuvettes - manually (c System) component replacement
6310 maintenance description, 9-43 c 4000 processing center, 9-73
clean cuvettes with detergent (c System) c 4000 supply and pump center, 9-114
6056 maintenance description, 9-26 general description, 9-73
i 1000SR, 9-148
clean ICT drain tip (c 4000) i 1000SR processing center, 9-150
6300 maintenance illustration, 9-51 i 1000SR supply and waste center, 9-169
clean ICT drain tip (c System) components
6300 maintenance description, 9-29 ARCHITECT System, 1-2
clean mixers (c System) c 4000 System, 1-4
6021 maintenance description, 9-25 ci integrated system, 1-3
clean Reagent Supply Center (c 4000) optical system (c System), 3-5
6027 maintenance description, 9-41 optical system (i System), 3-28

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
computer and interface illustration of, 2-102

specifications, 4-21 Configure assay parameters window -
computer hardware error codes Calibration - ICT view (c System)
descriptions of error codes 8000-8999, description of, 2-105
Concentrated Wash Buffer (i System) illustration of, 2-106
description of, 1-109 Configure assay parameters window -
illustration of 1 L bottle, 1-110 Calibration - Intervals view (c System -
illustration of 10 L bottle, 1-111 photometric)
configuration options description of, 2-103
bar code, Appendix E-146 field descriptions, Appendix E-165
Configuration screen - Assay settings
Assay parameters view description, 2-36 Configure assay parameters window -
Assay parameters view field descriptions, Calibration - Validity checks view (c
Appendix E-148 System - photometric)
Assay parameters view illustration, 2-37 description of, 2-104
Assay parameters view, accessing the, field descriptions, Appendix E-166
2-37 illustration of, 2-105
description of, 2-36 Configure assay parameters window -
New assay view description, 2-38 Calibration - Volumes view (c System -
New assay view field descriptions, photometric)
Appendix E-148 description of, 2-102
New assay view illustration, 2-39 field descriptions, Appendix E-164
New assay view, accessing the, 2-39 illustration of, 2-103
procedures associated with, 2-41 Configure assay parameters window -
windows associated with, 2-91 Calibration view (i System)
Configuration screen - QC-Cal settings description of, 2-99
accessing the, 2-122 field descriptions, Appendix E-163
description of, 2-121 illustration of, 2-100
field descriptions, Appendix E-180 Configure assay parameters window -
illustration of, 2-122 Dilution view (i System)
procedures associated with, 2-123 description of, 2-106
windows associated with, 2-157 field descriptions, Appendix E-168
Configuration screen - System settings illustration of, 2-107
accessing the, 2-5 Configure assay parameters window -
description of, 2-4 General - ICT view
illustration of, 2-5 field descriptions, Appendix E-162
procedures associated with, 2-6 illustration of, 2-99
Configuration screen -System settings Configure assay parameters window -
windows associated with, 2-25 General - Reaction definition view (c
Configure assay parameters window - System - photometric)
Calibration - Calibrators view (c System - description of, 2-96
photometric) field descriptions, Appendix E-155

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
Configure assay parameters window - Configure calibrator set window (c System)

General - Reagent Sample view (c System - description of, 2-163
photometric) field descriptions, Appendix E-185
field descriptions, Appendix E-158 Configure host - release mode window
Configure assay parameters window - field descriptions, Appendix E-133
General - Validity checks view (c System - illustration of, 2-27
photometric) Configure modules window (c 4000)
field descriptions, Appendix E-160 field descriptions, Appendix E-142
Configure assay parameters window - Configure modules window (i 1000SR)
General view (calculated) description of, 2-32
Configure multiconstituent bar code SID
Configure assay parameters window - window
General view (i System) description of, 2-161
Configure multiconstituent control window
Configure assay parameters window - description of, 2-158
Interpretation view field descriptions, Appendix E-182
illustration of, 2-114 Configure panel definitions window
Configure assay parameters window - field descriptions, Appendix E-177
Results view illustration of, 2-118
field descriptions, Appendix E-172 Configure password window
Configure assay parameters window - illustration of, 2-30
SmartWash view (c System)
description of, 2-108 Configure reagent (CC reagent settings)
field descriptions, Appendix E-169 window - Abbott assay view
Configure assay retest rules window illustration of, 2-115
field descriptions, Appendix E-177 Configure reagent (CC reagent settings)
illustration of, 2-119 window - User-defined assay view
Configure bar codes window field descriptions, Appendix E-174
illustration of, 2-35 Configure reagents - supplies window (ci
4100)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
description of, 2-28 c System calibration adjustment type

field descriptions, Appendix E-137 and interval (photometric), 2-48
illustration of, 2-29 c System default dilution setting
Configure reports printing window (photometric), 2-48
description of, 2-27 c System running calibrations by kit,
field descriptions, Appendix E-136 2-53
illustration of, 2-28 i System default dilution setting, 2-53
interpretation options (c System and
Configure result units window calculated), 2-50
description of, 2-116 normal and extreme ranges, 2-42
field descriptions, Appendix E-176 patient and QC panels, 2-43
illustration of, 2-117 result units and decimal places, 2-47
Configure results parameters window retest rule, 2-44
description of, 2-112 Configuring QC-Cal settings
field descriptions, Appendix E-173 Westgard rules, 2-131
configuring QC-Cal settings
Configure sample handler window (c 4000/i automated multiconstituent control
1000SR/ci 4100) ordering, 2-130
description of, 2-33 bar code for a single analyte control
illustration of, 2-34 level, 2-125
Configure sample handler window (RSH - c c System calibrator set, 2-132
4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100) intervals for a single analyte control
field descriptions, Appendix E-143 level, 2-126
Configure sample ordering window multiconstituent bar code SID, 2-129
description of, 2-25 new multiconstituent control, 2-127
field descriptions, Appendix E-133 new single analyte control, 2-123
illustration of, 2-26 configuring system settings
Configure serial ports window host interface settings, 2-6
description of, 2-35 QC run definition, 2-9
field descriptions, Appendix E-146 report settings, 2-7
illustration of, 2-35 configuring user-defined assays
Configure single analyte window c System SmartWash settings, 2-62
description of, 2-157 c System user-defined reagent
field descriptions, Appendix E-181 (photometric), 2-65
illustration of, 2-158 c System user-defined reagent kit
(photometric), 2-66
Configure system control center window
c System user-defined sample diluent
(photometric), 2-64
photometric assay, 2-59
connectors
Configure Westgard window
bar code scanner, 1-8
com 1 port, 1-8
CPU, 1-8
configuring ethernet, 1-8
system, 2-4 keyboard, 1-8
configuring Abbott assays mouse, 1-8
printer, 1-8

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
video, 1-8 illustration, 5-142

consumables assay options - manual dilution view
ARCHITECT System, 1-89 description, 5-140
ARCHITECT System inventory assay options - manual dilution view
management, 5-22 illustration, 5-141
bulk solutions, storing and using, 7-5 control orders
c System, 1-89 multiconstituent, creating, 5-137
c System inventory management, 5-23 single analyte, creating, 5-135
c System list numbers, Appendix D-2 viewing status of, 5-146
i 2000/i 2000SR inventory management, control results
5-35 adding a comment to, 5-211
i System, 1-102 archiving released, 5-246
i System list numbers, Appendix D-3 finding a specific, 5-209
inventory management description, releasing, 5-212
5-17 viewing all, 5-209
consumables troubleshooting viewing details, 5-210
c System, 10-5 control sample processing
i System, 10-7 description, 5-178
contents tab control tests
description of online operations manual rerunning, 5-193
table of contents, System
documentation-15 controller configuration (SCC)
illustration of, System 6008 diagnostics description, 10-684
documentation-16 controls
control level Levey-Jennings graph adding a lot to a single analyte control,
viewing, 5-290 2-135
adding an assay to a multiconstituent
Control order screen control, 2-139
general description, 5-132 automated ordering, 5-108
multiconstituent view, accessing, 5-135 changing multiconstituent, 2-141
multiconstituent view, description, changing single analyte, 2-137
5-134 changing the default dilution for a single
multiconstituent view, field analyte control, 2-139
descriptions, Appendix E-31 creating order for multiconstituent,
multiconstituent view, illustration, 5-137
5-134 creating order for single analyte, 5-135
procedures associated with, 5-135 multiconstituent, description, 1-105
single analyte view description, 5-132 multiconstituent, illustration, 1-106
single analyte view, accessing, 5-133 single constituent, description, 1-105
single analyte view, field descriptions, single constituent, illustration, 1-105
Appendix E-30
single analyte view, illustration, 5-133 controls troubleshooting
windows associated with, 5-140 c System, 10-7
i System, 10-8
Control order window
assay options - automated dilution view conventions
description, 5-141 online documentation, System
assay options - automated dilution view documentation-8
printed documentation, System

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
documentation-4 cuvette integrity test (c System)

corrective action procedures 1010 diagnostics description, 10-666
processing module, 10-687 cuvette segments (c 4000)
sample handler, 10-696 description of, 1-38
SCC, 10-698 illustration of, 1-39
correlation factor and intercept settings (c replacing, 9-100
System) cuvette wash pump (c 4000)
changing, 2-81 illustration of, 9-115
CPU cuvette washer (c 4000)
back panel description, 1-8 description of, 1-40
back panel illustration, 1-8 illustration of, 1-41
location of, 1-7 location of, 9-74
crash sensor test cuvette washer (c System)
c System 5405 diagnostics description, cleaning nozzles, 9-28
10-661 cuvettes (c 4000)
i 1000SR 5420 diagnostics description, capacities, 4-7
10-671 replacing, 9-96
Create backup window cuvettes (c System)
description of, 2-176 cleaning manually, 9-43
field descriptions, Appendix E-189 cleaning with detergent, 9-26
illustration of, 2-176 washing, 9-41
creating cycling power
calibration order, 6-12 processing module and or sample
control orders (multiconstituent), 5-137 handler, 5-11
control orders (single analyte), 5-135 SCC, 5-5
Levey-Jennings graph, 5-277
patient orders (batch, bar coded), 5-119 D
patient orders (batch, non-bar coded), D processing code
patient orders (single order), 5-115 daily maintenance
system software backup, 2-175 c System 6070 maintenance description,
curve shape adjustment method (i System) 9-22
description of, Appendix C-22 c System processing module, 9-21
customer maintenance kit LN 02J53-01 (c daily maintenance procedures (i 1000SR)
8000 System) description of, 9-56
listing of components, Appendix D-5 data reduction calculation
cutoff assay data reduction methods (i description of (i System), 3-29
System) description of photometric, 3-6
description of, Appendix C-18 description of potentiometric, 3-12
one-point qualitative (index formula), data reduction methods
Appendix C-19 c System photometric, Appendix C-2
two-point qualitative (index formula), c System potentiometric, Appendix C-8
Appendix C-19 i System 4PLC, Appendix C-16
cuvette dry tip (c 4000) i System cutoff assay, Appendix C-18
replacing the, 9-103 i System linear regression, Appendix

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
C-15 file, 2-181

i System point to point calibration, multiconstituent bar code SID, 2-144
Appendix C-14 patient or QC panel, 2-73
i System reference calibration, Appendix patient result, 5-195
C-19 print job, 5-307
data storage capacities retest rule, 2-76
message history log, 4-6 single analyte control level, 2-138
printer spool, 4-6 stored patient result, 5-231
QC results, 4-6 temporary messages, 10-17
reagent kits, 4-6 test from a patient order, 5-150
released results, 4-6 test from a rerun order, 5-223
temporary messages, 4-6 descriptive elements
unreleased results, 4-6 Maintenance log screen, 9-15
date and time settings Details for assay parameters window -
changing, 2-17 Calibration view (i System)
decontamination illustration of, 2-101
procedure requirements, 8-14 Details for assay parameters window -
SCC, external, 9-72 Dilution view (i System)
default calibration ordering type (c System - illustration of, 2-108
photometric) Details for assay parameters window -
changing, 2-80 General view (calculated)
default dilution settings illustration of, 2-95
c System changing photometric, 2-79 Details for assay parameters window -
c System configuring photometric, 2-48 General view (i System)
i System changing, 2-85 illustration of, 2-94
i System configuring, 2-53 Details for batch window
Define calibrator data window description of, 5-131
Define control data window illustration of, 5-131
description of, 2-160 Details for exceptions window - Calculated
field descriptions, Appendix E-183 view
Define data calibrator window (c System) description of, 5-266
field descriptions, Appendix E-186 field descriptions, Appendix E-103, ,
Appendix E-105
Define data window illustration of, 5-267
illustration of, 2-161, , 2-164
Details for exceptions window - Calibrator
delete view
multiconstituent control level, 2-145 description of, 5-269
deleting field descriptions, Appendix E-106
assay file, 2-177 illustration of, 5-270
c System calibrator set (photometric), Details for exceptions window - Control
2-148 view
c System reagent, 2-83 description of, 5-267, , 5-268
c System reagent kit, 2-85 field descriptions, Appendix E-104
exception, 5-261 illustration of, 5-268, , 5-269
maintenance or diagnostic procedure

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
Details for exceptions window - Data view (c window - Data view (c System)
field descriptions, Appendix E-98 Details for QC result (QC result review)
illustration of, 5-264 window - Photometric - graph view (c
Details for exceptions window - Photometric System)
- graph view (c System) description of, 5-215
field descriptions, Appendix E-100 Details for QC result (QC result review)
illustration of, 5-265 window (i System)
Details for exceptions window (i System) description of, 5-216, , 5-217
description of, 5-265 field descriptions, Appendix E-68, ,
field descriptions, Appendix E-101 Appendix E-69
illustration of, 5-266 illustration of, 5-217, , 5-218
Details for maintenance item window Details for QC result (Stored QC results)
description of, 9-13 window - Data view (c System)
Details for maintenance log screen illustration of, 5-250
field descriptions, Appendix E-127 Details for QC result (Stored QC results)
Details for maintenance log window window - Photometric - graph view (c
description of, 9-19 System)
Details for order (Order status Rerun status) illustration of, 5-251
window - Single order view
description of, 5-151 Details for QC result (Stored QC results)
field descriptions, Appendix E-36 window (i System)
illustration of, 5-152 description of, 5-251, , 5-252
field descriptions, Appendix E-90, ,
Details for order (Order status) window - Appendix E-91
Batch (bar coded) view illustration of, 5-252, , 5-253
field descriptions, Appendix E-37 Details for QC summary window
Details for order (Order status) window - illustration of, 5-292
Batch (non-bar coded) view
description of, 5-153 Details for reagent (history) window
Details for QC result (QC result review) -
Data view (c System) Details for reagent (Reagent status) window
Details for QC result (QC result review) - illustration of, 5-61
Photometric - graph view (c System)
field descriptions, Appendix E-67 Details for result (Results review) window -
Calculated view
Details for QC result (QC result review)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index

Details for result (Results review) window - Details for sample window
Data view (c System) description of, 5-130
illustration of, 5-200 detection technology
Details for result (Results review) window - c System, 4-2
Photometric - graph view (c System) i System, 4-2
description of, 5-200 Detergent A (c 4000)
field descriptions, Appendix E-45 replacing onboard solutions in reagent
illustration of, 5-201 supply center, 5-29
Details for result (Results review) window - Detergent A (c System)
Sample interference index view (c System) preparing, 5-27
description of, 5-201 replacing onboard solutions (c 4000),
field descriptions, Appendix E-46 5-32
Detergent B (c 4000)
Details for result (Results review) window (i replacing onboard solutions in reagent
System) supply center, 5-29
field descriptions, Appendix E-48 Detergent B (c System)
illustration of, 5-203 preparing 10% solution, 5-28
Details for result (Stored results) window - Detergent B probe wash (c System)
Calculated view 6055 maintenance description, 9-42
description of, 5-235 DI water (c System)
field descriptions, Appendix E-52 check purity, 9-22
illustration of, 5-235 diagnostic categories
Details for result (Stored results) window - c System, 10-659
Data view (c System) description of, 10-658
description of, 5-235 SCC, 10-683
field descriptions, Appendix E-54 Diagnostic perform window
Details for result (Stored results) window - field descriptions, Appendix E-129
Photometric - graph view (c System) illustration of, 10-657
description of, 5-236 diagnostic procedures
field descriptions, Appendix E-56 installing or deleting, 2-181
Diagnostics screen
Details for result (Stored results) window - accessing the, 10-652
Sample interference index view (c System) description of, 10-651
illustration of, 5-238 procedures associated with, 10-653
Details for result (Stored results) window (i windows associated with, 10-656
System) diagnostics, system

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
description of, 10-651 (potentiometric - c System)

dimensions calculation, Appendix C-9
i System biohazard bag, 4-8 description of, Appendix C-9
SCC, 4-8 electronic media
disabling or enabling the ICT module (c list numbers, Appendix D-10
System) emergency shutdown
procedure for, 10-689 c 4000, 5-15
Disk is read-only multi-module, 5-15
archive message, 5-233 single module, 5-15
dispensing volume specifications emission measurement
i System, 4-5 CMIA optical system, 3-27
displaying Empty
favorite topic in online operations reagent status description, 5-57
manual, System documentation-41 emptying
value for a Levey-Jennings point, 5-280 c System high-concentration waste
disposing bottle, 5-34
of waste, 8-12 enabling or disabling the ICT module (c
downloading System)
host computer, 5-107 procedure for, 10-689
E end-point assay
description of, 3-3
EDIT example of reaction curve, 3-3
c System result flag description, 5-187
environmental specifications and
Edit result window (c System) requirements
illustration of, 5-204 ARCHITECT System, 4-20
electrical error codes
precautions, 8-16 assay specific (1000-1999), 10-125
electrical requirements bar code reader (4000-4999), 10-331
troubleshooting, 10-9 computer hardware (8000-8999), 10-462
electrical safety parameters general (0001-0999), 10-21
ARCHITECT System, 4-16 level sense (3000-3999), 10-249
maintenance (2000-2999), 10-196
electrical specifications optics (6000-6999), 10-432
c System processing module with sample robotic and sensor (5000-5999), 10-352
handler, 4-15 software (9000-9999), 10-499
i System processing module with sample temperature (7000-7999), 10-443
handler, 4-15
SCC, 4-14 error message logs
System logs screen, 10-11
electrode (mV) response curve
(potentiometric - c System) error messages
during calibration, illustration, viewing low level, 10-16
Appendix C-11 ethernet connectors
during sample measurement, location of, 1-8
illustration, Appendix C-12 evaluating the check valve (c System)
electromotive force measurement procedure for, 10-691

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
examples EXPC
icons, 1-12 c System quality control result flag
menu, 1-12 description, 5-208
message, 1-15 c System result flag description, 5-187
prompt, 1-15, , 1-16 Expired
screen, 1-11 calibration status (c System), 6-19
syringe (i 1000SR), 1-56 reagent status description, 5-57
wash cup (i 1000SR), 1-56
window, 1-14 Export assay window
Exception field descriptions, Appendix E-151
test status description, 5-145
export assay window
Exception Details Report illustration, 2-41
export status messages
exception management descriptions of, Appendix E-152
exporting
Exception Status Report c System assay file, 2-180
exposure
Exception status screen mechanical components, 8-18
accessing, 5-257 to biohazardous or potentially infectious
adding a comment to an exception, materials, 8-7
5-260 to hot objects, 8-22
description of, 5-255 to laser light, 8-20
field descriptions, Appendix E-97 to probes and sharps, 8-20
procedures associated with, 5-258 external decontamination (SCC)
sorting options, 5-256 6038 maintenance description, 9-72
windows associated with, 5-262 external modem (SCC)
exceptions description of, 1-9
adding a comment to, 5-260 external waste pump
deleting, 5-261 clearances, 4-20
finding a specific, 5-258 description, 1-80
rerunning, 5-193 dimensions, 4-19
transmitting to the host, 5-261 electrical specifications and
viewing all, 5-258 requirements, 4-19
viewing details, 5-259 illustration, 1-80
Exceptions icon observed problems, 10-649
description of, Appendix E-4 replacing, 9-183
weight, 4-19
exceptions status button
description of, 1-17 Extra Bottle
reagent status description, 5-57
excluding
Levey-Jennings point, 5-280 F
EXP factor assay view - Calibration curve window
quality control result flag description, (c System)
result flag description, 5-187 factor data reduction method (photometric -

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
c System) Find options (Calibration status and

description of, Appendix C-2 Calibration history) window
Failed field descriptions, Appendix E-76
maintenance status description, 9-20 Find options (Calibration status) window
failed calibration curve description of, 6-20
storage, 6-11 illustration of, 6-20
failed calibration status Find options (Exception status) window
verification by system, 6-16 field descriptions, Appendix E-97
failing
calibration curve, 6-33 Find options (Order status Rerun status)
window
favorite topics description of, 5-151
adding or removing a favorite topic from field descriptions, Appendix E-35
online favorites list, System illustration of, 5-151
documentation-45
favorites tab description, System Find options (QC result review) window
documentation-20 description of, 5-213
favorites tab illustration, System field descriptions, Appendix E-64
documentation-20 illustration of, 5-214
favorites list Find options (QC summary review) window
adding or removing favorites, System description of, 5-290
documentation-45 illustration of, 5-291
field description Find options (QC summary) window
QC summary review screen, Appendix field descriptions, Appendix E-95
E-94 Find options (Reagent status - View all)
Stored QC results screen, Appendix E-85 window
field descriptions description of, 5-63
Configure Westgard window, Appendix field descriptions, Appendix E-114
E-185 illustration of, 5-64
Exceptions icon screens and windows, Find options (Reagent status) window
Appendix E-96 description of, 5-62
general description, Appendix E-16 field descriptions, Appendix E-114
file options illustration of, 5-63
reference, 3-20 Find options (Results review) window
files description of, 5-197
common test, 3-20 field descriptions, Appendix E-41
extra test, 3-20 illustration of, 5-198
filter Find options (Sample status) window
c 4000 ICT reference solution, replacing, description of, 5-160
c 4000 wash solution, replacing, 9-126 illustration of, 5-161
Find options (Calibration history) window Find options (Stored QC results) window

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
Find options (Stored results) window front processing center cover

description of, 5-234 i 1000SR processing module, 1-49
field descriptions, Appendix E-51 full assay view - Calibration curve window (i
illustration of, 5-234 System)
Find options (System logs) window description of, 6-25
illustration of, 10-19 full calibration
finding c System description, 6-6
a specific calibration, 6-32 i System description, 6-10
control result, 5-209 function bar buttons
exception, 5-258 description of, 1-12
message, 10-15 illustration of, 1-13
patient result, 5-189
reagent, 5-70 functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial
sample, 5-158 dilution)
stored control result, 5-244 data sheet, Appendix B-18
stored patient result, 5-227 data sheet example, Appendix B-19
summary for specific QC data, 5-288 description of, Appendix B-17
test order, 5-147 functional sensitivity - method 2
flags data sheet, Appendix B-21
patient result, 5-187 description of, Appendix B-20
quality control result, 5-207 fuse motor diagnostics (i 1000SR)
FLEX description of, 10-676
c System quality control result flag, G
5-208 gauge label (sample)
c System result flag, 5-187 description of, 5-166
float switch cable (c System) illustration of sample carrier, 5-167
replacing the, 9-180 general error codes
floppy drive descriptions of error codes 0001-0999,
SCC standard component, 1-7 10-21
specifications, 4-21 general operator
fluidic wash diagnostics description user log on, 1-21
c System, 10-661 glossary
fluidics subsystems troubleshooting procedure for using, System
c System, 10-4 documentation-38
i System, 10-6 graph elements (Levey-Jennings graph
flush bulk solutions (c System) screen)
flush ICT cup (c System) graphical symbols
2131 maintenance description, 9-39 i System assay technology, 3-25
flush ICT module (c System) GUI (graphical user interface)
flush water lines (c System) guidelines
2132 maintenance description, 9-39 sample bar code labels, 4-28

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
guidelines for calibration c System description, 1-80

description of, 6-2 replacing the, 9-178
H High-concentration waste pump (c 4000)
hard drive description of, 1-44
specifications, 4-21 illustration of, 1-45
hardware troubleshooting high-concentration waste pump (c 4000)

c System, 10-5 checking tubing (illustration), 9-49
i System, 10-6 location in supply and waste center,
9-115
hazards
chemical, 8-9 high-concentration waste sensor (c System)
electrical, 8-16 checking cleaning, 9-35
heavy objects, 8-22 hopper assembly (i 1000SR)
hot objects, 8-22 location of, 1-57
laser light, 8-20 host
mechanical, 8-18 configuring interface settings, 2-6
physical, 8-20 downloading from host computer to
probes and sharps, 8-20 SCC, 5-107
sensitizers, 8-10 interface specifications, 4-21
sodium azide in drains, 8-9 transmitting exceptions to the, 5-261
symbols, description of, 8-6
host interface components
tripping, 8-22
troubleshooting, 10-10
help button
host order query
location of, 1-10
Help?
hot objects
accessing error message, illustration,
exposure to, 8-22
accessing Help?, System humidity requirements
documentation-28 ARCHITECT System, 4-20
accessing online, System I
documentation-28
i 1000SR processing module - RSH
accessing screen or window, illustration,
card cage door, 1-50
card cage rear panel, 1-51
window example, System
description, 1-49
documentation-12
fluidics rear panel, 1-51
hemolysis illustration of front view, 1-50
measurement of, 3-21 illustration of rear view, 1-51
protocol, description of, 3-20 SCC rear panel, 1-51
HH i 1000SR System
result flag description, 5-187 description of, 1-4
HIGH i System
result flag description, 5-188 processing modules, 1-49
high-concentration bottle i System calibration types
emptying, 5-34 adjust, 6-9
high-concentration waste bottle (c System) full, 6-10
c System capacities, 4-7 index, 6-10

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
IA-MCC (multiconstituent control - i description, Appendix C-12

System) ICT measurement
icon equivalents ICT module
keyboard, 1-12 illustration of internal components, 3-12
icons ICT module (c 4000)
description of, 1-12 replacing, 9-108
example of, 1-12
Exceptions, Appendix E-4 ICT module (c System)
Orders, Appendix E-2 bleaching, 10-689
Overview, Appendix E-2 changing, 9-43
QC-Cal, Appendix E-4 description of, 1-93
Reagents, Appendix E-5 enabling or disabling the, 10-689
Results, Appendix E-3 flushing, 9-43
Supplies, Appendix E-5 illustration of, 1-94
System, Appendix E-5 warranty, 1-93
icons and menus ICT probe (c 4000)

description of, Appendix E-2 replacing, 9-108
icons- Snapshot screen ICT probe and tubing (c 4000)

Updates available, Appendix E-20 checking (illustration), 9-47
ICT (c System) ICT probe and tubing (c System)

washing with cleaning fluid, 9-42 checking (maintenance description),
9-25
ICT asp check valve (c System)
changing, 9-33 ICT ref check valves (c System)
checking, 9-34
ICT aspiration pump (c 4000)
location in supply and pump center, ICT reference pump (c 4000)
9-115 location of, 9-115
ICT calibrators (c System) ICT reference solution (c 4000)

description of, 1-94 replacing the filter, 9-124
illustration of, 1-95 ICT reference solution (c System)
ICT Cleaning Fluid (c System) description of, 1-96
illustration of, 1-96 replacing, 5-24
procedure for preparing, 9-23 updating supply status, 5-24
ICT cup (c System) ICT reference solution delivery

flushing, 9-39 description of sequence, 3-7
ICT drain tip (c 4000)
cleaning (illustration), 9-51 ICT sample delivery
ICT drain tip (c System)
cleaning, 9-29 ICT sample measurement
ICT index, Appendix C-12
ICT high-concentration waste area (c 4000)
description of, 1-42 ICT unit (c 4000)
ICT index location of, 9-74

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
icterus description of, 6-24

measurement of, 3-21 illustration of, 6-25
protocol, description of, 3-20 index calibration
ideal slope (ICT) i System description, 6-10
description of, 6-5 indicators
Import assay window status - RSH (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100),
field descriptions, Appendix E-149 information area (screen)
import assay window location of, 1-11
illustration, 2-40 information symbol (messages)
Import lot file selection window example of, 1-15
description of, 2-165 initiating
field descriptions, Appendix E-187 RSH and SSH sample processing, 5-177
illustration of, 2-166 sample processing, description, 5-176
import status messages install delete assays (SCC)
descriptions of, Appendix E-150 6114 diagnostics description, 10-685
import statuses (c System) install delete procedures (SCC)
import statuses (i System) installing
description of, 2-168 assay file, 2-177
importing maintenance or diagnostic procedure
c System assay file, 2-178 file, 2-181
c System calibrator data, 2-152, , 2-154 system, 2-2
c System multiconstituent control data, system software, 2-169
2-150, , 2-154 instructions box (maintenance)
i System multiconstituent control data, description of, 9-6
2-151
Insufficient disk space for archive
In Process archive message, 5-233
calibration status description, 6-19
test status description, 5-145 integrated chip technology
description of, 3-7
inactive calibration curve
storage, 6-11 interlock sensors test
c System 3400 diagnostics description,
inactive calibration status 10-664
verification by system, 6-16 interpretation options (c System and
calculated)
including configuring, 2-50
Levey-Jennings points, 5-280
interpretation settings
index changing, 2-86
online operations manual, description of
tab, System documentation-18 inventory management (consumables)
procedure for using in online operations c System procedures, 5-23
manual, System documentation-31 description of, 5-17
i 2000/i 2000SR procedures, 5-35
index assay view - Calibration curve window
(i System) inventory management (reagent)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
ARCHITECT System procedures, 5-68 10-249

c 4000 procedures, 5-73 level sensors test (i 1000SR)
i 1000SR procedures, 5-95 3420 diagnostics description, 10-676
K Levey - Jennings Report
keyboard illustration of, Appendix A-45
function button equivalents, 1-12 Levey-Jennings graph
icon equivalents, 1-12 changing, 5-279
location of, 1-7 creating, 5-277
specifications, 4-21
Levey-Jennings graph screen
keypad test description of, 5-274
c System 3720 diagnostics description, field descriptions, Appendix E-71
10-663 graph elements, 5-275
keypads illustration of, 5-275
c 4000 System processing module, procedures associated with, 5-277
description, 1-27 statistical data elements, 5-276
windows associated with, 5-283
L
Levey-Jennings points
labels
adding a comment to, 5-282
bar code label guidelines for 1D
displaying the value for, 5-280
(one-dimensional) reagent, 4-24
excluding or including, 5-280
c System reagent, description, 1-90
viewing details, 5-281
c System reagent, illustration, 1-91
i System reagent, description, 1-103 Levey-Jennings Report
i System reagent, illustration, 1-104 printing the, 5-299
sample bar code label guidelines, 4-28 lifting heavy objects hazard
lamp (c 4000) description of, 8-21
description of, 1-39 limit of blank - method 1
illustration of, 1-39 data sheet, Appendix B-4
location of, 9-74 data sheet example, Appendix B-5
replacing the, 9-89 description of, Appendix B-3
lamp (c System) limit of detection - method 1
change, 9-30 data sheet, Appendix B-15, , Appendix
lamp plate (c 4000) B-23
replacing the, 9-89 data sheet example, Appendix B-16, ,
Appendix B-24
LAS status button
limit of quantitation - method 1
laser
caution label, 8-21
certification label, 8-21 linear assay view - Calibration curve window
light, exposure to, 8-20 (c System)
last required read setting (c System -
photometric)
changing, 2-78 linear calibration curve - six calibrators
(photometric - c System)
level sense error codes
illustration of, Appendix C-3
descriptions of error codes 3000-3999,

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
linear data reduction method (photometric - location of, 1-57

c System) Load Error
description of, Appendix C-3 reagent status description, 5-57
linear regression data reduction method (i loading reagents
System) c 4000 bar coded, 5-74
description of, Appendix C-15 c 4000 non-bar coded, 5-79
illustration of, Appendix C-15 i 1000SR, 5-98
linear transformation adjustment method (i loading sample diluents (c 4000)
System) procedure for, 5-76
description of, Appendix C-21
loading samples (RSH)
linearity ranges bar coded samples for batch processing,
changing, 2-76 5-172
lipemia non-bar coded samples for batch
measurement of, 3-21 processing, 5-174
protocol, description of, 3-20 sample carriers, 5-168
liquid waste (i 1000SR) log off
container, 1-77 procedure, 1-24
liquid waste container (i1000SR) log on
illustration, 1-78 description of user, 1-21
liquid waste output specifications (i System) procedure (general operator), 1-21
description of, 4-5 procedure (system administrator), 1-22
window description, 1-20
LIS serial port settings window illustration (system
changing, 2-22 administrator), 1-21
LIS status button Log on window
log utilities (SCC)
list numbers 6009 diagnostics description, 10-684
accessories, Appendix D-9
c 4000 accessory kit description, Logit-4 calibration curve - three to six
Appendix D-4 calibrators (photometric - c System)
c 4000 System accessory 1 kit LN illustration of, Appendix C-5
02P68-01, Appendix D-4 Logit-4 data reduction method (photometric
c 8000 System customer maintenance kit - c System)
LN 02J53-01, Appendix D-5 description of, Appendix C-5
c System consumables, Appendix D-2 long-term shutdown (i 2000/i 2000SR)
electronic media, Appendix D-10 description of, 5-16
i System accessory kit, Appendix D-7
i System consumables, Appendix D-3 LOW
SCC components, Appendix D-11 result flag description, 5-188
LL Low Alert
result flag description, 5-187 reagent status description, 5-57
LLS Error low level error messages

reagent status description, 5-57 viewing, 10-16
load diverter (i 1000SR) M

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
M processing code description of, 9-14

MAC Hardware Address procedure (SCC) illustration of, 9-15
6500 diagnostics description, 10-686 procedures associated with, 9-16
maintenance Maintenance Perform window
1110 Pipettor Calibration, 9-60 description of, 9-11
overview of, 9-2 field descriptions, Appendix E-125
illustration, 9-12
maintenance and diagnostic file
management maintenance procedures
description of, 2-181 adding a comment, 9-17
installing or deleting, 2-181
maintenance categories and procedure performing, 9-6
descriptions
c System as-needed maintenance Maintenance screen
description, 9-35 accessing the, 9-4
c System daily maintenance description, description of, 9-3
c System monthly maintenance illustration of, 9-4
description, 9-27 procedures associated with, 9-5
c System quarterly maintenance To do tab, 9-3
description, 9-29 maintenance statuses
c System weekly maintenance description of, 9-20
description, 9-24 managing maintenance and diagnostic files
i 1000SR as-needed maintenance
description, 9-60 math models
i 1000SR daily maintenance description, description of, Appendix C-1
9-56 measurements
i 1000SR weekly maintenance systems physical specifications, 4-8
description, 9-56 measuring sample interference indices (c
SCC as-needed maintenance description, System)
maintenance error codes mechanical hazards
descriptions of error codes 2000-2999, description of, 8-18
10-196
menus
maintenance graphic description of, 1-12
pipettor calibration targets (i 1000SR), example of, 1-12
9-64
Message History Log
Maintenance History Report illustration of report, Appendix A-50
illustration of, Appendix A-48 printing the report, 5-304
specific procedure, printing, 5-302 SCC capacities, 4-6
specified month, printing, 5-301
message logs
maintenance kit (c 8000 System) reviewing, 10-14
listing of LN 02J53-01, Appendix D-5
messages
Maintenance log screen caution definition, 1-15
accessing the, 9-16 deleting temporary, 10-17

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
description of, 1-14 monitor specifications

example of, 1-15 description of, 4-21
finding, 10-15 monthly maintenance
information, 1-15 c System description, 9-27
method groups for verification protocols mouse
description of, Appendix B-1 SCC standard component, 1-7
methods comparison - method 1 multiconstituent bar code SID
(correlation) configuring, 2-129
data sheet, Appendix B-49
description of, Appendix B-48 multiconstituent control data (i System)
importing, 2-151
methods comparison - method 2
(concordance) multiconstituent control data (photometric
calculation sheet, Appendix B-51 - c System)
calculation sheet example, Appendix importing, 2-150, , 2-154
B-53 unassign assay, 2-155
data sheet, Appendix B-51 multiconstituent control level
description of, Appendix B-50 deleting, 2-145
minimum sample volume multiconstituent controls
printing on report, 5-121 add an assay to a bar code SID, 2-142
Missing Bottle adding an assay, 2-139
reagent status definition, 5-57 changing, 2-141
configuring new, 2-127
mixer unit (c 4000)
description of, 1-39 multiconstituent controls (i System)
location of, 9-74 illustration of, 1-106
mixer vibration test (c System) N

3126 diagnostics, 10-660 navigation
mixers (c 4000) of software, 1-16
replacing the, 9-106 navigation pane
mixers (c System) online operations manual, illustration of
cleaning the, 9-25 tabs, System documentation-15
Mixing nested expressions
reagent status description (i 1000SR), description of, System
5-59 documentation-37
modem specifications network hub
description of, 4-21 bar code scanner connector, 1-8
com 1 port, 1-8
module diagnostics description CPU connectors, 1-8
c System, 10-663 description of, 1-8
i 1000SR, 10-673 ethernet connectors, 1-8
module initialization illustration of, 1-8
c System 4080 diagnostics description, keyboard connector, 1-8
10-663 mouse, 1-8
i 1000SR 4110 diagnostics procedure, printer port, 1-8
10-674 video connector, 1-8

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
new reagent bottles (i 1000SR) OK

preparing, 5-95 reagent status description, 5-58
No Assay OK import status
reagent status description, 5-57 description of, 2-167, , 2-168
No assay import status onboard data storage
description of, 2-167, , 2-168 ARCHITECT System location, 4-4
No Cal capacities, 4-6
calibration status description, 6-19 onboard solution options (c 4000)
No CD drive is detected changing, 2-23
archive message, 5-233 onboard solutions (c 4000)
No disk or incorrect disk type detected replacing in reagent supply center and
archive message, 5-233 updating inventory, 5-29
noise level onboard solutions (c System)
specifications, 4-20 Acid Wash illustration, 1-100
non-bar coded reagents (c 4000) Detergent A illustration, 1-100
loading, 5-79 Detergent B illustration, 1-100
replacing, 5-84 storing and using, 7-5
unloading, 5-89
one-point adjustment (c System)
non-bar coded samples (RSH) description of, 6-7
loading for batch processing, 5-174
one-point qualitative (index formula) data
non-linear assay view - Calibration curve reduction method (i System)
window (c System) description of, Appendix C-19
online documentation
normal and extreme result ranges conventions used in, System
changing, 2-71 documentation-8
configuring, 2-42 description of, System documentation-6
Not performed procedure map description, System
maintenance status description, 9-20 documentation-21
number of exceptions pending review task lists on procedure map, System
description of, 1-17 documentation-22
tips for using, System documentation-24
number of orders pending rerun
window descriptions, System
documentation-10
O window toolbar, System
observed problems documentation-12
c System processing module, 10-573 window topic pane, System
c System sample results, 10-586 documentation-13
external waste pump, 10-649 online documentation procedures
general description, 10-573 closing the window, System
i System processing module, 10-584 documentation-44
i System sample results, 10-600 displaying and using the procedure map,
printer, 10-647 System documentation-29
sample handler, 10-627 displaying related information, System
SCC, 10-629 documentation-40

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
playing videos and animations, System adding or removing a favorite topic,

documentation-41 System documentation-45
printing topics, System displaying favorite topic, System
documentation-42 documentation-41
redisplaying online topics, System paging through content, System
resizing and moving the Help window, performing advanced search, System
System documentation-44 documentation-33
scrolling through a topic, System renaming favorite topic, System
tips for using, System documentation-24 searching for a term, System
using the glossary, System documentation-32
documentation-38 tips for using, System documentation-24
operation using boolean operators to search,
precautions, 7-4 System documentation-37
requirements before, 7-3 using nested expressions to search,
operations manual (online) using the index, System
access from system software, illustration, documentation-31
System documentation-6 using the table of contents, System
contents tab description, System documentation-30
documentation-15 using wildcard expressions to search,
conventions used in, System System documentation-38
documentation-8
description of, System documentation-6 operator
favorites tab description, System responsibility for using the system, 8-3
documentation-20 optic temperature diagnostics (i 1000SR)
index tab description, System description of, 10-677
documentation-18 optic temperature diagnostics description
navigation pane and tabs description, c System, 10-665
organization of, System optical measurement
documentation-17 emission measurement (i System), 3-27
procedure map, System optical system (c System), 3-4
documentation-22 optical measurements (i System)
search tab description, System description of, 3-27
documentation-19 optical specifications (c System)
tips for using, System documentation-24 description of, 4-16
window example, System
optical subsystem troubleshooting
documentation-11
c System, 10-4
operations manual (printed) i System, 10-6
conventions used in, System
optics background
documentation-4
1022 diagnostics description (i 1000SR),
organization of, System
10-677
documentation-2
optics diagram
operations manual procedures (online)
illustration of (c System), 3-5
accessing the operations manual, System
illustration of (i System), 3-28
documentation-27

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
optics error codes 5-122

descriptions of error codes 6000-6999, patient (single order), creating, 5-115
10-432 patient, deleting test from, 5-150
optics total test (c System) rerun, deleting test from, 5-223
1008 diagnostics description, 10-665 viewing status details, 5-148
optimum sampling sequence (c System) Orders icon
description of, 3-20 description of, Appendix E-2
screens and windows description,
option for running controls Appendix E-23
changing, 2-24
OSS (optimum sampling sequence) fetaure
optional components description of, 3-20
c System high-concentration waste
bottle, 1-80 Overridden
SCC bar code scanner, 1-9 c System calibration status description,
SCC cart, 1-9 6-19
SCC external modem, 1-9 reagent status description, 5-58
SCC printer, 1-9 Overview icon
SCC speakers, 1-9 description of, Appendix E-2
SCC UPS, 1-9 screens and windows description,
UPS, 1-80 Appendix E-16
Order List Report P
illustration of, Appendix A-52 parameter adjustment method (i System)
printing the, 5-298 description of, Appendix C-22
order status button passwords
description of, Appendix E-17 system administrator, 1-23
Order Status Report Patient order screen
illustration of, Appendix A-54 adding a test to a patient order, 5-125
Order status screen procedures associated with, 5-115
accessing, 5-144 windows associated with, 5-128
adding a comment to an order, 5-149 Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view
description of, 5-142 accessing, 5-113
procedures associated with, 5-146 illustration of, 5-112
sorting options, 5-143
windows associated with, 5-150 Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded)
view
orders accessing, 5-114
adding a comment to, 5-149 description of, 5-113
batch, processing, 5-180 field descriptions, Appendix E-26
calibration, creating, 6-12 illustration of, 5-114
control (multiconstituent), creating,
5-137 Patient order screen - Single patient view
control (single analyte), creating, 5-135 accessing, 5-111
patient (batch, bar coded), creating, description of, 5-110
patient (batch, non-bar coded), creating, illustration of, 5-111

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
Patient order window - assay options test status description, 5-145

automated dilution view Pending Collation
description of, 5-129 test status description, 5-145
Pending Transmission
Patient order window - assay options test status description, 5-145
manual dilution view
description of, 5-128 performance characteristics
illustration of, 5-129 c System, 4-2
i System, 4-2
patient orders
batch, bar coded, creating, 5-119 performing
batch, non-bar coded, creating, 5-122 checkout, 2-2
single order, creating, 5-115 diagnostic procedure, 10-654
patient panels peripheral devices observed problems,

changing, 2-72 10-647
configuring, 2-43 printer, 10-647
deleting, 2-73 photometric calibration method (c System)
Patient Report description of, 6-4
illustration of, Appendix A-56 photometric data reduction methods (c
patient result System)
flags, 5-187 absorbance, Appendix C-2
patient results factor, Appendix C-2
adding a comment to, 5-191 linear, Appendix C-3
archiving released, 5-231 Logit-4, Appendix C-5
deleting, 5-195 spline, Appendix C-6
deleting stored, 5-231 use factor and blank, Appendix C-7
finding a specific, 5-189
releasing, 5-196 photometric timing (c 4000)
viewing all, 5-188 illustration of, 3-17
viewing details, 5-190 physical hazards
patient results, QC results, and exceptions description of, 8-20
rerun review physical requirements
description of, 5-219 troubleshooting, 10-9
patient samples physical specifications
auto retest, 5-109 ARCHITECT System, 4-8
patient stored results pipetting hardware components (i 1000SR)
patient tests illustrated, 1-54
rerunning, 5-193 processing center, 1-54
viewing status of orders, 5-146 pipettor
pausing i 1000SR description, 1-54
processing module, 5-12 pipettor (i 1000SR)
RSH, 5-13 illustration, 1-55
Pending pipettor calibration targets (i 1000SR)
maintenance status description, 9-20 graphic, 9-64

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
pipettor diagnostics (i 1000SR) SCC, cycling, 5-5

description of, 10-670 powering off
pipettor diagnostics description processing module and or sample
c System, 10-660 handler, 5-9
pipettor probe (i 1000SR) SCC, 5-4
replacement, 9-150 powering on
pipettor probe tubing (i 1000SR) processing module and or sample
replacement, 9-154 handler, 5-7
SCC, 5-3
pipettors
i 1000SR pipettor description, 1-54 precautions
before operation, 7-3
pipettors LLS test (c System) biological hazards, 8-7
3625 diagnostics description, 10-662 chemical hazards, 8-9
placement requirements during operation, 7-4
ARCHITECT System, 4-20 electrical hazards, 8-16
Point detail window for system operation, 7-3
description of, 5-284 spill cleanup, 8-11
field descriptions, Appendix E-73 waste handling and disposal, 8-12
illustration of, 5-285 precision - method 1
point to point data reduction method (i data sheet, Appendix B-26
System) description of, Appendix B-25
description of, Appendix C-14 precision diagnostics (i 1000SR)
illustration of, Appendix C-14 description of, 10-678
poppet valve set (c 4000) precision diagnostics description
replacing the, 9-145 c System, 10-667
potentiometric assay view - Calibration preparing
curve window (c System) c System 0.5% acid wash solution, 5-26
description of, 6-22 c System 10% detergent B solution, 5-28
illustration of, 6-23 c System Detergent A, 5-27
potentiometric calibration method (c c System ICT Cleaning Fluid, 9-23
System) c System Water Bath Additive, 9-24
description of, 6-4 i 1000SR new reagent bottles, 5-95
i System used reagent bottles, 5-97
potentiometric data reduction methods (c
i System wash buffer, 5-41
System)
description of, Appendix C-8 pre-trigger and trigger storage area (i
electromotive force measurement, 1000SR)
Appendix C-9 description of, 1-67
sample measurement, Appendix C-11 Pre-Trigger check (i 1000SR)
slope calculation, Appendix C-10 2070 diagnostics description, 10-679
potentiometric method pre-trigger level sensor (i 1000SR)
power illustration of, 1-70
emergency shutdown description, 5-14 pre-trigger or trigger level sensor (i 1000SR)
processing module and or sample replacement, 9-169
handler, cycling, 5-11

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
Pre-Trigger Solution (i System) description of, Appendix E-19

description of, 1-107 Printer window
pre-trigger trigger manifold (i 1000SR) field descriptions, Appendix E-189
illustration of, 1-63 Printing
pre-trigger trigger storage area (i 1000SR) QC Summary report, 5-300
illustration of, 1-68 printing
pre-trigger level sensor, 1-68 Assay Parameter report for all assays,
pre-trigger trigger tray, 1-68 5-305
trigger level sensor, 1-68 Assay Parameter report for specified
pre-trigger trigger tray (i 1000SR) assays, 5-304
description of, 1-68 assay parameter reports, 2-91
illustration of, 1-69 flags on reports option, changing, 2-13
Previously Defined import status Levey-Jennings report, 5-299
description of, 2-167, , 2-168 Maintenance History report for a specific
procedure, 5-302
primary components Maintenance History report for a
ARCHITECT System, 4-4 specified month, 5-301
primary sample tubes Message History Log report, 5-304
specifications, 5-163 Order List report, 5-298
volumes, 5-165 Procedure report, 5-303
prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions (i QC Analysis report, 5-299
1000SR) reports, 5-295
2162 maintenance description, 9-62 screen image, 5-307
topics from online documentation,
prime wash zones (i 1000SR)
Priority sections
print job
change the number of priority sections
deleting, 5-307
(c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), 2-19
viewing the print queue, 5-306
priority sections - RSH (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci
Print options window
4100)
sample carrier, 1-85
printer status indicator, 1-85
description of, 1-9
probe acid wash (c System)
electrical specifications, 4-22
guidelines for bar code labels for 1D
(one-dimensional) reagent, 4-24 probe alignment test (c System)
observed problems, 10-647 1151 diagnostics description, 10-660
parallel cable length, 4-22 probe move (c System)
power cord length, 4-22 1161 diagnostics description, 10-661
spool capacities, 4-6 probe tubing
status button, 1-17 c 4000 reagent, replacing, 9-85
printer status button c 4000 sample, replacing the, 9-82

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
probe wash pump (c 4000) wash zone manifold, 1-57

supply and pump center components, wash zone outlet diverter, 1-57
9-115 process path motor (i 1000SR)
probe water wash (c System) description of, 1-65
6053 maintenance description, 9-41 illustration of, 1-66
probes processing batch orders
c 4000 reagent, replacing, 9-78 description of, 5-180
c 4000 sample, replacing, 9-74 processing center (c 4000)
probes and sharps hazards description of, 1-28
description of, 8-20 processing center (i 1000SR)
procedure information description of, 1-51
viewing, 10-653 pipetting hardware components
procedure map illustration, 1-54
description of, System pipettor hardware components
documentation-21 description, 1-53
illustration of, System process path hardware components,
documentation-21 1-56
tasks lists, System documentation-22 processing center c 4000
viewing list of procedures online, System location of components, 9-74
documentation-29 processing center component replacement
Procedure Report c 4000, 9-73
illustration of Basic, Appendix A-58 processing center component replacement (i
illustration of Columnar, Appendix A-60 1000SR)
printing the, 5-303 procedures, 9-150
procedures processing center map
diagnostic, 10-654 c 4000 illustration, 9-74
maintenance, 9-6 i 1000SR description, 1-52
viewing online procedure map, System i 1000SR illustration, 1-53
documentation-29
processing codes
process path (i 1000SR) description of, 5-145
components used in assay processing,
3-30 processing module
description of, 1-63 automatic activities, 1-126
illustration of, 1-64 c 4000 description, 1-25
c System observed problems, 10-573
process path (i System) c System specifications, 4-5
capacities, 4-7 corrective action procedures, 10-687
process path hardware components (i cycling power to, 5-11
1000SR) cycling power, starting up, and pausing
CMIA reader, 1-57 description, 5-6
drive motor, 1-57 i System observed problems, 10-584
pre-trigger trigger manifold, 1-57 i System specifications, 4-5
RV access door, 1-57 optional components, 1-80
RV loader and hopper assembly, 1-57 pausing the, 5-12
unload diverter, 1-57 powering off, 5-9
vortexers, 1-57 powering on, 5-7

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
starting, 5-12 processing module status

processing module diagnostics categories (i c System processing module status types,
1000SR) 1-121
fuse motor diagnostics description, description of, 1-120
10-676 i 1000SR processing module status types,
module diagnostics description, 10-673 1-123
optic temperature diagnostics illustration of, 1-120
description, 10-677 Snapshot screen graphic, 1-18
pipettor diagnostics description, 10-670 processing module wash (c System)
precision diagnostics description, 10-678 description of, 1-128
reaction mechanism diagnostics processing modules
description, 10-669 c System description, 1-25
solenoid sensor diagnostics description, general description, 1-25
10-675 i System description, 1-49
processing module graphic processing reagent inventory
c System field descriptions, Appendix description of, 5-180
E-17
i System field descriptions, Appendix prompts
E-17 description of, 1-15
example of, 1-15, , 1-16
processing module interface specifications
description of, 4-21 PSHH (c System ICT assays)
quality control result flag, 5-208
processing module keypad result flag, 5-188
c 4000 System description, 1-27
c 4000 System illustration, 1-28 pump center (c 4000)
processing module pumps (c 4000)
illustration of, 1-47 pump locations (c 4000)
cuvette wash, 9-115
processing module specifications high-concentration waste, 9-115
noise level, 4-20 ICT aspiration, 9-115
processing module specifications, bar code ICT reference, 9-115
readers probe wash, 9-115
c System, 4-5 wash solution, 9-115
i System, 4-5 pump motor test (i 1000SR)
processing module specifications, dispense 5160 diagnostics description, 10-677
volume Q
c System, 4-5
QC Analysis Report
processing module specifications, illustration, Appendix A-62
dispensing volume printing the, 5-299
i System, 4-5
QC data
processing module specifications, liquid viewing details, 5-289
waste output
i System, 4-5 QC data summary
finding a specific, 5-288
processing module specifications, viewing, 5-288
temperature
c System, 4-5 QC panels
i System, 4-5 changing, 2-72

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
configuring, 2-43 QC-Cal settings

deleting, 2-73 procedures associated with, 2-134
QC reports screen quality control analysis
accessing, 5-293 description of, 5-271
description of, 5-292 quality control result flags
quality control specification
QC Result Details Report ARCHITECT System, 4-4
quarterly maintenance (c System)
QC result review screen description of, 9-29
accessing, 5-207
adding a comment to a control result, quiet zone
5-211 1D reagent bar code labels, 4-25
description of, 5-205 sample bar code labels, 4-29
field descriptions, Appendix E-63 R
illustration of, 5-206 R processing code
procedures associated with, 5-208 description of, 5-146
windows associated with, 5-213 R1 pipettor calibration (c 4000)
1121 maintenance illustration, 9-53
QC results
SCC capacities, 4-6 R1 pipettor calibration (c System)
QC Results List Report
illustration of, Appendix A-68 R1 pipettor check
QC run definition 10-668
configuring, 2-9
R2 pipettor calibration (c 4000)
QC selection window 1122 maintenance illustration, 9-54
field descriptions, Appendix E-72 R2 pipettor calibration (c System)
illustration of, 5-284 1122 maintenance description, 9-38
QC Summary Report R2 pipettor check

illustration of report, Appendix A-70 c System 2045 diagnostics description,
10-668
QC Summary report
printing, 5-300 R2 reagent supply center (c System)
automatic rotation, 1-128
description of, 5-285 rate assay
illustration of, 5-286 down rate reaction curve, example of,
procedures associated with, 5-287 3-4
sorting options, 5-286 ratio
statistical data elements, 5-287 1D reagent bar code labels, 4-25
windows associated with, 5-290 ratio adjustment technique method (i
QC-Cal icon System)
description of, Appendix E-4 description of, Appendix C-20
screens and windows description, reaction carousel (c 4000)
Appendix E-61 assay processing positions, 3-15

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
components used in assay processing, reagent cartridges (c System)

illustration of, 1-38 reagent details
location of, 9-74 viewing, 5-71
reaction carousel (c System) reagent hardware components (c 4000)
capacities, 4-7 description of, 1-32
reaction carousel hardware components (c illustration of, 1-33
4000) reagent history details
description of, 1-36 viewing, 5-72
Reagent History Report
reaction carousel home move (c System) illustration of, Appendix A-72
3010 diagnostics procedure, 10-666
Reagent history screen
reaction graph and absorbance data (c accessing, 5-66
viewing data for a result, 5-192 field descriptions, Appendix E-115
reaction mechanism diagnostics description illustration of, 5-65
c System, 10-659 sorting options, 5-65
i 1000SR, 10-669 windows associated with, 5-66
reaction vessels (i System) reagent inventory
description of, 1-111, , 1-112 processing, 5-180
illustration of, 1-112 verifying all modules, 5-69
reagent bar code labels verifying single module, 5-68
c System description, 1-90 reagent inventory management
i System description, 1-103 ARCHITECT System, 5-68
reagent bar code test (c System) c 4000, 5-73
3206 diagnostics description, 10-663 general description, 5-49
i 1000SR, 5-95
reagent bottles (i 1000SR)
preparing new, 5-95 reagent kits
preparing used, 5-97 changing the system low alert, 2-14
SCC data storage capacities, 4-6
reagent carousel (i System)
capacities, 4-7 reagent kits (c System)
configuring user-defined (photometric),
reagent carousel test (i 1000SR) 2-66
3002 diagnostics description, 10-678 deleting, 2-85
reagent carousels description of kits and components, 1-90
scanning, 5-73 illustration of kits and components, 1-90
reagent carrier (i 1000SR) reagent troubleshooting, 10-7
illustration of, 1-117 reagent kits and components (i System)
reagent carriers description of, 1-103
capactities, 1-116 illustration of, 1-103
description of, 1-116 reagent troubleshooting, 10-8
reagent cartridge adapters (c 4000) reagent labels (c System)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
reagent labels (i System) description of, 5-52

Reagent Load Error Report sorting options, 5-53
illustration of report, Appendix A-74 Reagent status screens
reagent pipettors (c 4000) Assign location window description (c
description of, 1-35 4000), 5-61
location of pipettors 1 and 2, 9-74 Assign location window illustration (c
4000), 5-62
reagent pipettors (c4000) windows associated with, 5-60
reagent statuses
reagent probes (c 4000) description of, 5-57
replacing the, 9-78
replacing the tubing, 9-85 Reagent Supply Center (c 4000)
clean, 9-41
reagent sample carousel home (c System)
3011 diagnostics description, 10-666 reagent supply center (c 4000)
capacities, 4-6
reagent segments (c 4000)
description of, 1-114 reagent supply centers (c 4000)
location of, 9-74
reagent septums and replacement caps (i
System) reagent syringe (c 4000)
description of, 1-104 replacing the, 9-138
illustration, 1-105 reagent syringe (c System)
reagent status button 6303 maintenance description, 9-32
description of, Appendix E-17 reagent wash cups (c 4000)
Reagent Status Report (except for i 1000SR) illustration of, 1-36
illustration, Appendix A-76 reagents
Reagent Status Report (i 1000SR) finding a specific, 5-70
illustration of, Appendix A-78 reagents (c 4000)
Reagent status screen - View all view configuring location of non-bar coded,
accessing the, 5-56 5-61
c System field descriptions, Appendix loading bar coded, 5-74
E-111 loading non-bar coded, 5-79
description of, 5-55 replacing non-bar coded, 5-84
illustration of, 5-55 unloading bar coded, 5-87
sorting options, 5-56 unloading non-bar coded, 5-89
Reagent status screen (c 4000) reagents (c System)
accessing, 5-51 configuring user-defined (photometric),
field descriptions, Appendix E-109 deleting, 2-83
illustration of, 5-50 using, 7-5
Reagent status screen (c System) reagents (i System)
sorting options, 5-51 storing, 7-5
Reagent status screen (i 1000SR) Reagents icon
accessing, 5-54 description of, Appendix E-5

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
screens and windows description, inventory, 5-32

Appendix E-109 c 4000 sample diluents, 5-82
reagent-specific low alert setting (c System) c System bulk solutions and updating
changing, 2-82 inventory, 5-24
i 1000SR Pre-Trigger and or Trigger
recalculating Solution and updating inventory, 5-46
Westgard analysis, 5-282
report
reference file options Reagent History Report, Appendix A-72
report header text
reference method (i System) changing, 2-13
report printing
reference range - method 1 windows associated with, 5-308
report settings
released results configuring, 2-7
SCC capacities, 4-6
reportable range calibration verification -
releasing method 1
control results, 5-212 data sheet, Appendix B-29
patient results, 5-196 data sheet example, Appendix B-31
relocating description of, Appendix B-27
the system, 2-3 graph, Appendix B-30
removing graph example, Appendix B-32
(RSH - i1000SR) sample carriers from the reportable range calibration verification -
carrier transport and carrier method 2
positioners, 10-696 data sheet, Appendix B-35
assay from a retest rule, 2-75 data sheet example, Appendix B-36
favorite topic - online operations manual description of, Appendix B-33
favorites list, System graph, Appendix B-36
documentation-45 graph example, Appendix B-38
favorite topic for online operations reportable range calibration verification -
manual, System documentation-45 method 3
solid waste and updating inventory (i data sheet, Appendix B-41
1000SR), 5-36 data sheet example, Appendix B-42
renaming description of, Appendix B-39
favorite topic for online operations graph, Appendix B-42
manual, System documentation-46 graph example, Appendix B-44
replacement caps (i System) reports
description of, 1-104 Absorbance Data Report, Appendix A-3
illustration of, 1-105 Assay Parameter Report (c System),
replacing Appendix A-6
c 4000 non-bar coded reagents, 5-84 Assay Parameter Report (i System),
c 4000 onboard solutions in the reagent Appendix A-15
supply center and updating inventory, Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i
5-29 System), Appendix A-29
c 4000 onboard solutions in the sample Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System),
wash solution area and updating Appendix A-32
Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
System), Appendix A-35 changing for retest setting, 2-18

Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c Rerun List Report
System), Appendix A-23 illustration of, Appendix A-80
Cal Curve Details Report -
Potentiometric (c System), Appendix Rerun options (QC result review) window
A-20 description of, 5-218
Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor field descriptions, Appendix E-70
Blank (c System), Appendix A-26 illustration of, 5-219
Cal Curve Summary Report, Appendix Rerun options (Results review) window
A-38 description of, 5-203
changing printing settings, 2-11 field descriptions, Appendix E-49
Exception Details Report, Appendix A-40 illustration of, 5-204
Exception Status Report, Appendix A-43 rerun status details
Levey-Jennings Report, Appendix A-45 viewing, 5-148
Maintenance History Report, Appendix
Rerun status screen
A-48
accessing the, 5-221
Message History Log Report, Appendix
A-50
Order List Report, Appendix A-52
Order Status Report, Appendix A-54
procedures associated with, 5-222
Patient Report, Appendix A-56
printing, 5-295
printing assay parameter, 2-91 rerun test orders
Procedure Report, Basic, Appendix A-58 viewing status, 5-146
Procedure Report, Columnar, Appendix rerunning
A-60 tests, 5-193
QC Analysis Report, Appendix A-62
reruns status button
QC Result Details Report, Appendix A-65
description of, Appendix E-19
QC Results List Report, Appendix A-68
QC Summary Report, Appendix A-70 reseating cables (SCC)
Reagent Load Error Report, Appendix procedure for, 10-698
A-74 resizing and moving
Reagent Status (except for i 1000SR), Help window, System
Appendix A-76 documentation-44
Reagent Status Report (i 1000SR), Result Details Report
Appendix A-78 illustration of, Appendix A-82
Rerun List Report, Appendix A-80
Result Details Report, Appendix A-82 result interpretation limitation
Results List Report, Appendix A-85 description of, 7-10
Sample Laboratory Report, Appendix result transmission
A-89 canceling, 5-230
Sample Report, Appendix A-87 result units and decimal places
Sample Status Report, Appendix A-91 configuring, 2-47
Temporary Message Log Report,
Appendix A-93 result units setting
TSB (Technical Services Bulletin) changing, 2-87
Installation Log Report, Appendix A-95 results
repositioning (RSH) control result details, viewing, 5-210

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
control, releasing, 5-212 description of, 1-86

patient result details, viewing, 5-190 routine sections - RSH (i 1000SR)
patient, deleting, 5-195 carrier tray, 1-86
patient, releasing, 5-196 illustration of, 1-86
patient, viewing all, 5-188 status indicator, 1-86
stored control, viewing all, 5-243
stored patient, deleting, 5-231 routine sections (RSH - i 1000SR)
location of, 1-86
Results icon
description of, Appendix E-3 RSH
screens and windows description, carrier transport (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci
Appendix E-39 4100), 1-83
diagnostic categories i 1000SR, 10-680
Results List Report pausing the, 5-13
illustration of, Appendix A-85 status types, 1-119
Results review screen RSH (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
accessing the, 5-186 carrier transport, 1-83
adding a comment to a patient result, components illustration, 1-83
5-191 cover, 1-83
description of, 5-184 priority sections, 1-84
illustration of, 5-185 RSH (c4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100)
procedures associated with, 5-188 aspiration area, 1-83
sorting options, 5-185 RSH (i 1000SR)
windows associated with, 5-197 routine sections, 1-86
resuming RSH and SSH sample processing
RSH and SSH sample processing, 5-177 initiating or resuming, 5-177
sample processing, description, 5-176 RSH diagnostics categories (i 1000SR)
retest rule settings bar code reader diagnostics description,
description of, Appendix E-178 10-680
retest rules fuse motor diagnostics description,
adding an assay, 2-73 10-683
configuring, 2-44 module diagnostics description, 10-681
deleting, 2-76 solenoid sensor diagnostics description,
removing an assay from, 2-75 10-682
retransmitting RSH non-bar coded samples

stored control result, 5-246 loading for batch processing (i 1000SR),
stored patient result to the host, 5-229 5-174
reviewing message logs run definitions

procedure for, 10-14 Westgard rules, 5-274
robotic and sensor error codes run descriptions

descriptions of error codes 5000-5999, Westgard rules, 5-274
10-352 Running
routine sections maintenance status description, 9-20
RSH (i 1000SR), 1-86 test status description, 5-145
routine sections - RSH (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci running calibrations by kit

4100) c System configuring, 2-53

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
RV sample carriers (RSH)

capacity, 4-7 loading samples, 5-168
RV access door (i 1000SR) sample cups
location of, 1-57 volumes, 5-164
RV hopper capacities sample diluents
i System, 4-7 c 4000, loading, 5-76
RV loader and hopper assembly (i 1000SR) c 4000, replacing, 5-82
description of, 1-58 c System, configuring user-defined
illustration of, 1-58 (photometric), 2-64
location of, 1-57 sample gauge label
RV loader assesmbly (i 1000SR) description of, 5-166
removal/replacement, 9-162 illustration of sample carrier, 5-167
RVs (i 1000SR) sample handler capacities
replenishing and updating inventory, description of, 4-8
5-40 sample handler capacities (c 4000/i
S 1000SR/ci 4100)
sample carriers, 4-8
S processing code
description of, 5-146 sample handler graphic
description of, Appendix E-17
safety icons
description of, 8-4 sample handler LLS test
safety parameters 10-662
electrical, ARCHITECT System, 4-16
sample handler status
sample and reagent syringe drives (c 4000) description of, 1-118
location of, 9-115 RSH, 1-119
Sample and reagent syringes c 16000 status button on Snapshot screen, 1-119
illustration of, 1-49 sample handlers
Sample and reagent syringes c 4000 corrective action description, 10-696
description of, 1-48 cycling power to, 5-11
sample bar code settings cycling power, starting up, and pausing
changing codabar, 2-20 description, 5-6
changing code 39, 2-20 description of, 1-82
changing I 2 of 5, 2-21 observed problems, 10-627
powering off, 5-9
sample carousel (c 4000) powering on, 5-7
location of carousel and cover, 9-74 RSH (c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100), 1-82
sample carriers starting, 5-12
capactities, 1-113 sample hardware components (c 4000)
sample carriers (RSH - 1000SR) sample ID length (bar code labels)
removing carriers from carrier transport description of, 4-29
and carrier positions, 10-696

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
sample integrity initiating or resuming, 5-176

description of, 5-168 sample processing (RSH)
sample interference indices (c System) c 4000/i 1000SR/ci 4100 description,
absorption spectra illustration, 3-22 5-178
measurement, description of, 3-21 sample reagent probes (c System)
Sample Laboratory Report cleaning the, 9-26
illustration of, Appendix A-89 Sample Report
sample management illustration of, Appendix A-87
general description, 5-162 sample results
sample measurement data reduction c System observed problems, 10-586
(potentiometric - c System) i System observed problems, 10-600
description of, Appendix C-11 sample status
electrode (mV) response curve during viewing, 5-157
sample measurement, Appendix C-12 viewing details, 5-159
sample orders Sample Status Report
host computer downloading, 5-107 illustration of report, Appendix A-91, ,
host order query, 5-108 Appendix A-93
sample pipettor (c 4000) Sample status screen
location of, 9-74 accessing the, 5-156
sample pipettor calibration (c 8000) description of, 5-154
1120 maintenance illustration, 9-52 field descriptions, Appendix E-20
sample pipettor calibration (c System) illustration of, 5-155
1120 maintenance description, 9-36 procedures associated with, 5-157
sample pipettor check window associated with, 5-160
10-667 sample syringe (c 4000)
i 1000SR 2070 diagnostics description, 6301 maintenance illustration, 9-138
10-679 replacing o-ring and seal tips, 9-138
sample pipettors sample syringe (c System)
c 4000 description, 1-30 6301 maintenance description, 9-30
i 1000SR description, 1-54 sample tube specifications (aliquot and
sample pipettors (c 4000) primary)
illustration of, 1-31 illustration and measurements, 5-163
sample probe (c 4000) sample types
replacing the, 9-74 ARCHITECT System, 4-4
sample probe carryover performance sample vessel requirements
ARCHITECT System, 4-4 aliquot and primary sample tube
specifications, 5-163
sample probe wash cup (c 4000) general description, 5-162
description of, 1-30 sample cup, 5-163
sample volume requirements
sample probes (c 4000) aliquot tube, 5-166
replacing the tubing, 9-82 ARCHITECT System, 4-4
sample processing description of, 5-164

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
primary tube, 5-165 CPU, 1-7

sample cup, 5-164 floppy drive, 1-7
sample gauge label description, 5-166 illustration of, 1-7
sample gauge label on sample carrier keyboard, 1-7
illustration, 5-167 mouse, 1-7
sample wash solution area (c 4000) network hub, 1-7
description of, 1-31 touch-screen monitor, 1-7
illustration of, 1-32 Scheduled
samples maintenance status description, 9-20
finding a specific, 5-158 test status description, 5-145
patient, auto retest, 5-109 screen image
samples (RSH) printing, 5-307
loading bar coded samples for batch screen saving settings
processing, 5-172 changing, 2-16
loading in sample carriers, 5-168 screens
loading non-bar coded samples for batch description of, 1-11
processing, 5-174 example of, 1-11
sampling rules for calibration function buttons, 1-11
description of, 6-4 help button, 1-11
sampling sequence (c System) icons, 1-11
description of optimum sampling information area, 1-11
sequence, 3-20 title bar, 1-11
scanning reagent carousels search tab
procedure for, 5-73 online operations manual, System
documentation-19
SCC
component list numbers, Appendix searching
D-11 online operations manual advanced
computer and interface specifications, search, System documentation-33
4-21 online operations manual for a term,
corrective action procedure, 10-698 System documentation-32
cycling power to, 5-5 online operations manual using boolean
diagnostic categories, 10-683 operators, System documentation-37
electrical requirements, 4-14 online operations manual using nested
maintenance categories, 9-71 expressions, System documentation-37
observed problems, 10-629 online operations manual using
onboard data storage capacities, 4-6 wildcard expressions, System
powering off, 5-4 documentation-38
powering off and powering on, general Select assay window
description, 5-3 description of, 2-120
powering on, 5-3 field descriptions, Appendix E-180
processor specifications, 4-21 illustration of, 2-121
SCC optional components sensors
description of, 1-9 i 1000SR pre-trigger level, description,
SCC standard components 1-69
CD-RW drive, 1-7 i 1000SR pre-trigger level, illustration,
1-70

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
i 1000SR trigger level, description, 1-70 processing module graphic (c System),

i 1000SR trigger level, illustration, 1-71 Appendix E-17
septums (i System) processing module graphic (i System),
description of, 1-104 Appendix E-17
illustration of, 1-105 sample handler graphic, Appendix E-17
status buttons, 1-17
serial port settings statuses, 1-17
LIS, changing, 2-22
sodium azide
serum calibrators removing from drains, 8-9
description of, 6-4
sodium hydroxide
shutdown (emergency) c System Alkaline Wash, 1-98
description of, 5-14 c System Detergent B, 1-100
shutdown (long-term) (i System) i System Trigger Solution, 1-109
description of, 5-16 software backup
single analyte control levels creating, 2-175
configuring a bar code for, 2-125 software error codes
configuring intervals for automated descriptions of error codes 9000-9999,
ordering, 2-126 10-499
deleting, 2-138
software installation
single analyte controls description of, 2-169
adding a lot, 2-135
changing, 2-137 software interface
changing the default dilution, 2-139 description of, 1-10
configuring new, 2-123 function bar buttons, 1-10
help button, 1-10
single constituent controls (i System) icons, 1-10
illustration of, 1-105 menu, 1-10
six-point assay calibration (i System) message or prompt, 1-10
description of, 6-10 screen, 1-10
slope calculation data reduction window, 1-10
(potentiometric - c System) software navigation
description of, Appendix C-10 description of, 1-16
electrode (mV) response curve during illustration of, 1-17
calibration, Appendix C-11 software troubleshooting
relationship between ion electrolyte c System, 10-5
concentration and electromotive force, i System, 10-6
Appendix C-10
Software updates
SmartWash feature (c System) access system updates view on Utilities
configuring settings, 2-62 Screen, 2-172
description of, 3-19 installation log report, Appendix A-95
Snapshot screen installing, 2-172
accessing the, 1-20 System updates view on Utilities Screen,
field descriptions, Appendix E-16 utilities screen field descriptions,
illustration of, 1-19 Appendix E-188

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
software updates physical, 4-8

log, 10-13 processing module (c System), 4-5
software version processing module (i System), 4-5
viewing, 2-170 processing module interface, 4-21
system dimensions, 4-8
solenoid sensor diagnostics (i 1000SR
processing module) specifications, bar code readers
description of, 10-675 c System, 4-5
i System, 4-5
solenoid sensor diagnostics description
c System processing module, 10-663 specifications, dispense volume
RSH (i 1000SR), 10-682 c System, 4-5
solid waste (i 1000SR) specifications, dispensing volume
container, 1-75, , 1-78 i System, 4-5
storage area description, 1-75 specifications, external waste pump
waste chute and trap door illustration, clearances, 4-20
1-77 dimensions, 4-19
waste container, 1-78 electrical, 4-19
waste pan, 1-79 weight, 4-19
solid waste (i System) specifications, liquid waste output
capacities, 4-7 i System, 4-5
solid waste container (i 1000SR) specifications, printer
description, 1-78 description of, 4-22
illustration, 1-79 parallel cable length, 4-22
solutions power cord length, 4-22
used in daily operations (c 4000), 1-101 specifications, SCC
specifications floppy drive, 4-21
ARCHITECT System, 4-3 hard drive, 4-21
c 16000 processing module and sample keyboard, 4-21
handler, physical, 4-8 monitor, 4-21
c 8000 processing module and sample physical, 4-8
handler, physical, 4-8 pointing device, 4-21
CD-RW drive, 4-21 specifications, temperature
ci 8200 processing module and sample c System, 4-5
handler, 4-8 i System, 4-5
electrical (c System), 4-15 specifications, weight and force
electrical (i System), 4-15 ci 4100 System, 4-10, , 4-11
external modem, 4-21 i 1000SR System, 4-12
general, 4-3
host interface, 4-21 spills
i 1000SR processing module and sample cleaning up, 8-11
handler, physical, 4-8 spline data reduction method (photometric
i 2000 processing module and sample - c System)
handler, physical, 4-8 description of, Appendix C-6
i 2000SR processing module and sample spline calibration curve - three to six
handler, physical, 4-8 calibrators, Appendix C-7
noise level, 4-20 SSH (i 2000)
optical (c System), 4-16

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
initiating or resuming sample description, 1-67

processing, 5-177 i 1000SR solid waste, description, 1-75
starting up i 1000SR wash buffer, illustration, 1-72
processing module and or sample i 1000SRpre-trigger trigger, illustration,
handler, 5-12 1-68
i 1000SRwash buffer, description, 1-71
starting up, pausing, and shutting down the
system stored control result details
description of, 5-3 viewing, 5-245
STAT assay protocols (i 1000SR) stored control results
one-step (One step 11), description of, archiving procedure, 5-246
3-38 finding a specific, 5-244
two-step (Two step 4-4), description of, retransmitting, 5-246
3-40 viewing all, 5-243
statistical data elements (Levey-Jennings stored data protection
graph screen) ARCHITECT System, 4-4
description of, 5-276 stored patient results
Statistical data elements (QC summary archiving procedure, 5-231
review screen) deleting, 5-231
description of, 5-287 finding a specific, 5-227
retransmitting to the host, 5-229
status buttons viewing, 5-228
exceptions, 1-17
i System ARM, 1-17 Stored QC results
LAS, 1-17 Archive QC results window description,
LIS, 1-17 5-253
printer, 1-17 Stored QC results screen
Snapshot screen, 1-17 accessing the, 5-242
status indicator description of, 5-240
RSH (i 1000SR), 1-86 illustration of, 5-241
procedures associated with, 5-243
status types sorting options, 5-242
c System processing module, 1-121 windows associated with, 5-248
i 1000SR processing module, 1-123
RSH, 1-119 Stored results screen
statuses Archive results window description,
calibration, 6-19 5-239
import (c System), 2-167 Archive results window illustration,
import (i System), 2-168 5-240
maintenance, 9-20 description of, 5-224
reagent, 5-57 field descriptions, Appendix E-50
Snapshot screen, 1-17 illustration of, 5-225
system, description of, 1-118 procedures associated with, 5-226
test, 5-145 sorting options, 5-225
Stopped with errors windows associated with, 5-233
maintenance status description, 9-20 storing consumables
storage areas bulk solutions, 7-5
i 1000SR pre-trigger and trigger,

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
storing failed calibration curve c 4000 1 mL, replacing, 9-116

description of, 6-11 i 1000SR description, 1-55
storing inactive calibration curve i 1000SR illustration, 1-56
description of, 6-11 syringes and valves (c 4000)
Supplies icon checking, 9-50
description of, Appendix E-5 system
screens and windows description, checking for proper operation, 2-2
Appendix E-117 configuring the, 2-4
supply and pump center (c 4000) installing the, 2-2
description of, 1-45 relocating, 2-3
illustration, 9-115 system administrator
illustration of, 1-46 changing password, 1-23
illustration of components, 9-115 user log on, 1-22
supply and waste center (i 1000SR) system capacities
description of, 1-66 storage information for the SCC, 4-5
illustration of, 1-67 system control center
pre-trigger and trigger storage area, 1-67 description, 1-6
solid waste storage area, 1-67
wash buffer storage area, 1-67 system diagnostics
supply and waste inventory
verifying, 5-23 system flush
c System, 1-126
supply and waste status i System, 1-127
Snapshot screen button, 1-17
System icon
supply status button description of, Appendix E-5
c System, Appendix E-18 screens and windows description,
i System, Appendix E-19 Appendix E-120
Supply status screen system language setting
windows associated with, 5-21 changing, 2-15
Supply status screen (c 4000 view) System log screen
accessing the, 5-18 software update log, 10-13
field descriptions, Appendix E-118 System logs screen
illustration of, 5-18 accessing the, 10-14
Supply status screen (i 1000SR System view) error message logs, 10-11
symbology procedures associated with, 10-14
1D bar code labels, 4-24 windows associated with, 10-18
sample bar code labels, 4-28 System logs screen - Error message logs
symbols illustration of, 10-12
caution (messages), 1-15 System logs screen - Software update log
hazard, description of, 8-6 illustration of, 10-13
syringe (i 1000SR) system low alert setting for reagent kits
description of, 1-55 changing, 2-14
syringes system operation

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
precautions when operating the system, 3535 maintenance description, 9-62

7-3 temperature error codes
system paramters changing descriptions of error codes 7000-7999,
screen saver setting, 2-16 10-443
system prime (i System) temperature status (c System)
description of, 1-127 3525 maintenance description, 9-40
system settings temperature status (i 1000SR)
procedures associated with changing, 3540 maintenance, 9-63
2-10 temporary messages
system software deleting, 10-17
online operations manual acccess from, SCC capacities, 4-6
System documentation-6 test orders
Snapshot screen, 1-17 finding a specific, 5-147
software interface description, 1-10
software navigation, 1-16 test processing status
System software updates
installing, 2-172 test statuses
log, 10-17 description of, 5-145
log, search for updates, 10-19 tests
view history, 10-17 adding to patient order, 5-125
system statuses deleting from patient order, 5-150
c System processing module, 1-121 deleting from rerun order, 5-223
description of, 1-118 rerunning, 5-193
i 1000SR processing module, 1-123 status of orders, viewing, 5-146
RSH, 1-119 status of scheduled reruns, viewing,
5-222
System updates
System updates view on Utilities screen, throughput
2-171 c 4000, 4-4
i 1000SR, 4-4
T
title bar
table of contents location of, 1-11
procedure for using in online operations
TM-MCC (Lyophilized) - multiconstituent
manual, System documentation-30
controls (i System)
task lists description of, 1-105
description of, System
To do tab (maintenance)
documentation-22
description of, 9-3
illustration of, System
documentation-22 toolbar and command buttons
Help window description, System
Technical Services Bulletin
documentation-12
installation log report, Appendix A-95
topic pane
temperature
Help window description, System
c System processing module, 4-5
documentation-13
environmental requirements, 4-20
i System processing module, 4-5 touch-screen monitor
SCC standard component, 1-7
temperature check - manual (i 1000SR)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
transmitting illustration of, Appendix A-95

exception to the host, 5-261 two-point adjustment (c System)
trigger level sensor (i 1000SR) description of, 6-8
description of, 1-70 two-point calibration adjustment (i System)
Trigger Solution (i System) two-point qualitative (index formula) data
description, 1-108 reduction method (i System)
illustration of, 1-109 description of, Appendix C-19
tripping U
hazards, description of, 8-22
unassign assay
troubleshooting c System calibrator data, 2-156
approach to, 10-2 c System multiconstituent control data,
general description, 10-1 2-155
troubleshooting (c System) reagent variables Undefined
calibrators, 10-7 reagent status definition, 5-57
controls, 10-7
description of, 10-7 Units Mismatch import status
reagent kits, 10-7 description of, 2-167
troubleshooting (c System) system variables unload diverter (i 1000SR)
consumables, 10-5 description of, 1-64
fluidics subsystems, 10-4 Unloader (i 1000SR)
hardware, 10-5 description of, 1-65
optical subsystem, 10-4 unloader (i 1000SR)
software, 10-5 illustration of, 1-65
troubleshooting (i System) reagent variables unloading reagents
calibrators, 10-8 c 4000 bar coded, 5-87
controls, 10-8 c 4000 non-bar coded, 5-89
description of, 10-8 i 1000SR, 5-102
reagent kits, 10-8
unreleased results
troubleshooting (i System) system variables SCC capacities, 4-6
consumables, 10-7
description of, 10-5 Update supplies window - c 4000 view
fluidics subsystems, 10-6 field descriptions, Appendix E-119
hardware, 10-6 Update supplies window (c 4000 view)
optical subsystem, 10-6 description of, 5-21
software, 10-6 illustration of, 5-21
troubleshooting environmental variables update supplies window (i1000SR)
description of, 10-9 description, 5-22
electrical requirements, 10-9 illustration, 5-22
host interface components, 10-10 Updates icon
physical requirements, 10-9 Snapshot screen, Appendix E-20
troubleshooting operator variables updating 6115 procedure (SCC)
TSB Report updating inventory (i 1000SR)

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
solid waste, 5-36 illustration of, 2-174

upper waste manifold (i 1000SR) procedures associated with, 2-175
description of, 1-58 windows associated with, 2-176
illustration of, 1-59 Utilities screen - Software install view
UPS accessing the, 2-170
optional component description, 1-80 description of, 2-169
SCC, 1-9 field descriptions, Appendix E-187
urine calibrators procedures associated with, 2-170
description of, 6-4
Utilities screen - System updates view
use cal factor blank assay view - Calibration field descriptions, Appendix E-188
curve window (c System) procedures associated with, 2-172
illustration of, 6-22 V
use factor and blank - linear calibration verification protocols
curve (photometric - c System) method groups for, Appendix B-1
illustration, Appendix C-8 verifying
use factor and blank data reduction method calibration, 6-16
(photometric - c System) i System assay claims, Appendix B-1
description of, Appendix C-7 reagent inventory on a single module,
5-68
used reagent bottles (i System)
reagent inventory on all modules, 5-69
preparing, 5-97
supply and waste inventory, 5-23
User Canceled
Version details for procedure (Diagnostics)
maintenance status description, 9-20
window
user logon description of, 10-657
user-defined assays Version details for procedure (maintenance)
procedures associated with configuring, window
user-defined reagent kits (c System - field descriptions, Appendix E-126
photometric) illustration of, 9-13
configuring, 2-66 Version details for procedure window
user-defined reagents field descriptions, Appendix E-130
configuring, 2-65 videos
user-defined sample diluent (c System - playing, using online operations
photometric) manual, System documentation-41
configuring, 2-64 View details for a maintenance procedure
Utilities screen description of, 9-10
access the system updates view, 2-172 View maintenance procedure information
installing software updates, 2-172 description of, 9-5
System updates view, 2-171
Viewing
Utilities screen - Backup software view details for QC data, 5-289
viewing
a print job in the print queue, 5-306

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
all control results, 5-209 wash buffer filter (i 1000SR)

all exceptions, 5-258 description of, 1-74
all patient results, 5-188 illustration of, 1-75
all stored control results, 5-243 wash buffer reservoir (i 1000SR)
all stored patient results, 5-227 description of, 1-72
assay calibration history, 6-31 illustration of, 1-73
assay calibration status, 6-30
calibration curve information, 6-32 wash buffer storage area (i 1000SR)
control level Levey-Jennings graph, description of, 1-71
control result details, 5-210 wash cup
details for a Levey-Jennings point, 5-281 illustration of, 1-56
diagnostic procedure information, wash cup (i 1000SR)
exception details, 5-259
wash cup (i 2000/i 2000SR)
low level error messages, 10-16
order or rerun status details, 5-148
patient result details, 5-190 wash cup baffle (i 1000SR)
QC data summary, 5-288 replacement, 9-165
reaction graph and absorbance data for a wash cups (c 4000)
result (c System), 5-192 description of, 1-35
reagent details, 5-71
wash cuvettes (c System)
reagent history details, 5-72
sample status, 5-157
sample status details, 5-159 wash ICT with Cleaning Fluid (c System)
status of ordered tests, 5-146 6062 maintenance description, 9-42
status of tests scheduled for rerun, 5-222 wash solution filter (c 4000)
stored control result details, 5-245 replacing the, 9-126
stored patient results details, 5-228 wash syringe (c 4000)
system software version, 2-170 replacing the, 9-129
volumes wash syringe (c System)
sample cups, 5-164 6302 maintenance description, 9-31
sample requirements (aliquot tube),
5-166 wash zone inlet diverter (i 1000SR)
sample requirements (primary tube), description of, 1-66
vortexers (i 1000SR) wash zone manifold (i 1000SR)
W wash zone outlet diverter (i 1000SR)
Waiting user response illustration of, 1-60
maintenance status description, 9-20
wash zone probe (i 1000SR)
warranty replacement, 9-157
ICT module, 1-93
wash zone temperature tubing and sensor (i
wash buffer (i System) 1000SR)
preparing, 5-41 replacement, 9-160

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009
Index
washing application, 5-271

processing module (c System), 1-128 changing settings, 2-146
waste bottle configuring, 2-131
c System high-concentration, replacing, descriptions, 5-272
9-178 quality control result flag, 5-208
high-concentration (c System), run definitions, 5-274
emptying, 5-34 run descriptions, 5-274
waste chute and trap door (i 1000SR) wildcard expressions
illustration of, 1-77 description of, System
documentation-38
waste container (i 1000SR)
solid waste, illustration, 1-79 windows
waste drawer (i 1000SR) example of, 1-14
container, 1-76 help button, 1-13
waste handling and disposal information area, 1-13
description of, 8-12 Maintenance log screen, 9-18
waste pan (i 1000SR) Maintenance screen, 9-11
description, 1-79 Snapshot screen, 1-20
illustration, 1-80 title bar, 1-13
waste storage area
illustration (i 1000SR), 1-76
waste storage area (i 1000SR)
description of solid waste storage, 1-75
water and liquid waste requirements
c System processing module, 4-17
i System processing module, 4-18
water bath (c System)
changing, 9-39
checking temperature, 9-41
Water Bath Additive (c System)
adding, 9-39
procedure for preparing, 9-24
Water bath/waste overflow area (c 4000)
weekly maintenance description
c System, 9-24
weight and force
specifications, 4-9
Westgard analysis
recalculating, 5-282
Westgard rules

(PN 201837-107) April, 2009

Architect c4000i1000操作手册

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Architect c4000i1000操作手册

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ARCHITECT System

Abbott Laboratories ©1998, 2009 Abbott Laboratories

Read me first. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Read me-1

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-1

Processing module (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Table of contents-2 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Install or delete an assay file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-3

System startup, pause, and shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Table of contents-4 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Stored QC results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-240

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-5

Calibration status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Table of contents-6 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Reagent troubleshooting variables (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-7

Absorbance Data Report (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-3

Table of contents-8 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Limit of Blank - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-3

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-9

Table of contents-10 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Parameter method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-22

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Table of contents-11

Congratulations on the addition of the ARCHITECT System to your

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Read me first-1

– Direct access to error message help provides probable cause

Read me first-2 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Read me first-3

Read me first-4 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Read me first-5

Read me first-6 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

ARCHITECT c System warranty

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Read me first-7

ARCHITECT i System warranty

Read me first-8 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Read me first-9

In Vitro Diagnostic Directive 98/79/EC

Read me first-10 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

The following U.S. Patents are relevant to ARCHITECT i Systems or

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Read me first-11

NOTE: A new presentation of the Legal

Caution, risk of electrical shock

Electrical and electronic equipment waste

Use by/Expiration date

Consult operating instructions

Caution, consult accompanying documents

Read me first-12 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Key to symbols used on labeling (continued)

Caution, hot surface

Standard international unit

ICT Cleaning Fluid

ICT Lyophilized Cleaning Solution

Water Bath Additive

Concentrated Wash Buffer

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Read me first-13

Key to symbols used on labeling (continued)

Multi-Assay Manual Diluent

Catalog number/List number

ICT Reference Solution

Read me first-14 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

Documentation for the ARCHITECT System consists of the

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual System documentation-1

Organization of the printed operations manual

System documentation-2 ARCHITECT System Operations Manual